Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
R2021-091 2021-05-10
RESOLUTION NO. R2021-91 A Resolution of the City Council of the City of Pearland, Texas, awarding a construction services contract for the Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation Project, to R & B Group, in the amount of $889,865.00. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS: Section 1. That competitive bids for construction of the Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation Project have been reviewed and tabulated. Section 2. That the City Council hereby awards the bid to R & B Group, in the amount of $889,865.00. Section 3. The City Manager or his designee is hereby authorized to execute a construction services contract for the Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation Project. PASSED, APPROVED and ADOPTED this the 10th day of May, A.D., 2021. 0 41�%' I— R./ TAL ROA , TRMC, CMC CITY SECRETARY APPROVED AS TO FORM: G+- DARRIN M. COKER CITY ATTORNEY VIN COLE MAYOR Project Manual for: MILLER RANCH ROAD REGIONAL LIFT STATION REHABILITATION WW2001 0, 4 ,Pt,,,,, 4 ,. . ,- - 92 V G PEARLAND T ' Ex-!# .7.. FS j. t 89 t. ;:1i'I�,co EOF F pt t - BENpER" Bid No. : 0321 -29 ‘,V.'iiiiiiii (44 March 2021 / 351,202I Prepared By: Weston Solutions, Inc. 5599 San Felipe, Suite 700, Houston, Texas 77056 F-3123 City of Pearland Electrical Technical Specifications (Division 13 & 16) for Construction of Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation Pearland, Texas i �''•. * . �f i*. *I j* *111 JON—PAUL A. DIXON j . i 1110• 112808 :�� frift1(.110:7. ,.... Nei. '/X February 2021 a BAIRD GILROY &DIXON ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS TBPE Registration No. 16575 Baird Gilroy&Dixon,LLC 9711 S.Mason Rd. Ste 125#326 Richmond,Texas 77407 (281)529-5005 CITY OF PEARLAND BRAZORIA COUNTY,TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE DIVISION 0—BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Invitation to Bid 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Proposal 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One-Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien 00700 General Conditions of Agreement 00800 Special Conditions of Agreement 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction DIVISION 1 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary of Work 01140 Contractor's Use of Premises 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures 01290 Change Order Procedures 01310 Coordination and Meetings 01350 Submittals 01380 Construction Photographs 01420 Referenced Standards 01430 Contractor's Quality Control 01440 Inspection Services 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01505 Mobilization 01550 Stabilized Construction Exit 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 01561 Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 01562 Waste Material Disposal 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 01565 TPDES Requirements 01566 Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation 01570 Trench Safety System 01580 Project Identification Signs 01600 Material and Equipment 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01750 Starting Systems 01760 Project Record Documents Nolo- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2—SITE WORK 02200 Site Preparation 02220 Site Demolition 02252 Cement Stabilized Sand 02255 Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials 02318 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02335 Subgrade 02370 Geotextile 02520 Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 02533 Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 02534 PVC Pipe 02540 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 02541 Water and Wastewater Line Valves 02603 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers 02624 Structural Plate Culvert Structures 02628 Jacking Pipe or Box 02629 Safety End Treatments 02634 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings 02636 Polyurethane Coating on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe 02820 Wood Fences and Gates 02790 Bypass Pumping 02910 Topsoil 02921 Hydromulch Seeding 02922 Sodding DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03310 Structural Concrete DIVISION 9-SPECIAL FINISHES 09901 Protective Coatings DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT 11311 Pumps and Associated Infrastructure 11312 Odor Control System DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13201 Lift Station Rehabilitation 13300 I&C General Requirements 13310 I&C Field Instrumentation 13312 I&C Control Devices 00010-2of3 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 13315 I&C Control Panels 13320 I&C HMI Hardware& Software 13321 I&C PLC Hardware 13322 I&C Network& Communications Equipment 13325 I&C System Programming DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 16012 Electrical Work 16060 Electrical Demolition 16110 Raceways and Boxes 16122 600-volt Power Cable 16126 Instrumentation Cable 16140 Wiring Devices 16160 Cabinets and Enclosures 16165 Disconnect Switches 16170 Grounding and Bonding 16190 Supporting Devices 16195 Electrical Identification 16211 Natural Gas Engine Generator and Controls 16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices 16481 Motor Controllers 16496 Automatic Transfer Switch 16980 Natural Gas Service Entrance 16982 Natural Gas Distribution For Generators END OF SECTION 00010-3of3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebidsna,pearlandtx.gov. All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids, shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer,City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic bids will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, April 1, 2021. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened"and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control& Rehabilitation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WW2001 BID NO.: 0321-29 A non-mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at City Hall at 3519 Liberty Dr,Pearland,Texas 77581 at 10:00 a.m. on Thursday March 18,2021. A virtual option is available: To join by phone: 1-408-418-9388 Access Code 182 270 9709 Meeting Password: q5iE2nrmhD4 The project will entail the Replace the(2)existing pumps with City approved manufacturer pumps and install a third matching pump to increase the list station capacity to meet current demand. Replace existing control panel, discharge piping, guiderails, safety hatches and wet well liner. 06-2019 00100- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Install new odor control unit,permanent generator with automatic transfer switch,and level sensor. Scope includes bypass pumping and complete restoration of site. Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to,all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's,RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City,its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project.For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200. Electronic Bid Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents may also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (281) 376-4577 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713)334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston, TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832)613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System. BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to"day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland,Texas 77581. 06-2019 00 100-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent(100%)of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland,Texas as Obligee. Additionally,the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color,religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise(DBE)goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder. In identifying this criteria the City will consider: 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to: Base Bid, Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been"opened"may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Crystal Roan City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date March 10, 2021 Second Publication date March 17,2021 06-2019 00100-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS(LRB) 1. Defined Terms 1.1 The term "Owner" hereinafter is defined as the City of Pearland and is used interchangeably with the term "the City". Both terms are synonymous and refer to the City of Pearland and may be used inter-changeably. 1.2 The term"Bidder"means one who submits a Bid Proposal directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful Bidder" means the Lowest Responsible Bidder to whom the Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bid Documents" includes the Invitation to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders,the Bid Proposal,and the proposed Contract Documents(plans and specifications including all Addenda issued prior to bid opening). 1.3 The term "E-bid System" refers to the City's electronic bidding system. This is a web- based system (Ion Wave) that provides all Bid Documents electronically to interested parties (potential Bidders and forms the pathway for Bidders to submit bids in response to The Invitation to Bid. The term "e-bid" and/ or "electronic bid" means the Bidders' electronic response submitted on the electronic Bid Proposal with all required attachments to the Owner by way of the E-bid System. The terms "electronic bid" or"e-bid" are used inter-changeably to describe the above bid submittal process to submit a bid to the City in response to an Invitation to Bidders. 1.4 The term "Pro-Trak" means the City's web-based contract administration and construction records management software used by the contracting parties to administer the project. This system serves as the web accessed centralized project information hub for communications and document management, pay application processing and record retention for all project documentation. Operational instructions for accessing this system will be issued to the successful Bidder at the pre-Construction Meeting. 1.5 All other definitions set out in the Contract Documents are applicable to terms used in the Bidding Documents. 1.6 Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean consecutive calendar day(s). 1.7 The term"Alternate(s)"or"Add Alternate(s)"as used here inter-changeably are defined as an additive work item that may be selected or rejected by the Owner based on the Owner's sole acceptance or rejection of the price proposed for this item. Alternate bid prices shall include all labor, material, equipment and overhead costs to perform the work as specified, complete in place. When selected by the Owner, the costs for an Alternate work item shall be added to the Base Bid price and made a part of the Contract price. 2. Registration for E-bid System 2.1 The Owner's E-bid System is accessible via the City's web site at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Bid documents can be viewed by simply selecting a specific project from the BID OPPORTUNITIES list and clicking on that project AFTER registration as a Supplier. Interested Bidders MUST REGISTER as a "Supplier" by clicking on 08-2018 00200- 1 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS the Supplier Registration button and completing the registration form. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) Select the appropriate Time Zone for the Bidder's location and whether that location observes Daylight Savings time. Complete the registration information providing all required contact information and establish password security for the E-bid System. Once complete, "suppliers" will receive emails notifying of future bid opportunities. Downloading any project bid data will automatically place the bidder's contact information on the list of plan holders and the E-bid System will automatically send any and all updates,addenda,changes or additional information associated with that project. 2.2 The electronic Bid Proposal can only be submitted through this system. The form can be printed for Bidder's use, but the Bid Proposal MUST be submitted on the electronic form within the E-bid System. 2.3 Questions regarding use of the E-bid System may be directed by email to: eb ids(a,pearlandtx.gov. 3. Copies of Bidding Documents 3.1 Complete sets of "electronic" Bidding Documents are available for download to registered Bidders at No Cost from the City's E-bid System at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx.Interested Bidders must register as a"Supplier"on this site in order to receive the Bid Documents, and all Addenda or other notifications of changes, including communications from the Owner or Engineer. All Bid Documents are available to download and print. 3.2 The Bidder accepts sole responsibility for ensuring that he obtains a full set of these documents by completing the registration and executing a full and complete download of the project documents. Downloading of Bid Documents automatically ensures receipt of any and all subsequent communications,addenda or additional information from the City or its Engineer. 3.3 Copies of Bidding Documents are available or may be viewed at any of the Plan Houses listed in the Invitation to Bidders. It is recommended that all interested Bidders,whether bidding directly to the Owner or Sub-biddersNendors providing pricing to a Bidder, register as a Supplier and download all of the project Bid Documents. 3.4 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bid Proposals; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents including,but not limited to all Addenda issued prior to bid. 3.5 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bid Proposals on the Work, and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 08-2018 00200-2 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4. Qualifications of Bidders 4.1 In determining to whom to award a contract, the City of Pearland may consider, in addition to the other selection criteria identified in section 16 of these Instructions to Bidders, the following Qualifications of Bidder, and each Bidder must be prepared to submit within two (2)days of Owner's request any or all of such Qualifications requested. Failure to provide this information within the specified time frame may be cause for rejection of the Bid. 1) A brief narrative of previous experience of the Bidder with projects of a similar nature and scope; specifically including a list of 5 representative projects completed by the Bidder of a similar nature and scope to the work covered by this proposed Contract. The references for the projects provided must include the cost of the project,Owner's name,Engineer or prime contact and telephone number; 2) A list, including owner name and project location, of on-going projects and contracts for construction of projects of the Bidder which are not yet substantially complete including total contract value and current percent complete by payment; 3) A list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers for the project being bid and the total value of work awarded to subcontractors as shown on the Subcontractors List Bid Form; 4)A list of names, address and telephone number of references for other projects completed by Bidder; and 5)A Financial Statement of Bidder,consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Bidder for the Bidder's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Bid Proposal, which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The Financial Statement of Bidder shall be used to determine a Bidder's net working capital, which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. A Bidder's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Bidder's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being bid. The Bidder's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously marked as "confidential", and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information, if released, would give advantage to a competitor or bidder, and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Bidder. 5. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 5.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid Proposal, to (a) examine the Bidding Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost,progress,performance or furnishing of the Work,(c)consider federal,state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work,(d)study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents,and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents,(f)to recognize and plan for use of the City's"Pro-Trak"software to administer the construction process and perform the work of the project. 5.2 Any reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents will be made available to Bidders for review,but such reports are not part of the Contract Documents. Bidder may not and should not rely upon the accuracy of the data contained in such reports, interpretations or opinions contained therein, or the completeness thereof, for the purposes of bidding or construction. 08-2018 00200-3 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 5.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities, equipment or other underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. 5.4 Before submitting a Bid Proposal, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations,investigations,explorations,tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid Proposal prices for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the Contract Time, Contract Price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 5.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each prospective Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each prospective Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid Proposal. Prospective Bidders shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. 5.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands, access thereto or contractual arrangements for use by the Contractor required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 5.7 The submission of a Bid Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4,that without exception the Bid Proposal is premised upon performing and furnishing all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in, required by or reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 6. Interpretations and Addenda 6.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered or transmitted by electronic means to all registered Bidders in the City's E-bid System. Questions received less than five(5) days prior to the date for opening of Bid Proposals may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Addenda will automatically be made available to all registered Bidders that have downloaded Bid Documents from the City's E-bid System. 08-2018 00200-4 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 7. Bid Security 7.1 Each Bid Proposal must be accompanied by bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid Proposal price, in the form of a certified check, cashier's check or a Bid Bond("Bid Security"). 7.2 Bidders submitting bids through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of their Bid Security(sealed Bid Bond,Certified Check or Cashier's Check)as an attachment to their electronic bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland,Texas 77581. 7.3 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such time as Bidder has executed the Standard Form of Agreement,and furnished the required Performance and Payment Bonds, whereupon the Bid Security of both bidders will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish the required performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and shall be entitled to make a claim against the Bid Security. The Bid Security of other Bidders will be retained until the Contract is awarded and the Standard Form of Agreement becomes effective, or all bids are rejected, whereupon Bid Security furnished by all such Bidders will be returned. 8. Contract Time 8.1 The number of days in which the Work is to be Substantially Completed, as set forth in the Bid Proposal form and the Standard Form of Agreement, subject to such extension of time as may be due under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents ("Contract Time"). All references to"time"or"days"shall be interpreted as consecutive calendar days. 9. Liquidated Damages and Early Completion Bonus 9.1 Provisions for liquidated damages and early completion bonus,if any,are set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement. 10. Substitute or"Or-Equal" Items 10.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of the specified materials and equipment described in the Plans and Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or- equal" items unless otherwise stated. Whenever it is indicated in the Plans or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or"or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by the Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Agreement becomes effective. All "or-equal" references shall be interpreted to mean "or Owner approved equal". Any substitution made by the Bidder upon which the bid is based shall be at the Bidder's sole risk. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the Contract Documents. 0 08-2018 00200-5 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 11. Bid Form 11.1 The Bid Proposal form (Section 00300 — Bid Proposal) is included with the Bidding Documents when downloaded. This Document must be printed and signed, as required below, and then uploaded as an Attachment to the Bid. 11.2 All E-bids must be submitted on the City's official E-bid System Bid Proposal document. All blanks on the Bid Proposal form must be completed or filled in. The Bidder shall bid all Alternates, if any. Incomplete Bid Proposals may be cause for rejection. 11.3 Bid Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president(or other corporate officer accompanied be evidence of authority to sign)and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.4 Bid Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and if a corporate general partner, executed as required above for corporations and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.5 The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Bid Proposal form). Failure to do so could be cause for rejection of the Bid. 11.6 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid Proposal must be shown on the Bid Proposal form. 12. Submission of Bid Proposals 12.1 The place, date and/or time designated for opening Bid Proposals may be changed in accordance with applicable laws, codes and ordinances. Any such changes to the Bid Schedule shall be made by Addenda. 12.2 Electronic Bids shall be submitted per the requirements, instructions, terms and conditions as stated in the registration and submittal instructions of the City's E-bid System electronic bidding software. All Bidders utilizing this system MUST register as a potential supplier, (Bidder). E-Bids are submitted directly via the City's Web based system located at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. 12.3 Bid Proposals submitted after the bid date and time will be rejected. 13. Modification and Withdrawal of Bid Proposals 13.1 Prior to submission, E-bid Bid Proposals may be modified or withdrawn without prejudice. 13.2 Once submitted, Bid Proposals may only be modified by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid Proposal must be executed) and delivered to Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 and submitted any time prior to the opening of Bid Proposals. 0 08-2018 00200-6 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 13.3 A Bidder may not modify or withdraw its Bid Proposal by facsimile or verbal means. A withdrawn Bid Proposal may be resubmitted prior to the designated time for opening Bid Proposals. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety(90)days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. 13.4 If,within twenty-four(24)hours after Bid Proposals are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material mistake in the preparation of its Bid Proposal, that Bidder may request to withdraw its Bid Proposal and the bid security may be returned or,at the discretion of the Owner, Owner may make a claim against the bid security. Thereafter,that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Project to be provided under the Contract Documents. 13.5 Bid securities for unsuccessful Bidders will be returned to bidders once a successful Bidder has be identified and notified of the Owner's intent to award a contract. 14. Opening of Bid Proposals 14.1 Bid Proposals will be opened and(unless obviously non-responsive)read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bid Proposals and major alternates(if any)will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bid Proposals through E-Bid. Bid Proposals, in their entirety, shall be open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, with the exception of any trade secrets or confidential information contained therein, provided Bidder has expressly identified any specific information contained therein as being trade secrets or confidential information. 15. Bid Proposals to Remain Subject to Acceptance 15.1 All Bid Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for ninety(90) days after the day of the Bid Proposal opening,but Owner may,in its sole discretion,release any Bid Proposal and return the bid security prior to that date. 16. Award of Contract 16.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bid Proposals, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder. Owner may reject a bid as non-responsive if: 1) Bidder fails to provide required Bid Security; 2)Bidder improperly or illegibly completes or fails to complete all information required by the Bidding Documents; 3)Bidder fails to sign the Bid Proposal or improperly signs the Bid Proposal; 4) Bidder qualifies its Bid Proposal; 5) Bidder tardily or otherwise improperly submits its Bid Proposal; 6) Bidder fails to submit the Qualifications of Bidder as required under section 4 of these Instructions to Bidders; or 7) Bid Proposal is otherwise non-responsive. Contracts are awarded on the basis of the Lowest Responsible Bidder. 16.2 The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of bidder, if requested to do so. As required by the Instructions to Bidders and as a condition of Bid acceptability, the Contractor hereby agrees: 08-2018 00200-7 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. That the City, as Owner and Contract Administrator, retains the right to review and approve the Contractor's and all Subcontractors' qualifications to perform the Work of the Contract and to reject any Subcontractor not meeting the City's standards, as outlined in the General Conditions, or TxDOT's and FHWA qualifications for performing the Work. 16.3 Lowest Responsible Bidder. In determining Lowest Responsible Bidder, Owner will consider: Lowest Total Bid price for all work including Base Bid, Extra Work, Add Alternates and Cash Allowances, if any, and any other cost criteria. Additional evaluation criteria may include: the Qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bid Proposals comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Proposal form or prior to the Notice of Award. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 16.4 A contract to be awarded to the Lowest Responsible Bidder may be let on either a lump sum basis or a unit cost basis dependent on the Bid Proposal format. 16.5 Acceptance of any and all bids may be conditioned on compliance with the requirement for attendance of the mandatory pre-bid meeting. 16.6 In either case, Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid Proposal and to establish the responsibility,qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction, within the Contract Time. 16.7 Each Bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the Owner, the Professional/Engineer, and their respective employees, arising out of or in connection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any bid. 17. Contract Security 17.1 When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Standard Form of Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the Performance, Payment, Maintenance and Surface Correction Bonds required by the Contract Documents. Bonds may be on the forms provided herein or an equal form containing no substantive changes, as determined by Owner. 18. Signing of Agreement 18.1 When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement, and the required Performance and Payment Bond forms. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. There shall be no contract or agreement between Owner and the Successful Bidder until proper execution and attestation of the Standard Form of Agreement by authorized representatives of the Owner. 08-2018 00200-8 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 19. Pre-bid Conference 19.1 A pre-bid conference will be held as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. 20. Retainage 20.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 08-2018 00200-9 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL Lowest Responsible Bid Date: April, 1, 2021 Bid of R& B Group. Inc. , an individual proprietorship/a eorporatto organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas/a partnership consisting of , for the construction of: Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control &Rehabilitation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WW2001 BID NO.: 0321-29 (Submitted in Electronic format) To: The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Bidders, and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control & Rehabilitation with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Lori Bender, PE, Weston Solutions, Inc at 5599 San Felipe, Suite 700, Houston TX 77056, 713-985-6600, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth in Exhibit "A", the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Bidder. It is understood that, in the event any changes arc ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices bid shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Work so changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Bidders is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and,that a fully executed, signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland,Texas 77581. The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of Bidder, as required by the Instructions to Bidders if requested to do so as a condition of the Bid process. The Bidder binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according to the forms included in the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated in Exhibit A of this proposal along with all required insurance in the required amounts. Bidder's Initial's 08-2018 003 0 I of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL The undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within one hundred and eighty (180) calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts bid in this Bid Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Bid Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Bidder. It is understood that in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond if required, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Bidder will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to"day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). The Bidder acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bidding Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Proposal prices. Addendum No.: One Date: 3-23-21 Addendum No.: Three Date: 4-1-21 Addendum No.: Two Date: 3-29-21 Addendum No.: Date: Bidder hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are those named. Bidder has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name: R & B oup, Inc. By: Title: President Address: 1213 N. Durham Dr. Houston,Texas 77008 Phone No: 713-R62-58nn Pxt 2121 ATTEST: Elizabete Morse (Seal,if Bidder is a Corporation) (Typed Printed Name Signature Date: May 10, 2021 END OF SECTION Bidder's Initial's:__ 08-2018 00300 -2 f 2 CCTV OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER PART B PRICE PROPOSAL FORM Spec I Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount PKHD 1 Base Bid Base Bid PKLN 1 1 Base Bid 1 LS Mobilization;Maximum 3%of Total Bid 01505 $24,000.00 ' $24,000.00 Extension of above ground Force Main, including pipe support,tie-in to existing PKLN 1 2 1 LS Force Main,and abandonment of below 02533 ground Force Main as shown on the plans, Base Bid and all appurtenances,complete in place $40,000.00 $40,000.00 Wet Well Improvements consisting of Demolition of existing pumps,piping, and PKLN 1 3 1 LS supports above ground and in the wet well 02220 as shown in plans, installation of new pumps,supports, piping,safety grates, Base Bid I valves as shown in plans. complete in place $360,000.00 $360,000.00 PKLN 1 I 4 2 Mo 1,600 GPM By-Pass Pumping w/1,800 LF 02790 Base Bid Discharge $9,000.00 $18,000.00 PKLN 1 5 Base Bid 15 LF Trench Excavation Safety 01570 $1.00 $15.00 Wet Well Rehabilitation,including demolition of T-lock lining,surface PKLN 1 6 Base Bid 1 LS preparation,and the application of the 13201 Sewpercoat Coating,as directed by Engineer, complete in place. $150,000.00 $150,000.00 PKLN 1 7 Base Bid 1 LS Electrical/Control Panel Upgrades Div 13&16 $160,000.00 $160,000.00 PKLN 1 8 1 LS Pure Air Odor Control System. including 11312 Base Bid concrete pad, equipment, air vent replacement, wet well lid core, installation of odor control line into wet well,complete in place $25,000.00 $25,000.00 PKLN 1 9 Base Bid 1 1 LS 125-200 KW Natural Gas Generator w/ATS 16211/16496 I $76,000.00 $76,000.00 Addendum 2 Offeror's Initials 03 -Pact B- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLANL) PROPOSAL LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER PART B PRICE PROPOSAL FORM — Spec Quantity UOM Description01570 Reference _ Unit Price Total Amount PKLN 1 10 Base Bid 250 LF 8-ft Cedar wooden fence with metal posts and 02820 sliding gate; including demolition of existing $100.00 $25,000.00 PKLN 1 11 15 LF Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 01561 Base Bid $10.00 $150.00 PKLN 1 12 Base Bid 7 cy Crushed Aggregate backfill along fence line 02255 $100.00 $700.00 PKLN 1 13 Base Bid 1 LS Site Restoration including Hydromulching 02921 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 PKLN 1 14 Base Bid 1 LS Cash Allowance; Natural Gas Service SS $1,000 S1,000 Total Bid $889,865.00 T� Offero 's Authorized Signature Addendum 2 Offeror's Initials: 003 -Part B-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Pearland(hereinafter called OWNER or City) and R & B Group, Inc. (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents(hereinafter the"Work"). The Work is generally described as follows: Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control & Rehabilitation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WW2001 BID NO.: 0321-29 Article 2. ENGINEER The Work has been designed by Lori K Bender, PE with Weston Solutions, Inc located at 5599 San Felipe, Suite 100, Houston, TX 77056 who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) within one hundred and eighty (180) days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable), and completed and ready for Final Payment within two hundred and ten (210) days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No work will be allowed on Sundays. 32 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above,plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. OWNER and CONTRACTOR also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER four hundred dollars ($400.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial 4-2015 00500- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER four hundred dollars ($400.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion for completion and readiness for Final Payment. 33 Inspection Time. Working hours for the Pearland Inspection personnel are from 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding City approved holidays. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER of any required inspection overtime work at least 48 hours in advance and shall pay the overtime wages for the required City inspections. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds $889,865.00 , (the "Contract Price"). The Contract Price includes the Base Bid [and Alternates) as shown in Document 00300—Bid Proposal. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 6.0 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. Application for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work and actual quantity of Work completed, in accordance with Article 6 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. 5.1.1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage or actual quantity of Work complete, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with the General Conditions. The OWNER shall make payment within 30 days of receipt of application for payment by the ENGINEER. 5.12 Each progress payment shall be less retainage as specified in Paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood,however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER pay a reasonable and equitable portion 4-2015 00500-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR at the OWNER's option,may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under "Final Payment." 52 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 6.09 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 6.09. Article 6. INTEREST Interest on any overdue payment from OWNER to CONTRACTOR shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251.025 of the Texas Government Code, as amended. Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost,progress,performance,or furnishing of the Work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all available surveys, assessments, reports of explorations, investigations, and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of the site. Such technical reports and drawings are not Contract Documents,and Owner makes no representations or warranties as to the accuracy of such documents or information, or to whether or not they are complete, comprehensive, or all-inclusive. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying)all such examinations,investigations,explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraphs 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, and CONTRACTOR assumes the risk of such subsurface and physical conditions, and shall furnish the Work at the Contract Price,within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities.No additional examinations, investigations, 4-2015 00500-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and finish the Work at the Contract Price,within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor knew or should have known, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including any written resolution of any such conflict, error or discrepancy by ENGINEER. In the event of a conflict that was not brought to the OWNER's or ENGINEER's attention prior to the bid, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have bid the most expensive alternative. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following, each of which are incorporated herein by reference: 8.1 Standard Form of Agreement(Section 00500). 8.2 Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds (Sections 00610, 00611, and 00612). 8.3 General Conditions of Agreement (Section 00700), including Attachment No. 1 Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage,Attachment No.2 Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor. 8.4 Special Conditions of Agreement(Section 00800). 8.5 Plans, consisting of sheets numbered 1 through 35 inclusive with attachments with each sheet bearing the following general title: Orange Circle and Linwood Reconstruction Project 8.6 Instructions to Bidders and CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal,including any Addenda referenced therein. 8.7 Technical Specifications for the Work. 8.8 The following, which may be delivered or issued after this Agreement becomes effective: Any Change Orders or other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents in accordance with the General Conditions. 4-2015 00500-4of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Section 1, "Definitions and Interpretations" of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 92 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment,no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 93 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself,its partners,successors,assigns and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 CONTRACTOR agrees to warranty the Work for a period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion against defects in materials and workmanship. CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace any defective work within this warranty period immediately unless such repairs require long lead time materials and equipment in which case CONTRACTOR shall provide an agreeable schedule for repairs at no additional cost to OWNER. 9.5 The Work will be completed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with codes, ordinances, and construction standards of the City of Pearland, and all applicable laws, codes and regulations of governmental authorities. 9.6 In the event any notice period required under the Contract Documents is found to be shorter than any minimum period prescribed by applicable law, the notice period required shall be construed to be the minimum period prescribed by applicable law. 9.7 This Contract and the Contract Documents,insofar as they relate in any part or in any way to the Work undertaken therein, constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto, and it is expressly understood and agreed that there are no agreements or promises by and between said parties, except as aforesaid, and that any additions thereto or changes shall be in writing. 9.8 The provisions of this Contract shall be applied and interpreted in a manner consistent with each other so as to carry out the purposes and the intent of the parties, but if for any reason any provision is unenforceable or invalid, such provisions shall be deemed severed from this Contract and the remaining provisions shall be carried 4-2015 00500-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT out with the same force and effect as if the severed provision had not been part of this Contract. 9.9 The headings of the paragraphs are included solely for the convenience of reference and if there is any conflict between the headings and the text of this Contract, the Contract text shall control. 9.10 The waiver of any breach hereof shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision hereof. Failure by the OWNER in any instance to insist upon observance or performance by CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed a waiver by CONTRACTOR of any such observance or performance. No waiver will be binding upon OWNER unless in writing and then will be for the particular instance only. Payment of any sum by OWNER to CONTRACTOR with knowledge of any breach or default will not be deemed a waiver of such breach or default or any other breach or default. 9.11 The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER(through its employee handbook) considers the following to be misconduct that is grounds for termination of an employee of the OWNER: Any fraud, forgery,misappropriation of funds, receiving payment for services not performed or for hours not worked, mishandling or untruthful reporting of money transactions, destruction of assets, embezzlement, accepting materials of value from vendors, or consultants, and/or collecting reimbursement of expenses made for the benefit of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will not, directly or indirectly; cause an employee of the OWNER to engage in such misconduct. 9.12 The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with Appendix A (attached) of the City of Pearland's Title VI Nondiscrimination Plan Assurances. 4-2015 00500-6of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and one to CONTRACTOR. This Agreement will be effective upon execution d attestation by authorized representativ%.of the City of Pearland and upon the following date: 10 , 204. OWNER: CONTRACTOR: CITY OF PE N R&B Group, Inc. By: By: Brian D. Morrison Title: Cr' Title: President Date: R ��,�,��Att."^cF__ Date: Mat 10, 2021 (Corporate Seal) ATTES ATTEST ( - ��� ✓ Address for giving notices 1213 N. Durham Dr. Houston,Texas, 77008 Phone: 713-862-5800 ext# 2121 Fax: 713-862-5807 Agent for service of process: Brian D. Morrison END OF SECTION 2-2015 00500-7 of 7 Title VI Nondiscrimination Assurances APPENDIX A During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor") agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in Federally-Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT') Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. (2) Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Subcontracts, including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin. (4) Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Sub-Recipient, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Sub-Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: (a) withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or (b) cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. (6) Incorporation of Provisions:The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance. Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Sub-Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Sub-Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT APPENDIX B House Bill 89 Verification I, Brian D. Morrison (Person name), the undersigned representative (hereafter referred to as "Representative") of A & B Group, Inc. (company or business name, hereafter referred to as "Business Entity"), being an adult over the age of eighteen (18)years of age, after being duly sworn by the undersigned notary, do hereby depose and affirm the following: 1. That Representative is authorized to execute this verification on behalf of Business Entity; 2. That Business Entity does not boycott Israel and will not boycott Israel during the term of any contract that will be entered into between Business Entity and the City of Pearland; and 3. That Representative understands that the term "boycott Israel" is defined by Texas Government Code Section 2270.001 to mean refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli-controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes. aP‘'2D SIGNATURE O REPRESENTATIVE SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this 1 o day of May , 20 21 . �? .PY Po ELIZABETE S. MDRSE //� =°' �n's_Notary Public, State of Texas /VA_ 1/6/6 9.. ..„) Comm. Expires 09-03-202 6tary Pu c °''6;,. ° Notary ID 132656970 CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 1 of 1 Complete Nos. 1-4 and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos. 1,2,3,5,and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING 1 Name of business entity filing form,and the city,state and country of the business entity's place Certificate Number: of business. 2021-732850 R&B Group, Inc. HOUSTON ,TEXAS,TX United States Date Filed: 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is 03/31/2021 being filed. City of Pearland Texas Date Acknowledged: 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract,and provide a description of the services,goods,or other property to be provided under the contract. 0321-29 Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control&Rehabilitation Nature of interest 4 Name of Interested Party City,State,Country(place of business) (check applicable) Controlling I Intermediary Morrison, Brian Houston,TX United States X 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. ❑ 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION My name is Brian D. Morrison , and my date of birth is My address is 1213 N. Durham Dr. , Houston , Texas , 77008 , USA . (street) (city) (state) (zip code) (country) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in Harris County, State of Texas ,on the 1 day of April ,20 21 . (month) (year) Signature of a horized agent of contracting business entity (Declarant) Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Version V1.1.ceffd98a i-� R&BGROUOIC VPEARCE ACORO CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) `...i 5/4/2021 ' THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT Vicki Pearce,CIC,CISR NAME: INSURICA TX Insurance Services,Inc. (A/C,NN,Ext):(713)934-2005 FAX No):(866)652-9382 Houston,1945 State Highway 249 Suite 550 E MqI Vicki.Pearce INSURICA.com TX 77070 ADDRESS: INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIL# INSURER A:United Fire&Casualty Company 13021 INSURED INSURER B:Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 R&B Group,Inc. INSURER C:Hanover Insurance Company -- 22292 1213 N.Durham INSURERD: Houston,TX 77008 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDCSUBR POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSD WVD IMMIDDIYYYY) IMM/DDIYYYY) A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE _ $_ _ _ 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE X OCCUR 85321152 1/31/2021 1/31/2022 DAMAGE TO RENTED 300,000 PREMISES(Ea occurrence) $ MED EXP(Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 POLICY X Ec/ X LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 OTHER: $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 1,000,000 (Ea accident) X ANY AUTO 85321152 1/31/2021 1/31/2022 BODILY INJURY(Per person) $OWNED -SCHEDULED AUTOS ONLY _ AUTOSN E BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY ___AUTOS ONL� I. I�Per accident)DAMAGE $ A X UMBRELLA LIAR -X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE 85321152 1/31/2021 1/31/2022 AGGREGATE ._$ 5,000,000 DED RETENTION$ $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION PER OTH- ER EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY YIN X_ STATUTE ER ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE N N!A 0001140773 113112021 1/31/2022 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE'$ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ A Builders Risk 46306193 1/31/2021 1/31/2022 ANY ONE JOBSITE 3,000,000 C Inland Marine IHDA81971505 1/31/2021 1/31/2022 MAXIMUM PER ITEM 450,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Page 1 of 2 RE:Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control&Rehabilitation.Bid Number 0321-29 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE Cityof Pearland THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,TX 77581 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 418‘1,411:/12/ ACORD 25(2016/03) ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID:R&BGROUOIC VPEARCE LOC#: 1 ACORO ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 AGENCY NAMED INSURED RINSURICA TX Insurance Services, Inc. Durham &B GInc. 1213 N.Dur POLICY NUMBER Houston,TX 77008 Harris SEE PAGE 1 CARRIER NAIC CODE SEE PAGE 1 SEE P 1 EFFECTIVE DATE:SEE PAGE 1 ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: ACORD 25 FORM TITLE: Certificate of Liability Insurance Page 2 of 2 GENERAL LIABILITY: ADDITIONAL INSURED—OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS—SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION (CG2010 0413)—Any Person or Organization to Whom You have Agreed to Name as Additional Insured by Written Contract or Agreement if Executed Prior to Loss;, ADDITIONAL INSURED—OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS—COMPLETED OPERATIONS(CG2037 0413)-Any Person or Organization to Whom You have Agreed to Name as Additional Insured by Written Contract or Agreement if Executed Prior to Loss. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY—OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION (CG2001 0413)—You have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that this insurance would be primary and would not seek contribution from any other insurance available to the additional insured. TEXAS—EXTENDED ULTRA LIABILITY PLUS ENDORSEMENT—GENERAL LIABILITY EXTENSION (CG7208 07/17)-Blanket Waiver of Subrogation—We waive this right where you have agreed to do so as part of a written contract,executed by you prior to the loss. AUTO LIABILITY: BUSINESS AUTO ULTRA ENDORSEMENT(CA7109 0117)—Additional Insured Status by Contract,Agreement or Permit,Any Person or Organization to Whom You have Agreed to Name as Additional Insured by Written Contract or Agreement; Waiver of Subrogation Required By Contract,We waive any rights of recovery we may have against the person or organization with whom you have agreed in writing in a contract, agreement or permit. PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY—OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION (CA7334 0915)—Coverage is primary for any liability assumed under an "insured contract". This coverage will also be non-contributory if it is required by the terms of the "insured contract". WORKERS COMPENSATION: TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT(WC42 03 04B)— Blanket Waiver—Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. UMBRELLA: Follow Form of Underlying General Liability, Business Automobile Liability and Workers Compensation/Employers Liability Policies. POLLUTION LIABILITY: ADDITIONAL INSURED—ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT—ONGOING WORK OR OPERATIONS(ENV-3250 (12/18)As required by written contract or agreement signed by both parties prior to a loss to which this insurance applies. ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT—PRODUCTS-COMPLETED OPERATIONS HAZARD (ENV-3251 (12/18): —Any Person or Organization to Whom You have Agreed to Name as Additional Insured by Written Contract or Agreement if Executed Prior to Loss. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY—OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION (ENV-3253)12/18)—You have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that this insurance would be primary and would not seek contribution from any other insurance available to the additional insured. WAIVER OF RANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY — (ENV-3143 03/05)- Blanket Waiver of Subrogation—We waive this to"Any person or organization that is an owner of real property or personal property on which you are performing operations, or a contractor on whose behalf you are performing operations, and only at the specific written request of such person or organization to you,wherein such request is made prior to commencement of operations. ACORD 101 (2008/01) ©2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD R&B Group,Inc. Policy Dates:1-31-2021/2022 POLICY NUMBER: 85321152 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG20100413 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s) Location(s)Of Covered Operations ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM LOCATIONS DESIGNATED AND YOU HAVE AGREED TO NAME AS ADDIT- DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE IONAL INSURED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT MENTIONED WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT IF EXECUTED PRIOR TO OR AGREEMENT. LOSS . Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. PREMIUM 250 A. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional insureds, the following additional organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only exclusions apply: with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or damage" or "personal and advertising injury" "property damage" occurring after: caused, in whole or in part, by: 1. Your acts or omissions; or 1. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your work, on the project (other than service, behalf; maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or in the performance of your ongoing operations for on behalf of the additional insured(s) at the the additional insured(s) at the location(s) location of the covered operations has been designated above. completed; or However 2. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its 1. The insurance afforded to such additional intended use by any person or organization insured only applies to the extent permitted by other than another contractor or subcontractor law; and engaged in performing operations for a 2. If coverage provided to the additional insured is principal as a part of the same project. required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. CG 20 10 04 13 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 2 C. With respect to the insurance afforded to these 2. Available under the applicable Limits of additional insureds, the following is added to Insurance shown in the Declarations; Section III—Limits Of Insurance: whichever is less. If coverage provided to the additional insured is This endorsement shall not increase the required by a contract or agreement, the most we applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the will pay on behalf of the additional insured is the Declarations. amount of insurance: 1. Required by the contract or agreement:or Page 2 of 2 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 CG 20 10 0413 R&B Group,Inc. Policy Dates:1-31-2021/2022 POLICY NUMBER: 85321152 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 37 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s) Location And Description Of Completed Operations ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM LOCATIONS DESIGNATED AND YOU HAVE AGREED TO NAME AS ADDIT- DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE IONAL INSURED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT MENTIONED WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT IF EXECUTED PRIOR TO OR AGREEMENT. LOSS. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. PREMIUM 1, 000 A. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional insureds. the following is added to organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only Section III — Limits Of Insurance: with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or If coverage provided to the additional insured is "property damage"caused, in whole or in part, by required by a contract or agreement, the most we "your work" at the location designated and will pay on be half of the additional insured is the described in the Schedule of this endorsement amount of insurance: performed for that additional insured and 1. Required by the contract or agreement: or included in the "products -completed operations 2. Available under the applicable Limits of hazard". Insurance shown in the Declarations: However: 1. The insurance afforded to such additional whichever is less. insured only applies to the extent permitted This endorsement shall not increase the applicable by law: and Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. 2. If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. CG 20 37 04 13 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 1 R 8 B Group,Inc. Policy Dates:1-31-2021/2022 Policy#85321152 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG20010413 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART The following is added to the Other Insurance (2) You have agreed in writing in a contract or Condition and supersedes any provision to the agreement that this insurance would be contrary: primary and would not seek contribution Primary And Noncontributory Insurance from any other insurance available to the additional insured. This insurance is primary to and will not seek contribution from any other insurance available to an additional insured under your policy provided that: (1) The additional insured is a Named Insured under such other insurance; and CG 20 01 04 13 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 1 R 8 B Group,Inc. Policy Dates:1-31-2021/2022 Policy#85321152 CG 72 08 07 17 TEXAS - EXTENDED ULTRA LIABILITY PLUS ENDORSEMENT COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT SUMMARY OF COVERAGES This is a summary of the various additional coverages and coverage modifications provided by this endorsement. No coverage is provided by this summary. * Extended Property Damage * Expanded Fire Legal Liability to include Explosion, Lightning and Sprinkler Leakage * Coverage for non-owned watercraft is extended to 51 feet in length * Property Damage — Borrowed Equipment * Property Damage Liability — Elevators * Coverage D —Voluntary Property Damage Coverage $5,000 Occurrence with a $10,000 Aggregate * Coverage E — Care, Custody and Control Property Damage Coverage $25,000 Occurrence with a $100,000 Aggregate —$500 Deductible * Coverage F— Electronic Data Liability Coverage —$50,000 * Coverage G — Product Recall Expense $25,000 Each Recall Limit with a $50,000 Aggregate —$1,000 Deductible * Coverage H —Water Damage Legal Liability —$25,000 * Coverage I — Designated Operations Covered by a Consolidated (Wrap-Up) Insurance Program —Limited Coverage * Increase in Supplementary Payments: Bail Bonds to $1,000 * Increase in Supplementary Payments: Loss of Earnings to $500 * For newly formed or acquired organizations —extend the reporting requirement to 180 days * Broadened Named Insured * Automatic Additional Insured — Owners, Lessees or Contractors —Automatic Status When Required in Construction Agreement With You — Including Upstream Parties * Contractors BlanketAdditional Insured — Products — Completed Operations Coverage — Including Upstream Parties * Automatic Additional Insured —Vendors * Automatic Additional Insured — Lessor of Leased Equipment Automatic Status When Required in Lease Agreement With You * Automatic Additional Insured — Managers or Lessor of Premises * Additional Insured — Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured * Additional Insured — State or Governmental Agency or Subdivision or Political Subdivision — Permits or Authorizations * Additional Insured — Consolidated Insurance Program (Wrap-Up) Off-Premises Operations Only — Owners, Lessees or Contractors Automatic Status When Required in Construction Agreement With You * Additional Insured — Employee Injury to Another Employee * Automatically included —Aggregate Limits of Insurance (per location) * Automatically included —Aggregate Limits of Insurance (per project) * Knowledge of occurrence — Knowledge of an "occurrence", "claim or suit" by your agent, servant or employee shall not in itself constitute knowledge of the named insured unless an officer of the named insured has received such notice from the agent, servant or employee * Blanket Waiver of Subrogation * Liberalization Condition * Unintentional failure to disclose all hazards. If you unintentionally fail to disclose any hazards existing at the inception date of your policy, we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Form because of such failure. However, this provision does not affect our right to collect additional premium or exercise our right of cancellation or non-renewal. * "Insured Contract" redefined for Limited Railroad Contractual Liability * Mobile equipment to include snow removal, road maintenance and street cleaning equipment less than 1,000 lbs GVW * Bodily Injury Redefined REFER TO THE ACTUAL ENDORSEMENT FOLLOWING ON PAGES 2 THROUGH 14 FOR CHANGES AFFECTING YOUR INSURANCE PROTECTION CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 1 of 14 R&B Group,Inc. Policy Dates:1-31-2021/2022 Policy#85321152 CG 72 08 07 17 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. TEXAS - EXTENDED ULTRA LIABILITY PLUS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SECTION I - COVERAGES A. The following changes are made at COVERAGE A— BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY: 1. Extended Property Damage At 2. Exclusions exclusion a. Expected or Intended Injury is replaced with the following: "Bodily injury" or"property damage" expected or intended from the standpoint of the insured. This exclusion does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" resulting from the use of reasonable force to protect persons or property. 2. Expanded Fire Legal Liability At 2. Exclusions the last paragraph is deleted and replaced by the following: Exclusions c. through n. do not apply to damage by fire, explosion, lightning, smoke resulting from such fire, explosion, or lightning or sprinkler leakage to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE. 3. Non-Owned Watercraft At 2. Exclusions exclusion g. Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft (2) (a) is deleted and replaced by the following: (a) Less than 51 feet long; 4. Property Damage — Borrowed Equipment At 2. Exclusions the following is added to paragraph (4) of exclusion j. Damage To Property: This exclusion does not apply to "property damage" to borrowed equipment while at a jobsite and while not being used to perform operations. The most we will pay for "property damage" to any one piece of borrowed equipment under this coverage is $25,000 per occurrence. The insurance afforded under this provision is excess over any valid and collectible property insurance (including deductible) available to the insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis. 5. Property Damage Liability — Elevators At 2. Exclusions the following is added to paragraphs (3), (4) and (6) of exclusion j. Damage To Property: This exclusion does not apply to "property damage" resulting from the use of elevators. However, any insurance provided for such "property damage" is excess over any valid and collectible property insurance (including deductible) available to the insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis. B. The following coverages are added: 1. COVERAGE D—VOLUNTARY PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE "Property damage" to property of others caused by the insured: a. While in your possession; or b. Arising out of"your work". Coverage applies at the request of the insured, whether or not the insured is legally obligated to pay. For the purposes of this Voluntary Property Damage Coverage only: Exclusion j. Damage to Property is deleted and replaced by the following: CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 2 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 j. Damage to Property "Property damage" to: (1) Property held by the insured for servicing, repair, storage or sale at premises you own, rent, lease, operate or use; (2) Property transported by or damage caused by any "automobile", "watercraft" or "aircraft" you own, hire or lease; (3) Property you own, rent, lease, borrow or use. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE. For the purposes of this Voluntary Property Damage Coverage, our right and duty to defend ends when we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit for each coverage, and we are granted sole discretion in making payments under this coverage. 2. COVERAGE E —CARE, CUSTODY AND CONTROL PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE For the purpose of this Care, Custody and Control Property Damage Coverage only: a. Item (4) of Exclusion j. does not apply. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE . For the purposes of this Care, Custody and Control Property Damage Coverage, our right and duty to defend ends when we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit for each coverage, and we are granted sole discretion in making payments under this coverage. 3. COVERAGE F — ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY COVERAGE For the purposes of this Electronic Data Liability Coverage only: a. Exclusion p. of Coverage A — Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability in Section I — Coverages is replaced by the following: 2. Exclusions This insurance does not apply to: p. Electronic Data Damages arising out of the loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to manipulate "electronic data" that does not result from physical injury to tangible property. However, this exclusion does not apply to liability for damages because of"bodily injury". b. "Property Damage" means: (1) Physical injury to tangible property, including all resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the physical injury that caused it; or (2) Loss of use of tangible property that is not physically injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the "occurrence" that caused it; or (3) Loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access or inability to properly manipulate "electronic data", resulting from physical injury to tangible property. All such loss of "electronic data" shall be deemed to occur at the time of the "occurrence" that caused it. For the purposes of this Electronic Data Liability Coverage, "electronic data" is not tangible property. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE . 4. COVERAGE G —PRODUCT RECALL EXPENSE a. Insuring Agreement (1) We will pay 90% of "product recall expense" you incur as a result of a "product recall" you initiate during the coverage period. (2) We will only pay for "product recall expense" arising out of "your products" which have been physically relinquished to others. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 3 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 b. Exclusions This insurance does not apply to "product recall expense" arising out of: (1) Any fact, circumstance or situation which existed at the inception date of the policy and which you were aware of, or could reasonably have foreseen that would have resulted in a "product recall". (2) Deterioration, decomposition or transformation of a chemical nature, except if caused by an error in the manufacture, design, processing, storage, or transportation of "your product". (3) The withdrawal of similar products or batches that are not defective, when a defect in another product or batch has been found. (4) Acts, errors or omissions of any of your employees, done with prior knowledge of any of your officers or directors. (5) Inherent vice, meaning a natural condition of property that causes it to deteriorate or become damaged. (6) "Bodily Injury" or"Property Damage". (7) Failure of "your product" to accomplish its intended purpose, including any breach of warranty of fitness, quality, efficacy or efficiency, whether written or implied. (8) Loss of reputation, customer faith or approval, or any costs incurred to regain customer market, or any other consequential damages. (9) Legal fees or expenses. (10) Damages claimed for any loss, cost or expense incurred by you or others for the loss of use of "your product". (11) "Product recall expense" arising from the "product recall" of any of "your products" for which coverage is excluded by endorsement. (12) Any "product recall" initiated due to the expiration of the designated shelf life of "your product". 5. COVERAGE H —WATER DAMAGE LEGAL LIABILITY The Insurance provided under Coverage H (Section I) applies to "property damage" arising out of water damage to premises that are both rented to and occupied by you. The Limit under this coverage shall not be in addition to the Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit. The amount we will pay is limited as described below in SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE. 6. COVERAGE I — DESIGNATED OPERATIONS COVERED BY A CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAM The following exclusion is added to Paragraph 2. Exclusions of SECTION I — COVERAGES COVERAGE A — BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY: r. This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of either your ongoing operations or operations included within the "products-completed operations hazard" for any "consolidated (Wrap-up) insurance program" which has been provided by the prime contractor/project manager or owner of the construction project in which you are involved. This exclusion applies whether or not a consolidated (Wrap-up) insurance program: a. Provides coverage identical to that provided by this Coverage Part; or b. Has limits adequate to cover all claims. This exclusion does not apply if a "consolidated (Wrap-up) insurance program" covering your operations has been cancelled, non-renewed or otherwise no longer applies for reasons other than exhaustion of all available limits, whether such limits are available on a primary, excess or on any other basis. You must advise us of such cancellation, nonrenewal or termination as soon as practicable. For purposes of this exclusion a "consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program" is a program providing insurance coverage to all parties for exposures involved with a particular (typically major) construction project. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 4 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 C. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — COVERAGES A AND B is amended: 1. To read SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS 2. Bail Bonds Item 1.b. is amended as follows: b. Up to $1,000 for cost of bail bonds required because of accidents or traffic law violations arising out of the use of any vehicle to which the Bodily Injury Liability Coverage applies. We do not have to furnish these bonds. 3. Loss of Earnings Item 1.d. is amended as follows: d. All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured at our request to assist us in the investigation or defense of the claim or"suit", including actual loss of earnings up to $500 a day because of time off from work. 4. The following language is added to Item 1. However, we shall have none of the duties set forth above when this insurance applies only for Voluntary Property Damage Coverage and/or Care, Custody or Control Property Damage Coverage and we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit for these coverages. SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED A. The following change is made: Extended Reporting Requirements Item 3.a. is deleted and replaced by the following: a. Coverage under this provision is afforded only until the 180th day after you acquire or form the organization or the end of the policy period, whichever is earlier. B. The following provisions are added: 4. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED Item 1.f. is added as follows: f. Any legally incorporated entity of which you own more than 50 percent of the voting stock during the policy period only if there is no other similar insurance available to that entity. However: (1) Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurred before you acquired more than 50 percent of the voting stock; and (2) Coverage B does not apply to "personal and advertising injury" arising out of an offense committed before you acquired more than 50 percent of the voting stock. 5. Additional Insured — Owners, Lessees or Contractors-Automatic Status When Required in Construction or Service Agreement With You — Including Upstream Parties a. Any person or organization for whom you are performing operations when you and such person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy; b. Any other person or organization you are required to add as an additional insured under the contract or agreement described in Paragraph a. above. Such person(s) or organization(s) is an additional insured only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" which may be imputed to that person or organization directly arising out of: 1. Your acts or omissions; or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured. However, the insurance afforded to such additional insured: 1. Only applies to the extent permitted by law; and CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 5 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 2. Will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. c. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusions apply: This insurance does not apply to: 1. "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: a. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or b. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. This exclusion applies even if the claims against any insured allege negligence or other wrongdoing in the supervision, hiring, employment, training or monitoring of others by that insured, if the "occurrence" which caused the "bodily injury" or "property damage", or the offense which caused the "personal and advertising injury", involved the rendering of or the failure to render any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services. 2. "Bodily injury" or"property damage" occurring after: a. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insured(s) at the location of the covered operations has been completed; or b. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. 6. Additional Insured — Products Completed Operations Coverage — Including Upstream Parties a. Any person or organization for whom you are performing operations when you and such person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy; and b. Any other person or organization you are required to add as an additional insured under the contract or agreement described in Paragraph a. above. Such person(s) or organization(s) is an additional insured only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" which may be imputed to that person or organization directly arising out of"your work" specified in the "written contract" and included in the "products-completed operations hazard". However: (1) The insurance afforded to such additional insureds only applies to the extent permitted by law; (2) If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. (3) Such coverage will not apply subsequent to the first to occur of the following: i. The expiration of the period of time required by the "written contract"; or ii. The expiration of any applicable statute of limitations or statute of repose with respect to claims arising out of"your work". c. With respect to the insurance afforded to any additional insured under this endorsement, the following additional exclusionary language shall apply: This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architecture, engineering or surveying services, including: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 6 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 7. Additional Insured —Vendors a. Any person(s) or organization(s) (referred to throughout this additional coverage as vendor), but only with respect to "bodily injury" or "property damage", which may be imputed to that person(s) or organization(s) arising out of "your products" shown with the Schedule which are distributed or sold in the regular course of the vendor's business is an insured. However: (1) The insurance afforded to such vendor only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) If coverage provided to the vendor is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such vendor will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such vendor. b. With respect to the insurance afforded to these vendors, the following additional exclusions apply: (1) This insurance afforded the vendor does not apply to: (a) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for which the vendor is obligated to pay damages by reason of the assumption of liability in a contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability for damages that the vendor would have in the absence of the contract or agreement; (b) Any express warranty unauthorized by you; (c) Any physical or chemical change in the product made intentionally by the vendor; (d) Repackaging, except when unpacked solely for the purpose of inspection, demonstration, testing, or the substitution of parts under instructions from the manufacturer, and then repackaged in the original container. (e) Any failure to make such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of products. (f) Demonstration, installation, servicing or repair operations, except such operations performed at the vendor's premises in connection with the sale of the product. (g) Products which, after distribution or sale by you, have been labeled or relabeled or used as a container, part or ingredient of any other thing or substance by or for the vendor. (h) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of the sole negligence of the vendor for its own acts or omissions or those of its employees or anyone else acting on its behalf. However, this exclusion does not apply to: i. The exceptions contained in Sub-paragraphs d. or f.; or ii. Such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the products. (2) This insurance does not apply to any insured person or organization, from whom you have acquired such products, or any ingredient, part or container, entering into, accompanying or containing such products. 8. Additional Insured — Lessor of Leased Equipment — Automatic Status When Required in Lease Agreement With You a. Any person(s) or organization(s) from whom you lease equipment when you and such person(s) or organization(s) have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person(s) or organization(s) be added as an additional insured on your policy. Such person(s) or organization(s) is an insured only with respect to your liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" directly arising out of the maintenance, operation or use of equipment leased to you, which may be imputed to such person or organization as the lessor of equipment. However, the insurance afforded to such additional insured: (1) Only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) Will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 7 of 14 CO 72 08 07 17 A person's or organization's status as an additional insured under this endorsement ends when their contract or agreement with you for such leased equipment ends. b. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, this insurance does not apply to any "occurrence" which takes place after the equipment lease expires. 9. Additional Insured — Managers or Lessors of Premises a. Any person(s) or organization(s), but only with respect to liability arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of that part of the premises leased to you and subject to the following additional exclusions: This insurance does not apply to: (1) Any "occurrence" which takes place after you cease to be a tenant in that premises. (2) Structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or on behalf of the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule. However: (1) The insurance afforded to such additional insured only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. 10. Additional Insured — Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured a. Any architects, engineers or surveyors who are not engaged by you are insureds, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" which may be imputed to that architect, engineer or surveyor arising out of: (1) Your acts or omissions; or (2) Your acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations performed by you or on your behalf. But only if such architects, engineers or surveyors, while not engaged by you, are contractually required to be added as an additional insured to your policy. However, the insurance afforded to such additional insured: (1) Only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) Will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. b. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusion applies: This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of or failure to render any professional services, including: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications; or (2) Supervisory, inspection or engineering services. This exclusion applies even if the claims against any insured allege negligence or other wrongdoing in the supervision, hiring, employment, training or monitoring of others by that insured, if the "occurrence" which caused the "bodily injury" or "property damage", or the offense which caused the "personal and advertising injury", involved the rendering of or the failure to render any professional services. 11. Additional Insured — State or Governmental Agency or Subdivision or Political Subdivision — Permits or Authorizations Any state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision is an insured, subject to the following provisions: CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 8 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 a. This insurance applies only with respect to operations performed by you or on your behalf for which the state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision has issued a permit or authorization. However: (1) The insurance afforded to such additional insured only applies to the extent permitted by law; and (2) If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. b. This insurance does not apply to: (1) "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of operations performed for the federal government, state or municipality; or (2) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products-completed operations hazard". 12. Additional Insured Consolidated Insurance Program (Wrap-Up) Off-Premises Operations Only — Owners, Lessees or Contractors a. Any persons or organizations for whom you are performing operations, for which you have elected to seek coverage under a Consolidated Insurance Program, when you and such person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy as an insured. Such person or organization is an additional insured only with respect to your liability which may be imputed to that person or organization directly arising out of your ongoing operations performed for that person or organization at a premises other than any project or location that is designated as covered under a Consolidated Insurance Program. A person's or organization's status as an insured under this endorsement ends when your operations for that insured are completed. b. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusion applies. This insurance does not apply to: "Bodily injury", "property damage", or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of, or failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; and (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. 13. Additional Insured —Employee Injury to Another Employee With respect to your "employees" who occupy positions which are supervisory in nature: Paragraph 2.a.(1) of SECTION II —WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to read: a. "Bodily injury" or"personal and advertising injury": (1) To you, to your partners or members (if you are a partnership or joint venture), or to your members (if you are a limited liability company); (2) For which there is any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury described in paragraph (1)(a) above; or (3) Arising out of his or her providing or failing to provide professional healthcare services. Paragraph 3.a. is deleted. For the purpose of this Item 12 only, a position is deemed to be supervisory in nature if that person performs principle work which is substantially different from that of his or her subordinates and has authority to hire, direct, discipline or discharge. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 9 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE A. The following Items are deleted and replaced by the following: 2. The General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for the sum of: a. Medical expenses under Coverage C; b. Damages under Coverage A, except damages because of "bodily injury" or "property damage" included in the "products-completed operations hazard"; and c. Damages under Coverage B; and d. Damages under Coverage H. 3. The Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages because of "bodily injury" and "property damage" included in the "products-completed operations hazard" and Coverage G. 6. Subject to 5. above, the Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages because of "property damage" to any one premises, while rented to you, or in the case of damage by fire, explosion, lightning, smoke resulting from such fire, explosion, or lightning or sprinkler leakage while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner. B. The following are added: 8. Subject to Paragraph 5. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE $25,000 is the most we will pay under Coverage H for Water Damage Legal Liability. 9. Coverage G — Product Recall Expense Aggregate Limit $50,000 Each Product Recall Limit $25,000 a. The Aggregate Limit shown above is the most we will pay for the sum of all "product recall expense" you incur as a result of all "product recalls" you initiate during the endorsement period. b. The Each Product Recall Limit shown above is the most we will pay, subject to the Aggregate and $1,000 deductible, for "product recall expense" you incur for any one "product recall" you initiate during the endorsement period. We will only pay for the amount of Product Recall Expenses which are in excess of the deductible amount. The deductible applies separately to each Product Recall. The limits of insurance will not be reduced by the amount of this deductible. We may, or will if required by law, pay all or any part of any deductible amount. Upon notice of our payment of a deductible amount, you shall promptly reimburse us for the part of the deductible amount we paid. 10. Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Location) The General Aggregate Limit applies separately to each of your "locations" owned by or rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner. "Location" means premises involving the same or connecting lots, or premises whose connection is interrupted only by a street, roadway, waterway or right-of-way of a railroad. 11. Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Project) The General Aggregate Limit applies separately to each of your projects away from premises owned by or rented to you. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 10 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 12. With respects to the insurance afforded to additional insureds afforded coverage by items 5 through 13 of SECTION II —WHO IS AN INSURED above, the following is added: The most we will pay on behalf of the additional insured is the amount of insurance: a. Required by the contract or agreement; b. Available under the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations; Whichever is less. This endorsement shall not increase the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. 13. Subject to 5. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE, a $5,000 "occurrence" limit and a $10,000 "aggregate" limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages because of "property damage" covered under Coverage D —Voluntary Property Damage Coverage. For the purposes of this Voluntary Property Damage Coverage, our right and duty to defend ends when we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit for each coverage, and we are granted sole discretion in making payments under this coverage. 14. Subject to 5. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE , a $25,000 "occurrence" limit and a $100,000 "aggregate" limit is the most we will pay under Coverage E — Care, Custody and Control Coverage regardless of the number of: a. Insureds; b. Claims made or"suits" brought; or c. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing "suits". Deductible - Our obligation to pay damages on your behalf applies only to the amount of damages in excess of $500. This deductible applies to all damages because of "property damage" as the result of any one "occurrence" regardless of the number of persons or organizations who sustain damages because of that "occurrence". We may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim or "suit" and upon notification of the action taken, you shall promptly reimburse us for such part of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. As respects this coverage "Aggregate" is the maximum amount we will pay for all covered "occurrences" during one policy period. For the purposes of this Care, Custody and Control Property Damage Coverage, our right and duty to defend ends when we have paid the Limit of Liability or the Aggregate Limit for each coverage, and we are granted sole discretion in making payments under this coverage. 15. Subject to 5. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE, the most we will pay for "property damage" under Coverage F — Electronic Data Liability Coverage for loss of "electronic data" is $50,000 without regard to the number of "occurrences". SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS A. The following conditions are amended: 1. Knowledge of Occurrence a. Condition 2., Items a. and b. are deleted and replaced by the following: (1) Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit (a) You must see to it that we are notified as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim. Knowledge of an "occurrence" by your agent, servant or employee shall not in itself constitute knowledge of the named insured unless an officer of the named insured has received such notice from the agent, servant or employee. To the extent possible, notice should include: i. How, when and where the "occurrence" took place; ii. The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses, and iii. The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 11 of 14 CO 72 08 07 17 (b) If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against any insured, you must: i. Immediately record the specifics of the claim or"suit" and the date received; and ii. Notify us as soon as practicable. You must see to it that we receive written notice of the claim or "suit" as soon as practicable. Knowledge of a claim or "suit" by your agent, servant or employee shall not in itself constitute knowledge of the named insured unless an officer of the named insured has received such notice from the agent, servant or employee. 2. Where Broad Form Named Insured is added in SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED of this endorsement, Condition 4. Other Insurance b. Excess Insurance (1).(a) is replaced by the following: (a) Any of the other insurance, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, that is available to an insured solely by reason of ownership by you of more than 50 percent of the voting stock, and not withstanding any other language in any other policy. This provision does not apply to a policy written to apply specifically in excess of this policy. B. The following are added: 1. Condition (5) of 2. "Duties in the event Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit" c. You or any other involved insured must: (5) Upon our request, replace or repair the property covered under Voluntary Property Damage Coverage at your actual cost, excluding profit or overhead. 10. Blanket Waiver Of Subrogation We waive any right of recovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of: premises owned or occupied by or rented or loaned to you, ongoing operations performed by you or on your behalf, done under a contract with that person or organization, "your work", or "your products". We waive this right where you have agreed to do so as part of a written contract, executed by you before the "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs or the "personal injury" or "advertising injury" offense is committed. 11. Liberalization If a revision to this Coverage Part, which would provide more coverage with no additional premium becomes effective during the policy period in the state designated for the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations, your policy will automatically provide this additional coverage on the effective date of the revision. 12. Unintentional Failure to Disclose All Hazards Based on our reliance on your representations as to existing hazards, if you unintentionally should fail to disclose all such hazards at the inception date of your policy, we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Part because of such failure. However, this provision does not affect our right to collect additional premium or exercise our right of cancellation or non-renewal. 13. The following conditions are added in regard to Coverage G — Product Recall Expense In event of a "product recall", you must a. See to it that we are notified as soon as practicable of a "product recall". To the extent possible, notice should include how, when and where the "product recall" took place and estimated "product recall expense". b. Take all reasonable steps to minimize "product recall expense". This will not increase the limits of insurance. c. If requested, permit us to question you under oath at such times as may be reasonably required about any matter relating to this insurance or your claim, including your books and records. Your answers must be signed. d. Permit us to inspect and obtain other information proving the loss. You must send us a signed, sworn statement of loss containing the information we request to investigate the claim. You must do this within 60 days after our request. e. Cooperate with us in the investigation or settlement of any claim. f. Assist us upon our request, in the enforcement of any rights against any person or organization which may be liable to you because of loss to which this insurance applies. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 12 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 g. Claims Handling (1) Within 15 days after we receive written notice of claim, we will: (a) Acknowledge receipt of the claim. If we do not acknowledge receipt of the claim in writing, we will keep a record of the date, method and content of the acknowledgment; (b) Begin any investigation of the claim; and (c) Request a signed, sworn proof of loss, specify the information you must provide and supply you with the necessary forms. We may request more information at a later date, if during the investigation of the claim such additional information is necessary. (2) We will notify you in writing as to whether: (a) The claim or part of the claim will be paid; (b) The claim or part of the claim has been denied, and inform you of the reasons for denial; (c) More information is necessary; or (d) We need additional time to reach a decision. If we need additional time, we will inform you of the reasons for such need. (3) We will provide notification, as described in (2)(a) through (2)(d) above, within: (a) 15 business days after we receive the signed, sworn proof of loss and all information we requested; or (b) 30 days after we receive the signed, sworn proof of loss and all information we requested, if we have reason to believe the loss resulted from arson. If we have notified you that we need additional time to reach a decision, we must then either approve or deny the claim within 45 days of such notice. h. We will pay for covered loss or damage within 5 business days after: (1) We have notified you that payment of the claim or part of the claim will be made and have reached agreement with you on the amount of loss; or (2) An appraisal award has been made. However, if payment of the claim or part of the claim is conditioned on your compliance with any of the terms of this policy, we will make payment within 5 business days after the date you have complied with such terms. i. Catastrophe Claims If a claim results from a weather related catastrophe or a major natural disaster, the claim handling and claim payment deadlines described in a. and b. above are extended for an additional 15 days. Catastrophe or Major Natural Disaster means a weather related event which is: (1) Declared a disaster under the Texas Disaster Act of 1975; or (2) Determined to be a catastrophe by the State Board of Insurance. j. The term "business day", as used in this endorsement, means a day other than Saturday, Sunday or a holiday recognized by the state of Texas. k. We will issue loss payment to the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations and any mortgagee or loss payee as designated. 14. Limited Railroad Contractual Liability The following conditions are applicable only to coverage afforded by reason of the redefining of an "insured contract" in the DEFINITIONS section of this endorsement: a. Railroad Protective Liability coverage provided by Railroad Protective Liability Coverage Form (CG 00 35) with minimum limits of $2,000,000 per occurrence and a $6,000,000 general aggregate limit must be in place for the entire duration of any project. b. Any amendment to the Other Insurance condition of Railroad Protective Liability Coverage Form (CG 00 35) alters the primacy of the coverage or which impairs our right to contribution will rescind any coverage afforded by the redefined "insured contract" language. c. For the purposes of the Other Insurance condition of Railroad Protective Liability Coverage Form (CG 00 35) you, the named insured, will be deemed to be the designated contractor. CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 13 of 14 CG 72 08 07 17 SECTION V - DEFINITIONS A. At item 12. Mobile Equipment the wording at f.(1) is deleted and replaced by the following: f. (1) Equipment designed primarily for: (a) Snow removal; (b) Road maintenance, but not construction or resurfacing; or (c) Street cleaning; except for such vehicles that have a gross vehicle weight less than 1,000 lbs which are not designed for highway use. B. Item 3. "bodily injury" is deleted and replaced with the following: 3. "bodily injury" means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person. This includes mental anguish, mental injury, shock, fright or death that results from such physical injury, sickness or disease. C. Item 9. "Insured Contract" c. is deleted and replaced with the following: c. Any easement or license agreement; D. Item 9. "Insured Contract" f.(1) is deleted. E. The following definitions are added for this endorsement only: 23. "Electronic data" means information, facts or programs stored as or on, created or used on, or transmitted to or from computer software, including systems and applications software, hard or floppy disks, CD-ROMS, tape drives, cells, data processing devices or any other media which are used with electronically controlled equipment. 24. "Product recall" means a withdrawal or removal from the market of "your product" based on the determination by you or any regulatory or governmental agency that: a. The use or consumption of "your product" has caused or will cause actual or alleged "bodily injury" or "property damage"; and b. Such determination requires you to recover possession or control of "your product" from any distributor, purchaser or user, to repair or replace "your product", but only if "your product" is unfit for use or consumption, or is hazardous as a result of: (1) An error or omission by an insured in the design, manufacturing, processing, labeling, storage, or transportation of"your product"; or (2) Actual or alleged intentional, malicious or wrongful alteration or contamination of "your product" by someone other than you. 25. "Product recall expense" means reasonable and necessary expenses for: a. Telephone, radio and television communication and printed advertisements, including stationery, envelopes and postage. b. Transporting recalled products from any purchaser, distributor or user, to locations designated by you. c. Remuneration paid to your employees for overtime, as well as remuneration paid to additional employees or independent contractors you hire. d. Transportation and accommodation expense incurred by your employees. e. Rental expense incurred for temporary locations used to store recalled products. f. Expense incurred to properly dispose of recalled products, including packaging that cannot be reused. g. Transportation expenses incurred to replace recalled products. h. Repairing, redistributing or replacing covered recalled products with like products or substitutes, not to exceed your original cost of manufacturing, processing, acquisition and/or distribution. These expenses must be incurred as a result of a "product recall". CG 72 08 07 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 14 of 14 R&B Group, Inc. Policy Dates: 1-31-2021/2022 Policy#85321152 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 71 09 01 17 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUSINESS AUTO ULTRA ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS COVERAGE INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE Temporary Substitute Auto Physical Damage 2 Broad Form Insured 2 Employee as Insureds 2 Additional Insured Status by Contract, Agreement or Permit 2 Bail Bond Coverage 3 Loss of Earnings Coverage 3 Amended Fellow Employee Coverage 3 Towing and Labor 3 Physical Damage Additional Transportation Expense Coverage 3 Extra Expense -Theft 3 Rental Reimbursement and Additional Transportation Expense 4 Personal Effects Coverage 4 Personal Property of Others 4 Locksmith Coverage 4 Vehicle Wrap Coverage 5 Airbag Accidental Discharge 5 Audio, Visual and Data Electronic Equipment Coverage 5 Auto Loan/Lease Total Loss Protection 5 Glass Repair — Deductible Amendment 5 Amended Duties in the Event of Accident, Claim, Suit or Loss 6 Waiver of Subrogation Required by Contract 6 Unintentional Failure to Disclose 6 Hired, Leased, Rented or Borrowed Auto Physical Damage 6 Mental Anguish 7 Extended Cancellation Condition 7 The COVERAGE INDEX set forth above is informational only and grants no coverage. Terms set forth in (Bold Italics) are likewise for information only and by themselves shall be deemed to grant no coverage. CA 71 09 01 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 1 of 7 (Temporary Substitute Auto Physical Damage) A. TEMPORARY SUBSTITUTE AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE SECTION I — COVERED AUTOS, paragraph C. Certain Trailers, Mobile Equipment and Temporary Substitute Autos is amended by adding the following at the end of the existing language: If Physical Damage Coverage is provided under this Coverage form for an "auto" you own, the Physical Damage coverages provided for that owned "auto" are extended to any "auto" you do not own while used with the permission of its owner as a temporary substitute for the covered "auto" you own that is out of service because of its breakdown, repair, servicing, "loss", or destruction B. BROADENED LIABILITY COVERAGES SECTION II — LIABILITY COVERAGE in Paragraph A. Coverage at 1. Who Is An Insured is amended to include the following: (Broad Form insured) d. Any legally incorporated subsidiary in which you own more than 50% of the voting stock on the effective date of the Coverage Form. However, the Named Insured does not include any subsidiary that is an "insured" under any other automobile policy or would be an "insured" under such a policy but for its termination or the exhaustion of its Limit of Insurance. e. Any organization that is acquired or formed by you, during the term of this policy and over which you maintain majority ownership. However, the Named Insured does not include any newly formed or acquired organization: (1) That is a joint venture or partnership, (2) That is an "insured" under any other policy, (3) That has exhausted its Limits of Insurance under any other policy, or (4) 180 days or more after its acquisition or formation by you, unless you have given us notice of the acquisition or formation Coverage does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" that results from an accident that occurred before you formed or acquired the organization. (Employee as Insureds) f. Any employee of yours while acting in the course of your business or your personal affairs while using a covered "auto" you do not own, hire or borrow. (Additional Insured Status by Contract, Agreement or Permit) g. Any person or organization whom you are required to add as an additional insured on this policy under a written contract or agreement; but the written contract or agreement must be: (1) Currently in effect or becoming effective during the term of this policy; and (2) Executed prior to the "bodily injury" or "property damage." The additional insured status will apply only with respect to your liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage" which may be imputed to that person(s) or organization(s) directly arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of the covered "autos" at the location(s) designated, if any. Coverage provided by this endorsement will not exceed the limits of liability required by the written contract or written agreement even if the limits of liability stated in the policy exceed those limits. This endorsement shall not increase the limits stated in Section II. C. Limits of Insurance. For any covered "auto" you own this Coverage Form provides primary coverage. Page 2 of 7 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. CA 71 09 01 17 C. BROADENED SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS SECTION II. LIABILITY A. Coverage 2. Coverage Extensions a. Supplementary Payments (2) and (4) are replaced by the following: (Bail Bond Coverage) (2) Up to $5,000 for cost of bail bonds (including bonds for related traffic violations) required because of an "accident" we cover. We do not have to furnish these bonds. (Loss of Earnings Coverage) (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the "insured" at our request, including actual loss of earning up to $500 a day because of time off from work. (Amended Fellow Employee Exclusion) D. AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION Only with respect to your "employees" who occupy positions which are supervisory in nature, SECTION II. LIABILITY B. Exclusion 5. Fellow Employee is replaced by: 5. Fellow Employee "Bodily Injury": a. To you, or your partners or members (if you are a partnership or joint venture), or to your members (if you are a limited liability company); b. To your "executive officers" and directors (if you are an organization other than a partnership, joint venture, or limited liability company) but only with respect to performance of their duties as your officers or directors; c. For which there is an obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury described in paragraph a and b above; or d. Arising out of his or her providing or failing to provide professional health care services. For purposes of this endorsement, a position is deemed to be supervisory in nature if that person performs principle work which is substantially different from that of his or her subordinates and has authority to hire, transfer, direct, discipline or discharge. E. BROADENED PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGES SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE A. Coverage is amended as follows: (Towing and Labor) 2. Towing is deleted and replaced with the following: 2. Towing and Labor We will pay towing and labor costs incurred, up to the limits shown below, each time a covered "auto" is disabled: a. For private passenger type vehicles we will pay up to $100 per disablement. b. For all other covered "auto's" we will pay up to $500 per disablement However, the labor must be performed at the place of disablement. (Physical Damage Additional Transportation Expense Coverage) 4. Coverage Extensions a. Transportation Expenses is amended to provide the following limits: We will pay up to $60 per day to a maximum of $1,800. All other terms and provisions of this section remain applicable. The following language is added to 4. Coverage Extensions: (Extra Expense— Theft) c. Theft Recovery Expense If you have purchased Comprehensive Coverage on an "auto" that is stolen, we will pay the expense of returning that stolen auto to you. The limit for this coverage extension is $5,000. CA 71 09 01 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 3 of 7 • (Rental Reimbursement and Additional Transportation Expense) d. Rental Reimbursement We will provide Rental Reimbursement and Additional Expense coverage only for those Physical Damage coverages for which a premium is shown in the Declarations or schedule pages. Coverage applies only to a covered "auto". (1) We will pay for auto rental expense and the expense incurred by you because of "loss" to remove and transfer your materials and equipment from a covered "auto" to a covered "auto." Payment applies in addition to the otherwise applicable coverage you have on a covered "auto." No deductible applies to this coverage. (2) We will pay only for expenses incurred during the policy period and beginning 24 hours after the "loss" and ending, regardless of the policy's expiration, with the lesser of the following number of days: (a) The number of days reasonably required to repair or replace the covered "auto." If "loss" is caused by theft, this number of days is added to the number of days it takes to locate the covered "auto" and return it to you, or (b) 30 days. (3) Our payment is limited to the lesser of the following amounts: (a) Necessary and actual expenses incurred; or (b) $75 per day. (c) This coverage does not apply while there are spare or reserve "autos" available to you for your operations. (d) If"loss" results from the total theft of a covered "auto" of the private passenger or light truck type, we will pay under this coverage only that amount of your rental reimbursement expense which is not already provided for under the SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A. Coverage, 4. Coverage Extensions, a. Transportation Expenses. (Personal Effects Coverage) e. Personal Effects If you have purchased Comprehensive Coverage on this policy for an "auto" you own and that "auto" is stolen, we will pay, without application of a deductible, up to $500 for Personal Effects stolen with the "auto". The insurance provided under this provision is excess over any other collectible insurance. For this coverage extension, Personal Effects means tangible property that is worn or carried by an "insured". (Personal Property of Others) f. Personal Property of Others We will pay up to $500 for loss to personal property of others in or on your covered "auto." This coverage applies only in the event of "loss" to your covered "auto" caused by fire, lightning, explosion, theft, mischief or vandalism, the covered "auto's" collision with another object, or the covered "auto's" overturn. No deductibles apply to this coverage. (Locksmith Coverage) g. Locksmith Coverage We will pay up to $250 per occurrence for necessary locksmith services for keys locked inside a covered private passenger "auto". The deductible is waived for these services. Page 4 of 7 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. CA 71 09 01 17 (Vehicle Wrap Coverage) h. Vehicle Wrap Coverage If you have Comprehensive or Collision coverage on an "auto" that is a total loss, in addition to the actual cash value of the "auto", we will pay up to $1,000 for vinyl vehicle wraps which are displayed on the covered "auto" at the time of total loss. Regardless of the number of autos deemed a total loss, the most we will pay under this Vehicle Wrap Coverage for any one "loss" is $5,000. For purposes of this coverage provision, signs or other graphics painted or magnetically affixed to the vehicle are not considered vehicle wraps. (Airbag Accidental Discharge) F. SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, B. Exclusions is amended at 3. to include the following language: If you have purchased Comprehensive or Collision Coverage under this policy, this exclusion does not apply to mechanical breakdown relating to the accidental discharge of an air bag. This coverage applies only to a covered auto you own and is excess of any other collectible insurance or warranty. No deductible applies to this coverage. G. BROADENED LIMITS OF INSURANCE (Audio, Visual and Data Electronic Equipment Coverage) SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE — C. Limit of Insurance at 1.b. is amended to provide the following limits: b. Limits of $1,000 per "loss" is increased to $5,000 per "loss". All other terms and provisions of this section remain applicable. (Auto Loan/Lease Total Loss Protection) SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE — C. Limit of Insurance is amended by adding the following language: 4. In the event of a total "loss" to a covered "auto" shown in the Schedule pages, subject at the time of the "loss" to a loan or lease, we will pay any unpaid amount due including up to a maximum of $500 for early termination fees or penalties on the lease or loan for a covered"auto" less: a. The amount paid under the Physical Damage Coverage Section of the policy; and b. Any: (1) Overdue lease / loan payments at the time of the "loss"; (2) Financial penalties imposed under a lease for excessive use, abnormal wear and tear or high mileage; (3) Security deposits not returned by the lessor; (4) Costs for extended warranties, Credit Life Insurance, Health, Accident or Disability Insurance purchased with the loan or lease; and (5) Carry-over balances from previous loans or leases. (Glass Repair—Deductible Amendment) H. GLASS REPAIR — DEDUCTIBLE SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE — D. Deductible is amended by adding the following: Any deductible shown in the Declarations as applicable to the covered "auto" will not apply to glass breakage if the damaged glass is repaired, rather than replaced. CA 71 09 01 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 5 of 7 (Amended Duties in the Event of Accident, Claim, Suit or Loss) I. AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT OR LOSS Under SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, A. Loss Conditions , the following is added to paragraph 2. Duties In The Event of Accident, Suit or Loss: d. Knowledge of any "accident", "claim", "suit" or "loss" will be deemed knowledge by you when notice of such "accident", "claim", "suit" or"loss" has been received by: (1) You, if you are an individual; (2) Any partner or insurance manager if you are a partnership; (3) An executive officer or insurance manager, if you are a corporation; (4) Your members, managers or insurance manager, if you are a limited liability company; or (5) Your officials, trustees, board members or insurance manager, if you are a not-for-profit organization. (Waiver of Subrogation by Contract) J. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION REQUIRED BY CONTRACT Under SECTION IV, BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, A. Loss Conditions 5. Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us the following language is added: However, we waive any rights of recovery we may have against the person or organization with whom you have agreed in writing in a contract, agreement or permit, to provide insurance such as is afforded under the policy to which this endorsement is attached. This provision does not apply unless the written contract or written agreement has been executed, or permit has been issued, prior to the "bodily injury" or"property damage." (Unintentional Failure to Disclose) K. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE Under SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, B. General Conditions , the following is added to 2. Concealment, Misrepresentation Or Fraud: Your unintentional error in disclosing, or failing to disclose, any material fact existing at the effective date of this Coverage Form, or during the policy period in connection with any additional hazards, will not prejudice your rights under this Coverage Form. (Hired, Leased, Rented or Borrowed Auto Physical Damage) L. HIRED, LEASED, RENTED OR BORROWED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE Under SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS B. General Conditions 5. Other Insurance Paragraph 5.b. is replaced by the following: b. (1) For "Comprehensive" and "Collision" Auto Physical Damage coverage provided by this endorsement, the following are deemed to be covered "autos" you own: (a) Any Covered "auto" you lease, hire, rent or borrow; and (b) Any Covered "auto" hired or rented by your "employee" under a contract in that individual "employee's" name, with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. However, any "auto" that is leased, hired, rented or borrowed with a driver is not a covered "auto" (2) Limit of Insurance For This Section The most we will pay for any one "loss" is the lesser of the following: (a) $75,000 per accident, or (b) actual cash value at the time of loss, or (c) cost of repair. Page 6 of 7 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. CA 71 09 01 17 Minus a $500 deductible. An adjustment for depreciation and physical condition will be made in determining actual cash value in the event of a total loss. No deductible applies to "loss" caused by fire or lightning. (3) This Hired Auto Physical Damage coverage is excess over any other collectible insurance. (4) Definitions For This Section (a) Comprehensive Coverage: from any cause except the covered "auto's" collision with another object or the covered "auto's" overturn. We will pay glass breakage, "loss" caused by hitting a bird or animal and, "loss" caused by falling objects or missiles. (b) Collision Coverage: caused by the covered "auto's" collision with another object or by the covered "auto's" overturn. (Mental Anguish) M. MENTAL ANGUISH Under SECTION V— DEFINITIONS, C. is replaced by the following: C. "Bodily injury" means bodily injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person including mental anguish or death resulting from bodily injury, sickness, or disease. (Extended Cancellation Condition) N. EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION Under CANCELLATION, of the COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS form, item 2.b. is replaced by the following: b. 60 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for any other reason. CA 71 09 01 17 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 7 of 7 R&B Group,Inc. Policy Dates: 1-31-2021/2022 CA 73 34 09 15 Policy#85321152 r THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM The following language replaces SECTION IV BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS Part B. General Conditions 5. Other Insurance c.: c. Regardless of the provisions of Paragraph a. above, this Coverage Form's Covered Autos Liability Coverage is primary for any liability assumed under an "insured contract". This coverage will also be non-contributory if it is required by the terms of the "insured contract". CA 73 34 09 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 1 of 1 18 R XaSM t e u u WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 03 04 B EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X)Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s)or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Included, see Information Page This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 1/31/21 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no. 0001140773 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 1/31/21 Issued to: R&B GROUP INC 71a-e This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 1/25/21 PO Box 12058,Austin,TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com I (800)859-5995 I Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 03 04 B CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND Section 00610 Bond No. 929598756 PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That R&B Group, Inc. of the City of Houston , County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and Continental Casualty Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ 889,865.00 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Prinpipal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 10 day of ILI , 20(2.A , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Miller Ranch Road Regional Lift Station Odor Control & Rehabilitation 2814 Miller Ranch Rd,Pearland TX 77584 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WW2001 BID NO.: 0321-29 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract Work and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions, and agreements in and by said Contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and Contract Documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 12/2007 00610- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 10th day of May , 2021 . Principal: Surety: ;l R& B Group, Inc. Continental Cas ty C m an By: � By: Title: Brian Morrison,President Title: Rebecca Garza,Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: 1213 N. Durham 333 South Wabash—Floor 41 Houston, TX 77008 Chicago, IL 60604 Telephone: (713) 862-5800 Telephone: (312) 822-7330 Fax: (713) 862-5807 Fax: N/A NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 12/2007 00610-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND Section 00611 Bond No. 929598756 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That R&B Group, Inc. of the City of Houston , County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and Continental Casualty Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ 889,865.00 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 0 day of MPCI,� , 20 21 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Miller Ranch Road Regional Lift Station Odor Control & Rehabilitation 2814 Miller Ranch Rd,Pearland TX 77584 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WW2001 BID NO.: 0321-29 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in said Contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00611 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 10th day of May , 2021 . Principal: Surety:R&B Group, Inc. Continent 1 Cas a ty Cot By: By: Title: Brian Morrison, President Title: Rebecca Garza,Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: 1213 N. Durham 333 South Wabash—Floor 41 Houston, TX 77008 Chicago, IL 60604 Telephone: (713) 862-5800 Telephone: (312) 822-7330 Fax: (713) 862-5807 Fax: N/A NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00611 -2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND Section 00612 Bond No. 929598756 ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That R& B Group, Inc. of the City of Houston , County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and Continental Casualty Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ 889,865.00 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 10 day of Hfru , 20 J, (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Miller Ranch Road Regional Lift Station Odor Control & Rehabilitation 2814 Miller Ranch Rd,Pearland TX 77584 City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: WW2001 BID NO.: 0321-29 which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully correct all such work not in accordance with the Contract Documents discovered within the one-year period from the date of substantial completion, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00612- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 10th day of May , 2021 . Principal: Surety: R& B Group, Inc. Contineita to :m 1 1 _Ain p By: By: MI I PM"'w Title: Brian Morrison, President Title: Rebecca Garza,Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: 1213 N. Durham 333 South Wabash—Floor 41 Houston, TX 77008 Chicago, IL 60604 Telephone: (713) 862-5800 Telephone: (312) 822-7330 Fax: (713) 862-5807 Fax: N/A NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00612-2 of 2 POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Know All Men By These Presents,That Continental Casualty Company,an Illinois insurance company,National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford,an Illinois insurance company,and American Casualty Company of Reading,Pennsylvania,a Pennsylvania insurance company(herein called "the CNA Companies"),are duly organized and existing insurance companies having their principal offices in the City of Chicago,and State of Illinois, and that they do by virtue of the signatures and seals herein affixed hereby make,constitute and appoint Philip Wayne Baker, Edward Donald Arens, Michele Marie Bonnin, Rebecca Garza, Jillian O'Neal, Erica Anne Cox, Individually of The Woodlands,TX,their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign,seal and execute for and on their behalf bonds,undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature -In Unlimited Amounts- and to bind them thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of their insurance companies and all the acts of said Attorney,pursuant to the authority hereby given is hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-Law and Resolutions,printed on the reverse hereof,duly adopted,as indicated,by the Boards of Directors of the insurance companies. In Witness Whereof,the CNA Companies have caused these presents to be signed by their Vice President and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed on this 8th day of February,2021. ��cAsu,1<ry wsua tNe c °u,Y Continental Casualty Company o + National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford x conpoq^re it 4, cit_ g t,„„RP t.4% American C lty Company of Re ing,Pennsylvania z • a � _� DULY tl, �, k....SEAL : l i5oz . �/ 1s97 RAR,� Paul T.Bruflat ce President State of South Dakota,County of Minnehaha,ss: On this 8th day of February,2021,before me personally came Paul T.Bruflat to me known,who,being by me duly sworn,did depose and say: that he resides in the City of Sioux Falls,State of South Dakota;that he is a Vice President of Continental Casualty Company,an Illinois insurance company, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford,an Illinois insurance company,and American Casualty Company of Reading,Pennsylvania,a Pennsylvania insurance company described in and which executed the above instrument;that he knows the seals of said insurance companies;that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals;that they were so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Boards of Directors of said insurance companies and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority,and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said insurance companies. II4J , )----7)9,4--1-1/L) My Commission Expires June 23,2021 J.Mohr Notary Public CERTIFICATE I,D.Johnson,Assistant Secretary of Continental Casualty Company,an Illinois insurance company,National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois insurance company,and American Casualty Company of Reading,Pennsylvania,a Pennsylvania insurance company do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney herein above set forth is still in force,and further certify that the By-Law and Resolution of the Board of Directors of the insurance companies printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said insurance companies this 10th day of May , 2021 . cXstZ ) twsuR� �,, Continental Casualty Company �� ,z. , �y ," National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford cop°O7�kre Q ( i! ; toc.oRroirofei; American Casualty Company of Reading,Pennsylvania z § s JULY 1i SEAL) _feD yO0 V (......0 • )C)j)Clif‘'e4de D. Johnson Assistant Secretary Form F6853-4/2012 Go to www.cnasurety.com>Owner/Obligee Services>Validate Bond Coverage,if you want to verify bond authenticity. Authorizing By-Laws and Resolutions ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following resolution duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting held on May 12,1995: "RESOLVED: That any Senior or Group Vice President may authorize an officer to sign specific documents,agreements and instruments on behalf of the Company provided that the name of such authorized officer and a description of the documents,agreements or instruments that such officer may sign will be provided in writing by the Senior or Group Vice President to the Secretary of the Company prior to such execution becoming effective." This Power of Attorney is signed by Paul T.Bruflat,Vice President,who has been authorized pursuant to the above resolution to execute power of attorneys on behalf of Continental Casualty Company. This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company by unanimous written consent dated the 25th day of April,2012: "Whereas,the bylaws of the Company or specific resolution of the Board of Directors has authorized various officers(the"Authorized Officers")to execute various policies,bonds,undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature;and Whereas,from time to time,the signature of the Authorized Officers,in addition to being provided in original,hard copy format,may be provided via facsimile or otherwise in an electronic format(collectively,"Electronic Signatures");Now therefore be it resolved:that the Electronic Signature of any Authorized Officer shall be valid and binding on the Company." ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY OF HARTFORD: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following resolution duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company by unanimous written consent dated May 10,1995: "RESOLVED: That any Senior or Group Vice President may authorize an officer to sign specific documents,agreements and instruments on behalf of the Company provided that the name of such authorized officer and a description of the documents,agreements or instruments that such officer may sign will be provided in writing by the Senior or Group Vice President to the Secretary of the Company prior to such execution becoming effective." This Power of Attorney is signed by Paul T.Bruflat,Vice President,who has been authorized pursuant to the above resolution to execute power of attorneys on behalf of National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford. This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company by unanimous written consent dated the 25ih day of April,2012: "Whereas,the bylaws of the Company or specific resolution of the Board of Directors has authorized various officers(the"Authorized Officers")to execute various policies,bonds,undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature;and Whereas,from time to time,the signature of the Authorized Officers,in addition to being provided in original,hard copy format,may be provided via facsimile or otherwise in an electronic format(collectively,"Electronic Signatures");Now therefore be it resolved:that the Electronic Signature of any Authorized Officer shall be valid and binding on the Company." ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF AMERICAN CASUALTY COMPANY OF READING,PENNSYLVANIA: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following resolution duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company by unanimous written consent dated May 10,1995: "RESOLVED: That any Senior or Group Vice President may authorize an officer to sign specific documents,agreements and instruments on behalf of the Company provided that the name of such authorized officer and a description of the documents,agreements or instruments that such officer may sign will be provided in writing by the Senior or Group Vice President to the Secretary of the Company prior to such execution becoming effective." This Power of Attorney is signed by Paul T.Bruflat,Vice President,who has been authorized pursuant to the above resolution to execute power of attorneys on behalf of American Casualty Company of Reading,Pennsylvania. This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company by unanimous written consent dated the 25th day of April,2012: "Whereas,the bylaws of the Company or specific resolution of the Board of Directors has authorized various officers(the"Authorized Officers")to execute various policies,bonds,undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature;and Whereas,from time to time,the signature of the Authorized Officers,in addition to being provided in original,hard copy format,may be provided via facsimile or otherwise in an electronic format(collectively,"Electronic Signatures");Now therefore be it resolved:that the Electronic Signature of any Authorized Officer shall be valid and binding on the Company." State of Texas Claim Notice Endorsement To be attached to and form a part of Bond No. 929598756 In accordance with Section 2253.021(f) of the Texas Government Code and Section 53.202(6) of the Texas Property Code any notice of claim to the named surety under this bond(s) should be sent to: CNA Surety 333 South Wabash — Floor 41 Chicago, IL 60604 Telephone: (312) 822-7330 Email: claims@cnasurety.com Form F6944 CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN Section 00615 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN AND PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT The undersigned contracted with City of Pearland to furnish in connection with certain improvements to real property located in the City of Pearland, TX and owned by the City of Pearland which improvements are described as follows: In consideration of Pay Estimate No. in the amount of$ the undersigned, on oath, states that all persons and firms who supplied labor and materials to the undersigned in connection with said Project will be fully paid within 30 days of the date of this document by the undersigned for such work through In consideration of the payment herewith made,the undersigned does fully and finally release and hold harmless the City of Pearland and its surety, if any,through the above date from any and all claims, liens, or right to claim or lien, arising out of this Project under any applicable bond, law or statue. It is understood that this affidavit is submitted to induce payment of the above sum and for use by the City of Pearland in assuring the Owner and others that all liens and claims relating to the said Project furnished by the undersigned are paid. Signature Printed Name&Title Company Name State of County of Subscribed and sworn to,before me,this day of , 20 My Commission Expires: Notary Public 5-12-12 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Pane No. 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1.02 Contract Documents 1.03 Subcontractor 1.04 Written Notice 1.05 Work 1.06 Extra Work 1.07 Work Day 1.07-1 Rain Day 1.07-2 Impact Day 1.08 Calendar Day 1.09 Substantially Completed 1.10 Interpretation of Words and Phrases 1.11 Referenced Standards 1.12 Contract Time 1.13 Construction Inspector 1.14 Balancing Change Order 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 2.01 No Warranty of Design 2.02 Right of Entry 2.03 Ownership of Plans 10-2012 00700-i CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 2.04 Changes and Alterations 2.05 Damages 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 Owner-Engineer Relationship 3.02 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible 3.03 Preliminary Approval 3.04 Inspection by Engineer 3.05 Determination of Questions and Disputes 3.06 Recommendation of Payment 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 Independent Contractor 4.02 Contractor's Understanding 4.03 Laws and Ordinances 4.04 Assignment and Subletting 4.05 Performance and Payment Bonds [and Maintenance Bond] 4.06 Insurance 4.07 Permits and Fees 4.08 Texas State Sales Tax 4.09 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence 4.10 Character of Workers 4.11 Labor, Equipment, Materials, Construction Plant and Buildings 4.12 Sanitation 4.13 Cleaning and Maintenance 4.14 Performance of Work 4.15 Right of Owner to Accelerate the Work 10-2012 00700- ii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.16 Layout of Work 4.17 Shop Drawings 4.18 Engineer-Contractor Relationship; Observations 4.19 Observation and Testing 4.20 Defects and Their Remedies 4.21 Liability for Proper Performance 4.22 Protection Against Accident To Employees and the Public 4.23 Protection of Adjoining Property 4.24 Protection against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers, Materialmen, and Furnishers of Equipment,Machinery and Supplies 4.25 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention 4.26 Indemnification 4.27 Losses From Natural Causes 4.28 Guarantee 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 Time and Order of Completion 5.02 Extension of Time 5.03 Hindrances and Delays 5.04 Suspension of Work 5.05 Liquidated Damages for Delay 5.06 Change of Contract Time 5.07 Delays Beyond Owner's and Contractor's Control 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 Discrepancies and Omissions 6.02 Quantities and Measurements 10-2012 00700-iii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.03 Estimated Quantities 6.04 Price of Work 6.05 Payments 6.06 Partial Payments 6.07 Use of Completed Portions&Punchlist 6.08 Substantial Completion 6.08-1 6.09 Final Payment 6.10 Correction of Work Before Final Payment 6.11 Correction of Work After Final Payment 6.12 Payments Withheld 6.13 Delayed Payments 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7.01 Differing Site Conditions 7.02 Change Orders 7.03 Change Orders 7.04 Request for Work Approval for Work on Non-Work Days 7.05 Minor Changes 7.06 Extra Work 7.07 Time of Filing Claims 8.0 DEFAULT 8.01 Default by Contractor 8.02 Supplementation of Contractor Forces 8.03 Cumulative Remedies& Specific Performance 8.04 Cross-Default 10-2012 00700-iv CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.05 Insolvency 8.06 Contingent Assignment 8.07 Waiver of Consequential Damages 8.08 Termination for Convenience 8.09 Default by Owner 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ATTACHMENT NO. 1: WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE Al ATTACHMENT NO. 2: AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE B1 ATTACHMENT NO. 3: OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR Cl 10-2012 00700-v CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement. The term ENGINEER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Engineer or Architect identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as a representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the preparation of plans and specifications of this Contract. The term CONSTRUCTION MANAGER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Construction Manager identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the performance of the work of this Contract. The Owner's representative on the project site shall be the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER or ENGINEER as designated. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall consist of all of the documents identified in Article 8 of the Standard Form of Agreement, which documents, excluding such documents as may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, as referenced in Article 8, shall be bound together in a Project Manual for the Work. All references to the "Contract" or the "Agreement" in these General Conditions of Agreement shall include the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order: (1) Modifications in writing and signed by both parties, including any Change Orders; (2) Standard Form of Agreement; (3) Special Conditions of Agreement; (4) General Conditions of Agreement, including Attachment No. 1 — Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 — Agreement for Final Payment and CONTRACTOR'S Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 — Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor; (5) Addenda, if any; (6) Plans and Specifications referenced or included in the Project Manual; (7) Instructions to Bidders; (8) Bid Proposal; and 08-2018 00700- 1 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (9) Exhibits: The following Exhibits, if any, attached hereto, are incorporated herein, and are a part of this Contract: In the event a conflict or inconsistency remains between or within the Contract Documents, or the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, CONTRACTOR shall provide the greater quantity or better quality, or CONTRACTOR shall comply with the more stringent requirements, as determined by ENGINEER. Terms or phrases used in the Contract Documents with a well-known technical or construction industry meaning shall have such recognized meanings. References to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, shall mean the latest in effect on the effective date of the Contract, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1 .03 SUBCONTRACTOR. The term "subcontractor", as employed herein, includes those entities having a contract with the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor for performance of work on the Project. OWNER shall have no responsibility to any subcontractor for performance of work on the Project contemplated by these Contract Documents, and any such subcontractor shall look exclusively to CONTRACTOR for any payments due subcontractor. 1.04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person or by electronic means through the Pro-Trak to the individual or to a partner of the partnership or joint venture, or to an officer of the corporation or company for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, to the last known business address or registered office of such individual,partnership,joint venture or corporation or company, or to the address for giving notices listed in the Standard Form of Agreement. 1.05 WORK. Unless otherwise stipulated, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities or services of any nature whatsoever necessary for the execution and completion of the Work described in the Standard Form of Agreement. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well-known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. 1.06 EXTRA WORK. The term "Extra Work", as used in this Contract, shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER,to be performed by the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown in the plans. Extra work shall be authorized in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement. Extra Work items are paid for on an as needed, as authorized basis only. 1.07 WORK DAY: As used herein, a "Work Day" is defined as any Monday through Friday, not a legal holiday, and any Saturday or Sunday specifically approved by the OWNER, in which the CONTRACTOR can perform six or more hours of work per the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR agrees to request specific approval from the Construction Manager or 08-2018 00700-2 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner, in advance, to perform work on Saturdays or Sundays and in so doing agrees to pay all charges and costs for Inspection and or Construction Management services required during the performance of any such approved work. Refer to paragraph 7.04 for procedure to determine cost for Construction Management and Inspection Services for work on non-work days. 1.07-1 RAIN DAY: As used herein, is defined as any WORK DAY during which weather related conditions prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items as identified in the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record Rain Days on the Pay Application each month for the review and possible approval by the OWNER. The approved Rain Day is then added to the Contract Time. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) 1.07-2 IMPACT DAY: As used herein, is a day that is added to the CONTRACT TIME by the OWNER by Change Order to extend the Contract Time by one full Work Day. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) Impact Days, once approved by the OWNER, shall extend the Contract Time on a one-to-one basis to replace a Work Day lost to conditions that prevented the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items. Impact Days are added to the Contract Time by Change Order only at the end of the work and then only if, in the opinion of the OWNER, a time extension is warranted due to delays beyond the control of the Contractor and required to complete the work within the Contract Time. 1.08 CALENDAR DAY. A "calendar day" is any day of the week, month or year no days being excepted. Unless otherwise expressly provided, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 1 .09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED: The terms "Substantially Completed", or "Substantially Complete" or"Substantial Completion" as used in this Contract, shall mean that all major process components of the facility or work have been made suitable for use or occupancy, including appropriate documentation from the equipment suppliers that all of the individual components have been installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturer's recommendations,the installations have been approved by the ENGINEER and the items have met the start-up and testing requirements of the contract documents or is deemed to be in a condition to serve its intended purpose or requires only minor miscellaneous work and adjustment to achieve Final Completion and Acceptance as determined by the ENGINEER. Upon compliance with the above referenced criteria, ENGINEER shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: designation will be given on components of the Work that must be placed into service prior to the completion of the entire Work. The contractor's One Year Warranty period for these items shall begin on the date of Partial Substantial Completion as designated by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall determine and make all such designations. 1.10 INTERPRETATION OF WORDS AND PHRASES. Whenever the words "directed", "permitted", "designated", "required", "ordered", "considered necessary", "prescribed" or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, opinion designation or prescription of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative is intended. Similarly, the words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean that no exception is taken by ENGINEER, but does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 08-2018 00700-3 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Whenever in the Specifications or Plans of the Contract Documents, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words,terms or clauses defining the character of the work. 1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS. No provision of any referenced standard specification, or manual shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, or their consultants, employees,or representatives from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to the Engineer or its consultants, employees, or representatives any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.12 CONTRACT TIME The term Contract Time as used herein, refers to the number of Calendar days provided to complete the work or the date, stated in the Agreement: (i)to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with Paragraph 6.09 and as modified as a result of any authorized Extensions. The established Contract Time includes 40 Rain Days per year, based on the average number of rain days per year for the period of June 1898 to December 1996 as recorded by the Alvin Weather Center Record. The Contract Time shall only be extended by (a) the addition of Rain Days equal to the number of actual Rain Days in excess of 40 days per year and (b) the number of Impact Days granted for delays, in the opinion of the Owner, beyond the control of the Contractor. The extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for delays. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR The term "Construction Inspector" here in includes those professionals engaged by the OWNER to ensure CONTRACT work's compliance with the specifications and any applicable statutory requirements. 1.14 BALANCING CHANGE ORDER is a change order executed during the close-out process that may add/remove pay items, or adjust quantities of existing items or remove unused pay items or quantities Balancing Change Orders are used to reconcile the unit cost of the work performed or installed by the Contractor. 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 2.01 NO WARRANTY OF DESIGN. It is understood that the OWNER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY OR SUFFICIENCY OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR ANY OTHER DESIGN DOCUMENTS, AND OWNER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY SUCH WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. Prior to commencing each portion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the relevant Contract Documents, shall observe conditions at the site affecting the Work, and shall take field measurements of existing conditions related to the Work. Any errors, omissions or 08-2018 00700-4 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT inconsistencies in the Contract Documents noted by the CONTRACTOR, and/or any variance between the Contract Documents and applicable codes, standards or ordinances, shall be promptly reported by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER in writing as a Request for Information. Work performed prior to a Request for Information shall be at the Contractor's risk. If CONTRACTOR fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall pay such costs and damages to OWNER as would have been avoided if CONTRACTOR had reported any errors, omissions, inconsistencies or variances in the Contract Documents noted by CONTRACTOR or which should have been noted by a careful study of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations,thereto, as the same shall have been interpreted by the ENGINEER. 2.02 RIGHT OF ENTRY. The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the work herein contracted for is to be performed, constructed or installed, for itself or such agent or agents as it may select, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of performing, constructing or installing such collateral work as the OWNER may desire. The OWNER shall have the right to make inspections at all reasonable times, and the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claims for extension of time and/or compensation for any loss or damage if his work shall be delayed by reason of such inspection, performance, construction or installation of collateral work. 2.03 OWNERSHIP OF PLANS. All plans, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work and, with the exception of the sets forming the part of the signed Contract Documents, are to be returned to the OWNER on request at the completion of the Work. All plans and models are the property of the OWNER. 2.04 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations, additions and deletions as the OWNER may see fit, in the Work, including but not limited to changes in line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or specifications for the Work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of construction, without affecting the validity of this Contract and the corresponding Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations or deletions diminish the quantity or the value of the Work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for compensation or damages, including lost or anticipated profits on the Work that may be affected. If the amount of Work is increased and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this Contract, otherwise, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Article 7 hereof for Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any Work already done or material already furnished or used in said Work,then the OWNER shall compensate the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used and for any actual loss occasioned by such change due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the Work as originally planned. 2.05 DAMAGES. In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the 08-2018 00700-5 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 OWNER-ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP. The ENGINEER shall serve as the OWNER'S representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations on the authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents; and the ENGINEER shall not have authority to extend the OWNER's liability or to bind the OWNER for any additional liability of any nature whatsoever without the written consent of the OWNER. Any communications by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR regarding the Work shall be issued through the ENGINEER. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the Work; therefore, written decisions or directions rendered by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be resolved as provided in Article 7. Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the OWNER'S representative shall have the authority to issue written stop work orders whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with four(4) copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one full size copy of the same constantly accessible on the job site, with the latest revisions noted thereon. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preserving the Plans and Specifications, timely and accurately updated, for reference and review by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and submittal of redlines during closeout. 3.03 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL. The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the obligations imposed under this Contract for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of new material of good quality, and for good and workmanlike performance of the Work as herein described, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents, without alteration, deletion or change. No failure or omission of the OWNER'S representative to discover, object to or condemn any non-conforming or defective work or material, or to stop work, shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to fully and properly perform the Contract, including without limitation, the obligation to at once remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance, upon discovery of such non-conforming or defective work or material. Any questioned Work may be ordered taken up or removed for inspection by the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance, and if found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, all expense of removing, inspection and repair or replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR; otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the OWNER, provided that where inspection or approval is specifically required by the Specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the CONTRACTOR proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER. 08-2018 00700-6 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3.04 INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if such Work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical, functional /or engineering requirements of the Contract Documents, and is in all other respects being performed in compliance with the Contract Documents. However, the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality and/or quantity of the work, nor shall the ENGINEER be in any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident to the Work being performed or any part thereof. The ENGINEER shall use reasonable care to prevent deviation from the intent and substance of the Contract Documents by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work and any part thereof and, on the basis of such on-site observations, will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the CONTRACTOR. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any other Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the Work. 3.05 DETERMINATION OF QUESTIONS AND DISPUTES. In order to prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is agreed that the ENGINEER shall, in all cases, determine the quantities and qualities of the several kinds of Work, which are to be paid for under this Contract. The ENGINEER shall address all questions in relation to said Work and the construction thereof, as well as all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. In the event the ENGINEER shall become aware of or shall receive information that there is a dispute or a possible dispute as to the reasonable interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, or any other dispute or question, the ENGINEER shall, within a reasonable time, provide a written interpretation of the Contract Documents or a written decision on all questions arising relative to the execution of the Work, copies of which shall be delivered to all parties to the Contract. If the CONTRACTOR or OWNER desires to take exception to any directions, order, interpretation or instructions of the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR or OWNER shall present any such claim to the ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.07. 3.06 RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT. The ENGINEER shall review the CONTRACTOR's application for payment and supporting documents, shall determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and shall provide written recommendation to the OWNER for payment to the CONTRACTOR in such amount. Such recommendation of payment to CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation to the OWNER of the ENGINEER's judgment that the work has progressed to the point indicated, to the best of his knowledge, information and belief; however, such recommendation of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed an acceptance of any defective or non-conforming Work. Any recommendation of payment by the ENGINEER shall be subject to OWNER's rights to withhold payment under Section 6.12 and as otherwise provided in the Contract. 08-2018 00700-7 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is, and shall remain, an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing the Work under this Contract, with full and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the means, method and manner of performing such Work, so long as such methods comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and do not adversely affect the completed improvements or any other property abutting or adjoining the Work area, the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. The fact that the OWNER or ENGINEER as the Owner's representative shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER and the ENGINEER hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor with respect to either the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person, firm or corporation. 4.02 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, the general and local conditions, including but not limited to weather, access, lay down and storage areas, and all other matters which in any way affect the Work under this Contract. It is further understood that the CONTRACTOR has satisfied himself as to the terms, meaning, intent and requirements of all of the Contract Documents, and applicable laws, codes, regulations and ordinances. CONTRACTOR hereby warrants and represents that it has taken into consideration all of the foregoing factors, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4.03 LAWS AND ORDINANCES. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state or local laws, codes, ordinances, permits and regulations, regardless of whether the same are adopted before or after the execution of this Contract, which in any manner affect the Contract or the work, and shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER against any claim arising out of the violation of any such laws, ordinances and regulations, whether by the CONTRACTOR or his agents, employees, subcontractors or vendors. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Plans and Specifications are at variance with federal or state laws or codes or the ordinances or regulations of the City, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the CONTRACTOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, rules or regulations, or if CONTRACTOR reasonably should have known of any such violation, and without such notice to the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The OWNER is a Political Subdivision of the State of Texas, and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the OWNER may enter into contracts, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this Contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. Neither the act 08-2018 00700-8 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of OWNER entering into this Contract, nor OWNER's performance hereunder, shall constitute a waiver of any immunity from suit enjoyed by OWNER under applicable law, all such rights and defenses being hereby expressly reserved, notwithstanding any term or provision herein to the contrary. The Code of Ordinances and other applicable regulations of the OWNER shall be deemed to be embodied in this Contract. The prevailing wage rates applicable to this Project shall be either Document 00811 —Wage Scale for Engineering Construction, or Document 00813 —Wage Scale for Building Construction, or both, as set out in the Project Manual. 4.04 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and that he will not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, or sublet said Contract, or any rights, duties or obligations arising thereunder, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the OWNER, and that no part or feature of the Work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to disapprove the subletting of this Contract or any portion hereof on any basis whatsoever. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work or materials required in the performance of this Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to the OWNER, as provided for by this Agreement. 4.05 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND MAINTENANCE BONDS. In the event the Contract Price shall be in excess of $25,000.00, the CONTRACTOR shall execute separate Performance,Payment and Maintenance Bonds, each in the sum of one hundred percent(100%) of the Contract Price, and each in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. If the Contract Price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All required Bonds shall be payable to OWNER and on forms approved by the OWNER, and shall be executed by a corporate surety in accordance with Article 7.19-1 of the Texas Insurance Code. It is agreed that the Contract shall not be in effect until such original Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are delivered to and approved by the OWNER. The cost of the premium for the Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, should Maintenance Bonds be required, shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal. All bonds shall be issued by Texas Department of Insurance approved surety companies. 4.06 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall procure, maintain and keep in force throughout the duration of the Work, and throughout the Guarantee Period, insurance as specified in Attachment No. 1 hereto with regard to Workers' Compensation Insurance, and as specified in Attachment No. 3 hereto with regard to all other Insurance. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this Contract, whether performed by the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor, or others for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.07 PERMITS AND FEES. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, and which are legally required at the time bids are received. Permits required by the City of Pearland will be issued as a NO FEE permit. 4.08 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX. Materials incorporated into this project are exempt from State Sales according to provisions of the Texas Tax Code, Chapter 151, Subsection H. 08-2018 00700-9 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit or exemption certificate which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the Work without paying tax at due time of purchase. 4.09 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this Contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and shall act as the agent of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the CONTRACTOR is essential to the proper performance of the Work, and lack of such supervision shall be an act of default, and grounds for suspending operations of the CONTRACTOR. The Superintendent cannot be removed from the project without the consent of the Owner; the Superintendent must speak and understand the English language; the Superintendent must be on site when any work on the project is being done, even when a subcontractor is performing the work. The Work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative will be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or any of its agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 4.10 CHARACTER OF WORKERS. The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this Contract,to do the Work, and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the Work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or in the ENGINEER's opinion, are not using their best efforts for the progress of the Work, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the Work and shall not again be employed on the Work without the ENGINEER's written consent. OWNER reserves the right to bar any person, subcontractor, or supplier found to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or not using their best efforts to progress work or considered to be a threat to the health, safety and welfare to the project or workforce. 4.11 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, AND BUILDINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services, tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, facilities, utilities and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this Contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that the OWNER shall furnish same; and further, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation and protection of all materials, supplies,machinery,equipment,tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction and any and all parts of the Work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such Work, until the entire Work is completed and accepted. The building or placement of structures for housing workers or offices, or the erection of tents or other forms of protection, will be permitted only with the ENGINEER's written permission, and at 08-2018 00700- 10 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT such places as the ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Any structures of any nature constructed, placed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection, placement or construction thereof; and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER or OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, placement, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings or structures. 4.12 SANITATION.Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers and others on the Work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER, and their use shall be strictly enforced. Any structures of any nature constructed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection or construction thereof, and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER and OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings. 4.13 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep and maintain the premises free from accumulation of debris, trash and waste. The CONTRACTOR shall remove waste, debris and trash at the end of each work day. CONTRACTOR shall remove all such debris, trash and waste, tools, scaffolding and surplus materials, and shall leave the Work broom-clean or its equivalent, upon completion of the Work. The Work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute, the OWNER may remove the debris,trash,waste and surplus materials, and charge the cost to the CONTRACTOR. 4.14 PERFORMANCE OF WORK. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice for such materials furnished or work completed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15 RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCELERATE THE WORK. If at any time the methods or equipment used by the CONTRACTOR, or the work force supplied are found to be inadequate to achieve the progress required to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time, the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, may order the CONTRACTOR in writing to supplement its forces and/or equipment, or work shifts or overtime, or otherwise improve its efficiency and rate of progress to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with such order, at its own cost and expense. 4.16 LAYOUT OF WORK. Except as specifically provided herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out work by means of construction surveying and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 4.17 SHOP DRAWINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, six (6) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules 08-2018 00700- 11 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT required for the work of the various trades. Contractor will check and approve shop drawings for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and will so certify by stamp on each drawing prior to submittal to ENGINEER. Any drawings submitted without Contractor's stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to him for proper submission. The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, indicating desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents, unless he has, in writing, called the ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of the submission, and the ENGINEER has acknowledged and accepted such deviations in writing, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the Contract Time. Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the apparent sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the Contract Documents, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR's performance hereunder, and any action taken by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility and liability to comply with the Contract Documents. OWNER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals, review comments, notes, corrections, schedules and updates, testing results, payment applications, instructions and other communications by means of the OWNER'S Pro-Trak. The OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall each retain such hard copies form this system as are required for their specific record keeping requirements. No documents shall be removed from this system or destroyed except those being replaced by the systems protocols as a latest version document. All requirements for written communications, submittals, comments, instructions or other documents processed by means of this system shall have the same legal or time sensitive status as if they had been hand delivered in hard copy to their intended addressee. 4.18 ENGINEER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP; OBSERVATIONS. It is agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative, shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint such subordinate engineers, representatives or observers as the said ENGINEER may from time to time deem proper to observe the materials furnished and the Work done under this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, representatives or observers for the proper observation and examination of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, representatives or observers so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the CONTRACTOR object to any orders by any 08-2018 00700- 12 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subordinate engineer, representative or observer, the CONTRACTOR may, within three (3) days, make written appeal to the ENGINEER for his decision. 4.19 OBSERVATION AND TESTING. The OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe, inspect and test the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation, inspection and testing at any location wherever Work is in preparation or progress. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation, inspection or testing which may be contemplated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation, inspection or testing. The OWNER or the ENGINEER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such deficiencies, and regardless of whether the ENGINEER has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work is covered without approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for examination, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. In the event that any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for the OWNER or the ENGINEER to make observations of such Work or require testing of said Work, then in such event, the OWNER or the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by independent persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. If any Work, which is required to be inspected, tested or approved, is covered up without written approval or consent of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation and testing, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided herein. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of such tests, inspections or approval, and any Work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work and any other work affected thereby shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Neither observations by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER, nor inspections, certifications, tests or approvals made by the OWNER, the ENGINEER or other persons authorized under this Agreement to make such inspections, tests or approvals, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.20 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES. It is further agreed that if the Work or any part thereof or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such Work so that it shall be in full accordance with this Contract, It is further agreed that any such remedial action contemplated herein shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700- 13 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.21 LIABILITY FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE. Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional instructions and information concerning the Work to be performed, passing from or through the ENGINEER, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the CONTRACTOR to deviate from the Contract Documents, the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the agreement of the parties as to Work the CONTRACTOR is to perform. CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable and contractually bound, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use or non-use of all items and methods incident to the performance of the Contract, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, similar items or devices used by him during construction, and work performed either directly or incident to construction, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, whether such damage be suffered by the ENGINEER,the OWNER or any other person not a party to this Contract. Any review of Work in progress or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents by the ENGINEER or OWNER, or any agent, employee or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the Project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for construction or construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of Work completed or being performed, as measured against the Contract Documents, or for the purpose of enabling the CONTRACTOR to more fully understand the Contract Documents so that the completed construction Work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for proper performance of his Work on the Project, including, without limitation, the propriety of means and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said Contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Any action by the ENGINEER or the OWNER in visiting or observing during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver of CONTRACTOR'S liability for damages as herein set out. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents, whether called to the CONTRACTOR's attention or not, shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said Contract Documents, and further shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his liability for loss, damage or injury as herein set out. 4.22 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and persons entering the project site, as well as for the protection of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. The CONTRACTOR shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the Work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded, as a minimum, in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, barricades, fences,traffic control, warning signs and other safety devices. 08-2018 00700- 14 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT No alcoholic beverages, non-prescription drugs, or unsafe practices shall be allowed on the Work site. CONTRACTOR shall dismiss anyone participating in any of the above from the Work site for the duration of the Project. Only prescription drug uses with a doctor's authorization to perform construction activities shall be allowed on the Work site. Violation of this provision is a default under the Contract. The use, possession, sale, transfer, purchase or being under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other illegal or unlawful substance by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees, or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors and employees at any time at the Work site or while on company business is prohibited. CONTRACTOR shall institute and enforce appropriate drug testing guidelines and program. All accidents or injuries to CONTRACTOR's employees working on the job site must be reported verbally and in writing to the ENGINEER immediately, and within no more than eight(8)hours. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, in his sole discretion as an independent contractor. Inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative concerning omissions under thus paragraph as the Work progresses, are intended as reminders to the CONTRACTOR of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty by ENGINEER, or OWNER's representative to supervise safety precautions by either the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors. 4.23 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY. The CONTRACTOR shall employ proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent or adjoining property. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OWNER AND ENGINEER AGAINST ANY CLAIM OR CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, LOSS, COSTS OR EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY'S FEES, DUE TO ANY INJURY TO ANY ADJACENT OR ADJOINING PROPERTY, ARISING OR GROWING OUT OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE, LOSS, COST OR EXPENSE IS CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER AND/OR ENGINEER. 4.24 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE WILL PROMPTLY PAY WHEN DUE, AND WILL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ALL CLAIMS GROWING OUT OF THE DEMANDS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, WORKERS, MECHANICS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY AND PARTS THEREOF, EQUIPMENT, POWER TOOLS AND ALL SUPPLIES, INCLUDING COMMISSARY, INCURRED IN THE FURTHERANCE OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT. When so desired by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, then the OWNER may, at the option of the OWNER, either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably 08-2018 00700- 15 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT sufficient to liquidate any and all such claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this Contract. Any and all communications between any parties under this paragraph shall be in writing. Nothing contained in this paragraph or this Agreement shall create, establish or impose any relationship, contractual or otherwise,between OWNER and any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create, establish or impose any duty upon OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR. 4.25 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright, by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner thereof THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND ALL SUITS OR CLAIMS FOR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND SHALL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF, EXCEPT SUCH SUITS AND CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF A PARTICULAR DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS OR THE PRODUCT OF A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF CHOICE OF ALTERNATE DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS IS ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR, OR IF CONTRACTOR KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND FAILED TO PROMPTLY NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING, THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF. 4.26 INDEMNIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER MADE BY ANY EMPLOYEE, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OF CONTRACTOR, OR BY ANY UNION, TRADE ASSOCIATION, WORKER'S ASSOCIATION OR OTHER GROUPS, ASSOCIATIONS OR INDIVIDUALS, ALLEGEDLY REPRESENTING EMPLOYEES OF THE CONTRACTOR, IN ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY INVOLVING, GROWING OUT OF OR ARISING FROM CLAIMS BY SUCH EMPLOYEES FOR WAGES, SALARY, COMPENSATION, BENEFITS, WORKING CONDITIONS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR COMPLAINT OR CLAIM WHICH MAY BE MADE. THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SURETIES AND INSURANCE CARRIERS SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES FROM AND AGAINST ALL DAMAGES, CLAIMS, LOSSES, DEMANDS, SUITS, LIABILITIES, JUDGMENTS AND COSTS OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY'S FEES AND EXPENSES, AND SHALL BE REQUIRED TO PAY ANY JUDGMENT THEREFOR, WITH COSTS, WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED AGAINST THE OWNER AND/OR THE ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM OR ALLEGEDLY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE 08-2018 00700- 16 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH DAMAGES, CLAIM, LOSS, DEMAND, SUIT, LIABILITY,JUDGMENT, COST OR EXPENSE: (A) ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR ALLEGEDLY ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY BY CONTRACTOR; OR (B) IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE OR DEATH OR INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR IS ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY ONE OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT IT IS CAUSED IN PART OR ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER, ENGINEER AND/OR A PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in the Agreement to the contrary, in accordance with the provisions of Section 130.002 of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, CONTRACTOR shall not be obligated to indemnify or hold harmless the ENGINEER, his agents, servants or employees, from liability for damage that is caused by or results from defects in plans, designs or specifications prepared, approved or used by the ENGINEER, or negligence of the ENGINEER in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of any construction contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the construction contract, and arises from personal injury or death, property injury, or any other expense that arises from personal injury,death, or property injury. This indemnity agreement is a continuing obligation, and shall survive notwithstanding completion of the Work, Final Payment, expiration of the warranty period, termination of the Contract, and abandonment or takeover of the Work. CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations hereunder shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts, and shall not be limited by any limitation on amounts or coverage of insurance provided or to be provided under this Contract. 4.27 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES. All loss, cost, expense or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from any unforeseen circumstances in the prosecution of the same, or from the action of the elements, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. 08-2018 00700- 17 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.28 GUARANTEE. The CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees all the Work under the Contract to be free from defects or deficiencies in material in every particular and free from defects or deficiencies in workmanship; and against unusual damage from proper and usual use; and agrees to replace or to re-execute without cost to the OWNER such Work as may be found to be defective, deficient or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, and to make good all damages caused to other work or material, due to such defective Work or due to its required replacement or re-execution. This guarantee shall cover a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion of Work under the Contract, as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for defective, deficient or non-conforming material or workmanship during the period covered by the guarantee. The one-year period of guarantee will not limit the OWNER'S other rights under common law with respect to any defects, deficiencies or non-conforming Work discovered after one year. If this one-year guarantee conflicts with other warranties or guarantees,the longer period of warranty or guarantee will govern. 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION. It is the meaning and intent of this Contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his Work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the Work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Time; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either by contract or by his own forces, the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the Work done under this Contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized, and the CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate and coordinate its Work with OWNER or such other contractors. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, an updated schedule with every pay estimate for review by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, with dates on which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. Such schedules shall show completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and/or shall show such recovery efforts as CONTRACTOR intends to undertake in the event Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed. 5.02 EXTENSION OF TIME. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he has submitted his Bid Proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this Project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions as hereinafter set forth, and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this Contract, except when Substantial Completion of the Work has been delayed solely by strikes, lockouts, fires, Acts of God, or by any other cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies the delay. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice, in writing and within three (3) days of the start of any such delay, of the cause of any such delay, and its estimated effect on the Work and the schedule for completion of the Work. Upon receipt of a written request for an extension of the Contract Time from the CONTRACTOR, supported by relevant and all requested documentation, the ENGINEER shall submit such written request, together with his written recommendation, to the 08-2018 00700- 18 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OWNER for consideration. If the delay is not attributable in whole or in part to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or suppliers, and if the OWNER determines that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the terms of the Contract, the OWNER shall grant an extension of time for Substantial Completion of the Work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, and such extension of time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy, except as may be otherwise provided herein. No extensions of Contract Time shall be made for delays occurring prior to the Contractor's mobilization as defined in Section 01505 MOBILIZATION. The Contract Time as defined in the Bid Proposal and other sections herein incorporates 40 Rain Days per calendar year or an average of 3.33 days per calendar month. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep record of all weather related delays and to submit the monthly count on each Pay Application. The Owner's Representative shall review and sign off on this record as a part of the Pay Application approval process every month. If, during preparation of the Balancing Change Order, the status of the work progress requires an extension of the Contract Time, Impact Days shall be added to the Completion Date equal to the total number of Weather or Impact Days approved less the original 40 days resident in the original Contract Time. The Addition of Weather or Impact Days will only alter the Contract Time when added by Change Order. If the Work is completed prior to the Completion Date, No Days will be added. The addition of Weather or Impact Days shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole remedy for delays to the completion of the Work and their addition to the Contract Time shall not affect the Contract Price through any"per diem" adjustment to the General Conditions costs, Temporary Facilities costs or any other costs associated with the extension of the Contract Time. 5.03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS. In executing the Contract, the CONTRACTOR agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all interference, disruption, hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material, workmen or otherwise. No claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages, loss, costs or expense resulting from interference, disruption,hindrances or delays from any cause during the progress of any portion of the Work embraced in this Contract, except where the Work is stopped or suspended by order of the OWNER's representative and such stoppage or suspension is not attributable to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR. 5.04 SUSPENSION OF WORK. OWNER may, without cause, order the CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such period of time as OWNER may request. The Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be adjusted for any increase in the cost of or the time required for performance of the Work caused by such suspension. No adjustment shall be made to the extent performance was or would have been suspended by a cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible, or to the extent an adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. 5.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY: It is understood and agreed that time is of the essence, and that the CONTRACTOR will commence the Work on the date specified herein or in any Notice to Proceed, and will Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the time for the Substantial Completion of the Work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that a failure to complete on time will cause damage to the OWNER and that such damages 08-2018 00700- 19 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT cannot be accurately measured or that ascertainment will be difficult. Therefore, the parties agree that for each and every calendar day the Work or any portion thereof shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall pay, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable estimate of OWNER's damages, and not as a penalty, the amount set out in the Standard Form of Agreement. However, the foregoing agreement as to liquidated damages constitutes only an agreement by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as to the amount of damages which the OWNER will sustain by reason of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to complete the work within the Contract Time. Should the OWNER suffer damage by reason of any other breach by CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may recover such actual damages in addition to any liquidated damages due. The OWNER shall have the right to deduct and withhold the amount of any and all such damages whether it be the minimum amount stipulated above or otherwise, from any monies owing by it to said CONTRACTOR, or the OWNER may recover such amount from the CONTRACTOR and the sureties of his bond; all of such remedies shall be cumulative and the OWNER shall not be required to elect any one nor be deemed to have made an election by proceeding to enforce any one remedy. 5.06 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME: The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment of Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making such claim to the other party and to the ENGINEER promptly, but in no event later than ten(10) days after the event-giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim, along with supporting data, shall be delivered within thirty (30) days of the occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written representation that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Contractor shall submit, as a minimum,the following data: A. Information showing that the time requested is not included in the existing Contract and in addition to the Contract. B. Information documenting that the number of days requested is accurate for the event. C. Revised, current construction schedule showing that the time requested affects the project's critical path. 5.07 DELAYS BEYOND OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL: Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delays beyond the control of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time in an amount equal to the time lost. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Price as a result of such delays. IN NO EVENT SHALL OWNER BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM (i) Delays caused by, or within the control of, the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) Delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, even if such delays are due in part to the negligence, other fault, breach of contract or warranty, violation of the Texas Deceptive Trade Act, or strict liability without regard 08-2018 00700-20 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT to fault of OWNER. An extension of Contract time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for any such delays. Delays attributed to, and within the control of, a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the CONTRACTOR. 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. If the CONTRACTOR knows or reasonably should have known of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the ENGINEER and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the ENGINEER prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the CONTRACTOR fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Bid Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five(5)days prior to the opening of bids. 6.02 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, volume, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. 6.03 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES. This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, and including any estimates contained therein, is intended to convey all Work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of Work to be done and material to be furnished under this Contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the Bid Proposals offered for the Work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of Work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this Contract may differ from the estimates and that the items listed or estimated quantities stated, and/or any difference between estimated and actual Work, shall not give rise to a claim by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER for loss, cost, expense,damages, unit price adjustment, quantity differences, unrecovered overhead or lost or anticipated profits, or other compensation. 6.04 PRICE OF WORK. It is agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work described in the Bid Proposal, and Contract Documents, is to be done for the prices bid by the CONTRACTOR and that such prices shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents as interpreted by the ENGINEER, and all costs, expenses, bond and insurance premiums, taxes, overhead, and profit. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all Work by the CONTRACTOR, and upon the completion of all Work and the delivery of all materials embraced in this Contract in full conformity with the Contract Documents, the OWNER agrees to pay to the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the Contract is a unit cost agreement, unless stated otherwise, and that the final Contract amount is equal to the unit cost multiplied by the number of units authorized, installed and approved by the Owner. The OWNER does not assume any obligation to pay for any services or material not actually authorized and used. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices as payment in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid Work, and for all expenses incurred by him, and for full performance of the Work and the whole thereof in the 08-2018 00700-21 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT manner and according to this Agreement, Contract Documents, and the requirements of the ENGINEER. 6.05 PAYMENTS. No payments made or approvals or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Contract, either in whole or in part, nor shall any certificate, approval or payment be considered as acceptance of defective, deficient or non-conforming Work. CONTRACTOR shall, at any time requested during the progress of the Work, furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with an affidavit showing the CONTRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before Final Payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no unpaid claims due subcontractors, suppliers or laborers by reason of any Work under the Contract. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims of whatsoever nature against OWNER, arising out of or related to the Contract, or the Work, or any acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this Contract. 6.06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. When the Contract Price is a lump sum amount, prior to the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review and approval a Schedule of Values, which shall fairly allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work and shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. The Schedule of Values shall follow the trade divisions of the Specifications so far as practicable. Upon approval, this Schedule of Values shall be used by ENGINEER as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Application for Payment. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. On or before the tenth day of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER, for approval or correction, an application for partial payment, being a statement showing as completely as practicable, the agreed unit quantities and extended total value of the Work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all conforming materials to be fabricated into the Work and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER at the Work site only.No payment will be made for materials stored until OWNER has approved in writing storage at the Work site. The ENGINEER shall then review such statement of unit quantities and application for partial payment and the progress of the Work made by the CONTRACTOR and, within ten days after the date ENGINEER receives CONTRACTOR's application for payment, if the application is found to be accurate and correct and the WORK conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall certify the application for partial payment and shall deliver his preliminary certification for payment to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR; or, if the ENGINEER finds that CONTRACTOR's application for payment contains an error or is otherwise disputed, he shall notify CONTRACTOR of such error or dispute, and shall prepare a preliminary certificate for partial payment for the undisputed amount of the application for payment due CONTRACTOR, and deliver it to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER'S notice to CONTRACTOR that a bona fide dispute for payment exists shall include a list of the specific reasons for nonpayment. All payment applications made by CONTRACTOR and delivered to ENGINEER and all verifications and certification of such applications shall be made and transmitted within the Pro- Trak system and signed with the appropriate electronic signatures as provided for in the software. Such applications for payment shall not be considered complete unless accompanied by the 08-2018 00700-22 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR'S Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit, Section 00615, duly executed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR and reflecting the correct corresponding amount of the payment application. The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR, within thirty (30) days of the date of ENGINEER's receipt of the application for payment, the undisputed balance due, less applicable retainage, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained or withheld by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR may submit a corrected application for payment after its receipt of the ENGINEER's notice of error or dispute, and such corrected application for payment shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER and disputed or paid under the same procedure and within the same time limits set out above. As a condition of any progress payment under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to ENGINEER and OWNER a full release of all claims, direct or indirect, at law or in equity, arising out of or related to the Work to date, excluding retainage or any claims previously submitted as required under the terms of the Contract, and specifically identified and excluded by CONTRACTOR in the release. OWNER shall be entitled to retain from each progress payment five percent (5%) of the amount thereof. Such retainage shall be retained until Final Completion and satisfaction of all conditions for Final Payment. It is understood, however, that in case the whole Work be near to completion, as certified by the ENGINEER, and some unexpected or unusual delay occurs, through no neglect or fault on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may, upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work, and thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive, at the OWNER'S option, payment of the balance due him under the Contract for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to OWNER's rights to otherwise withhold or retain payments, and subject to the conditions set forth under"6.09 FINAL PAYMENT." The Owner at its option and in compliance with Texas law may reduce retainage to less than the above-stated percentages. 6.07 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS & PUNCHLIST. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired; but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within three (3) days of OWNER's taking possession, give OWNER written notice of same, and CONTRACTOR may be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as may be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 6.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER AND ENGINEER, by letter executed by a duly qualified officer of CONTRACTOR that in CONTRACTOR's opinion, the Work of the Contract, or an agreed portion thereof, is "Substantially Complete". Such notification shall include a list of all outstanding or incomplete items. Upon receipt, and within a reasonable time thereafter, of such notice, the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall jointly perform a walk-through and inspection of the Work to determine the status of all or the identified portion of the work, and the ENGINEER shall prepare a detailed 08-2018 00700-23 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT list of unfinished, incomplete, defective and/or non-conforming Work ("Punchlist"). If the ENGINEER determines that the Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after receipt of Certificate to make written objection to the ENGINEER as to any provision of the Certificate or the attached list of non-conforming work. If ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not Substantially Complete, ENGINEER will, within fourteen (14) days, notify CONTRACTOR of the reason he believes the Work is not Substantially Complete. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities, pending final payment and acceptance, with respect to security, maintenance, utilities and damage to the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. NEITHER THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK, NOR THE OMISSION OF AN ITEM FROM THE PUNCHLIST, SHALL EXCUSE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING ALL OF THE WORK UNDERTAKEN, WHETHER OF A MINOR OR MAJOR NATURE, AND THEREBY COMPLETING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the time period within which CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work for Final Acceptance by the Owner and ENGINEER. 6.08-1 OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, for security requirement reasons. OWNER may establish an access procedure to facilitate CONTRACTOR's uninterrupted access to the Work for the purposes of completing and correcting all items on the Punchlist in an expeditious manner. 6.09 FINAL PAYMENT. Final payment of the Retainage withheld from the Contract Price shall be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR at such time as: (a) the Work, including all Change Orders and including all Punchlist work, has been fully completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents; (b) the Contract has been fully performed except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work during the warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; (c) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER; (d) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Consent of Surety, if any,to final payment; (e) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a complete set of As-Built Drawings, reflecting all deviations from the Plans, Specifications and approved shop drawings in the Work actually constructed, and delivers all maintenance and operating manuals and/or instructions; 08-2018 00700-24 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (f) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all building certificates required prior to occupancy and all other required inspections/approvals/acceptances by city, county, state governmental entities or other authorities having jurisdiction; (g) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER assignments of all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or manufacturers, as well as names, addresses and telephone numbers of contacts for each subcontractor,vendor, supplier or manufacturer; (h) CONTRACTOR removes all equipment,tools,temporary facilities, surplus materials and rubbish from the site, and final cleans the site to OWNER's satisfaction; (i) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Full and Final Release and Affidavit of Bills Paid in the form attached hereto as Attachment No. 2, executed by CONTRACTOR; (j) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all other documentation required to be submitted to OWNER pursuant to the Contract Documents, including but not limited to any special guarantees or warranties, operation and maintenance manuals, etc'. in each case in a form satisfactory to OWNER as determined in OWNER's sole discretion; and (k) The Final Application for Payment has been approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Acceptance of Final Payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than any claims previously made in writing by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, and still unsettled, and except for claims arising out of third party actions, cross-claims and counterclaims. No interest shall be due or payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR on any sums retained or withheld by OWNER pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract Documents, except as otherwise provided by applicable law. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion nor the Final Payment nor possession or acceptance of the Work shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of its obligation for correction of defective or non- conforming Work, or for fulfillment of any warranty, which may be required by law or by the Contract Documents. 6.10 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT. The CON TRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials, equipment or Work which is defective or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not, and CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, promptly replace such materials, equipment or Work with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of CONTRACTOR or other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such unsuitable Work within ten (10) business days after receipt of a written notice from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, the OWNER may remove,replace and remedy such work at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700-25 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.11 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT. If within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost, correct it and any other work affected thereby promptly after receipt of a written notice from OWNER to do so. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to building contents, when such damage results from the CONTRACTOR's use of faulty materials or defective workmanship; to the extent such damage is not covered by OWNER's insurance. This warranty period shall renew and recommence for each corrected item of Work upon completion of the remedial work. This time period for correction by CONTRACTOR is in addition to, and not in lieu of, all warranties or remedies, which exist at common law or by statute. These warranty obligations shall survive the termination of this Contract, and shall be enforceable by a decree of specific performance, in addition to such other rights and remedies available to OWNER at law or in equity. 6.12 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The OWNER may withhold, or on account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify and demand immediate repayment of, the whole or part of any certificate for payment or payment, to such extent as may be necessary to protect OWNER from loss on account of: (a) Defective or non-conforming Work not remedied; (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims; (c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for material or labor; (d) Damage to another contractor, OWNER, existing improvements on the site, or to adjacent or adjoining property; (e) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract amount; (f) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; (g) Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute any and all documents, releases or other documents presented to the CONTRACTOR for execution, as provided for herein or otherwise; (h) Liquidated or other damages due to late completion; and/or (i) Any breach by CONTRACTOR of this Contract or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. When the above grounds are removed to OWNER's satisfaction,the withheld payment shall be made promptly. If the said causes are not so remedied, OWNER may remedy the same for CONTRACTOR's account, charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR and deduct such cost 08-2018 00700-26 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT from the Contract Sum or from any payments due or to become due under any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6.13 DELAYED PAYMENTS. Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR when payment is due in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, any interest due CONTRACTOR for late payments shall accrue and be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and payment of such interest shall fully liquidate and compensate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. Should OWNER fail to pay CONTRACTOR an undisputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, CONTRACTOR shall give the notice required and comply with the provisions of Section 2251.051 of the Texas Government Code,and shall thereupon be entitled to the rights and remedies provided therein. 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7.01 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS. During the progress of the work, if subsurface, latent physical conditions or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the contract or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract,the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER's Representative in writing within three(3)calendar days of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. (a)Upon written notification,the ENGINEER will investigate the conditions, and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits,will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the CONTRACTOR will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has provided the required written notice. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. 7.02 SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended by the ENGINEER in writing for seven(7)calendar days and the CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension,the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request for adjustment to the ENGINEER within seven(7)calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. (a)Upon receipt,the ENGINEER will evaluate the CONTRACTOR's request. If the ENGINEER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the CONTRACTOR, its suppliers, or subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather,the ENGINEER will make an adjustment(excluding profit)and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the ENGINEER's determination, in writing,whether or 08-2018 00700-27 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. 7.03 CHANGE ORDERS. Without invalidating this Agreement,the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time,order additions, deletions or revisions to the Work; such changes will be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in Contract Price, as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work, and any change in Contract Time,which may result from the change. 7.04 In accordance with paragraph 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S request to work weekends, the Owner's Construction Manager shall, upon receipt of written notice by the CONTRACTOR of the need to conduct work on otherwise non-Work Days, prepare a cost estimate for providing Construction Management and Inspection services during the requested period and submit this to both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If approved by both parties the Construction Manager shall prepare a Deductive Change Order in the amount stated in the estimate for the signature of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER for inclusion in the next Pay Application. The Deductive Change Order must be signed and executed by both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR prior to start of work on any non-Work Day. 7.05 MINOR CHANGES. The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the Work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price or time. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor changes authorized by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work or entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall give notice of same by written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order, with a copy to OWNER. Any such notice and request by the CONTRACTOR shall be given prior to beginning the changed work. CONTRACTOR's commencement of any minor change in the Work prior to such written notice and request shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims for an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time arising out of or related to such changed work. 7.06 EXTRA WORK. It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall perform all work when presented with a written Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order signed by the ENGINEER, subject, however, to the right of the CONTRACTOR to require written confirmation of such Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order by the OWNER. It is agreed that the basis of compensation or adjustment to the CONTRACTOR for work either altered, added or deleted by a Change Order or Work Change Directive, or for which a claim for Extra Work is made, shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method(A)--By Contract unit prices applicable to the work, if any; or Method(B)--By agreed unit prices or agreed stipulated lump sum price; or 08-2018 00700-28 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Method(C)--If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) can be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced, then the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the "Actual Field Cost" of the work plus: a) For subcontractors performing work mark-up shall be limited to fifteen percent, ten (10%) for the subcontractor plus five (5%) for the General Contractor or b)For the General Contractor alone, self-performing the extra work, without subcontractor, the mark-up shall not exceed ten percent (10%), as full and final compensation for the Extra Work and all costs and expenses, direct or indirect, arising out of or related thereto. In the event said Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work is performed and paid for under Method(C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "Actual Field Cost" is hereby defined as the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals of machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, plus all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by law or ordinance, or the Contract Documents,plus all payments to subcontractors for such work. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the "Actual Field Cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100%), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America where practicable. The mark-up of the "Actual Field Cost" to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "Actual Field Cost" as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR's field office must be maintained solely on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "Actual Field Cost." No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered by the ENGINEER in a written Work Order. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the Contract Time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order authorizing such Extra Work within ten (10) days of ENGINEER's orders or instructions, otherwise the orders or instructions will be considered minor changes. The issuance of a Work Order by the ENGINEER shall not constitute or be construed as an agreement or acknowledgement by the ENGINEER that the work which is the subject of the Work Order is Extra Work outside the scope of the Contract Work, but shall merely constitute a direction to the 08-2018 00700-29 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR to perform the work, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work, and shall keep an accurate account of the "Actual Field Cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). Upon completion of the alleged Extra Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within ten (10) days submit his claim to the ENGINEER by proper certification and attestation, on forms provided by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall render a written decision on CONTRACTOR's claim within ten (10) days. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. If the ENGINEER shall fail to respond in writing to CONTRACTOR's claim within thirty (30) days of the date of submission, or if CONTRACTOR shall dispute or object to ENGINEER's decision on any claim, and CONTRACTOR fails to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0, within sixty(60) days after the date of submission to the ENGINEER, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, the CONTRACTOR shall lose and forfeit his right to make such claim for Extra Work at any later date, and all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed waived, forfeited and forever barred. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 7.07 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS. Except as otherwise provided herein, all questions of dispute or adjustment shall be made within the Pro-Trak system and filed with the ENGINEER within three (3) days after the ENGINEER has given any directions, order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception. The ENGINEER shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions, and render his final decision in writing. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. In case the CONTRACTOR should desire to appeal from the ENGINEER's decision, the CONTRACTOR may request a meeting between representatives of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the purposes of appealing the ENGINEER's decision directly to the OWNER, such meeting to occur within ten (10) days after the date of the CONTRACTOR's request, or such longer period as may be agreed to by the parties in writing. If the CONTRACTOR shall still be aggrieved after a meeting with the OWNER and/or his representative, the CONTRACTOR shall have sixty (60) days after the date of the meeting, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0. In the event the CONTRACTOR shall fail, for any reason, to timely file a Request for Mediation,the OWNER shall be released of any and all liability, and the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely file a Request for Mediation shall constitute a waiver, forfeit and final bar of all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 8.0 DEFAULT 8.01 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume Work within five (5) days after written notification from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, or if the CONTRACTOR otherwise defaults on its obligations under the Contract, OWNER shall have the right, if it so elects and 08-2018 00700-30 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT without prejudice to any other rights it may have, after giving five (5) days written notice of default to CONTRACTOR and any surety, to terminate the Contract or any part thereof and/or to take over or cause others to take over the Work or any part thereof, and to complete such Work for the account of CONTRACTOR. Where Performance and Payment Bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be directed to complete the Work in conjunction with the notice of default, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. After receiving said notice of default,the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within no more than three (3) days, remove from the Work any machinery, equipment, or tools then on the job, not intended for incorporation into the Work. Should CONTRACTOR fail to promptly remove such machinery, equipment or tools, OWNER may remove such machinery, equipment or tools and store same at CONTRACTOR's expense; return such machinery, equipment or tools to their purported owner; or otherwise dispose of such machinery, equipment or tools as OWNER sees fit. Any materials, supplies and/or equipment delivered for use in the Work, may be used in the completion of the Work by the OWNER or the surety on the Performance Bond, or another contractor in completion of the Work; it being understood that the use of such equipment, supplies and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the Work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no Performance Bond or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinabove provided for within ten (10) days after the service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the Work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The OWNER may thereupon employ such force of workers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the OWNER may deem necessary to expeditiously complete the Work, and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall be credited with the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by such CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER upon demand; or (b) The OWNER, under sealed bids, under the times and procedures provided for by law, may let the contract for completion of the Work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this Contract. In case of any increase in cost to the OWNER under the completion contract, as compared to what would have been the cost under this Contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR, and the amount of such increase may be deducted by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such increase to the OWNER 08-2018 00700-31 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT upon demand. However, should the cost to complete any such completion contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this Contract,the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. In the event of a default by CONTRACTOR, no further payments shall be made to CONTRACTOR under the Contract until the Work is Finally Completed. When the Work shall have been Finally Completed,the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be so notified. A complete itemized statement of the Contract accounts, certified by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement. The OWNER, prior to incurring an obligation to make payment hereunder, shall have such statement of completion attested to by the CONTRACTOR and the surety as accurate, and in exchange for payment of the sum stated therein, the OWNER shall be entitled to a full and final release of any claims or demands by the CONTRACTOR or the surety. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this Contract, or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools or supplies left on the site of the Work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety. Should the cost to complete the Work exceed the Contract Price, and the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated above, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies which are the property of CONTRACTOR on the site of the Work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his surety at the respective addresses designated in the Contract, provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his surety, subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of such notice, the OWNER may sell such property, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, which remain on the Work, and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his surety, to their reputed owners. 8.02 SUPPLEMENTATION OF CONTRACTOR FORCES. If CONTRACTOR at any time shall, in OWNER'S sole opinion, fail to furnish skilled workers, suitable materials, supplies or adequate equipment sufficient for the prompt, timely and diligent prosecution of the Work in accordance with OWNER's direction, OWNER shall have the right, without prejudice to the exercise of other remedies for the same default and without fully taking over the Work, to supplement CONTRACTOR's forces and to expedite delivery of and to procure and furnish such workers, materials, tools, supplies or equipment for CONTRACTOR's account by employing other contractors and suppliers engaged in the same class of work and charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR, said cost to be deducted from sums due or to become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER or any parent, subsidiary or affiliate of OWNER. 08-2018 00700-32 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.03 CUMULATIVE REMEDIES & SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE. All rights and remedies of OWNER, under the terms of the Contract and/or available at law or in equity, are cumulative. In the event CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors, vendors or suppliers fails or refuses for any reason to provide timely manufacture, fabrication, delivery, installation, erection, construction or completion of any supplies, materials, expendables, equipment, machinery, accessories or appurtenances to be furnished hereunder, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that such items are required, necessary, essentially unique to the Project and the Work and will cause irreparable harm to OWNER and the Project if not furnished in accordance with the Contract, and OWNER shall have the right to obtain a decree of specific performance and mandatory injunctive relief from any Court of competent jurisdiction to ensure the timely furnishing of such items. 8.04 CROSS-DEFAULT. If, for any reason, CONTRACTOR is declared in default and/or terminated by OWNER under any other agreement with OWNER, whether related to the Project or not related to the Project, OWNER shall have the right to offset and apply any amounts which might be owed to OWNER by CONTRACTOR under any other such agreements against any earned but unpaid amounts owing to CONTRACTOR by OWNER under the Contract, any retainage earned by CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any unearned, unpaid amount under the Contract. 8.05 INSOLVENCY. It is recognized that if CONTRACTOR becomes a debtor in voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy proceedings, makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, such events could seriously impair or frustrate CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Accordingly, it is agreed that should CONTRACTOR become a debtor in bankruptcy, either voluntary or involuntary, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of the filing with the bankruptcy court. Further, it is agreed that upon occurrence of any one or more such events, OWNER shall be entitled to request of CONTRACTOR or its successors, trustees or receivers, adequate assurances of future performance. In the event such adequate assurances are not given to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER within seventy-two (72) hours of such request, OWNER shall have the right to immediately invoke the remedies of this Section 8 or as provided by law. Pending receipt of such adequate assurances of such future performance, OWNER may proceed with the Work on a temporary basis and deduct the costs, plus reasonable overhead and profit, from any amounts due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER. In this regard, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that delays in performance could result in more damages to CONTRACTOR than would be sustained if OWNER failed to exercise such remedies. 8.06 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT. CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to OWNER, all of CONTRACTOR's rights under and interest in any and all subcontracts and/or purchase orders entered into by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement, such assignment to become effective upon CONTRACTOR's default under this Agreement or OWNER's termination of this Contract, and OWNER's acceptance of such assignment. Upon CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of this Contract, OWNER may, in the event there is no performance bond for the Contract, or in the event the performance bond surety fails to complete the Contract, or if OWNER otherwise so elects in its sole discretion, accept such assignment by written notice of such acceptance to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor, and may require subcontractors to perform all of the then unperformed duties and obligations under the subcontract, for the direct benefit of OWNER. In the event OWNER requires such performance by a subcontractor, then OWNER 08-2018 00700-33 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT shall be obligated to pay such subcontractor any amounts due and owing under the terms of the subcontract/purchase order, at the subcontract prices and rates, and subject to any rights of withholding or offset and other terms and conditions of the subcontract, for all work properly performed by such subcontractor, to the date of OWNER's acceptance and thereafter. OWNER's liability in this connection, however, shall not exceed the amount obtained by subtracting all payments made by CONTRACTOR to subcontractor from the Subcontract Price at the time of CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall include a provision in its subcontracts that allows such assignment and allows OWNER to take these actions, and further provides that in the event of CONTRACTOR's termination for default, the subcontractor agrees to give the OWNER or its agent the right to inspect all books and records of subcontractor relating to the Work. 8.07 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. CONTRACTOR expressly waives any and all claims for consequential damages against OWNER arising out of or related to this Contract, or any other agreements between CONTRACTOR and OWNER, including, but not limited to, claims for damages incurred by CONTRACTOR for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there, losses of financing, bonding capacity, business and reputation, and claims for lost profit, whether on this Contract or otherwise. 8.08 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. OWNER may at its sole discretion, upon five (5) days written notice to CONTRACTOR, terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, if and when OWNER determines that it is in the best interest of OWNER to do so. Upon receipt of such written notice from OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall cease all terminated Work and take reasonable precautions to protect and preserve such work, and shall take all reasonable measures after consultation with OWNER to terminate or assign to OWNER all subcontracts, purchase orders or other commitments related to the Work or the Project on terms and conditions acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be paid for all Work performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, based upon the Contract Price and the percentage of completion on the date of termination, and less amounts previously paid, subject to any reasonable backcharges attributable to CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Contract and further subject to the other terms of this Contract regarding payment. In no event will CONTRACTOR receive or be entitled to any payment or compensation whatsoever for interruption of business or loss of business opportunities, any other items of consequential damages, for overhead or loss of profits on the unperformed Work and/or services and unfurnished materials or for any intangible, impact or similarly described cost, damages or expense, and under no circumstances shall the total sum paid to or received by CONTRACTOR under this Contract exceed the Contract Price. The compensation provided herein shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy arising out of a termination for convenience. 8.09 DEFAULT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall default on its material obligations under this Contract, other than OWNER's failure to pay CONTRACTOR a disputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, as addressed by Section 6.13 of this Agreement, and shall fail or refuse to cure, or to commence and diligently pursue cure of such default within fifteen (15) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the Work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of the Work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR and have not been incorporated into the Work. And thereupon, the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR, which estimate shall include the value of all Work actually completed by 08-2018 00700-34 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT said CONTRACTOR (at the Contract Prices), the value of all partially completed Work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this Contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole Work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement, and shall present the same to the OWNER, and OWNER's payment of said sum to the CONTRACTOR, on or before thirty (30) days after OWNER's receipt of such statement, shall satisfy any and all rights, claims or causes of action of CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to such default by OWNER, and shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such default. A disputed or unilateral claim by the Contractor cannot by itself constitute a default hereunder. 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION Any dispute or pending claim or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall not excuse or relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the Contract, and CONTRACTOR shall diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to,the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to any other dispute resolution process as may be selected by OWNER. Unless mutually agreed otherwise the mediation shall be conducted by a third party who will be selected by agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, and Request for Mediation shall be filed with the other party. The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. If a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the work of a subcontractor or supplier, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor or supplier as a party to any mediation proceeding between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts and/or purchase orders related to the Work a specific provision whereby the subcontractor or supplier consents to being joined in mediation between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the work of such subcontractor or supplier. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas and shall be considered performable in Brazoria County, Texas, for venue purposes. Further, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR stipulate that venue for any dispute resolution proceeding involving or touching upon the Contract other than the conduct of an arbitration hearing shall be in Brazoria County, Texas, or, if such choice of venue is prohibited or unenforceable by law, shall be held in the county where the Project is located. CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in the event OWNER seeks to enforce any provision of this Contract whether by arbitration or other dispute resolution process. Further, in the event OWNER defends any claim instituted by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, whether in arbitration or other dispute resolution process, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in defending such claim provided OWNER is the prevailing party, in whole or in part, in such proceeding. 08-2018 00700-35 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 1 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. DEFINITIONS: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor's/person's work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner- operators, (as defined at Section 406.121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER: (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 00700-Al CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,too: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR,prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700-A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR,prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (a) a certificate of coverage,prior to the other person beginning work on the Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage,prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the person knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts,to perform as required by paragraphs(1)-(7),with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR'S failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract, at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 05/2007 00700- A3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between [Contractor's Company Name] (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Project known as Miller Ranch Road Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation (the "Contract"), the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if a partnership, or if a corporation, by action of the president and secretary of said corporation, as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation, their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation: 1. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract, and the final Change Order issued under the Contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. 2. It is agreed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue, arising out of or related to the Contract, any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR, acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto, does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment, and that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims, demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a modification, waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as set out in the Contract itself, but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700-B 1 • CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT SIGNED and EXECUTED this,the_day of_ , 20_. CONTRACTOR: By: Signature Print Name: Title: [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign; if a partnership, each general partner must sign; if a corporation,the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this,the day of 20_by , a Texas corporation, under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By-Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR: By: President ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or a joint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 05/2007 00700-B2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME,the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s)are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: I(We)am(are)the person(s)who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I (we)have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and I(we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR- Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me,the day of 20_. Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700-B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME,the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release, whose names are set out above,who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation,pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation, the By-Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation; and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached, are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this,the day of , 20 Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: 07/2006 00700-B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO.3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR 1. Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1.1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a)the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and(c)others as required by the Contract Documents, if any. 1.2 Contractor. "Contractor"shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor"shall include subcontractors of any tier. 1.4 ISO. "ISO"means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein: 2.1.1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to"obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5) business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. 10-2012 00700-C1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3. Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3.1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company. All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. 3.4 Limits of Liability. The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and umbrella policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3.5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision: In the event of cancellation, non-renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder, thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail,return receipt requested. 3.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor, whether required herein or not. 3.7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self-insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. 4. Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: 10-2012 00700-C2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance 4.1.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of all locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability. 4.1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4.1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than: Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Product-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury Limit $1,000,000 4.1.4 Required Endorsements a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 .85; or ii. ISO form CG 20 26 11 85; or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01; or iv. any form providing equivalent protection to Owner. b. Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. d. Personal Injury Liability. The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non-Contributing Liability. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non- contributing liability. f. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 10-2012 00700-C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1.5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 4.2.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned,hired, and non-owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent). 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$1,000,000. 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3.1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows: 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than: Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4.4.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop-down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4.4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 10-2012 00700-C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$5,000,000. 4.4.4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5.1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the negligent performance of professional services of any type, including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims-Made basis. 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$1,000,000. 4.5.4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.6 Builder's Risk 4.6.1 Insureds. Insureds shall include: a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds; and b. subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. 10-2012 00700-CS CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover: a. all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; b. all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located at the site; c. all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; d. all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; e. all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and f. other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. Form a. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed-value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. b. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. c. Required coverage shall further include: i. Additional expenses due to delay in $TBD completion of project(where applicable) ii. Agreed value Included without sublimit iii. Damage arising from error, omission or Included without sublimit deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications,workmanship or materials, including collapse iv. Debris removal additional limit 25% of direct damage loss v. Earthquake(where applicable) $ TBD vi. Earthquake sprinkler leakage(where $TBD applicable) vii. Expediting expenses $TBD viii. Flood(where applicable) $TBD ix. Freezing Included without sublimit x. Mechanical breakdown, including hot& Included without sublimit cold testing(where applicable) xi. Notice of cancellation,non-renewal or Included 10-2012 00700-C6 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT material reduction—60 days prior written notice to each insured xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, Included below xiii. Ordinance or law Included without sublimit xiv. Pollutant clean-up and removal $TBD xv. Preservation of property Included without sublimit xvi. Replacement cost Included xvii. Theft Included without sublimit xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, Included below. 4.6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4.6.4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following: a. All Risks of Direct Damage,Per $5,000 Occurrence, except b. Delayed Opening Waiting Period 5 Days c. Flood, Per Occurrence $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, B or V d. Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler $25,000 Leakage, Per Occurrence 4.6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property. This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates: a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; b. the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached,has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. 10-2012 00700-C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be endorsed as follows: a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b. The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows: Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5. Intentionally left blank. 6. Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement. New certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements. 6.2 Form 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28, "Evidence of Property Insurance". 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25, "Certificate of Insurance". 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify: 6.3.1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name,which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company. 6.3.4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3.6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3.7 Cancellation, non-renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and "but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 10-2012 00700-C8 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3.8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3.10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. 6.3.11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6.4 Required Endorsements. A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6.6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party,the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. 7. Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7.1 Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors)to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its 10-2012 00700-C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9. Release and Waiver. The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. 10-2012 00700-C 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The following Special Conditions modify the General Conditions,Document 00700. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Special Conditions,the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Add the following paragraph to the end of Article 1.01: The OWNER'S representative on the project site is: _telephone: 281. 652. The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is: telephone: The CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR is: telephone: ARTICLE 4 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.05 Add the following paragraph to Article 4.05: A Maintenance Bond in accordance with Document 00612 of the Project Manual is required for this Project. The cost of this bond shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal. Attachment No. 3 To General Conditions, Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor, Article 4.6 Builder's Risk—Builder's Risk Insurance is Required/Not Required for this project. ARTICLE 5 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.08 Add Article 5.08: The Contract Time as defined in the bid and other sections of the Contract Documents includes a certain number of rain days. Based on the Alvin Weather Center Records,the average annual rain days from June 1898 to December 1996 is 40 days calculated from all precipitation days of record. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep a record of rain days at the site. The record of rain days must be accepted and signed by the City Inspector monthly, and shall be reported on the monthly pay estimate submittal. At the end of the contract,the CONTRACTOR will be credited only for the number of accepted rain days that exceed 40 rain days per year,proportionate to the original Contract Time. General Notes: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed internet access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Required/Not Required to provide either a Field Office or 08/2018 00800- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT any interne access for this project. All other requirements remain and will be required per the section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for all Traffic Control Documents.Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for procurement of Traffic Control Documents prior to permitting. Contractor is to keep a minimum of one lane open at all times,in both directions. No lane closures to extend beyond the defined work day. Contractor Will/ Will Not be required to provide an on-site construction office for the duration of this project. END OF SECTION 08/2018 00800-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Section 00811 WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION 1.01 In accordance with the Prevailing Wage law on Public Works (Article 2258 of the Texas Government Code),the public body awarding the contract does hereby specify the rates shown in Table 00811-A following to be the general prevailing rates in the locality in which the work is being performed. 1.02 This prevailing wage rate does not prohibit the payment of more than the rates stated. 1.03 The wage scale for engineering construction is to be applied to all site work greater than five(5)feet from an exterior wall of new building under construction or from an exterior wall of an existing building. (Attach the current wage rates. Number the pages 00811-2, 00811-3, etc.) 10-2012 00811 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date: March 23, 2021 PROJECT: Miller Ranch Road Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation BID NO.: 0321-29 BID DATE: April 1, 2021; 2:00 p.m FROM: Lori K Bender, PE a Project Manager Weston Solutions, Inc. 5599 San Felipe, Suite 700 Houston, Texas 77056 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL °Y FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Adding the Pre-Bid Sign-in Sheet and the Pre-Bid Agenda for reference. SPECIFICATIONS: • 1. Remove in its entirety the Specification 13201 Lift Station Rehabilitation and replace with the attached Specification 13201 Lift Station Rehabilitation. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: �1r .4'•� of re No change. .c7 co40: 4. s t/ END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 • LORI K.BENDER /�- ,$ 101933 c1cEkse° , Lori Bender, P.E. �$.•"'"•••••N" '� T. Project Manager nth Matvact` 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 1 o� 411111 PEq,p CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECTS DEPARTMENT 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland,Texas 77581 TEX AS pearlandtx.gov/projects est. S9a PRE-BID MEETING AGENDA Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control& Rehabilitation Thursday, March 18,2021 10:00 AM he pre-bid meeting for this project is non-mandatory. Please make sure you have signed the sign in sheet. This meeting is not to make changes in the design, but to answer any questions about the plans and specifications. Any questions you have shall be sent in writing through the E-bid system at ebids@,pearlandtx.gov. There will be no decisions made at this meeting. All questions and clarifications regarding project documents shall be made in writing and will be addressed by an addendum. Addendums will be available for viewing along with the contract documents. 1) Sign-in,Social Distancing Measures 2) Introduction of Participants a) City of Pearland Project Manager: Morgan R Early 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 281.652.1734 office 281.652.1706 fax b) Design Engineer: Lori K Bender, P.E. Weston Solutions, Inc 5599 San Felipe, Suite 700 Houston, TX 77056 713.985.6600 office 3) Introduction of the Project a) Project Name: Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control & Rehabilitation b) City of Pearland Project Number: WW1903 c) Bid No: 0321-29 Design 1 of 3 D30.Revised 7/08 4) Project Overview a) Overview of Work - Lowest Responsible Bidder • Replace existing pumps, discharge elbows, power cord, and rails with new Flygt submersible pumps. • Extension of above ground Force Main, including pipe support, tie-in to existing Force Main, and abandonment of below ground Force Main as shown on the plans, and all appurtenances, complete in place. • Wet Well Rehabilitation, including the demolition of the T-Lock, surface preparation, and the application of the specified Coating, as directed by Engineer, complete in place. • Install a new Pure Air odor control unit and associated piping, enclosure, and accessories. • 8-ft Cedar wooden fence with metal posts and sliding gate; including demolition of existing fence. • Recoating of existing above-grade piping, valves, and fittings that are to remain in service. • Bypass pumping to accomplish the installation of the above items. • Electrical - Install auxiliary power natural gas generator as shown on the electrical drawings. Provide automatic transfer switch, panel upgrades, conduit, wire, etc. as show. Includes contractor coordinated gas service install to generator. b) The Contractor shall be aware of existing utilities in and around the project areas. It is the Contractor's responsibility to locate and verify all utilities prior to construction. Contractor must contact and coordinate with all pertinent entities (i.e. AT&T, CenterPoint Energy, Comcast, etc...) and meet their requirements. c) Preliminary Cost Estimate - Approximately$1 Million d) Construction concerns: i) Future Issues: COVID related resource delays that could affect schedule. Coordination between entities will be crucial for success. Acquisition of long lead time items to be prioritized to maintain construction schedule. ii) Existing Conditions: Project Site is an urban area, adjacent to a daycare/school and a hotel. iii) Coordination Between other Entities: Contact City of Pearland, Project Manager, Morgan R Early for necessary coordination. Entities to include: Design Engineers, City of Pearland ROW and Public -Works departments. 5) Bidding Process a) Advertised: 03/10/2021 & 03/17/2021 in Pearland Reporter News. b) Non-mandatory Pre-bid Conference: Thursday, March 18, 2021 @ 10:00 AM at City Hall at 3519 Liberty Dr, Pearland, Texas 77581. A virtual option is available: To join by phone: 1-408- 418-9388 Access Code 182 270 9709 Meeting Password: q5iE2nrmhD4 Design 2 of 3 D30.Revised 7/08 , c) Construction Plans& Specs available for download at City's EBID system. All bids should be submitted through the E-Bid system located on the City's website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are advised to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-Bid System at the above website by clicking on "Supplier Registration" and completing a short registration questionnaire. Electronic Bid Documents, including Plans, Technical Specifications and Bid Forms are available for download after registration is approved by City Purchasing office. No plan fees or deposits are required for bid documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov. d) Sealed bids due in duplicate: Thursday,April 1,2021 by 2:00 pm (via EBID system). Bids will be opened and read aloud after the 2:00 pm deadline. Location: City Hall or Virtual. Call-in access to virtual opening will be provided via addendum. e) Bid Security—Five percent(5%) bid security must accompany each bid proposal in the form of certified check, cashier's check or Bid Bond 6) Contract a) Award i) Notice of Award—Successful Bidder shall return Standard Form of Agreement and Payment Bond Forms within 10 days ii) Notice to Proceed—Contractor shall commence work within ten(10) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed b) Project Duration i) Substantial Completion: 180 calendar days ii) Complete/Final Payment: 90 days after Owner receives approved invoice from Designer& close-out documentation required iii) Liquidated Damages: $400.00 per day 7) Closing comments Anything that has been said during the Pre-bid Conference is for the purpose of assisting in the clarification of the details of this project. This discussion is intended to be helpful to the potential bidders, but in no way is it meant to change anything contained in the Bid Documents. Additional questions regarding to project plans or bid documents must be submitted in writing to ebidsApearlandtx.gov • Bidders must rely on Addenda for official answers to issues that are either not covered or are ambiguous in the Bid Documents. All Pre-Bid participants will be notified of future Addenda, if required. Interested bidders are responsible for obtaining Addenda from the Design Consultant. The City expects the highest standards of customer service and customer satisfaction. Field personnel must extend courtesy, cooperation, and rapid response to customer concerns. Communicate any customer request, complaints, and/or concerns to the Project Manager, Construction Manager, or the Construction Inspector as soon as possible. 8) Questions 01111'' Design 3 of 3 D30. Revised 7/08 A. `� PE44' Miller Ranch Regional Lift Station Odor Control and Rehabilitation o CoP Project No. WW 1903 IIPLMIdNalPre-Bid Meeting Sign-in Sheet T E x A s Thursday, March 18, 2021 @ 10:00 AM Esr. 1s9D` 3519 Liberty Dr, Pearland TX 77581 Name (Print) Company Phone Number Email Morgan R Early City of Pearland 281-652-1734 mearly(a�pearlandbc.gov Xic eL/c/I �"C!!r ..e. A/i` I Y - A? 60,4 /t l J �lp�, !' r/ G-�II.# ,/.4 J ,4/1! TiP� rt - cv� JeS0 Ho►�tfJCl � 1? S C:o�Ttt-&x.Ttcn) �-G--S53 - 4-2S.Z S CbN}-1- e Fktalr-]2Y�o)s_I2m, O. -S"i.'-? . .3"- '-•.0s 7 0: ,9G 00:;itreT S/2.3' 90 fez V .CLi9,eE-2:gs•t 'I. ,idole s 4171, if . llert IVVC 1J3.$11. 7.01e 6dta-rc5 i%11 --e4rletr -cvw -J J3-G 4-- I w`<__ iec7-e_c e-c_ a o ( • eq f ' 3 2 13 X" "41... r!^2 2 ' /go y.P2 2-c. c'w ---..4n (,v/1J k K ______j (..g i' 7 z- 77 1 e h n t„1.4 LA-C L 4?/`12'n/it/S •(ek, D\i.itT-C K.Mratl °op 7-0i. z-e{,BiO.: c:I it.-kPlei(A Q..re,G, ctn A -(0)51- n`‘ �� -v.`,-\\Q--, Co-' �1l�-i1S-yocog cLy),le�G-zpgo-c1 fix, pti, 6-,ci.bex A.1 E-..- -Tv Al S'39 403 zi ci2t 0,(1 ,. _,ptvceti_e4=c,,,i 5c.tuci-1 (..„4.5,c,„.1 \je(vo1cQ Peaia. 0 0P ?g - 4)52- 115 ( ebic15 0 porlavid }'t . 90 `✓ 111 1 of 3 D5.Revised 9/08 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 2 Date: March 29, 2021 PROJECT: Miller Ranch Road Regional Lift Station Rehabilitatior 4 ��.u�«ti�u r*ii. BID NO.: 0321-29 �4, . * * BID DATE: April 1, 2021; 2:00 p.m LORI K.BENDER 101933 FROM: Lori K Bender, PE p,��/BEN� `�� Project Manager Fs Weston Solutions, Inc. h{��+ss0N 1-V� 5599 San Felipe, Suite 700 Houston, Texas 77056 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Remove bid proposal form Part B in it's entierity and replace with attached bid proposal form. SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Remove Specification Section 01100 - Summary of Work and replace with attached section. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: 1. Bid Set Plans Sheet 15 "Nozzle Assembly Detail" is removed from this project. CONTRACTOR QUESTIONS: 1. Question: Does the wet well have an existing protective coating in it that must be removed? Answer: The existing wet well has a T-Lock Liner. 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM 2. Question: The specification call for Raven EPoxy Raven 05 HCR. Could this be a typo error there is not Raven 05,there is Raven 405. Please clarify. Answer: See Addendum 1 revised Specification 13201 Lift Station Rehabilitation END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 ,1(4......,,, Lori K Bender, P.E. Project Manager 2-22-12 00900-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER PART B PRICE PROPOSAL FORM Spec Quantity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount PKHD 1 Base Bid Base Bid PKLN 1 1 Base Bid 1 LS Mobilization; Maximum 3%of Total Bid 01505 Extension of above ground Force Main, including pipe support,tie-in to existing PKLN 1 2 1 LS Force Main,and abandonment of below 02533 ground Force Main as shown on the plans, Base Bid and all appurtenances,complete in place Wet Well Improvements consisting of Demolition of existing pumps, piping, and supports above ground and in the wet well PKLN 1 3 1 LS 02220 as shown in plans, installation of new pumps, supports, piping, safety grates, Base Bid valves as shown in plans, complete in place 1,600 GPM By-Pass Pumping w/ 1,800 LF PKLN 1 4 Base Bid 2 MO Discharge 02790 PKLN 1 5 Base Bid 15 LF Trench Excavation Safety 01570 Wet Well Rehabilitation, including demolition of T-lock lining, surface PKLN 1 6 Base Bid 1 LS preparation, and the application of the 13201 Sewpercoat Coating, as directed by Engineer, complete in place. PKLN 1 7 Base Bid 1 LS Electrical/Control Panel Upgrades Div 13&16 PKLN 1 8 1 LS Pure Air Odor Control System, including 11312 Base Bid concrete pad, equipment, air vent replacement, wet well lid core, installation of odor control line into wet well, complete in place — PKLN 1 9 Base Bid 1 LS 125-200 KW Natural Gas Generator w/ATS 16211/16496 Addendum 2 Offeror's Initials: 00300- Part B- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER PART B PRICE PROPOSAL FORM Spec Quantity UOM Description01570 Reference Unit Price Total Amount PKLN 1 10 Base Bid 250 LF 8-ft Cedar wooden fence with metal posts and 02820 sliding gate; including demolition of existing PKLN 1 11 15 LF Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 01561 Base Bid PKLN 1 12 Base Bid 7 CY Crushed Aggregate backfill along fence line 02255 PKLN 1 13 Base Bid 1 LS Site Restoration including Hydromulching 02921 PKLN 1 14 Base Bid 1 LS Cash Allowance; Natural Gas Service SS $1,000 $1,000 Total Bid Offeror's Authorized Signature Addendum 2 Offeror's Initials: 00300- Part B-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 3 Date: April 1, 2021 PROJECT: Miller Ranch Road Regional Lift Station Rehabilitation BID NO.: 0321-29 BID DATE: April 1, 2021; 2:00 p.m FROM: Morgan R Early Project Manager City of Pearland 3519 Liberty, Pearland TX 77581 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Correction to bid item 7 in electronic bid system that was removed from Section 00300 Part B via addendum#2 dated 03/29/21. SPECIFICATIONS: None. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: None. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 Morgan R Early Project Manager 2-22-12 00900- I of I CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 04/2008 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK Section 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. A summary of the Work to be performed under this Contract, work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work Sequence, future Work, Contractor's use of Premises, and Owner occupancy. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOUCMENTS A Lift station rehabilitation at the Miller Ranch Lift Station as generally described in this section. The full and completed project scope is described by the contract documents consisting of technical specifications, drawings, and other documents included as part of the bid package. The omission of any work from this summary does not relieve the Contractor from fulfilling his obligations under the Contract to deliver a complete, fully funtional project meeting the design intent. B Base Bid Item No. 1 shall consist of the following: 1. Mobilization to Miller Ranch Lift Station by the Contractor to initiate project start-up. 2. Preparation of site and right-of-way prior to commencement of work. C Base Bid Item No. 2 shall consist of the following: 1. Extension of above-ground piping prior to connecting to underground force main. 2. Installation of magmeter flow meter and associated straight pipe on either side to allow for proper flow measurements. 3. Installation of wye tee to allow for bypass pumping during rehabilitation of wet well, and for future repair and construction work at Miller Ranch Lift Station. 4. Installation of third pipe support between the magmeter and wye tee. D Base Bid Item No. 3 shall consist of wet well improvements, including but not limited to: 1. Demolition and replacement of two (2) existing KSB pumps with City approved manufacturer Flygt pumps. Installation of a third matching pump to increase lift station capacity to meet current demand. Demolition and replacements of motors,piping, valves, and associated structural, 10/2020 Addendum 2 01100- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK mechanical, and electrical upgrades to meet current City of Pearland guidelines. 2. Demolition and replacement of steel guiderails. 3. Installation of an ultrasonic level sensor, while keeping the existing float switches to operate as backups. 4. Demolition and replacement of existing safety netting with aluminum safety access grates. E Base Bid Item No. 4 shall consist of incidental diversion pumping to complete this work. Pumping should connect to proposed wye tee and shall be priced an a per month basis. F Base Bid Item No. 5 shall consist of trench excavation safety. G Base Bid Item No. 6 shall consist of replacing the T-Lock lining including, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Demolition of T-Lock lining inside the wet well 2. Perform structural repairs on wet well. 3. Install SewperCoat® lining to the interior of the wet well. H Base Bid Item No. 7 shall consist of electrical work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Demolition and replacement of control panels throughout site. 2. Connection of magmeter flow meter. 3. Connection of natural gas powered generator. 4. Connection of odor control system to SCADA on-site. Base Bid Item No. 8 shall consist of installation of odor control system, including but not limited to the following: 1. Installation of a Pure Air 1000 CFM odor control system, or pre-approved equal, including foundation, electrical and waterline connections, and controls. 2. Coring 4"odor control system drain hole into the top of the wet well. 3. Demolition and replacement of 14"vent pipe. J Base Bid Item No. 9 shall consist of Miller Ranch Lift Station site improvements, including but not limited to the following: 10/2020 Addendum 2 01100-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK 1. Installation of a new permanent natural gas powered generator with sound attenuation to operate the full firm pumping capacity of the lift station and the odor control system. This includes a concrete foundation and an automatic transfer switch. 2. Installation of automatic transfer switch(ATS)to transfer power source to generator in event of a power failure. 3. Construction of concrete pad to support generator and associated infrastructure. K Base Bid Item No. 10 shall consist of fence work including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Demolition and replacement of chain link fence and gate with 8-foot tall cedar wooden fence with metal posts and a sliding gate. 2. Backfill to grade 1-foot wide space between existing masonry fence and proposed cedar fence with 6 inches of gravel to prevent vegetation growth. L Base Bid Item No. 11 shall consist of installation of reinforced filter fabric barrier. M Base Bid Item No. 12 includes providing and placement of crushed aggregate backfill along fence line as needed. N Base Bid Item No.13 includes site restoration including hydro mulching. 0 Base Bid Item No.14 (Cash Allowance): To cover the Gas Service Provider's cost for installation of the service line and the meter as a pass through cost. Contractor must submit invoice from the provider with the pay estimate. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A The Owner will coordinate the installation of the natural gas line to the site for use at the natural gas generator. B The Owner will take the decommisioned self-priming pump and mount it on a trailor for the Owner to haul off. 1.04 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A Not applicable. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A Contractor shall construct work in phases during the construction period. Contractor shall coordinate construction schedule and operations with the City of 10/2020 Addendum 2 01100-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK Pearland. Contractor shall submit a detailed Construction Sequencing Plan to the Engineer for review and approval prior to construction. B All work at the site which could potentially interfere with normal operations at the plant (and/or off-site facilities) shall be coordinated with the Plant Supervisor. Contractor shall submit a construction sequencing plan that shows no plant operations (or off-site facility operations)will be adversely affected for more than four (4) hours in any 24 hour period. All requests which impact normal operation of the plant shall be submitted at least five (5) working days in advance of the proposed shutdown date. Approval for shutdown(s) may be dependant upon influent flow conditions (wet-weather vs. dry-weather) and the operating status of near-by facilities to supplement lost influent pumping capacity. The maximum entire plant shutdown period shall be no more than four (4) consecutive hours. Central control/monitoring of the lift station operation and local control of the plant shall be restricted to the same scheduling constraints regarding outages. C Construction Sequence 1. Pre-Construction Activities 2. Mobilize and submit key project submittals and shop drawings. 3. Take pre-construction photographs of the existing site, including site paving, curbs, landscaping features, etc., prior to commencing any work. 4. Schedule/attend a meeting with the lift station plant supervisor to determine acceptable protocol (i.e. duration, scheduling, notification procedures, etc.)that will be used for any planned shut-down of existing facilities. 5. Miller Ranch Lift Station Rehabilitation a. Demolish 25 LF of existing 12" force main. b. Install 12" 45-degree bends, new discharge header and 12"x12" wye tee. Tie-in to existing force main with mechanical joint and 10/2020 Addendum 2 01100-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK megalug restraint, or pre-approved equal. New piping shall be placed in cement stabilized sand for restraining purposes. c. Set up bypass pumping from the wet well to the force main connecting temporary piping connecting to the wye tee. d. Utilize existing pipe that is to be abandoned in-place to temporarily restrain the force main joints during initial pump. e. Remove and replace above-ground piping, valves,tee joints, pipe supports, and associated infrastructure. f. Demolish and replace manhole frame and cover for level transducer and 14" vent pipe. g. Remove pumps, piping within the wet well, and level sensors. h. Remove and replace guiderails. i. Demolish and replace T-lock with Sewpercoat® lining. j. Drill 4"hole into top of wet well for odor control drain connection. k. Install new pumps, piping within the wet well, piping supports, and level sensors. 1. Demolish and replace electrical control panels. m. Construct concrete pad for generator. n. Install natural gas powered generator and connect to City supplied natural gas connection. o. Connect ATS system for generator. p. Install odor control system and connect to wet well and SCADA on-site. q. Remove existing chain link fence and gate. r. Backfill to grade area between the masonry fence and proposed cedar fence with 6 inches of gravel. s. Install 8-ft wooden cedar fence with metal poles and a sliding gate. D Contractor to submit project schedule to Engineer & Owner for approval as specified in Section 01350—Submittals. E Contract shall coordinate the Work with the Engineer and Owner as specified in Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings. 10/2020 Addendum 2 01100-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK 1.06 FUTURE WORK A Not applicable. 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A Comply with procedures for access to the site and Contractor's use of rights-of-way as specified in Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Contractor shall be responsible for all utilities required for construction. 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate the Owner's operations. Coordinate Contractor's activities with Engineer. B Schedule Work to accommodate this requirement. 2.0 PRODUCTS—Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION—Not Used END OF SECTION 10/2020 Addendum 2 01100-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Section 01140 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A General use of the Project Site including properties inside and outside of the limits of construction, work affecting roads, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. B References to Technical Specifications: 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2 Section 01730—Cutting&Patching 3 Section 01555—Traffic Control &Regulation 4 Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 5 Section 01720—Field Surveying 6 Section 02980—Pavement Repair 7 Section 02770—Curbs, Curb & Gutter, &Headers 8 Section 02255 —Bedding,Backfill, &Embankment Materials 9 Section 02922—Sodding 10 Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding v, 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Confine access,operations,and storage areas to limits of construction as shown on the Plans provided by Owner as stipulated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement; trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B Contractor may make arrangements,at Contractor's cost,for temporary use of private properties,in which case Contractor and Contractor's surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of the limits of construction. 1. Improvements to private properties made for the Contractor's use mustbe removed upon completion of the Work. a. No fill material may be placed in temporary work areas or on adjacent private properties without the written permission of the Engineer or the issuance of a Fill Permit by the City of Pearland or other governing entity. C Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 01/2018 01140- 1 of4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.5 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B Altering the condition of properties adjacent to and along the limits of construction will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer and property owner(s) as noted above. C Means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures which will result in damage to properties or improvements in the vicinity outside of the limits of construction will not be permitted without temporary or permanent easements as determined by the Engineer. D Any damage to properties outside of the limits of construction shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. E Contractor shall protect or replace all property corners,monuments or other demarcations disturbed, damaged or lost as a result of his activities. The replacement of these devices shall be properly documented to the satisfaction of the City by a Registered Public Land Surveyor with copies delivered to the Owner or private property owner. 1.6 USE OF SITE A Obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close consecutive intersections simultaneously. B Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the Contractor. C Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets; when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow. E Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems which may exist on rights-of-ways within the Project Site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition equal to or better than that existing at start of the Work. F When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting&Patching. G Fires are not permitted on the Project Site. 01/2018 01140-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.7 NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed construction and time schedule. Notification shall be 24 hours,72 hours and 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 200 feet of the homes or businesses. B Include in notification names and telephone numbers of two representatives for resident contact,who will be available on 24-hour call. Include precautions which will be taken to protect private property and identify potential access or utility inconvenience or disruption. C Submit proposed notification to Engineer for approval. Consideration shall be given to the ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Notice shall be in an understandable language. 1.8 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the Engineer. B Obtain the Engineer's approval when the nature of the Work requires closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the Contractor's responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. C Remove surplus materials and debris and open 1000 feet or less for public use as work in that block is complete. D Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property. F Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section 01555 —Traffic Control & Regulation. 1.9 CLEAN-UP A Maintain Project Site in a neat and orderly manner. B Perform daily clean-up in and around construction zone of dirt,debris,scrap materials, other disposable items. C Leave streets, driveways, and sidewalks broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of each work day. D Promptly remove barriers,signs,and components of other control systems that are no 01/2018 01140-3of4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES longer being utilized. E Dispose of waste and excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. 1.10 RESTORATION A Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on the Plans. B Repair/Replace removed or damaged pavement in accordance with Section 02980— Pavement Repair and removed or damaged curbs,gutters,and headers in accordance with Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers. Repair/Replace with like materials to match existing style, lines, grades, etc., unless otherwise directed by Engineer. C Repair turf areas which become damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. D Level with bank sand or topsoil, conforming to Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill,& Embankment Materials, as approved by the Engineer. E Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02922—Sodding. Use only block sodding; do not use spot sodding or sprigging. F Provide hydromulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved,in accordance with Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. G Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using steel wheel rollers appropriate for sodding 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2018 01140-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for measurement and payment of Work. B Conditions for nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejected products. C References to Technical Specifications: See Bid Proposal Sheet D Reference Standards: 1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC) 1.02 AUTHORITY A Units and methods delineated in this Section are intended to complement the criteria of the Technical Specifications and Section 00300—Bid Proposal. B In the event of conflict, the unit specified for Bid Items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal shall govern. C Measurements and quantities submitted by the Contractor will be verified by the Engineer. D Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required by Engineer to verify quantities. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A Quantity and measurement estimates stated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal are for contract purposes only.Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work, authorized and verified by Engineer shall determine payment as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B If the actual Work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, provide the required quantities at the unit prices contracted except as otherwise stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement or in executed Change Order. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. 05/2007 01200- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES B Measurement by Volume: 1. Stockpiles: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials: Measured by cubic dimension using the average end area method. C Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. D Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. E Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the agreement. F Other: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or lineal means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.05 PAYMENT A Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision,labor,products,tools, equipment,plant,transportation,services,and incidentals;and erection,application or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. The price bid shall include the total cost for required Work. Claims for payment as Unit Price Work not specifically covered in Section 00300—Bid Proposal will not be accepted. B Progress Payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by the unit price. C Progress Payments for Lump Sum Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of the percentage of quantities included in the schedule of values incorporated in the Work. D Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by Engineer multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. 1.06 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A Remove and replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents. B If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The nonconforming Work will remain as is,but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer. 2. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the Engineer, and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer,if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable than originally specified. 05/2007 01200-2of3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES C Individual Technical Specifications may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D The authority of the Engineer to assess the nonconforming Work and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to Engineer. 2. Products determined as nonconforming before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work,unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 05/2007 01200-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Section 01290 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for processing Change Orders, including: 1. Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work; 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time; 3. Change procedures, using proposals and construction contract modifications,Work Change Directive, Stipulated Price Change Order,Unit Price Change Order, Time and Materials Change Order; 4. Execution of Change Orders; 5. Correlation of Contractor Submittals. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents C Other References: 1. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment(Data Quest Blue Book). Rental Rate is defined as the full unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A Contractor shall provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute change documents, and who shall also be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. The information shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of proposed changes in the Work. B Contractor shall document each Proposal for Change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow for its evaluation. 02/2008 01290- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES C Proposal for Change shall include, as a minimum, the following information as applicable: 1. Original Quantities of items in Section 00300—Bid Proposal with additions, reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. When Work items were not included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal, Contractor shall provide unit prices for the new items, with supporting information as required by the Engineer. 3. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 4. Additional data upon request. D For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-material basis, the following additional information may be required: 1. Quantities and description of products and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 7.03 "Extra Work". 4. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 5. Time records and certified copies of applicable payrolls. 6. Invoices and receipts for products,rented equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. E Rented equipment will be paid to the Contractor by actual invoice cost for the duration of time required to complete the extra work. If the extra work comprises only a portion of the rental invoice where the equipment would otherwise be on the site,the Contractor shall compute the hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly invoice by 176. (One day equals 8 hours and one week equals 40 hours.) Operating costs shall not exceed the estimated operating costs given for the item of equipment in the Blue Book. F For changes in the work performed on a time-and-materials basis using Contractor- owned equipment, compute rates with the Blue Book as follows: 1. Multiply the appropriate Rental Rate by an adjustment factor of 70 percent plus the full rate shown for operating costs. The Rental Rate utilized shall be the lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent of the Rental Rate for double shifts (one extra shift per day) and 200 percent of the Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day. No other rate adjustments shall apply. 2. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shown in the Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of a Change Order. Issuance of a Work Change Directive or written acceptance by the Engineer of changes will be formalized into Change Orders. All such changes will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.01 "Change Orders". 02/2008 01290-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B The Engineer will advise Contractor of Minor Changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time as authorized by Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.02 "Minor Changes", by issuing supplemental instructions. C Contractor may request clarification of Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents or other information. Response by the Engineer to a Request for Information does not authorize the Contractor to perform tasks outside the scope of the Work. All changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.06 PROPOSALS FOR CHANGE AND CONTRACT MODIFICATION A The Engineer may issue a-Request for Proposal,which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Plans and Technical Specifications.The Engineer may also request a proposal in the response to a Request for Information. Contractor will prepare and submit its Proposal for Change within 7 days or as specified in the request. B The Contractor may propose an unsolicited change by submitting a Proposal for Change to the Engineer describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 1.07 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate a method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C Contractor shall proceed promptly to execute the changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.08 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted Proposal for Change including the Contractor's lump sum price quotation. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A Where Unit Prices for the affected items of the Work are included in Section 00300- Bid Proposal ,the Unit Price Change Order will be based on unit prices as originally bid, subject to provisions of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Where unit prices of the Work are not pre-determined in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Work Change Directive or accepted Proposal for Change will specify the unit prices to be used. 02/2008 01290-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.10 TIME-AND-MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A Contractor shall provide an itemized account and supporting data after completion of change,within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on time-and-material basis as specified in this Section, 1.04 "Documentation of Change in Contract Price and Contract Time". D Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of changes,and shall substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION A Engineer will issue Change Orders,Work Change Directives, or accepted Proposals for Change for signatures of parties named in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A For Stipulated Price Contracts, Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. B For Unit Price Contracts,the next monthly Application for Payment of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include any new items not previously included and the appropriate unit rates. C Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time,and shall revise schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit for review. D Contractor shall promptly enter changes to the on-site and record copies of the Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents as required in Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01290-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01310 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Section includes general coordination including Preconstruction Conference, Site Mobilization Conference, and Progress Meetings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Coordination is required throughout the documents. Refer to all of the Contract Documents and coordinate as necessary. 1.03 ENGINEER AND REPRESENTATIVES A The Engineer may act directly or through designated representatives as defined in Section 00700 = General Conditions of Agreement, 1.01 "Owner, Contractor, and Engineer", and as identified by name at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and work of the various Technical Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B Coordinate completion and clean up of the Work for Substantial Completion and for portions of the Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. C Coordinate access to Project Site for correction of nonconforming work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities where Owner is in partial occupancy. 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Engineer will schedule a Preconstruction Conference. B Attendance Required: Engineer's representatives,Consultants,Contractor,and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties to the Contract, and the Consultant. 3. Review of insurance. 02/2008 01310- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4. Discussion of formats proposed by the Contractor for Schedule of Values, and Construction Schedule. 5. Discussion of required Submittals, including,but not limited to,Work Plans, Traffic Control Plans, Safety Programs, Construction Photographs. 6. Procedures and processing of Shop Drawings and other submittals, substitutions, Applications for Payment,Requests for Information, Request for Proposal, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout. 7. Scheduling of the Work and coordination with other contractors. 8. Review of Subcontractors. 9. Appropriate agenda items listed in this Section, 1.06 "Site Mobilization Conference", when Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference are combined. 10. Procedures for testing. 11. Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents. 12. Designation of the individual authorized to execute change documents and their responsibilities. 13. Discussion of requirements of a Trench Safety Program. 1.06 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work,Engineer will schedule a Site Mobilization Conference at the Project Site prior to Contractor occupancy. B Attendance Required: Engineer representatives, Consultants, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor 2. Safety and first aid procedures 3. Construction controls provided by Owner 4. Temporary utilities 5. Survey and layout 6. Security and housekeeping procedures 1.07 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Progress Meetings shall be held at Project Site or other location as designated by the Engineer. Meeting shall be held at monthly intervals, or more frequent intervals if directed by Engineer. B Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer representatives, and Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C Engineer or City's representative will make arrangements for meetings,and recording minutes. D Engineer or City's representative will prepare the agenda and preside at meetings. 02/2008 01310-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS E Contractor shall provide required information and be prepared to discuss each agenda item. F Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Construction Schedule, Applications for Payment,payroll and compliance submittals. 3. Field observations,problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of Submittal Schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review status of Requests for Information,Requests for Proposal. 7. Review status of Change Orders. 8. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9. Maintenance of updates to Construction Schedule. 10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 11. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 12. Coordination of projected progress. 13. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 14. Effect of proposed changes on Construction Schedule and coordination. 15. Other items relating to the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01310-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS Section 01350 SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL This Section contains general lists of Submittals and Technical Specifications that may be required for the Work. When Submittals are required elsewhere in these Technical Specifications,refer to this Section for Submittal requirements and procedures. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Submittal procedures for: 1. Schedule of Values 2. Construction Schedules 3. Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples 4. Operations and Maintenance Data 5. Manufacturer's Certificates 6. Construction Photographs 7. Project Record Documents 8. Design Mixes B References to the following Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01310—Coordination &Meetings 2. Section 01630—Product Options &Substitutions 3. Section 01100—Summary of Work 4. Section 01380—Construction Photographs 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A Scheduling and Handling 1. Schedule Submittals well in advance of the need for material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after Submittal is abproved. 2. Develop a Submittal Schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, correction,resubmission and final review of all submittals.The Engineer will review and return submittals to the Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a Submittal Schedule be acceptable which allows less than 30 days for initial review by the Engineer. This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor. 3. The Engineer's review of submittals covers conformity to the Plans,Technical Specifications, and dimensions which affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements; review of 01/2008 01350- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Plans and Technical Specifications. 4. Submit 5 copies of documents unless otherwise specified in this Section or by individual Technical Specifications. 5. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 6. The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in Applications for Payment until approval has been obtained in the specified manner. B Transmittal Form and Numbering 1. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number each transmittal form beginning with the number 1. Re- Submittals shall use the original number with an alphabetic suffix(i.e.,2A for first Re-Submittal of Submittal 2 or 15C for third Re-Submittal of Submittal. 15). Each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. 4. For submittal numbering of video tapes, see this Section, 1.10 "Video". C Contractor's Certification 1. Each submittal shall contain a statement or stamp signed by the Contractor, certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES • A Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment. A Schedule of Values shall be provided for each of the items indicated as Lump Sum (LS) in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal for which the Contractor requests to receive Progress Payments. B Schedule of Values shall be typewritten on 8-1/2"x 11",plain bond,white paper. Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a format for listing costs of Work by Section. C Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest $100.00 except for the value of one item, if necessary, to make the total price for all items listed in the Schedule of Values equal to the applicable Lump Sum in Section 00300—Bid Proposal. D For Unit Price Contracts, items should include a proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, such that the total of all items listed in the Schedule of Values equals the Contract amount. For.Stipulated Price Contracts,Mobilization,Bonds,and Insurance may be listed as separate items in the Schedule of Values. 01/2008 01350-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS E For Lump Sum equipment items, where Submittals for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports in conjunction with Operation and Maintenance Data are required, include a separate item for equipment Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals and a separate item for Submittals of equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports, each valued at five(5)percent of the Lump Sum. F Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications,Change Orders,and Work Change Directives. Submit revised Schedule of Values 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment after the changes are approved by the Engineer. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A Submit Construction Schedules for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall be,at a minimum,a bar chart, (computer generated or prepared manually) and a narrative report. B During the Preconstruction Meeting, as noted in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the format to be used for the Construction Schedule Submittal.The format is subject to approval by the Engineer. Review of the Submittal will be provided within 7 days of the Submittal of the sample. C Within 7 days of the receipt of approval of the Contractor's format, or 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is later, the Contractor shall submit a proposed Construction Schedule for review. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall meet the following requirements: 1. The Construction Schedule shall usually include a total of at least 20 but not more than 50 activities. Fewer activities may be accepted,if approved by the Engineer. 2. For Projects with work at different physical locations,each location should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 3. For projects with multiple crafts or significant subcontractor components,these elements should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 4. For Projects with multiple types of tasks within the scope,these types of work should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 5. For Projects with significant major equipment items or materials worth over 25 percent of the Total Contract Price, the Construction Schedule shall indicate dates when these items are to be purchased,when they are to be delivered,and when installed. 6. For Projects where operating plants are involved, each period of work which will require the shut down of any process or operation shall be identified in the Construction Schedule and must be agreed to by the Engineer prior to starting work in the area. 7. A Billing Schedule(tabulation of the estimated monthly billings)for the Work shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor with the first Construction Schedule. This information is not required in the monthly updates, unless significant changes in Work require re-submittal of the Construction Schedule for review. The total for each month and a cumulative total will be indicated. 01/2008 01350-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS These monthly forecasts are only for planning purposes of the Engineer. Monthly payments for actual work completed will be made by the Engineer in accordance with Section 00700- General Conditions of Agreement. D The Contractor must receive approval of the Engineer for the Construction Schedule and Billing Schedule prior to the first monthly Application for Payment. No payment will be made until these are accepted. E Upon written request from the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval all or any part of the Construction Schedule to reflect changed conditions in the Work or deviations made from the original plan and schedule. F The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall thereafter be updated with the Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates, Percent Complete, and Remaining Duration of each Activity and submitted monthly. The date to be used in updating the monthly Construction Schedule shall be the same Date as is used in the monthly Application for Payment. This monthly update of the Construction Schedule shall be required before the monthly Application for Payment will be processed for payment. G The narrative Construction Schedule Report shall include a description of changes made to the Construction Schedule; Activities Added to the Construction Schedule; Activities Deleted from the Construction Schedule; any other changes made to the Construction Schedule other than the addition of Actual Start Dates and Actual Finish Dates and Remaining Durations: 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES A Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings for review as required by the Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each Shop Drawing. 3. The Shop Drawing shall accurately and distinctly present the following: a. Field and erection dimensions clearly identified as such. b. Arrangement and section views. c. Relation to adjacent materials or structure including complete information for making connections between work under this Contract and work under other contracts. d. Kinds of materials and finishes. e. Parts list and descriptions. f. Assembly Shop Drawings of equipment components and accessories showing their respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. g. Where necessary for clarity, identify details by reference to sheet numbers and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as shown on the Plans. 4. Shop Drawing Drawings shall be to scale,and shall be a true representation of the specific equipment or item to be furnished. 01/2008 01350-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS B Product Data 1. Submit Product Data for review when required in individual Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each data item submitted. 3. Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models,options to be used in this Project. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information unique to this Project, where required by the Technical Specification. 4. For products specified only by reference standard,submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 5. For Approved Products, those designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words"or approved equal",submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 6. For products proposed as alternates to Approved Products, refer to Section 01630-Product Options and Substitutions, 1.04"Selection Options"and 1.07 "Substitution Procedures". 7. For products that are neither Pre-Approved, Approved, specified only by reference standard, nor proposed as alternates, submit product description, trade name, manufacturer, and supplier. Contractor shall provide additional information upon written request by Engineer or Owner. C Samples 1. Submit samples for review as required by the Technical Specification. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on each sample or a firmly attached sheet of paper. 3. Submit the number of samples specified in the Technical Specification;one of which will be retained by the Engineer. 4. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are identified in the Technical Specifications. 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A When specified in Technical Specification,submit manufacturers'printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, operation, adjusting, finishing, and maintenance. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section. 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each document. C Identify conflicts between manufacturers'instructions and Contract Documents. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' certificate of compliance for review by Engineer. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of the certificate. 01/2008 01350-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS C Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D Manufacturer's Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product,but must be acceptable to Engineer. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Submit photographs in accordance with Section 01380—Construction Photographs. 1. Prints: Prepare 2 prints of each view and submit 1 print directly to the City's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs. One print shall be retained by the Contractor and made available at all times for reference on the job site. B PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS: 1. Prior to the commencement of any construction,take digital color photographs on the entire route of the project 2. Photographs: Two prints, color, matte finish; 3 x 5 inch size,mounted on 81 x 11-inch soft card stock, with left edge binding margin for three hole punch, or in plastic pockets in three-ring notebook. 3. Th photographs shall show: a. Date photographs were taken b. Location of the photograph, house number and street name. (This information may be shown on a chalk board in the photograph by a label on the mountings.) 4. Photographs should show the condition of the following a. Esplanades and boulevards b. Yards (near, side and far side of street) c. Housewalk, sidewalk and driveway; curb d. Area between walk and curb 1) Particular features(yard lights, shrubs, fences, trees, etc.) 2) Landscaping and decorative features. C POST CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1. On completion of construction, provide photographs of any public or private property which has been repaired or restored and any damage which is or may be the subject of complaints. 1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01760—Project Record Documents. 1.10 VIDEO A Submit television video in DVD format as required in individual Technical Specifications. B Transmittal forms for video disks shall be numbered sequentially beginning with TO1, T02,T03, etc. 01/2008 01350-6of6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 1.11 DESIGN MIXES A When specified, submit design mixes for review. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each design mix. C Mark each design mix to identify proportions,gradations,and additives for each class and type of design mix submitted. Include applicable test results on samples for each mix. D Maintain a copy of approved design mixes at mixing plant. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2008 01350-7 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS Section 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for construction photographs and submittals. B References Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 2. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Construction Photographs under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for installed Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, submit photographs in accordance applicable provisions of this Section. B Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. C Prepare three(3)prints of each view and submit two(2) prints directly to the Project Manager within seven(7)days of taking photographs. One(1)print shall be retained by the Contractor in the field office at the Project Site and available at all times for reference. D When requested,by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit extra prints of photographs,for distribution directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to the photographer. E When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken prior to start of the Work to show original Project Site conditions. F When required by Contract Documents, submit photographs with Application for Payment. G When required by individual Sections,submit photographs taken following completion of the Work to show the condition in which the Project Site will be left. H With each submittal,include photographic negatives in protective envelopes,identified by Project Name, Contractor, and date photographs were taken. 01/2008 01380- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Contractor shall be responsible for the timely execution of the photographs, their vantage point, direction of shot, and quality. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A Photographs shall be digital quality and shall be submitted on a CD. B The photographs shall show on a non-elective chalkboard or white board,readable in the photograph: 1. Job number. 2. Date and time photographs were taken. 3. Location of the photograph,house number and street, along with the project number. C Indicate the condition of the following: 1. Esplanades and boulevards. 2. Yards (near side and far side of street). 3. House-walk and sidewalk. 4. Curb. 5. Area between walk and curb. 6. Particular features (yard lights, shrubs, fence, trees, etc.). 7. Date shall be on negative. 8. Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction of shot on a key plan of the Project Site. D Sufficient number of photographs shall be taken to show the existence or non- existence of cracked concrete and the condition of trees, shrubs and grass. E Identify each photograph with an applied label or rubber stamp on the back with the following information: 1. Name of the Project. 2. Name and address of the photographer(if a professional photographer is used). 3. Name of the Contractor. 4. Date the photograph was taken. 5. Photographs to be in plastic pockets and bound in three-ring notebook for easy access and viewing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Prior to the commencement of the Work, take photographs of the entire route of the Project Site. 01/2008 01380-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 3.02 POST-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Following the completion of the Work,take photographs from corresponding vantage points and direction of shots. 3.03 ,PROCESS PHOTOGRAPHS A Take photographs at intervals, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment and submit on CD with monthly Application for Payment. B Select the vantage points for each shot each month to best show the status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken. Take not less than two (2) shots from the same vantage point creating a time-lapsed sequence. C Follow direction when given by the Project Managerlin selecting vantage points. END OF SECTION 01/2008 01380-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Section 01420 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A General quality assurance as related to Reference Standards and a list of references. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street,N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit,MI 48219-0150 AGC Associated General Contractors of America ' 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AI Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park,MD 20740 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 02/2008 01420- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue,Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington,DC 20036 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma,WA 98411 API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street, N.W. Washington,DC 20005 AREA American Railway Engineering Association 50 F Street, N.W. Washington,DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda,MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 35104 Miami,FLr33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 02/2008 01420-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue,N.W. Washington,DC 20036 CRD U.S.A. Corps of Engineers Code of Ordinances City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,TX 77581 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains, NY 10604 FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration 5600 Fisher Lane Rockville, MD 20857-0001 FS Federal Standardization Documents General Services Administration, Specifications Unit(WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington,DC 20406 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineer Association P.O. Box 440 S. Yarmouth,MA 02664 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway,NJ 0855-1331 MIL Military Specifications General Services Administration, Specifications Unit(WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington,DC 20406 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P. O. Box 986 Katy,TX 77450 02/2008 01420-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers'Association 2101 L Street, N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park,P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor, Government Printing Office Washington,DC 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie,IL 60077-1083 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh,PA 15213 TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P. O. Box 13087 Austin,TX 78711-3087 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation 125 East 11th Street Austin, TX 78701-2483 Texas MUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (2003 Adoption) (published by Texas Department of Transportation) UL Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook,IL 60062 UNI-BELL UNI-BELL Pipe Association 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 02/2008 01420-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Dallas,TX 75234 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 942 Main Street—Suite 300 Hartford, CT 06103 WWD/PI Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation P.O. Box 12157 Austin,TX 78711 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01420-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL Section 01430 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Quality assurance and control of installation and manufacturer's field services and reports. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce the Work of specified quality at no additional cost to the Owner. B Comply fully with manufacturers' installation instructions, including each step in sequence. - C Request clarification from Project Manager before proceeding should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents. D Comply with specified Standards as minimum requirements for the Work except when more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E Perform work by persons qualified to produce the specified level of workmanship. F Obtain copies of Standards and maintain at Project Site when required by individual Technical Specifications. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A When specified in individual Technical Specifications, provide material or product suppliers' or manufacturers' technical representative to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment, operator training, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate operation,as required. Conform to minimum time requirements for start-up operations and operator training if defined in Technical Specifications. 02/2008 01430- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL B At the Project Manager's request, submit qualifications of manufacturer's representative to Project Manager fifteen (15) days in advance of required representative's services. The representative shall be subject to approval of Project Manager. C Manufacturer's representative shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. Submit report within one(1)day of observation to Project Manager for review. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01430-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND OBSERVATION SERVICES Section 01440 OBSERVATION SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Observation services and references. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 INSPECTION A Project Manager will appoint an Observer as a representative of the Owner to oversee inspections,tests,and other services specified in individual Technical Specifications. B Alternately, Project Manager may appoint, employ, and pay an independent firm to provide additional observation or construction management services as indicated in Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. C Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Project Manager,Engineer,and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the Observer;furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, and storage. E Contractor shall notify Project Manager 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. Notify Engineer and independent firm when noted. F Contractor shall sign and acknowledge report for Observer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 09/2009 01440- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Section 01450 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Testing Laboratory Services and Contractor responsibilities related to those services. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American-Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3740, "Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" b. ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" 1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A Owner will select,employ,and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing identified in individual Technical Specifications. B Employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C Owner or designated representative shall schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoid'delay to the Work. D Contractor shall be responsible for paying for services of commercial testing laboratory, with prior approval of Owner, to perform the following: 1. Pipe diameter deflection tests on all flexible and semi-rigid sanitary sewer collection system pipe installation 2. Laboratory services required to establish mix design proposed for use for Portland cement concrete, asphaltic concrete mixtures and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory when required because of change in source of materials or other conditions not caused by Owner. 3. Tests required to establish optimum moisture of earth and base materials and to determine required compactive effort to meet density requirements. 4. Cores to test for thickness. 5. Testing and inspection performed for the Contractor's convenience. 6. Retesting and repetitions of laboratory services when initial tests indicate work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 04/2008 01450- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.03 LABORATORY REPORTS A The Engineer will receive 1 copy,the Project Manager will receive 2 copies, and the Contractor will receive 2 copies of Laboratory Reports from the testing laboratory. One of the Contractor's copies shall remain at the Project Site for duration of Project. Test results which indicate non-conformance shall be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratory to the Contractor and Project Manager. 1.04 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A Notify Project Manager and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify Engineer if specification section requires the presence of the Engineer. B Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on Project Site. C Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D Provide samples to laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. E Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work Labe tested;to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested; and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. F Arrange with laboratory and pay for: 1. Retesting required for failed tests. 2. Retesting for nonconforming Work. 3. Additional sampling and tests requested by Contractor for his own purposes. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 04/2008 01450-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 3.01 CONDUCTING TESTING A Laboratory sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329,as well as other test standards specified in individual Technical Specifications. ' END OF SECTION • 04/2008 01450-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary facilities and the necessary controls for the Work including utilities, telephone, sanitary facilities, field office, storage sheds and building, safety requirements,first aid equipment,fire protection,security measures,protection of the Work and property, access roads and parking, environmental controls, disposal of trash,debris,and excavated material,pest and rodent control,water runoff and erosion control. B References to Technical Specifications: Section 00200—Instructions to Bidders Section 01100—Summary of Work Section 01350—Submittals Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation Section 01100—Summary of Work Section 01600—Material&Equipment Section 01570—Trench Safety System Section 01555 —Traffic Control &Regulation Section 01720—Field Surveying Section 01563 —Tree&Plant Protection Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water Section 13730- Computer Equipment C Referenced Standards: Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas D Definitions: Underground Structures - sewer, water, gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical and signal conduits, tunnels, and other existing subsurface installations located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Surface Structures -existing buildings, structures and other constructed installations above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any extension below the surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to buildings,tanks,walls,bridges, roads, dams, channels, open drainage,piping,poles, 12-2-2011 01500- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, guard cables, fencing, and other facilities that are visible above the ground surface. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A The facilities and controls specified in this Section are considered minimum for the Work. The Contractor may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet Contractor's responsibilities for protection of persons and property. B Comply with applicable requirements specified in other Technical Specifications. Maintain and operate temporary facilities and systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to original condition. 1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A Temporary Service Make arrangements with utility service companies for such temporary services as are necessary to construct the work and manage the site. Abide by rules and regulations of the utility service companies or authorities having jurisdiction. Be responsible for utility service costs until the Work is Substantially Complete. Included are fuel,power,light,heat,and other utility services necessary for execution, completion,testing, and initial operation of the Work. B Water Provide water required for and in connection with Work to be performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices, or for other use as required for proper completion of the Work. For water to be drawn from public water supply, obtain special permit or license and _ meter from the proper City officials. For facilities under construction, establish a 12-2-2011 01500-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS water/sewer billing account with City's Utility Billing Department.A deposit based on rates established by latest ordinance will be required. For water drawn from fire hydrants,apply for and receive a construction water meter from City'Public Works Department. Identify specific location for construction water meter installation. Once installed,water meter may not be moved without notification of Public Works Department.Install backflow preventer on fire hydrant supply if not included in City provided meter. Provide and maintain an adequate supply of potable water for domestic consumption by Contractor personnel. C Electricity and Lighting 1 Provide temporary electric power service in Contractor's name, as required for the prosecution of the Work, including testing of Work. Provide power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's equipment, or for any other use by Contractor or as necessary to maintain any of Owner's on-going operations as may continue on the site during any scheduled shutdown. Minimum lighting level shall be 5 foot-candles for open areas; 10 foot-candles for stairs and shops. 2 Provide permanent electric power service,in the Contractor's name,to the work or site as and when required by the schedule of the work to achieve Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. D Natural Gas Provide and pay for natural gas service to the work as and when required by the schedule to achieve Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. E Temporary Heat and Ventilation Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of the Work. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions; maintain enclosed areas at a minimum of 50 degrees F. F Telephone Provide emergency telephone service at the Project Site for use by Contractor personnel and others performing work or furnishing services. G Sanitary Facilities Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on the Project Site,in compliance with federal, state, and local regulations. Locate toilets on the Project Site near the work and secluded from view insofar as possible. Keep toilets clean and supplied throughout the course of the Work. 12-2-2011 01500-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Enforce the use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at the Project Site. Such facilities shall be enclosed. Pit-type toilets will not be permitted. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause a nuisance or health problem; have sewage and waste hauled off-site and properly disposed in accordance with local regulations. Control areas where sanitary facilities are located in conformance with Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 1.06 FIELD OFFICE A Provision of a Field Office and other specific temporary facilities as required in paragraph B below UNLESS otherwise stated in Section 00800 - Special Conditions of the Agreement,or Section 01100—Summary of Work. Provide for transportation,move-in,set-up,tie-down and,when project is complete,removal and move-out. The Contractor shall confirm location of office and other temporary facilities with Owner's Representative at Pre-Construction Meeting prior to delivery and set up. Location of temporary facilities shall be approved by the Owner's Representative by way of the submittal process. B. At a minimum, the Contractor's field office shall provide for, contain or serve to: provide a secured space for project administrative operations, periodic progress meetings,on-site storage for project files and plans,office space for CONTRACTOR's field supervisory personnel and provide a separate securable office space for OWNER's Representative including: meeting table and chairs, a single two drawer filing cabinet,a built-in drawing table and plan holders. Provide electric lighting and HVAC to the mobile office. 1. Field Office shall provide for, at a minimum, a high speed interne connection for use by Owner's Representative or Construction Manager as controlled by Paragraph A above. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Provide for storage of materials under the provisions of Section 01600—Material & Equipment. 1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A Contractor shall prepare, submit and follow a Safety Program that complies with federal, state, and local safety codes, statutes, and practices. Include in the Safety Program documented response to excavation, embankment, and trench safety requirements as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety System. B Conduct operations in strict accord with applicable federal,state and local safety codes and statutes and with good construction practice. The Contractor is fully responsible and obligated to establish and maintain procedures for safety of all work, personnel and equipment involved in the Work. C Observe and comply with Texas Occupational Safety Act (Art. 5182a, V.C.S.) and with all safety and health standards promulgated by Secretary of Labor under Section 12-2-2011 01500-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 107 of Contract Work Hours and Standards Act,published in OSHA Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and adopted by Secretary of Labor under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and to any other legislation enacted for safety and health of Contractor employees. Such safety and health standards apply to subcontractors and their employees as well as to the Contractor and its employees. D Observance of and compliance with the regulations shall be solely and without qualification the responsibility of the Contractor without reliance or superintendence of or direction by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative. Immediately advise the Engineer of investigation or inspection by Federal Safety and Health inspectors of the Contractor or subcontractor's work or place of work on the Project Site under this Contract,and after such investigation or inspection,advise the Engineer of the results. Submit one copy of accident reports to Engineer within ten(10)days of occurrence. E Protect areas occupied by workmen using the best available devices for detection of lethal and combustible gases. Test such devices frequently to assure their functional capability. Constantly observe infiltration of liquids into the Work area for visual or odor evidence of contamination. Take immediate and appropriate steps to seal off entry of contaminated liquids to the Work area. F Safety measures, including but not limited to safety personnel, first-aid equipment, ventilating equipment and safety equipment,in the Plans and Technical Specifications are obligations of the Contractor. G Maintain required coordination with the local Police and Fire Departments during the entire period covered by the Contract. 1.09 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A Provide a first aid kit throughout the construction period. List telephone numbers for physicians,hospitals, and ambulance services in each first aid kit. B Have at least one person thoroughly trained in first aid procedures present on the Project Site whenever work is in progress. 1.10 FIRE PROTECTION A Fire Protection Standards. Conform to specified fire protection and prevention requirements as well as those that may be established by Federal, State, or local governmental agencies. B. Comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA Standard No. 241, Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations. Provide portable fire extinguishers,rated not less than 2A or 5B in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10,Portable Fire Extinguishers,for each temporary building,and for every 3000 square feet of floor area of facilities under construction. Locate portable fire extinguishers within 50 feet maximum from any point on the Project Site. 12-2-2011 01500-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C. Fire Prevention and Safety Measures. Prohibit smoking in hazardous areas. Post suitable warning signs in areas that are continuously or intermittently hazardous. Use metal safety containers for storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids. Do not store flammable or combustible liquids in or near stairways or exits. Maintain clear exits from all points within a structure. 1.11 SECURITY MEASURES A Protect all materials, equipment, and property associated with the Work from loss, theft,damage,and vandalism. Contractor's duty to protect property includes Owner's property. B If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction, provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing as approved by Owner's Representative. 1.12 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES A Prevent damage to existing public utilities during construction. These utilities are shown on the Plans at their approximate locations. Give owners of these utilities at least 48 hours notice before commencing Work in the area, for locating the utilities during construction, and for making adjustments or relocation of the utilities when they conflict with the proposed Work. 1.13 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Preventive Actions. Take precautions, provide programs, and take actions necessary to protect the Work and public and private property from damage. Take action to prevent damage, injury or loss, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Store apparatus,materials,supplies,and equipment in an orderly,safe manner that will not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or the Work of any other contractor, any utility service company, or the Owner's operations. b. Provide suitable storage for materials that are subject to damage by exposure to weather,theft, breakage, or otherwise. c. Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work. d. Frequently clean up refuse,rubbish,scrap materials,and debris caused by construction operations,keeping the Work safe and orderly. e. Provide safe barricades and guard rails around openings, for scaffolding, for temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas. 12-2-2011 01500-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Obtain written consent from proper parties before entering or occupying with workers, tools,materials or equipment,privately owned land except on easements provided for construction. Assume full responsibility for the preservation of public and private property on or adjacent to the site. If any direct or indirect damage is done by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in execution of the Work by the Contractor, it shall be restored by the Contractor to a condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage was done. B Barricades and Warning Signals. Where Work is performed on or adjacent to any roadway, right-of-way, or public place, furnish and erect barricades,fences, lights,warning signs, and danger signals; provide watchmen;and take other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and protection of the Work.Conform to Section 01555—Traffic Control& Regulation. C Preserving Control Points Maintain permanent benchmarks,public or private elevation or property demarcation and control monumentation, or other reference points. Unless otherwise directed in writing,replace at no cost to the Owner,those monuments,property corners or other permanent demarcations that are damaged or destroyed in accordance with Section 01720—Field Surveying. D Tree and Plant Protection. Protect trees,shrubs,lawns,outside of grading limits and within the grading limits as designated on the Plans,and in accordance with requirements of.Section 01563—Tree &Plant Protection. E Protection of Underground and Surface Structures Known underground structures, including water, sewer, electric, and telephone services are shown on the Plans in accordance with the best information available,but is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. Contractor is responsible for making Locate Calls. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of utility services. Restore to original condition damages to underground structure at no additional cost to the Owner. Immediately notify the agency or company owning any existing utility which is damaged,broken,or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Engineer and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent. Necessary changes in location of the Work may be made by the Engineer to avoid unanticipated underground structures. If permanent relocation of an underground structure or other subsurface installations is required and not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents,the Engineer will direct Contractor in writing to perform the Work, which shall be paid for under the 12-2-2011 01500-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS provisions for changes in the Contract Price as described in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. Support in place and protect from direct or indirect injury to underground and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Install such supports carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before installing structure supports,Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the owner of the structure. Avoid moving or in any way changing the property of public utilities or private service corporations without prior written consent of a responsible official of that service or public utility. Representatives of these utilities reserve the right to enter within the limits of this project for the purpose of maintaining their properties,or of making such changes or repairs to their property that may be considered necessary by performance of this Contract. Notify the owners and/or operators of utilities and pipelines of the nature of construction operations to be performed and the date or dates on which those operations will be performed. When construction operations are required in the immediate vicinity of existing structures,pipelines,or utilities,give a minimum of five • (5)working days advance notice. Probe and flag the location of underground utilities prior to commencement of excavation. Keep flags in place until construction operations reach and uncover the utility. Assume risks attending the presence or proximity of underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits to the Work including but not limited to damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by the Work to any structure. Immediately repair damage caused, to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure. 1.14 PROTECTION OF THE WORK Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed,prior to completion of the Work. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment,materials, and surfaces. 1.15 ROADS AND PARKING A Prevent interference with traffic and Owner operations on existing roads. B Minimize use of existing streets and driveways by construction traffic. C Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment,materials, and surfaces. D Construct and maintain temporary detours, ramps, and roads to provide for normal public traffic flow when use of public roads or streets is closed by necessities of the Work. E Provide mats or other means to prevent overloading or damage to existing roadways • from tracked equipment or exceptionally large or heavy trucks or equipment 12-2-2011 01500-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS F Designate temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. Locate as approved by Engineer. G Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment unnecessarily in existing parking areas. 1.16 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as necessary for controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas. B Comply with statutes,regulations,and ordinances which relate to the proposed Work for the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources, including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, PL 91- 190, Executive Order 11514. C Provide, install and maintain storm water runoff control including but not limited to temporary entrance, silt fencing, etc. as specified in Contract Documents. D Recognize and adhere to the environmental requirements of the Project. Disturbed areas shall be strictly limited to boundaries established by the Contract Documents. Burning of rubbish, debris or waste materials is not permitted. 1.17 POLLUTION CONTROL A Provide methods,means,and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil,water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site,and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems in conformance with TPDES requirements and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. D Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. E Use equipment during construction that conforms to current federal, state, and local laws and regulations. 1.18 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A Provide rodent and pest control as necessary to prevent infestation of Project Site. B Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect conditions at the Project Site or adjoining properties. 12-2-2011 01500-9of10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A Provide vehicles, equipment, and construction activities that minimize noise to the greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to OSHA Standards- 29 CFR and in no case will noise levels be permitted which create a nuisance in the surrounding neighborhoods. B Conduct construction operations during daylight hours from 7:30 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. except as approved by Engineer. C Comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Codes of Ordinances, City of Pearland,Texas. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A Control objectionable dust caused by operation of vehicles and equipment under the provisions of Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 1.21 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A Provide methods to control surface water,runoff,subsurface water,and water pumped from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the Project Site, or adjoining properties in accordance with Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water and Section 01566—Source.Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. B Inspect earthwork periodically to detect any evidence of the start of erosion. Apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 12-2-2011 01500- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND _ MOBILIZATION Section 01505 MOBILIZATION 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A Mobilization of construction equipment and facilities onto the Work. B Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) 2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices(Texas MUTCD) 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Mobilization is on a Lump Sum basis and shall not exceed three percent(3%) of the total bid price. B. Payment for 50% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the first monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Schedule of Values (Section 01350—Submittals) 2. Trench Safety Program(Section 01570—Trench Safety System) 3. Construction Schedule(Section 01350—Submittals) 4. Pre-construction Photographs (Section 01380—Construction Photographs) 5. Installation and acceptance of Project Identification Sign(s)(Section 01580—Project Identification Signs) 6. Installation and acceptance of Field Office (Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) 7. Installation and acceptance of TPDES requirements (Section 01565 TPDES Requirements) C. Payment for 25% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Installation of High Speed Internet Access (Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) D. Payment for 15% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the third monthly Application for Payment. E. Payment for the remaining 10% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item maybe included in the fourth monthly Application for Payment. F. For contracts with a duration of less than 120 days,payment for the remaining 50% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the items listed in B. and C. above, as applicable. 08/2018 01505- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION G. Mobilization payments will be subject to Retainage as stipulated in Section 00700 General Conditions of Agreement. 2.1 PRODUCTS 2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Provide specified number of project identification sign(s)per Section 01580. The name, address and contact information of the general contractor for the project shall be shown on the sign per Section 01580 and the attached exhibit. 3.1 EXECUTION 3.2 PLACEMENT OF PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Place a Project Identification Sign as described in Section 01580,part 1.03,D visible to passing traffic or as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION t � 08/2018 01505- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS Section 01550 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION,EXITS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of erosion and sediment control for Stabilized Construction Exits used during construction and until final development of the Project site. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01565—TPDES Requirements 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required in this Section under'the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on Geotextile fabric. C Sieve analysis of aggregates conforming to requirements in this Section,2.02"Course Aggregates". 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A Provide woven or non-woven geotextile fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a minimum grab strength of 270 psi any principal direction, and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Both the geotextile and threads shall be resistant to chemical attack,mildew, and rot and shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable life at a temperature range of 0°F to 120°F. 12/2015 01550- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS D Representative Manufacturers: Mirafi, Inc., Or-Equal. 2.02 COARSE AGGREGATES A Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone,gravel,concrete,crushed blast furnace slag,or a combination of these materials. Aggregate shall be composed of clean,hard, durable materials free from adherent coatings,salt, alkali,dirt,clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials, or organic and injurious matter. B Course aggregates shall be open graded with a size 3"to 6". 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A The Contractor shall provide stabilized construction exits at the construction,staging, parking, storage, and disposal areas to keep the street clean of mud carried by construction vehicle and equipment. Such erosion and sediment controls shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within the Project Site until acceptance of the Work or until directed by the Engineer to remove and discard the existing system. Maintenance shall be performed routinely to remove soil build up or, as required by the Engineer. D Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of stabilized construction exits. Unless otherwise directed, maintain them until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove stabilized construction exits promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. E Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems, including vegetative systems shall be repaired immediately. F Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation and Section 01565 TPDES Requirements. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide stabilized access roads, subdivision roads, parking areas, and other on-site -- vehicle transportation routes where shown on Plans. 12/2015 01550-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS B Provide stabilized construction exits, and truck washing areas when approved by Engineer, of the sizes and locations where shown on Plans or as specified in this Section. C Vehicles leaving construction areas shall have their tires cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right-of-way. When washing is needed to remove sediment, Contractor shall construct a truck washing area. Truck washing shall be done on stabilized areas which drain into a drainage system protected by erosion and sediment control measures. D Details for Stabilized Construction Exits are shown on the Plans. Construction of all other stabilized areas shall be to the same requirements. Roadway width shall be at least 14 feet for one-way traffic and 20 feet for two-way traffic and shall be sufficient for all ingress and egress. Furnish and place geotextile fabric as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of coarse aggregate with underlying soil. Exposure of geotextile fabric to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to minimize damage potential. E Roads and parking areas shall be graded to provide sufficient drainage away from stabilized areas. Use sandbags,gravel,boards,or similar methods to prevent sediment from entering public right-of-way, receiving stream or storm water conveyance system. F The stabilized areas shall be inspected and maintained daily. Provide periodic top dressing with additional coarse aggregates to maintain the required depth. Repair and clean out damaged control measures used to trap sediment. All sediment spilled, dropped,washed,or tracked onto public right-of-way shall be removed immediately. G The length of the stabilized area shall be as shown on the Plans, but not less than 50 feet. The thickness shall not be less than 8 inches. The width shall not be less than full width of all points of ingress or egress. H Stabilization for other areas shall have the same coarse aggregate,thickness,and width requirements as the stabilized construction exit,except where shown otherwise on the Plans. I Stabilized area may be widened or lengthened to accommodate truck washing area when authorized by Engineer. J Alternative methods of construction may be utilized when shown on Plans, or when approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 12/2015 01550-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS Section 01554 STREET SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Materials, hardware and installation of Traffic Signs. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Signs installed or replaced will be measured by the each sign. Signs refurbished will be measured by each sign. B Payment for installation of traffic signs will be on the basis of each sign installed. C The price is full compensation for furnishing and installing new signs and hardware.Cost of associated posts, footings, and miscellaneous mounting hardware will not be paid for directly but is to be included in the unit price bid for installation of each traffic sign. D Non-standard signs installed or replaced will be measured by the square foot of the sign face. Non-standard signs shall not be installed without prior approval from the City 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Contractor shall submit a list of intended suppliers and products to be used for all signs, posts, and associated hardware. City reserves the right to request actual product samples prior to approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. 12/2015 01554- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS B The following ASTM Standards and documents, of the issue in effect on the date of Invitation for Bid, form a part of this specification to the extent herein. 1. ASTM B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM D 523 Standard Method for Test for Specular Gloss 3. ASTM D 4956 Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control. 4. ASTM E 284 Standard Definition of Terms Relating to Appearance of Materials. 5. ASTM E 308 Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System 6. ASTM E 810 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Retroreflection of Retroreflective Sheeting. 7. ASTM E 1164 Standard Practice for Obtaining Spectrophotometric Data for Object-Color Evaluation. C Substrate (Sign Blanks)—This shall be aluminum alloy 5052-R38. The thickness of sign shall be 0.125 inch with 3/4"radius corner. 1. Metal working—The aluminum shall be free of burrs and pits on both sides, including edges and holes, and shall be made ready for applications of sheeting. 2. Surface preparation—The aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased with solvent and alkaline emulsions cleaner by immersion, spray, or vapor degreasing and dried prior to application of the gold chromate sheeting coat. The aluminum shall be new and corrosion-free with holes drilled or punched, corners round to radii 3/4" and all edges smoothed prior to application of sheeting. The heavy or medium chromate coating shall conform in color and corrosion resistance to that imparted by the Alodine 1200F treatment. 3. Size—The dimension of substrate application for regulatory, warning, and guide signs shall be as specified by the Engineer and as shown on the plans. D Sign Face (Background, Legends, Symbols, and Colors) — These shall be in accordance with the Standard Highway Signs Designs(SHSD)for Texas and with the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD) 1. Street Name shall be constructed from Avery Dennison OL—2007 Green Electronic Cutable Film,using Highway B Series Font, 6"Upper/Lower case, 3" Suffix for St., Dr., Ave. designations. Signs shall have a Y2"White Border. a. Tolerance for Horizontal Alignment- Letters, numerals and symbols shall be horizontally aligned to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. b. Tolerance for Vertical Alignment— Letters, numerals, and symbols shall be vertically aligned to a tolerance of 1/16 inch on each letter in each line. 2. All sign blanks shall be covered with Avery Dennison T—7500 White Vinyl reflective sheeting. 3. Signs requiring"No Outlet" or"Dead End" designations shall be constructed from Avery Dennison Black PC—500— 190—O Vinyl, 2 1/4" 12/2015 01554-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS upper case lettering. Arrow shall be 1 1/4"x 4 1/4"Long, overlaid with Avery Dennison OL—2001 Yellow electronic Cutable Film 5 ''A"x 8". E Street Name Sign shall have a 3/4"x 3/4" City of Pearland dating sticker indicating the month and year of manufacture of each sign. Dating sticker shall be applied to the White Reflective Vinyl, covered by the Green EC film in the manufacturing process. F Avery Dennison is the approved manufacturer of vinyls for the City of Pearland.Any substitutions will require submission of sample materials and specifications sheets to the City Of Pearland Traffic Operations manager prior to use.Any and all components are to be match components.Uses of non-matching components are prohibited. G Sign Posts - Steel post shall conform to the standard specification for hot rolled carbon sheet steel, structural quality, ASTM designation'A570, Grade 50. Average minimum yield strength after cold forming is 60,000 psi. 1. The location, height, size and the foundation of the sign post shall conform to the City's standard detail. 2. The signs shall be installed using RPB412F— 12"Round Post Cap and RPB412F— 12" Cross Piece Brackets. Posts caps shall be attached to sign post using 5/16" Carriage Bolts and 5/16"Tuff Nuts. Signs are to be attached to brackets using same. H Warranty-The Contractor shall warrant the materials and workmanship of each sign in accordance with the maximum limits of material warranties extended by manufacturers of raw materials, subject to the conditions they specify. The retro- reflective sheeting will be considered unsatisfactory if it has deteriorated due to natural causes to the extent that: (1)the sign is ineffective for its intended purpose when viewed from a moving vehicle under normal day and night driving conditions; or (2) the coefficient of retro-reflection is less than the minimum specified for that sheeting. When sign failure occurs prior to the minimum years indicated and an inspection demonstrates that the failure is caused by materials warranted to contractor to endure at least that long, the sign will be replaced or repaired free of materials charges. When failure occurs and inspection demonstrates that such failure is due to poor workmanship, the sign will be replaced or repaired at Contractor's expense, including shipping charges. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT The contractor shall provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A Construction shall be high quality with no visible defects in the finished product. Fabrication shall be in accordance with these specifications. Street name signs 12/2015 01554-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS shall always be supplied and installed at each project intersection whether signs previously existed at the location or not. B The removal of existing signs shall be coordinated with the Traffic Operations Section of the Public Works Department (281-652-1900) and arrangements made for a convenient time to deliver City signs and poles. All salvaged traffic signs shall be delivered to the Traffic Operations Center located at 2559 Hillhouse Road, Pearland. All deliveries to the Traffic Operations Center requires a minimum notice of two (2) working days prior to returning or delivering any sign and/or sign related material. 3.03 RESPONSIBILITIES A The contractor is responsible for providing and supplying aluminum traffic signs covered with retro-reflective sheeting, applying standard legends (or special legends if shown in the plans) to the covered sign blanks, galvanized steel sign poles,pole anchors, all hardware for installing the signs and poles, and for installing traffic signs, poles and anchors as shown in the plans or call for in the contract documents, complete and ready for field installations. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and_restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. END OF SECTION 12/2015 01554-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION Section 01555 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.0 GENERAL • 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for traffic control plans,signs,signals,control devices,flares,lights and traffic signals, as well as construction parking control, designated haul routes and bridging of trenches and excavations. B Requirements for and qualifications of Flaggers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Traffic Control and Regulation. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Traffic Control and Regulation,including submittal of a traffic control plan if different from the one provided on the Plans, provision of traffic control devices, and provision of equipment and personnel as necessary to protect the Work and the public. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for traffic control and regulation. B Flaggers. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Flaggers as required for the Work. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for Flaggers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B A Traffic Control Plan responsive to the Texas MUTCD and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer is incorporated into the Plans. If the Contractor proposes to implement traffic control different than the plan provided, he shall submit a Traffic Control Plan in conformance with Texas MUTCD for approval of the Engineer. C For both the Traffic Control Plan and Flaggers' use, submit Schedules of Values within 30 days following the Notice to Proceed. D Each week submit a daily log for Flaggers listing name,badge number,time start,time finish, and hours worked. 03/2008 01555- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.04 FLAGGERS A Unless otherwise specified,use only Flaggers who are off-duty,regularly employed, uniformed Peace Officers. B Flaggers are required at the following locations: 1. Where multi-lane vehicular traffic must be diverted into single-lane vehicular traffic. 2. Where vehicular traffic must change lanes abruptly. 3. Where construction equipment either enters or crosses vehicular traffic lanes and walks. 4. Where construction equipment may intermittently encroach on vehicular traffic lanes and unprotected walks and cross-walks. 5. Where construction activities might affect public safety and convenience. 6. Where traffic regulation is needed due to rerouting of vehicular traffic around the work site. 7. When requested by Owner. C The use of Flaggers is for the purpose of assisting in the regulation of traffic flow and movement, and does not in any way relieve the contractor of full responsibility for taking such other steps and provide such other Flaggers or personnel as the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the work and the public, and does not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any damage for which he would otherwise be liable. Flaggers shall be used and maintained at such points for such periods of time as may be required to provide for the public safety and convenience of travel. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNS,SIGNALS,AND DEVICES A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. B Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by agencies having jurisdiction. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PUBLIC ROADS A Abide by laws and regulations of governing authorities when using public roads. If the Contractor's work requires that public roads be temporarily impeded or closed, approvals shall be obtained from governing authorities and permits paid for before starting any work. Coordinate activities with the Engineer. B Contractor shall maintain at all times a 10-foot-wide all-weather lane adjacent to work areas which shall be kept free of construction equipment and debris and shall be for the use of emergency vehicles, or as otherwise provided in the Traffic Control Plan. 03/2008 01555-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION C Contractor shall not obstruct the normal flow of traffic from 7:00 a.m.to 9:00 a.m.and 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on designated major arterials or as directed by the Engineer. D Contractor shall maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all times. E Cleanliness of Surrounding Streets: 1. Keep streets used for entering or leaving the job area free of excavated material, debris, and any foreign material resulting from construction operations. Leave the area broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of the work day. F Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking,and access by emergency vehicles. G Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles in existing facilities. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. H Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas. 3.02 FLARES AND LIGHTS A Provide flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. 3.03 HAUL ROUTES A Utilize haul routes designated by Owner or shown on the Plans for construction traffic. B Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and minimize interference with public traffic. D Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by vehicles utilizing haul routes. 3.04 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A Install traffic control devices at approaches to the site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. B Relocate traffic signs and control devices as Work progresses to maintain effective traffic control. 3.05 BRIDGING TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS A Whenever necessary,bridge trenches and excavation to permit an unobstructed flow of traffic. 03/2008 01555-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION B Secure bridging against displacement by using adjustable cleats,angles,bolts or other devices whenever bridge is installed: 1. On an existing bus route; 2. When more than five percent of daily traffic is comprised of commercial or truck traffic; 3. When more than two separate plates are used for the bridge; or 4. When bridge is to be used for more than five consecutive days. C Install bridging to operate with minimum noise. D Adequately shore the trench or excavation to support bridge and traffic. E Extend steel plates used for bridging a minimum of one foot beyond edges of trench or excavation. Use temporary paving materials (premix) to feather edges of plates to minimize wheel impact on secured bridging. F Use steel plates of sufficient thickness to support H-20 loading, truck or lane, that produces maximum stress. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. D Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01555-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE Section 01560 FILTER FABRIC FENCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of filter fabric fence to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants from overland flow. Filter fabric fence is not for use in channelized flow areas. Filter fabric fence may be reinforced. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion&Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Filter fabric fence will be measured by the linear foot between the limits of the beginning and ending of wooden stakes. B Payment for filter fabric fence will include arid be full compensation for all labor, equipment,materials,supervision,and all incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other Product Data on geotextile fabric. 03/2008 01560- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction,a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric fence as specified in this Section, 3.02F. Unless otherwise directed,maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. D _ Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide filter fabric fence systems in accordance with the Plan detail for Filter fabric fence. Filter fabric fence shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. B Attach the filter fabric to 2-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 8 inches. If filter fabric is factory preassembled 03/2008 01560-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE with support netting,then maximum spacing allowable is 8 feet. Install wooden stakes at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff. C Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground. E Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary,splice the Fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. F Inspect filter fabric fence systems after each rainfall,daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the fence or 6 inches, whichever is less. • END OF SECTION 03/2008 01560-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER Section 01561 REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES • A Installation of reinforced filter fabric barrier to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants in channelized flow areas. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion &Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for reinforced filter fabric barrier is on a linear foot basis between the limits of the beginning and ending fence posts, measured, accepted, and complete in place. B Payment for filter fabric barrier will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, supervision, and incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction.. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on geotextile fabric. 05/2008 01561 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM - D4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction,a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi,Inc., or equal. 2.02 FILTER FABRIC REINFORCEMENT A Provide woven galvanized steel wire fence with minimum thickness of 14 gauge and a maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches. B Welded wire shall be galvanized, 2-inch by 4-inch, welded wire fabric, 121/2 gauge. 2.03 EXECUTION 2.04 PREPARATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric barrier. Unless otherwise directed,maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 1562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 05/2008 01561 -2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 2.05 INSTALLATION A Install reinforced filter fabric barriers for erosion and sediment control used during construction and until the final development of the Project Site. Reinforced filter fabric barriers are used to retain sedimentation in channelized flow areas. B Provide reinforced filter fabric barrier in accordance with the Plan detail for Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier. Reinforced filter fabric barrier systems shall be installed in such a manner that runoff will percolate through the system and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. C Trench in the toe of the reinforced filter fabric barrier with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Reinforced filter fabric barrier shall have a height of 18 inches. E Securely fasten the filter fabric to the wire with tie wires. F Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary,splice the fabric together only at a suprt a minimum oeal securely. G Inspect po the reinforcedpostwith filterini fabricu6-inch barrier systemsverlap and afters each rainfall, daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the barrier or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION 05/2008 01561 -3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL Section 01562 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion&Sedimentation 3. Section 01600—Materials &Equipment 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Obtain and submit applicable permits for proposed disposal sites. C Submit a Waste Material Disposal Plan. D Submit a copy of written permission from property owners,along with a description of the property,prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project Site. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. City of Pearland requires individual fill placement permits for all fill placed within the City limits. 1.04 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL PLAN A Contractor shall formulate and implement a plan for the collection and disposal of waste materials on the Project Site which includes the following information: 1. Schedule for collection and inspection. 2. Location of trash and waste receptacles. 3. Provisions for liquid waste and potential water pollutants material. B The plan shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local health and safety regulations and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion &Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 2 07/2006 01562- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A Excavated material: When indicated on Plans, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at a location or locations outside the limits of Project Site. B Base, surface, and bedding material: Deliver gravel, asphaltic, or other base and surfacing material designated for salvage to the location designated by the Engineer. C Pipe culvert: Deliver culverts designated for salvage to Owner's storage area. D Other salvageable materials: Conform to requirements of individual Technical Specifications. E Coordinate delivery of salvageable material with Engineer. F When temporary, on-site storage of salvaged materials is required, comply with applicable provisions of Section 01600—Materials &Equipment. 3.02 SEDIMENT DISPOSAL A Remove sediment deposits and dispose of them at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a spoil site is not designated on the Plans, dispose of sediment off site at a location not in or adjacent to a stream or floodplain. _ B Off-site disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. C Sediment to be placed at the Project Site should be spread evenly throughout the designated area,compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way. D If sediment has been contaminated,it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.03 EXCESS MATERIAL,WASTE,AND EQUIPMENT A Vegetation,rubble,broken concrete,debris,asphaltic concrete pavement,excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage,shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the Project Site and legally disposed of. B Dispose of removed equipment,materials,waste and debris in a manner conforming to applicable laws and regulations C Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the Project Site when written permission is obtained from property owner under the provisions of this Section, 1.03D. 07/2006 01562-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL D Verify the flood plain status of any proposed disposal site. Do not dispose of excavated materials in an area designated as within the 100-year Flood Hazard Area. E Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis, such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition. F No materials shall be disposed in a manner to damage the.Owner in any way. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01562-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Section 01563 • TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tree and plant protection. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT • A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage,branch,trunk,or root damage that could result from construction operations. B Prevent following types of damage: 1. Compaction of root zone by foot or vehicular traffic, or material storage. 2. Trunk damage from equipment operations,material storage, or from nailing or bolting. 3. Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires or machine impacts. 4. Root poisoning from spilled solvents, gasoline,paint, and other noxious materials. 5. Branch damage due to improper pruning or trimming. 6. Damage from lack of water due to: a. Cutting or altering natural water migration patterns near root zones. b. Failure to provide adequate watering. 7. Damage from alteration of soil pH factor caused by depositing lime, concrete,plaster, or other base materials near roots. 8. Cutting feeder of roots or roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 1.04 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT A When trees, other than those designated for removal,are destroyed or badly damaged as a result of construction operations,remove and replace with same size,species,and variety up to and including 8 inches in trunk diameter. Trees larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be replaced with an 8-inch diameter tree of the same species and variety and total contract amount will be reduced by an amount determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: 0.7854 x D2 x $10.00 where D is diameter in inches of tree or shrub trunk measured 12 inches above grade. B All necessary tree replacements shall be as approved by Engineer/Urban Forester. 02/2013 01563- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Asphalt paint: Emulsified asphalt or other adhesive, elastic, antiseptic coating formulated for horticultural use on cut or injured plant tissue,free from kerosene and coal creosote. B Burlap: Suitable for use as tree wrapping. C Fertilizer: Liquid containing 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorus, and 5 percent potash. D. Temporary Barrier Fence: Plastic, bright orange color for visibility, 48 inches in height, 8.5 pounds weight minimum. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS A Except for trees and shrubs shown on Plans to be removed,all trees and shrubs within the Project Site area are to remain and be protected from damage. B For designated trees to be removed,perform the following: 1. Stake right-of-way limits and identify any tree of diameter greater than 4 inches which is to be removed. Mark trees prior to felling with an X in orange paint, clearly visible, on the trunk, and at eye level. 2. After marking trees give a minimum of 48-hours notice in writing to the Engineer of intent to begin felling operations. 3. Trees whose trunks are only partially in the right-of-way shall be protected and preserved as described below. C For trees or shrubs to remain,perform the following: 1. Trim trees and shrubs only as necessary. a. Trees and shrubs requiring pruning for construction should also be pruned for balance as well as to maintain proper form and branching habit. b. Cut limbs at branch collar. No stubs should remain on trees. Branch cuts should not gouge outer layer of tree structure or trunk. 2. Use extreme care to prevent excessive damage to root systems. a. Roots in construction areas will be cut smoothly with a trencher before excavation begins. Do not allow ripping of roots with a backhoe or other equipment. b. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. c. Cover exposed roots with soil as soon as possible. 3. Prevent damage or compaction of root zone(area inside dripline)by construction activities. a. Do not allow scarring of trunks or limbs by equipment or other means. 02/2013 01563-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION b. Do not store construction materials, vehicles, or excavated material inside dripline of trees. c. Do not pour liquid materials inside dripline. 4. Water and fertilize trees and shrubs that will remain to maintain their health during construction period. a. Supplemental watering of landscaping during construction should be done once a week in months receiving average rainfall and twice a week in months receiving below average rainfall. b. This watering shall consist of saturating soils at least 6 to 8 inches beneath surface. 5. Water areas currently being served by private sprinkler systems while systems are temporarily taken out of service to maintain health of existing landscapes. 6. At option of the Contractor and with the Engineer's permission, trees and shrubs to remain may be temporarily transplanted and returned to original positions under supervision of professional horticulturist. 3.02 PROTECTIVE CONTROLS A Protection of trees or shrubs in open area: 1. Install steel drive-in fence posts in protective circle, approximately 8 feet on center, at the dripline of the leaf canopy of trees or 2 ft. around shrubs. 2. Drive steel drive-in fence posts 3 feet minimum into ground, leaving 5 feet minimum above ground. 3. For trees or shrubs in paved areas,use moveable posts constructed from concrete-filled steel pipe 2-1/2 inches minimum in diameter mounted in rubber auto tires filled with concrete. 4. Mount plastic temporary barrier safety fence on posts. B Timber-wrap protection for trees in close proximity of moving or mechanical equipment and construction work: 1. Wrap trunk with layer of burlap. 2. Install 2 x 4's or 2 x 6's (5-foot to 6-foot lengths)vertically, spaced 3 inches to 5 inches apart around circumference of tree trunk. 3. Tie in place with 12 to 9 gage steel wire. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF NEWLY PLANTED TREES A Water newly planted trees adequately to maintain and support healthy plants at the time of planting. B The Contractor guarantees that trees planted for this Work shall remain alive and healthy at least until the end of a one-year warranty period. 1. Within four weeks of notice from Owner, Contractor shall replace, at his expense, any dead trees or any trees that in the opinion of Owner, have become unhealthy or unsightly or have lost their natural shape as a result of additional growth, improper pruning or maintenance, or weather conditions. 02/2013 01563 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2. When tree must be replaced, the guarantee period for that tree shall begin on date of replacement of tree, subject to the Owner's inspection, for no less than one year. 3. Straighten leaning trees and bear entire cost. 4. Dispose of trees rejected at any time by Engineer at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02/2013 01563-4 of 4 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER Section 01564 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER AND SURFACE WATER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Dewatering,depressurizing,draining,and maintaining trench and structure excavations and foundation beds in dry and stable condition. B Protecting work against surface runoff and rising flood waters. C Disposing of removed water. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 4. Section 01565—TPDES Requirements 5. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion&Sedimentation E Referenced Standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 2. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 3. Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas 4. Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council (WWD/PI) F Definitions: 1. Ground Water Control Systems-installations external to the excavation such as well points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering and depressurization. a. Dewatering-lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations and disposing of removed water. The intent of dewatering is to increase stability of excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations;reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material;prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations; and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures and other installations. b. Depressurization-reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom. 2. Surface Water Control- diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water away from the excavation. 3. Excavation Drainage-keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 02/2008 01564- 1 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for and control of ground water for open cut pipe excavations shall be on a linear foot basis and shall not exceed the length of open cut pipe installation in the area requiring ground water control. 7- Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for control of ground water for any condition(s) other than those described in this Section, 1.02A. No separate payment will be made for control of surface water. Include the cost to control non-pipe excavation ground water and surface water in price for Work requiring such controls. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan for review by the Engineer prior to start of any field work. The plan shall be signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. The plan shall include the following: 1. Results of subsurface investigation and description of the extent and characteristics of water bearing layers subject to ground water control. 2. Names of equipment suppliers and installation subcontractors. 3. A description of proposed ground water control systems indicating arrangement, location, depth and capacities of system components, installation details and criteria, and operation and maintenance procedures. 4. A description of proposed monitoring and control system indicating depths and locations of piezometers and monitoring wells, monitoring installation details and criteria, type of equipment and instrumentation with pertinent data and characteristics. 5. A description of proposed filters including types, sizes, capacities and manufacturer's application recommendations. 6. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed systems for intended applications. Define potential area of influence of ground water control operation near contaminated areas. 7. Operating requirements, including piezometric control elevations for dewatering and depressurization. 8. Excavation drainage methods including typical drainage layers, sump pump application and other necessary means. 9. Surface water control and drainage installations. 10. Proposed methods and locations for disposing of removed water. C Submit the following records upon completed initial installation: 1. Installation and development reports for well points, eductors, and deep wells. 02/2008 01564-2 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 2. Installation reports and baseline readings for piezometers and monitoring wells. 3. Baseline analytical test data of water from monitoring wells. 4. Initial flow rates. D' Submit the following records on a weekly basis during operations: 1. Records of flow rates and piezometric elevations obtained during monitoring of dewatering and depressurization. Refer to this Section, 3.02 "Requirements for Eductor,Well Points, or Deep Wells". 2. Maintenance records for ground water control installations,piezometers, and monitoring wells. E Submit the following records at end of the Work. Decommissioning(abandonment) reports for monitoring wells and piezometers installed by other during the design phase and left for Contractor's monitoring and use. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Conduct subsurface investigations to identify groundwater conditions and to provide parameters for design,installation, and operation of groundwater control systems. B Design a ground water control system, compatible with the requirements of OSHA Standards - 29 CFR,Part 1926, and Section 01570-Trench Safety Systems of these Technical Specifications, to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting excavations. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties,buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage,boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C Ground water control systems may include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water,as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E Provide ditches,berms,pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water from excavation and other work areas. F Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 02/2008 01564-3 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and any • settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells,or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. I Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. J Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B Comply with TCEQ regulations and WWD/PI Advisory Council for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C Obtain permit from TCEQ under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES),for storm water discharge from construction sites. Refer to Section 01565— TPDES, 3.02 "Certification Requirements". D Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of groundwater and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. E Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. F Implement control of ground and surface water under the provisions of Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion &Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. Selected equipment and materials are subject to review 02/2008 01564-4 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER of the Engineer through Submittals required in Section 01350 — Submittals, 1.06 "Operations and Maintenance Data". B Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, must be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells,and devices,such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. D All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. E Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND WATER CONTROL A Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers,piezometric pressures,and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine the drawdown characteristics of the water-bearing layers. The results shall be presented in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. Refer to this Section, 1.03B. B Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the Plan. Notify Engineer in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Provide revised drawings and calculations with such notification. D Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E Monitor operations.to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the Plan. 02/2008 01564-5 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Maintain water level below subgrade elevation. Do not allow levels to rise until foundation concrete has achieved design strength. H During backfilling,dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. I Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical, provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout when pipe is removed from service. J Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced,such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means of draining the affected portion of underground system,including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L Compact backfill as required by the Contract Documents. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR,WELL POINTS,OR DEEP WELLS A For aboveground piping in ground water control system,include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are predrained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation. D Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations,but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is predrained by an existing system such that the criteria of the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan are satisfied. 02/2008 01564-6 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER E Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F Provide additional ground water control installations or change the methods in the event that the installations according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03A. G Mechanical dewatering equipment shall comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland,Texas. 3.03 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained, stable trench conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of the following methods or combination of methods: 1. Sump pumping in combination with: a. Layer of crushed stone and filter fabric. b. Sand and gravel drains. 2. Wells for ground water control. B Use sump pumping and a drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D 2321,placed on the foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material. 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area. Keep system in good operating condition. B Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the Engineer. 3.05 MONITORING AND RECORDING A Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. 02/2008 01564-7 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER B Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Engineer's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.06 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through use of dikes, ditches,curb walls,pipes,sumps or other approved means. The requirement includes temporary works required to protect adjoining properties from surface drainage caused by construction operations. B Divert surface water and seepage water into sumps and pump it into drainage channels or storm drains, when approved by agencies having jurisdiction. Provide settling basins when required by such agencies. C Provide additional surface water control measures or change the methods in the event that the measures according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03B. END OF SECTION 02/2008 01564-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL A As used herein and in conjunction with TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000,the term OPERATOR refers to the CONTRACTOR. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A Description of the required documentation to be prepared,signed and submitted by the Contractor before conducting construction operations, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)General Permit as issued March 5, 2003, re-issued March 5, 2013, and re-issued March 5, 2018, by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality under the provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Section 26.040 of the Texas Water Code. B Contractor's responsibility for implementation,maintenance,and inspection of storm water pollution prevention control measures including,but not limited to,erosion and sediment controls,storm water management plans,waste collection and disposal,off- site vehicle tracking,and other practices shown on the Plans or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specifications.This Specification provides guidelines and Best Management Practices (BMP's) information for the Contractor to use in adhering to all local, state and federal environmental regulations with respect to storm water pollution prevention during construction activity. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01310—Coordination&Meetings 3. Section 01770—Contract Closeout D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) E Other References: 1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP) found in Appendix A of these Technical Specifications. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 08/2018 01565- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIRED NOTICES A The Contractor shall complete,sign, and date the Contractor's Notice of Intent(NOI) attached in Appendix A. The signed copy of the Contractor's NOI shall be returned to the TCEQ. It is contractor's responsibility to pay for any fees associated with the permit. Submission of the NOI is required by both the Owner and the Contractor before construction operations start. B Upon completion of construction and acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Contractor shall complete, sign, and date the Contractor's Notice of Termination (NOT) attached in Appendix A. 3.02 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A On the Operator's Information form attached in Appendix A, the Contractor shall complete name, address, and telephone number for the Contractor; the names of persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures and all Subcontractors. B The Contractor and Subcontractors named in the Contractor's Information form shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's/Subcontractor's Certification form, attached in Appendix A. C The persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's Inspection and Maintenance Certification form, attached in Appendix A. D The Contractor's Information form and all certification forms shall be submitted to the Owner before beginning construction. E Contractor shall review implementation of the SWPPP in a meeting with the Owner and Engineer prior to start of construction in accordance with Section 01310 — Coordination&Meetings. 3.03 RETENTION OF RECORDS A The Contractor shall keep a copy of the SWPPP at the Project Site or at the Contractor's office from the date that it became effective to the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. B At Contract Closeout,the Contractor shall submit to the Owner all TPDES forms and certifications, as well as a copy of the SWPPP, in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. The SWPPP records and data will be retained by Owner for a period of 3 years from the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. 08/2018 01565-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.04 POSTING OF NOTICES A The following notices shall be posted from the date that this SWPPP goes into effect until the date the Work is accepted by the Owner: 1. Copies of the Notices of Intent submitted by the Owner and Contractor and a brief Description of Construction Activity being conducted at the Project Site, as given in Article 1 of the SWPPP, shall be posted at the Project Site or at Contractor's office in a prominent place for public viewing. 2. Notice to drivers of equipment and vehicles, instructing them to stop, check, and clean tires of debris and mud before driving onto traffic lanes. Post such notices at every stabilized construction exit area. 3. In an easily visible location on Project Site,post a notice of waste disposal procedures. 4. Notice of hazardous material handling and emergency procedures shall be posted with the NOI on Project Site. Keep copies of Material Safety Data Sheets at a location on Project Site that is known to all personnel. 5. Keep a copy of each signed certification at the Project Site or at Contractor's office. APPENDIX A FOLLOWS THIS SECTION END OF SECTION i 08/2018 01565-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS (APPENDIX A) Table of Contents TCEQ General Permit NOI TCEQ Form 20022 TCEQ Form—20134 NOC TCEQ Form—20023 Site Notice Forms 08/2018 01565-4 of 4 General Permit to Discharge Under TCEQ the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities TXR150000 Effective March 5, 2018 printed on TEXAS COMMISSION ON ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY recycled paper Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P.O.Box 13087,Austin,Texas 78711-3087 h( GENERAL PERMIT TO DISCHARGE UNDER THE TEXAS POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM under provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code This permit supersedes and replaces TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000,issued March 5,2013 Construction sites that discharge stormwater associated with construction activity located in the state of Texas may discharge to surface water in the state only according to monitoring requirements and other conditions set forth in this general permit,as well as the rules of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ or Commission),the laws of the State of Texas,and other orders of the Commission of the TCEQ. The issuance of this general permit does not grant to the permittee the right to use private or public property for conveyance of stormwater and certain non-stormwater discharges along the discharge route. This includes.property belonging to but not limited to any individual,partnership,corporation or other entity. Neither does this general permit authorize any invasion of personal rights nor any violation of federal,state,or local laws or regulations. It is the responsibility of the permittee to acquire property rights as may be necessary to use the discharge route. This general permit and the authorization contained herein shall expire at midnight,five years from the permit effective date. EFFECTIVE DATE: March 5,2018 ISSUED DATE: Z.-g For he Co fission TPDES GENERAL PERMIT NUMBER TXR150000 RELATING TO STORMWATER DISCHARGES ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Table of Contents Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions 5 Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required 5 Section B. Definitions 6 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage 13 Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 13 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity 13 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities 13 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges 13 4. Other Permitted Discharges 14 Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out 14 Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 14 1. Post Construction Discharges 14 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges 14 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards 14 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)Requirements 14 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone 15 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas 16 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities 16 8. Indian Country Lands 16 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation 16 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities 16 11. Endangered Species Act 16 12. Other 17 Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Large Construction Activities 17 2. Small Construction Activities 17 Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion. 17 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: 18 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities. 20 5. Effective Date of Coverage 20 6. Notice of Change(NOC) 21 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices 22 8. Contents of the NOI 22 Section F. Terminating Coverage 23 1. Notice of Termination(NOT)Required 23 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT 23 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites 24 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control 24 Section G. Waivers from Coverage 25 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage 25 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver 26 3. Effective Date of a LREW 26 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period 26 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 27 1. Individual Permit Alternative 27 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges 27 -, 3. Individual Permit Required 27 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization 27 Section I. Permit Expiration 27 Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) 28 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development 29 Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 29 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications 29 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control 30 Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation,Implementation,and Compliance 30 Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 30 Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s 31 Section F. Contents of SWP3 31 Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites 40 Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants 42 Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 42 Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs)and SWP3 Requirements 44 Page 3 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges 46 Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements 46 Part VI. Retention of Records 47 Part VII.Standard Permit Conditions 47 Part VIII. Fees 48 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization 5o Appendix B: Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas 52 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map 53 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas 54 Page 4 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required When calculating the acreage of land area disturbed,include the disturbed land-area of all construction and construction support activities. How much land will be disturbed?(*1) <1 acre 1 or more acres (*I) (*I) NO Do you meet the }Es Will 5 or more definition of r acres be disturbed? "operator?"(*2) (*1) NO YES • Permit Coverage Required • Prepare and Implement SWP3 • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of Site Notice to MS4 Operator • V L l Are you a"primary NO operator?"(*2) et Permit Coverage Not YES Required.Unless Part Permit Coverage Required of a Larger Common • Prepare and Implement SWP3 Plan of Development • Submit NOI to TCEQ or Sale • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of NOI to MS4 Operator (*1) To determine the size of the construction project,use the size of the entire area to be disturbed,and include the size of the larger common plan of development or sale,if the project is part of a larger project(refer to Part I.B., "Definitions,"for an explanation of"common plan of development or sale'). (*2) Refer to the definitions for"operator,"`primary operator,"and"secondary operator"in Part 1., Section B.of this permit. Page 5 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section B. Definitions Arid Areas-Areas with an average annual rainfall of o to 10 inches. Best Management Practices(BMPs)-Schedules of activities,prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures,structural controls,local ordinances,and other management practices to prevent or reduce the discharge of pollutants. BMPs also include treatment requirements,operating procedures,and practices to control construction site runoff,spills or leaks,waste disposal,or drainage from raw material storage areas. Commencement of Construction-The initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavation activities,as well as other construction-related activities (e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition). Common Plan of Development-A construction activity that is completed in separate stages,separate phases,or in combination with other construction activities. A common plan of development(also known as a"common plan of development or sale")is identified by the documentation for the construction project that identifies the scope of the project,and may include plats,blueprints,marketing plans,contracts,building permits,a public notice or hearing,zoning requests,or other similar documentation and activities. A common plan of development does not necessarily include all construction projects within the jurisdiction of a public entity(e.g.,a city or university). Construction of roads or buildings in different parts of the jurisdiction would be considered separate"common plans,"with only the interconnected parts of a project being considered part of a"common plan"(e.g.,a building and its associated parking lot and driveways,airport runway and associated taxiways,a building complex,etc.). Where discrete construction projects occur within a larger common plan of development or sale but are located 1/4 mile or more apart,and the area between the projects is not being disturbed,each individual project can be treated as a separate plan of development or sale,provided that any interconnecting road,pipeline or utility project that is part of the same"common plan"is not included in the area to be disturbed. Construction Activity-Includes soil disturbance activities,including clearing,grading, excavating,construction-related activity(e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition),and construction support activity. This does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site (e.g.,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities). Regulated construction activity is defined in terms of small and large construction activity. Construction Support Activity—A construction-related activity that specifically supports construction activity,which can involve earth disturbance or pollutant-generating activities of its own,and can include,but are not limited to,activities associated with concrete or asphalt batch plants,rock crushers,equipment staging or storage areas,chemical storage areas,material storage areas,material borrow areas,and excavated material disposal areas. Construction support activity must only directly support the construction activity authorized under this general permit. Dewatering—The act of draining rainwater or groundwater from building foundations, vaults,and trenches. Discharge—For the purposes of this permit,the drainage,release,or disposal of pollutants in stormwater and certain non-stormwater from areas where soil disturbing activities(e.g., clearing,grading,excavation,stockpiling of fill material,and demolition),construction materials or equipment storage or maintenance(e.g.,fill piles,borrow area,concrete truck wash out,fueling),or other industrial stormwater directly related to the construction process (e.g.,concrete or asphalt batch plants)are located. Drought-Stricken Area—For the purposes of this permit,an area in which the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration's U.S.Seasonal Drought Outlook indicates for the period during which the construction will occur that any of the following conditions are Page 6 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 likely: (1)"Drought to persist or intensify", (2)"Drought ongoing,some improvement",(3) "Drought likely to improve,impacts ease",or(4)"Drought development likely". See http://www.cpc.ncep.noaa.gov/products/expert assessment/seasonal drought.html. Edwards Aquifer-As defined under Texas Administrative Code(TAC)§213.3 of this title (relating to the Edwards Aquifer),that portion of an arcuate belt of porous,water-bearing, predominantly carbonate rocks known as the Edwards and Associated Limestones in the Balcones Fault Zone trending from west to east to northeast in Kinney,Uvalde,Medina, Bexar,Comal,Hays,Travis,and Williamson Counties; and composed of the Salmon Peak Limestone,McKnight Formation,West Nueces Formation,Devil's River Limestone,Person Formation,Kainer Formation,Edwards Formation,and Georgetown Formation. The permeable aquifer units generally overlie the less-permeable Glen Rose Formation to the south,overlie the less-permeable Comanche Peak and Walnut Formations north of the Colorado River,and underlie the less-permeable Del Rio Clay regionally. Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone-Generally,that area where the stratigraphic units constituting the Edwards Aquifer crop out,including the outcrops of other geologic formations in proximity to the Edwards Aquifer,where caves,sinkholes,faults,fractures,or other permeable features would create a potential for recharge of surface waters into the Edwards Aquifer. The recharge zone is identified as that area designated as such on official maps located in the offices of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and the appropriate regional office. The Edwards Aquifer Map Viewer,located at http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html,can be used to determine where the recharge zone is located. Edwards Aquifer Contributing Zone-The area or watershed where runoff from precipitation flows downgradient to the recharge zone of the Edwards Aquifer. The contributing zone is located upstream(upgradient)and generally north and northwest of the recharge zone for the following counties: all areas within Kinney County,except the area within the watershed draining to Segment No.2304 of the Rio Grande Basin; all areas within Uvalde,Medina,Bexar,and Comal Counties; all areas within Hays and Travis Counties, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Colorado River above a point 1.3 miles upstream from Tom Miller Dam,Lake Austin at the confluence of Barrow Brook Cove, Segment No.14o3 of the Colorado River Basin;and all areas within Williamson County, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Lampasas River above the dam at Stillhouse Hollow reservoir,Segment No.1216 of the Brazos River Basin. The contributing zone is illustrated on the Edwards Aquifer map viewer at http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html. Effluent Limitations Guideline(ELG)—Defined in 4o Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) §122.2 as a regulation published by the Administrator under§3o4(b)of the Clean Water Act(CWA)to adopt or revise effluent limitations. Facility or Activity—For the purpose of this permit,referring to a construction site,the location of construction activity,or a construction support activity that is regulated under this general permit,including all contiguous land and fixtures(for example,ponds and materials stockpiles),structures,or appurtenances used at a construction site or industrial site. Final Stabilization-A construction site status where any of the following conditions are met: (a) All soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and a uniform(that is, evenly distributed,without large bare areas)perennial vegetative cover with a density of at least 7o%of the native background vegetative cover for the area has been established on all unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures,or equivalent permanent stabilization measures(such as the use of riprap,gabions,or geotextiles) have been employed. Page 7 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (b) For individual lots in a residential construction site by either: (1) the homebuilder completing final stabilization as specified in condition(a)above; or (2) the homebuilder establishing temporary stabilization for an individual lot prior to the time of transfer of the ownership of the home to the buyer and after informing the homeowner of the need for,and benefits of,final stabilization.If temporary stabilization is not feasible,then the homebuilder may fulfill this requirement by retaining perimeter controls or BMPs,and informing the homeowner of the need for removal of temporary controls and the establishment of final stabilization. Fulfillment of this requirement must be documented in the homebuilder's stormwater pollution prevention plan(SWP3). (c) For construction activities on land used for agricultural purposes(such as pipelines across crop or range land),final stabilization may be accomplished by returning the disturbed land to its preconstruction agricultural use. Areas disturbed that were not previously used for agricultural activities,such as buffer strips immediately adjacent to surface water and areas that are not being returned to their preconstruction agricultural use must meet the final stabilization conditions of condition(a)above. (d) In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas only,all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and both of the following criteria have been met: (1) Temporary erosion control measures(for example,degradable rolled erosion control product)are selected,designed,and installed along with an appropriate seed base to provide erosion control for at least three years without active maintenance by the operator,and (2) The temporary erosion control measures are selected,designed,and installed to achieve 7o%of the native background vegetative coverage within three years. Hyperchlorination of Waterlines—Treatment of potable water lines or tanks with chlorine for disinfection purposes,typically following repair or partial replacement of the waterline or tank,and subsequently flushing the contents. Impaired Water-A surface water body that is identified as impaired on the latest approved CWA§3o3(d)List or waters with an EPA-approved or established total maximum daily load(TMDL)that are found on the latest EPA approved Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b)and 3o3(d),which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. Indian Country Land—All land within the limits of any Indian reservation under the jurisdiction of the United States government,notwithstanding the issuance of any patent, and,including rights-of-way running through the reservation; (2)all dependent Indian communities with the borders of the United States whether within the originally or subsequently acquired territory thereof,and whether within or without the limits of a state; and(3)all Indian allotments,the Indian titles to which have not been extinguished, including rights-of-way running through the same. (4o CFR§122.2) Indian Tribe-Any Indian Tribe,band,group,or community recognized by the Secretary of the Interior and exercising governmental authority over a Federal Indian Reservation(40 CFR§122.2). Infeasible—Not technologically possible,or not economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. (40 CFR§450.11(b)). Large Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. Large construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than five(5)acres of total Page 8 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500o0 land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land; Large construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities.) Linear Project—Includes the construction of roads,bridges,conduits,substructures, pipelines,sewer lines,towers,poles,cables,wires,connectors,switching,regulating and transforming equipment and associated ancillary facilities in a long,narrow area. Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW)-A written submission to the executive director from an operator of a construction site that is considered as small construction activity under the permit,which qualifies for a waiver from the requirements for small construction activities,only during the period of time when the calculated rainfall erosivity factor is less than five(5). Minimize-To reduce or eliminate to the extent achievable using stormwater controls that are technologically available and economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(MS4)-A separate storm sewer system owned or operated by the United States,a state,city,town,county,district,association,or other public body(created by or pursuant to state law)having jurisdiction over the disposal of sewage,industrial wastes,stormwater,or other wastes,including special districts under state law such as a sewer district,flood control or drainage district,or similar entity,or an Indian tribe or an authorized Indian tribal organization,that discharges to surface water in the state. Notice of Change(NOC) —Written notification to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this permit,providing changes to information that was previously provided to the agency in a notice of intent form. Notice of Intent(NOI)-A written submission to the executive director from an applicant requesting coverage under this general permit. Notice of Termination(NOT)-A written submission to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this general permit requesting termination of coverage. Operator-The person or persons associated with a large or small construction activity that is either a primary or secondary operator as defined below: Primary Operator—the person or persons associated with construction activity that meets either of the following two criteria: (a) the person or persons have on-site operational control over construction plans and specifications,including the ability to make modifications to those plans and specifications;or (b) the person or persons have day-to-day operational control of those activities at a construction site that are necessary to ensure compliance with a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3)for the site or other permit conditions(for example,they are authorized to direct workers at a site to carry out activities required by the SWP3 or comply with other permit conditions). Secondary Operator—The person or entity,often the property owner,whose operational control is limited to: (a) the employment of other operators,such as a general contractor,to perform or supervise construction activities;or Page 9 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (b) the ability to approve or disapprove changes to construction plans and specifications, but who does not have day-to-day on-site operational control over construction activities at the site. Secondary operators must either prepare their own SWP3 or participate in a shared SWP3 that covers the areas of the construction site,where they have control over the construction plans and specifications. If there is not a primary operator at the construction site,then the secondary operator is defined as the primary operator and must comply with the requirements for primary operators. Outfall-For the purpose of this permit,a point source at the point where stormwater runoff associated with construction activity discharges to surface water in the state and does not include open conveyances connecting two municipal separate storm sewers,or pipes, tunnels,or other conveyances that connect segments of the same stream or other water of the U.S.and are used to convey waters of the U.S. Permittee-An operator authorized under this general permit. The authorization maybe gained through submission of a notice of intent,by waiver,or by meeting the requirements for automatic coverage to discharge stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction activity. Point Source—Any discernible,confined,and discrete conveyance,including but not limited to,any pipe,ditch,channel,tunnel,conduit,well,discrete fissure,container,rolling stock concentrated animal feeding operation,landfill leachate collection system,vessel or other floating craft from which pollutants are,or may be,discharged. This term does not include return flows from irrigated agriculture or agricultural stormwater runoff(4o CFR §122.2). Pollutant-Dredged spoil,solid waste,incinerator residue,sewage,garbage,sewage sludge, filter backwash,munitions,chemical wastes,biological materials,radioactive materials,heat, wrecked or discarded equipment,rock,sand,cellar dirt,and industrial,municipal,and agricultural waste discharged into any surface water in the state. The term"pollutant"does not include tail water or runoff water from irrigation or rainwater runoff from cultivated or uncultivated rangeland,pastureland,and farmland. For the purpose of this permit,the term "pollutant"includes sediment. Pollution-The alteration of the physical,thermal,chemical,or biological quality of,or the contamination of,any surface water in the state that renders the water harmful,detrimental, or injurious to humans,animal life,vegetation,or property or to public health,safety,or welfare,or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose(Texas Water Code(TWC) §26.001(14)). Rainfall Erosivity Factor(R factor)-the total annual erosive potential that is due to climatic effects,and is part of the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE). Receiving Water-A"Water of the United States"as defined in 4o CFR§122.2 or a surface water in the state into which the regulated stormwater discharges. Semiarid Areas-areas with an average annual rainfall of 10 to 20 inches. Separate Storm Sewer System-A conveyance or system of conveyances(including roads with drainage systems,streets,catch basins,curbs,gutters,ditches,man-made channels,or storm drains),designed or used for collecting or conveying stormwater;that is not a combined sewer,and that is not part of a publicly owned treatment works(POTW). Small Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than one(1)acre and less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than one(1)acre of total land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than one(1)and Page 10 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities). Steep Slopes—Where a state,Tribe,local government,or industry technical manual(e.g. stormwater BMP manual)has defined what is to be considered a"steep slope",this permit's definition automatically adopts that definition. Where no such definition exists,steep slopes are automatically defined as those that are 15 percent or greater in grade. Stormwater(or Stormwater Runoff)-Rainfall runoff,snow melt runoff,and surface runoff and drainage. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity-Stormwater runoff,as defined above,from a construction activity. Structural Control(or Practice)-A pollution prevention practice that requires the construction of a device,or the use of a device,to reduce or prevent pollution in stormwater runoff. Structural controls and practices may include but are not limited to:silt fences, earthen dikes,drainage swales,sediment traps,check dams,subsurface drains,storm drain inlet protection,rock outlet protection,reinforced soil retaining systems,gabions,and temporary or permanent sediment basins. Surface Water in the State- Lakes,bays,ponds,impounding reservoirs,springs,rivers, streams,creeks,estuaries,wetlands,marshes,inlets,canals,the Gulf of Mexico inside the territorial limits of the state(from the mean high water mark(MHWM)out 10.36 miles into the Gulf),and all other bodies of surface water,natural or artificial,inland or coastal,fresh or salt,navigable or non-navigable,and including the beds and banks of all water-courses and bodies of surface water,that are wholly or partially inside or bordering the state or subject to the jurisdiction of the state; except that waters in treatment systems which are authorized by state or federal law,regulation,or permit,and which are created for the purpose of waste treatment are not considered to be water in the state. Temporary Stabilization-A condition where exposed soils or disturbed areas are provided a protective cover or other structural control to prevent the migration of pollutants. Temporary stabilization may include temporary seeding,geotextiles,mulches,and other techniques to reduce or eliminate erosion until either permanent stabilization can be achieved or until further construction activities take place. Thawing Conditions—for the purposes of this permit,thawing conditions are expected based on the historical likelihood of two or more days with daytime temperatures greater than 32 T. This date can be determined by looking at historical weather data. Note: The estimation of thawing conditions is for planning purposes only. During construction,the permittee will be required to conduct site inspections based upon actual conditions(i.e.,if thawing conditions occur soonerthan expected,the permittee will be required to conduct inspections at the regular frequency). Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)-The total amount of a pollutant that a water body can assimilate and still meet the Texas Surface Water Quality Standards. Turbidity—A condition of water quality characterized by the presence of suspended solids and/or organic material. Waters of the United States-Waters of the United States or waters of the U.S.means: (a) all waters which are currently used,were used in the past,or may be susceptible to use in interstate or foreign commerce,including all waters which are subject to the ebb and flow of the tide; (b) all interstate waters,including interstate wetlands; Page ii Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (c) all other waters such as intrastate lakes,rivers,streams(including intermittent streams),mudflats,sandflats,wetlands,sloughs,prairie potholes,wet meadows, playa lakes,or natural ponds that the use,degradation,or destruction of which would affect or could affect interstate or foreign commerce including any such waters: (1) which are or could be used by interstate or foreign travelers for recreational or other purposes; (2) from which fish or shellfish are or could be taken and sold in interstate or foreign commerce;or (3) which are used or could be used for industrial purposes by industries in interstate commerce; (d) all impoundments of waters otherwise defined as waters of the United States under this definition; (e) tributaries of waters identified in paragraphs(a)through(d)of this definition; (f) the territorial sea; and (g) wetlands adjacent to waters(other than waters that are themselves wetlands) identified in paragraphs(a)through(f)of this definition. Waste treatment systems,including treatment ponds or lagoons designed to meet the requirements of CWA are not waters of the U.S. This exclusion applies only to manmade bodies of water which neither were originally created in waters of the U.S.(such as disposal area in wetlands)nor resulted from the impoundment of waters of the U.S. Waters of the U.S.do not include prior converted cropland. Notwithstanding the determination of an area's status as prior converted cropland by any other federal agency,for the purposes of the CWA,the final authority regarding CWA jurisdiction remains with EPA. Page 12 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from small and large construction activities may be authorized under this general permit. 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction support activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit maybe authorized,provided that the following conditions are met: (a) the construction support activities are located within one(1)mile from the boundary of the construction site where the construction activity authorized under the permit is being conducted that requires the support of these activities; (b) an SWP3 is developed for the permitted construction site according to the provisions in Part III.F of this general permit,and includes appropriate controls and measures to reduce erosion and the discharge of pollutants in stormwater runoff according to the provisions in Part III.G of this general permit; (c) the activities are directly related to the construction site; (d) the activities are not a commercial operation,nor serve other unrelated construction projects;and (e) the activities do not continue to operate beyond the completion of the construction activity at the project it supports. Construction support activities that operate outside the terms provided in(a)through(e) above must obtain authorization under a separate Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)permit,which may include the TPDES Multi Sector General Permit(MSGP),TXRo50000(related to stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity),an alternative general permit(if available),or an individual water quality permit. 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges The following non-stormwater discharges from sites authorized under this general permit are also eligible for authorization under this general permit: (a) discharges from fire-fighting activities(fire-fighting activities do not include washing of trucks,run-off water from training activities,test water from fire suppression systems,or similar activities); (b) uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings(excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life),which include flushings from systems that utilize potable water,surface water,or groundwater that does not contain additional pollutants(uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings do not include systems utilizing reclaimed wastewater as a source water); (c) water from the routine external washing of vehicles,the external portion of buildings or structures,and pavement,where detergents and soaps are not used, where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred(unless spilled materials have been removed;and if local state,or federal regulations are applicable,the materials are removed according to those regulations),and where the purpose is to remove mud,dirt,or dust; Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (d) uncontaminated water used to control dust; (e) potable water sources,including waterline flushings,but excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life; (f) uncontaminated air conditioning condensate; (g) uncontaminated ground water or spring water,including foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materials such as solvents; and (h) lawn watering and similar irrigation drainage. 4. Other Permitted Discharges Any discharge authorized under a separate National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES),TPDES,or TCEQ permit may be combined with discharges authorized by this general permit,provided those discharges comply with the associated permit. Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out The wash out of concrete trucks at regulated construction sites must be performed in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 1. Post Construction Discharges Discharges that occur after construction activities have been completed,and after the construction site and any supporting activity site have undergone final stabilization,are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Discharges originating from the sites are not authorized under this general permit following the submission of the notice of termination(NOT)or removal of the appropriate site notice,as applicable,for the regulated construction activity. 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges Except as otherwise provided in Part II.A of this general permit,only discharges that are composed entirely of stormwater associated with construction activity may be authorized under this general permit. 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards Discharges to surface water in the state that would cause,have the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or that would fail to protect and maintain existing designated uses of surface water in the state are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. The executive director may require an application for an individual permit or alternative general permit(see Parts II.H.2 and 3.)to authorize discharges to surface water in the state if the executive director determines that any activity will cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or is found to cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to,the impairment of a designated use. The executive director may also require an application for an individual permit considering factors described in Part II.H.3 of this general permit. 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)Requirements The permittee shall determine whether the authorized discharge is to an impaired water body on the latest EPA-approved CWA Section 3o3(d)List or waters with an EPA- approved or established TMDL that are found on the latest EPA-approved Texas Page 14 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b)and 303(d), which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. New sources or new discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired waters are not authorized by this permit unless otherwise allowable under 30 TAC Chapter 305 and applicable state law. Impaired waters are those that do not meet applicable water quality standard(s)and are listed as category 4 or 5 in the current version of the Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality,and waterbodies listed on the CWA§ 3o3(d)list.Pollutants of concern are those for which the water body is listed as impaired. Discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired water bodies for which there is a TMDL are not eligible for coverage under this general permit unless they are consistent with the approved TMDL. Permittees must incorporate the conditions and requirements applicable to their discharges into their SWP3,in order to be eligible for coverage under this general permit. For consistency with the construction stormwater-related items in an approved TMDL,the SWP3 must be consistent with any applicable condition,goal,or requirement in the TMDL,TMDL Implementation Plan(I-Plan),or as otherwise directed by the executive director. 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone Discharges cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 30 TAC Chapter 213(relating to Edwards Aquifer). In addition,commencement of construction (i.e.,the initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavating activities,as well as other construction-related activities such as stockpiling of fill material and demolition)at a site regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213,may not begin until the appropriate Edwards Aquifer Protection Plan(EAPP)has been approved by the TCEQ's Edwards Aquifer Protection Program. (a) For new discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,or within that area upstream from the recharge zone and defined as the Contributing Zone (CZ),operators must meet all applicable requirements of,and operate according to, 3o TAC Chapter 213(Edwards Aquifer Rule)in addition to the provisions and requirements of this general permit. (b) For existing discharges located.within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,the requirements of the agency-approved Water Pollution Abatement Plan(WPAP) under the Edwards Aquifer Rule is in addition to the requirements of this general permit. BMPs and maintenance schedules for structural stormwater controls,for example,may be required as a provision of the rule. All applicable requirements of the Edwards Aquifer Rule for reductions of suspended solids in stormwater runoff are in addition to the requirements in this general permit for this pollutant. (c) For discharges located within ten stream miles upstream of the Edwards Aquifer recharge zone,applicants shall also submit a copy of the NOI to the appropriate TCEQ regional office. Counties: Comal,Bexar,Medina,Uvalde, and Kinney Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager San Antonio Regional Office 14250 Judson Road San Antonio,Texas 78233-4480 (210)490-3096 Counties: Williamson,Travis,and Hays Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager Austin Regional Office 12100 Park 35 Circle Page 15 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Room 179,Building A Austin,Texas 78753 (512)339-2929 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas Discharges otherwise eligible for coverage cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 30 TAC Chapter 311(relating to Watershed Protection)for water quality areas and watersheds. 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities This general permit does not limit the authority or ability of federal,other state,or local governmental entities from placing additional or more stringent requirements on construction activities or discharges from construction activities. For example,this permit does not limit the authority of a home-rule municipality provided by Texas Local Government Code§401.002. 8. Indian Country Lands Stormwater runoff from construction activities occurring on Indian Country lands are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. If discharges of stormwater require authorization under federal NPDES regulations,authority for these discharges must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA). 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation Stormwater runoff from construction activities associated with the exploration, development,or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline,are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Authorization for stormwater discharges from construction activities that are associated with production of oil or gas or geothermal,resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline must be obtained,as required,from the U.S.EPA or the Texas Railroad Commission,as applicable. Discharge of stormwater related to construction activity, from a facility that stores both refined products intended for off-site use and crude oil in aboveground storage tanks,is regulated by the TCEQ and is eligible for coverage under this general permit. 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities Stormwater discharges from agricultural activities that are not point source discharges of stormwater are not subject to TPDES permit requirements. These activities may include clearing and cultivating ground for crops,construction of fences to contain livestock,construction of stock ponds,and other similar agricultural activities. Discharges of stormwater runoff associated with the construction of facilities that are subject to TPDES regulations,such as the construction of concentrated animal feeding operations,would be point sources regulated under this general permit. 11. Endangered Species Act Discharges that would adversely affect a listed endangered or threatened aquatic or aquatic-dependent species or its critical habitat are not authorized by this permit,unless the requirements of the Endangered Species Act are satisfied.,Federal requirements related to endangered species apply to all TPDES permitted discharges and site-specific controls may be required to ensure that protection of endangered or threatened species is achieved. If a permittee has concerns over potential impacts to listed species,the permittee may contact TCEQ for additional information. Page 16 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 12. Other Nothing in Part II of the general permit is intended to negate any person's ability to assert force majeure(act of God,war,strike,riot,or other catastrophe)defenses found in 3o TAC§7o.7. Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Large Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Operators of large construction activities continuing to operate after the effective date of this permit,and authorized under the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR150000(effective on March 5,2013),must submit an NOI to renew authorization or a NOT to terminate coverage under this general permit within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim or grace period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES general permit. 2. Small Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Discharges from ongoing small construction activities that commenced prior to the effective date of this general permit,and that do not meet the conditions to qualify for termination of this permit as described in Part II.F of this general permit,must meet the requirements to be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES Construction General Permit. Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion: Operators of small construction activity,as defined in Part I.B of this general permit, shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,which occur in certain counties and during periods of low potential for erosion that do not meet the conditions of the waiver described in Part II.G of this general permit,maybe automatically authorized under this general permit if all the following conditions are met. (a) the construction activity occurs in a county and during the corresponding date range(s)listed in Appendix A; (b) the construction activity is initiated and completed,including either final or temporary stabilization of all disturbed areas,within the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; Page 17 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (c) all temporary stabilization is adequately maintained to effectively reduce or prohibit erosion,permanent stabilization activities have been initiated,and a condition of final stabilization is completed no later than 3o days following the end date of the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; (d) the permittee signs a completed TCEQ small construction site notice for low potential for erosion,including the certification statement; (e) a signed and certified copy of the small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is posted at the construction site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity; NOTE:Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified site notice,with a viewable signature,located on- site and available for review by any applicable regulatory authority. (f) a copy of the signed and certified small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities; (g) discharges of stormwater runoff or other non-stormwater discharges from any supporting concrete batch plant or asphalt batch plant is separately authorized under an individual TPDES permit,another TPDES general permit,or under an individual TCEQ permit where stormwater and non-stormwater is disposed of by evaporation or irrigation(discharges are adjacent to water in the state);and (h) any non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,are not considered by TCEQ to be a wastewater,or are captured and routed for disposal at a publicly operated treatment works or licensed waste disposal facility. If all of the conditions in(a)—(h)above are met,then the operator(s)of small construction activities with low potential for erosion are not required to develop a SWP3. If an operator is conducting small construction activities and any of the above conditions (a)—(h)are not met,the operator cannot declare coverage under the automatic authorization for small construction activities with low potential for erosion and must meet the requirements for automatic authorization(all other)small construction activities,described below in Part II.E.2. For small construction activities that occur during a period with a low potential for erosion,where automatic authorization under this section is not available,an operator may apply for and obtain a waiver from permitting(Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver— LREW),as described in Part II.G of this general permit. Waivers from coverage under the LREW do not allow for any discharges of non-stormwater and the operator must ensure that discharges on non-stormwater are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization. 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: Operators of small construction activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,as defined in Part I.B of this general permit or as defined but who do not meet in the conditions and requirements located in Part II.E.1 above,maybe automatically authorized for small construction activities,provided that they meet all of the following conditions: Page 18 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit,that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site for which the applicant is the operator,and implement the SWP3 prior to commencing construction activities; (b) all operators of regulated small construction activities must post a copy of a signed and certified Small Construction site notice,the notice must be posted at the construction site in a location where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities,at least two days prior to commencing construction activity,and maintain the notice in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities,e.g. pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway;notice for these linear sites maybe relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities); (c) operators must maintain a posted site notice at the construction site until final stabilization has been achieved;and NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Small Construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. (d) provide a copy of the signed and certified construction site notice to the operator of any municipal separate storm sewer system(MS4)receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities. As described in Part I.B of this general permit,large construction activities include those that will disturb less than five(5)acres of land,but that are part of a larger common plan of development or sale that will ultimately disturb five(5)or more acres of land,and must meet the requirements of Part II.E.3.below. • 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: Operators of large construction activities that qualify for coverage under this general permit must meet all of the following conditions: (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site where the applicant is the operator. The SWP3 must be developed and implemented prior to obtaining coverage and prior to commencing construction activities; (b) primary operators of large construction activities must submit an NOI prior to commencing construction activity at a construction site.A completed NOI must be submitted to TCEQ electronically using the online e-Permits system on TCEQ's website. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver must submit a completed NOI to TCEQ at least seven(7)days prior to prior to commencing construction activity to obtain provisional coverage seven(7)days from the postmark date for delivery to the TCEQ. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. If an additional primary operator is added after the initial NOI is submitted,the additional primary operator must meet the same requirements for existing primary operator(s),as indicated above. If the primary operator changes due to responsibility at the site being transferred from one primary operator to another after the initial NOI is submitted,the new primary operator must submit a paper NOI or an electronic NOI at least ten(io) Page 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 days prior to assuming operational control of a construction site and commencing construction activity. Operators that submit NOIs electronically must use the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. (c) all operators of large construction activities must post a site notice in accordance with Part III.D.2 Of this permit. The site notice must be located where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and must be maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities,e.g.pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway;notice for these linear sites may be relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local, state,and federal authorities); (d) two days prior to commencing construction activities,all primary operators must: i. provide a copy of the signed NOI to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to any secondary construction operator,and ii. list in the SWP3 the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy; (e) all persons meeting the definition of"secondary operator"in Part I of this permit are hereby notified that they are regulated under this general permit,but are not required to submit an NOI,provided that a primary operator at the site has submitted an NOI,or prior to commencement of construction activities,a primary operator is required to submit an NOI and the secondary operator has provided notification to the operator(s)of the need to obtain coverage(with records of notification available upon request). Any secondary operator notified under this provision may alternatively submit an NOI under this general permit,may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES individual permit,or may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES general permit if available;and (f) all secondary operators of large construction activities must post a copy of the signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice and provide a copy of the signed and certified site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to the commencement construction activities. NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an NOI using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities: Operators of certain small construction activities may obtain a waiver from coverage under this general permit,if applicable. The requirements are outlined in Part II.G below. 5. Effective Date of Coverage (a) Operators of small construction activities as described in either Part II.E.1 or II.E.2 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions of Part II.E.1 or II.E.2. Secondary operators of large construction Page 20 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 activities as described in Part II.E.3 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions in Part II.E.3. For activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction may not commence for sites regulated under 30 TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (b) Primary operators of large construction activities as described in Part II.E.3 above that electronically submit an NOI are authorized immediately following confirmation of receipt of the electronic form by the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver are provisionally authorized seven(7)days from the date that a completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. For construction activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction activities may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (c) Operators are not prohibited from submitting late NOIs or posting late notices to obtain authorization under this general permit. The TCEQ reserves the right,to take appropriate enforcement action for any unpermitted activities that may have occurred between the time construction commenced and authorization was obtained. (d) If operators that submitted NOIs have active authorizations for construction activities that are ongoing when the term of the current general permit expires and a new general permit is issued,a 9o-day interim(grace)period is granted to provide coverage that is administratively continued until operators with active authorizations can obtain coverage under the newly issued CGP. The 9o-day grace period starts on the effective date of the newly issued CGP. Deadlines for obtaining coverage for operators of small and large construction are provided in Part II.D.1 and 2 above. 6. Notice of Change(NOC) If relevant information provided in the NOI changes,the operator that has submitted the NOI must submit an NOC to TCEQ at least fourteen(14)days before the change occurs, if possible. Where a 14-day advance notice is not possible,the operator must submit an NOC to TCEQ within 14-days of discovery of the change. If the operator becomes aware that it failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect information in an NOI, the correct information must be submitted to TCEQ in an NOC within 14 days after discovery. The NOC shall be submitted on a form provided by the executive director,or by letter if an NOC form is not available. A copy of the NOC form or letter must also be placed in the SWP3 and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge. A list that includes the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy of the NOC(or NOC letter)must be included in the SWP3. Information on an NOC may include,but is not limited to,the following: a change in the description of the construction project;an increase in the number of acres disturbed(for increases of one or more acres); or the name of the operator(where the name of the operator has changed). A transfer of operational control from one operator to another,including a transfer of the ownership of a company. Coverage under this general permit is not transferable Page 21 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 from one operator to another or one company to another,and may not be included in an NOC. A transfer of ownership of a company may include,but is not limited to,the following: changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation or changing corporation types,so that the filing number(or charter number)that is on record with the Texas Secretary of State must be changed. An NOC is not required for notifying TCEQ of a decrease in the number of acres disturbed. This information must be included in the SWP3 and retained on site. Effective September 1,2018,applicants must submit an NOC using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices NOI forms,NOT forms,NOC letters,and Construction Site Notices that require a signature must be signed according to 3o TAC§305.44(relating to Signatories for Applications). 8. Contents of the NOI The NOI form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) the TPDES CGP authorization number for existing authorizations under this general permit,where the operator submits an NOI to renew coverage within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit; (b) the name,address,arid telephone number of the operator filing the NOI for permit coverage; (c) the name(or other identifier),address,county,and latitude/longitude of the construction project or site; (d) the number of acres that will be disturbed by the applicant; (e) confirmation that the project or site will not be located on Indian Country lands; (f) confirmation that a SWP3 has been developed in accordance with this general permit,that it will be implemented prior to commencement of construction activities,and that it is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans;for multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3,the confirmation for an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3 provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator; (g) name of the receiving water(s); (h) the classified segment number for each classified segment that receives discharges from the regulated construction activity(if the discharge is not directly to a classified segment,then the classified segment number of the first classified segment that those discharges reach);and (i) the name of all surface waters receiving discharges from the regulated construction activity that are on the latest EPA-approved CWA§3o3(d)List of impaired waters or Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b)and 3o3(d)as not meeting applicable state water quality standards. Page 22 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section F. Terminating Coverage 1. Notice of Termination(NOT)Required Each operator that has submitted an NOI for authorization of large construction activities under this general permit must apply to terminate that authorization following the conditions described in this section of the general permit. Authorization of large construction must be terminated by submitting an NOT on a paper form to TCEQ supplied by the executive director or electronically via the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Authorization to,discharge under this general permit terminates at midnight on the day a paper NOT is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ or immediately following confirmation of the receipt of the NOT submitted electronically by the TCEQ. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until an NOT is submitted. Effective September 1,2018,applicants must submit an NOT using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. The NOT must be submitted to TCEQ,and a copy of the NOT provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(with a list in the SWP3 of the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy),within 3o days after any of the following conditions are met: (a) final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; (b) a transfer of operational control has occurred(See Section II.F.4 below);or (c) the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual TPDES permit or alternative TPDES general permit. 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT The NOT form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) if authorization for construction activity was granted following submission of an NOI,the permittee's site-specific TPDES authorization number for a specific construction site; (b) an indication of whether final stabilization has been achieved at the site and a NOT has been submitted or if the permittee is simply no longer an operator at the site; (c) the name,address,and telephone number of the permittee submitting the NOT; (d) the name(or other identifier),address,county,and location(latitude/longitude)of the construction project or site;and (e) a signed certification that either all stormwater discharges requiring authorization under this general permit will no longer occur,or that the applicant is no longer the operator of the facility or construction site,and that all temporary structural erosion controls have either been removed,,will be removed on a schedule defined in the SWP3,or have been transferred to a new operator if the new operator has applied for permit coverage. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal. Page 23 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites (a) Each operator that has obtained automatic authorization for small construction or is a secondary operator for large construction must perform the following when terminating coverage under the permit: i. remove the site notice; ii. complete the applicable portion of the site notice related to removal of the site notice;and iii. submit a copy of the completed site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(or provide alternative notification as allowed by the MS4 operator, with documentation of such notification included in the SWP3). (b) The activities described in Part II.F.3.(a)above must be completed by the operator within 3o days of meeting any of the following conditions: i. final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; ii. a transfer of day-to-day operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions has occurred(See Section II.F.4.below);or iii. the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual or general TPDES permit. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates immediately upon removal of the applicable site notice. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until the site notice is removed. 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control (a) When the primary operator of a large construction activity changes or operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions is transferred to another primary operator,the original operator must do the following: i. submit an NOT within ten(io)days prior to the date that responsibility for operations terminates,and the new operator must submit an NOI at least ten (io)days prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with condition(c)below;and ii. submit a copy of the NOT from the primary operator terminating its coverage under the permit and its operational control of the construction site and submit a copy of the NOI from the new primary operator to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge in accordance with Part II.F.1 above. (b) For transfer of operational control,operators of small construction activities and secondary operators of large construction activities who are not required to submit an NOI must do the following: i. the existing operator must remove the original site notice,and the new operator must post the required site notice prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with the conditions in Part II.F.4.(c)i or ii below;and ii. a copy of the site notice,which must be completed and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge,in accordance with Part II.F.3 above. (c) Each operator is responsible for determining its role as an operator as defined in Part I.B and obtaining authorization under the permit,as described above in Part Page 24 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 II.E.i—3. Where authorization has been obtained by submitting an NOI for coverage under this general permit,permit coverage is not transferable from one operator to another. A transfer of operational control can include changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation,or changing to a different corporation type such that a different filing(or charter) number is established with the Texas Secretary of State. A transfer of operational control can also occur when of the following criteria is met,as applicable: i. Another operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that do not meet the definition for final stabilization; ii. all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have either been removed, scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3,or transferred to a new operator,provided that the original permitted operator has attempted to notify the new operator in writing of the requirement to obtain permit coverage. Records of this notification(or attempt at notification)shall be retained by the operator transferring operational control to another operator in accordance with Part VI of this permit. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal;or iii. a homebuilder has purchased one or more lots from an operator who obtained coverage under this general permit for a common plan of development or sale. The homebuilder is considered a new operator and shall comply with the requirements of this permit. Under these circumstances,the homebuilder is only responsible for compliance with the general permit requirements as they apply to the lot(s)it has operational control over in a larger common plan of development,and the original operator remains responsible for common controls or discharges,and must amend its SWP3 to remove the lot(s) transferred to the homebuilder. Section G. Waivers from Coverage The executive director may waive the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit for stormwater discharges from small construction activities under the terms and conditions described in this section. 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage Operators of small construction activities may apply for and receive a waiver from the requirements to obtain authorization under this general permit,when the calculated rainfall erosivity(R)factor for the entire period of the construction project is less than five(5). The operator must submit either a signed paper Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW) certification form to the TCEQ,supplied by the executive director,or complete the form electronically via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. The form is a certification by the operator that the small construction activity will commence and be completed within a period when the value of the calculated R factor is less than five(5). The paper LREW certification form must be postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ at least seven(7)days before construction activity begins or,if submitted electronically, construction may begin at any time following the receipt of written confirmation from TCEQ that a complete electronic application was submitted and acknowledged. This waiver from coverage does not apply to any non-stormwater discharges,including what is allowed under this permit. The operator must insure that all non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,or are captured and routed to an authorized treatment facility for disposal. Page 25 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Effective September 1,2018,applicants must submit an LREW using the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver The construction site operator may calculate the R factor to request a waiver using the following steps: (a) Estimate the construction start date and the construction end date. The construction end date is the date that final stabilization will be achieved. (b) Find the appropriate Erosivity Index(EI)zone in Appendix B of this permit. (c) Find the EI percentage for the project period by adding the results for each period of the project using the table provided in Appendix D of this permit,in EPA Fact Sheet 2.1,or in USDA Handbook 703,by subtracting the start value from the end value to find the percent EI for the site. (d) Refer to the Isoerodent Map(Appendix C of this permit)and interpolate the annual isoerodent value for the proposed construction location. (e) Multiply the percent value obtained in Step(c)above by the annual isoerodent value obtained in Step(d). This is the R factor for the proposed project. If the value is less than 5,then a waiver may be obtained. If the value is five(5)or more,then a waiver may not be obtained,and the operator must obtain coverage under Part II.E.2.of this permit. Alternatively,the operator may calculate a site-specific R factor utilizing the following online calculator: http://ei.tamu.edu/index.html,or using another available resource. A copy of the LREW certification form is not required to be posted at the small construction site. 3. Effective Date of a LREW Unless otherwise notified by the executive director,operators of small construction activities seeking coverage under a LREW are provisionally waived from the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit seven(7)days from the date that a completed paper LREW certification form is postmarked for delivery to TCEQ,or immediately upon receiving confirmation of approval of an electronic submittal,made via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Effective September 1,2018,applicants seeking coverage under a LREW must submit an application for a LREW using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period If a construction activity extends beyond the approved waiver period due to circumstances beyond the control of the operator,the operator must either: (a) recalculate the R factor using the original start date and a new projected ending date,and if the R factor is still under five(5),submit a new waiver certification form at least two(2)days before the end of the original waiver period; or (b) obtain authorization under this general permit according to the requirements for automatic authorization for small construction activities in Part II.E.2 of this permit, prior to the end of the approved LREW period. i Page 26 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 1. Individual Permit Alternative Any discharge eligible for coverage under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under an individual TPDES permit according to 3o TAC§305(relating to Consolidated Permits). Applications for individual permit coverage must be submitted at least three hundred and thirty(33o)days prior to commencement of construction activities to ensure timely authorization. Existing coverage under this general permit should not be terminated until an individual permit is issued and in effect. 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges Certain discharges eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),as applicable. 3. Individual Permit Required The executive director may require an operator of a construction site,otherwise eligible for authorization under this general permit,to apply for an individual TPDES permit in the following circumstances: (a) the conditions of an approved TMDL or TMDL I-Plan on the receiving water; (b) the activity being determined to cause,has a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or being found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state:and (c) any other consideration defined in 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges)including 3o TAC Chapter 2o5.4(c)(3)(D),which allows the commission to deny authorization under the general permit and require an individual permit if a discharger has been determined by the executive director to have been out of compliance with any rule,order,or permit of the commission, including non-payment of fees assessed by the executive director. A discharger with a TCEQ compliance history rating of"unsatisfactory"is ineligible for coverage under this general permit. In that case,3o TAC§60.3 requires the executive director to deny or suspend an authorization to discharge under a general permit. However,per TWC§26.o4o(h),a discharger is entitled to a hearing before the commission prior to having an authorization denied or suspended for having an "unsatisfactory"compliance history. Denial of authorization to discharge under this general permit or suspension of a permittee's authorization under this general permit for reasons other than compliance history shall be done according to commission rules in 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges). 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization Any discharge eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),if applicable. Section I. Permit Expiration 1. This general permit is effective for a term not to exceed five(5)years. All active discharge authorizations expire on the date provided on page one(1)of this permit. Following public notice and comment,as provided by 3o TAC§205.3(relating to Public Notice,Public Meetings,and Public Comment),the commission may amend, Page 27 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 revoke,cancel,or renew this general permit. All authorizations that are active at the time the permit term expires will be administratively continued as indicated in Part II.I.2 below and in Part II.D.1(b)and D.2(b)of this permit. 2. If the executive director publishes a notice of the intent to renew or amend this general permit before the expiration date,the permit will remain in effect for existing,authorized discharges until the commission takes final action on the permit. Upon issuance of a renewed or amended permit,permittees may be required to submit an NOI within 90 days following the effective date of the renewed or amended permit,unless that permit provides for an alternative method for obtaining authorization. 3. If the commission does not propose to reissue this general permit within 90 days before the expiration date,permittees shall apply for authorization under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. If the application for an individual permit is submitted before the expiration date,authorization under this expiring general permit remains in effect until the issuance or denial of an individual permit. No new NOIs will be accepted nor new authorizations honored under the general permit after the expiration date. Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) All regulated construction site operators shall prepare an SWP3,prior to submittal of an NOI,to address discharges authorized under Parts II.E.2 and II.E.3 of this general permit that will reach Waters of the U.S. This includes discharges to MS4s and privately owned separate storm sewer systems that drain into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. Individual operators at a site may develop separate SWP3s that cover only their portion of the project,provided reference is made to the other operators at the site. Where there is more than one SWP3 for a site,operators must coordinate to ensure that BMPs and controls are consistent and do not negate or impair the effectiveness of each other. Regardless of whether a single comprehensive SWP3 is developed or separate SWP3s are developed for each operator,it is the responsibility of each operator to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit in the areas of the construction site where that operator has control over construction plans and specifications or day-to-day operations. An SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater associated with construction activity and non-stormwater discharges described in Part II.A.3,in compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. An SWP3 must also identify any potential sources of pollution that have been determined to cause,have a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause or contribute to the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state from discharges of stormwater from construction activities and construction support activities. Where potential sources of these pollutants are present at a construction site,the SWP3 must also contain a description of the management practices that will be used to prevent these pollutants from being discharged into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. NOTE: Construction support activities can also include vehicle repair areas,fueling areas,etc.that are present at a construction site solely for the support construction activities and are only used by operators at the construction site. The SWP3 is intended to serve as a road map for how the construction operator will comply with the effluent limits and other conditions of this permit and does not establish the effluent limits that apply to the construction site's discharges. These limits are established in Part III.G of the permit. Page 28 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development For more effective coordination of BMPs and opportunities for cost sharing,a cooperative effort by the different operators at a site is encouraged. Operators of small and large construction activities must independently obtain authorization under this permit,but may work together with other regulated operators at the construction site to prepare and implement a single,comprehensive SWP3,which can be shared by some or all operators,for the construction activities that each of the operators are performing at the entire construction site. 1. The SWP3 must include the following: (a) for small construction activities—the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3; (b) for large construction activities-the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3,the general permit authorization numbers of each operator (or the date that the NOI was submitted to TCEQ by each operator that has not received an authorization number for coverage under this permit); and (c) - for large and small construction activities-the signature of each operator participating in the shared SWP3. 2. The SWP3 must clearly indicate which operator is responsible for satisfying each shared requirement of the SWP3. If the responsibility for satisfying a requirement is not described in the plan,then each permittee is entirely responsible for meeting the requirement within the boundaries of the construction site where they perform construction activities. The SWP3 must clearly describe responsibilities for meeting each requirement in shared or common areas. 3. The SWP3 may provide that one operator is responsible for preparation of a SWP3 in compliance with the CGP,and another operator is responsible for implementation of the SWP3 at the project site. Section B. Responsibilities of Operators i. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications All secondary operators and primary operators with control over construction plans and specifications shall: (a) ensure the project specifications allow or provide that adequate BMPs are developed to meet the requirements of Part III of this general permit; (b) ensure that the SWP3 indicates the areas of the project where they have control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications; (c) ensure that all other operators affected by modifications in project specifications are notified in a timely manner so that those operators may modify their BMP s as necessary to remain compliant with the conditions of this general permit;and (d) ensure that the SWP3 for portions of the project where they are operators indicates the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number(s)for operators with the day-to-day operational control over those activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions. If a primary operator has not been authorized or has abandoned the site,the secondary operator is considered to be the responsible party and must obtain authorization Page 29 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 as a primary operator under the permit,until the authority for day-to-day operational control is transferred to another primary operator. The new primary operator must update or develop a new SWP3 that will reflect the transfer of operational control and include any additional updates to the SWP3 to meet requirements of the permit. 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control Primary operators with day-to-day operational control of those activities at a project that are necessary to ensure compliance with an SWP3 and other permit conditions must ensure that the SWP3 accomplishes the following requirements: (a) meets the requirements of this general permit for those portions of the project where they are operators; (b) identifies the parties responsible for implementation of BMPs described in the SWP3; (c) indicates areas of the project where they have operational control over day-to- day activities; and (d) the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number of the parties with control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications for areas where they have operational control over day-to-day activities. Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation,Implementation, and Compliance The SWP3 must be prepared prior to obtaining authorization under this general permit, and implemented prior to commencing construction activities that result in soil disturbance. The SWP3 must be prepared so that it provides for compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit. Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 1. The SWP3 must be retained on-site at the construction site or,if the site is inactive or does not have an on-site location to store the plan,a notice must be posted describing the location of the SWP3. The SWP3 must be made readily available at the time of an on-site inspection to: the executive director; a federal,state,or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans,grading plans,or stormwater management plans;local government officials; and the operator of a municipal separate storm sewer receiving discharges from the site. If the SWP3 is retained off-site,then it shall be made available as soon as reasonably possible. In most instances,it is reasonable that the SWP3 shall be made available within 24 hours of the request. 2. Operators with authorization for construction activity under this general permit must post a TCEQ site notice at the construction site at a place readily available for viewing by the general public,and local,state,and federal authorities. (a) Primary and secondary operators of large construction activities must each post a TCEQ construction site notice,respective to their role as an operator at the construction site,as required above and according to requirements in Part II.E.3 of this general permit. (b) Primary and secondary operators of small construction activities must post the TCEQ site notice as required in Part III.D.2.(a)above and for the specific type of small construction described in Part II.E.1 and 2 of the permit. (c) If the construction project is a linear construction project,such as a pipeline or highway,the notices must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway. Site notices for small and large construction Page 30 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 activities at these linear construction sites may be located,as necessary,along the length of the project,but must still be readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities;and contain the following information: i. the site-specific TPDES authorization number for the project if assigned; ii. the operator name,contact name,and contact phone number; iii. a brief description of the project; and iv. the location of the SWP3. 3. This permit does not provide the general public with any right to trespass on a construction site for any reason,including inspection of a site;nor does this permit require that permittees allow members of the general public access to a construction site. Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s The permittee must revise or update the SWP3 within seven days of when any of the following occurs: 1. a change in design,construction,operation,or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants and that has not been previously addressed in the SWP3; 2. changing site conditions based on updated plans and specifications,new operators, new areas of responsibility,and changes in BMPs; or 3. results of inspections or investigations by construction site personnel authorized by the permittee,operators of a municipal separate storm sewer system receiving the discharge,authorized TCEQ personnel,or a federal,state or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans indicate the SWP3 is proving ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants in discharges authorized under this general permit. Section F. Contents of SWP3 The SWP3 must be developed and implemented by primary operators of small and large construction activities and include,at a minimum,the information described in this section and must comply with the construction and development effluent guidelines in Part III,Section G of the general permit. 1. A site or project description,which includes the following information: (a) a description of the nature of the construction activity; (b) a list of potential pollutants and their sources; (c) a description of the intended schedule or sequence of activities that will disturb soils for major portions of the site,including estimated start dates and duration of activities; (d) the total number of acres of the entire property and the total number of acres where construction activities will occur,including areas where construction support activities(defined in Part I.B of this general permit)occur; (e) data describing the soil or the quality of any discharge from the site; (f) a map showing the general location of the site(e.g.a portion of a city or county map); (g) a detailed site map(or maps)indicating the following: Page 31 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 i. drainage patterns and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities; ii. areas where soil disturbance will occur; iii. locations of all controls and buffers,either planned or in place; iv. locations where temporary or permanent stabilization practices are expected to be used; v. locations of construction support activities,including those located off-site; vi. surface waters(including wetlands)either at,adjacent,or in close proximity to the site,and also indicate whether those waters are impaired; vii. locations where stormwater discharges from the site directly to a surface water body or a municipal separate storm sewer system; viii. vehicle wash areas;and ix. designated points on the site where vehicles will exit onto paved roads(for instance,this applies to construction transition from unstable dirt areas to exterior paved roads). Where the amount of information required to be included on the map would result in a single map being difficult to read and interpret,the operator shall develop a series of maps that collectively include the required information. (h) the location and description of support activities authorized under the permittee's NOI,including asphalt plants,concrete plants,and other activities providing support to the construction site that is authorized under this general permit; (i) the name of receiving waters at or near the site that may be disturbed or that may receive discharges from disturbed areas of the project; (j) a copy of this TPDES general permit; (k) the NOI and the acknowledgement of provisional and non-provisional authorization for primary operators of large construction sites,and the site notice for small construction sites and for secondary operators of large construction sites; (1) stormwater and allowable non-stormwater discharge locations,including storm drain inlets on site and in the immediate vicinity of the construction site where construction support activities will occur;and (m) locations of all pollutant-generating activities at the construction site and where construction support activities will occur,such as the following: Paving operations;concrete,paint and stucco washout and water disposal;solid waste storage and disposal; and dewatering operations. 2. A description of the BMPs that will be used to minimize pollution in runoff. The description must identify the general timing or sequence for implementation. At a minimum,the description must include the following components: (a) General Requirements i. Erosion and sediment controls must be designed to retain sediment on-site to the extent practicable with consideration for local topography,soil type, and rainfall. ii. Control measures must be properly selected,installed,and maintained according to the manufacturer's or designer's specifications. Page 32 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 iii. Controls must be developed to minimize the offsite transport of litter, construction debris,and construction materials. (b) Erosion Control and Stabilization Practices The SWP3 must include a description of temporary and permanent erosion control and stabilization practices for the construction site,where small or large construction activity will occur. The erosion control and stabilization practices selected by the permittee must be compliant with the requirements for sediment and erosion control,located in Part III.G of this permit. The description of the SWP3 must also include a schedule of when the practices will be implemented. Site plans must ensure that existing vegetation at the construction site is preserved where it is possible. i. Erosion control and stabilization practices may include but are not limited to: establishment of temporary or permanent vegetation,mulching, geotextiles,sod stabilization,vegetative buffer strips,protection of existing trees and vegetation,slope texturing,temporary velocity dissipation devices,flow diversion mechanisms,and other similar measures. ii. The following records must be maintained and either attached to or referenced in the SWP3,and made readily available upon request to the parties listed in Part III.D.i of this general permit: (A) the dates when major grading activities occur; (B) the dates when construction activities temporarily or permanently • cease on a portion of the site;and (C) the dates when stabilization measures are initiated. Erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily ceased and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. Stabilization measures that provide a protective cover must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have permanently ceased. The term"immediately"is used to define the deadline for initiating stabilization measures.In the context of this requirement,"immediately"means as soon as practicable,but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth-disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Except as provided in (A).through(D)below,these measures must be completed as soon as practicable,but no more than 14 calendar days after the initiation of soil stabilization measures: (A) Where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased due to frozen conditions, non-vegetative controls must be implemented until thawing conditions(as defined in Part I.B of this general permit) are present,and vegetative stabilization measures can be initiated as soon as practicable. (B) In arid areas,semi-arid areas,or drought-stricken areas,as they are defined in Part I.B of this general permit,where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased or is precluded by arid conditions,other types of erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated at the site as soon as practicable. Where vegetative controls are infeasible due to arid conditions,and within 14 calendar days of a temporary or permanent cessation of construction activity in any portion of the site,the operator shall immediately install non- Page 33 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 vegetative erosion controls in areas of the construction site where construction activity is complete or has ceased. If non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator shall install temporary sediment controls as required in Part III.F.2.(b).iii.(C)below. (C) In areas where non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator may alternatively utilize temporary perimeter controls. The operator must document in the SWP3 the reason why stabilization measures are not feasible,and must demonstrate that the perimeter controls will retain sediment on site to the extent practicable. The operator must continue to inspect,the BMPs at the frequencies established in Part III.F.7.(c)for unstabilized sites. (D) The requirement for permittees to initiate stabilization is triggered as soon as it is known with reasonable certainty that construction activity at the site or in certain areas of the site will be stopped for 14 or more additional calendar days. If the initiation or completion of vegetative stabilization is prevented by circumstances beyond the control of the permittee,the permittee must employ and implement alternative stabilization measures immediately. When conditions at the site changes that would allow for vegetative stabilization,then the permittee must initiate or complete vegetative stabilization as soon as practicable. iv. Final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. v. TCEQ does not expect that temporary or permanent stabilization measures to be applied to areas that are intended to be left un-vegetated or un- _ stabilized following construction(e.g.,dirt access roads,utility pole pads, areas being used for storage of vehicles,equipment,or materials). (c) Sediment Control Practices The SWP3 must include a description of any sediment control practices used to remove eroded soils from stormwater runoff,including the general timing or sequence for implementation of controls. i. Sites With Drainage Areas of Ten or More Acres (A) Sedimentation Basin(s) (1) A sedimentation basin is required,where feasible,for a,common drainage location that serves an area with ten(io)or more acres disturbed at one time. A sedimentation basin may be temporary or permanent,and must provide sufficient storage to contain a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year,24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained. When calculating the volume of runoff from a 2-year,24-hour storm event,it is not required to include the flows from offsite areas and flow from onsite areas that are either undisturbed or have already undergone permanent stabilization,if these flows are diverted around both the disturbed areas of the site and the sediment basin.Capacity calculations shall be included in the SWP3. (2) Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,the sedimentation basin must provide at least 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained until final stabilization of the site. Page 34 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (3) If a sedimentation basin is not feasible,then the permittee shall provide equivalent control measures until final stabilization of the site. In determining whether installing a sediment basin is feasible,the permittee may consider factors such as site soils, slope,available area,public safety,precipitation patterns,site geometry,site vegetation,infiltration capacity,geotechnical factors,depth to groundwater,and other similar considerations. The permittee shall document the reason that the sediment basins are not feasible,and shall utilize equivalent control measures, which may include a series of smaller sediment basins. (4) Unless infeasible,when discharging from sedimentation basins and impoundments,the permittee shall utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface. (B) Perimeter Controls: At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. ii. Controls for Sites With Drainage Areas Less than Ten Acres: (A) Sediment traps and sediment basins may be used to control solids in stormwater runoff for drainage locations serving less than ten(io) acres. At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. (B) Alternatively,a sediment basin that provides storage for a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained may be utilized. Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,a temporary or permanent sediment basin providing 3,60o cubic feet of storage per acre drained may be provided. If a calculation is performed,then the calculation shall be included in the SWP3. (C) If sedimentation basins or impoundments are used,the permittee shall comply with the requirements in Part III.G.6 of this general permit. 3. Description of Permanent Stormwater Controls A description of any stormwater control measures that will be installed during the construction process to control pollutants in stormwater discharges that may occur after construction operations have been completed must be included in the SWP3. Permittees are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater management measures,as follows: (a) permittees authorized under the permit for small construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site; or (b) permittees authorized under the permit for large construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site and prior to submission of an NOT. 4. Other Required Controls and BMPs Page 35 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) Permittees shall minimize,to the extent practicable,the off-site vehicle tracking of sediments and the generation of dust. The SWP3 shall include a description of controls utilized to accomplish this requirement. (b) The SWP3 must include a description of construction and waste materials expected to be stored on-site and a description of controls to minimize pollutants from these materials. (c) The SWP3 must include a description of potential pollutant sources in discharges of stormwater from all areas of the construction site where construction activity,including construction support activities,will be located, and a description of controls and measures that will be implemented at those sites to minimize pollutant discharges. (d) Permittees shall place velocity dissipation devices at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel(i.e.,runoff conveyance)to provide a non- erosive flow velocity from the structure to a water course,so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected. (e) Permittees shall design and utilize appropriate controls to minimize the offsite transport of suspended sediments and other pollutants if it is necessary to pump or channel standing water from the site. (f) Permittees shall ensure that all other required controls and BMPs comply with all of the requirements of Part III.G of this general permit. (g) For demolition of any structure with at least 10,00o square feet of floor space that was built or renovated before January 1,198o,and the receiving waterbody is impaired for polychlorinated biphenyls(PCBs): i. Implement controls to minimize the exposure of PCB-containing building materials,including paint,caulk,and pre-198o fluorescent lighting fixtures to precipitation and to stormwater;and ii. Ensure that disposal of such materials is performed in compliance with applicable state,federal,and local laws. 5. Documentation of Compliance with Approved State and Local Plans (a) Permittees must ensure that the SWP3 is consistent with requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by federal,state,or local officials. (b) SWP3s must be updated as necessary to remain consistent with any changes applicable to protecting surface water resources in sediment erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by state or local official for which the permittee receives written notice. (c) If the permittee is required to prepare a separate management plan,including but not limited to a WPAP or Contributing Zone Plan in accordance with 30 TAC Chapter 213(related to the Edwards Aquifer),then a copy of that plan must be either included in the SWP3 or made readily available upon request to authorized personnel of the TCEQ. The permittee shall maintain a copy of the approval letter for the plan in its SWP3. 6. Maintenance Requirements (a) All protective measures identified in the SWP3 must be maintained in effective operating condition. If,through inspections or other means,as soon as the permittee determines that BMPs are not operating effectively,then the permittee shall perform maintenance as necessary to maintain the continued effectiveness Page 36 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 of stormwater controls,and prior to the next rain event if feasible. If maintenance prior to the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,the reason shall be documented in the SWP3 and maintenance must be scheduled and accomplished as soon as practicable. Erosion and sediment controls that have been intentionally disabled,run-over,removed,or otherwise rendered ineffective must be replaced or corrected immediately upon discovery. (b) If periodic inspections or other information indicates a control has been used incorrectly,is performing inadequately,or is damaged,then the operator shall replace or modify the control as soon as practicable after making the discovery. (c) Sediment must be removed from sediment traps and sedimentation ponds no later than the time that design capacity has been reduced by 5o%. For perimeter controls such as silt fences,berms,etc.,the trapped sediment must be removed before it reaches 5o%of the above-ground height. (d) If sediment escapes the site,accumulations must be removed at a frequency that minimizes off-site impacts,and prior to the next rain event,if feasible. If the permittee does not own or operate the off-site conveyance,then the permittee shall work with the owner or operator of the property to remove the sediment. 7. Inspections of Controls (a) Personnel provided by the permittee must inspect disturbed areas (cleared, graded,or excavated)of the construction site that do not meet the requirements of final stabilization in this general permit,all locations where stabilization measures have been implemented,areas of construction support activity covered under this permit,stormwater controls(including pollution prevention controls) for evidence of,or the potential for,the discharge of pollutants,areas where stormwater typically flows within the construction site,and points of discharge from the construction site. i. Personnel conducting these inspections must be knowledgeable of this general permit,the construction activities at the site,and the SWP3 for the site. ii. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§305.128. (b) Requirements for Inspections i. Inspect all stormwater controls(including sediment and erosion control measures identified in the SWP3)to ensure that they are installed properly, appear to be operational,and minimizing pollutants in discharges,as intended. ii. Identify locations on the construction site where new or modified stormwater controls are necessary. iii. Check for signs of visible erosion and sedimentation that can be attributed to the points of discharge where discharges leave the construction site or discharge into any surface water in the state flowing within or adjacent to the construction site. iv. Identify any incidents of noncompliance observed during the inspection. v. Inspect locations where vehicles enter or exit the site for evidence of off-site sediment tracking. vi. If an inspection is performed when discharges from the construction site are occurring: identify all discharge points at the site,observe and document the visual quality of the discharge(i.e.,color,odor,floating,settled,or Page 37 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 suspended solids,foam,oil sheen,and other such indicators of pollutants in stormwater). vii. Complete any necessary maintenance needed,based on the results of the inspection and in accordance with the requirements listed in Part III.F.6 above. (c) Inspection frequencies: i. Inspections of construction sites must be conducted at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,unless as otherwise provided below in Part III.F.7.(c).ii—v below. ii. Inspection frequencies must be conducted at least once every month in areas of the construction site that meet final stabilization or have been temporarily stabilized. iii. Inspection frequencies for construction sites,where runoff is unlikely due to the occurrence of frozen conditions at the site,must be conducted at least once every month until thawing conditions begin to occur(See definitions for thawing conditions in Part I.B). The SWP3 must also contain a record of the approximate beginning and ending dates of when frozen conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly, while those conditions persisted,instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. iv. In arid,semi-arid,or drought-stricken areas,inspections must be conducted at least once every month and within 24 hours after the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. The SWP3 must also contain a record of the total rainfall measured,as well as the approximate beginning and ending dates of when drought conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly,while those conditions persisted,instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. v. As an alternative to the inspection schedule in Part III.F.7.(c).i above,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed, then the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. vi. The inspection procedures described in Part III.F.7.(c).i.—v above can be performed at the frequencies and under the applicable conditions indicated for each schedule option,provided that the SWP3 reflects the current schedule and that any changes to the schedule are made in accordance with the following provisions: the inspection frequency schedule can only be changed a maximum of one time each month;the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month; and the reason for the schedule change documented in the SWP3(e.g.,end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (d) Utility line installation,pipeline construction,and other examples of long, narrow,linear construction activities may provide inspection personnel with limited access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a)above. i. Inspection of linear construction sites could require the use of vehicles that could compromise areas of temporary or permanent stabilization,cause Page 38 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150oo0 additional disturbance of soils,and result in the increase the potential for erosion. In these circumstances,controls must be inspected at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,but representative inspections may be performed. ii. For representative inspections,personnel must inspect controls along the construction site for o.25 mile above and below each access point where a roadway,undisturbed right-of-way,or other similar feature intersects the construction site and allows access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a) above. The conditions of the controls along each inspected o.25 mile portion maybe considered as representative of the condition of controls along that reach extending from the end of the o.25 mile portion to either the end of the next o.25 mile inspected portion,or to the end of the project, whichever occurs first. As an alternative to the inspection schedule described in Part III.F.7.(c).i above,the SWP3 maybe developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed,the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. iii. The SWP3 for a linear construction site must reflect the current inspection schedule. Any changes to the inspection schedule must be made in accordance with the following provisions: (A) the schedule may be changed a maximum of one time each month; (B) the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month,and (C) the reason for the schedule change must be documented in the SWP3 (e.g.,end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (e) In the event of flooding or other uncontrollable situations which prohibit access to the inspection sites,inspections must be conducted as soon as access is practicable. (f) Inspection Reports i. A report summarizing the scope of any inspection must be completed within 24-hours following the inspection. The report must also include the date(s) of the inspection and major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3. Major observations in the report must include: the locations of where erosion and discharges of sediment or other pollutants from the site have occurred;locations of BMPs that need to be maintained;locations of BMPs that failed to operate as designed or proved inadequate for a particular location;and locations where additional BMPs are needed. ii. Actions taken as a result of inspections must be described within,and retained as a part of,the SWP3. Reports must identify any incidents of non- compliance. Where a report does not identify any incidents of non- compliance,the report must contain a certification that the facility or site is in compliance with the SWP3 and this permit. The report must be retained as part of the SWP3 and signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§305.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). iii. The names and qualifications of personnel making the inspections for the permittee maybe documented once in the SWP3 rather than being included in each report. (g) The SWP3 must be modified based on the results of inspections,as necessary,to t better control pollutants in runoff. Revisions to the SWP3 must be completed Page 39 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 within seven(7)calendar days following the inspection. If existing BMPs are modified or if additional BMPs are necessary,an implementation schedule must be described in the SWP3 and wherever possible those changes implemented before the next storm event. If implementation before the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,these changes must be implemented as soon as practicable. 8. The SWP3 must identify and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for all eligible non-stormwater components of the discharge,as listed in Part II.A.3 of this permit. 9. The SWP3 must include the information required in Part III.B of this general permit. 10. The SWP3 must include pollution prevention procedures that comply with Part III.G.4 of this general permit. Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites Except as provided in 4o CFR§§125.30-125.32,any discharge regulated under this general permit,with the exception of sites that obtained waivers based on low rainfall erosivity,must achieve,at a minimum,the following effluent limitations representing the degree of effluent reduction attainable by application of the best practicable control technology currently available(BPT). 1. Erosion and sediment controls.Design,install,and maintain effective erosion controls and sediment controls to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such controls must be designed,installed,and maintained to: (a) Control stormwater volume and velocity within the site to minimize soil erosion in order to minimize pollutant discharges; (b) Control stormwater discharges,including both peak flowrates and total stormwater volume,to minimize channel and streambank erosion and scour in the immediate vicinity of discharge point(s); (c) Minimize the amount of soil exposed during construction activity; (d) Minimize the disturbance of steep slopes; (e) Minimize sediment discharges from the site. The design,installation,and maintenance of erosion and sediment controls must address factors such as the amount,frequency,intensity and duration of precipitation,the nature of resulting stormwater runoff,and soil characteristics,including the range of soil particle sizes expected to be present on the site; (f) If earth disturbance activities are located in close proximity to a surface water in the state,provide and maintain appropriate natural buffers if feasible and as necessary,around surface water in the state,depending on site-specific topography,sensitivity,and proximity to water bodies. Direct stormwater to vegetated areas and maximize stormwater infiltration to reduce pollutant discharges,unless infeasible. If providing buffers is infeasible,the permittee shall document the reason that natural buffers are infeasible and shall implement additional erosion and sediment controls to reduce sediment load; (g) Preserve native topsoil at the site,unless the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that the topsoil be disturbed or removed,or it is infeasible; and (h) Minimize soil compaction. In areas of the construction site where final vegetative stabilization will occur or where infiltration practices will be installed, either: i. restrict vehicle and equipment use to avoid soil compaction;or Page 4o Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 ii. prior to seeding or planting areas of exposed soil that have been compacted, use techniques that condition the soils to support vegetative growth,if necessary and feasible; Minimizing soil compaction is not required where the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that it be compacted. (i) TCEQ does not consider stormwater control features(e.g.,stormwater conveyance channels,storm drain inlets,sediment basins)to constitute"surface water"for the purposes of triggering the buffer requirement in Part III.G.1.(f) above. 2. Soil stabilization.Stabilization of disturbed areas must,at a minimum,be initiated immediately whenever any clearing,grading,excavating,or other earth disturbing activities have permanently ceased on any portion of the site,or temporarily ceased on any portion of the site and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. In the context of this requirement,"immediately"means as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth- disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Temporary stabilization must be completed no more than 14 calendar days after initiation of soil stabilization measures,and final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas where initiating vegetative stabilization measures immediately is infeasible,alternative non- vegetative stabilization measures must be employed as soon as practicable.Refer to Part III.F.2.(b)for complete erosion control and stabilization practice requirements. In limited circumstances,stabilization may not be required if the intended function of a specific area of the site necessitates that it remain disturbed. 3. Dewatering.Discharges from dewatering activities,including discharges from dewatering of trenches and excavations,are prohibited,unless managed by appropriate controls. 4. Pollution prevention measures.Design,install,implement,and maintain effective pollution prevention measures to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such measures must be designed,installed,implemented,and maintained to: (a) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from equipment and vehicle washing, wheel wash water,and other wash waters.Wash waters must be treated in a sediment basin or alternative control that provides equivalent or better treatment prior to discharge; (b) Minimize the exposure of building materials,building products,construction wastes,trash,landscape materials,fertilizers,pesticides,herbicides,detergents, sanitary waste,and other materials present on the site to precipitation and to stormwater; (c) Minimize the exposure of waste materials by closing waste container lids at the end of the work day.For waste containers that do not have lids,where the container itself is not sufficiently secure enough to prevent the discharge of pollutants absent a cover and could leak,the permittee must provide either a cover(e.g.,a tarp,plastic sheeting,temporary roof)to minimize exposure of wastes to precipitation,or a similarly effective means designed to minimize the discharge of pollutants(e.g.,secondary containment);and (d) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from spills and leaks,and implement chemical spill and leak prevention and response procedures. 5. Prohibited discharges.The following discharges are prohibited: Page 41 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) Wastewater from wash out of concrete,unless managed by an appropriate control; (b) Wastewater from wash out and cleanout of stucco,paint,form release oils, curing compounds and other construction materials; (c) Fuels,oils,or other pollutants used in vehicle and equipment operation and maintenance; (d) Soaps or solvents used in vehicle and equipment washing;and (e) Toxic or hazardous substances from a spill or other release. 6. Surface outlets.When discharging from basins and impoundments,utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface,unless infeasible. Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants Discharges of stormwater runoff from concrete batch plants present at regulated construction sites and operated as a construction support activity may be authorized under the provisions of this general permit,provided that the following requirements are met for concrete batch plant(s)authorized under this permit. Only the discharges of stormwater runoff and non-stormwater from concrete batch plants that meet the requirements of a construction support activity can be authorized under this permit(see the requirements for "Non-Stormwater Discharges"in Part II.A.3 and"Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activity"in Part II.A.2). If discharges of stormwater runoff or non-stormwater from concrete batch plants are not authorized under this general permit,then discharges must be authorized under an alternative general permit or individual permit[see the requirement in Part II.A.2.(c)]. This permit does not authorize the discharge or land disposal of any wastewater from a concrete batch plants at regulated construction sites. Authorization for these wastes must be obtained under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 1. Operators of concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit shall sample the stormwater runoff from the concrete batch plants according to the requirements of this section of this general permit,and must conduct evaluations on the effectiveness of the SWP3 based on the following benchmark monitoring values: Table 1.Benchmark Parameters Benchmark Benchmark Value Sampling Sample Type Parameter _ Frequency Oil and Grease(*1) 15 mg/L 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) Total Suspended 5o mg/L 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) Solids(*1) pH 6.o—9.o Standard Units 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) Total Iron(*1) 1.3 mg/L 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) (*1) All analytical results for these parameters must be obtained from a laboratory that is accredited based on rules located in 3o TAC§25.4(a)or through the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program(NELAP). Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 4o CFR§136.1(c)and 4o CFR §122.44(i)(1)(iv). Page 42 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (*2) When discharge occurs. Sampling is required within the first 30 minutes of discharge. If it is not practicable to take the sample,or to complete the sampling,within the first 3o minutes,sampling must be completed within the first hour of discharge. If sampling is not completed within the first 3o minutes of discharge,the reason must be documented and attached to all required reports and records of the sampling activity. (*3) Sampling must be conducted at least once during each of the following periods. The first sample must be collected during the first full quarter that a stormwater discharge occurs from a concrete batch plant authorized under this general permit. • January through March April through June July through September October through December For projects lasting less than one full quarter,a minimum of one sample shall be collected,provided that a stormwater discharge occurred at least once following submission of the NOI or following the date that automatic authorization was obtained under Section II.E.2,and prior to terminating coverage. (*4) A grab sample shall be collected from the stormwater discharge resulting from a storm event that is at least o.i inches of measured precipitation that occurs at least 72 hours from the previously measurable storm event. The sample shall be collected downstream of the concrete batch plant,and where the discharge exits any BMPs utilized to handle the runoff from the batch plant,prior to commingling with any other water authorized under this general permit. 2. The permittee must compare the results of sample analyses to the benchmark values above,and must include this comparison in the overall assessment of the SWP3's effectiveness. Analytical results that exceed a benchmark value are not a violation of this permit,as these values are not numeric effluent limitations. Results of analyses are indicators that modifications of the SWP3 should be assessed and may be necessary to protect water quality. The operator must investigate the cause for each exceedance and must document the results of this investigation in the SWP3 by the end of the quarter following the sampling event. The operator's investigation must identify the following: (a) any additional potential sources of pollution,such as spills that might have occurred; (b) necessary revisions to good housekeeping measures that are part of the SWP3; (c) additional BMPs,including a schedule to install or implement the BMPs;and (d) other parts of the SWP3 that may require revisions in order to meet the goal of the benchmark values. Background concentrations of specific pollutants may also be considered during the investigation. If the operator is able to relate the cause of the exceedance to background concentrations,then subsequent exceedances of benchmark values for that pollutant may be resolved by referencing earlier findings in the SWP3. Background concentrations maybe identified by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-on to the permitted facility,by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-off from adjacent non-industrial areas,or by identifying the pollutant is a naturally occurring material in soils at the site. Page 43 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs)and SWP3 Requirements Minimum SWP3 Requirements—The following are required in addition to other SWP3 requirements listed in this general permit,which include,but are not limited to the applicable requirements located in Part III.F.7 of this general permit,as follows: 1. Description of Potential Pollutant Sources-The SWP3 must provide a description of potential sources(activities and materials)that can cause,have a reasonable potential to cause or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state in stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this permit. The SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity and non-stormwater discharges(described in Part II.A.3 of this general permit),in compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit,including the protection of water quality, and must ensure the implementation of these practices. The following must be developed,at a minimum,in support of developing this description: (a) Drainage—The site map must include the following information: i. the location of all outfalls for stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this permit; ii. a depiction of the drainage area and the direction of flow to the outfall(s); iii. structural controls used within the drainage area(s); iv. the locations of the following areas associated with concrete batch plants that are exposed to precipitation:vehicle and equipment maintenance activities(including fueling,repair,and storage areas for vehicles and equipment scheduled for maintenance); areas used for the treatment, storage,or disposal of wastes;liquid storage tanks;material processing and storage areas;and loading and unloading areas; and v. the locations of the following: any bag house or other dust control device(s); recycle/sedimentation pond,clarifier or other device used for the treatment of facility wastewater(including the areas that drain to the treatment device); areas with significant materials;and areas where major spills or leaks have occurred. (b) Inventory of Exposed Materials—A list of materials handled at the concrete batch plant that maybe exposed to stormwater and that have a potential to affect the quality of stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this general permit. (c) Spills and Leaks-A list of significant spills and leaks of toxic or hazardous pollutants that occurred in areas exposed to stormwater and that drain to stormwater outfalls associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit must be developed,maintained,and updated as needed. (d) Sampling Data-A summary of existing stormwater discharge sampling data must be maintained,if available. 2. Measures and Controls-The SWP3 must include a description of management controls to regulate pollutants identified in the SWP3's"Description of Potential Pollutant Sources"from Part IV.B.1 of this permit, and a schedule for implementation of the measures and controls. This must include,at a minimum: Page 44 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (a) Good Housekeeping-Good housekeeping measures must be developed and implemented in the area(s)associated with concrete batch plants. i. Operators must prevent or minimize the discharge of spilled cement, aggregate(including sand or gravel),settled dust,or other significant materials from paved portions of the site that are exposed to stormwater. Measures used to minimize the presence of these materials may include regular sweeping or other equivalent practices. These practices must be conducted at a frequency that is determined based on consideration of the amount of industrial activity occurring in the area and frequency of precipitation,and shall occur at least once per week when cement or aggregate is being handled or otherwise processed in the area. ii. Operators must prevent the exposure of fine granular solids,such as cement,to stormwater.Where practicable,these materials must be stored in enclosed silos,hoppers or buildings,in covered areas,or under covering. (b) Spill Prevention and Response Procedures-Areas where potential spills that can contribute pollutants to stormwater runoff,and the drainage areas from these locations,must be identified in the SWP3. Where appropriate,the SWP3 must specify material handling procedures,storage requirements,and use of equipment. Procedures for cleaning up spills must be identified in the SWP3 and made available to the appropriate personnel. (c) Inspections-Qualified facility personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit,the concrete batch plant,and the.SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)must be identified to inspect designated equipment and areas of the facility specified in the SWP3. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§305.128. Inspections of facilities in operation must be performed once every seven days. Inspections of facilities that are not in operation must be performed at a minimum of once per month. The current inspection frequency being implemented at the facility must be recorded in the SWP3. The inspection must take place while the facility is in operation and must,at a minimum,include all areas that are exposed to stormwater at the site,including material handling areas,above ground storage tanks,hoppers or silos,dust collection/containment systems, truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Follow-up procedures must be used to ensure that appropriate actions are taken in response to the inspections. Records of inspections must be maintained and be made readily available for inspection upon request. (d) Employee Training-An employee training program must be developed to educate personnel responsible for implementing any component of the SWP3, or personnel otherwise responsible for stormwater pollution prevention,with the provisions of the SWP3. The frequency of training must be documented in the SWP3,and at a minimum,must consist of one training prior to the initiation of operation of the concrete batch plant. (e) Record Keeping and Internal Reporting Procedures-A description of spills and similar incidents,plus additional information that is obtained regarding the quality and quantity of stormwater discharges,must be included in the SWP3. Inspection and maintenance activities must be documented and records of those inspection and maintenance activities must be incorporated in the SWP3. (f) Management of Runoff-The SWP3 shall contain a narrative consideration for reducing the volume of runoff from concrete batch plants by diverting runoff or otherwise managing runoff,including use of infiltration,detention ponds, retention ponds,or reusing of runoff. Page 45 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 3. Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation—At least once per year,one or more qualified personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit, the concrete batch plant,and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)shall conduct a compliance evaluation of the plant. The evaluation must include the following. (a) Visual examination of all areas draining stormwater associated with regulated concrete batch plants for evidence of,or the potential for,pollutants entering the drainage system. These include,but are not limited to: cleaning areas, material handling areas,above ground storage tanks,hoppers or silos,dust collection/containment systems,and truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Measures implemented to reduce pollutants in runoff(including structural controls and implementation of management practices)must be evaluated to determine if they are effective and if they are implemented in accordance with the terms of this permit and with the permittee's SWP3. The operator shall conduct a visual inspection of equipment needed to implement the SWP3,such as spill response equipment. (b) Based on the results of the evaluation,the following must be revised as appropriate within two weeks of the evaluation: the description of potential pollutant sources identified in the SWP3(as required in Part "Description of Potential Pollutant Sources");and pollution prevention measures and controls identified in the SWP3(as required in Part IV.B.2, "Measures and Controls"). The revisions may include a schedule for implementing the necessary changes. (c) The permittee shall prepare and include in the SWP3 a report summarizing the scope of the evaluation,the personnel making the evaluation,the date(s)of the evaluation,major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3,and actions taken in response to the findings of the evaluation. The report must identify any incidents of noncompliance. Where the report does not identify incidences of noncompliance,the report must contain a statement that the evaluation did not identify any incidence(s),and the report must be signed according to 3o TAC§305.1.28,relating to Signatories to Reports. (d) The Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation may substitute for one of the required inspections delineated in Part IV.B.2.(c)of this general permit. Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges Wastewater discharges associated with concrete production including wastewater disposal by land application are not authorized under this general permit. These wastewater discharges must be authorized under an alternative TCEQ water quality permit or otherwise disposed of in an authorized manner. Discharges of concrete truck wash out at construction sites may be authorized if conducted in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements This general permit authorizes the land disposal of wash out from concrete trucks at construction sites regulated under this general permit,provided the following requirements are met. Any discharge of concrete production waste water to surface water in the state must be authorized under a separate TCEQ general permit or individual permit. A. Discharge of concrete truck wash out water to surface water in the state,including discharge to storm sewers,is prohibited by this general permit. B. Concrete truck wash out water shall be disposed in areas at the construction site where structural controls have been established to prevent discharge to surface water Page 46 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 in the state,or to areas that have a minimal slope that allow infiltration and filtering of wash out water to prevent discharge to surface water in the state. Structural controls may consist of temporary berms,temporary shallow pits,temporary storage tanks with slow rate release,or other reasonable measures to prevent runoff from the construction site. C. Wash out of concrete trucks during rainfall events shall be minimized. The discharge of concrete truck wash out water is prohibited at all times,and the operator shall insure that its BMPs are sufficient to prevent the discharge of concrete truck wash out as the result of rainfall or stormwater runoff. D. The disposal of wash out water from concrete trucks,made under authorization of this general permit must not cause or contribute to groundwater contamination. E. If a SWP3 is required to be implemented,the SWP3 shall include concrete wash out areas on the associated site map. Part VI. Retention of Records The permittee must retain the following records for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that a NOT is submitted as required in Part II.F.1 and 2 of this permit. For activities in which an NOT is not required,records shall be retained for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that the operator terminates coverage under Section II.F.3 of this permit. Records include: A. A copy of the SWP3; B. All reports and actions required by this permit,including a copy of the construction site notice; C. All data used to complete the NOI,if an NOI is required for coverage under this general permit; and D. All records of submittal of forms submitted to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to the secondary operator of a large construction site,if applicable. Part VII. Standard Permit Conditions A. The permittee has a duty to comply with'all permit conditions. Failure to comply with any permit condition is a violation of the permit and statutes under which it was issued(CWA and TWC),and is grounds for enforcement action,for terminating, revoking and reissuance,or modification,or denying coverage under this general permit,or for requiring a discharger to apply for and obtain an individual TPDES permit,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 40 CFR§122.41 (a). B. Authorization under this general permit may be modified,suspended,revoked and reissued,terminated or otherwise suspended for cause,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,30 TAC§305.66 and 40 CFR§122.41(f). Filing a notice of planned changes or anticipated non-compliance by the permittee does not stay any permit condition. The permittee must furnish to the executive director,upon request and within a reasonable time,any information necessary for the executive director to determine whether cause exists for modifying,revoking and reissuing,terminating or,otherwise suspending authorization under this permit,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 4o CFR§122.41(h). Additionally,the permittee must provide to the executive director,upon request,copies of all records that the permittee is required to maintain as a condition of this general permit. C. It is not a defense for a discharger in an enforcement action that it would have been necessary to halt or reduce the permitted activity to maintain compliance with the permit conditions. Page 47 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 D. Inspection and entry shall be allowed under TWC Chapters 26-28,Texas Health and Safety Code§§361.032-361.033 and 361.037,and 4o CFR§122.41(i).The statement in TWC§26.014 that commission entry of a facility shall occur according to an establishment's rules and regulations concerning safety,internal security,and fire protection is not grounds for denial or restriction of entry to any part of the facility or site,but merely describes the commission's duty to observe appropriate rules and regulations during an inspection. E. The discharger is subject to administrative,civil,and criminal penalties,as applicable,under TWC Chapter 7 for violations including but not limited to the following: 1. negligently or knowingly violating the federal CWA§§301,302,306,307,308, 318,or 405,or any condition or limitation implementing any sections in a permit issued under CWA§402,or any requirement imposed in a pretreatment program approved under CWA§§4o2(a)(3)or 4o2(b)(8); 2. knowingly making any false statement,representation,or certification in any record or other document submitted or required to be maintained under a permit,including monitoring reports or reports of compliance or noncompliance;and 3. knowingly violating CWA§303 and placing another person in imminent danger of death or serious bodily injury. F. All reports and other information requested by the executive director must be signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§305.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). G. Authorization under this general permit does not convey property or water rights of any sort and does not grant any exclusive privilege. H. The permittee shall take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge in violation of this permit that has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. I. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain all facilities and systems of treatment and control(and related appurtenances)that are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit. Proper operation and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory controls and appropriate quality assurance procedures.This provision requires the operation of back-up or auxiliary facilities or similar systems that are installed by a permittee only when the operation is necessary to achieve compliance with the conditions of the permit. J. The permittee shall comply with the monitoring and reporting requirements in 40 CFR§122.41(j)and(1),as applicable. K. Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 40 CFR§136.1(c)and 40 CFR§122.44(i)(1)(iv). Part VIII. Fees A. A fee of must be submitted along with the NOI: 1. $325 if submitting a paper NOI,or 2. $225 if submitting an NOI electronically. B. ' Fees are due upon submission of the NOI. An NOI will not be declared administratively complete unless the associated fee has been paid in full. C. No separate annual fees will be assessed for this general permit. The Water Quality Annual Fee has been incorporated into the NOI fees as described above. Page 48 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 D. Effective September 1,2018,applicants seeking coverage under an NOI or LREW must submit their application using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. Page 49 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization Periods of Low Erosion Potential by County—Eligible Date Ranges Andrews: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Ector: Nov.15-Apr.30 Archer: Dec.15-Feb.14 Edwards: Dec.15-Feb.14 Armstrong: Nov.15-Apr.30 El Paso: Jan.1-Jul.14,or May 15-Jul. Bailey: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov.15-May 31,or Jun.1-Aug.14,or Jun.15-Sept.14, 14 or Jul.1-Oct.14,or Jul.15-Oct.31,or Aug.1-Apr.30,or Aug.15-May 14,or Baylor: Dec.15-Feb.14 Sept.1-May 30,or Oct.1-Jun.14,or Borden: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Nov.1-Jun.30,or Nov. 15-Jul.14 Brewster: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Fisher: Dec.15-Feb.14 Briscoe: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Floyd: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Brown: Dec.15-Feb.14 Foard: Dec.15-Feb.14 Callahan: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Gaines: Nov.15-Apr.30 Carson: Nov.15-Apr.3o Garza: Nov.15-Apr.30 Castro: Nov. -Apr.30 Glasscock: Nov.15-Apr.30 Childress: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Hale: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Cochran: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- Hall: Feb. -Mar.30 May 14 Hansford: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Coke: Dec.15-Feb.14 Hardeman: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Coleman: Dec.15-Feb.14 Hartley: Nov.15-Apr.30 Collingsworth: Jan.1-Mar.30,or Dec.1- Haskell: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Feb.28 Hockley: Nov. 1-Apr.14,or Nov.15- Concho: Dec.15-Feb.14 Apr.30 Cottle: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Howard: Nov.15-Apr.30 Crane: Nov.15-Apr.3o Hudspeth: Nov. 1-May 14 Crockett: Nov. 15-Jan.14,or Feb.1- Hutchinson: Nov.15-Apr.30 Mar.30 Irion: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Crosby: Nov.15-Apr.30 Jeff Davis: Nov.1-Apr.30 or Nov.15- Culberson: Nov. 1-May 14 May 14 Dallam: Nov.1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Jones: Dec. 15-Feb.14 30 Kent: Nov.15-Jan.14 or Feb.1-Mar.30 Dawson: Nov.15-Apr.3o Kerr: Dec.15-Feb.14 Deaf Smith: Nov.15-Apr.3o Kimble: Dec. 15 Feb. 14 Dickens: Nov. 15-Jan.14,or Feb. 1-Mar. 30 King: Dec.15 Feb.14 Dimmit: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Kinney: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Donley: Jan.1-Mar.30,or Dec.1-Feb. Knox: Dec.15-Feb.14 28 Lamb: Nov.1-Apr.14,or Nov.15-Apr. Eastland: Dec.15-Feb.14 30 Page 50 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Loving: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15-May Scurry: Nov.15-Apr.30 • �4 Shackelford: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Lubbock: Nov.15-Apr.3o Sherman: Nov.15-Apr.30 Lynn: Nov. -Apr.30 Stephens: Dec.15-Feb.14 Martin: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Sterling: Nov.15-Apr.30 Mason: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Stonewall: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Maverick: Dec.15-Feb.14 Sutton: Dec.15-Feb.14 McCulloch: Dec.15-Feb.14 Swisher: Nov.15-Apr.30 Menard: Dec.15-Feb.14 Taylor: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Midland: Nov.15-Apr.3o Terrell: Nov.15-Apr.30 Mitchell: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Terry: Nov.15-Apr.30 Moore: Nov.15-Apr.3o Throckmorton: Dec.15-Feb.14 Motley: Nov.15-Jan. 14,or Feb.1-Mar. 30 Tom Green: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Nolan: Dec.15-Feb.14 Upton: Nov.15-Apr.30 Oldham: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Uvalde: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Parmer: Nov.1-Apr.14,or Nov.15-Apr. Val Verde: Nov.15-Jan.14,or Feb.1- Mar.30 30 Pecos: Nov.15-Apr.3o Ward: Nov.1-Apr.14,or Nov.15-Apr. 30 Potter: Nov. 15-Apr.30 'Wichita: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Presidio: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- May 14 Wilbarger: Dec.15-Feb.14 Randall: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Winkler: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- May 14 Reagan: Nov.15-Apr.30 Yoakum: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- Real: Dec.15-Feb. 14 May 14 Reeves: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov.15-May Young: Dec.15-Feb.14 14 Wheeler: Jan.1-Mar.30,or Dec. 1-Feb. Runnels: Dec.15-Feb.14 28 Schleicher: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Zavala: Dec.15-Feb.14 Page 51 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix B:Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas �_, '` a :a •.• F r•^L! ig` R'r r.' • r;. . • ; 78 • 9l 11 .. �- •y�� •*;,-,....1k �I�,i.T __: wE.to��-a a...z<... b -*:•ate•b s. .4.."•'.1 i ••• •r•a.a r - ,,,.-1,I.r 4* r !' ''' _ ,.rG ,. ` •rria °r ." i ' r .as •.7a .s.•a' r" R? bra �r+.1w�+ a_ 4 .311 .1 a a 1.t s r• �' .{.+ Mi.{ib, ..r_ale.636" -•.,•..t++.: i :l:iA xie.eFei .. F ,yi+ }'' -ram r. • r..i+ •rs�. -Zq.-. ., . o I •'1•1•.4••_•6i . lit ' 3.1mi���: "'���i,..f ,� i'a, er, >S IYJ�A'`r'�'.i b a ai�r *:� der. •'�+ ~�!?`'i'_ �.�,�+ Sy .'+*) +c }jf.��*, •- 1 .iF •'#} . .roe 1 +r1 T1 -_. �a is♦ • + uj Lw 'F. + ..t i It, �/ : 11.4 qs a. •i.,I_ :�.. ..+r sro••s®m w•�.._♦ '. :a•�'.:• *,P I '7.J7*].- 1 rt,..r i Y 1..Via.r'. aN".-6ii an'VP '+i*• 3^"..1 a-P' 1.lij.9ra.9�ot� '•=, •, ,+� .f .. • ,-y .el :r t a.•a ISM ea sa..a•+■s 754 ,ems e,s.4. • +"a ••�i+5�' *., +* �!!� � ,7 a raw..s'1iFEs ao,a+rrsanoserer 'i, ♦•• �.'••a', .,_•• it "•aei4 - a•i i r r i•L aan ar•!8'IMP APR or s 1 '',a i,• •• •o it ;i, 7'.■.r_L'i♦1ri.E...s it or Gi 4149 e.a.. 1 ,a ...r ,4,,r 17 y 1 *ri.. . �,,, a::i e'e i•a Ia:#s ae' ew** e+..- Y."r,•• +a e ti r •'I -'. 1 -. MS"Kti.- '... .6 1i•a Y9 wpm'a*as or r' _ .v i•ii. a 1 %pi -. y�1, „ 7. 5:12.1.1....4...r.1,rrYY r �.:...w l%e m®a i o®..•t r VW VW MR far aa-a�o •} •:‘C: ' any... r'o •�F 1;e �.......-...t . %.*,.e.LYT�J.,::r• am ire Erio laa Iga �.� f•• r • . - •.,",.1. }_r-:*';b. �. f..rr•.� .1 rraalra...a i.�.i0 li'I.7fiiWi'O `oti •r ! _ •.:e yi.g;yr't:1 +.'•• +a" +� �A.e a i. . ra,a . S j f+,+.i;q •bAi,•�*♦ .....�� raaet.a:r Y, 4 '1L 4i T. 4*r, ':.i+�`.•�ev .•w :•�.+ ......�. a'rr .ti�2 Fj...,,,,til .il�• �M �i.t. }!• . 1,....:,..a '+r+a•..i .s a,r'a+w.r.. ^ �3'' ..' 1''� •T 1. i ,4 ig. ' a , IL%+a•.••• .•�p'ra�S/. •: we,> Pal la. +ww--.... ..Yy,r.y .-•r.• .J 'a„,g4F' /fir • • 7 . may:a®+.....rrb.+�or. �Jil v,1 1 4` '.� of 7. ,, rt�i5 t.d°i - as+.9+,..eyes'tw° _ G S' !' �a i+"' „► Mimi rA.r..ra.•ra ,"t �i�' ' • . • 6r�a w y�7. ','.."_ 1 : 1 .rras {•sr . ..- ±�, e '1, ' =Ili: - Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook dog:`Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service Page 52 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map WA Will FA.11 :sh rxtriltalkijiliriP/401:519 rinniffild rilliii2472-1111Vj'drAulE1101 I\ Mile Ira Tie* kiii ® i io use 111 14' sins aILni #ai��� �il11 -immaritlionartlimbo.��rs�l� prostgawiv -laariehrilvV1741141 412,040/5ent..e loArlf* 4-4164/10arir wkilosarital 6 !rig Jolt, 1144-.00-ak fat - '�;Ast $�' � , !�► �!` o Boa ...,. �. .. Miller V-4 WRJ lour :410.,,4011101.4%., 1561211,411 -275 Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook log:`Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(R USLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service Page 53 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15o0o0 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas Periods: EI# 1/1 1/16 1/31 2/15 3/1 3/16 3/31 4/15 4/30 5/15 5/30 6/14 6/29 7/14 7/29 8/13 8/28 9/12 9/27 to/12 10/2711/11 u/26 12/11 12/31 89 0 1 1 2 3 4 7 2 8 27 38 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 94 97 98 99 100 loo loo 90 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 21 29 37 46 54 6o 65 69 74 81 87 92 95 97 98 99 loo 91 o 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 loo loo 92 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 loo loo 93 0 1 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 25 4o 49 56 62 67 72 76 8o 85 91 97 98 99 99 100 94 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 21 29 38 47 53 57 61 65 7o 76 83 88 91 94 96 98 100 95 0 1 3 5 7 9 11 14 18 27 35 41 46 51 57 62 68 73 79 84 89 93 96 98 loo 96 0 2 4 6 9 12 17 23 30 37 43 49 54 58 62 66 7o 74 78 82 86 90 94 97 100 97 0 1 3 5 7 10 14 20 28 37 48 56 61 64 68 72 77 81 86 89 92 95 98 99 100 106 0 3 6 9 13 17 21 27 33 38 44 49 55 61 67 71 75 78 81 84 86 90 94 97 100 Each period begins on the date listed in the table above and lasts until the day before the following period. The final period begins on December 11 and ends on December 31. Table adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:`Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service Page 54 TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: CN: RN: mee Notice of Intent (NOI) for an Authorization for Stormwater Discharges Associated with real Construction Activity under TCEQ TPDES General Permit TXR150000 IMPORTANT INFORMATION Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the NOI form. Use the NOI Checklist to ensure all required information is completed correctly. Incomplete applications delay approval or result in automatic denial. Once processed your permit authorization can be viewed by entering the following link into your internet browser: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm or you can contact TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700. ePERMITS Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ 20754). To submit an NOI electronically, enter the following web address into your internet browser and follow the instructions: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/index.cfm APPLICATION FEE AND PAYMENT The application fee for submitting a paper NOI is $325. The application fee for electronic submittal of a NOI through the TCEQ ePermits system(STEERS)is $22 5. Payment of the application fee can be submitted by mail or through the TCEQ ePay system. The payment and the NOI must be mailed to separate addresses. To access the TCEQ ePay system enter the following web address into your internet browser: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay. Provide your payment information for verification of payment: • If payment was mailed to TCEQ provide the following: o Check/Money Order Number: o Name printed on Check: • If payment was made via ePay, provide the following: o Voucher Number: o A copy of the payment voucher is attached to this paper NOI form. TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2018) Page 1 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 RENEWAL(This portion of the NOI is not applicable after June 3, 2018) Is this NOI for a renewal of an existing authorization? 0 Yes 0 No If Yes, provide the authorization number here: TXR15 NOTE: If an authorization number is not provided, a new number will be assigned. SECTION 1. OPERATOR (APPLICANT) a) If the applicant is currently a customer with TCEQ, what is the Customer Number (CN) issued to this entity? CN (Refer to Section 1.a) of the Instructions) b) What is the Legal Name of the entity(applicant) applying for this permit? (The legal name must be spelled exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State, County, or in the legal document forming the entity.) c) What is the contact information for the Operator (Responsible Authority)? Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss): First and Last Name: , Suffix: Title: Credentials: - Phone Number: Fax Number: E-mail: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing Information if outside USA: Territory: - Country Code: Postal Code: d) Indicate the type of customer: 0 Individual 0 Federal Government 0 Limited Partnership 0 County Government General Partnership 0 State Government 0 Trust 0 City Government Sole Proprietorship (D.B.A.) 0 Other Government 0 Corporation 0 Other: EEstate e) Is the applicant an independent operator? 0 Yes 0 No TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2oi8) Page 2 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 (If a governmental entity, a subsidiary, or part of a larger corporation, check No.) f) Number of Employees. Select the range applicable to your company. rd 0-20 E 251-500 5 21-100 501 or higher El 101-250 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers: (Required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. Not Required for Individuals, Government, or Sole Proprietors.) State Franchise Tax ID Number: Federal Tax ID: Texas Secretary of State Charter (filing) Number: DUNS Number (if known): SECTION 2. APPLICATION CONTACT . Is the application contact the same as the applicant identified above? Yes, go to Section 3 No, complete this section Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credential: Organization Name: Phone Number: Fax Number: E-mail: Mailing Address: Internal Routing (Mail Code, Etc.): .. City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: - Postal Code: SECTION 3. REGULATED ENTITY (RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) If this is an existing permitted site, what is the Regulated Entity Number (RN) issued to this site? RN (Refer to Section 3.a) of the Instructions) • TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2°18) Page 3 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 b) Name of project or site (the name known by the community where it's located): c) In your own words, briefly describe the type of construction occurring at the regulated site (residential, industrial, commercial, or other): P1 d) County or Counties (if located in more than one): e) Latitude: Longitude: f) Site Address/Location If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section A: Street Number and Name: City, State, and Zip Code: Section B. Location Description: City(or city nearest to)where the site is located: Zip Code where the site is located: SECTION 4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS a) Is the project or site located on Indian Country Lands? 0 Yes, do not submit this form. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. 0 No b) Is your construction activity associated with a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources? 0 Yes. Note: The construction stormwater runoff may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas and may need to obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. r No c) What is the Primary Standard Industrial Classification(SIC) Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site? _ d) What is the Secondary SIC Code(s), if applicable? e) What is the total number of acres to be disturbed? f) Is the project part of a larger common plan of development or sale? TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2°18) Page 4 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 E Yes No. The total number of acres disturbed, provided in e) above, must be 5 or more. If the total number of acres disturbed is less than 5, do not submit this form. See the requirements in the general permit for small construction sites. g) What is the estimated start date of the project? h) What is the estimated end date of the project? i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? d Yes 5 No j) What is the name of the first water body(ies) to receive the stormwater runoff or potential runoff from the site? k) What is the segment number(s) of the classified water body(ies) that the discharge will eventually reach? 1) Is the discharge into a Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(MS4)? 0 Yes rd No If Yes, provide the name of the MS4 operator: Note: The general permit requires you to send a copy of this NOI form to the MS4 operator. m) Is the discharge or potential discharge from the site within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, as defined in 30 TAC Chapter 213? a Yes, complete the certification below. Ell No, go to Section 5 I certify that the copy of the TCEQ approved Plan required by the Edwards Aquifer Rule (30 TAC Chapter 213) that is included or referenced in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan will be implemented. 8 Yes SECTION 5. NOI CERTIFICATION a) I certify that I have obtained a copy and understand the terms and conditions of the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). 8 Yes b) I certify that the full legal name of the entity applying for this permit has been provided and is legally authorized to do business in Texas. g Yes c) I understand that a Notice of Termination(NOT) must be submitted when this authorization is no longer needed. _0 Yes d) I certify that a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan has been developed, will be implemented prior to construction and to the best of my knowledge and belief is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans, as required in the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). 8 Yes Note: For multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3, the confirmation of an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3, provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator. TCEQ-20022(3/6/2o18) Page 5 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 SECTION 6. APPLICANT CERTIFICATION SIGNATURE Operator Signatory Name: Operator Signatory Title: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature (use blue ink): Date: TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2018) Page 6 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 NOTICE OF INTENT CHECKLIST (TXR150000) Did you complete everything? Use this checklist to be sure! Are you ready to mail your form to TCEQ? Go to the General Information Section of the Instructions for mailing addresses. Confirm each item(or applicable item) in this form is complete. This checklist is for use by the applicant to ensure a complete application is being submitted. Missing information " may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. (See NOI process description in the General Information and Instructions.) APPLICATION FEE If paying by check: bl Check was mailed separately to the TCEQs Cashier's Office. (See Instructions for Cashier's address and Application address.) 8 Check number and name on check is provided in this application. If using ePay: E The voucher number is provided in this application and a copy of the voucher is attached. RENEWAL 16 If this application is for renewal of an existing authorization, the authorization number is provided. OPERATOR INFORMATION Customer Number (CN)issued by TCEQ Central Registry 5 Legal name as filed to do business in Texas. (Call TX SOS 512-463-5555 to verify.) El Name and title of responsible authority signing the application. 0 Phone number and e-mail address ra Mailing address is complete&verifiable with USPS. www.usps.com Cl Type of operator (entity type). Is applicant an independent operator? Number of employees. g For corporations or limited partnerships - Tax ID and SOS filing numbers. E Application contact and address is complete&verifiable with USPS. http://www.usps.com REGULATED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE 5 Regulated Entity Number (RN) (if site is already regulated by TCEQ) Site/project name and construction activity description County g Latitude and longitude http://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sgmaview.html TCEQ-20022 Checklist(03/06/2018) Page 1 Site Address/Location. Do not use a rural route or post office box. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS Indian Country Lands -the facility is not on Indian Country Lands. Construction activity related to facility associated to oil, gas, or geothermal resources a Primary SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site. www.osha.gov/oshstats/sicser.html 0 Estimated starting and ending dates of the project. 5 Confirmation of concrete truck washout. El Acres disturbed is provided and qualifies for coverage through a NOI. C Common plan of development or sale. Di Receiving water body or water bodies. d Segment number or numbers. MS4 operator. Edwards Aquifer rule. CERTIFICATION d Certification statements have been checked indicating Yes. Signature meets 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44 and is original. TCEQ-20022 Checklist (03/06/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent (NOI) for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES General Permit (TXR150000) GENERAL INFORMATION _ [Where to Send the Notice of Intent (NOI): By Regular Mail: By Overnight or Express Mail: TCEQ TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) P.O. Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, Texas 78711-3087 Austin, TX Application Fee: The application fee of $325 is required to be paid at the time the NOI is submitted. Failure to submit payment at the time the application is filed will cause delays in acknowledgment or denial of coverage under the general permit. Payment of the fee may be made by check or money order, payable to TCEQ, or through EPAY (electronic payment through the web). Mailed Payments: Use the attached General Permit Payment Submittal Form. The application fee is submitted to a different address than the NOI. Read the General Permit Payment Submittal Form for further instructions, including the address to send the payment. ePAY Electronic Payment: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay When making the payment you must select Water Quality, and then select the fee category "General Permit Construction Storm Water Discharge NOI Application". You must include a copy of the payment voucher with your NOI. Your NOI will not be considered complete without the payment voucher. ',TCEQ Contact List: Application - status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management - obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases (as available): 512-239-DATA(3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Intent Process: When your NOI is received by the program, the form will be processed as follows: • Administrative Review: Each item on the form will be reviewed for a complete response. In addition, the operator's legal name must be verified with Texas Secretary of State as valid and active (if applicable). The address(es) on the form must be verified with the US Postal service as receiving regular mail delivery. Do not give an overnight/express mailing address. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a notice of deficiency (NOD) will be mailed to the operator. The operator will have 30 days to respond to the.NOD. The response will be reviewed for completeness. • Acknowledgment of Coverage: An Acknowledgment Certificate will be mailed to the operator. This certificate acknowledges coverage under the general permit. or Denial of Coverage: If the operator fails to respond to the NOD or the response is inadequate, coverage under the general permit may be denied. If coverage is denied, the operator will be notified. General Permit (Your Permit) For NOIs submitted electronically through ePermits, provisional coverage under the general permit begins immediately following confirmation of receipt of the NOI form by the TCEQ. For paper NOIs, provisional coverage under the general permit begins 7 days • after a completed NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. You should have a copy of your general permit when submitting your application. You may view and print your permit for which you are seeking coverage, on the TCEQ web site http://www.tceq.texas.gov. Search using keyword TXR150000. Change in Operator An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated project or site changes, the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted no later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. TCEQ Central Registry Core Data Form The Core Data Form has been incorporated into this form. Do not send a Core Data Form to TCEQ. After final acknowledgment of coverage under the general permit, the program will assign a Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number, if one has not already been assigned to this customer or site. For existing customers and sites, you can find the Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number by entering the following web address into your internet browser: http://www15.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/ or you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. On the website, you can search by your permit number, the Regulated Entity(RN) number, or the Customer Number (CN). If you do not know these numbers, you can select "Advanced Search" to search by permittee name, site address, etc. • The Customer (Permittee)is responsible for providing consistent information to the TCEQ, and for updating all CN and RN data for all authorizations as changes occur.For this permit, a Notice of Change form must be submitted to the program area. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 .INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE NOI FORM Renewal of General Permit. Dischargers holding active authorizations under the expired General Permit are required to submit a NOI to continue coverage. The existing permit number is required. If the permit number is not provided or has been terminated, expired, or denied, a new permit number will be issued. (Section 1. OPERATOR(APPLICANT) a) Customer Number (CN) TCEQ's Central Registry will assign each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. If the applicant is an existing TCEQ customer, the Customer Number is available at the following website: http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/. If the applicant is not an existing TCEQ customer, leave the space for CN blank. b) Legal Name of Applicant Provide the current legal name of the applicant. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, as filed in the county.You may contact the SOS at 512-463-5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. If filed in the county, provide a copy of the legal documents showing the legal name. c) Contact Information for the Applicant (Responsible Authority) Provide information for the person signing the application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website: https://tools.usps.com/go/ZipLookupAction!input.action. The phone number should provide contact to the applicant. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the applicant. d) Type of Customer (Entity Type) Check only one box that identifies the type of entity. Use the descriptions below to identify the appropriate entity type. Note that the selected entity type also indicates the name that must be provided as an applicant for an authorization. Individual An individual is a customer who has not established a business, but conducts an activity that needs to be regulated by the TCEQ. Partnership A customer that is established as a partnership as defined by the Texas Secretary of State Office (TX SOS). If the customer is a 'General Partnership' or 'Joint Venture' filed in the county(not filed with TX SOS), the legal name of each partner forming the 'General Partnership' or 'Joint Venture' must be provided. Each 'legal entity' must apply as a co-applicant. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Trust or Estate A trust and an estate are fiduciary relationships governing the trustee/executor with respect to the trust/estate property. Sole Proprietorship (DBA) A sole proprietorship is a customer that is owned by only one person and has not been incorporated. This business may: 1. be under the person's name 2. have its own name (doing business as or DBA) 3. have any number of employees. If the customer is a Sole Proprietorship or DBA, the 'legal name' of the individual business 'owner' must be provided. The DBA name is not recognized as the 'legal name' of the entity. The DBA name may be used for the site name (regulated entity). Corporation A customer that meets all of these conditions: 1. is a legally incorporated entity under the laws of any state or country 2. is recognized as a corporation by the Texas Secretary of State 3. has proper operating authority to operate in Texas The corporation's 'legal name' as filed with the Texas Secretary of State must be provided as applicant. An'assumed' name of a corporation is not recognized as the 'legal name' of the entity. Government Federal, state, county, or city government (as appropriate) The customer is either an agency of one of these levels of government or the governmental body itself. The government agency's 'legal name' must be provided as the applicant. A department name or other description of the organization is not recognized as the 'legal name'. Other This may include a utility district, water district, tribal government, college district, council of governments, or river authority. Provide the specific type of government. e) Independent Entity Check No if this customer is a subsidiary, part of a larger company, or is a governmental entity. Otherwise, check Yes. f) Number of Employees Check one box to show the number of employees for this customer's entire company, at all locations. This is not necessarily the number of employees at the site named in the application. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers These are required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. These are not required for Individuals, Government, and Sole Proprietors. State Franchise Tax ID Number Corporations and limited liability companies that operate in Texas are issued a franchise tax identification number. If this customer is a corporation or limited liability company, enter the Tax ID number. Federal Tax ID All businesses, except for some small sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships should have a federal taxpayer identification number (TIN). Enter this number here. Use no prefixes, dashes, or hyphens. Sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships do not need to provide a federal tax ID. TX SOS Charter (filing) Number Corporations and Limited Partnerships required to register with the Texas Secretary of State are issued a charter or filing number. You may obtain further information by calling SOS at 512-463-5555. DUNS Number Most businesses have a DUNS (Data Universal Numbering System)number issued by Dun and Bradstreet Corp. If this customer has one, enter it here. ,Section 2. APPLICATION CONTACT _ Provide the name and contact information for the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3. REGULATED ENTITY(RE)INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) Regulated Entity Number (RN) The RN is issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity is regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. Search TCEQ's Central Registry to see if the site has an assigned RN at http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/. If this regulated entity has not been assigned an RN, leave this space blank. If the site of your business is part of a larger business site, an RN may already be assigned for the larger site. Use the RN assigned for the larger site. If the site is found, provide the assigned RN and provide the information for the site to be authorized through this application. The site information for this authorization may vary from the larger site information. An example is a chemical plant where a unit is owned or operated by a separate corporation that is accessible by the same physical address of your unit or facility. Other examples include industrial parks identified by one common address but different corporations have control of defined areas within the site. In both cases, an RN would be assigned for the physical address location and the permitted sites would be identified separately under the same RN. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 5 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site or project as known by the public in the area where the site is located. The name you provide on this application will be used in the TCEQ Central Registry as the Regulated Entity name. c) Description of Activity Regulated In your own words, briefly describe the primary business that you are doing that requires this authorization. Do not repeat the SIC Code description. d) County Provide the name of the county where the site or project is located. If the site or project is located in more than one county, provide the county names as secondary. e) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees, minutes, and seconds or decimal form. For help obtaining the latitude and longitude, go to: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sqmaview.html. f) Site Address/Location If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site in Section A. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address, you may need to validate the address with your local police (911 service) or through an online map site used to locate a site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, provide a complete written location description in Section B. For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city (or nearest city) and zip code of the site location. Section 4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS a) Indian Country Lands If your site is located on Indian Country Lands, the TCEQ does not have authority to process your application. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6, Dallas. Do not submit this form to TCEQ. b) Construction activity associated with facility associated with exploration, development, or production of oil, gas, or geothermal resources If your activity is associated with oil and gas exploration, development, or production, you may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas (RRC) and may need to obtain authorization from EPA Region 6. Construction activities associated with a facility related to oil, gas or geothermal resources may include the construction of a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 6 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 carbon dioxide geologic storage facility; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. Where required by federal law, discharges of stormwater associated with construction activities under the RRC's jurisdiction must be authorized by the EPA and the RRC, as applicable. Activities under RRC jurisdiction include construction of a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources, such as a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a carbon dioxide geologic storage facility under the jurisdiction of the RRC; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. The RRC also has jurisdiction over stormwater from land disturbance associated with a site survey that is conducted prior to construction of a facility that would be regulated by the RRC. Under 33 U.S.C. §1342(1)(2) and §1362(24), EPA cannot require a permit for discharges of stormwater from field activities or operations associated with{oil and gas} exploration, production, processing, or treatment operations, or transmission facilities, including activities necessary to prepare a site for drilling and for the movement and placement of drilling equipment, whether or not such field activities or operations may be considered to be construction activities unless the discharge is contaminated by contact with any overburden,raw material, intermediate product, finished product,byproduct, or waste product located on the site of the facility. Under §3.8 of this title (relating to Water Protection), the RRC prohibits operators from causing or allowing pollution of surface or subsurface water. Operators are encouraged to implement and maintain best management practices (BMPs) to minimize discharges of pollutants, including sediment,in stormwater during construction activities to help ensure protection of surface water quality during storm events. For more information about the jurisdictions of the RRC and the TCEQ read the Memorandum of Understanding (MOU)between the RRC and TCEQ at 16 Texas Administrative Code, Part 1, Chapter 3, Rule 3.30,by entering the following link into an internet browser: http://texreg.sos.state.tx.us/public/readtac$ext.TacPage?s1=R&app=9&p_dir=&p_rloc= &p_tloc=&p_ploc=&pg=1&p_tac=&ti=16&pt=1&ch=3&r1=30 or contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 for additional information. c) Primary Standard Industrial Classification(SIC) Code Provide the SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at this site. Common SIC Codes related to construction activities include: • 1521 - Construction of Single Family Homes • 1522 - Construction of Residential Buildings Other than Single Family Homes • 1541 - Construction of Industrial Buildings and Warehouses TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 7 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 J • 1542 - Construction of Non-residential Buildings, other than Industrial Buildings and Warehouses • 1611 - Highway and Street Construction, except Highway Construction • 1622 - Bridge, Tunnel, and Elevated Highway Construction • 1623 -Water, Sewer, Pipeline and Communications, and Power Line Construction For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your Internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/pls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Local Government Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. d) Secondary SIC Code Secondary SIC Code(s)may be provided. Leave this blank if not applicable. For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your Internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/pls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. e) Total Number of Acres Disturbed Provide the approximate number of acres that the construction site will disturb. Construction activities that disturb less than one acre, unless they are part of a larger common plan that disturbs more than one acre, do not require permit coverage. Construction activities that disturb between one and five acres, unless they are part of a common plan that disturbs more than five acres, do not require submission of an NOI. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. If you have any questions about this item, please contact the stormwater technical staff by phone at 512-239-4671 or by email at swgp@tceq.texas.gov. f) Common Plan of Development Construction activities that disturb less than five acres do not require submission of an NOI unless they are part of a common plan of development or for sale where the area disturbed is five or more acres. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. For more information on what a common plan of development is, refer to the definition of "Common Plan of Development" in the Definitions section of the general permit or enter the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/permitting/stormwater/common_plan_of_developrnent_step s.hln,l For further information, go to the TCEQ stormwater construction webpage enter the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction and search for "Additional Guidance and Quick Links If you have any further questions about the Common Plan of Development you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 or the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance at 800-447- 2827. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 8 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Estimated Start Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity is initiated at the site. If renewing the permit provide the original start date of when construction activity for this project began. h) Estimated End Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity will end and final stabilization will be achieved at the site. i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? Indicate if you expect that operators of concrete trucks.will washout concrete trucks at the construction site. j) Identify the water body(s) receiving stormwater runoff The stormwater may be discharged directly to a receiving stream or through a MS4 from your site. It eventually reaches a receiving water body such as a local stream or lake, possibly via a drainage ditch.You must provide the name of the water body that receives the discharge from the site (a local stream or lake). If your site has more than one outfall you need to include the name of the first water body for each outfall, if they are different. k) Identify the segment number(s) of the classified water body(s) Identify the classified segment number(s) receiving a discharge directly or indirectly. Enter the following link into your internet browser to find the segment number of the classified water body where stormwater will flow from the site: www.tceq.texas.gov/waterquality/monit'oring/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. You may also find the segment number in TCEQ publication GI-316 by entering the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/publications/gi/gi-316 or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge is into an unclassified receiving water and then crosses state lines prior to entering a classified segment, select the appropriate watershed: • 0100 (Canadian River Basin) • 0200 (Red River Basin) • 0300 (Sulfur River Basin) • 0400 (Cypress Creek Basin) • 0500 (Sabine River Basin) Call the Water Quality Assessments section at 512-239-4671 for further assistance. 1) Discharge into MS4 -Identify the MS4 Operator The discharge may initially be into a municipal separate storm sewer system(MS4). If the stormwater discharge is into an MS4, provide the name of the entity that operates the MS4 where the stormwater discharges. An MS4 operator is often a city, town, county, or utility district,but possibly can be another form of government. Please note that the Construction General Permit requires the Operator to supply the MS4 with a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 9 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 copy of the NOI submitted to TCEQ. For assistance, you may call the technical staff at 512-239-4671. m) Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone and Certification The general permit requires the approved Contributing Zone Plan or Water Pollution Abatement Plan to be included or referenced as a part of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. See maps on the TCEQ website to determine if the site is located within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer by entering the following link into an internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/field/eapp/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at 512-239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge or potential discharge is within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, a site-specific authorization approved by the Executive Director under the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program(30 TAC Chapter 213)is required before construction can begin. For questions regarding the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program, contact the appropriate TCEQ Regional Office. For projects in Hays, Travis and Williamson Counties: Austin Regional Office, 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, 512-339- 2929. For Projects in Bexar, Comal, Kinney, Medina and Uvalde Counties: TCEQ San Antonio Regional Office, 14250 Judson Rd., San Antonio, TX 78233-4480, 210-490- 3096. Section 5. NOI CERTIFICATION Note: Failure to indicate Yes to all of the certification items may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. a) Certification of Understanding the Terms and Conditions of Construction General Permit (TXR150000) Provisional coverage under the Construction General Permit (TXR150000)begins 7 days after the completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. Electronic applications submitted through ePermits have immediate provisional coverage. You must obtain a copy and read the Construction General Permit before submitting your application. You may view and print the Construction General Permit for which you are seeking coverage at the TCEQ web site by entering the following link into an internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction or you may contact the TCEQ Stormwater processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. b) Certification of Legal Name The full legal name of the applicant as authorized to do business in Texas is required. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, that is filed in the county where doing business. You may contact the SOS at 512-463 5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. c) Understanding of Notice of Termination A permittee shall terminate coverage under the Construction General Permit through the submittal of a NOT when the operator of the facility changes, final stabilization has TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 10 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 been reached, the discharge becomes authorized under an individual permit, or the construction activity never began at this site. d) Certification of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan The SWP3 identifies the areas and activities that could produce contaminated runoff at your site and then tells how you will ensure that this contamination is mitigated. For example, in describing your mitigation measures, your site's plan might identify the devices that collect and filter stormwater, tell how those devices are to be maintained, and tell how frequently that maintenance is to be carried out. You must develop this plan in accordance with the TCEQ general permit requirements. This plan must be developed and implemented before you complete this NOI. The SWP3 must be available for a TCEQ investigator to review on request. Section 6. APPLICANT CERTIFICATION SIGNATURE The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44. If you are a corporation: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(1) (see below).According to this code provision, any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. If you are a municipality or other government entity: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(3) (see below). According to this code provision, only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity, it may be beneficial to consult your city charter, county or city ordinances, or the Texas statute(s)under which your government entity was formed. An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above, please contact the TCEQ's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 11 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. Signatories to Applications (a)All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation, the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph, a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision- making functions for the corporation; or the manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million (in second-quarter 1980 dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship, the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor, respectively. (3) For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency, the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph, a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g., regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 12 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you are mailing your payment. (Instructions: • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NOI. 'Mail this form and your check to either of the following: By Regular U.S.Mail By Overnight or Express Mail Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 Cashier's Office, MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, TX 78711-3088 Austin, TX 78753 'Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXR150000 1. Check or Money Order No: 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: 3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI Information: If the check is for more than one NOI, list each Project or Site (RE) Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. Do not submit a copy of the NOI with this form, as it could cause duplicate permit application entries! If there is not enough space on the form to list all of the projects or sites the authorization will cover, then attach a list of the additional sites. Project/Site (RE) Name: , Project/Site (RE) Physical Address: Staple the check or money order to this form in this space. TCEQ-20134 (03/06/2018) Page 1 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you are mailing your payment. • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NOI. Mail this form and your check to: BY REGULAR U.S.MAIL BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office,MC-214 Cashier's Office,MC-214 P.O.Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,TX 78711-3088 Austin,TX 78753 Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXG920000 1. Check/Money Order No: YY 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: 3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI INFORMATION If the check is for more than one NOI,list each Project/Site(RE)Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. DO NOT SUBMIT A COPY OF THE NOI WITH THIS FORM AS IT COULD CAUSE DUPLICATE PERMIT ENTRIES. See Attached List of Sites(If more space is needed,you may attach a list.) Project/Site(RE)Name: Project/Site(RE)Physical Address: YYuY Staple Check in This Space v v TCEQ-20134(04/13/2006) Page 1 TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: CN: RN: e = Region: -^a Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TCEQ TPDES General Permit TXR150000 IMPORTANT INFORMATION: Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the form. Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ 20754). ePermits: This form is available on our online permitting system. Sign up for online permitting at: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/ What is the permit number to be terminated? TXR15 TXRCW Section 1. OPERATOR (Permittee) a) What is the Customer Number(CN)issued to this entity? CN b) What is the Legal Name of the current permittee? c) Provide the contact information for the Operator(Responsible Authority). Prefix(Mr. Ms. or Miss): First and Last Name: r Suffix: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: r Fax Number: - - Email: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Country Mailing Information, if outside USA: Section 2. APPLICATION CONTACT This is the person TCEQ will contact if additional information is needed regarding this application. Is the application contact the same as the permittee identified above? 0 Yes, go to Section 3. El No, complete section below TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Prefix (Mr. Ms. or Miss): First and Last Name:F Suffix: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: f • Fax Number:f Email: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Country Mailing Information,if outside USA: Section 3. REGULATED ENTITY (RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) TCEQ issued RE Reference Number(RN):RN b) Name of project or site as known by the local community: c) County,or counties if more than 1: d) Latitude: _ Longitude: _ e) Site Address/Location: If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section 3A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section 3B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section 3A: Physical Address of Project or Site: Street Number and Name: City, State, and Zip Code: Section 3B: Site Location Description: Location description: City where the site is located or,if not in a city,what is the nearest city: Zip Code where the site is located: - Section 4. REASON FOR TERMINATION Check the reason for termination: g Final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the Operator and all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have been removed, or scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3. Another permitted Operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized, and temporary erosion controls that have been identified in the SWP3 have been transferred to the new Operator. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 The discharge is now authorized under an alternate TPDES permit. The activity never began at this site that is regulated under the general permit. Section 5. CERTIFICATION Signatory Name: Signatory Title: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief,true, accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature (use blue ink): Date: TCEQ 20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Instructions for Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TPDES General Permit TXR150000 GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Termination(NOT): BY REGULAR U.S. MAIL: BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL: Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Stormwater Processing Center (MC-228) Stormwater Processing Center(MC-228) P.O.Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,Texas 78711-3087 Austin,TX 78753. TCEQ Contact List: Application status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management- obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases(as available): 512-239-DATA(3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Termination Process: A Notice of Termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ When your NOT is received by the program,the form will be processed as follows: 1) Administrative Review: The form will be reviewed to confirm the following: • the permit number is provided; • the permit is active and has been approved; • the entity terminating the permit is the current permittee; • the site information matches the original permit record; and • the form has the required original signature with title and date. 2) Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a phone call will be made to the applicant to clear the deficiency. A letter will not be sent to the permittee if unable to process the form. 3) Confirmation of Termination: A Notice of Termination Confirmation letter will be mailed to the operator. Chan:e in O s erator: - An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated entity changes,the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted not later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE FORM The majority of permit information related to the current operator and regulated entity are available at the following website: http://www2.tcea.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Section 1. O I erator (Current Permittee): a) Customer Number(CN) TCEQ's Central Registry assigns each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. The Customer Number, for the current permittee,is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. b) Legal Name of Operator The operator must be the same entity as previously submitted on the original Notice of Intent for the permit number provided. The current operator name, as provided on the current authorization, is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. c) Contact Information for the Operator (Responsible Authority) Provide information for person signing the NOT application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. Update the address if different than previously submitted for the Notice of Intent or Notice of Change. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website:https://tools.usps.com/go/ZipLookupAction!input.action. The phone number should provide contact to the operator. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the operator. Section 2. A s s lication Contact: Provide the name, title and contact information of the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3. Re: ated Entit (RE) Information on Project or Site: a) Regulated Entity Reference Number(RN) A number issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number,registration number, or license number. The Regulated Entity Reference Number is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site as known by the public in the area where the site is located. c) County Identify the county or counties in which the regulated entity is located. d) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees,minutes,and seconds or decimal form. The latitude and longitude as provided on the current authorization is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wo_dpa/index.cfm. e) Site/Project(RE)Physical Address/Location Information The physical address/location information, as provided on the current authorization, is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. TCEQ 20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Section 3A. If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address,you may need to validate the address with your local police(911 service) or through an online map site used to locate the site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. Section 3B. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, provide a complete written location description.For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city(or nearest city) and Zip Code of the facility location. Section 4. Reason for Termination: The Notice of Termination form is only for use to terminate the authorization(permit). The Permittee must indicate the specific reason for terminating by checking one of the options. If the reason is not listed then provide an attachment that explains the reason for termination. Please read your general permit carefully to determine when to terminate your permit. Permits will not be reactivated after submitting a termination form. The termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. Section 5. Certification: The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. IF YOUAREA CORPORATION: The regulation that controls who may sign an application form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a),which is provided below. According to this code provision, any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. IF YOUAREA MUNICIPALITY OR OTHER GOVERNMENT ENTITY- The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a),which is provided below. According to this code provision, only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity,it may be beneficial to consult your city charter,county or city ordinances,or the Texas statutes under which your government entity was formed.An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation.By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above,please contact the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44. Signatories to Applications (a) All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation,the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph,a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary,treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision-making functions for the corporation;or the manager of one or more manufacturing,production,or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding$25 million(in second-quarter 1980 dollars),if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship,the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor,respectively. (3) For a municipality,state,federal, or other public agency,the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph,a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g.,regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ 20023 (03/09/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 01 r 111 LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "PRIMARY OPERATOR"NOTICE This notice applies to construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.usinavipermits/wq_construction.html Site-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized. Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: . a' LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "SECONDARY OPERA TOR "NOTICE This notice applies to secondary operators of construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html Site-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized. Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3): For Large Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.3. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.3. of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part II.F.3. 111 ram- • •� SMALL CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 The following information is posted in compliance with Part II.E.2. of the TCEQ General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from small construction sites. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: For Small Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.2. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.2. of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part II.F.3. CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION Section 01566 SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Descriptions of measures and practices, in response to TPDES General Permit TXR 150000, which shall be used on the Work to eliminate or significantly minimize pollutants in discharges into Surface Water in the State by controlling erosion and sediments at their source. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01550—Stabilized Construction Exit 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls C Definitions: 1. Potential Water Pollutant- any substance that could potentially alter the physical, thermal, chemical, or biological quality of the Surface Water in the State,rendering the water harmful, detrimental, or injurious to humans, animal life, vegetation, or property, or to public health, safety or welfare, or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose. 1.02 MEAUSREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Plans and this Technical Specification. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C The Contractor shall install, maintain, and inspect erosion and sediment control measures and practices that operate effectively and as specified in the Plans and in this or other Technical Specifications. 07/2006 01566- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION D Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of the limits of construction or dedicated rights-of-way and easements. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor. E The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, storing,hauling, and disposing of spoil, silt, waste materials, and contaminated material resulting from erosion and sediment control measures as specified in this or other Technical Specifications and in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.02 EXPOSED SOIL A When soil is exposed as a result of clearing,grading,excavating,stockpiling,or other soil disturbing activities, the Contractor shall implement measures to effectively control erosion and prevent the escape of sediments from the Project Site. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Preserve existing vegetation to the extent possible. 2. Construct drainage swales,berms, or sediment basins. 3. Maintain grades to minimize the velocity of sheet flow over disturbed areas and promote evaporation and infiltration of storm water directly into the ground. 4. Install filter fabric fences or barriers, sediment traps, seepage basins, gabions, or storm drain inlet protection devices. 5. Utilize vegetative buffer strips,mulching, or riprap C When the placement of topsoil,bank sand, or other soil material is specified,after an area has been brought to grade and immediately prior to placement, loosen the subgrade discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 2 inches to permit bonding to the subsoil. D When all soil disturbing activities have been completed, establish a perennial vegetative cover on all areas that are not paved, covered by permanent structures, or otherwise permanently stabilized. 3.03 DUST CONTROL A Implement control measures to minimize dust creation and movement on construction sites and roads and to prevent airborne sediment from reaching receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems, to reduce on-site and off-site damage, to prevent health hazards, and to improve traffic safety. B Control blowing dust by using one or more of the following measures: 1. Mulches bound with chemical binders. 2. Temporary vegetative cover. 3. Tillage to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface. 4. Irrigation by water sprinkling. 07/2006 01566-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 5. Barriers using solid board fences, burlap fences, crate walls, bales of hay, or similar materials. C Implement dust control measures immediately whenever dust can be observed blowing on the Project Site. 3.04 DEMOLITION AREAS i A Demolition activities which create large amounts of dust with significant concentrations of heavy metals or other potential water pollutants shall use methods described in this Section,3.03"Dust Control",to limit transport of airborne pollutants. However, water or slurry used to control dust contaminated with heavy metals or potential water pollutants shall be retained on the Project Site and shall not be allowed to run directly into watercourses or storm water conveyance systems by the appropriate use of control measures described in this Section. Methods of ultimate disposal of these materials shall be carried out in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal health and safety regulations. 3.05 SEDIMENT TRACKING A Minimize off-site tracking of sediments and the generation of dust by construction vehicles, keeping the streets clean or construction debris and mud, by implementing one or more of the following control measures: 1. Restrict all ingress and egress to stabilized construction exits. 2. Stabilize areas used for staging, parking, storage or disposal. 3. Stabilize on-site vehicle transportation routes. 4. Remove mud and other debris, washing if necessary, from vehicles prior to entrance onto public roadways from the Project Site. 5. Maintain grade to minimize the occurrence of mud on the Project Site. B Construct stabilized construction areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. C In addition to Stabilized Construction Exits shovel or sweep the pavement to the extent necessary to keep the street clean. Water-hosing or sweeping of debris and mud off of the street into adjacent areas is not allowed. 3.06 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A Control equipment maintenance and repair so that oils,gasoline,grease,solvents,and other potential water pollutants cannot be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Confine maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment to areas specifically designated for that purpose. 2. Provide these areas with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid as well as solid waste. 07/2006 01566-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 3. Clean and inspect maintenance and repair areas daily. - 4. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 5. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 6. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 7. Isolate areas of contaminated soil or other materials to facilitate proper removal and disposal. C Where effective control measures are not feasible,equipment shall be taken off-site for maintenance and repair. 3.07 WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL A Conduct operations in conformance with the plan provided in Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal and utilize such control measures,described in this Section,as may be necessary to eliminate or'significantly reduce the discharge of possible water pollutants from the Project Site as a result of waste collection and disposal. B Keep receptacles and waste collection areas neat and orderly to the extent possible. Waste shall not be allowed to overflow its container or accumulate from day-to-day. Locate trash collection points where they will least likely be affected by concentrated storm water runoff. 3.08 WASHING AREAS A Vehicles such as concrete delivery trucks or dump trucks and other construction equipment shall not be washed at locations where the runoff will flow directly into a watercourse or storm water conveyance system. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Designate special areas for washing vehicles. 2. Locate these areas where the wash water will spread out and evaporate or infiltrate directly into the ground, or where the runoff can be collected in a temporary holding or seepage basin. 3. Beneath wash areas construct a gravel or rock base to minimize mud production. B Construct washing areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. 3.09 STORAGE AND USAGE OF POTENTIAL WATER POLLUTANTS A Store and use potential water pollutants such as pesticides,fertilizers,distillate fuels, lubricants, solvents, cements, paints, acids, caustics, and other toxic substances in accordance with manufacturers' guidelines, Material Safety Data Sheets, and with local, state, and federal regulations. 07/2006 01566-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION B Isolate these substances in areas where they are to be stored,opened or used such that they will not cause pollution of runoff from the Project Site. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 2. Store containers on raised platforms. 3. Place plastic matting, packed clay,tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 4. Provide protective cover or weather proof enclosure. 5. Minimize accidental spillage. 6. Keep containers tightly closed. 7. Periodically inspect containers for leakage. 8. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 9. Provide berms,filter fabric fences or barriers, or sediment basins. 10. Designate washing areas for containers and other items that have come in contact with potential water pollutants. C Avoid overuse of substances such as pesticides and fertilizers which could produce contaminated runoff. 3.10 SANITARY FACILITIES A Provide the Project Site with adequate portable toilets for workers in accordance with Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls,and applicable health regulations. B Control areas where sanitary facilities are located so that sewage or chemicals will not be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems by using one or more of the following measures. 1. Inspect the facilities daily. 2. Service the facilities as often as necessary to maintain cleanliness and prevent overflows. 3. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate 4. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area END OF SECTION 07/2006 01566-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM Section 01570 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench safety system for the construction of trench excavations. B. Trench safety system for excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) E. Definitions: 1: Trench. A narrow excavation(in relation to its depth)made below the surface of the ground. In general,the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench(measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet. 2. Trench safety system requirements apply to larger open excavations if the erection of structures or other installations limits the space between the excavation slope and the installation to dimensions equivalent to a trench as defined. 3. Trench safety systems include both Protective Systems,and Shoring Systems but are not limited to sloping, sheeting,trench boxes or trench shields, slide • rail systems, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. 5/2013 01570- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM a. Protective System: A method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the collapse of an adjacent structure. b. Shoring System: A structure, which supports the sides of an excavation, to prevent cave-ins, maintain stable soil conditions, or to prevent movements of the ground affecting adjacent installations or improvements. c. Special Shoring: A shoring system meeting Special Shoring Requirements for locations identified on the Plans. 4. Competent Person- one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for trench safety systems used on utility excavations is on a linear foot basis, measured along the centerline of the trench. Payment for trench safety systems includes payment for manholes and other line structures. B. Unless indicated in as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for shoring systems under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for trench safety systems. C. If shown on the Plans and included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as a separate Bid Item, Measurement and Payment for Special Shoring system installation for trench excavation is on a square foot basis, measured and completed in place. D. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on structural excavations under this Section. Include cost for trench safety system used on structural excavations in applicable structure installation. E. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on roadway excavation or embankment under this Section. Include cost in applicable Sections. F. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a safety plan specifically for the construction of trench excavation,excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of 5/2013 01570-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. Design the Trench Safety Plan to be in accordance with OSHA Standards - 29CFR governing the presence and activities of individuals working in and around trench excavations, and in accordance with any Special Shoring requirements at locations shown on the Plans. Include in the plan, submittal of the contact information for the Competent Person. C. Have Shop Drawings for trench safety systems sealed, as required by OSHA, by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas, retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with the provision of Excavations,Trenching,and Shoring,OSHA Standards-29 CFR,Part 1926,Subpart P, as amended,including Final Rule,published in the Federal Register Vol.54,No.209 on Tuesday, October 31, 1989. The sections that are incorporated into these Technical Specifications, by reference, include Standard 1926.650—652. B. A reproduction of the OSHA Standards — 29 CFR included in Subpart P — "Excavations"from the Federal Register Vol. 54,No.209 is available upon request to Contractors bidding on the Work. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the reproduction. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a copy of this section of the Federal Register. C. Include in the Trench Safety Program measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause,Section 5.(a)(1),of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970—20 USC 654 which states, "Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." D. Legislation that has been enacted by the State of Texas with regard to Trench Safety Systems is hereby incorporated, by reference, into these specifications. Under Texas Statutes, refer to Chapter 756 of the Health and Safety Code, SUBCHAPTER C. TRENCH SAFETY. E. Reference materials, if developed for this Work, will be issued by the Engineer along with the Bid Documents, including the following: 1. Geotechnical information obtained for use in design of the trench safety system. 2. Special Shoring Requirements. 1.05 INDEMNIFICATION A. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its employees, and agents, from any and all damages, costs (including,without limitation, legal fees, court costs, and the cost of investigation),judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of 5/2013 01570-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ' TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM persons resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner in case the Owner is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews, inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Engineer will only be in regard to compliance with the Contract Documents and will not constitute approval by the Engineer nor relieve Contractor of obligations under state and federal trench safety laws. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with provisions of OSHA Standards—29 CFR. B. Specially designed trench safety systems shall be installed in accordance with the Contractor's trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. Install Special Shoring at the locations shown on the Plans. D. Obtain verification from a Competent Person, defined in this Section and as identified in the Contractor's Trench Safety Program, that trench boxes and other pre- manufactured systems are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Conduct daily inspections by Contractor or Contractor's independently retained consultant, of the trench safety systems to ensure that the installed systems and operations meet OSHA Standards—29 CFR and other personnel protection regulations requirements. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, immediately stop work in the trench and move personnel to safe locations until necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel. C. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections. 5/2013 01570-4of5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify specific applicability of the selected or specially designed trench safety systems to each field condition encountered on the Work. END OF SECTION 5/2013 01570-5of5 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS Section 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Project identification sign description. B. Installation. C. Maintenance and removal. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for design, fabrication, installation, and maintenance of project identification signs under this Section. Include cost of work performed under this Section in the pay item for Section 01505 -Mobilization. B. If changes to project identification signs are requested by the City Engineer to keep them current,payment will be made by change order. C. Skid-mounted signs shall be relocated as directed by the City Engineer at no additional cost to the City. Post-mounted signs shall be relocated once, if directed in writing by the City Engineer, at no additional cost to the City. If a post-mounted sign is relocated more than once at the written direction of the City Engineer, payment will be made by change order. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sign Construction: Project identification signs shall be constructed of new materials and painted new for the project. Construct post-mounted signs as shown on Construction Sign Details. B. Appearance: Project identification signs shall be maintained to present a clean and neat look throughout the project duration. C. Sign Manufacturer/Maker: Experienced as a professional sign company. D. Sign Placement: Place signs at locations as directed by the City Engineer. The City Engineer will provide sign placement instructions at the Pre-construction Meeting. 1. A linear project is one involving paving, overlay, sewer lines, storm drainage, or water mains that run in the right-of-way over a distance. A 10/2014 01580-1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS r linear project requires a project identification sign at each end of the construction site. 2. Single Site or Building Projects: Provide one project identification sign. 3. Multiple Sites: Provide one project identification sign at each site. 4. Sign Relocation: As work progresses at each site, it may be necessary to move and relocate project identification signs. Relocate signs as directed in writing by the City Engineer. E. Alternate Skid-mounted Sign Construction: Post-mounted signs are preferred, but skid-mounted signs are allowed, especially for projects with noncontiguous locations where work progresses from one location to another. The skid structure shall be designed so that the sign will withstand a 60-mile-per-hour wind load directly to the face or back of the sign. Use stakes, straps, or ballast. Approval of the use of skid-mounted signs shall not release the Contractor from responsibility of maintaining a project identification sign on the project site and shall not make the City responsible for the security of such signs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures. B. Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign and lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering, if used. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: All sign materials shall be new. 1. Sign Posts: Use 4-inch by 4-inch treated wood posts, sized to fix top of sign at 6 FEET ABOVE GROUND. 2. Sign Supports and Skid Bracing: 2-inch by 4-inch wood framing material. 3. Skid Members: 2-inch by 6-inch wood framing material. 4. Fasteners: a. Use galvanized steel fasteners. b. Use 3/8-inch by 5-1/2-inch button head carriage bolts to attach sign to posts. Secure with nuts and flat head washers at locations as recommended by Sign Manufacturer. c. Cover button heads with white reflective film or paint to match sign background B. Sign and Sign Header: Use medium density overlaid marine plywood, minimum 1/2-inch thick. Use full-size 4-foot by 8-foot sheets for sign and a single piece for header to minimize joints; do not piece wood to fabricate a sign face. C. Paint and Primers: White paint used to prime surfaces and to resist weathering shall be an industrial grade,fast-drying,oil-based paint with gloss finish. Paint structural 10/2014 01580-2 • CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS and framing members white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint sign and sign header material white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint all sign surfaces with this weather-protective paint prior to adding any sign paint or adhesive applications. D. Colors: Follow criteria established by attached Exhibit 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification signs within 10 calendar days s after Date of Commencement. B. Erect signs where designated by the City Engineer at the Pre-construction Meeting or as described in part 1.03 of this Section. Position the sign in such a manner as to be fully visible and readable to the general public. C. Erect sign level and plumb. D. If mounted on posts, sink posts a minimum of 30 inches below grade in 10-inch diameter posthole. Stabilize posts with sharp sand or concrete to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above existing grade for mounting of the sign and header. E. Erect sign so that the top edge of the sign, is no higher than 6 feet above existing grade. 3.02 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Keep signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage. B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of 2 feet upon completion of Project. Restore the area to a condition equal to or better than before construction. END OF SECTION 10/2014 01580-3 , CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS . PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN EXHIBIT k First Impression . "'`. PROJECT NAME LOCATED HERE �:E 0.° 1� F- @ A u. PROJECT: T PROJECT NO. 12345678 Capital Improvement CITY OF PEARLAND SignageLayout CAPITAL PROJECT PROJECT SCHEDULE:MONTH/YEAR emu° Various MAYOR:TOMEFID BUDGET: $DOLLAR AMOUNT WV/STATE: _COUNCILrOSfON I:.TONY CARBONI ENGINEER/ARCHITECT: Peariand,Texas. COUNCIL POSITION 2:SCOTT SHERMAN CITE October2014 COUNOLPOSTON31 GARYMOORE NAME GOES HERE "E""°IE: MAYOR PIO TIME KEITH OROFNEAUX capital Improvement COUNCILPOSION S.GREO MIL CONTRACTOR: 4xti blank template atter2014 p COYMANAOtR:CLAYrEARSON CONTRACTOR NAME GOES HERE WxERERCOOTOTkINRIRe DEPUTY CITY MANAGRI JON RRANSON RSFEPB®EGEICEPPO CIOSPARn® ASSY OFT MANAGER,TRENT EPPERSON pearlandtx.gov/departments/engineering-capital-projectslprojects kErouwEOExIURPMO01E0UN08T 144111LESGREn MIT1DUCCFE4OEFq @PIRIEwa1 AIIM EnNORE! NIRVIPaWJeGx 6cannnnAL40! SPECIAL NOTE:CONTACT CITY SECRETARY FOR CURRENT COUNCIL NAMES AGTEPRFSSOOSSOESCA • 120 VOLT ELECTRICAL SERVICE SINGLE SIDE MDO MARINE GRADE PLYWOOD FINISHED WITH ALKYD ENAMEL GLOSS WHITE CLIENT TO PROVIDE ALL MARY SERVICESCOMPUTER CUT VINYL AND DIGITAL PRINT 5 YEAR LIFE MINIMUM MATERIALS `L"oH STOE�PP:m INSTALL ON TWO 4°X4°TREATED POSTS,MIN.DEPTH IS 24°,OR SKID MOUNTED AS SITE REQ'D.. CLIENT APPROVAL , 10/2014 - 01580-4 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for transportation, delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion &Sedimentation 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this work is a component. 1.03 PRODUCTS A Products: Means material,equipment,or systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for reuse. B Do not reuse materials and equipment,designated to be removed,except as specified by the Contract Documents. C Provide equipment and components from the fewest number of manufacturers as is practical, in order to simplify spare parts inventory and to allow for maximum interchangeability of components. For multiple components of the same size,type or application, use the same make and model of component throughout the Work. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION A Make arrangements for transportation, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials required for timely completion of the Work. B Transport and handle products in accordance with instructions. C Consign and address shipping documents to the proper party giving name of Project, street number, and City. Shipments shall be delivered to the Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY A Arrange deliveries of products to accommodate the Construction Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. Avoid deliveries that cause lengthy storage or overburden of limited storage space. 07/2006 01600- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the Project Site and to accommodate the following: 1. Work of other contractors or the Owner. 2. Limitations of storage space. 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. C Have products delivered to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. D Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact; labels are legible. 4. Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A Coordinate the off-loading of materials and equipment delivered to the Project Site. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, Contractor shall relocate materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. B Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by the Owner, by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. C Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D Handle products by methods to prevent over bending or overstressing. E Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. F Handle materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G Do not drop, roll, or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIAL A Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Technical Specifications. Control storage of potential water pollutants in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. Place loose soil materials,and materials to be incorporated into the Work to prevent damage to any part of the Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all parts of the Work and to utility service company installations in the vicinity of the Work. 07/2006 01600-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT C Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants, and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. D Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. E Restrict storage to areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Plans or approved by the Project Manager. F Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate. G Do not use lawns, grass plots, or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. Damage to lawns,sidewalks,streets or other improvements shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. H Protect stored materials and equipment against loss or damage. I Store materials in manufacturers'unopened containers. J Materials delivered and stored along the line of the Work shall be not closer than 3 feet to any fire hydrant. Public and private drives and street crossings shall be kept open. K The total length which materials may be distributed along the route of construction at any one time is 1000 lineal feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Project Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01600-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Section 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Options for making product or process selections. B Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes,including pre- approved, and approved products or processes C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Product: Means,materials,equipment,or systems incorporated into the Work.Product does not include machinery and equipment used for production,fabrication,conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re-use. B Process: Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.04 SELECTION OPTIONS A Pre-approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in the Technical Specifications as"pre-approved". Products of other manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered under the submittal process for approving alternate products. B Approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal". Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01350—Submittals. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre-approved Products. C Product Compatibility: To the maximum extent possible,provide products that are of the same type or function from a single manufacturer,make, or source. Where more than one choice is available as a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner. 07/2006 01630- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the alternate product. B Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C If the Engineer determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications,the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.06 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner. C The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly, to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner. 1.07 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in determining equivalency as related to the Approved Product specified. B Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen(14)days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D Submit 5 copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Architect/Engineer,and installing contractor. 07/2006 01630-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Shop Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer. E Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings,Product Data, and Samples. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01630-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING Section 01720 FIELD SURVEYING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for surveyors and surveys. B Procedures pertaining to survey control points and reference points. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A Conform to State of Texas laws for surveys requiring licensed surveyors. Employ a land surveyor acceptable to Engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit to Engineer the name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. C Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work on request. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 1.06 EXAMINATION A Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work. B Notify Engineer immediately of any discrepancies discovered. 07/2006 01720- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING 1.07 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A Control datum for survey is that established by Owner-provided survey and indicated on Plans. B Locate and protect survey control points,including property corners,prior to starting site work. Use caution to preserve permanent reference points during construction. C The Contractor shall not reset; nor cause to be reset, lost, disturbed, or damaged; control points. Promptly notify Engineer of disturbance or damage to any control point(s). D Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of need for relocation of reference points due to changes in grades or other reasons. E Report promptly to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point. F Any re-staking of control points lost,disturbed,or damaged by Contractor's operations will be provided by Owner at Contractor's expense. G Employ a Registered Public Land Surveyor to reset any missing,disturbed,or damaged monumentation. 1.08 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. B Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on Project Site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C Establish and record in survey notes elevations,lines and levels to provide quantities required for Measurement and Payment and to provide appropriate controls for the Work. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading; fill and topsoil placement;utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Mounumented Baseline. D Verify periodically layouts by same means. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01720-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS Section 01750 STARTING SYSTEMS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Starting systems. B Demonstration and instructions. C Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D References to Technical specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Contractor shall conduct all start-up operations under this Contract in conformance with Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control. B Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. C Notify Engineer 7 days prior to startup of each item. D Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. E Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. 07/2006 01750- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS F Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G Execute start-up under Contractor's supervision in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H When specified in individual specification sections,require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect,check and approve equipment or system installation prior to and during start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner two weeks minimum prior to date of Substantial Completion. B Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. D Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.03 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND'BALANCING A Contractor shall start, test, adjust, balance, and provide reports on all installed equipment as provided for in this section. B Owner may also appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. 'Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner indicating observations and results of the tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C Owner's employment of an independent firm shall not relieve the Contractor's responsibility under this section. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01750-2of2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01760 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01770—Contract Closeout 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A Maintain one copy of Record Documents at the Project Site in accordance with Section 00700— General Conditions of Agreement, 3.02 "Keeping Plans and Specifications Accessible". B Store Record Documents and Samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents, or in a secure location. Provide files,racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and Samples. C Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large,printed letters. D Maintain Record Documents in a clean,dry,and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection by Engineer. 1.05 RECORDING A Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B Plans, Change Orders, and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record all actual construction, or "as built" conditions,including: 1. Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and appurtenances,referenced to permanent surface improvements. 07/2006 01760- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to bench marks utilized for the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original Plans. 6. References to related Shop Drawings and Modifications. C Record information with a red pen or pencil on a set of drawings indicated as the Record Document Set,provided by Engineer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION A Deliver Record Documents and Samples to Owner in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01760-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Closeout procedures including final submittals such as operation and maintenance data, warranties, and spare parts and maintenance materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — -- Submittals. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A Comply with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement regarding Final Completion and Final Payment when Work is complete and ready for Engineer's final inspection. B Provide Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. C Complete or correct items on punch list,with no new items added. Any new items will be addressed during warranty period. D The Owner will occupy portions of the Work as specified in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. E Contractor shall request Final Inspection at least two weeks prior to Final Acceptance. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING A Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B Clean debris from drainage systems. r C Clean Project Site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 09/2009 01770- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from the Project Site following the final test of utilities and completion of the Work. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit Operations and Maintenance data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.07 WARRANTIES A Provide one original of each warranty from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. B Provide Table of Contents and assemble warranties in 3-ring/D binder with durable plastic cover. C Submit warranties prior to Final Application for Payment. 1. Warranties shall commence in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 1.09 "Substantially Completed". 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION Contractor shall diligently pursue completion of the items and activities contained in the Contract Close Out and Project Record Document sections of the project manual. Notwithstanding any performance of warranty work,the work of Contract Closeout shall be complete within thirty (30) days of the date of Final Completion and Acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION 09/2009 01770-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 07/2006 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION Section 02200 SITE PREPARATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of topsoil, stripping and stockpiling, clearing and grubbing. B Removal and disposal of waste materials, excess materials, debris and trash. C Removal of obstructions. D Excavation and fill. E Salvaging of designated item. F References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill and Embankment Material ( 6. Section 02330—Embankment 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises ' G Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If Site Preparation is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. r, B Submit embankment material sources and product quality information in accordance this Section. 1/2018 02200- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. A Clear Project Site of trees,shrubs,and other vegetation,except for those designated by Owner to be left standing. B Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees designated to remain. C Completely remove stumps,roots,and other debris protruding through ground surface. 1. On areas required for roadway, channel, or structural excavation, remove stumps, 2" diameter or larger limbs and roots,to depth of 2 feet below lower elevation of excavation. 2. On areas required for embankment construction, remove 2" diameter limbs, stumps and roots to depth of 2 feet below ground surface 3. Trees and stumps may be cut off as close to natural ground as practicable on areas which are to be covered by at least 3 feet of embankment D Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth,and thoroughly compact to density equal to adjacent original ground. E Complete operations by bulldozing,blading, and grading so that prepared area is free of holes,unplanned ditches, abrupt changes in elevations and irregular contours, and preserve drainage of area. 1. Blade entire area to prevent ponding of water and to provide drainage,except in areas to be immediately excavated 1/2018 02200-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A Obtain approval of topsoil qualitybefore excavating and stockpiling. B Excavate topsoil for esplanades and areas to receive grass or landscaping from areas to be further excavated. C Topsoil Stripping: 1. Remove growths of grass from areas before stripping. 2. Topsoil is defined as surface soil found of depth of not less than 4 inches. 3. Strip topsoil to depths encountered. 4. Perform stripping in a manner to prevent intermingling of topsoil with underlying sterile subsoil and remove objectionable materials, including clay lumps, stones over 2 in. in diameter, weeds,roots, leaves, and debris. 5. Where trees are designated by Owner to be left standing,stop topsoil stripping at extreme limits of tree drip line to prevent damage to main root system. D Topsoil Stockpiling: 1. Stockpile in areas designated on Plans. 2. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. 3. Cover storage piles, if required to prevent wind-blown dust. 4. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Stockpile in a manner to prevent erosion. 3.03 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A Undercut, remove, and replace material which Engineer designates as unsuitable for subsequent construction. B Material used to replace unsuitable material shall be suitable material from site excavation or as indicated on Plans. 3.04 EXCAVATION AND FILL A Construction surveying shall be performed by qualified personnel under the direction of the contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and correctness of this work. In the event that the work consists of significant alteration of the topographic features of natural grade, contractor shall perform enough topographic survey to substantiate existing pre-construction elevations. No claim shall be made for additional excavation or grade adjustment in excess of quantities contained in the contract documents without demonstrable evidence that such conditions existed prior to start of the work B Depressed site areas shall be filled using material from high areas, insofar as practicable. 1/2018 02200-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION C When fill obtained from high areas is exhausted, fill to indicated rough grade elevations under roadways with"Structural Fill"and open areas not under structures or roadways with"General Fill", or as indicated on Plans. D Place and compact fill in accordance with Section 02330—Embankment. 3.05 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS AND MATERIAL A Items designated by Engineer to be salvaged are to be carefully removed,so as to cause no damage to the salvaged items and delivered to Owner's storage yard. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. END OF SECTION 1/2018 02200-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION Section 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Demolishing and removing existing pavements, structures, equipment and materials only to the extent as indicated on the Plans. B Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, and base courses. C Removing concrete curbs, concrete curb and gutters, sidewalks and driveways. D Removing pipe culverts and sewers. E Removing miscellaneous structures of wood, plastics, metals, concrete, masonry, or combination of concrete and masonry, etc. F Disposing of demolished materials and equipment. G References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals '3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Control 4. Section 01100—Summary of Work 5. Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 7. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures under this Section. Include cost for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If indicated as a Bid Item,measurement will be as follows: 1. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing,and removing asphaltic surfacing,is on a square yard basis measured between lips of gutters. 2. Measurement for removing and disposing of cement stabilized shell base course, with or without asphalt surfacing, is on a square yard basis. 3. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing with curbs,is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. Payment includes removal of all base,asphaltic surfacing,concrete pavement,esplanade curbs, curb and gutters, and paving headers. 07/2006 02220- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 4. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete pavement is.on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. 5. Measurement for removing and disposing of monolithic curb and gutter, removing monolithic concrete curb,and removing concrete curb,is on a lineal foot basis measured along the face of the curb. 6. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete sidewalk and driveway is on a square yard basis. 7. Measurement for removing and disposing of miscellaneous concrete and masonry removal is on a cubic yard basis of the structure in place. 8. Measurement for removing and disposing of pipe culverts and sewers is on a lineal foot basis for each diameter of type of pipe removed. 9. Measurement for removing and disposing of unlisted materials shall be on the lump sum basis. C No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits indicated on Plans, or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for demolition. Describe coordination for shutting off,capping,and removing temporary utilities. Plan operations to minimize temporary disruption of utilities to existing facilities or adjacent property. • C Submit proposed demolition and removal schedule for approval. Notify Engineer in writing at least 48 hours before starting demolition. D Submit an approved copy of demolition schedule to Engineer prior to commencement of demolition operations. E Obtain a permit for building demolition, as required. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. B The Contractor shall be responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and shall be liable for any damage due to movement or settlement. Provide proper framing and shoring necessary for support. Cease operations if an adjacent structure appears to be endangered. Resume demolition only after proper protective measures have been taken. 07/2006 02220-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 1.05 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A Materials and equipment designated for reuse or salvage are listed in Section 01100— Summary of Work. Protect items designated for reuse or salvage from damage during demolition,handling and storage. Restore damaged items to satisfactory condition. B Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the property of the Contractor. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store and protect materials and equipment designated for reuse until time of installation. B Deliver and unload items to be salvaged to storage areas indicated on Plans. C Remove equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage and all waste and debris resulting from demolition from site. Remove material as work progresses to avoid clutter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR DEMOLITION A Use equipment and materials approved as prescribed in this Section, 1.03"Submittals'. B Use of a"drop hammer"must have the Engineer's prior approval. 3.0 'EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Prior to demolition, make an inspection with Engineer to determine the condition of existing structures and features adjacent to items designated for demolition. B Engineer will mark or list existing equipment to remain the property of the Owner. C Do not proceed with demolition or removal operations until after the joint inspection and subsequent authorization by Engineer. D Stop demolition and notify Engineer if underground fuel storage tanks, asbestos, PCB's, contaminated soils, or other hazardous materials are encountered. 3.02 UTILITY SERVICES A Follow rules and regulations of authorities or companies having jurisdiction over communications,pipelines, and electrical distribution services. B Notify and coordinate with utility company and adjacent building occupants when temporary interruption of utility service is necessary. 07/2006 02220-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 3.03 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS A Mechanical removals consist of dismantling and removing existing piping, pumps, motors,water tanks,equipment and other appurtenances. It includes cutting,capping, and plugging required to restore use of existing utilities. B Remove existing process,water, chemical,gas, fuel oil and other piping not required for new work. Take out piping to the limits shown or to a point where it will not interfere with the new work. Piping not indicated to be removed or which does not interfere with new work shall be removed to the nearest solid support,capped,and the remainder left in place. Purge chemical and fuel lines and tanks. Verify that such lines are safe prior to removal or capping. C Where piping that is to be removed passes through existing walls, cut and cap piping on each side of the wall. Use cap appropriate for pipe material to be capped. Provide fire-rated sealant for walls classified as fire-rated. D When underground piping, which is not located in the public right-of-way, is to be altered or removed,cap the remaining piping. Abandoned underground piping may be left in place unless it interferes with new work or is shown or specified to be removed. Piping less than 15 inches in diameter may be plugged and abandoned in place. For piping 15 inches in diameter and greater to be abandoned,fill with sand,pressure grout or other approved method and plug with concrete or brick masonry bulkhead. E Remove waste and vent piping to points shown. Plug pipe and cleanouts and plugs. Where vent stacks pass through an existing roof that is to remain,remove the stack and patch the hole in the roof,making it watertight. Comply with requirements of existing roof installer so as to maintain roof warranty. F Conform to applicable codes when making any changes to plumbing and heating systems. 3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS A Electrical removals consist of disconnecting and removing existing switchgear, distribution switchboards,control panels,bus duct, conduits and wires,panel boards, lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical equipment. B Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to prevent damage to allow continued operation of existing systems and to maintain the integrity of the grounding systems. 07/2006 02220-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C Remove poles and metering equipment, if designated for removal on the Plans. Coordinate electrical removals with the power company, as necessary. Verify that c power is properly de-energized and disconnected. D Where shown or otherwise required, remove wiring in underground duct systems. Verify function of wiring before disconnecting and removing. Plug ducts which are not to be reused at entry to buildings. E Changes to electrical systems shall conform to applicable codes. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove from the site all items contained in or upon the structure not designated for reuse or salvage in accordance with this Section and Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. C Follow method of disposal as required by regulatory agencies. END OF SECTION • 07/2006 02220-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Section 02252 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Cement stabilized sand for backfill and bedding. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight)Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" b. ASTM D 1632, "Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory" c. ASTM D 1633, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders" d. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" e. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" f. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" g. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" h. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" i. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" j. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" k. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" 1. ASTM C 31,"Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as an Extra Item, no separate payment will be made for cement stabilized sand under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for applicable utility or structure installation. B If use of cement stabilized sand is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a per ton basis. A conversion between volumes calculated based on theoretical limits --- and total weight will be made based on a ratio of 1.64 tons per cubic yard. 02/2009 02252- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material qualification and design mix tests to include: 1. Three series of tests of sand or fine aggregate material from the proposed source. Tests shall include procedures defined in this Section, 2.01 "Materials". 2. Three moisture-density relationship tests prepared using the material qualified by the tests in this Section, 1.03B 1. Blends of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and bank run sand shall be tested at the ratio to be used for the design mix testing. 3. Design mix report to meet the specifications of this Section, 1.04 "Design Requirements". The design mix shall include compressive strength tests after 48-hours and 7 days curing. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A Design sand-cement mixture to produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 100 pounds per square inch in 48 hours when compacted to a minimum 95 percent in accordance with ASTM D 558 and when cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632, and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633. Mix shall contain a minimum of 1-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. Compact mix with a moisture content on the dry side of optimum. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Cement shall be Type 1 Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150. B Sand shall be clean, durable, and meet grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C 33 and the following requirements: 1. Classified as SW, SP or SM by the United Soil Classification System of ASTM D 2487. 2. Deleterious material content: a. Clay lumps shall comprise less than 0.5 percent by ASTM C 142. b. Lightweight pieces shall comprise less than 5.0 percent by ASTM C 123. c. Organic impurities shall produce color no darker than the standard color by ASTM C 40 ASTM. 3. Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C Fine aggregate,manufactured from crushed concrete meeting the quality requirements for crushed rock material in Section 02255 - Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials, may be used as a complete or partial substitute for Bank Sand. The blending ratio of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and Bank Sand shall be defined in the mix design report. 02/2009 02252-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D Water shall be potable,free of oils,acids,alkalies,organic matter,or other deleterious substances,meeting requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.02 MIXING MATERIALS A Thoroughly mix sand, cement and water in proportions of the mix design using a pugmill-type mixer. The plant shall be equipped with automatic weight controls to ensure correct mix proportions. B Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading directly after mixing. Material not placed and compacted within 4 hours after mixing shall be rejected. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Place sand-cement mixture in 8-inch-thick loose lifts and compact to a minimum of 95 percent of ASTM D 558, unless otherwise specified on Plans. The moisture content during compaction shall be on the dry side of optimum but sufficient for hydration. Perform and complete compaction of sand-cement mixture within 4 hours after addition of water to mix at the plant. B Do not place or compact sand-cement mixture in standing or free water. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. B Mixing plant inspections will be performed periodically. Material samples will be obtained and tested in accordance with this Section, 2.01 "Materials", if there is evidence of change in material characteristic. C One sample of cement stabilized sand shall be obtained for each 150 tons of material placed per day with no less than one sample per day of production.Random samples of delivered cement stabilized sand shall be taken in the field at point of delivery in accordance with ASTM 3665.Obtain three individual samples of approximately 12 to 15 lb each from the first,middle, and last third of the truck and composite them into one sample for test purpose. D Prepare and mold four specimens (for each sample obtained) in accordance with ASTM D558,Method A,without adjusting moisture content. Samples will be molded at approximately same time material is being used,but no later than 4 hours after water is added to mix. E After molding,specimens will be removed from molds and cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632. 02/2009 02252-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND F Specimens will be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 1633, Method A. Two specimens will be tested at 48 hours plus or minus 2 hours and two specimens will be tested at 7 days plus or minus 4 hours. G A strength test will be average of strengths of two specimens molded from same sample of material and tested at same age.Average daily strength will be average of strengths of all specimens molded during one day's production and tested at same age. H Precision and Bias: Test results shall meet recommended guideline for precision in ASTM D 1633 Section 9. I Reporting: Test reports shall contain, as a minimum,the following information: 1. Supplier and plant number 2. Time material was batched 3. Time material was sampled 4. Test age(exact hours) 5. Average 48-hour strength 6. Average 7-day strength 7. Specification section number 8. Indication of compliance/non-compliance 9. Mixture identification 10. Truck and ticket numbers 11. The time of molding 12. Moisture content at time of molding 13. Required strength 14. Test method designations 15. Compressive strength data as required by ASTM D 1633 16. Supplier mixture identification 17. Specimen diameter and height, in. 18. Specimen cross-sectional area, sq. in. J The cement content will be checked on samples obtained in the field whenever there are apparent changes in the mix properties. 3.03 ACCEPTANCE A Strength level of material will be considered satisfactory if: 1. The average 48-hour strength is greater than 100 psi with no individual strength test below 70 psi. 2. All 7-day individual strength tests(average of two specimens)are greater than or equal to100 psi. B Material will be considered deficient when 7-day individual strength test(average of two specimens) is less than 100 psi but greater than 70 psi. See Paragraph 3.04 Adjustment for Deficient Strength. C The material will be considered unacceptable and subject to removal and replacement at Contractors expense when individual strength test(average of two specimens)has 7-day strength less than 70 psi 02/2009 02252-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D When moving average of three daily 48-hour averages falls below 100 psi,discontinue shipment to project until plant is capable of producing material,which exceeds 100 psi at 48 hours. Five 48-hour strength tests shall be made in this determination with no individual strength tests less than 100 psi. E Testing laboratory shall notify Contractor,Project Manager,and material supplier by facsimile of tests indicating results falling below specified strength requirements within 24 hours. F If any strength test of laboratory cured specimens falls below the specified strength, Contractor may, at his own expense, request test of cores drilled from the area in question in accordance with ASTM C42.In such cases,three(3)cores shall be taken for each strength test that falls below the values given in 3.03.A. G Cement stabilized sand in an area represented by core tests shall be considered satisfactory if the average of three(3)cores is equal to at least 100 psi and if no single core is less that 70 psi.Additional testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength results will be permitted. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT FOR DEFICIENT STRENGTH A When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength greater than or equal to 100 psi, then material will be considered satisfactory and bid price will be paid in full. B When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 100 psi and greater than or equal to 70 psi,material shall be accepted contingent on credit in payment Compute credit by the following formula: Credit per Cubic Yard=$30.00 x 2 (100 psi-Actual psi) 100 C When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 70 pounds per square inch, then remove and replace cement-sand mixture and paving and other necessary work at no cost to City. END OF SECTION 02/2009 02252-5 of 5 • CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS Section 02255 BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS r 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A reference source for materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment,specified elsewhere in the Technical Specifications,and their associated material qualification testing requirements. B Source qualifications and handling of these materials. C Material use and application is specified on the Plans or in individual Technical Specifications referencing materials either by Material Classification or by Product Description. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 02910—Topsoil 3. Section 02252—Cement Stabilized Sand E Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" b. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" c. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" d. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" e. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" f. ASTM D 1140, "Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer the No. 200 (70-um) Sieve" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" i. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" 07/2007 02255- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS A Materials shall be classified for the purpose of quality control in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification Symbols as defined in ASTM D 2487. 1. Class I: Well-graded gravels and sands, gravel-sand mixtures, crushed well- graded rock, little or no fines (GW, SW): a. Plasticity index: non-plastic. b. Gradation: D6o/Dio- greater than 4 percent; amount passing No. 200 sieve-less than or equal to 5 percent. 2. Class II: Poorly graded gravels and sands, silty gravels and sands, little to moderate fines: a. Plasticity index: non-plastic to 4. b. Gradations: Gradation (GP, SP): amount passing No. 200 sieve - less than 5 percent. Gradation(GM,SM): amount passing No.200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. c. Borderline gradations with dual classifications(e.g.,SP-SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve-between 5 percent and 12 percent. 3. Class III: Clayey gravels and sands, poorly graded mixtures of gravel, sand, silt, and clay(GC, SC, and dual classifications, e.g., SP-SC): a. Plasticity index: greater than 7. b. Gradation: amount passing No.200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. 4. Class IVA: Lean clays (CL). a. Plasticity Indexes: Plasticity index: greater than 7, and above A line. Borderline plasticity with dual classifications (CL-ML): PI between 4 and 7. b. Liquid limit: less than 50. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve- greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. 5. Class IVB: Fat clays (CH) a. Plasticity index: above A line. b. Liquid limit: 50 or greater. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve- greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. B Use soils with dual class designation according to ASTM D 2487, and which are not defined above, according to the more restrictive class. 2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS A Unsuitable Material. Unsuitable soil materials are the following: 07/2007 02255-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Materials that are classified as ML,CL-ML,MH,PT,OH and OL according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Materials that cannot be compacted to the required density due to either gradation, plasticity, or moisture content. 3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials. 4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical contaminants. B Suitable Material. Soil materials meeting specification requirements. Unsuitable soils meeting specification requirements for suitable soils after treatment with,for example, lime or cement shall be considered suitable,unless otherwise indicated. C General Fill. Material that is free of stones greater than 3 inches,free of roots,waste, debris,trash,organic material,unstable material,non-soil matter,hydrocarbon or other contamination, conforming to the following limits for deleterious materials: 1. Clay lumps: Less than 0.5 percent for Class I, and less than 2.0 percent for Class II, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142. 2. Lightweight pieces: Less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 123. 3. " Organic impurities: No color darker than standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. D Random Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I,II,III,IV, or fat clay(CH), sand,gravel,or a combination,from excavation or borrow,which can be compacted to form stable embankments, and conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 65 maximum,ASTM-D4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 0 minimum,45 maximum, ASTM-D4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones,hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. E Structural Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I,II,III,or IV,sand,gravel,or a combination, from excavation or borrow, which can be compacted to form stable embankments and fills conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 45 maximum,ASTM D 4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 12 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. F Select Fill. Class III clayey gravel or sand or Class IV lean clay or clayey soils treated with lime or cement, and conforming to: 07/2007 02255-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Plasticity Index: 7 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 2. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones,hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 3. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. G Concrete Fill. Conform to requirements for Class B concrete as specified in Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete. H Topsoil. Conform to requirements specified in Section 02910-Topsoil. Bank Sand: Durable Bank Sand classified as SP, SW, or SM by the Unified Soil Classification System(ASTM D 2487)meeting the following requirements: 1. Less than 15 percent passing the number 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. The amount of clay lumps or balls not exceeding 2 percent. 2. Material passing the number 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: a. Liquid limit: not exceeding 25 percent. b. Plasticity index: not exceeding 7. J Cement Stabilized Sand. Conform to requirements of Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. K Concrete Sand. Natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of natural and manufactured sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 10 to 30 No. 100 2 to 10 L Gem Sand. Sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 for course aggregates specified for number 8 size and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 95 to 100 No. 4 60 to 80 No. 8 15 to 40 07/2007 02255-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS M Pea Gravel. Durable particles composed of small,smooth,rounded stones or pebbles and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 1/2" 100 3/8" 85 to 100 No. 4 10 to 30 No. 8 0 to 10 No. 16 0 to 5 N Crushed Aggregates. Crushed aggregates consist of durable particles obtained from an approved source and meeting the following requirements: 1. Materials of one product delivered for the same construction activity from a single source. 2. Non-plastic fines. 3. Los Angeles Abrasion Test wear not exceeding 45 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 4. Crushed aggregate shall have a minimum of 90 percent of the particles retained on the No.4 sieve with 2 or more crushed faces as determined by TxDOT Tex- 460-A,Part I. 5. Crushed stone: Produced from oversize plant processed stone or gravel,sized by crushing to predominantly angular particles from a naturally occurring single source. Uncrushed gravel are not acceptable materials for embedment where crushed stone is shown on the applicable utility embedment drawing details. 6. Crushed Concrete: Crushed concrete is an acceptable substitute for crushed stone as utility backfill. Gradation and quality control test requirements are the same as crushed stone. Provide crushed concrete produced from normal weight concrete of uniform quality; containing particles of aggregate and cement material,free from other substances such as asphalt,reinforcing steel fragments, soil, waste gypsum(calcium sulfate), or debris. 7. Gradations, as determined in accordance with TxDOT Tex-110-E. PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT FOR PIPE SIEVE EMBEDMENT BY RANGES OF NOMINAL PIPES SIZES >15" 15" - 8" <8" 1" 95 - 100 100 - 3/4" 60 - 90 90— 100 100 1/2" 25 - 60 - 90— 100 3/8" - 20—55 40- 70 No. 4 0 - 5 0— 10 0 - 15 No. 8 - 0- 5 0 - 5 07/2007 02255-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SOURCE QUALIFICATIONS FOR BORROW MATERIAL A Use of material encountered in excavations is acceptable, provided applicable requirements are satisfied. If excavation material is not acceptable,provide from other approved source. B Identify off-site sources for materials at least 14 days ahead of intended use so that the Engineer may obtain samples for verification testing. C Obtain approval for each material source by the Engineer before delivery is started. If sources previously approved do not produce uniform and satisfactory products,furnish materials from other approved sources. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after delivery. Materials which do not meet the requirements will be rejected. Do not use material which,after approval,has become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once a material is approved by the Engineer, a Change Order is required to change to a different material. D Bank sand, select fill, and random fill, if available in the project excavation, may be obtained by selective excavation and acceptance testing. Obtain additional quantities of these materials and other materials required to complete the Work from off-site sources. E The Owner does not represent or guarantee that any soil found in the excavation work will be suitable and acceptable as backfill material. 3.02 MATERIAL HANDLING A When material is obtained from either a commercial or non-commercial borrow pit, open the pit to expose the vertical faces of the various strata for identification and selection of approved material to be used. Excavate the selected material by vertical cuts extending through the exposed strata to achieve uniformity in the product. B Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling and control,and verification testing by the Engineer in advance of final placement. Obtain approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property. C When stockpiling material near the Project Site,use appropriate methods to eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing sediments from entering the drainage system. D Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles at a distance from the trench to prevent slides or cave-ins. Do not place stockpiles of excavated materials on public streets. 07/2007 02255-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS E Place stockpiles in layers to avoid segregation of processed materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. END OF SECTION 07/2007 02255-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES Section 02318 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation,trenching,foundation,embedment,and backfill for installation of utilities, storm sewers including manholes, pipeline structures and other associated appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 4. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 7. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 8. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 9. Section 02370—Geotextile 10. Section 02220—Site Demolition 11. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight)Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" d. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" e. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" f. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods.(Shallow Depth)" g. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 5/2013 02318- 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) a. Tex-l01-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E,Particle Size Analysis of Soils D. Definitions: 1. Excavation - Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by removal of material. a. Extra Hand Excavation- excavation by manual labor at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. b. Extra Machine Excavation- excavation by machine at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. c. Special Excavation-excavation necessitated by obstruction of pipes, ducts, or other structures, not shown on Plans, which interfere with installation of utility piping by normal methods of excavation or augering. Contractor shall be responsible for locating such underground obstructions,sufficiently in advance of trench excavation or augering,to preclude damage to the obstructions. 2. Pipe Foundation-suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at the trench subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of the bedding as shown on the Plans, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over- excavations. 3. Pipe Bedding-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation up to a level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 4. Haunching-the material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to spring-line of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 5. Initial Backfill - the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from spring-line of pipe(top of haunching)up to a level line 12 inches above top of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 6. Pipe Embedment - the portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching, and initial backfill. 7. Trench Zone-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath pavement. 5/2013 02318-2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 8. Trench Conditions - description of the stability of trench bottom and trench walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill,except where structural trench support is necessary. a. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as a result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level. b. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. 1) Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement. 2) Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in the embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils. c. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in the pipe embedment zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances,such as sloughing,sliding,boiling,heaving or loss of density. 9. Sub-trench - a special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of a sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor. 10. Trench Dam - a placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or foundation to prohibit ground water flow along the trench. 11. Over-Excavation and Backfill - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Plans, and backfilled with foundation backfill material. 12. Foundation Backfill Materials - natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled gradation, and geo-textile filter fabrics as required, to control 5/2013 02318-3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete seal slabs. 13. Trench Shield(Trench Box)-a portable worker safety structure moved along the trench as work proceeds, used as a Protective System and designed to withstand forces imposed on it by cave-in,thereby protecting persons within the trench. Trench shields may be stacked if so designed or placed in a series depending on depth and length of excavation to be protected. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. - Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench excavation,embedment,and backfill under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for all excavation and backfill associated with the placement and construction of: underground piping,boxes,manholes and associated appurtenances including conduit, or duct work. B. If Special Excavation is allowed,based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis,measured in place,without deduction for space occupied by portions of pipes, ducts, or other structures left in place across trenches excavated under this item. 1. Payment for Special Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Protection of pipes, ducts, or other structures encountered including bracing, shoring, and sheeting necessary for support. c. Replacement of pipes, ducts, or structures damaged by special excavation operations, except where payment for replacement is authorized by Engineer due to deteriorated condition of pipes,ducts,or structure. d. Temporary disconnecting,plugging, and reconnecting of low volume water pipes,to allow machine excavation or augering,when approved by Engineer. Pipe for replacement shall be new and conform to specification requirements for type of existing pipe removed. e. Placement of material from Special Excavation. f. Geo-textile material and concrete trench dams required to complete the placement of material from Special Excavation. g. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Special Excavation. h. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: 5/2013 02318-4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Utility piping installed in trenches excavated under this item. c. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. C. If Extra Hand Excavation is allowed,based on the Engineer's direction,and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Hand Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from Extra Hand Excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Hand Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component.: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. D. If Extra Machine Excavation is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Machine Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from extra machine excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Machine Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. 5/2013 02318-5of15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. No payment will be made for delays in completion of Work resulting from Extra Item Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a written description for information only of the planned typical method of excavation,backfill placement and compaction, including: 1. Sequence of work and coordination of activities. 2. Selected trench widths. 3. Procedures for foundation and embedment placement, and compaction. 4. Procedure for use of trench boxes and other pre-manufactured systems while assuring specified compaction against undisturbed soil. 5. Procedure for installation of Special Shoring at locations identified on the Plans. C. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D. Submit field red lines documenting location of Utilities as installed, referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 5/2013 02318-6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.06 SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Special Shoring shall be, in accordance with Section 01570—Trench Safety System, designed by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas,At Contractor's expense. B. Special Shoring shall be designed to provide support for the sides of the excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. C. Special Shoring may be a pre-manufactured system or a field fabricated system that meets the requirements of the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. B. Manufactured materials,such as crushed concrete,may be substituted for natural soil or rock products where indicated in the product specification, and approved by the Engineer,provided that the physical property criteria are determined to be satisfactory by testing. C. Geotextile(Filter Fabric): Conform to requirements of Section 02370—.Geotextile. D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed(bag) concrete. E. Timber Shoring Left in Place: Untreated oak. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Perform excavation with track mounted excavator or other equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B. Use only hand-operated tamping equipment until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment until adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. C. Use trench shields or other Protective Systems or Shoring Systems which are designed and operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against undisturbed native soil. 5/2013 02318-7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use Special Shoring systems where required which may consist of braced sheeting, braced soldier piles and lagging, slide rail systems, or other systems meeting the Special Shoring design requirements. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Program as specified in Section 01570 — Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures conform to Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to conform with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. D. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. E. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation F. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on the same day that acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation,manhole, or other structures. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on the Plans, install underground utilities in open cut trenches with vertical sides. B. Perform excavation work so that pipe,conduit,and ducts can be installed to depths and alignments shown on the Plans. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. C. Determine trench excavation widths using the following schedule as related to pipe outside diameter(O.D.). Maximum trench width shall be the minimum trench width plus 24 inches. NOMINAL MINIMUM TRENCH PIPE SIZE,INCHES WIDTH,INCHES Less than 18 O.D. + 18 18 to 30 O.D. +24 Greater than 30 O.D. +36 5/2013 02318-8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use sufficient trench width or benches above the embedment zone for installation of well point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or impractical to pump from the surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms,pipe, embedment and backfill, and other materials. E. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify the Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding. F. Shoring of Trench Walls. 1. Install Special Shoring in advance of trench excavation or simultaneously with the trench excavation, so that the soils within the full height of the trench excavation walls will remain fully laterally supported at all times. 2. For all types of shoring, support trench walls in the pipe embedment zone throughout the installation. Provide trench wall supports sufficiently tight to prevent washing the trench wall soil out from behind the trench wall support. 3. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer,leave sheeting driven into or below the pipe embedment zone in place to preclude loss of support of foundation and embedment materials. Leave rangers,walers, and braces in place as long as required to support sheeting,which has been cut off,and the trench wall in the vicinity of the pipe zone. 4. Employ special methods for maintaining the integrity of embedment or foundation material. Before moving supports,place and compact embedment to sufficient depths to provide protection of pipe and stability of trench walls. As supports are moved, finish placing and compacting embedment. 5. If sheeting or other shoring is used below top of the pipe embedment zone,do not disturb pipe foundation and embedment materials by subsequent removal. Maximum thickness of removable sheeting extending into the embedment zone 1 inch. Fill voids left on removal of supports with compacted backfill material. G. Use of Trench Shields. When a trench shield(trench box)is used as a worker safety device, the following requirements apply: 1. Make trench excavations of sufficient width to allow shield to be lifted or pulled freely,without damage to the trench sidewalls. 2. Move trench shields so that pipe, and backfill materials, after placement and compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor the degree of compaction reduced. 5/2013 02318-9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3. When required, place, spread, and compact pipe foundation and bedding materials beneath the shield. For backfill above bedding,move the shield as backfill is placed and ramped in. Place and compact backfill materials against undisturbed trench walls and foundation. 4. Maintain trench shield in position to allow sampling and testing to be performed in a safe manner. 3.03 TRENCH FOUNDATION A. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials. B. Place trench dams in Class I foundations in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.04 PIPE EMBEDMENT PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Immediately prior to placement of embedment materials,the bottoms and sidewalls of • trenches shall be free of loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil. B. Place Geotextile,if specified,to prevent particle migration from the in-situ into open- graded(Class I)embedment materials or drainage layers. C. Place embedment including bedding, haunching and initial backfill to meet requirements indicated on Plans. PVC & HDPE require cement stabilized sand bedding and backfill to one foot below subgrade or below grade if under pavement,or one foot above top of pipe if not under pavement. D. For pipe installation,manually spread embedment materials around the pipe to provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Do not allow materials to free-fall from heights greater than 24 inches above top of pipe. Perform placement and compaction directly against the undisturbed soils in the trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to remain in place. E. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of the embedment zone unless means to maintain the density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports are used in embedment zone, lift the supports incrementally to allow placement and compaction of the material against undisturbed soil. F. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other sharp, angular aggregates. 5/2013 02318- l0 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES G. Place haunching material manually around the pipe and compact it to provide uniform bearing and side support. If necessary, hold small-diameter or lightweight pipe in place during compaction of haunch areas and placement beside the pipe with sand bags or other suitable means. H. Place electrical conduit directly on foundation without bedding. Shovel pipe embedment material in place and compact it using pneumatic tampers in restricted spaces,and vibratory-plate compactors or engine-powered jumping jacks in unrestricted spaces. Compact each lift before proceeding with placement of the next lift. 1. Class I embedment materials. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Systematic compaction by at least two passes of vibrating equipment. Increase compaction effort as necessary to effectively embed the pipe to meet the deflection test criteria. c. Moisture content as determined by Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of trench bottom,foundation or trench walls. 2. Class II embedment and cement stabilized sand. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by methods determined by Contractor to achieve a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined according to ASTM D 698 for Class II materials and according to ASTM D 558 for cement stabilized materials. c. Moisture content of Class II materials within 1percent of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content of cement stabilized sands on the dry side of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration. J. Place trench dams in Class I embedments in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.05 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable. Leave only the minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction. Backfill placement and compaction shall apply to all soils excavated for the trench especially including any areas that were "benched" or over-excavated in place of trenched shoring. All disturbed soils generated during excavation,whether inside the trench or associated with it, shall be considered to fall under this requirement. 5/2013 02318- 11 of 15 • CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES B. Where damage to completed pipe installation work is likely to result from withdrawal of sheeting, leave the sheeting in place. Cut off sheeting 1.5 feet or more above the crown of the pipe. Remove trench supports within 5 feet from the ground surface. C. For sewer pipes,use backfill materials described here as determined by trench limits. As trench zone backfill in paved areas for streets and to one foot back of curbs and pavements,use cement stabilized sand for pipe of nominal sizes less than 36 inches,or Bank Sand for pipe of nominal sizes 36 inches and larger as indicated on the Drawings. Uniformly backfill trenches unless specified otherwise according to the paved area criteria. Use select backfill within one foot below pavement subgrade for rigid pavement. For asphalt concrete,use flexible base material within one foot below pavement subgrade. D. For water lines,backfill in trench zone,including auger pits,with Bank Sand, Select Fill, or Random Fill material as specified in this Section. E. For trench excavations under pavement,place trench zone backfill in lifts and compact by methods indicated below. Fully compact each lift before placement of the next lift. 1. Bank Sand. a. Maximum 9-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 3 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698 2. Cement Stabilized Sand. a. Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform placement and required compaction, but not exceeding 24 inches. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558. c. Moisture content on the dry side of optimum determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for cement hydration. 3. Select Fill. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by equipment providing tamping or kneading impact to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 2 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698. F. For trench excavations outside pavements,a Random Fill of suitable material may be used in the trench zone. 5/2013 02318- 12of15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1. Fat clays(CH)may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas at the Contractor's option. If the required density is not achieved,the Contractor,at his option and at no additional cost to the Owner,may use lime stabilization to achieve compaction requirements or use a different suitable material. 2. Maximum 9-inch compacted lift thickness for clayey soils and maximum 12- inch lift thickness for granular soils. 3. Compact to a minimum of 90 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or to same density as adjacent soils. 4. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density. 3.06 MANHOLES,JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES A. Meet the requirements of adjoining utility installations for backfill of pipeline structures, as shown on the Plans. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control 1. The Engineer may sample and test backfill at: a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's designated off-site stockpiles. b. On-site stockpiles. c. Materials placed in the Work. 2. The Engineer may resample material at any stage of work or location if changes in characteristics are apparent. B. Production Verification Testing: The Owner's testing laboratory will provide verification testing on backfill materials,as directed by the Engineer. Samples may be taken at the source or at the production plant, as applicable. C. Provide excavation and Trench Safety Systems at locations'and to depths required for testing and retesting during construction. D. Tests will be performed on a minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. 5/2013 02318- 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be performed initially for backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D 698,and for cement stabilized sand in accordance with ASTM D 558. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. F. In-place density tests of compacted pipe foundation, embedment and trench zone backfill soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions. 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted embedment and for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted trench zone backfill material. Testing shall be performed for each lift thickness for different backfill material specified in Item 3.05. 2. A minimum of three density tests for each full shift of Work when backfill is placed. 3. Density tests will be distributed among the placement areas. Placement areas are: foundation,bedding,haunching, initial backfill and trench zone. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified. 5. Density tests may be performed at various depths below the fill surface by pit excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to acceptance/rejection. 6. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in-place tests showing density less than the acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both verification tests show acceptable results. 7. Re-compacted placement will be retested at the same frequency as the first test series, including verification tests. G. Recondition,re-compact,and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work does not meet specified compaction requirements. For Cement Stabilized Sand with nonconforming density,core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's expense. H. Acceptability of crushed rock compaction will be determined by inspection. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 5/2013 02318- 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. D. Coordinate excavation within 15 feet of existing utilities with utility representative. Excavate by hand to locate existing,utility, support utility with methods agreed upon by utility representative. All work shall be subsidiary to bid items in Section 00300 Bid Proposal. No-additional cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02318- 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE Section 02335 SUBGRADE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foundation course of lime and Portland Cement stabilized in situ subgrade material. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 6. Section 01720—Field Surveying 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" f. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. g. ASTM D 558-Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-Cement-Mixtures. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for subgrade is on a square yard basis. Separate payment will be made for each different required type and thickness of stabilized Subgrade. Limits of measurement shall match actual pavement replaced; but no greater than maximum pavement replacement limits shown on Drawings. Limits for measurement will be extended to include installed stabilized subgrade material that extends 2 foot beyond outside edge of pavement to be replaced, except where proposed pavement section 5/2013) 02335 - 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE shares common longitudinal or transverse edge with existing pavement section. No payment will be made for stabilized subgrade in areas beyond these limits. B. Measurement for hydrated lime and quicklime is by the ton of 2,000 pounds dry- weight basis,determined by the area to be covered and the rate of application. Do not include cost of hydrated lime or quicklime in Bid Item for subgrade. C. Measurement for lime slurry is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of lime calculated on the percentage by weight of dry solids for the grade of slurry. Do not include cost of lime slurry in Bid Item for subgrade. D. Measurement for Portland Cement is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of dry weight basis. Do not include cost of Portland Cement in Bid Item for subgrade. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit certificates stating that hydrated lime, commercial lime slurry and quicklime complies with the requirements in this Section. C. Submit weight tickets,certified by supplier,with each bulk delivery of lime to Project Site. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for rotary speed mixer and compaction equipment for approval. 1.04 TESTING AND SAMPLING A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. B. Tests and analysis of soil materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C. Sampling and testing of lime slurry shall be in accordance with Tex-600-J. D. Sample mixtures of Portland Cement,hydrated lime or quicklime in slurry form will be tested to establish compliance with the requirements in this Section. E. Soil will be evaluated to establish percent ofhydrated lime,quicklime,or lime slurry to be applied to subgrade material. F. Moisture-density relationship will be established on material sample from roadway, after stabilization, in accordance with ASTM D 698. 5/2013 02335-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE G. Soil will be evaluated to establish ratio of cement to soil to obtain desired stability. Normal range is 6 percent to 10 percent by weight. H. The percentage of moisture in soil, at time of cement application, will be determined by ASTM D 558. Moisture will not be allowed to exceed quantity that will permit uniform, complete mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations nor specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture, as determined. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Bagged lime shall bear manufacturer's name, product identification, and certified weight.Bags varying more than 5 percent of certified weight may be rejected;average weight of 50 random bags in each shipment shall not be less than certified weight. B. Store lime in weatherproof enclosures. Protect lime from ground dampness. C. Quicklime can be dangerous; exercise extreme caution if used for the Work. Contractor shall become informed about recommended precautions in the handling, storage and use of quicklime. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER A. Water shall be clean; clear; and free from oil, acids, alkali, or organic matter. 2.02 LIME A. Type A-Hydrated Lime:Dry material consisting essentially of calcium hydroxide or mixture of calcium hydroxide and an allowable percentage of calcium oxide and magnesium hydroxide. B. Type B-Lime Slurry:Liquid mixture consisting essentially of lime solids and water in slurry form. Water or liquid portion shall not contain dissolved material in sufficient quantity to be injurious or objectionable for purpose intended. C. Type C - Quicklime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium oxide. Furnish quicklime in either of the following grades: 5/2013 02335-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE 1. Grade DS:Pebble quicklime of a gradation suitable for use in the preparation of a slurry for wet placing. 2. Grade S:Finely-graded quicklime for use in the preparation of a slurry for wet placing. Do not use Grade S quicklime for dry placing. (So called "Blue Lime"is not acceptable.) D. Lime shall conform to following requirements: CHEMICAL COMPOSITION TYPE A B C Active lime content, 90.0 mine 87.0 mine - %by weight Ca(OH)2+Ca0 Unhydrated lime content, %by weight CaO 5.0 max - 87.0 min Free water content, %by weight H2O 5.0 max - - SIZING Wet Sieve, as %by weight residue retained: No. 6 0.2 max 0.2 max2 8.0 max3 No. 30 4.0 max 4.0 max2 - Dry sieve, as %by weight residue retained: 1-inch - - 0.0 3/4-inch - - 10.0 max Notes: 1 Maximum 5.0%by weight CaO shall be allowed in determining total active lime content. 2 Maximum solids content of slurry. 3 Total active lime content, as CaO, in material retained on the No. 6 sieve shall not exceed 2.0%by weight of original Type C lime. E. Lime Slurry may be delivered to the Project Site as Commercial Lime Slurry, or may be prepared at the Project Site using Hydrated Lime or Quicklime. The slurry shall be free of liquids other than water and shall be of a consistency that can be handled and uniformly applied without difficulty. 2.03 PORTLAND CEMENT (ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. ASTM C 150 Type I,bulk or sacked. 5/2013 02335-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE 2.04 SOIL A. Provide soil consisting of approved material free from vegetation or other objectable matter encountered in existing roadbed. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify backfill of new or relocated utilities and structures below future grade is complete. B. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. C. Verify subgrade lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. B. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. C. Cut material to bottom of subgrade using an approved cutting and pulverizing machine meeting following requirements: 1. Cutters accurately provide a smooth surface over entire width of cut to plane of secondary grade. 2. Visible indication that cut is to proper depth. D. Alternatively,scarify or excavate to bottom of stabilized subgrade. Remove material or windrow to expose secondary grade. Correct wet or unstable material below secondary grade by scarifying,adding lime,and compacting. Obtain uniform stability. E. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.03 LIME SLURRY APPLICATION A. Mix hydrated lime or quicklime with water to form a slurry of the solids content ( specified. Commercial lime slurry shall have dry solids content as specified. Conform to cautionary requirements in this Section, 1.06C, concerning use of quicklime. 5/2013 02335-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUB GRADE B. Apply slurry with a distributor truck equipped with an agitator to keep lime and water in a consistent mixture. Make successive passes over measured section of roadway to attain proper moisture and lime content. Limit spreading to an area where preliminary mixing operations can be completed on the same working day. 3.04 PRELIMINARY MIXING A. Do not mix and place material when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Base may be placed when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. B. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to mix soil, lime, and water to required depth. Obtain a homogeneous friable mixture free of clods and lumps. C. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. D. Seal subgrade as a precaution against heavy rainfall by rolling lightly with light pneumatic rollers. E. Cure soil-lime material for 1 to 4 days. Keep subgrade moist during cure. 3.05 FINAL MIXING A. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to uniformly mix cured soil and lime to required depth. B. Add water to bring moisture content of soil mixture to a minimum of optimum or above. C. Mix and pulverize until all material passes a 1 inch sieve; a minimum of 90 percent, excluding non-slaking fractions,passes a 3/4-inch sieve;and a minimum of 65 percent excluding non-slaking fractions passes a No. 4 sieve. D. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. E. Do not expose hydrated lime to open air for more than 6 hours during interval between application and mixing. Avoid excessive hydrated lime loss due to washing or blowing. 3.06 MIXING-PORTLAND CEMENT(ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Do not place and mix cement when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Place Portland Cement base when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. 5/2013 02335-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Spread cement uniformly on soil at rate specified by laboratory. When bulk cement spreader is used,position it by string lines or other approved method to ensure uniform distribution of cement. Apply cement only to area where operations can be continuous and completed in daylight,within 1 hour of application. Amount of moisture in soil at time of cement placement shall not exceed quantity that will permit uniform mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations. Do not exceed specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture. C. Do not allow equipment other than that used in spreading and mixing, to pass over freshly spread cement until it is mixed with soil. D. Dry mix cement with soil after cement application. Continue mixing until cement has been sufficiently blended with soil to prevent formation of cement balls when water is applied. Mixture of soil and cement that has not been compacted and finished shall not remain undisturbed for more than 30 minutes. E. Immediately after dry mixing is complete, uniformly apply water as necessary and incorporate it into mixture. Pressurized equipment must provide adequate supply to ensure continuous application of required amount of water to sections being processed within 3 hours of cement application. Ensure proper moisture distribution at all times. After last increment of water has been added, continue mixing until thorough and uniform mix has been obtained. F. Ensure percentage of moisture in mixture,based on dry weights,is within 2 percentage points of specified optimum moisture content prior to compaction. When uncompacted soil cement mixture is wetted by rain indicating that average moisture content exceeds tolerance given at time of final compaction,reconstruct entire section in accordance with this Section at no additional cost to City. 3.07 COMPACTION-LIME SUBGRADE A. Aerate or sprinkle to attain optimum moisture content as determined by Testing Laboratory. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges specified at time of final compaction. B. Start compaction immediately after final mixing,unless approved by Engineer. C. Spread and compact in two or more approximately equal layers where total compacted thickness is to be greater than 8 inches. D. Compact with approved heavy pneumatic or vibrating rollers, or a combination of tamping rollers and light pneumatic rollers. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until entire depth is uniformly compacted. E. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and re-compacting. 5/2013 02335-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE F. Compact to following minimum densities at a moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698,unless otherwise indicated on the Plans: 1. Areas to receive pavement without subsequent base course:Minimum density of 98 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Areas to receive subsequent base course: Minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density. G. Seal with approved light pneumatic tired rollers: Prevent surface hair line cracking. Rework and re-compact at areas where hair line cracking develops. H. Contractor shall conduct operations to minimize elapsed time between mixing and compacting stabilized subgrade in order to take advantage of rapid initial set characteristics. Complete compaction within 2 hours of commencing compaction and not more than 6 hours after adding and mixing the last stabilizing agent. 3.08 COMPACTION-PORTLAND CEMENT SUBGRADE(ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Prior to beginning compaction, ensure mixture is in loose condition for its full depth. Uniformly compact the loose mixture to specified density, lines and grades. B. After soil and cement mixture is compacted,apply water uniformly as needed and mix thoroughly. Then reshape surface to required lines, grades and cross section and lightly scarify to loosen imprints left by compacting or shaping equipment. C. Roll resulting surface with pneumatic-tired roller and "skin" surface with power grader. Thoroughly compact mixture with pneumatic roller,adding small increments of moisture,as needed. When aggregate larger than No.4 sieve is present in mixture, make one complete coverage of section with flat-wheel roller immediately after skinning operation. When approved by Project Manager, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure, provided dense uniform surface, free of surface compaction planes, is produced. Maintain moisture content of surface material at its specified optimum during finishing operations. Compact and finish surface within period not to exceed 2 hours,to produce smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks, ridges, or loose material, conforming to crown, grade and line shown on Drawings within period not to exceed 2 hours. 3.09 CURING A. Moist cure for a minimum of 3 days before placing base or surface course,or opening to traffic. Time may be adjusted as approved by Engineer. Subgrade may be opened to traffic after 2 days if adequate strength has been attained to prevent damage.Restrict traffic to light pneumatic rollers or vehicles weighing less than 10 tons. 5/2013 02335-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. Roll with light pneumatic roller to keep surface knit together. C. Place base, surface, or seal course within 14 days after final mixing and compaction unless prior approval is obtained from Engineer. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section or in 16 foot length. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A minimum of three phenolphthalein test will be made at random locations per 1000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in-place depth. B. Contractor may, at his own expense, request additional cores in the vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. If the average of the tests falls below the required depth,place and compact additional material at no cost to the Owner. C. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 at random locations near depth determination tests. Three tests will be performed for each 1000 foot roadway section. Rework and re-compact areas that do not conform to compaction requirements at no cost to the Owner. 3.12 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B. Fill test pits with new compacted lime stabilized subgrade. C. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and grades. D. In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.13 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain stabilized Subgrade to lines and grades and in good condition until placement of base or surface course. B. Protect the asphalt membrane, if used, from being picked up by traffic. 5/2013 02335-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE C. Repair settlements, areas with loss of density, or areas of subgrade damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner by replacing and re-compacting material to full depth. D. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02335- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND GEOTEXTILE Section 02370 GEOTEXTILE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Geotextile, also called filter fabric, in applications such as under a granular fill, as a pipe embedment wrap,around the exterior of a tunnel liner,or around the foundations of pipeline structures. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" b. ASTM D 4533,"Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles" c. ASTM D 4833,"Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products" d. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" e. ASTM D 4751, "Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile" f. ASTM D 4491, "Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item„no separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Work requiring geotextile. B If Geotextile is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit the standard manufacturer's catalog sheets and other pertinent information,for approval, prior to installation. 07/2006 02370- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND GEOTEXTILE C Submit installation methods,as a part of the work plan for tunneling or for excavation and backfill for utilities. Obtain approval from Engineer for Geotextile material and the proposed installation method prior to use of the geotextile. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE A Provide a geotextile(filter fabric)designed for use in geotechnical applications which forms a permeable layer or media while retaining the soil matrix. B Use a fabric which meets the physical requirements for Class A Subsurface Drainage installation conditions as defined in AASHTO M288 and as specified in this Section, 2.02 "Properties". 2.02 PROPERTIES A Material: Non-woven,non-biodegradable,fabric consisting only of continuous chain polymer filaments or yarns, at least 85 percent by weight poly-olefins, polyesters or polyamide, formed into a dimensionally stable network. B Chemical Resistance: Inert to commonly encountered chemicals and hydrocarbons over a pH range of 3 to 12. C Physical Resistance: Resistant to mildew and rot, ultraviolet light exposure, insects and rodents. D Minimum Test Values: PROPERTY VALUE(MIN) TEST METHOD Grab strength 180 lbs ASTM D 4632 Trapezoidal Tear Strength 50 lbs ASTM D 4533 Puncture Strength 80 lbs . ASTM D 4833 Mullen Burst Strength 290 psi ASTM D 3786 Apparent Opening Size(1) 0.25 mm ASTM D 4751 Permittivity(sec-1) 0.2 ASTM D 4491 (1) Maximum average roll value 3.0 EXECUTION - Notused END OF SECTION 07/2006 02370-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND - VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Section 02520 VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES,AND METER VAULTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Valve boxes for water service. B Meter boxes for water service. C Meter vaults for water service. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for valve boxes under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B No separate payment will be made for installation of meter boxes furnished by the Owner under this Section. Include cost of installation of meter boxes in Bid Items for which the Work is a component. C Measurement for installation of meter vaults is on a per each basis for each meter vault type and size,complete in place. Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for following items for approval: 1. Each type of valve box and lid. 2. ' Each type of meter box and cover. 3. Each type of meter vault frame and cover. 06/2014 02520- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS C . Submit Shop Drawings for cast-in-place meter vaults for approval if proposed construction varies from Plans. D Submit manufacturer's certification that meter boxes purchased for Work meet the requirements of this Section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE BOXES A Provide adjustable, cast-iron, screw-type, valve boxes as manufactured by Bass and Hays Foundry,Inc.,or approved equal. Design of valve box shall minimize stresses on valve imposed by loads on box lid. B Cast the word"WATER" into lid, 1/2 inch in height and raised 3/32 inch, for valves serving potable water lines. C Provide 6-inch PVC, Class 150, DR 18,riser pipes. D Concrete for valve box placement: 1. For locations in new concrete pavement,use strength and mix design of new pavement. 2. For other locations, use class "A" concrete, with minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi, conforming to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 2.02 METER BOXES A Refer to City of Pearland Standard Details or contact the Public Works Department for list of acceptable products. 2.03 METER VAULTS A Meter vaults may be constructed of precast concrete, cast-in-place concrete, or solid masonry unless a specific type of construction is required by Plans. B Concrete for meter vaults: Class A concrete, conforming to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete,with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days. C Vaults for meters 3" and greater shall be procured through the City's utility billing department. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 06/2014 02520-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS A Obtain approval from the City Engineer or designee for location of meter vault. B Verify lines and grades are correct. C Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by vaults. 3.02 VALVE BOXES A Provide riser pipe with suitable length for depth of cover indicated on Plans or to accommodate actual finish grade. B Install adjustable valve box and riser piping plumbed in a vertical position. Provide 6 inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end,and interior contact flange of valve box, for vertical movement damping. Riser may rest on valve flange, or provide suitable footpiece to support riser pipe. C Paint covers of new valve boxes as directed by the Owner. 3.03 METER BOXES A Install plastic boxes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B Construct concrete meter boxes to dimensions shown on Plans. C Adjust top of meter boxes to conform to cover elevations specified in this Section, 3.05 "Frame and Cover for Meter Vaults". D Do not locate under paved areas unless approved by Engineer. Use approved traffic- type box with cast iron lid when meter must be located in paved areas. 3.04 METER VAULTS A Construct concrete meter vaults to dimensions and requirements shown on Plans.Do not cast in presence of water. Make bottom as uniform as practicable. B Precast Meter Vaults: 1. Install precast vaults in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set level on a minimum 3 inch thick bed of sand conforming to the requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 2. Seal lifting holes cement-sand mortar or non-shrink grout. C Meter Vault Floor Slab: 1. Construct floor slabs of 6-inch-thick reinforced concrete. Slope floor 1/4 inch per foot toward sump. Make sump 12 inches in diameter,or 12 inches square, and 4 inches deep, unless other dimensions are required by Plans. Install dowels at maximum of 18 inches,center-to-center,or install mortar trench for keying walls to floor slab. 2. Precast floor slab elements may be used for precast vault construction. 06/2014 02520-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS 3.05 FRAME AND COVER FOR METER VAULTS A Diamond Plate Aluminum as follows: 1. In unpaved areas,set top of meter box or meter vault cover 2 to 3 inches above natural grade. 2. In sidewalk areas,set top of meter box or meter vault cover 1/2 to 1 inch above adjacent concrete. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises B Backfill and compact in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C In unpaved areas, slope backfill around meter boxes and vaults to provide a uniform slope 1 to 5 from top to natural grade. D Meter boxes are not allowed in sidewalk. END OF SECTION 06/2014 02520-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWAGE FORCE MAINS r Section 02533 SANITARY SEWAGE FORCE MAINS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary sewage force mains. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 5. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" b. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 2. American Concrete Institute(ACI) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for pipe is on a linear foot basis taken along the center line of the pipe from end to end,measured and complete in place. B. Payment for sanitary sewage force mains includes pipe,fittings,excavation,bedding, backfill and special backfill,shoring,earthwork,connections to existing manholes and pipe, accessories, inspection and testing. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 5/2013 02533- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWAGE FORCE MAINS B. Submit proposed methods,equipment,materials,and sequence of operations for force main construction. C. Submit Shop Drawings and design calculations for joint restraint systems using reinforced concrete encasement of pressure pipe and fittings. D. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Conform to requirements of Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. All pipe used for sanitary sewer force mains shall be painted white. 2.02 PVC PIPE A. Provide PVC pressure pipe conforming to the minimum working pressure rating specified in this Section. All pipe used for sanitary sewer force mains shall be white. B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot,containing a bonded-in elastomeric sealing ring meeting the requirements of ASTM F 477. In designated areas requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use EBAA Iron Series 2000PV, Uniflange Series 1350 restrainer,or equal joint restraint device conforming to UNI-B-13,for PVC pipe 12-inch diameter and less. C. Fittings: Provide ductile iron fittings as per this Section, 2.03 "Thrust Restraint", except furnish all fittings with one of the following internal linings: 1. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with ASTM D 1248,heat fused to the interior surface of the fitting,as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe "Polybond", or U.S. Pipe "Polyline". 2. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)polyurethane, Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals, Inc. 3. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)ceramic epoxy,Protecto 401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. 5/2013 02533-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWAGE FORCE MAINS D. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with this Section, 3.04A"Hydrostatic Testing". E. Manufacturers: Approved manufacturers of pressure rated, solid wall PVC pipe for sanitary sewer force mains are: 1. J&M Manufacturing Company, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation 3. Diamond Plastics Corporation 4. Carlon Company 5. North American Pipe Corporation(NAPCO) F. Provide lined ductile iron fittings conforming to Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.03 THRUST RESTRAINT A. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans,provide concrete thrust blocking for force mains up to 12-inches in diameter, to prevent movement of buried lines under pressure at bends. Blocking shall be Portland cement concrete. Place concrete in accordance with details on the Plans. Place thrust blocks between undisturbed ground and the fittings. Anchor fittings to thrust blocks so that pipe and fitting joints are accessible for repairs. Concrete shall extend from 6 inches below the pipe or fitting to 12 inches above. B. For all force mains larger than 12 inches in diameter,and where indicated on the Plans, provide restrained joints conforming to the requirements of the force main pipe material specifications. Restrained joints shall be installed for the length of pipe on both sides of each bend or fitting for the full length shown on the Plans. C. Horizontal and vertical bends between zero and 10° deflection angle will not require thrust blocks or harnessed or restrained joints. D. Horizontal and vertical bends between 10°and 90° deflection angle shall have thrust restraint as shown on the Plans. E. Reinforced concrete encasement of force main pipe and fittings may be used in lieu of manufactured joint restraint systems. Alternate joint restraint systems using reinforced concrete encasement shall conform to the following design requirements. 1. Design calculations shall be performed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. 2. Design calculations shall be based upon soil parameters quantified in the geotechnical report for the site where the alternative thrust restraint system is to be installed. If data is not available for the site,use parameters recommended by the geotechnical engineer. 3. The design system pressure shall be the specified test pressure. 5/2013 02533-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWAGE FORCE MAINS 4. The following safety factors shall be used in sizing the restraint system: a. Apply a factor of safety equal to 1.5 for passive soil resistance. b. Apply a factor of safety equal to 2:0 for soil friction. 5. The encasement shall be contained entirely within the standard trench width and terminate on both ends at a pipe bell or coupling. 6. Concrete encasement reinforcement steel shall be designed for all loads including internal pressure and longitudinal forces. Concrete design shall be in accordance with ACI 318. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Plan operations to minimize disruption of utilities to occupied facilities or adjacent property. 3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION BY OPEN-CUT A. Perform excavation, bedding, and backfill in accordance with Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Install pipe in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in this Section. C. Install pipe only after excavation is completed,the bottom of the trench is fine graded, bedding material is installed, and the trench has been approved by the Engineer. D. Install pipe to the line and grade indicated. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of barrel on bedding material and is laid in the trench so the interior surfaces of the pipe follow the grades and alignment indicated. Provide bell holes where necessary. E. Install pipe with the spigot ends toward the direction of flow. Form a concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe so as to prevent offsets. F. Keep the interior of pipe clean as the installation progresses. Where cleaning after laying the pipe is difficult because of small pipe size,use a suitable swab or drag in the pipe and pull it forward past each joint immediately after the joint has been completed. Remove foreign material and debris from the pipe. G. Provide lubricant,place and drive home newly-laid sections with come-a-long winches so as to eliminate damage to sections. Install pipe to "home" mark where provided. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed unless protective measures are provided and approved in advance by the Engineer. 5/2013 02533 -4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWAGE FORCE MAINS H. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection. I. When work is not in progress,cover the exposed ends of pipes with an approved plug to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe. J. Where sanitary sewer force main is to be installed under an existing waterline with a separation distance of less than 2 feet, install one full joint length of pipe centered on the waterline and maintain a minimum 6 inch separation distance. 3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN-CUT A. For installation of pipe by augering or jacking conform to requirements of specification sections for augering or jacking work. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hydrostatic Testing 1. After the pipe and appurtenance have been installed, test line and drain. Prevent damage to the Work or adjacent areas. Use clean water to perform tests. 2. The Engineer may direct tests of relatively short sections of completed lines to minimize traffic problems or potential public hazards. 3. Test pipe in the presence of the Engineer. 4. Test pipe at 150 psig or 1.5 times design pressure of the pipe, whichever is greater. Design pressure of the force main shall be the rated total dynamic head of the lift station pump. 5. Test pipe at the required pressure for a minimum of 2 hours according to requirements of UNI-B-3. 6. Maximum allowable leakage shall be as calculated by the following formula: L=(S) (D) (P°'S)/ 133,200 Where: L = Leakage in gallons per hour S = Length of pipe in feet D = Inside diameter of pipe in inches P = Pressure in pounds per square inch 7. Correct defects, cracks, or leakage by replacement of defective items or by repairs as approved by the Engineer. 5/2013 02533 -5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWAGE FORCE MAINS 8. Plug openings in the force main after testing and flushing. Use cast iron plugs or blind flanges to prevent debris from entering the tested pipeline. B. Pigging Test 1. When requested by the Engineer and after completion of hydrostatic testing and prior to final acceptance,test force mains longer than 200 feet by pigging to ensure piping is free of obstructions. 2. Pigs: Provide proving pigs manufactured of an open-cell polyurethane foam body, without any coating or abrasives which would scratch or otherwise damage interior pipe wall surface or lining. Pigs shall be able to pass through reductions of up to 65 percent of the nominal cross-sectional area of the pipe. Pigs shall be able to pass through standard fittings such as 45°and 90°elbows, crosses,tees,wyes,gate valves,or plug valves,as applicable to the force main being tested. 3. Test Execution: Pigging test shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. Provide at least 48 hours notice of scheduled pigging of the force main prior to commencing the test. 4. All pigging tests shall be borne by the Contractor at no cost to the City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02533-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE Section 02534 PVC PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for water distribution in nominal diameters 4 inches through 16 inches. B. Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe for gravity sanitary sewers in nominal diameters 4 inches through 48 inches. C. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for gravity sanitary sewers and force mains in nominal diameters 4 inches through 36 inches. D. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 3. Section 02533 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap 5. Section 02510—Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 7. Section 02731 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 8. Section 02630—Storm Sewers 9. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities E. Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12" for Water Distribution. b. AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameters, 14in. Through 36 in. c. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" 05/2013 02534- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE c. ASTM D 3139,"Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" d. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" e. ASTM F 949,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings" f. ASTM D 794,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter" g. ASTM F 679,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" h. ASTM D 2241,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe(SDR Series)" i. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" j. ASTM D 2444, "Standard Test Method for Determination for the Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup(Falling Weight)" k. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" 3. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) a. ANSI A21.10 Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water. b. ANSI A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as.a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for PVC pipe under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains,Gravity Sanitary Sewer,and Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, and special details. 05/2013 02534-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit manufacturer's certifications that PVC pipe and fittings meet requirements of this Section and AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 for pressure pipe applications,or the appropriate ASTM standard specified for gravity sewer pipe. B. Submit manufacturer's certification that PVC pressure pipe has been hydrostatically tested at the factory in accordance with AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 and this Section. C. When foreign manufactured material is proposed for use, have material tested for conformance to applicable ASTM requirements by certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Furnish copies of test reports to the Engineer for review. Cost of testing shall be borne by Contractor or Supplier. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Use PVC compounds in the manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. B. Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin PVC compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for a rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F per requirements of PPI TR3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous throughout,free of voids,cracks,inclusions,and other defects, uniform as commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage. C. For PVC pressure pipe used for water mains,provide self-extinguishing PVC pipe that bears Underwriters'Laboratories mark of approval and is acceptable without penalty to Texas State Fire Insurance Committee for use in fire protection lines. D. Gaskets: 1. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477. Use elastomeric factory- installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight. 2. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed sewer, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants. ) 05/2013 02534-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum(diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer E. Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble,non-toxic,non-objectionable in taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets. 2.02 WATER SERVICE PIPE A. Pipe 4-inch through 12-inch: AWWAC900, Class 150, DR 18; nominal 20-foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameters. B. Pipe 16-inch: AWWA C905; Class 235; DR 18; nominal 20 foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameter. C. Joints: ASTM D 3139; push-on type joints in integral bell or separate sleeve couplings. Do not use socket type or solvent weld type joints. D. Make curves and bends by deflecting the joints. Do not exceed maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for review by the Engineer. E. Hydrostatic Test: AWWA C900, AWWA C905, ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110); at point of manufacture; submit manufacturer's written certification. 2.03 BENDS AND FITTINGS FOR PVC PRESSURE PIPE A. Bends and Fittings: ANSI A21.10, ductile iron; ANSI A21.11 single rubber gasket push-on type joint; minimum 150 psi pressure rating. B. Coatings and Linings: Conform to requirements of Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.04 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE A. PVC gravity sanitary sewer pipe shall be in accordance with the provisions in the following table: 05/2013 02534-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE WALL PRODUCT ASTM SDR(MAX.)/ DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER OPTIONS DESIGNATION STIFFNESS(MIN.) SIZE RANGE Solid J-M Pipe Approved D3034 SDR 26/PS 115 6"to 15" CertainTeed Approved F679 SDR 26/PS 115 18"to 48" Can-Tex Approved AWWA C900 DR 18/N/A*** 4"to 12" Carlon Approved AWWA C905 DR 18/N/A*** 14"to 36" Diamond Profile* Contech A-2000** Only when F949 N/A/50 psi 12"to 36" included in the ETI Ultra-Rib Bid Schedule F794 N/A/46 psi 12"to 48" Lamson Vylon F794 N/A/46 psi 21"to 48" * Allowed to be used where there are no service taps. ** Allowed to be used to maximum depth of 10' only. ***For water-seer separation requirements unless specifically noted in Bid Schedule. B. When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F679,except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi. C. For sewers up to 12-inch-diameter crossing over waterlines, or crossing under waterlines with less than 2 feet separation, provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings. D. Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastometric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. E. ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477 shall be provided. Gaskets shall be factory- assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444. F. Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sewer sanitary bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tee or wye fittings are not acceptable. 2.05 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN PIPE A. Provide PVC pressure pipe conforming to the requirements for water service pipe,and conforming to the minimum working pressure rating specified in Section 02533 — Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot,containing a bonded-in elastomeric sealing ring meeting the requirements of ASTM F 477. In designated areas requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use EBAA Iron Series 2000PV, Uniflange Series 1350 restrainer,or equal joint restraint device conforming to UNI-B-13,for PVC pipe 12-inch diameter and less. 05/2013 02534-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Fittings: Provide ductile iron fittings as per this Section,2.03 "Bends and Fittings for PVC Pressure Pipe", except furnish all fittings with one of the following internal linings: 1. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with ASTM D 1248,heat fused to the interior surface of the fitting,as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe "Polybond", or U.S. Pipe "Polyline". 2. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)polyurethane,Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals, Inc. 3. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)ceramic epoxy,Protecto 401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. D. Exterior Protection: Provide polyethylene wrapping of ductile iron fittings as required by Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap. E. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with this Section, 2.02E. F. Manufacturers: Approved manufacturers of pressure rated, solid wall PVC pipe for sanitary sewer force mains are: 1. J&M Manufacturing Company, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation 3. Diamond Plastics Corporation 4. Carlon Company 5. North American Pipe Corporation(NAPCO) 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Store pipe under cover out of direct sunlight and protect from excessive heat or harmful chemicals in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Conform to requirements of Section 02510—Water Mains, Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers, Section 02731 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,and Section 02630— Storm Sewers. B. Install PVC pipe in accordance with Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities,ASTM D 2321, and manufacturer's recommendations. 05/2013 02534-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Water service pipe 12 inches in diameter and smaller: Installed to clear utility lines and have minimum 4 feet of cover below lowest property line grade of street,unless otherwise required by Plans. D. For water service,exclude use of PVC within 200 feet(along the public right-of-way) of underground storage tanks or in undeveloped commercial acreage. Underground storage tanks are primarily located on service stations but can exist at other commercial establishments. E. Avoid imposing strains that will overstress or buckle the pipe when lowering pipe into trench. F. Hand shovel pipe bedding under the pipe haunches and along the sides of the pipe barrel and compact to eliminate voids and ensure side support. END OF SECTION 05/2013 02534-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES &VALVES Section 02540 TAPPING SLEEVES &VALVES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ' A Tapping sleeves and valves for connections to existing water system. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02541—Water&Wastewater Line Valves 4. Section 02520—Valve Boxes,Meter Boxes, &Meter Vaults 5. Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap 6. Section 02318—Excavation&Backfill for Utilities C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water c. AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of tapping sleeves and valves is on a per each basis. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation as indicated on Plans. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Provide manufacturer's affidavit that all valves purchased for tapping of existing waterlines conform to Section 02541 — Water & Wastewater Line Valves and to applicable requirements of AWWA C500 and that they have been satisfactorily tested in accordance with AWWA C500. 02/2008 02540- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Tapping Sleeves: 1. Tapping Sleeve Bodies: Stainless steel;in two sections to be bolted together with high-strength,corrosion-resistant,low-alloy,steel bolts;mechanical joint ends. a. 12 inch and smaller: stainless steel; JCM 432, Romac, or approved equal. b. 16 inch and larger:epoxy coated ductile iron;JCM,or approved equal. 2. Branch Outlet of Tapping Sleeve: Flanged;machined recess;AWWA C207, Class D,ANSI 150 lb drilling. Gasket: Affixed around recess of tap opening to preclude rolling or binding during installation. 3. Where fire service from 6-inch main is approved,use cast iron split sleeve. B Tapping Valves: Meet all requirements of Section 02541—Water&Wastewater Line Valves with following exceptions: 1. Inlet Flanges: a. AWWA C110;Class 125. b. AWWA C110; Class 150 and higher: Minimum eight hole flange. 2. Outlet: Standard mechanical or push-on joint; to fit any standard tapping machine. 3. Valve Seat Opening: Accommodate full-size shell cutter for nominal size tap without any contact with valve body; double disc. 4. Open Left operation only. • C Valve Boxes: Furnish and install according to Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, &Meter Vaults. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Install tapping sleeves and valves at locations and of sizes as shown on Drawings. B Thoroughly clean tapping sleeve, tapping valve and pipe prior to installation and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C Hydrostatically test installed tapping sleeve to 150 psig for a minimum of 15 minutes. Inspect sleeve for leaks, and remedy leaks prior to tapping operation. D When tapping concrete pressure pipe, size on size,use shell cutter one standard size smaller than waterline being tapped. E Do not use Large End Bell(LEB)increasers with a next size tap unless existing pipe is asbestos-cement. 02/2008 02540-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES &VALVES 3.02 INSTALLATION A Tighten bolts in proper sequence so that undue stress is not placed on pipe. B Align tapping valve properly and attach it to tapping sleeve. C Make tap with sharp, shell cutter: 1. For 12-inch and smaller tap,use minimum cutter diameter one-half inch less than nominal tap size. 2. For 16-inch and larger tap,use manufacturer's recommended cutter diameter. D Withdraw coupon and flush all cuttings from newly-made tap. E Wrap completed tapping sleeve and valve in accordance with Section 02512 — Polyethylene Wrap. F Place concrete thrust block behind tapping sleeve (NOT over tapping sleeve and valve). G Block under valve using concrete blocks. H Request inspection of installation prior to backfilling. I Backfill in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation&Backfill for Utilities. END OF SECTION 02/2008 02540-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES Section 02541 WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Gate valves, Plug Valves, Butterfly Valves, Air Release and Pressure Reducing Valves. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittal Procedures 3. Section 02520—Valve Boxes,Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength" b. ASTM B 763,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for Valve Applications" c. ASTM B 62, "Standard Specification. for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings" d. ASTM D 429,"Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates" e. ASTM A 126, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,Flanges, and Pipe Fittings" f. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" g. ASTM A 240,"Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications" h. ASTM A 276, "Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes" i. ASTM B 584,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications" j. ASTM A 313,"Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 Resilient-seated Gate Valves, 3 through 12 NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems c. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants d. AWWA C504 Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves 04/2009 02541 - 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for valves under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Stipulated Price(Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract,payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions(of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed valves for approval. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Submit manufacturer's affidavit that gate valves are manufactured in the United States and conform to stated requirements of AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 and this Section,and that they have been satisfactorily tested in the United States in accordance with AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A Gate Valves: AWWA C500,AWWA C509 or C515 and additional requirements of this Section.Direct bury valves and those in subsurface vaults,aboveground and plant valves open counterclockwise. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans, use gate valves as line valves for sizes less than 16-inches. If type of valve is indicated, no substitute is allowed. C Gate Valves 1-1/2 Inches in Diameter and Smaller: 125 psig; bronze; rising-stem; single-wedge; disc type; screwed ends; such as Crane No. 428, or approved equal. D Coatings for Gate Valves 2 Inches and Larger: AWWA C550; Indurall 3300 or approved equal, non-toxic,imparts no taste to water,functions as physical,chemical, and electrical barrier between base metal and surroundings, minimum 8-mil-thick, fusion-bonded epoxy. Prior to assembly of valve, apply protective coating to interior and exterior surfaces of body. E Gate Valves 2 Inches in Diameter: Iron body,double gate,non-rising stem, 150-pound test, 2 inch square nut operating clockwise to open. 04/2009 02541 -2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES F Gate Valves 4 Inches to 12 Inches in Diameter: Non-directional, resilient seated (AWWA C509 or AWWA C515) or parallel seat double disc (AWWA C500), 200 psig, bronze mounting, push-on bell ends with rubber joint rings, and nut-operated unless otherwise specified. Provide resilient seated valves manufactured by American Darling AFC-500, US Pipe Metroseal 200, or approved equal. Provide double disc valves manufactured by American Darling 52, Clow F-6102, or approved equal. , Comply with following requirements: 1. Design: Fully encapsulated rubber wedge or rubber seat ring mechanically attached with minimum 304 stainless-steel fasteners or screws; threaded connection isolated from water by compressed rubber around opening. 2. Body: Cast or ductile iron, flange bonnet and stuffing box together with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts.Manufacturer's initials,-pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. 3. Bronze: Valve components in waterway to contain not more than 15 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum. 4. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number 995 minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2 inches of 12 percent, non-rising. 5. 0-rings: AWWA C509, sections 2.2.6 and 4.82. 6. Stem Seals: Consist of three 0-rings, two above and one below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar. 7. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 8. Resilient Wedge: Molded,synthetic rubber,vulcanized and bonded to cast or ductile iron wedge or attached with 304 stainless steel screws tested to meet or exceed ASTM D 429, Method B; seat against epoxy-coated surface in valve body. 9. Bolts: AWWA C509 Section 4.4; stainless steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated. G Gate Valves 16 Inches to 24 Inches in Diameter: AWWA C500 by Mueller;push-on bell ends with rubber rings and nut-operated unless otherwise specified,double disc, 150 psi, and comply with the following: 1. Body: Cast or ductile iron; flange together bonnet and stuffing box with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body., Equip with rollers, tracks, and scrapers. 2. Stems: Machined from ASTM B 62 bronze rod with integral forged thrust collar machined to size; non-rising. 3. Stem Seals: Consist of one 0-ring above and one 0-ring below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque. 4. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Discs: Cast iron with bronze disc rings securely peened into machined dovetailed grooves. 6. Wedging Device: Solid bronze or cast-iron, bronze-mounted wedges. Thin plates or shapes integrally cast into cast-iron surfaces are acceptable. Other moving surfaces integral to wedging action shall be bronze monel or nickel alloy-to-iron. 04/2009 02541 -3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 7. Bronze Mounting: Built as integral unit mounted over, or supported on, cast iron base and of sufficient dimensions to be structurally sound and adequate for imposed forces. 8. Gear Cases: Cast iron;furnished on 18-inch and larger valves and of extended type with steel side plates, lubricated, gear case enclosed with oil seal or 0- rings at shaft openings. 9. Stuffing Boxes: Located on top of bonnet and outside gear case. H Gate Valves 20 Inches and Larger: Furnish and equip with bypass valves. 1. Sizes: Provide 3-inch bypass valves for 16-inch through 20 inch gate valves. Provide 4-inch bypass valves for 24-inch gate valves. I Valves 4 Inches through 12 Inches for Installation in Vertical Pipe Lines: 1. Double disc, square bottom. J Valves 14 Inches and Larger for Installation in Horizontal Pipe Lines: 1. Equipped with bronze shoes and slides. K Gate Valves Installed at Greater than 4 foot Depth: 1. Provide non-rising, extension stem having coupling sufficient to attach securely to operating nut of valve. Upper end of extension stem shall terminate in square wrench nut no deeper than 4 feet from finished grade. L Gate Valves in Factory Mutual (Fire Service)Type Meter Installations: 1. Conform to provisions of this specification; outside screw and yoke valves; carry label of Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.;flanged,Class 125;clockwise to close. M Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel.Or PCCP. 2.02 BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACTUATORS • A Butterfly Valves and Actuators: Conform to AWWA C504, except as modified or supplemented herein. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or approved equal. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans,butterfly valves shall be used for line valve sizes 16 inch and larger. If type of valve is specified, no substitute will be allowed. C Butterfly valves shall be short-body,flanged design and installed at locations as shown on Plans. D Direct-bury valves,valves in subsurface vaults. Above-ground and plant valves shall open counterclockwise. E Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. F Butterfly Valves and Actuators (Additional Requirements for Large-Diameter Water Mains): Valves larger than 72 inches in diameter shall have all components designed 04/2009 02541 -4 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES so that the allowable stresses at rated pressure shall not exceed one-third of the yield strength or one-fifth of the ultimate strength of the material used. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International,American-Darling, or equal. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVE CONSTRUCTION A Valves: AWWA C504, Class 150B. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B. Flanges: ANSI B 16.1, Class 125 lb. B Discs for Butterfly Valves: Either cast iron or ductile iron. C Seats: Buna-N or neoprene, and may be applied to disc or body. Seats shall be mechanically secured and may not rely solely on adhesive properties of epoxy or similar bonding agent to attach seat to body. Seats on disc shall be mechanically retained by stainless steel(18-8)retaining ring held in place by stainless steel(18-8) cap screws that pass through rubber seat for added retention. When seat is on disc, seat shall be retained in position by shoulders located on both disc and stainless-steel retaining ring. Mating surfaces for seats: Type 304 or 316,stainless steel and secured to disc by mechanical means: Sprayed-on or plated mating surfaces will not be allowed. D Coat interior wetted ferrous surfaces of valve,including disc,with epoxy suitable for potable-water conditions. Epoxy, surface preparation, and epoxy application: In accordance with AWWA C550 and coating manufacturer's recommendations. Provide two coats of two-component, high-build epoxy with minimum dry thickness of 10 mils. Epoxy coating: Indurall 3300 or approved equal. Coatings shall be holiday tested and measured for thickness. E Valve shaft and keys,dowel pins,or taper pins used for attaching valve shaft to valve disc: Type-304 or 316 stainless steel. Shaft Bearings: Stainless steel,bronze,nylon, or Teflon (supported by fiberglass mat or backing material with proven record of preventing Teflon flow under load)in accordance with AWWA C504. F Packing: Field-adjustable, split-V type, and replaceable without removing operator assembly. G Retaining Hardware for Seats: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. Nuts and screws used with clamps and discs for rubber seats shall be held securely with locktight, or other approved method, to prevent loosening by vibration or cavitational effects. H Valve disc shall seat in position at 90 degrees to the pipe axis and shall rotate 90 degrees between full-open and tight-closed position. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal and convex side of disc facing anticipated direction of flow, except where shown otherwise on Plans. 2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION A Provide actuators for valves with size based on line velocity of 16 feet per second, and,unless otherwise shown on Plans, equip with geared manual actuators. Provide 04/2009 02541 -5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES fully enclosed and traveling-nut type, rack-and-pinion type, or worm-gear type for valves 24 inches and smaller. B Provide actuator designed for installation with valve shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C Provide valve shaft extended from valve to actuator. Space between actuator housing and valve body shall be completely enclosed so that no moving parts are exposed to soil or elements. D Provide oil-tight and watertight actuator housings for valves,specifically designed for buried service or submerged service when located in valve vaults,and factory packed with suitable grease. E Install a valve position indicator on each actuator housing located above ground or in valve vaults. Valves shall be equipped with 2-inch actuator nut only. F Indicate direction of opening of valve on exposed visible part of assembly. G Design worm-gear or traveling-nut actuators so that a torque of 150 foot-pounds, or less,will operate valve at most adverse condition for which valve is designed.Vertical axis of actuating nut shall not move as valve is opened or closed. 2.05 VALVE BOXES A Provide standard adjustable valve boxes only conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes,Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults. 2.06 VALVE SERVICE MANHOLES A For large-diameter water mains, provide manholes to dimensions shown on Plans conforming to requirements of Section 02542—Concrete Manholes. 2.07 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES A Air Release Valves: Apco No. 200, GA Industries Fig. 2-AR, or equal. Materials: body and cover, ASTM A 48, Class 30, cast iron; float and leverage mechanism, ASTM A 240 or A276 stainless steel;orifice and seat,stainless steel against Buna-N or Viton mechanically retained with hex head nut and bolt;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Provide inlet and outlet connections, and orifice as shown on Plans. B Air Release and Vacuum Valves: Provide single-body, standard combination or duplex-body custom combination valves as indicated on Plans. 1. For 2 inch and 3 inch, single-body valves, provide inlet and outlet sizes as shown on Plans and orifice sized for 100 psi working pressure. Valve materials: body, cover and baffle, ASTM A 48, Class 35, or ASTM A 126, Grade B cast iron;plug or poppet,ASTM A 276 stainless steel;float,ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat,Buna-N; other valve internals, stainless steel. Valve exterior: Painted with shop-applied primer suitable for contact with potable 04/2009 02541 -6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES water. Provide Apco Model 145C or 147C, Val-Matic Series 200, or equal valves. 2. For 3 inch and larger duplex body valves as shown on Plans, provide Apco Series 1700 with No. 200 air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. AR/GH- 21K/280,or equal. Air and vacuum valve materials: body and cover,ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; float,ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat,Type-304, stainless steel and Buna-N;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Air release valve: Constructed as specified in paragraph above on Air Release Valves. C Vacuum Relief Valves: Provide air inlet vacuum relief valves with flanged inlet and outlet connections as shown on Plans. Provide air release valves in combination with inlet and outlet, and orifice as shown on Plans. Valve shall open under pressure differential not to exceed 0.25 psi. Provide Apco Series 1500 with a No. 200A air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. HCARV, or approved equal. Materials for vacuum relief valves: valve body, ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; seat and plug, ASTM B 584 bronze, copper alloy 836; spring, ASTM A 313, Type-304, stainless steel;bushing,ASTM B 584 bronze,copper alloy 932;retaining screws,ASTM A 276, Type-304, stainless steel. D Air Release Valve Vault as detailed in Plans. 2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A Provide Cla-Val Model 90-01, or approved equal,PRV with strainer in location and arrangement as shown on Plans. Valve body: ASTM A 48,cast iron or ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with ANSI B 16.1, Class 125, flanges. Valve cover: ASTM A 48 cast iron. Valve internals: Type-303, stainless steel or B-62 bronze. Rubber parts: Buna-N. No leather parts shall be allowed. Resilient seat shall have rectangular cross section. B Control Tubing: Contain shutoff cocks with "Y" strainer. C PRV: Equip with valve position indicator. Initially set in field by authorized manufacturer's representative with 60 psi downstream pressure. D Provide basket strainer upstream of PRV as shown on Plans. Strainer body: quick- opening type, fabricated-steel construction with ANSI B16.1, Class 150, flanges. Basket: Type-304, stainless steel. Provide Hayward Model 90, or equal,for PRV 4- inch through 24-inch. Provide Hayward Model 510, or equal, for PRV 14 inches or greater when space limitations dictate the use of smaller strainer housing. E Pilot Systems for PRV: Adjustable and pressure sustaining. F Valve Box: Valve Box conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter boxes, and Meter Vaults. 04/2009 02541 -7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Earthwork. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Operation. Do not use valves for throttling without prior approval of manufacturer. 3.02 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A Remove foreign matter from within valves prior to installation. Inspect valves in open and closed positions to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition. B Install valves and valve boxes where shown on Plans. Set valves plumb and as detailed. Center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth around each valve box for minimum radius of 4 feet, or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 feet. Install valves completely closed when placed in water line. C For pipe section of each valve box,use only cast iron,ductile iron,or DR 18 PVC pipe cut to proper length. Size to allow future operation of valve. Assemble and brace box in vertical position as indicated on Plans. 3.03 DISINFECTION AND TESTING A Perform disinfection and testing of valves and appurtenances as required by Section 02510—Water Mains. B Repair or replace valves which exceed the allowable specified leakage rate. 3.04 PAINTING OF VALVES A Paint valves in vaults, stations, and above ground using ACRO Paint No. 2215, or approved equal. END OF SECTION 04/2009 02541 -8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS Section 02603 FRAMES,GRATES,RINGS,AND COVERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Iron castings for manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin frames and grates,meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings and extensions. B. Ring grates. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" b. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" c. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO M 306, "Drainage, Sewage,Utility, and Related Castings" 3. American Welding Society(AWS) a. AWS D12.1, "Reinforcing Steel Welding Code" 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) a. Chapter 217.55 "Minimum Clear Opening" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B. If frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals are included as a Bid Items, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 12/2015 02603 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES,GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Provide copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions. Manufacturer shall be East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. or as approved by public works: C. Provide Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of casting assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include Setting Drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CASTINGS A. Castings for frames,grates,rings and covers shall conform to ASTM A 48,Class 35B and AASHTO M 306. Provide locking covers if indicated on Plans. B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without permanent deformation. C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the Plans. D. Castings shall be 75%post-consumer recycled material, clean, free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs. 2.02 BEARING SURFACES A. Machine bearing surfaces between covers or grates and their respective frames so that even bearing is provided for any position in which the casting may be seated in the frame. 2.03 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS A. Where indicated on the Plans,provide stainless steel inflow preventers and watertight manhole frames and covers with a minimum of four bolts and a gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply watertight manhole Frames and Covers, Model R-1916 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Model V-2420 by East Jordan Iron Works, or as approved by public works. B. Where personnel entry is anticipated,minimum clear opening of 30-inches is required. 12/2015 02603-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS 2.04 FABRICATED RING GRATES A. Ring grates shall be fabricated from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 615. B. Welds connecting the bars shall conform to AWS D12.1. 2.05 MORTAR A. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270,Type S using Portland cement. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All installations that have an elevation difference between the final elevation of the manhole cover and the surrounding finished grade greater than 18 inches will be required to be hinged, lift assist gasketed ring and cover. B. Install castings according to approved Shop Drawings, instructions given in related Sections, and applicable directions from the manufacturer's printed materials. C. Set castings accurately at required locations to proper alignment and elevation. Keep castings plumb, level, true and free of rack. Measure location accurately from established lines and grades. Brace or anchor frames temporarily in formwork until permanently set. D. Ring grates shall be fabricated in accordance with Plans and shall be set in mortar in the mouth of the pipe bell. END OF SECTION 12/2015 02603-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES Section 02624 STRUCTURAL PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Structural plate culverts and special structural plate shapes. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 153,"Standard Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware b. ASTM B 695, "Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel c. ASTM B 221,"Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum- Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for structural plate pipes, pipe arches, arches, underpasses or box culverts is on a linear foot basis,measured along flow lines between ends of structures. Separate measurement will be made for each different required size, gage, or minimum thickness of the required material. B For multiple structures,the measured length will be the sum of the lengths of barrels as prescribed above. C Payment for structural plate culvert structures includes aluminum alloy inverts, toe walls, footings, closure plates and stiffeners, and all labor and materials required for installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 07/2006 02624- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES B Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 ACCEPTANCE AT SITE A Furnish an itemized statement of the number and size of plates in each shipment. From this list, a visual inspection will be made by the Engineer, including an examination of the plates for deficiency in size,radius of curvature specified,and any evidence of poor workmanship. The inspection may include taking samples for chemical analysis and determination of weight of splutter coating. The plates making up the shipment shall fully meet the requirement of these specifications. Any plates failing to do so shall be rejected. B The Engineer may elect to have the material inspected and sampled in the rolling mill or in the fabrication shop. A chemical analysis of any plate may be required from the mill. The inspection,either in the mill or in the shop,will be under the direction of the Engineer. The Engineer will have free access to the mill or shop for inspection. Any material which has been previously rejected at the mill or shop and included in a later lot will be rejected unless the material has been satisfactorily repaired. C Structural plate with a damaged splutter coating, or which shows defective workmanship shall be rejected. Minor damaged areas of splutter coating,as judged by the Engineer,may be repaired by painting with a zinc dust-zinc oxide paint conforming to Federal Specification TT-P-641g. The requirement applies not only to individual plates but to the entire shipment. D The following defects are considered to be poor workmanship. The presence of any one of them in an individual structural plate will be cause for rejection: 1. Uneven laps. 2. Elliptical shaping(unless specified). 3. Variation from a straight center line. 4. Ragged edges and damaged coatings. 5. Loose, uneven lined or spaced bolts. } 6. Illegible brand. 7. Bruised, scaled or broken splutter coating. 8. Dents or bends in the metal. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL PIPE AND ARCH MATERIALS A Plates and fasteners used for construction of structural plate pipes,pipe arches,arches, underpasses, box culverts and special shapes shall conform to AASHTO M 167 for galvanized corrugated steel structures and to AASHTO M219 for aluminum alloy structures. B Steel fasteners shall be mechanically galvanized or hot-dip galvanized and shall conform to ASTM A 153, Class C or D, or ASTM B 695, Class 40. The weight of galvanized coating shall be determined according to Test Method Tex-728-I. 07/2006 02624-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES C Steel plates shall consist of structural units of corrugated galvanized steel. Single plates shall be furnished in standard sizes to permit structure length increments of 2 feet. Plates will have approximately a 2 inch lip beyond each end and crest, which results in the actual length of a given structure being approximately 4 inches longer than the nominal length, except when skewed or beveled. D Aluminum plate shall consist of structural units of corrugated aluminum alloy. For aluminum alloy structures, cut plates shall be furnished on structure ends to permit structure length increments of one foot. When required, aluminum alloy inverts,toe walls, footings and closure plates shall conform to the material requirements for the aluminum structural plate. Extruded aluminum transverse stiffeners shall conform to ASTM B 221,Alloy 6061-T6. E The material for metal headwalls shall comply with requirements shown on the Plans. 2.02 • STRUCTURE AND MATERIAL DESIGNATION A The types of structures will be indicated on the Plans by one of the following descriptions: 1. Structural Plate Pipe(Galvanized. Steel) 2. Structural Plate Pipe(Alum.) 3. Structural Plate Pipe Arch(Galvanized. Steel) 4. Structural Plate Pipe Arch (Alum.) 5. Structural Plate Arch (Galvanized. Steel) 6. Structural Plate Arch (Alum.) 7. Structural Plate Underpass (Galvanized. Steel) 8. Structural Plate Underpass (Alum.) 9. Structural Plate Box Culvert(Galvanized. Steel) 10. Structural Plate Box Culvert(Alum.) B When designated as one of the above types without the material being designated,the Contractor may furnish the structure in either galvanized steel or aluminum. 2.03 PLATE JOINTS A Form plates to provide bolted lap joints. Punch bolt holes so that plates having like dimensions, curvature, and the same number of bolts per foot of seam are interchangeable. B Curve each plate to proper radius so that cross-sectional dimensions of finished structure will be as indicated on Plans. C Stagger joints so that not more than three plates are jointed at any one point. Unless otherwise specified, place bolt holes along those edges of plates that will form longitudinal seams in the finished structure as follows: 1. Stagger in rows 2 inches apart,with one row in the valley and one in the crest of corrugations with not less than 4 bolts per foot for galvanized steel ( structures. 07/2006 02624-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES 2. Stagger in rows 13/a inches apart with 2 bolts in each valley and on each crest and not less than 16 bolts per 3 feet for aluminum alloy structures. D Provide for a bolt spacing of not more than 12 inches for bolt holes along edges of plates that will form circumferential seams in finished structure. E Keep minimum distance from center of hole to edge of plate to not less than 13/4 times diameter of bolt. F For the diameter of bolt holes in longitudinal seams do not exceed diameter of the bolt. Diameter of bolt holes in longitudinal seams shall not exceed diameter of bolt by more than 1/8 inch. G Cut plates for forming skewed or sloped ends to give the angle of skew or slope specified. H Repair burned edges to eliminate oxide and burrs. Maintain legible identification numerals on each plate to designate its proper position in the finished structure. 2.04 CONCRETE A Concrete shall conform to Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete.Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, use Class A concrete for footings and headwalls. Use Class B concrete for slope protection and for invert paving, when required. Place - reinforcement as shown on the Plans. 2.05 REINFORCING STEEL A Reinforcing steel shall conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTIVE COATINGS,LININGS AND PAVINGS A When required,protect structural plate structures with bituminous coating,bituminous lining or have invert paved with bituminous material. Remove moisture, dirt, oil, unbonded or incompatible paint, grease, alkalies, or other foreign matter from the surface to be coated before applying the coating material. B When specified or called in the Plans apply bituminous coatings to inside and outside of structures to a minimum thickness of 0.05 inch as provided in AASHTO M190, Type A. C Apply a protective coating to coupling bands for coated structures. Use coatings in accordance with AASHTO M190. Coupling bands may be single-dipped with the , coating thickness requirement waived. D Apply bituminous linings, if required, over bituminous coatings, to inside bottom portion of structure as provided in AASHTO M190, Type C. 07/2006 02624-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES E When linings and pavings are not required, an asphalt mastic coating may be substituted for bituminous coating on corrugated steel or aluminum structures on outside surface of the structure. The inside surface need not be coated. F When specified or called in the Plans, use an asphalt mastic coating conforming to requirements of AASHTO M243,except that asbestos fibers will not be used. Perform this process at the fabrication plant. Apply asphalt mastic material uniformly to the outside surface with a minimum thickness of 0.05 inch. Pinholes,blisters, cracks or lack of bond are cause for rejection. G When protective coatings are applied to structures,be sure that the thickness of metal is clearly identified on the inner surface of each section with paint or other approved means. Repair damaged protective coatings, linings and invert paving. Use bituminous material conforming to provisions of AASHTO M 190 or other approved materials to repair damaged asphalt mastic coatings. H Coat that portion of nuts and bolts projecting outside the pipe after installation. The portion of nuts and bolts projecting inside the structure need not be coated. When asphalt mastic is used for protective coating,the surface at joints of the structure need not be coated prior to assembly. Thoroughly seal joints after assembly with asphalt mastic on outside of the structure. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Excavate in accordance with Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Make trenches for pipes,pipe arches,underpasses or box culverts of sufficient width to provide free working space for erection and thorough tamping of backfill and bedding material under and around the structure. If the quality of the native soil is less than that of the proposed backfill material,extended the excavation to each side of the barrel,a minimum horizontal distance of half the span or two-thirds of the total rise,whichever is greater. B Foundations, Structural Plate Structures with Metal Inverts: Have these structures bedded in a foundation of sandy earth material carefully and accurately shaped to fit the lower part of the pipe for at least ten percent of its overall height. However, the length of bedding arch need not exceed the width of the bottom plate. Obtain uniform seating of corrugations on pipe bed by placing the sandy material at least 3 inches thick. For culverts, place bedding to full width of the invert. 1. Excavation in Rock: Where rock, in either ledge or boulder formation, is encountered, remove it below grade and replace with a compacted earth cushion having a thickness of not less than 1/2 inch per foot height of fill over top of the pipe, with the minimum allowable thickness of 12 inches and a maximum of 24 inches under the pipe. 2. Where the soil encountered at the established grade is a quicksand, muck or similar unstable material, remove and replace it in accordance with Section 02318— Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. When required, use special bedding as shown on Plans. 07/2006 02624-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES C Foundations, Structural Plate Structures with Reinforced Concrete Footings: Form footings for these structures and finish them to true lines and grades as established by Engineer. 1. Set anchors or slots for box culverts to true line and grade when placing concrete for each substructure unit. Conform to Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete for placing substructure units. 2. Place footings entirely in rock,shale or similarly hard material,or on firm soil or compacted soil cushion. When part of the founding area is rock,undercut it and replace it with a minimum 12 inch thick compacted soil cushion. When a thin layer of soil is partially covering rock within the bearing area and when practical to do so,soil may be removed and footings placed directly on rock in accordance with details shown on Plans. D Erection: Install structural plate structures in accordance with Plans and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Coat any steel in joints which is not protected by galvanizing with suitable bituminous coating. 2. Handle pipes and plates carefully to avoid damage to any protective coating. Repair damaged coatings. 3. For anchoring plates to headwalls or other concrete end treatment,use anchor bolts with 3/4 inch diameter by 6 inch minimum length on not more than 19-inch centers. 4. Do not place plates for arch structures until the concrete cement substructure has cured for a minimum of 3 days. 5. When all plates are in position, tighten nuts and bolts progressively and uniformly,beginning at one end of the structure. Tighten nuts a second time to a torque of not less than 150 ft-lbs nor more than 300 ft-lbs for steel bolts and not less than 100 ft-lbs nor more than 150 ft-lbs for aluminum bolts. If an impact wrench is used,check with a long-handled,structural or socket wrench or a torque wrench to ensure that they are properly tightened. Replace service bolts used in drawing the plates together with standard high strength bolts. E Shape Control: Furnish acceptable shape control devices for monitoring horizontal and vertical shape of structures. Maintain the shape within two percent of design measurements span or rise,whichever is greater or 5 inches,whichever is less,during erection and backfilling. F Backfilling: Perform backfilling and embankment construction around the pipe in accordance with Section 02318— Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, except as modified below. 1. Within vertical planes 2 feet beyond the horizontal limits of the structure and until a minimum of 2 feet of cover has been compacted over the structure,only hand operated, mechanical tamping equipment shall be permitted. 2. Unless otherwise shown,no heavy earth moving equipment shall be permitted to haul over the structure until a minimum of 2 feet of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed. Remove and replace plates or structures damaged by equipment or backfilling operation. 07/2006 02624-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES 3. During backfilling, to avoid unequal pressures and produce uniformly compacted backfill material of uniform density throughout the length of the structure and ensure proper backfill under the structure. 4. Prior to adding each new layer of loose backfill material, until a minimum 2 feet of cover is obtained,an inspection will be made of the inside periphery of the structure to determine any local or unequal deformation caused by improper construction methods. 5. Backfill the structure so that when backfill is complete the inside dimensions are within tolerances set forth in shape control. In the case of arches other than pipe arches when backfilling is completed before headwalls are placed,place the first material midway between ends of the arch,forming as narrow a ramp as possible until the top of the arch is reached. Construct the ramp evenly from both sides. Thoroughly the backfilling material as it is placed. After two ramps have been constructed to the top of the arch, deposit the remainder of backfill from the top of the arch both ways from the center,to the ends and as evenly as possible on both sides of the arch. If headwalls are built before the arch is backfilled,place fill material first adjacent to one headwall until the top of the arch has been reached, after which fill shall be dumped from the top of the arch toward the other headwall, with care being taken to deposit material evenly on both sides of the arch. 6. For multiple structures,perform same backfill process for all structures more or less simultaneously. Backfilling between barrels will usually require that the material be placed with a crane and bucket or other suitable equipment. Do not drop backfill material from a height or concentrated in such an amount prior to distribution over the top arc that damage to the flexible structure will result. Compact this backfill with hand operated tampers or other equipment acceptable to Engineer. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02624-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND JACKING PIPE OR BOX Section 02628 JACKING PIPE OR BOX 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Description-Furnish and install pipe or box by jacking. B Direct Jacking Direct jacking of concrete box is a method of installing a Precast Reinforced Concrete Box (RCB) under roadways, railways, runway or highways in lieu of the open cut method.The box jacking procedure uses a PIPE OR BOX that is suitable to be jacked through the soil; sizes range from an end area of approximately 32 square feet to 144 square feet(8' x 4' to 12' x 12').Maximum jacking loads are controlled by pumping bentonite or suitable lubricants around the outside of the box during the jacking operation. Typically,jacks are oversized so they can be operated at a lower pressure and maintain a reserve jacking capacity.It is common,although not mandatory,to use a 24-hour operation when pushing box,reducing the possibility that the box will freeze or"set"in the ground. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02415—Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. ASTM C 76,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 3. ASTM C 443, "Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets" 4. ASTM C 506,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" 5. ASTM C 877,"Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe,Manholes, and Precast Box Sections" 6. ASTM C 507, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" 7. ASTM C 655, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" 8. ASTM D 3350, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials" 07/2008 02629- 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND JACKING PIPE OR BOX 9. ASTM C 1433,"Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers" 10. ASTM B 633,"Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel" 11. ASTM A 760, "Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic- Coated for Sewers and Drains" 12. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for storm sewers is on a linear foot basis taken along the center line of the pipe from center line to center line of manholes or from end to end of culverts,measured and complete in place. Separate measurement will be made for each type and size of pipe installed. B Payment for storm sewer includes pipe,earthwork,connections to existing manholes and pipe,accessories,equipment and execution required or incidental to storm sewer work. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Tunnel specialist to be performing the work on the job must submit a letter of qualification to the Owner outlining: 1., A successful history of direct jacking box; 2. Have successfully completed direct jack installations of equal or greater size and length; 3. Direct jack installation of pipe or box has been completed within the last two years; 4. List of Project Names and Owners with contact information for projects qualifying the Tunnel specialist. C Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation instructions. D Submit product quality, material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A The condition for acceptance will be a storm sewer that is watertight both in pipe-to-pipe joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 07/2008 02629-2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND JACKING PIPE OR BOX B Handle pipe,fittings,and accessories carefully with approved handling devices. Do not drop or roll pipe off trucks or trailers. Materials cracked, gouged, chipped, dented, or otherwise damaged will not be approved for installation. C Store pipe and fittings on heavy timbers or platforms to avoid contact with the ground. D Unload pipe,fittings, and specials as close as practical to the location of installation to avoid unnecessary handling. E Keep interiors of pipe and fittings completely free of dirt and foreign matter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE MATERIAL A Reinforced Concrete Box Must be "Jacking Quality" designed to withstand estimated jacking loads; Boxes with an end area greater than 50 square feet should be no longer than six (6)foot in length. B Joint Cushions: Use 3/4" minimum thickness plywood cushions or other approved material;Use cushioning rings of single or multiple pieces. C Piping materials for storm sewers shall be of the sizes and types indicated on the Plans. D Materials for pipe and fittings, other than those specified or referenced, may be considered for use in storm sewers. E For consideration of other materials, submit complete manufacturer's data including materials, sizes, flow carrying capacity, installation procedures, and history of similar installations to Engineer for pre-bid evaluations, if allowed, or as a substitution. 2.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE A Circular reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 76, for Class III wall thickness. Joints shall be rubber gasketed conforming to ASTM C 443. B Reinforced concrete arch pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 506 for Class A-III: Joints shall conform to ASTM C 877. C Reinforced concrete elliptical pipe, either vertical or horizontal, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 507 for Class VE-III for vertical or Class HE-III for horizontal. Joints shall be rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C 877. D Reinforced concrete D-load pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 655. E When approved by the Engineer, high density polyethylene, corrugated drainage pipe meeting requirements of AASHTO M252 or M294 and ASTM D 3350,Hancor or equal. 2.03 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX SEWERS 07/2008 02629-3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND JACKING PIPE OR BOX A All box sewer sections shall conform to ASTM C1433, as indicated on the Plans. B All pipe and boxes shall be machine-made or cast by a process which will provide for uniform placement of concrete in the forms and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete. C Concrete shall conform to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. D Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit-mixed concrete is not acceptable. 2.04 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS A Corrugated metal pipe may be galvanized steel,aluminized steel,aluminum or precoated galvanized steel as indicated on Plans and conforming to the following: Galvanized Steel AASHTO M218 Aluminized Steel AASHTO M274 Aluminum AASHTO M197 Precoated Galvanized Steel AASHTO M246 1. Reference to gauge of metal is to U.S. Standard Gauge for uncoated sheets. Tables in AASHTO M218 and AASHTO M274 list thicknesses for coated sheets in inches. The tables in AASHTO M197 list thicknesses in inches for clad aluminum sheets. B Coupling bands and other hardware for galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall conform to requirements of AASHTO M36 for steel pipe and AASHTO M196 for aluminum pipe. 1. Coupling bands shall be not more than 3 nominal sheet thicknesses lighter than thickness of pipe to be connected and in no case lighter than 0.052 inch for steel or 0.048 inch for aluminum. 2. Coupling bands shall be made of same base metal and coating (metallic or otherwise) as pipe. 3. Minimum width of corrugated locking bands shall be as shown below for corrugations which correspond to end circumferential corrugations on pipes being joined: a. 101/2 inches wide for 2 Z/3 inch x 1/2-inch corrugations. b. 12 inches wide for 3 inch x 1 inch corrugations. 4. Helical pipe without circumferential end corrugations will be permitted only when it is necessary to join a new pipe to an existing pipe which was installed with no circumferential end corrugations. In this event pipe furnished with helical corrugations at ends shall be field jointed with either helically corrugated bands or with bands with projections (dimples). The minimum width of helical corrugated bands shall conform to the following: a. 12 inches wide for 1/2 inch-deep helical end corrugations. b. 14 inches wide for one inch-deep helical end corrugations. 07/2008 02629-4 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND JACKING PIPE OR BOX 5. Bands with projections shall have circumferential rows of projections with one projection for each corrugation. Width of bands with projections shall be not less than the following: a. 12 inches wide for pipe diameters up to and including 72 inches. Bands shall have two circumferential rows of projections. b. 16 'A inches wide for pipe diameters of 78 inches and greater. Bands shall have four circumferential rows of projections. 6. Bolts for coupling bands shall be 1/2 inch diameter. Bands 12 inches wide or less will have a minimum of 2 bolts per end at each connection, and bands greater than 12 inches wide shall have a minimum of 3 bolts at each connection. 7. Galvanized bolts may be hot dip galvanized in accordance with requirements of AASHTO M 232,mechanically galvanized to provide same requirements as AASHTO M 232, or electro-galvanized per ASTM B 633,Type RS. C Bituminous coated pipe or pipe arch shall be coated inside and out with a bituminous coating which shall meet these performance requirements and requirements of AASHTO M190. 1. Pipe shall be uniformly coated inside and out to a minimum thickness of 0.05 inch, measured on crests of corrugations. 2. Bituminous coating shall adhere to the metal so that it will not chip,crack,or peel during handling and placement;and shall protect pipe from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Where a paved invert is shown on Plans,pipe or pipe arch,in addition to fully- coated treatment described above,shall receive additional bituminous material, same as specified above, applied to the bottom quarter of circumference to form a smooth pavement. Maintain a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch above crests of corrugations. D Furnish all fittings and specials required for bends, end sections, branches, access manholes,and connections to other fittings. Design fittings and specials in accordance with Plans and ASTM A 760. Fittings and specials are subject to same internal and external loads as straight pipe. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 HYDRAULIC JACKING SYSTEM 1. Has main jacks mounted in jacking frame located in tunneling shaft; 2. Positions jacks at the"haunches" or four corners of the RCB; 3. Has jacking frame which successively pushes string of connected pipes following tunnel excavation towards receiving shaft; 4. Has sufficient jacking capacity to push tunneling shield and string of box through the ground; 5. Has capacity at least 25% percent greater than calculated maximum jacking load; 6. Develops uniform distribution of jacking on end of box by use of a thrust transfer device and plywood cushions or"Kidney Ring"; 07/2008 02629-5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND JACKING PIPE OR BOX 7. Use joint cushioning material, use 1/2 inch minimum thickness for pipe diameter 30 inches or less, use 3/4 inch minimum thickness for pipe diameter greater than 30 inches. Use N inch minimum thickness for all boxes. 8. Uses hydraulic jacks which are individually controlled; 9. Uses even pressure to all jacks during operation. B Box Guides 1. Should be sufficient to support the section of the pipe or box; 2. Should'direct the pipe or box on the proper line and grade. C Tunnel Shield 1. Provides adequate protection for cutters and loaders at the face of the tunnel; 2. Conforms to the shape and size of the pipe or box; 3. May be a half or full shield. D Ventilation 1. Provide adequate air flow for workers inside the tunnel excavation; 2. Provide equipment with the ability to maintain a reasonable air temperature inside the tunnel excavation. E Other 1. Use other equipment, as necessary to complete box jacking operations including,but not limited to,lighting,air compressor,and mud mixing system. 3.02 SHAFTS A Shaft 1. Shall be constructed in accordance with the OSHA 1926 standard;Pits should be large enough to accommodate the backstop, jacking equipment, muck removal equipment, and maintain a minimal walking room on either side. 2. Install pipe or box so there is no interference with the operation of street highway,railroad or other facility and no embankment or structure is weakened or damaged. 3. Immediately after installation of pipe or box, backfill shafts or trenches excavated to facilitate jacking,boring or tunneling. B Backstop 1. Should be constructed to withstand anticipated jacking loads;Constructed out of steel, concrete and/or other approved material. 3.03 JACKING A Alignment 1. Place the entire jacking assembly in line with the direction and grade of the pipe or box; 2. Jack the pipe or box from the downstream end, whenever possible; 3. The final position of the box must not vary from the line and grade shown on the plans by more than one(1)inch in ten (10)feet; 4. Variation must be regular and in one direction; 07/2008 02629:6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND JACKING PIPE OR BOX 5. The final flow must be in the direction shown on the plans. B Line and Grade Control 1. Use a construction laser to check line and grade after each time the pipe or box is pushed. C Excavation 1. Excavate the material at the face of the tunnel; 2. Excavation should conform to the shape and size of the pipe or box; 3. The excavation at the bottom of the box should maintain the desired grade of the tunnel; 4. If desired, over excavate to provide not more than two(2)inches of clearance for the upper portion of the box; 5. The distance the excavation extends beyond the end of the pipe or box or Tunnel shield must not exceed two (2) feet; 6. Decrease the distance of the excavation as necessary to maintain stability of the material being excavated; 7. Remove material through the pipe or box; 8. Force the box into the excavated area with the jacking equipment. D Face Control 1. Provide adequate face control as necessary for the existing soil conditions. E Box Lubrication 1. Provide and maintain box lubrication system adequate to reduce friction between the pipe or box and the surrounding soil; 2. Use high yield Wyoming bentonite; 3. Lubricate the pipe or box a minimum of twice per work shift; 4. Volume of mud pumped should be sufficient to fill over excavation. F Work Schedule 1. Maintain a standard work schedule as long as jacking loads allow; 2. As jacking loads increase, increase work schedule; 3. Use a 24 hour, 7 day week operation when necessary. G Grouting 1. Pressure grout any over excavation of more than one (1)inch. H Box Repair 1. Repair any box damaged in during jacking operations. 2. Remove and replace any box damaged beyond repair at the Contractor's expense 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 07/2008 02629-7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND JACKING PIPE OR BOX B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope to pre construction conditions or better or natural grade as indicated on the Plans. END OF SECTION 07/2008 02629-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND SAFETY END TREATMENTS Section 02629 SAFETY END TREATMENTS 1.0 GENERAL • 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Safety End Treatments for storm sewers. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01450 -Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02255 -Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318 -Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02630 - Storm Sewers 8. Section 02631 -Precast Inlets,Headwalls and Wingwalls 9. Section 02633 - Cast-in-Place Inlets,Headwall and Wingwalls C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 76, "Standard and Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe" 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TX-DOT) a. Item 467, Safety End Treatment. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Safety End Treatments of all types will be measured by each barrel of each structure end. B. Payment for Safety End Treatments includes materials, earthwork, connections, and accessories. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 5/2013 02629- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SAFETY END TREATMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance to Section 01350 - Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation instructions. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing shall be performed under the provisions in Section 01450 -Testing Laboratory Services. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Class A concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi. B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Corrugated Metal Pipe: Prefabricated metal end sections. 2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS A. Fabricate Precast Units in accordance with Section 02631 -Precast Inlets, Headwalls and Wingwalls. B. Furnish Precast Concrete Units as indicated on the plans. C. Provide adequate lifting devices based on size and weight of the unit. 2.03 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE A. Provide RCP mitered to the proposed slope. B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe shall conform to Section 02630- Storm Sewers. 2.04 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE A. Provide galvanized steel prefabricated metal end sections. 5/2013 02629-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SAFETY END TREATMENTS B. Corrugated Metal Pipe and Fittings shall conform to Section 02630- Storm gg Sewers. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT A. Store Precast Units on a level surface. B. Do not place any loads or ship Precast Units until the design strength is reached. 3.02 CAUSES FOR REJECTIONS A. Individual Units may be rejected due to fractures, cracks passing through the wall surfaces, surface defects or damages to galvanizing. Remove rejected Units from project and replace with acceptable Units at no additional cost to City. 3.03 EXCAVATION,BEDDING AND BACKFILL A. Conform to requirements in Section 02318 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Take special precautions in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement or damaged to the Units. C. Bed Units on foundations of firm and stable material accurately shaped to conform to the Units. D. Provide adequate means to lift and place the Units. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to new or existing facilities as needed, at no additional cost to City. END OF SECTION ( 5/2013 02629-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 02634 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for water mains,wastewater force mains,gravity sanitary sewers, and storm sewers. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02676—Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines 3. Section 02533—Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap 5. Section 02510—Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers C. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) a. ANSI A21.51,Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugal Cast, in Metal Molds b. ANSI A21.11,Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe c. ANSI A21.15,Flanged Cast and Ductile Iron d. ANSI A21.50,Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe e. ANSI A21.10, Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water f. ANSI B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings g. ANSI A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service h. ANSI A21.4, Cement-Mortar lining/Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C 111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings b. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water c. AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service d. AWWA C600 Installation for Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances 3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) a. SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5/2013 02634- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS a. ASTM G 62,"Standard Test Method for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings" b. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for ductile iron pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains, Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, Gravity Sanitary Sewers, and Storm Sewers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Plans. Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by the Engineer is at Contractor's risk. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all ductile iron pipe and fittings meet provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSI A21.51. B. Provide certifications that all pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI A21.11. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Ductile iron pipe barrels: ANSI A21.15,ANSI A21.50 or ANSI A21.51;bear mark of Underwriters'Laboratories approval. B. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths,not less than 18 feet long,except for special fittings and closure sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,use minimum Pressure Class 250 for waterlines or thickness Class 52 for waterlines in casing or augered hole. Provide minimum thickness Class 52 for sanitary sewers. Provide minimum Pressure Class 350 for flanged pipe. 5/2013 02634-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.02 JOINTS A. Joint types: ANSI A21.11 push-on;ANSI A21.11 mechanical joint;or ANSI A21.15 flanged end. Provide push-on joints unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or required by these specifications.For bolted joints,bolts shall conform to requirements ofAWWA C111. B. Where restrained joints for buried service are required by Plans, provide one of the following, or Approved Equal (restrained joints shall be polyethylene wrapped): 1. Super-Lock Joint by Clow Corporation. 2. Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring by American Cast Iron Pipe Company. 3. TR-Flex Joint by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 4. EBAA IRON MEGALUG Mechanical Joint Restraint. C. Threaded or grooved type joints which reduce pipe wall thickness below minimum required are not acceptable. D. Provide for restrained joints designed to meet test pressures required under Section 02676 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines or Section 02533— Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, as applicable. E. Where ductile iron water main is cathodically protected from corrosion,bond rubber gasketed joints as shown on Plans to provide electrical continuity along entire pipeline, except where insulating flanges are required by Plans. 2.03 GASKETS A. Furnish, when no contaminant is identified, plain rubber(SBR) gasket material; for flanged joints 1/8-inch thick gasket in accordance with ANSI A21.15. B. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas,especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed pipeline, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants: CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber,Nitrile Rubber,FKM Viton Type Gasket(ASTM 1418) Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacture 5/2013 02634-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND . DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.04 FITTINGS A. Use fittings of same size as pipe. Reducers are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting. Reducing bushings are also prohibited. Make reductions in piping size by reducing fittings. Line and coat fittings as specified for pipe they serve. B. Push-on Fittings will not be allowed above grade. C. Flanged Fittings: ANSI A21.10; ANSI B 16.1 cast or ductile iron. Flanges: ANSI B 16.1, Class 125;pressure rated at 250 psig. D. Mechanical Joint Fittings: ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110);pressure rated at 250 psi. E. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Mains:ANSI A21.53(AWWA C153);4-inch through 12-inch diameter; cement-mortar lining; conform to requirements of Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap. 2.05 COATINGS AND LININGS A. Water Main Interiors: ANSI A21.4, cement lined with seal coat. B. Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors: 1. Preparation: Commercial blast cleaning conforming to SSPC-SP6. 2. Liner thickness:Nominal 40 mils,minimum 35 mils, for pipe barrel interior; minimum 6- 10 mils at gasket groove and outside spigot end to 6-inches back from end. 3. Testing: ASTM G 62, Method B for voids and holidays; provide written certification. 4. Acceptable Lining Materials: a. Virgin polyethylene conforming to ASTM D 1248, with inert fillers and carbon black to resist ultraviolet degradation during storage heat bonded to interior surface of pipe and fittings;"Polyline"by American Cast Iron Pipe Company; or Approved Equal. b. Polyurethane: Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals. • c. Ceramic Epoxy: Protecto-401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. C. Sanitary Sewer Point Repair Pipe: For pipes which will be lined with high density polyethylene liner pipe or cured-in-place liner,provide cement-lined with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A21.4. For pipes which will not be provided with named liner, provide pipe as specified in this Section, 2.05B "Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors". 5/2013 02634-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS D. Exterior: Prime coat and outside asphaltic coating conforming to ANSI A21.10,ANSI A21.15, or ANSI A21.51 for pipe and fittings in open cut excavation and in casings. E. Polyethylene Wrap: For buried water lines and sanitary sewers, including point repairs, provide polyethylene wrap unless otherwise specified or shown. Provide Polyethylene Wrap for all buried ductile iron pipe,including polyurethane coated pipe. F. For flanged joints in buried service,provide petrolatum wrapping system,Denso, or Approved Equal, for the complete joint and all alloy steel fasteners. Alternatively, provide bolts made of Type 304 Stainless Steel. G. Pipe to be installed in potentially contaminated areas shall have coatings and linings recommended by the manufacturer as resistant to the contaminants. 2.06 MANUFACTURERS A. Pre-approved manufacturers of ductile iron are American Cast Iron Pipe Co.,McWane Cast Iron Pipe Co., and U. S. Pipe and Foundry Co. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conform to installation requirements of Section 02510—Water Mains,Section 02530 —Gravity Sanitary Sewers,and Section 02533—Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,except as modified in this Section. B. Install in accordance with AWWA C600 and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install all ductile iron pipe in polyethylene wrap, unless cathodic protection is provided. Do not use polyethylene wrap with a cathodic protection system. 3.02 GRADE A. Unless otherwise specified on Plans,install ductile iron pipe for water service to clear utility lines with following minimum cover: DIAMETER DEPTH OF COVER (INCHES) (FEET) 16 and 24 5 12 and smaller 4 END OF SECTION 5/2013 02634-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 02635 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A New steel pipe and fittings for water mains, pumping facilities, and casings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02636—Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe 3. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 36, "Standard Specification for Carbon structural Steel" b. ASTM A 570, "Standard Practice for Roof System Assemblies Employing Steel Deck, Performed Roof Insulation, and Bituminous Built-Up Roofing" c. ASTM A 53, "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel,Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless" d. ASTM A 135,"Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe" e. ASTM A 139, "Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (arc)- Welded Steel Pipe(NPS 4 and Over)" f. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM D 512, "Standard Test Method for Chloride Ion in Water" i. ASTM D 1293, "Standard Test Method for pH of Water" j. ASTM D 4541, "Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers" 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe—6 in. and Larger b. AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe ,c. AWWA Ml 1 Steel Water Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation, Fourth Edition d. AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 in. Through 144 in. e. AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines f. AWWA C210 Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Special Sections,Connections,and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines 02/2008 02635- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS g. AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe—4 in. and Larger—Shop Applied h. AWWA C602 Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place-4 in. and Larger i. AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Sanitation Foundation(NFS) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for steel pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains, pumping facilities and casings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit Shop Drawings for aerial crossings and water plant/facilities. Include design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade,laying dimensions,lining and coating systems,proposed welding procedures,fabrication,fitting,flange,and special details. C Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Plans. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Provide manufacturer's certifications that all pipe and fittings have been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C200, Section 3.4. B Provide manufacturer's affidavits that polyurethane coatings,linings and tape coatings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and that coatings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature 5 degrees above the dew point. C Provide manufacturer's affidavits that mortar coatings and linings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and that linings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature above 32 degrees F. D Prior to work being started, provide proof of certification of qualification for all welders employed for type of work,procedures and positions involved. Qualifications shall be in accordance with AWWA C206. E Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by the Engineer shall be at Contractor's risk. 02/2008 02635-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL PIPE A Provide steel pipe designed and manufactured in conformance with AWWA C200 and AWWA M11 except as modified herein. Steel shall be minimum of ASTM A 36, ASTM A 570 Grade 36, ASTM A 53 Grade B, ASTM A 135 Grade B, or ASTM A 139 Grade B. B Minimum Allowable Steel-Wall Thickness: In accordance with following table for HS-20 live loads and depths of bury of up to 16 feet and AWWA C200 new,uncoated welded steel. CASING PIPE (ENCASEMENT SLEEVES) CASING MINIMUM WALL APPROXIMATE WEIGHT PIPE SIZE PER O.D. THICKNESS LINEAR FOOT UNCOATED 8" 8.625" 0.219" 19.64 10" 10.75" 0.219" 24.60 12" 12.75" 0.219" 29.28 14" 14.00" 0.219" 32.00 16" 16.00" 0.219" 36.86 20" 20.00" 0.250" 52.73 24" 24.00" 0.250" 63.41 30" 30.00" 0.250" 79.43 C Provide pipe sections in lengths of no less than 20 feet except as required for special fittings or closure sections. D Fittings: Factory forged for sizes 4 inches through 24 inches; long radius bends; beveled ends for field butt welding; wall thickness: equal to or greater than pipe to which fittings is to be welded; unless otherwise shown on the Plans. E Joints: 1. Standard field joint for steel pipe; including casings: AWWA C206. a. Single-welded,lap joint. b. Double-welded, butt joint. 2. Provide mechanically coupled or flanged joints where required for valves and fittings, and as shown on Plans. Flanges: AWWA C207, Class D; same diameter and drilling as Class 125 cast iron flanges, ASA B16.1. Maintain electrically isolated flanged joints between steel and cast iron by using epoxy- 02/2008 02635-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS coated bolts, nuts, washers and insulating type gasket unless otherwise approved by Engineer. F Make curves and bends by use of beveled joints unless otherwise indicated on Plans. Contractor may submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for consideration by the Engineer. If other methods are deemed satisfactory,install at no additional cost to Owner. G Provide shop coated and shop lined steel pipe with minimum of one coat of shop applied primer approved for use in potable water transmission on all exposed steel surfaces. Primer for tape coated steel pipe to be used for field-applied coatings shall have no less than 5 percent solids. Provide primer compatible with coating system and in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. H Standard or Special Sections: Within 1/8 inch + of specified or theoretical lengths. Flanges: Square with pipe with bolt holes straddling both horizontal and vertical axis. Provide 1/2-inch gap between pipe ends where pipe is to be coupled with sleeve couplings. 2.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A General: Supplied with either tape coatings as specified herein. 1. Tape Coating: AWWA C214;80-mil,shop-applied,Polyken YG-III,Tek-Rap Yard-Rap,or equal,except as modified herein. Components: primer,one 20- mil layer of inner-layer tape for corrosion protection and two 30-mil layers of outer-layer tape for mechanical protection. Primer: compatible with tape coating, supplied by coating-system manufacturer. Provide pipe with shop coatings cut back from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. Taper successive tape layers by 1-inch staggers to facilitate field wrapping of joints. Cut back approximately 4 to 4-1/2 inches to facilitate welding. Inner and outer tape widths: DIAMETER TAPE WIDTH 4"—6" 6" 8"— 12" 9" 14"— 16" 12" 18"—24" 18" 2.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE IN TUNNEL,CASING OR AUGER HOLES A Provide exterior coating system of pipe in augered holes or casing, without annular grout, as specified in Section 02636—Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe. No additional exterior coating is required for mortar coated pipe. 02/2008 02635-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.04 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND (OR EXPOSED) A Provide a 3-coat epoxy/polyurethane coating system as designated below. Surface Preparation SSPC SP10 Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile Prime Coat ACRO 4422 Inhibitive Epoxy Primer, or approved equal 2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT Intermediate Coat ACRO 4460 Chemical Resistant Epoxy, or approved equal 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Finish Coat ACRO 4428 Polyurethane, or approved equal 1.5 to 2.0 mils DFT B Total minimum allowable dry film thickness for system: 10 mils. C All materials shall be from same manufacturer. 2.05 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE A General: Supply steel pipe with either epoxy lining or shop applied cement mortar lining,capable of conveying water at temperatures not greater than 140°F.All linings shall conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NFS) Standard 61 and certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. Unless otherwise noted, coat all exposed(wetted) steel parts of flanges,blind flanges, bolts, access manhole covers, etc., with epoxy lining, as specified herein. B Epoxy Lining: AWWA C210 - White, or approved equal for shop and field joint applied, except as modified herein. 1. Surface Preparation: S SPC-SP-10(64);Near White Blast Clean;2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile. 2. Prime Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-Buff;4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 3. Intermediate Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-Buff: 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 4. Finish Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-White 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 5. Minimum allowable dry film system thickness: 12.0 mils. 6. Maximum allowable dry film system thickness: 18.0 mils. 7. Minimum field adhesion: 700 psi. 8. Dry film thicknesses for approved alternate products in accordance with the product manufacturer's recommendations. 9. The lining system may consist of three or more coats of the same approved alternate epoxy lining without the use of a separate primer. 02/2008 02635-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 10. Provide materials from the same manufacturer. C Shop Applied Cement Mortar Lining: AWWA C205; shop-applied, cement mortar linings,except as specified herein 3/8 inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 24 inches and smaller.Pipe with cut back lining from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 2.06 MORTAR FOR EXTERIOR JOINTS A Cement Mortar: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean sand; mix with water to a consistency of thick cream. B Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type II. C Sand: 1. Inside joints: AWWA C602; fine graded natural sand. 2. Outside joints: ASTM C 33; natural sand with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. D Water: total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/1;ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/1 for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02510—Water Mains except as modified herein. 3.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A Tape Coating System: 1. Inspect pipe,prior to shipment,for holidays and damage to coating. Perform electrical holiday test of minimum of 6,000 volts with a 60 cycle current audio detector. If test indicates no holidays and outer wrap(s) is torn, remove damaged layers of outer wrap by carefully cutting with sharp razor-type utility knife. Wash with Xylol area to be patched and at least 4 inches of undamaged tape where hand-applied tape wrap will overlap. AWWA C209 cold-applied tape; compatible with tape-wrapping system applied for each layer of outer- wrap tape that has been removed. If damaged area shows holiday when tested, remove outer layers and expose inner wrap. Prime exposed area and overlaps with light coat of primer. Firmly press into place patch of inner wrap of sufficient size to extend 4 inches from holidays in all directions. Holiday test patch to verify that it is installed satisfactorily. Retrim outer layer of tape to expose first wrap of outer-wrap tape sufficiently to allow minimum lap of 2 inches in all directions. Wash exposed outer wrap tape with Xylol and prime. Apply two layers of AWWA C209 outer wrap with 35 mils minimum thickness. 02/2008 02635-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2. Regardless of results of electrical holiday test,bubbles in tape coating system are not allowed. Cut out bubbles and patch as detailed above. 3. Field repairs and applications of coatings: AWWA C209 around joint cutbacks except as modified herein. Field-welded joints: clean shop-primed ends of weld splatter, damaged primer and rust to achieve required surface preparation prior to field repair of linings and coatings. a. Immediately prior to placing joint in trench, remove shop-applied primer by abrasive blasting,solvent or other method as approved by the Engineer. Avoid damage to adjacent existing coatings. Clean surfaces to achieve surface preparation at least equivalent to SSPC SP6 in accordance with AWWA C209. Solvent: environmentally safe and compatible with coating-system primer. b. Apply primer immediately prior to application of first layer of tape to achieve maximum bond. Apply tape while primer is still"tacky"with 3-inch minimum overlap over shop-applied coating. 4. Do not expose tape coatings to harmful ultraviolet light for more than 90 days. Discard (remove) and replace outer layer of tape coating when exposure exceeds 90 days. In case of factory applied coatings,remove joint from site for removal and reapplication of outer layer of tape coatings. B At Owner's option,coating system and application may be tested and inspected at plant site in accordance with AWWA C214. C Cement Mortar Coating: AWWA C205; 1-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 3.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND, IN VAULTS, TUNNELS OR CASINGS, AND INTERNAL LINING FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS A Cement Mortar Lining: AWWA C205; 1/2-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. B Safety: Paints,coatings,and linings specified herein are hazardous materials. Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment,approved by appropriate regulatory agency, is mandatory for all personnel involved in painting, coating, and lining operations. C Workmanship: 1. Application: By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings. 2. Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1. D Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare all surfaces for painting with abrasive blasting. 2. Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other contaminants do not fall on wet,newly-painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations. 02/2008 02635-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. Prior to blasting,clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease, oil and dirt by steaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP1. 4. Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove all surface defects such as gouges,pits, welding and torch-cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4-inch minimum radius. 5. Abrasive Material: a. Blast only as much steel as can be coated same day of blasting. b. Use sharp, angular, properly-graded abrasive capable of producing depth of profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to jobsite in moisture-proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives are not acceptable. c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press-O-Film Tape, or approved equal. Furnish tapes to Owner for filing and future reference. d. Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming commences,or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew point. 6. Remove all dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing or blowing with clean, dry air. E Coating and Lining Application: 1. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply coatings or linings when metal temperature is less than 50 degrees F;when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point; when expected weather conditions are such that ambient temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after application of coating;or when relative humidity is above 85 percent. Measure relative humidity and dew point by use of sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables. Provide dehumidifiers for all field-applied coatings and linings to maintain proper humidity levels. 2. Application Procedures: a. Apply coatings and linings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of this Section. Provide a finish free of runs, sags, curtains,pinholes, orange peel,fish eyes, excessive overspray or de-laminations. b. Thin materials only with manufacturer's recommended thinners. Thin only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations, proper atomization and flow-out. Mix material components using mechanical mixers. c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end of day. 3. Apply primer immediately after surface has been cleaned. Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied. Apply succeeding coats before contamination of under surface occurs. 4. Allow each coat of paint either to dry or cure amount of time recommended by coating or lining manufacturer before successive coats of paint are applied. Apply all successive coats of paint within recoat threshold time as 02/2008 02635-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS recommended by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data sheets or through written communications. 3.04 INSPECTION A Procure services of an independent testing laboratory or inspection service,approved by the Engineer, to perform tests on all portions of coating and lining applications. Laboratory shall supply services of NACE Certified Coatings Inspectors having Level III Certification for all coating and linings inspection work. Include cost of such testing in contract unit price bid for water main. Furnish copies of all test reports to the Engineer for review. If defective coatings or lining are revealed,cost of repair and testing of repair will be paid for by Contractor. The Engineer shall have full and final decision as to suitability of all coatings and linings tested. B For all field applied coatings and linings,including joints,notify Owner sufficiently in advance of work so that Owner can perform examination of and acceptance of surface preparation and application of each coat prior to application of next coat. Furnish appropriate test data to Owner verifying compliance with requirements of this Section of each coat prior to proceeding with next coat. Recoat or repair runs, overspray, roughness and/or abrasives in coating,or other indications of improper application in accordance with coating or lining manufacturer's and the Engineer's instructions. C Repairs, surface preparation and painting will be subject to inspection by Owner. Guidelines published by Steel Structures Painting Council will be used as basis for acceptance or rejection of cleaning, painting or coating application. SSPC VIS 1, Pictoral Surface, along with single-probe magnetic pull-off type dry film thickness gages,electrical holiday detectors,and standard wet film thickness gages will be used to determine acceptability of paint applications. D Check film thickness with nondestructive magnetic pull-off gage such as Mikrotest Model DFG-100 or electronic thickness gage. National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates will be used to verify accuracy of thickness gage. Determine maximum and minimum thickness in accordance with SSPC PA2 for frequency and method. Evaluate each length of pipe under SSPC PA2. Consider each field joint area separate and discrete for purpose of DFT measurements. Perform five spot DFT measurements on each field joint area (15 individual readings). Check thickness of each individual coat as well as thickness of overall system with respect to compliance with this Section. Failure to meet either overall system thickness requirements or requirements of component coats shall be cause for rejection and recoat or repair of entire joint or length of pipe. E Holiday Test: 1. Begin inspection after coating has sufficiently cured,usually one to five days. (Consult coating manufacturer for specific curing schedule.) 2. Use high-voltage d-c holiday detector such as D.E. Stearns Company Model 14/20 or Tinker & Rasor Model AP/W. Use 1600 volts, plus or minus 100 volts. Use brass brush type electrode. 02/2008 02635-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. Ground high-voltage d-c holiday detector to metal being inspected. Earth-type ground tape is not acceptable. Mark detected defects with white chalk,repair and reinspect. 4. Adhesion Tests: ASTM D 4541; pull-off testing using an Elcometer Model 106 Fixed Alignment Adhesion Tester. Adhesion testing may be directed by the Engineer on any length of pipe or joint which exceeds maximum coating thickness limitations specified in this Section. 3.05 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION A Owner reserves right to inspect or acquire service of independent third-party inspector who is fully knowledgeable of, and qualified to inspect, surface preparation and application of high-performance coatings to inspect any and all phases of all coatings and linings work,whether field or shop applied. Contractor responsible for application and performance of coating and lining whether or not Owner provides such inspection. END OF SECTION 02/2008 02635- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE Section 02636 POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Two-component polyurethane coating system for use as an internal or external coating for steel or ductile iron pipe. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02634-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 3. Section 02635—Steel Pipe and Fittings C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C210, Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 16, "Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials,and Applications" b. ASTM D 1737, "Standard Guide for Testing Industrial Water- Reducible Coatings" 3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) a. SSPC-PA 2, Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges b. SSPC-PA 3, A Guide to Safety in Paint Application c. SSPC-PS Guide 17.00,Guide for Selecting Urethane Painting Systems d. SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning e. SSPC-SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section.Include cost of polyurethane coatings in Bid Items for steel pipe or ductile iron pipe. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit coating manufacturer's catalog sheets and technical information for approval, prior to delivery of pipe. 07/2006 02636- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE C Obtain from coating manufacturer and submit a coating "affidavit of compliance" to requirements of this Section stating that coatings were applied in factory and in accordance with manufacturer's minimum requirements. 1.04 SAFETY A Secure, from manufacturer, Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for polyurethane coatings and repair materials listed in this Section. B Safety requirements stated in this and related Sections apply in addition to applicable federal, state and local rules and regulations. Comply with instructions of coating manufacturer and requirements of insurance underwriters. C , Follow handling and application practices of SSPC-PA Guide 3; SSPC-PS Guide 17.00; Coating Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A Use standard containers to prevent gelling,thickening deleteriously or forming of gas in closed containers within period of one year from date of manufacture. B Label each container of separately packaged component clearly and durably to indicate date of manufacture, manufacturer's batch number, quantity, color, component identification and designated name or formula specification, number of coatings together with special instructions. Do not use coating components older than one year. C Deliver coating materials to pipe manufacturer in sealed containers showing designated name, batch number, color, date of manufacture and name of coating manufacturer. D Store materials on site in enclosures which are out of direct sunlight, and in warm, ventilated, and dry area. E Prevent puncture, inappropriate opening, or other action which may lead to product contamination. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 COATING MATERIAL A Coating Standard: ASTM D 16. B Coating System: Use Type V system which is a 2-package polyisocyanate, polyol- cured urethane coating, mixed in 1:1 ratio at time of application. The components shall be balanced viscosities in their liquid state and not require agitation during use. C Exterior Coating Material: CORROPIPE II-TX and Joint Coating Material CORROPIPE II-PW, manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries,Inc., 5673 Old Dixie Road, Forest Park, Georgia 30050, or approved equal. 07/2006 02636-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE D Internal Coating Material: Joint Coating Material CORROPIPE II-PW,manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc., 5673 Old Dixie Road, Forest Park, Georgia 30050, or approved equal. E Cured Coating Properties: 1. Conversion to Solids by Volume: 97 percent plus or minus 3 percent. 2. Temperature Resistance: Minus 40 degrees F and plus 130 degrees F. 3. Minimum Adhesion: 500 psi,when applied without primer to ductile iron pipe which has been blasted to comply with SSPC-SP 10. 4. Cure Time: For handling in 1 minute at 120 degrees F,and full cure within 7 days at 70 degrees F. 5. Maximum Specific Gravities: Polyisocyanate resin, 1.20. Polyol resin, 1.15. 6. Minimum Impact Resistance: 80 inch-pounds using 1-inch diameter steel ball where coating is applied at 30 mils to ductile iron pipe surface which has been blasted to SSPC No. 10 finish. 7. Minimum Tensile Strength: 2000 psi. 8. Hardness: 55 plus or minus 5 Shore D at 70 degrees F. 9. Flexibility Resistance: ASTM D 1737 using 1-inch mandrel. Allow coating to cure for 7 days. Perform testing on test coupons,held for 15 minutes at temperature extremes specified in this Paragraph. 2.02 REPAIR AND TOUCHUP MATERIAL A CORROPIPE II PW (two-component, brush applied, or approved equal). Mix in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A Remove deposits of oil,grease or other organic contaminates before blast cleaning by using solvent wash as specified in SSPC-PA Guide 3. Clean and dry surfaces making them completely dry, free of moisture, dust, grit, oil, grease or any other deleterious substances prior to application of coating. B Exterior and Interior Surfaces: SSPC-SP10, near-white metal blast cleaning. The blasting shall be done with clean, hard, sharp cutting abrasives with no steel or cast iron shot in the mix. C Ductile Iron Pipe: Prior to the start of production blasting, prepare specimens for a white metal blast and a near-white metal blast using the equipment and abrasives proposed for the work. During preparation of the specimens,the blasting intensity and abrasive shall be changed as necessary to provide the degree of cleaning required by SSPC-SP10,except that the color of the blasted substrate is not expected to match the color of blasted steel. After examination and concurrence by the Engineer, the production blasting may begin. Monitor and control the production blasting so that production pipe surfaces match the surface of the approved blasting specimens. 07/2006 02636-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3.02 THICKNESS - A External Coatings: Minimum DFT of 25 mils (0.025 inch). B Internal Coatings: Minimum DFT of 35 mils. C Thickness Determinations: Use Type 1 magnetic thickness gauge as described in SSP- PA2 specification. Individual readings below 90 percent of specified minimum are not acceptable. Average individual spot readings(consisting of three point measurements within 3 inches of each other) less than 95 percent of minimum are not acceptable. Average of all spot readings less than minimum thickness specified is not acceptable. 3.03 FACTORY APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE COATING A Equipment: Two-component, 1:1 mix ratio, heated airless spray unit. B Temperature: Minimum 5 degrees F above dew point temperature. The temperature of the surface shall not be less than 60 degrees F during application. C Humidity: Heating of pipe surfaces may be required to meet the requirements of this Section, 2.01E, "Cured Coating Properties",if relative humidity exceeds 80 percent. D Do not thin or mix resins; use as received. Store resins at a temperature above 55 degrees F at all times. E Application: Conform to coating manufacturer's recommendations. Apply directly to substrate to achieve specified thickness. Multiple-pass,one-coat application process is permitted provided maximum allowable recoat time specified by coating manufacturer is not exceeded. ' F Recoat only when coating has cured less than maximum time specified by coating manufacturer. When coating has cured for more than recoat time, brush-blast or thoroughly sand coating surface. Blow-off cleaning using clean, dry,.high pressure compressed air. G Cure at ambient temperature above 0 degrees F. Do not handle pipe until coating has been allowed to cure as follows: AMBIENT MINIMUM FULL TEMPERATURE CURE TIME Over 70 degrees F 7 days 50 to 70 degrees F 9 days 0 to 50 degrees F 12 days 07/2006 02636-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3.04 JOINTS A Apply coating to unlined pipe surfaces including inside of bell socket and outside of spigot. B Coating thickness on sealing areas of spigot end of pipe exterior: Minimum 8 mils (0.008 inch),maximum of 10 mils(0.010 inch). Maximum 10 mils may be exceeded in spigot end provided maximum spigot diameter as specified by pipe manufacturer is not exceeded. 3.05 INSPECTION A Engineer may inspect coatings at coating applicator's facilities. B Secure approval of surface preparation by coating manufacturer's representative prior to coating application. C Holiday Inspection: Conform to AWWA C 210, Section 5.3.3.1. Follow coating manufacturer's recommendation. Conduct inspection any time after coating has reached initial cure. Repair in accordance with this Section, 3.07 "Repair and Field Touchup". 3.06 PIPE INSTALLATION A When required by the Engineer,provide services of manufacturer's representative for period of not less than 2 weeks at beginning of actual pipe laying operations to advise Contractor regarding installation including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting,coatings repairs,and general construction methods as to how they may affect pipe coatings. B Use nylon straps,padded lifts and padded storage skids. Field cuts should be kept to minimum. Repair damage to coating due to handling or construction practices. Refer to Section 02634-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings and Section 02635—Steel Pipe and Fittings for additional requirements. C Just before each section of pipe is to be placed into the trench, conduct a visual and holiday inspection. Defects in the coating system shall be repaired before the pipe is installed. 3.07 REPAIR AND FIELD TOUCHUP A Apply repair and touchup materials in conformance with factory application of polyurethane coating requirements specified in this Section, excluding equipment requirements. B Repair Procedure-Holidays: 1. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other deleterious materials 2. Roughen area to be patched by sanding with rough grade sandpaper(40 grit). 07/2006 02636-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3. Apply one coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. C Repair Procedure-Field Cuts or Large Damage: 1. Remove burrs from field cut ends or handling damage and smooth out edge of polyurethane coating. 2. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other deleterious materials 3. Roughen area to be patched with rough grade sandpaper (40-grit). Feather edges and include overlap of 1 inch to 2 inches of roughened polyurethane in area to be patched. 4. Apply thick coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. Feather edges of repair material into prepared surface. Cover at least 1 inch of roughened area surrounding damage, or adjacent to field cut. D Repair Procedure-Thermite Brazed Connection Bonds: 1. Remove polyurethane coating with power wire brush from area on metal surface which is to receive thermite brazed connection. 2. Grind metal surface to shiny metal with power grinder and coarse grit grinding wheel. 3. Apply thermite-brazed connection using equipment, charge and procedure recommended by manufacturer of thermite equipment. 4. After welded surface has cooled to temperature below 130 degrees F, apply protective coating repair material to weld,exposed pipe surface and damaged areas of polyurethane coating. 5. Do not cover or backfill freshly repaired areas of coating at thermite-brazed connection until repair material has completely cured. Allow material to cure in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02636-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND BYPASS PUMPING Section 02790 BYPASS PUMPING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Use of bypass pumping/ diversion pumping to prevent surcharging and maintain uninterrupted flow through sewage collection system while allowing Contractor to provide reliable sewer service to the sanitary sewer users at all times and to isolate sewer line manholes, lift stations, and/or sewer line segments designated for cleaning, rehabilitation, and television inspection operations. Includes installation and operation of bulkheads, plugs, hoses, piping and pumps to maintain sewage flow and prevent backup and overflow. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement and Payment shall be unit price paid per month and shall include the pumping systems, all pipe, hoses, standby pumps, connections, labor, and any other appurtenances or supervision necessary to operate the system 24 hours a day during the duration of the proposed improvements. B. Refer to Section 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit a bypass pumping plan to the Engineer for review and concurrence prior to commencing rehabilitation operations in any given area. B. Refer to Section 01350 Submittals. 2.0 MATERIALS 2.1 PUMPS A. Use electrical powered pumps or diesel-driven pumps with Level III sound attenuation (max 70 d(B)A @ 7 meters) having a minimum pumping capacity as required (minimum pumping capacity = the firm pumping capacity of the lift station, where firm capacity= pumping capacity with the largest lift pump out of service). 2.2 PIPING,JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES A. All piping,joints and accessories shall be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure or a minimum of 50 psi whichever is greater and be leak free. B. Connections to piping shall utilize Xylem Plug Valve or approved equivalent. 01/19/21 02790 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND BYPASS PUMPING 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PROCEDURES AND METHODS A. Prior to beginning rehabilitation operations demonstrate pumping system is in good working order. B. Locate pumping suction and discharge lines so as not to cause undue interference with the use of streets,private driveways entrances or residences. C. All piping,joints and accessories shall be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure or a minimum of 50 psi whichever is greater. D. Plug off and pump down sewer manhole or line segment in designated area. Maintain sanitary sewer system so that surcharging does not occur. E. Complete lift station rehabilitation operations as quickly as possible. F. An experienced operator shall be on site at all times(24 hours per day)to monitor the operation,adjust pump speed,valves,etc.The monitoring time may be reduced to normal working hours if the bypass pumping system is equipped with a working auto-dialer system that shall automatically notify the Contractor of high liquid levels and system malfunction. G. The Contractor shall be able to provide an experienced operator to the site with in one (1) hours' drive at all times in which the bypass pumping system is in operation. H. Furnish all labor,materials, supervision and equipment necessary for maintaining the pumping system in continuous proper working order for the duration of rehabilitation and improvement operations. Obtain approval of discharge location for diversion pumping system prior to commencing work.Under no condition will raw sewage be allowed to discharge in open ditches,streets or storm sewer systems nor in any way that would create unsanitary conditions or interfere unduly with the use of streets,private driveways entrances or residences. Whenever flows in a sewer line are blocked,plugged or bypassed, sufficient precautions must be taken to protect the sewer lines from damage. Ensure that sewer line cleaning, rehabilitation and television inspection and/or bypass operations do not cause flooding or damage to public or private property being served by the sewer lines involved in the repair.The Contractor is responsible for having additional standby pumps in the event of failure of any pumps. 01/19/21 02790 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND BYPASS PUMPING I. In the event sewage accidentally drains into the drainage system or street, the Contractor shall immediately stop the overflow, notify the Engineer and cleanup and disinfect the spillage to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1. In the event the sewage is spilled onto public or private property, the Contractor shall wash down, clean up and disinfect the spillage to the private owner's/Engineer's satisfaction. 2. Overflow/spillage shall be reported to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) by the Contractor within 24 hours. J. When diversion pumping operations are complete,piping shall be drained into the sanitary sewer prior to disassembly. END OF SECTION 01/19/21 02790 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WOOD FENCES AND GATES Section 02820 WOOD FENCES AND GATES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Fence framework, material components, and accessories. B Excavation for post bases, concrete foundation for posts, and installation of gates. 1. Manual gates and related hardware. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for fencing shall be on a linear foot basis for type and height noted, measured and complete in place. B Measurement for gates shall be per each, complete in place. C Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions,hardware anchorage, and specific description of material components. C Product Data: Provide data on material components including posts, rails, bracing, accessories,fittings, and hardware. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Fence height shall be as indicated on Plans or as noted to match height of existing. B Line post spacing shall not exceed 10 feet, or as shown on Plans. 07/2006 02820- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WOOD FENCES AND GATES C Provide bracing as appropriate for structural integrity. D Concrete posts in the ground at a depth of, at least, '/z the height of the fence. E The diameter of the post hole shall be,at least, 1 Y2 times that of the post,or as shown on Plans. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A Company specializing in installation of the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 2.0 PRODUCTS A When the Work entails replacement of fence structures, the products shall match or exceed the quality of existing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install fence in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer and these Technical Specifications. B Use a Class B concrete base or better to set posts into the ground. Allow concrete to cure for at least 7 days before attaching remainder of fence. C Where type of material applies,use standard fence stretching equipment to stretch the fencing before tying it to the rails and posts. Repeat the stretching and tying operations about every 100 feet. Use bottom tension wire where specified on Plans. D Erect gates so they swing or slide in the appropriate direction. Provide gate stops as required. Secure hardware,adjust,and leave in perfect working order. Adjust hinges and diagonal bracing so that gates will hang level. Adjust rollers and guides of sliding gates so that gates are level. E Accommodate contour of ground as indicated on Plans. F Where new fence joins an existing fence, set a corner post and brace post at the junction, or tie in as directed on Plans. G Nuts and bolts shall be in conformance with ASTM-A307 and shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. 07/2006 02820-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WOOD FENCES AND GATES H Other hardware indicated on Plans shall be in accordance with ASTM Standards. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02820-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL Section 02910 TOPSOIL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing and placing topsoil for finish grading and for seeding, sodding, and planting. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02200—Site Preparation 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for topsoil under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which topsoil is a component. B If topsoil is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. • 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02910- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural sandy loam surface soil obtained from excavation or borrow operations having the following characteristics: 1. pH value of between 5.5 and 6.5. 2. Liquid limit: topsoil not exceed 50 3. Plasticity index: 10 or less. 4. Gradation: maximum of 40 percent with a passing the#280 sieve. B Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil,clay lumps,weeds,non-soil materials and other litter or contamination. Topsoil shall not contain roots,stumps,and stones larger than 2 inches. C Obtain topsoil from the top material from naturally well drained areas where topsoil occurs at a minimum depth of 4 inches and has similar characteristics to that found at the placement site. Do not obtain topsoil from areas infected with a growth of, or reproductive parts of nut grass or other noxious weeds. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify that excavation and embankment operations have been completed to correct lines and grades. 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND SOTCKPILING A Conform to topsoil stripping and stockpiling requirements of Section 02200 — Site Preparation. 3.03 PLACEMENT A Contractor shall conduct erosion control practices described in Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation during topsoil placement operations. B For areas to be seeded or sodded, scarify or plow existing surface material to a minimum depth of 4 inches,or as indicated on the Plans. Remove any vegetation and foreign inorganic material. Place 4 inches of topsoil on the loosened material and roll lightly with an appropriate lawn roller to consolidate the topsoil. C Increase depth of topsoil to 6 inches when placed over cement stabilized sand used as bedding and backfill material. D For areas to receive bushes or trees,excavate existing material and place topsoil to the depth and dimensions shown on the Plans. 07/2006 02910-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL E Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain topsoil until a vegetative cover is established. B Repair areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02910-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING Section 02921 HYDROMULCH SEEDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Seeding, fertilizing, mulching, and maintaining areas of commercial, industrial, or undeveloped land disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMEN AND PAYMENT A Measurement for hydromulch seeding is on a per acre basis,measured and complete in place. B Payment for hydromulch seeding shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and preparation necessary for application and maintenance. - C No payment shall be made for hydromulch seeding used in restoration of areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit certification from supplier that each type of seed conforms to these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Certification shall accompany seed delivery. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02921 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Seed: Conform to U.S.Department of Agriculture rules and regulations of the Federal Seed Act and the Texas Seed Law. Seed shall be certified 90 percent pure and furnish 80 percent germination and meet the following requirements: 1. Rye: Fresh, clean, Italian rye grass seed (lollium multi-florum), mixed in labeled Proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. Deliver in original unopened containers. 2. Bermuda: Extra-fancy, treated, lawn type common bermuda (Cynodon dactylon). Deliver in original,unopened container showing weight,analysis, name of vender, and germination test results. 3. Wet,moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. D Fertilizer:Dry and free flowing,inorganic,water soluble commercial fertilizer,which is uniform in composition. Deliver in unopened containers which bear the manufacturers guaranteed analysis. Caked,damaged,or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. Fertilizer shall contain minimum percentages of the following elements: Nitrogen: 10 Percent Phosphoric Acid: 20 Percent Potash: 10 Percent E Mulch:Virgin wood cellulose fibers from whole wood chips having a minimum of 20 percent fibers 0.42 inches(10.7 mm)in length and 0.01 inches(0.27 mm)in diameter. Mulch shall be dyed green for coverage verification purposes. F Soil Stabilizer: "Terra Tack" 1 or approved equal. G Weed control agent: Pre-emergent herbicide for grass areas, "Benefin" or approved equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start or perform work under conditions that are not satisfactory to perform tasks due to inclement or impending inclement weather. B After the areas to receive hydromulch seeding have been brought to grade,rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps, and other debris. 07/2006 02921 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact a layer of topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 —Topsoil. F Surface of topsoil shall be smooth and free of weeds,rocks,and other foreign material immediately before applying hydromulch seeding. 3.02 APPLICATION A Seed: Apply uniformly at the following rates for type of seed and planting date: APPLICATION PLANTING TYPE RATE DATE POUNDS/A Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Jan 1 to Mar 31 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Apr 1 to Sep 30 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Oct 1 to Dec 31 Annual Rye Grass(Gulf) 30 B Fertilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 500 pounds per acre. C Mulch: Apply uniformlyat a rate of 50poundsper 1000 square feet. PPY q D Soil stabilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 40 pounds per acre. E Weed control agent: Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate prior to Hydromulching. F Suspend all operations under conditions of drought,excessive moisture,high winds,or extreme or prolonged cold. Obtain the Engineer's approval before resuming operations. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintain grassed areas by watering,fertilizing,weeding,and trimming as required to establish and sustain 70% acceptable vegetative cover. B For areas seeded in the fall, continue maintenance the following spring until an acceptable lawn is established. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 07/2006 02921 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain grassed areas a minimum of 90 days, or as required to establish an acceptable lawn. B Once a lawn is established,protect and maintain it until completion of the Work. C Replace seeded areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02921 -4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING Section 02922 SODDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Sodding areas of residential lawns disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Definitions: 1. Lawn- ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed. 2. Sod-blocks, squares, strips of turf grass, and adhering soil used for vegetative planting. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for utility or paving. B If sodding is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C No payment shall be made for sodding of restoration areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material sources and product quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the,requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 07/2006 02922- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Fertilizer: Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. D Weed and Insect Treatment: Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit treatment method to the Engineer for approval. All insect and disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas E Water: Potable, available on-site through Contractor's water trucks. Do not use private resident's water. 2.02 SOD A Species: Bermuda (Cynodon Dactylon), Buffalo (Buchloe Dactyloides), or St. Augustine to match existing or as directed. B Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed; not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from obnoxious grasses,roots, stones and foreign materials. C Size: 12 inch wide strips,uniform in thickness(2 inch minimum with clean-cut edges. D Sod is to be supplied and maintained in a healthy condition as evidenced by the grass being a normal, green color. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement or impending inclement weather. Perform Sodding only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Engineer to be suitable for proper placement. 07/2006 02922-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING B After the areas to receive sod are brought to grade, rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones,hard clay lumps and other debris. C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 — Topsoil. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding. F Spread 2-inch(±1") layer of Bank Sand over prepared topsoil. G .Prior to placing sod,rake areas smooth,free from unsightly variations,bumps,ridges, or depressions, and completely free from stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. H Apply fertilizer at a rate of 25 lbs/1000 SF. Apply after raking soil surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer. 3.02 APPLICATION A Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod strips staggered. Sod shall be laid within 24 hours of harvesting. B After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil below sod. C Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to the Engineer for approval, prior to construction. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintenance Period: 1. Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and continue for a 30-day period from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Re-sod unacceptable areas. 3. Water, fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow, edge, replace unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. All disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. 4. Notify Engineer 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection. B Watering: 1. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for the first 3 weeks after area is sodded. 07/2006 02922-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 2. After 3-week period,water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time unless comparable amount has been provided by rain. 3. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is in frozen condition. 4. Water in the morning to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of water with minimum evaporation. C Mowing: 1. Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches. 2. Set mower blades at 2-1/2 inches. 3. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface. 4. Sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation, shall be mowed with a light-weight rotary type mower. The sod shall be mowed only when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. 5. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing. D Fertilizer and Pest Control: 1. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at a rate of 40 pounds per 5,000 square feet or as recommended by manufacturer. Fertilizer shall not be placed until 2 weeks after placement of sod. 2. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with a mix of 50 percent sharp sand and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss. 3. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick. 4. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140- Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain sod in good condition until 30 days after Substantial Completion. B Replace sod damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02922-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 03310 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place normal-weight structural concrete and mass concrete. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 00300—Bid Proposal 2. Section 01200—Measurement 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for structural concrete is on an each basis for each structure as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these structures in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. B. If Extra Structural Concrete is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic-yard basis, measured in place. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. D. No provisions shall be provided for temperature controlled curing of test cylinder. Test cylinder(s) shall be cured in identical environment until picked up by lab. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Mass Concrete: Concrete sections 4 feet or more in least dimension. B. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI- 305R. C. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI - 306R. 5/2013 03310-1 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND - STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01350—Submittals. B. Mill Certificates: Required for bulk cement. C. Design Mixes: 1. Submit test data on proposed design mixes for each type of concrete in the Work, including each class, and variations in type, source or quantity of material. Include type, brand and amount of cementitious materials; type, brand and amount of each admixture; slump; air content; aggregate sources, gradations,specific gravity and absorption;total water(including moisture in 'aggregate); water/cement ratio; compressive strength test results for 7 and 28 days;and shrinkage tests for Class C and D concrete at 21 or 28 days of drying. 2. Submit abrasion loss and soundness test results for limestone aggregate. 3. Testing of aggregates, including sieve analysis, shall be performed by a certified independent testing laboratory. Tests shall have been performed no earlier than 3 months before Notice to Proceed. 4. Provide standard deviation data for plant producing concrete. Data shall include copies of laboratory test results and standard deviation calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1. Laboratory tests shall have been -- performed within past 12 months. When standard deviation data is not available, comply with ACI 318,Table 5.3.2.2. 5. Review and acceptance of mix design does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide concrete of quality and strength required by these Specifications. D. Admixtures: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including following: 1. Air-Entraining Admixture: Give requirements to control air content under all conditions,including temperature variations and presence of other admixtures. 2. Chemical Admixtures: Give requirements for quantities and types to be used under various temperatures and job conditions to produce uniform,workable concrete mix. Submit evidence of compatibility with other admixtures and cementitious materials proposed for use in design mix. E. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): When proposed for use, submit manufacturer's technical information and instructions for use of superplasticizer. State whether superplasticizer will be added at ready-mix plant or job site. When superplasticizer will be added at job site, submit proposed plan for measuring and adding superplasticizer to concrete mix at job site, and establish dosing area on site with holding tanks and metering devices. When superplasticizer is to be added at 5/2013 03310-2 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ready-mix plant,submit contingency plans for adding additional superplasticizer at job site when required due to delay in placing concrete. Identify portions of Work on which superplasticizer is proposed for use. F. Hot and Cold Weather Concreting: Submit,when applicable,proposed plans for hot and cold weather concreting. Review and acceptance of proposed procedure will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for quality of finished product. G. Project Record Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that are concealed from view. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide necessary controls during evaluation of materials,mix designs,production and delivery of concrete, placement and compaction to assure that the Work will be accomplished in accordance with Contract Documents. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record dates, locations, quantities, air temperatures, and test samples taken. B. Code Requirements: Concrete construction for buildings shall conform to ACI 318. Concrete construction for water and wastewater treatment and conveying structures shall conform to ACI 318 with modifications by ACI 350R, Item 2.6. Where this Specification conflicts with ACI 318 or ACI 350R,this Specification governs. C. Testing and Other Quality Control Services: 1. Concrete testing required in this section,except concrete mix design,limestone aggregate test data, and testing of deficient concrete, will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. 2. Provide material for and cooperate fully with Owner's testing laboratory technician in obtaining samples for required tests. 3. Standard Services: The following testing and quality control services will be provided by Owner in accordance with Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services: a. Verification that plant equipment and facilities conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready-Mix Concrete Production Facilities". b. Testing of proposed materials for compliance with this Specification. c. Review of proposed mix design submitted by Contractor. 5/2013 03310-3 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE d. Obtaining production samples of materials at plants or stockpiles during work progress and testing for compliance with this Specification. e. Strength testing of concrete according to following procedures: 1) Obtaining samples for field test cylinders from every 100 cubic yards and any portion less than 100 cubic yards for each mix design placed each day, according to ASTM C 172, with each sample obtained from a different batch of concrete on a representative, random basis. Selecting test batches by any means other than random numbers chosen before concrete placement begins is not allowed. 2) Molding four specimens from each sample according to ASTM C31, and curing under standard moisture and temperature conditions as specified in Sections 7(a)and(b)of ASTM C31. 3) Testing two specimens at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days according to ASTM C39, reporting test results averaging strengths of two specimens. However, when one specimen evidences improper sampling, molding or testing, it will be discarded and remaining cylinder considered test result. When high-early-strength concrete is used,specimens will be tested at 3 and 7 days. f. Air content: For each strength test, determination of air content of normal weight concrete according to ASTM C231. g. Slump: For each strength test, and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, conducting slump test in accordance with ASTM C143. h. Temperature: For each strength test,checking concrete temperature in accordance with ASTM C1064. Lightweight concrete: For each strength test,or more frequently when requested by the Engineer,determination of air content by ASTM C567 and unit weight by ASTM C567. j. Monitoring of current and forecasted climatic conditions to determine when rate of evaporation,as determined by Figure 2.1.5 of ACI 305R, will produce loss of 0.2 pounds of water, or more,per square foot per hour. Testing lab representative will advise Contractor to use hot weather precautions when such conditions will exist during concrete placement,and note on concrete test reports when Contractor has been advised that hot weather conditions will exist. 5/2013 03310-4 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE k. Class A and D Concrete Shrinkage Tests: Performance of drying shrinkage tests for trial batches as follows: 1) Preparation and Testing of Specimens: Compression and drying shrinkage test specimens will be taken in each case from the same concrete sample; shrinkage tests will be considered a part of the normal compression tests for the project. 4-inch by 4-inch by 11-inch prisms with an effective gage length of 10 inches, fabricated, cured, dried and measured in accordance with ASTM C157, modified as follows: (a). Wet curing: Remove specimens from molds at an age of 23 hours ±1 hour after trial batching and immediately immerse in water at 70 degrees F ±3 degrees F for at least 30 minutes; (b). Measure within 30 minutes after first 30 minutes of immersion to determine original length (not to be confused with "base length"); [ (c). Then submerge in saturated limewater,at 73 degrees F ±3 degrees F, for 7 days; (d). Then measure at age 7 days to establish "base length" for drying shrinkage calculations ("zero" days drying age); (e). Calculate expansion (base length expressed as a percentage of original length); (f). Immediately store specimens in a temperature and humidity controlled room maintained at 73 degrees F, ±3 degrees, and 50 percent relative humidity, ±4 percent, for the remainder of the test. (g). Measure to determine shrinkage, expressed as percentage of base length. Compute the drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen as the difference between the base length (at ?zero@ days drying age)and the length after drying at each test age. Compute the average drying shrinkage deformation of the specimens to the nearest 0.0001 inch at each test age. If the drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from the average of that test age by more than 0.0004 inch,disregard the results obtained from that specimen. 5/2013 03310-5 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Report results of shrinkage tests to the nearest 0.001 percent of shrinkage. (h). Report shrinkage separately for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. 4. Additional Testing and Quality Control Services: The following will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450,Testing Laboratory Services, when requested by the Engineer. a. Checking of batching and mixing operations. b. Review of manufacturer's report of each cement shipment and conducting laboratory tests of cement. c. Molding and testing reserve 7-day cylinders or field cylinders. d. Conducting additional field tests for slump,concrete temperature,and ambient temperature. e. Alkalinity Tests: For concrete used in sanitary structures, one test for each structure. Perform alkalinity tests on concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure in accordance with "Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis," Vol. 15, page 230. 5. Contractor shall provide the following testing and quality control services: a. Employ an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test design mix for each class of concrete for which material source has been changed. b. Notify commercial testing laboratory employed by Owner 24 hours prior to placing concrete. 6. Testing of deficient concrete in place: a. When averages of three consecutive strength test results fail to equal or exceed specified strength, or when any individual strength test result falls below specified strength by more than 500 psi, strength of concrete shall be considered potentially deficient and core testing, structural analysis or load testing may be required by the Engineer. b. When concrete in place proves to be deficient, Contractor shall pay costs, including costs due to delays, incurred in providing additional 5/2013 03310-6 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE testing and analysis services provided by the Engineer, or the independent commercial testing laboratory selected by the Owner. c. Replace concrete work judged inadequate by core tests, structural analysis or load tests at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Core Tests: 1) Obtain and test cores in accordance with ASTM C42. Where concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test; test dry. Where concrete in structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42. 2) Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so as to least impair strength of structure. When,before testing,one or more cores shows evidence of having been damaged during or after removal from structure, replace the damaged cores. 3) Concrete in area represented by core test will be considered adequate when average strength of cores is equal to at least 85 percent of specified strength, and when no single core is less than 75 percent of specified strength. 4) Patch core holes in accordance with Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. e. Structural Analysis: When core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain, the Engineer may perform additional structural analysis at Contractor's expense to confirm safety of structure. f. Load Tests: When core tests and structural analysis do not confirm safety of structure, load tests may be required, and their results evaluated, in accordance with ACI 318. g. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, probe penetration tests (Windsor probe), or other nondestructive device may be permitted by the Engineer to determine relative strengths at various locations in structure,to evaluate concrete strength in place,or for selecting areas to be cored. However, such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated with other test data,shall not be used as basis for acceptance or rejection of structure's safety. 5/2013 03310-7 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS A. Cement: Store cement in weather tight buildings,bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. When there is any doubt as to the expansive potential of shrinkage-compensating cements because of method or length of storage and exposure, laboratory test cement before use. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use aggregate stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 feet in thickness. Complete each layer before next is started. C. Fine Aggregate: Before using, allow fine aggregate to drain until uniform moisture content is reached. D. Admixtures: Store admixtures to avoid contamination, evaporation or damage. For those used in form of suspensions or non-stable solutions, provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform distribution of ingredients. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics. E. Lightweight Aggregates: Uniformly pre-dampen lightweight aggregates as necessary to prevent excessive variations in moisture content. Allow pre-dampened aggregates to remain in stockpiles,under continuous fog spray,for minimum of 24 hours before use. Provide adequate drainage in stockpile areas to eliminate excess water and accumulation of contaminated fines. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Use same brand of cement used in concrete mix design. Use only one brand of each type in each structure,unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Portland Cement:ASTM C 150,Type I or Type II,gray in color. Use Type III only when specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing. Use Type II, including the requirements of Table 2, in construction of liquid-containing structures and cooling towers,unless shown otherwise on Drawings. B. Admixtures: 1. Do not use calcium chloride,thiocyanate or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. 2. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260,compatible with other admixtures used. 5/2013 03310-8 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 3. Chemical Admixtures: Polymer type,non-staining, chloride-free admixtures conforming to ASTM C494, Type A, C, D or E. 4. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, compatible with and by the same manufacturer as other admixtures. C. Mixing Water: Use clean, potable water, free from harmful amounts of oils, acids, alkalis or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94. D. Aggregates: Use coarse aggregate from only one source and fine aggregate from only one source, for exposed concrete in any single structure. 1. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel,crushed gravel or crushed limestone conforming to ASTM C33. 2. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand complying with ASTM C33. 3. Limestone aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 and the following additional requirements: a. Clean,hard,strong and durable particles free of chemicals and coatings of silt,clay, or other fine materials that may affect hydration and bond of cement paste. b. Select crushed limestone: High-calcium limestone (minimum 95 percent CaCO3 and maximum 3.5 percent MgCO3)with maximum Los Angeles Abrasion loss of 38 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or ASTM C535. c. Test aggregate for soundness in accordance with ASTM C88; maximum loss shall not exceed 18 percent after 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate test. 4. Maximum size of coarse aggregate: a. Normal weight concrete, except as noted below: 1-1/2 inches. b. Formed members 6 inches or less in least dimension: 1/5 least dimension. c. Slabs: 1/3 depth of slab. d. Drilled shafts: 1/3 clearance between reinforcing steel,but not greater than 3/4 inch. e. Concrete fill,seal slabs and bonded concrete topping in clarifiers: 3/8 inch. 5/2013 03310-9 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete:ASTM C330. Grading limits: 3/4 inch to No. 4. 6. Abrasive Aggregate: Conform to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. E. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted. F. Evaporation Retardant: Masterbuilders "Confilm",Euclid"Eucobar", or equal. G. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Bonding Agent: Two-component modified epoxy resin. 2. Vapor barrier: 6-mil clear polyethylene film of type recommended for below- grade application. 3. Non-shrink grout: premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement and water-reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX A. Objective: Select proportions of ingredients to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance and other specified properties. B. Mix Design: Employ and pay an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test mix designs for each type of concrete specified. Proportion mix design ingredients by weight. Submit mix designs and test results for approval. 1. During the trial batches,aggregate proportions may be adjusted by the testing laboratory using two coarse aggregate size ranges to obtain the required properties. If one size range produces an acceptable mix, a second size range need not be used. Such adjustments shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of this Section, whether the aggregate proportions are from the Contractor's preliminary mix design, or whether the proportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. Prepare trial batches using the aggregates,cement and admixtures proposed for the project. Make trial batches large enough to obtain 3 drying shrinkage test specimens and 6 compression test specimens from each batch. Shrinkage testing is required only for Class A and D concrete. 5/2013 03310-10 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Determine compressive strength by testing 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high cylinders,made,cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 192 and ASTM C39. Test 3 compression test cylinders at 7 days and 3 at 28 days. Average compressive strength for the 3 cylinders tested at 28 days for any given trial batch shall be not less than 125 percent of the specified compressive strength. 3. Perform sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch according to of ASTM C136. Report percentage passing each sieve. 4. In mix designs for Class A and D concrete,fine aggregate shall not exceed 41 percent of total aggregate by weight. C. Shrinkage Limitations, Class A and D Concrete 1. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch: 0.036 percent as measured at 21-day drying age or 0.042 percent at 28-day drying age. Use for construction only mix designs that meet trial batch shrinkage requirements. Shrinkage limitations apply only to Class A and D concrete. 2. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field shall not exceed the trial batch maximum shrinkage requirement by more than 25 percent. 3. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction,take any or all of the following actions,at no additional cost to the Owner,for securing the specified shrinkage requirements: Changing the source or aggregates,cement or admixtures;reducing water content; washing of aggregate to reduce fines; increasing the number of construction joints; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to minimize shrinkage or its effects. D. Selecting Ingredient Proportions for Concrete: 1. Proportion concrete mix according to ACI 301, Chapter 3. 2. Establish concrete mix design by laboratory trial batches prepared by independent testing laboratory, or on basis of previous field experience in accordance with provisions of ACI 318,Item 5.3;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. 3. Concrete mix design data submitted for review shall have average 28-day compressive strength calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.2.1. When data is not available to determine standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1, average 28-day strength of mix design shall conform to ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2. E. Water-Cement Ratios: 1. Maximum allowable water-cement ratios shall be as follows: 5/2013 03310-11 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE a. Concrete for liquid-containing structures: 0.45. b. Concrete subjected to brackish water, salt spray or deicers: 0.40. c. All other concrete: 0.55. 2. Superplasticizer may be added to maintain specified maximum water-cement ratios. Include free water in aggregate in water-cement ratio computations. F. Adjustment of Mix Proportions: After sufficient data becomes available during construction,mix may be adjusted upon approval of the Engineer,in accordance with ACI 318,Item 5.5;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. G. Entrained Air: Air-entrain all concrete except drilled shafts. Total air content in accordance with ASTM C173: 4 to 6 percent. H. Consistency, Workability, and Slump: 1. The quantity of water in a batch of concrete shall be just sufficient, with a normal mixing period,to produce concrete which can be worked properly into place without segregation,and which can be compacted by vibratory methods as specified, to give the desired strength, density, impermeability and smoothness of surface. Change the quantity of water as necessary, with variations in the nature or moisture content of the aggregates, to maintain uniform production of a desired consistency. Determine the consistency of the concrete in successive batches by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slumps shall be as follows: Concrete Type Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Portland Cement Concrete 2" 4" Concrete to be dosed with superplasticizer: 1" 3" Normal Weight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 9" Lightweight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 7" Drilled Shaft Concrete: 4"* 8" *Minimum slump where drilled shafts are cast in temporary casings: 5 inches 2. Specified slump shall apply at time when concrete is discharged at job site. Perform slump tests to monitor uniformity and consistency of concrete delivered to job site; however, do not use as basis for mix design. Do not exceed water-cement ratios specified. 5/2013 03310-12 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Admixtures: Proportion admixtures according to manufacturer's recommendations. Use of accelerator is permitted when air temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Use of retarder is permitted when temperature of placed concrete exceeds 65 degrees F. J. High-Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): Use superplasticizer to improve workability of concrete or delay hydration of cement,in accordance with requirements and recommendations of product manufacturer and approved submittals. K. Concrete Classification and Strength: 1. Strength: Conform to values for class of concrete indicated on Drawings for each portion of Work. Requirements are based on 28-day compressive strength. If high early-strength concrete is allowed,requirements are based on 7-day compressive strength. 2. Classification: Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Normal-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard Concrete for Structures Containing Water or Wastewater A 4,000 564 (6 sacks) B 1,500 329 (3 Y2 sacks) C 3,000 470 (5 sacks) D 5,000 658 (7 sacks) H 3,000 611 (6 %2 sacks) Concrete for Buildings, Slabs on Grade and Miscellaneous Structures AB 4,000 Not Applicable BB 1,500 Not Applicable CB 3,000 Not Applicable DB , 5,000 Not Applicable Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Light-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard E 3,000 Not Applicable F 4,000 Not Applicable G 5,000 Not Applicable 3. Maximum size aggregate for Class H concrete: 3/8 inch. Maximum size aggregate for all other normal-weight concrete: 1-1/2 inches, except as specified In Paragraph 2.01D.4. 4. When required strength is not obtained with minimum cement content as specified,add cement,lower water-cement ratio or provide other aggregates as necessary. 5/2013 03310-13 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. In addition to conforming to specified strength,lightweight concrete must be within specified unit weight limits. Maximum air-dry unit weight is 118 pounds per cubic foot; minimum is 110 pounds per cubic foot unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Determine air-dry unit weight in accordance with ASTM C567. Correlate air-dry unit weight with fresh unit weight of the same concrete as a basis for acceptance during construction. L. Use of Classes of Concrete: 1. Use classes of concrete as indicated on the Drawings and in other specifications. 2. Liquid-containing structures: If not otherwise indicated, use the following classes for structures containing water or wastewater and for utility applications in the locations described: a. Class A: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class B: Unreinforced concrete used for plugging pipes, seal slabs, thrust blocks, and trench dams,unless indicated otherwise. c. Class H: Fill and topping. Where-concrete fill thickness exceeds 3 inches in the majority of a placement and is not less than 1.5 inches thick, Class A concrete may be used. 3. All other structures: If not otherwise indicated,use the following classes in the locations described: a. Class AB: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class CB: Duct banks;see Section 16402—Underground Duct Banks for additional requirements. c. Class BB: Unreinforced concrete fill under structures. 2.03 MIXING NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE A. Conform to ACI 301, Chapter 7. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: _ 1. Measure,batch,mix and transport ready-mixed concrete according to ASTM C94. Plant equipment and facilities shall conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities". 5/2013 03310-14 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Provide batch tickets with information specified in ASTM C94. Deliver batch ticket with concrete and give to Owner's on-site testing laboratory representative. C. Batch Mixing at Site: 1. Mix concrete in batch mixer conforming to requirements of CPMB"Concrete Plant Mixer Standards". Use mixer equipped with suitable charging hopper, water storage tank and water measuring device. Batch mixer shall be capable of mixing aggregates, cement and water into uniform mass within specified mixing time, and of discharging mix without segregation. Operate mixer according to rated capacity and recommended revolutions per minute printed on manufacturer's rating plate. 2. Charge batch into mixer so some water will enter before cement and aggregates. Keep water running until one-fourth of specified mixing time has elapsed. Provide controls to prevent discharging until required mixing time has elapsed. When concrete of normal weight is specified,provide controls to prevent addition of water during mixing. Discharge entire batch before mixer is recharged. 3. Mix each batch of 2 cubic yards or less for not less than 1 minute and 30 seconds.Increase minimum mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction of cubic yard. 4. Keep mixer clean. Replace pick-up and throw-over blades in drum when they have lost 10 percent of original depth. D. Admixtures: 1. Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into mixer as solution using automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Measure admixture to accuracy within+3 percent. Do not use admixtures in powdered form. 2. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete, provided that admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on concrete or on properties of each other. Inject admixtures separately during batching sequence. 3. Add retarding admixtures as soon as practicable after addition of cement. E. Temperature Control: 1. When ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F, keep as-mixed temperature above 55 degrees F to maintain concrete above minimum placing temperature. 5/2013 03310-15 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. When water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when temperature of mixture is greater than 100 degrees F. 3. In hot weather, maintain temperature of concrete below maximum placing temperature. When necessary, temperature may be lowered by cooling ingredients, cooling mixer drum by fog spray, using chilled water or well- crushed ice in whole or part for added water,or arranging delivery sequence so that time of transport and placement does not generate unacceptable temperatures. 4. Submit hot weather and cold weather concreting plans for approval. 2.04 MIXING LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE A. Determining Absorption of Aggregates: Mixing procedures vary according to total absorption by weight of lightweight aggregates. Determine total absorption by weight before pre-damping in accordance with ASTM C 127. B. Ten Percent or Less Absorption: Follow same requirements as for mixing normal- weight concrete when preparing concrete made with low-absorptive lightweight aggregates having 10 percent or less total absorption by weight. To be low-absorptive, aggregates must absorb less than 2 percent additional water in first hour after mixing. C. More Than 10 Percent Absorption: Batch and mix concrete made with lightweight aggregates having more than 10 percent total absorption by weight, as follows: 1. Place approximately 80 percent of mixing water in mixer. 2. If aggregates are pre-dampened, add air-entraining admixture and all aggregates. Mix for minimum of 30 seconds, or 5 to 10 revolutions of truck mixer. 3. When aggregates have not been pre-dampened, mix aggregates and water for minimum of 1 minute and 30 seconds, or 15 to 30 revolutions of truck mixer. Then add air-entraining admixture and mix for additional 30 seconds. 4. Then,in the following sequence,add specified or permitted admixtures(other than air-entraining agent), all cement, and mixing water previously withheld. 5. Complete mixing using procedures for normal-weight concrete. 2.05 MASS CONCRETE A. Do not use high early-strength cement(Type III) or accelerating admixtures. 5/2013 03310-16 of23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE B. Use high-range water-reducing admixture(superplasticizer)to minimize water content and cement content. C. Specified water-reducing retarding admixture may be required to prevent cold joints when placing large quantities of concrete,to permit revibration of concrete,to offset effects of high temperature in concrete or weather, and to reduce maximum temperature or rapid temperature rise. 2.06 EQUIPMENT A. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at delivery end. Conform to following equipment and operations requirements. B. Truck mixers, agitators and manner of operation: Conform to ASTM C94. Use of non-agitating equipment for transporting concrete is not permitted. C. Belt conveyors: Configure horizontally, or at a slope causing no segregation or loss. Use approved arrangement at discharge end to prevent separation. Discharge long runs without separation into hopper. D. Chutes: Metal or metal-lined (other than aluminum). Arrange for vertical-to- horizontal slopes not more than 1 to 2 or less than 1 to 3. Chutes longer than 20 feet or not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into hopper before distribution. E. Do not use aluminum or aluminum-alloy pipe or chutes for conveying concrete. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Concreting Under Water: Not permitted except where shown otherwise on Drawings , or approved by the Engineer. When shown or permitted,deposit concrete under water by methods acceptable to the Engineer so fresh concrete enters mass of previously- placed concrete from within,causing water to be displaced with minimum disturbance at surface of concrete. B. Protection from Adverse Weather: Unless adequate protection is provided or the Engineer's approval is obtained, do not place concrete during rain, sleet, snow or freezing weather. Do not permit rainwater to increase mixing water or to damage surface finish. If rainfall occurs.after placing operations begin, provide adequate covering to protect Work. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 5/2013 03310-17 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1. Under interior slabs on grade,install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water,mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set,use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, clean joint surfaces of laitance,loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate), roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Contract Drawings, shop drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork, inserts, embedded items, reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. 5/2013 03310-18 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions,unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater without special methods. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 HANDLING,TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301 and this Section. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel that will not be covered by current pour. 5/2013 03310-19 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. Do not transport concrete with vibrators. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet;take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. Rate of placement shall not exceed 5 feet of vertical rise per hour. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used,it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. 5/2013 03310-20 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE H. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed,below 90 degrees F. 3.04 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose(conduit) diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits)that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Control: Take samples for slump,air content and test cylinders at the placement (discharge)end of the line. 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or 3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2-inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.06 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R Group 3 immersion- type high-speed power vibrators(8,000 to 12,000 rpm)in sufficient number and with 5/2013 03310-21 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.07 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously-placed layer. 3.08 REPAIRING SURFACE DEFECTS AND FINISHING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.09 CURING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. 5/2013 03310-22 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND I STRUCTURAL CONCRETE C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 03310-23 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS Section 09901 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing surfaces, providing adequate conditions for proper workmanship, and furnishing and applying the protective coating materials required for metallic, concrete, masonry and plastic surfaces. B. Color code painting of piping and piping identification signs and markers. C. Refer to Section 09900—Painting for Decorative and Protective Coatings to be used on Interior and Exterior Architectural Surfaces, such as wood, gypsum board and masonry. D. Refer to Section 09971 —Painting and Protective Coatings for Potable Water Storage Tanks for painting and protective coatings to be used on potable water storage tanks. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unit Prices 1. No separate payment will be made for protective coatings unless specifically listed in Document 00410—Bid Form. Include payment for protective coatings in unit prices for items to which coatings are applied. 2. Measurement for protective coatings, when included as a separate pay item, is on a square-foot basis for completed protective coating systems. 3. Refer to Section 01270—Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A13.1 —Color Schedule B. ANSI/AWWA C213 —Fusion-bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines C. Federal Specification TT-P-28—Paint,Aluminum,Heat Resisting 1200 degrees F D. Federal Standard 595A—Federal Standard Colors E. Military Specification DOD-P-23236—Paint Coating Systems, Steel Ship Tank,Fuel and Salt Water Ballast, Class 2 F. NSF Standard 61 —Drinking Water System Components—Health Effects 1/2011 09901 - 1 of24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS G. SSPC-PA 1 —Paint Application Specification No. 1 - Shop,Field and Maintenance Painting H. SSPC-PA 2—Paint Application Specification No. 2—Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages I. SSPC-Paint 16—Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black(or Dark Red)Paint J. SSPC-SP 1 —Solvent Cleaning K. SSPC-SP 2—Hand Tool Cleaning L. SSPC-SP 3 —Power Tool Cleaning M. SSPC-SP 5/NACE 1 —White Metal Blast Cleaning N. SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3 —Commercial Blast Cleaning O. SSPC-SP 7/NACE 4-Brush-Off Blast Cleaning P. SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2—Near White Metal Blast Cleaning Q. SSPC-SP 11 —Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal R. SSPC-VIS 1-89—Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel S. SSPC-VIS 3 —Visual Standard for Power-and Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel T. SSPC-QP 1 —Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors U. SSPC-QP 2—Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors to Remove Hazardous Paint V. SSPC-SP12/NACE 5—Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High-and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating 1.4 DEFINITIONS .) A. Paint, coatings, or finishes as used in this Section include surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxies, polyurethanes, acrylics, zincs, and other protective coatings with the exceptions of galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. B. DFT means minimum dry film thickness. - C. VOC means Volatile Organic Components 1/2011 09901 -2 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. See the Drawings and other Specifications to determine how coatings under this Section will be applied. Paint or coat new and modified surfaces in conformance with this Section. B. Coating system schedules summarize surfaces to be coated, required surface preparation, and coating systems to be applied. Coating notes on Drawings are used to show exceptions to schedules, to show or extend limits of coating systems, or to clarify or show details for application of coating systems. C. Do not apply protective coatings to the following surfaces unless specifically named or shown to be coated: 1. Concrete 2. Stainless steel, bronze, or brass 3. Machined surfaces 4. Grease fittings 5. Glass 6. Equipment nameplates 7. Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces 8. Galvanized steel electrical conduit and associated galvanized and factory-coated junction boxes and electrical panels 9. Galvanized surfaces inside buildings and not exposed to view 10. Manhole and valve covers and rings, storm water inlet gratings, covers, and frames D. Provide decorative and protective coatings for interior architectural surfaces such as wood, gypsum board, and masonry in accordance with Section 09900—Painting. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330—Submittal Procedures. B. Submit the following information at least 10 days prior to protective coating work: 1. Coating Materials List: Eight copies of a coating materials list naming the manufacturer and the coating number, keyed to the coating systems described in this Section. Submit the list prior to or at the time of sample submittal. 2. Paint Manufacturer's Information: For each coating system to be used, submit the following data: a) Paint manufacturer's Product Data Sheet for each product proposed, including statements on the suitability of the material for the intended use. b) Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with the system performance and material requirements. c) Paint manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation, application and curing. d) Colors available for each product, where applicable. e) Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings, where applicable. 0 Material Safety Data Sheets for each product used. g) VOC of each paint or coating proposed, stated in grams per litre. 1/2011 09901 -3 0f24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3. Samples a) Submit color samples of paint, finishes, and other coating materials on 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch sheet metal or heavy cardstock. Have each sheet completely coated over its entire surface with one protective coating material, type, and color. b) Provide two sets of color samples to match each color selected by the City Engineer from the manufacturer's standard color sheets. If custom-mixed colors are indicated, prepare color samples using color formulations prepared to match the color samples furnished by the City Engineer. c) Submit one 15-pound sample of each abrasive proposed to be used for surface preparation for submerged and severe service coating systems. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Submit five (5) references which show that the painting Contractor has previous successful experience with the indicated or comparable coating systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the owner of each installation for which the painting Contractor provided the protective coating. As an alternative, submit proof of certification in accordance with SSPC-QP 1. B. For any project which involves removal or repair of lead based paints, submit proof of certification in accordance with SSPC-QP 2. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL RESTRICTIONS A. Ventilate area where coating is being applied. Post and enforce NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME signs until coating has cured. B. Provide lighting level of 80-foot candles (860 lx)measured mid-height at substrate surface. C. Restrict worker access and construction traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. D. Comply with City of Houston and all applicable OSHA confined space entry regulations including but not limited to OSHA Permit-Required Confined Space Standard 1910.146. 1.9 WARRANTY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE A. Warranty Inspection: 1. A warranty inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of coating and painting. The Contractor and a representative of the coating material manufacturer must attend the inspection. At the option of the City, the City may be represented by a NACE certified coating inspector. 2. The City Engineer may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date within the one-year correction period, or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. Cancellation of the warranty inspection does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. 1/2011 09901 -4 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3. Repair defective work discovered during the warranty inspection in accordance with these Specifications. BY Extended Maintenance of Chemical Tank Lining Systems: Promptly repair defects in the chemical resistant sheet lining system for a period of 2 years after the lining has been placed into service. Such maintenance includes repair of the chemical tank and any equipment or facilities damaged by the corrosive action of the chemicals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COATINGS CRITERIA A. Suitability: Use suitable coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Recommendations must be accompanied by test methods used to determine suitability and results of these tests. B. Compatibility: In any coating system, use only compatible materials from a single manufacturer. Give particular attention to compatibility of primers, intermediate coats and finish coats. If necessary, apply a barrier coat or tie coat between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility. C. Containers: Supply coating materials in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, and name of manufacturer, all plainly legible at the time of use. D. Colors: Use colors and shades of colors of all coats of paint as indicated on the coating schedules or as selected by the City Engineer. Make each coat a contrasting shade to the previous and following coats to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. The City Engineer will select finish colors from the manufacturer's standard color samples. E. Substitute or Equal Products: 1. To establish equality under Section 01630 — Product Substitution Procedures, furnish satisfactory documentation from the manufacturer of the proposed substitute product that the material meets the indicated requirements and is equivalent to or better in the following properties: a) Resistance to abrasion and physical damage. b) Resistance to chemical attack. c) Life expectancy. d) Ability to recoat in the future. e) Solids content by volume. f) Dry film thickness per coat. g) Compatibility with other coatings. h) Suitability for the intended service. i) Temperature limitations in service and during application. j) Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats. k) Ease of application. 1) Ease of repairing damaged areas. 1/2011 09901 -5 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS m) Stability of colors. n) VOC content expressed in grams per liter. 2. For substitutions, submit protective-coating materials which are standard products produced by recognized manufacturers who are regularly engaged in production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. Where requested, provide the City Engineer with the names of not less than 10 successful applications of the proposed manufacturer's products, which comply with these requirements. Applications must be in similar service environments to the job being contracted. 2.2 INDUSTRIAL COATING SYSTEMS A. Material Sources: Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying many of the specified industrial coating materials. Manufacturers and specific paint designations (numbers) are listed to indicate the required type and quality of coating. Contractors are to base their bid on the use of products supplied by one of the named manufacturers. These named manufacturers are designated to establish a level of acceptable product quality or manufacturing experience and are not to be construed as the only manufacturers of products acceptable for use. Other manufacturers will be considered on an individual basis, and may be submitted for consideration in accordance with Document 0700, Article 3.8, Product Options and Substitutions (excluding 3.8.3), Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures, Section 01630 — Products Substitution Procedures, and this Section. 1. AKZO/International Coatings 2. Ameron International 3. Carboline Coatings Company 4. Hempel Coatings USA, Inc. 5. ICl/Devoe Coatings 6. Sigma Coatings USA, Inc. 7. Tnemec Company 8. Sherwin Williams Co. B. System 1 — Aliphatic Polyurethane Finish Coat: Use a two-component aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. As primer,use a rust inhibitive 2- component epoxy coating with minimum solids content of 66 percent by volume. 1. Prime Coat: a) DFT=4-6 mils (100-150 microns). b) Products: Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75, SW Macropoxy 646 FC Epoxy, or equal. 2. Finish Coats (one or more): a) DFT=2-4 mils (50-100 microns). b) Products: Ameron 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG, Tnemec 74, VyGuard V54, Sherwin Williams Hi-Solids Polyurethane, or equal. 3. Total System= 6-10 mils (150-250 microns). 4. Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. 1/2011 09901 -6 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS C. System 2 — Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Polyurethane: For prime coat, use a 2-component water or solvent-based inorganic zinc silicate which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film, and is recommended by the coating manufacturer as a primer for this system. As intermediate coat, use a high-build, 2-component epoxy with a solids content of at least 70 percent by volume. For finish coat, use a 2-component aliphatic acrylic or polyester polyurethane coating material that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. 1. Prime Coat: a) DFT=2.5-4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b) Products: Ameron Dimetcote 21-5 or 21-9, Carbozinc 11 or D7WB, VyGuard 13F6 or 13F7, SW Zinc Clad II L.V. or equal. 2. Intermediate Coat: a) DFT=4-6 mils (100-150 microns). b) Ameron 385, Carboline 893, VyGuard V75, or equal. 3. Finish Coats (one or more): a) DFT=2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b) Ameron 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG, VyGuard V54, Sherwin Williams Hi-Solids Polyurethane, or equal. 4. Total System DFT=9-14 mils (225-600 microns). 5. Apply intermediate coat in excess of 4 mils (100 microns) DFT using the mist coat/full coat technique to completely cover the inorganic zinc primer and prevent bubbling of the epoxy or polyurethane finish coat. 6. Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. 7. If inorganic zinc primer is used as a pre-construction or shop-applied primer, and there are damaged or uncoated areas, spot blast the damaged areas with abrasive to an SSPC- SP 10 Near White Metal Standard and then coat with the specified material. D. System 3 — Inorganic Zinc: Use a 2-component water-based inorganic zinc silicate which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat(one). a) DFT=2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b) Products: Ameron Dimetcote 21-5, Carbozinc D7WB, VyGuard 13F6 or 13F7, S.W. Zinc Clad XI, or equal. 2. Total System DFT=2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). E. System 4 —Acrylic Latex: Use a single component, water-based acrylic latex with a fungicide additive having a minimum solids content of 35 percent by volume. Apply a prime coat as recommended by manufacturer. Select coating material, which is available in ANSI safety colors. 1. Prime Coat - a) DFT=2-3 mils (50-75 microns). b) Products: Carboline D3358, Ameron 148, Hemucryl 1803, Sherwin Williams DTM Primer/Finish. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more): a) DFT=6-8 mils (150-200 microns). �/ 1/2011 09901 -7 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS b) Products: Carboline D3359,Ameron 220,Hemucryl 4803, Sherwin Williams DTM Acrylic Coating or equal. 3. Total System DFT= 8-11 mils (200-275 microns). F. System 5 — Epoxy: Use a two-component, rust inhibitive, polyamide-cured epoxy coating material with a recoatable finish that is available in a wide selection of colors. Use a coating with a minimum solid content of 66 percent by volume and resistant to service conditions of condensing moisture, splash and spillage of lubricating oils, and frequent washdown and cleaning. 1. Prime Coat: a) DFT=3-5 mils(75-125 microns). b) Products: Ameron 385PA, Carboline 193, Tnemec 69,VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal. 2. Prime Coat(where shop applied): a) DFT=3-5 mils(75-125 microns). b) Products: Ameron 370, Carboline 193, Tnemec 161,VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Recoatable Epoxy Primer, or equal. 3. Finish Coats (2 or more): a) DFT=5- 7 mils (125-175 microns). b) Products: Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC,or equal. 4. Total System DFT= 8-12 mils (200-300 microns). G. System 6 — Aliphatic Polyurethane, Fiberglass: Use a two-component aliphatic polyurethane coating material with superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, and resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering. Use a primer, tie coat, or mist coat as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Prime Coat(Tie Coat): Ameron 385, Carboline 893,Tnemec P66, VyGuard V75, Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more): a) DFT=2-4 mils(50-75 microns). b) Products: Ameron Amershield, Carbothane 134 HG, Tnemec 74,VyGuard V54, or equal. H. Section 7 — Alkyd Enamel: Use a high quality, gloss, or semi-gloss, medium long oil alkyd finish with a minimum solids content of 49 percent by volume. Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Prime Coat: a) DFT=2-3 mils (50 to 75 microns). b) Products: Ameron 5105, Carboline AD29, Tnemec P4-55, VyGuard 13R29, kem Kromik Universal, or equal. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more): a) DFT=2-4 mils(50-75 microns). b) Products: Ameron 5401HAS, Carboline GP62,Tnemec 2H, VyGuard V20, Sherwin Williams Indusrial Enamel, or equal. 3. Total System DFT=4-7 mils(100-175 microns). 1/2011 09901 -8 of24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS I. System 8—Aluminum Metal Isolation: Use one coat of a high-build polyamide epoxy paint. 1. Products: Tnemec P66,Ameron 385, Carboline 893,Tnemec P66,VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal. 2. Total System DFT= 6-8 mils(150-200 microns). J. System 9 —Aluminum Silicone Resin: Use an aluminum silicone resin material suitable for a service temperature of up to 1000 degrees F (538 degrees C). Coating must comply with Federal Specification DOD-P-28. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat(2 or more): a) DFT=2-4 mils (50-100 microns) b) Products: Tnemec 39-1061,Ameron 878, Carboline 4631, VyGuard V437A1, Sherwin Williams Steel Master 9500, or equal c) Total System DFT=2-4 mils (50-100 microns) K. System 10 —Zinc Rich Epoxy: Use a polyamide Epoxy resin material that contains at least 76 percent zinc in the dried film. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat(2 or more): a) DFT=3-5 mils (75-125 microns) b) Products: Ameron 68HS, Carboline 858, VyGuard 13F4, Sherwin Williams Zinc Clad III,or equal c) Total System DFT=3-5 mils(75-125 microns) 2.3 SUBMERGED AND SEVERE SERVICE COATING SYSTEMS A. Material Sources: The manufacturers listed in this paragraph are materials, which satisfy the material descriptions of this paragraph and have a documented successful record for long- term submerged or sever service conditions. Proposed substitute products will be considered as indicated under paragraphs 2.01.5. B. System 100 —Amine-Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build amine-cured epoxy with a solids content of at least 80 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in potable water and municipal wastewater. For potable water service, select a coating material listed in the NSF 61 Standard. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coats (3 or more): a) DFT= 16-19 mils (400 to 475 microns). b) Products: Ameron Amercoat 395, Carboline 891,Tnemec 139, Sherwin Williams Tank Clad H.S,or equal. 2. For coating of valves and non-submerged equipment, DFT= 12-14 mils (300-350 microns). C. System 101 —Polyamide Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build, polyamide epoxy resin with a solids content of at least 56 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in potable water or municipal wastewater. For potable water service, select a coating material listed under NSF 61 Standard. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coats (3 or more): a) DFT= 12-14 mils (300-350 microns). 1/2011 09901 -9 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS b) Products: Tnemec 20, VyGuard 78PR, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 NSF,or equal. D. System 102 — Coal Tar Epoxy: Use a high-build, 2-component amine or polyamide-cured coal tar epoxy with a solids content of at least 68 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long- term immersion in wastewater or for coating of buried surfaces. Coating must conform to Mil Spec DOD-P-23236, or to SSPC Paint 16. Prime coats are for use as a shop primer only. Omit prime coat when both surface preparation and coating are performed in the field. 1. Prime Coat: DFT= 1.5-2.5 mils (38-65 microns). a) Products: Ameron Amercoat 83HS, Tnemec P66, VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Copoxy Primer, or equal. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more): a) DFT= 14-18 mils(350-450 microns). b) Products: Ameron 78HB, Carbomastic 14, Tnemec 46H413, VyGuard 64, Sherwin Williams Targuard Coal Tar Epoxy,or equal. c) Total System DFT= 15.5-20.5 mils (387-513 microns). E. System 103 — Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Use a 100 percent powder epoxy applied in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C213, except prepare surface as specified in the coating system schedule in this Section. Apply the coating using the fluidized bed process. 1. Liquid Epoxy: For field repairs, use a 100 percent solids liquid epoxy as recommended by the powder epoxy manufacturer to provide a DFT of 15-17 mils(375-425 microns). 2. Powder Coating: a) DFT= 15-17 mils (375-425 microns). b) Products: Scotchkote 134 or 206N,Napgard 7-0008 or 7-2500, or equal. c) Total System DFT= 15-17 mils (375-425 microns). d) For coating of valves, DFT=11-12 mils(275-300 microns). F. System 104—Chemical Resistant Sheet Lining: 1. Materials: Use natural rubber, chlorobutyl rubber, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) rubber, chloroprene polymer (neoprene) rubber, or chlorosulfonated polyethylene (Hypalon) rubber sheet lining material. Submit shop drawings containing technical information that confirms the suitability of the lining material system for long- term immersion in each chemical to be stored. Service temperatures are expected to be up to 150°F (65°C). a) Neoprene Sheet Lining Material:Use a synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 59688, or equal. b) Chlorobutyl Sheet Lining Material: Use a synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 60924, or equal. c) Natural Rubber (soft) Sheet Lining Material: Use a soft natural rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 83160, or equal. d) Natural Rubber (hard) Sheet Lining Material: Use a hard, natural rubber resistant to oxidizing agents and formulated for autoclave curing. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 8631, or equal. 1/2011 09901 - 10 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS e) EPDM Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulphuric acid solution and formulated for autoclave or steam curing under pressure. f) Hypalon Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulfuric acid solution. 2. Primers: Use primers, adhesives, activators, accelerators, and other necessary materials as recommended by the sheet material manufacturer. 3. Metal Surface Preparation: Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, prepare the base metal as required by the sheet lining material manufacturer's installation instructions. If the instructions differ from these specifications, provide the highest degree of cleaning and surface preparation required by either instructions or specifications. Perform abrasive blast cleaning in accordance with this section. 4. Installation: Install lining materials in accordance with the material manufacturer's written installation instructions. Line interior surfaces including piping, vents, fittings, flange faces,manhole covers, and blind flanges. 5. Testing: Test the lining system for holidays in accordance with this Section before and after curing. 6. Curing: Cure the lining system by steam using the time and temperature as required by the material manufacturer. G. System 105 — Vinyl Ester: Use vinyl ester resin coating material with an inert flake pigment that is suitable for immersion service in 30 percent hydrochloric acid and 30 percent sulfuric acid solutions. 1. Coating (2 or more coats): a) DFT=40-45 mils (1000-1125 microns). b) Products: Plasite 4100,Sherwin Williams Magnalux 304 FF,or equal. c) Prime Coat: As recommended by the material manufacturer. H. System 106 — 100% Solids Epoxy: Use a solventless epoxy resin coating suitable for severe service areas subject to splash, spillage or intermittent immersion in wide range of industrial chemicals and wastewater. Coating to resist normal abrasion from rolling vehicles. 1. Coating(2 or more coats): a) DFT= 15-20 mils (325-500 microns). b) Products: Ameron, Carboline, Sherwin CorCote HCR. c) Prime Coat:As recommended by manufacturer. I. System 107 — 100% solids Epoxy Sealer: Use a clear, unpigmented solventless epoxy suitable for application over marginal surfaces, including damp surfaces, tight rust and tight old coatings. Coating serves as primer for alkyd, acrylic, epoxy, and polyurethane finish coats. 1. Coating(1 coat only): a) DFT= 1-2 mils(25-50 microns). b) Products: ICl/Devoe 167 PrePrime, Carboline Rust Bond, Sherwin Williams 920 PrePrime, or equal. 1/2011 09901 - 11 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical representative to visit the project site for technical support as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer's products. B. For submerged and severe service coating systems, require the paint manufacturer to furnish the following services: 1. Provide at least 6 hours of on-site instruction on the proper surface preparation, use, mixing, application, and curing of the coating systems. 2. Observe the start of surface preparation, mixing, and application and curing of the coating systems. 3. Provide the services of a NACE Certified Coating Inspector at all times during the surface preparation, mixing, application, curing and testing of all coatings applied in submerged or acid spill areas. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP • A. Use skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision. For all jobs involving lead based paint removal or repair, require the presence of a certified Competent Person, Lead per OSHA requirements. B. Apply coating to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, and joints. Ensure thorough cleaning and an adequate thickness of coating material. Apply coatings to produce finished surfaces free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture and finish. Effect complete hiding so that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas. Apply a brushed stripe coat to all edges and welds after priming submerged or severe service areas. C. Remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, name plates on machinery, and other surfaces not to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect the working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and coating operations. Mask openings in motors to prevent entry of coating or other materials. 1/2011 09901 - 12 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS D. Do not damage adjacent work during blast cleaning operations. Perform spray painting under - carefully controlled conditions. Promptly repair any damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from blast cleaning or coating operations. E. Coordinate cleaning and coating so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly-coated surfaces. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS A. The following referenced surface preparation standards of the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)form a part of this Specification: 1. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants from steel surfaces by cleaning' with solvent, vapor degreasing, emulsion or alkaline cleaners, or steam. 2. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2): Removal of all loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and wire brushing. 3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by rotary or impact power tools, power wire brushing, or power abrading. 4. White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP5/NACE 1): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by blast cleaning. 5. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except limit random staining to no more than 33 percent of each unit area of surface. 6. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7/NACE'4): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating, all of which are considered tightly adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife. 7. Near-white Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP1O/NACE 2): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, ,mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except limit random staining to no more than 5 percent of each unit area of surface. 3.4 METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED) A. Provide the minimum abrasive-blasted surface preparation as indicated in the coating system schedules at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these specifications and the coatings manufacturer's printed recommendations for the intended service, the higher degree of cleaning applies. B. Perform metal surface preparation in conformance with the current SSPC/NACE Standards and this Section. Blast cleaned surfaces must match standard samples in SSPC-VIZ 1. C. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning using solving cleaning as per SSPC-SP1. 1/2011 09901 - 13 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS D. Round or chamfer sharp edges. Grind to smooth finish burrs, surface defects, and weld splatter prior to blast cleaning. E. Select the type and size of abrasive to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendation for the particular coating and service conditions. As abrasives for submerged and severe service coating systems use clean, hard, sharp cutting crushed slag. Do not use automated blasting systems and metal shot or grit for surfaces that will be in submerged service, even if subsequent abrasive blasting is planned with hard, sharp-cutting slag. F. Do not reuse abrasive except when an automated blasting system is used for surfaces that will be in non-submerged service. For automated blasting systems, use clean, oil-free abrasives. In the abrasive mix, use at least 50 percent steel grit. Replenish abrasive mix with new shot/grit combination as necessary to maintain the anchor profile within %2 mil (13 microns) of the specified profile. G. Comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning. H. For air-blast cleaning, supply compressed air at adequate pressure from well-maintained compressors equipped with oil and a moisture separator which delivers oil and water-free air as checked with white blotter, white cloth, or plastic sheets at the beginning of each blasting sequence. I. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation using dry air-blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting. Vacuuming must be the final cleaning method immediately prior to painting areas that will go into submerged service. J. In enclosed areas and other areas where dust may settle, vacuum the surface clean and wipe it with a tack cloth. K. Remove damaged or defective coating by the specified blast or power tool cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating. L. If the specified abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent work, the area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be in submerged service, then SSPC-SP2— Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3 —Power Tool Cleaning, may be used. If the coated area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and will be in submerged service, then SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal may be used. M. Completely remove shop-applied coatings of unknown composition before the specified coatings are applied. Examine valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and fabricated pipe or equipment for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings. Completely remove temporary coatings by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP 1 method before starting abrasive blast cleaning. Alternate cleaning methods such as Baking Soda Blasting or Sponge Jet Blasting may be used as appropriate. N. Use the solvent cleaning method (SSPC-SP1) to clean shop-primed equipment in the field before finish coats are applied. 1/2011 09901 - 14 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR GALVANIZED FERROUS METAL A. For galvanized ferrous metal,use the alkaline cleaning method per SSPC-SP1 to remove oil, grease, and other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of protective coatings. Alternate methods with biodegradable surfactant type cleaners followed by fresh water washing may be used as appropriate. B. Apply pretreatment coatings of surfaces in accordance with the printed recommendations of the coating manufacturer. 3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION OF FERROUS SURFACES WITH EXISTING COATINGS A. Remove grease, oil, heavy chalk, dirt, or other contaminants by solvent or detergent cleaning prior to abrasive blast cleaning. Determine the generic type of the existing coatings by laboratory testing. B. Provide the degree of cleaning specified in the coating system schedule for the entire surface to be coated. If the degree of cleaning is not indicated in the schedule, remove deteriorated coatings by abrasive blast cleaning to meet the requirements of SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Clean areas of tightly adhering coatings to meet the requirements of SSPC-SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, with the remaining thickness of pre-existing coating not to exceed 3 mils. C. If coatings to be applied are not compatible with existing coatings, apply intermediate coatings conforming to the paint manufacturer's recommendation for the indicated coating system or completely remove the existing. coating prior to abrasive blast cleaning. Make a small trial application for compatibility prior to painting large areas. Allow the trial application to cure for 7 days at 50°F(10°C) or higher before determining compatibility. D. Completely remove coatings of unknown composition prior to application of new coatings. E. Where specified or where job site conditions do not permit dry-abrasive blasting for industrial coating systems due to dust or air pollution considerations, water jetting or wet- abrasive blasting may be used. In both methods, use inhibitors approved by the manufacturer of the coating system, which will be applied over the cleaned area. Begin the coating application as soon as the surface has dried, and before the formation of any flash rusting. Perform water jetting with or without abrasive injection, as appropriate, to achieve the specified degree of surface cleanliness. Do not use water jetting methods for submerged or severe-service coating systems,unless specified for that area. 3.7 PLASTIC,FIBERGLASS,AND NONFERROUS METALS SURFACE PREPARATION A. Unless otherwise indicated, for equipment or parts of equipment which are not submerged in service, shop-prime, and then finish-coat in the field after installation. For methods, materials, application equipment, and other details of shop painting, comply with this Section. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specified period of time, apply the finish coating in the shop and then touch-up the paint after installation. 1/2011 09901 - 15 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS B. Perform surface preparation and coating work in the field for equipment, or parts and surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves. C. For certain pieces of equipment, it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish coatings in the field. Such equipment may include engine generator sets, equipment such as electrical control panels, switch gear or main control boards, submerged parts of pumps, ferrous metal passages in valves, or other items where it is not possible to obtain the required quality in the field. For such equipment, prime and finish-coat in the shop and touch-up in the field after installation.Use the identical material for touch-up that was used for shop painting. Require the manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its shop drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications. Submit the coating material product data sheet with the shop drawings for the equipment. D. For certain small pieces of equipment, the manufacturer will have a standard coating system, which is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the shop drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps. E. Protect shop-painted surfaces during shipment and handling. Protect surfaces with padding or blocking. Lift equipment with canvas or nylon slings. Before being topcoated, do not expose primed surfaces to the weather for more than 2 months or less when recommended by the coating manufacturer. F. Repair damage to shop-applied coatings in accordance with this Section and the coating manufacturer's printed instructions. G. Make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the requirements of this Section. Submit copies of applicable coating manufacturer's product data sheets with equipment shop drawings. 3.8 APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. Apply protective coatings to steel substrates in accordance with SSPC-PA1 —Paint Application Specification No. 1. Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting. B. Inspect cleaned surfaces and each coat prior to succeeding coats. Schedule inspections with the City Engineer in advance. C. Paint blast-cleaned ferrous metal surfaces before rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Limit blast cleaning to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same working day unless the area to be coated is protected by humidity control equipment set to maintain humidity below 50 percent at all times. D. Apply coatings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and this Section, whichever has the most stringent requirements. 1/2011 09901 - 16 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS E. Give special attention to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other places where insufficient film thickness is likely to occur. Use stripe painting by brush, after application of the primer, for these areas. F. Give special attention to materials, which will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Coat such contact surface prior to assembly or installation. Use only inorganic zinc primers on faying surfaces. G. Apply finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats, in a manner which will present uniform texture and color-matched appearance. H. Do not apply coatings under the following conditions: 1. Temperature outside of the manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum range. 2. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 3. Substrate or air temperature less than 5°F (3°C) above the due point. 4. Air temperature is expected to drop below 40°F (14°C) or less than 5°F (3°C) above the dew point within 8 hours after application of the coating. 5. Wind conditions in excess of 15 MPH or dust laden. I. Determine the dew point by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with the U.S. Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychometric tables. J. For steel piping which will not be buried, have the surface abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation. K. Apply finish coats after concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is complete and the work areas are clean and dust free. Concrete must have cured for a minimum'of 28 days @ 75°F (24° C) unless an approved epoxy sealer has been applied to green concrete within 12 hours of finishing the concrete. 3.9 CURING OF COATINGS A. Maintain curing conditions in accordance with the recommendations of the coating material manufacturer and this Section, whichever is the most stringent. Complete curing before placing the coating systems into service. B. In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation using heated air may be required until the coatings have fully cured. C. Forced air ventilation is required for the application and curing of coatings on the interior surfaces of enclosed hydraulic structures. During application and curing periods, continuously exhaust air from the lowest level of the structure using portable ducting to force air into all compartments and around baffles. After interior coating operations have been completed, provide a final curing period that meets the minimum temperature and time requirements of the manufacturer of the coating system being applied, while operating the forced air ventilation system continuously. 1/2011 09901 - 17 of24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3.10 SHOP AND FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Give the City Engineer a minimum of 3 days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation work or coating application work, and a minimum of 7 days advance notice of the start of any shop surface preparation work. B. Perform surface preparation and coating applications in the presence of the City Engineer, or his appointed NACE certified coating inspector, unless the City Engineer has granted prior approval to perform the work in their absence. C. Inspection by the City Engineer or the NACE certified inspector, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these Specifications. D. Erect and move scaffolding where requested by the City Engineer to facilitate inspection. Provide additional illumination to light areas to be inspected. Remove or grind smooth all scaffolding clips welded to the structure prior to surface preparation of the structure. E. Until final acceptance of the coatings, furnish inspection devices in good working condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness (DFT) of protective coatings. Make DFT gauges available for the City Engineer's use throughout the coating process until final acceptance of the coatings. Provide the services of a NACE certified coating inspector for all holiday detection work until the final acceptance of the coatings. Operate holiday inspection devices in the presence of the City Engineer. F. Perform holiday tests on coated ferrous surfaces inside a steel reservoir, other surfaces that will . be submerged in water or other liquids, or surfaces which are enclosed in a vapor space in such . structures. Perform holiday tests on surfaces coated with any of the submerged and severe service coating systems. Mark and repair or recoat areas which contain holidays in accordance with the coating manufacturer's printed instructions and then retest. DO NOT PERFORM HOLIDAY TESTING AFTER STRUCTURE HAS BEEN SUBMERGED. 1. Coatings with Thickness Exceeding 20 mils (500 microns): For surfaces having a total DFT exceeding 20 mils (500 microns); use a pulse-type holiday Detector such as Elcometer 136, or equal. Adjust and operate in accordance with NACE RP0188. 2. Coatings with Thickness of 20 mils (500 microns) or Less: For surfaces having a total DFT of 20 mils or less, use Elcometer 269 non-destructive type holiday detector, or equal. Instrument must operate at less than 75 volts. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils (250 and 500 microns), a non-sudsing type wetting agent such as Kodak Photo-Flo, or equal, may be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. For submerged or severe service areas, the residue of the wetting agent must be removed with clean, fresh water prior to application of any additional coats. 1/2011 09901 - 18 of 24 _��` CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS G. On ferrous metals, measure the DFT in accordance with SSPC-PA2 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness with magnetic gauges using either a pull-off type gauge (Elcometer 211) or constant pressure gauge (Elcometer 345F), or equal. Test each coat for the correct thickness. Calibrate the DFT gauge at the beginning of each workday or shift in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer of the gauge. Do not take measurements until at least 8 hours after coating application. On non-ferrous metals, measure the DFT with positive pressure eddy current gages (Elcometer 345N) or equal. H. Evaluation of blast-cleaned surface preparation work will be based upon comparison with photographic samples contained in SSPC-VIZ 1. I. Evaluation of surface profile will be based upon the use of TesTex pressure sensitive tapes. 3.11 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING A. Painting and Color Coding: 1. Use colors and signs to identify all piping which is exposed to view in buildings or tunnels, above suspended ceilings or exposed above grade, and all outdoor piping. Identify each pipe by a color complying with the following schedule of colors and by applied markers. 2. Coat pipes with the number of coats and type of material specified. Base coats for pipeline painting may be a neutral color. Make each succeeding base coat a contrasting color. For the final coat, comply with the pipe identifying color schedule. 3. Apply pipe identification markers to exposed piping, except for the following pipe at wastewater lift stations: a) Discharge piping for wastewater pumps. b) Vent piping. c) Any piping inside wet wells. B. Pipe Identification Markers: 1. Identify all pipes with applied signs or markers at 15-foot centers, at both sides of penetrated walls or floors, adjacent to valves, at connected equipment, at branch fittings, and in congested pipe layouts. a) Apply markers consisting of signs with legends as follows: OUTSIDE DIAMETER LENGTH OF SIZE OF PIPE OR COLOR OF CYlVFR TNC1 FTF.T.T) T.RTTF.R 3/4 to 1- 1/4 8 1/2 1- 1/2 to 2- 3/8 8 3/4 2- 1/2 to 5- 7/8 12 1- 1/4 6 to 7- 7/8 12 1- 1/4 8 to 10 24 2- 1/2 Over 10 32 3- 1/2 1/2011 09901 - 19 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS b) As pipe markers, use semi-rigid outdoor grade acrylic plastic, Seton Name Plate Corp., SetMark, or equal. Use Type SNA for outside diameters 3/4 through 5- 7/8 - inches and Type STR for 6-inch outside diameter or larger. For pipes less than 3/4- inch in diameter, use applied marker of brass identification tags 1-1/2 inches square with depressed letters 1/4-inch high, black-filled. Apply tightly to pipeline with metal or plastic straps. C. Pipe Identification Color Schedule: 1. For wastewater facilities refer to current version of TCEQ chapter 217. For piping systems not found in TCEQ chapter 217, use the colors listed in the following pipe identification color schedule: PIPE IDENTIFICATION COLOR SCHEDULE PIPING SYSTEM COLOR FED. STD.NO. Fire Mains Red 11105 Oxygen Orange 12246 Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow 13655 Raw Polymer Pink 11156 Diluted Polymer Purple 17142 Natural Gas Yellow 13655 Heating Water Pink 11158 Domestic Hot Light Pink 11668 Potable Water Blue 15102 Non-Potable Water White 17875 Instrument Air Green 14187 Plant Air Dark Green 14110 Raw Sewage Gray 16473 Grit Dark Gray 16187 Cyclone Return Gray 16473 Classifier Return Gray 16473 PIPING SYSTEM COLOR FED. STD.NO. Heavy Solids Dark Brown 10080 Return Sludge Brown 10091 Waste Sludge Yellow-Brown 10266 Scum Light Brown 10334 Chilled Water Supply(CWS) Blue-Green 14329 Chilled Water Return(CWR) Blue-Green 14325 Condensing Water Supply(Cond-WS) Light Green 14533 Condensing Water Return(Cond-WR) Light Green 14533 Deionized Water(DW) Light Blue 15526 Vacuum(Vac) White 17875 Vent Light Gray 16492 2. For pipe identification colors not listed above, follow American National Standard (ANSI A13.1-81) Color Schedule: a) Materials inherently hazardous, flammable or explosive; chemically active or toxic; extreme temperature or pressure; radioactive: Yellow Field with Black Letters. 1/2011 09901 -20 of 24 '� - CITY OF PEARLAND, PROTECTIVE COATINGS b) Material of inherently low hazard—liquid or liquid admixture: Green Field with White Letters; gas or gaseous admixture: Blue Field with White Letters. c) Fire quenching materials,water, foam, carbon dioxide,Halon, etc.: Red Field with White Letters. 3.12 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES—FERROUS METALS A. Coating System Schedule,Ferrous Metal—Not Galvanized SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATION SURFACE SYSTEM NO./ PREPARATION DESCRIPTION FM-1: Surfaces indoors and outdoors, Near White Metal (2) exposed or covered, except those listed blast cleaning Inorganic zinc/epoxy/ below. SSPC- polyurethane SP 10/NACE 2 FM-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, Near White Metal (100) chlorine storage room, sodium hypochlorite blast cleaning Amine-cured epoxy storage room SSPC- SP 10/NACE 2 FM-3: Surfaces of pumps and equipment and White Metal Blast (100) other ferrous surfaces submerged or Cleaning SSPC- Amine-cured epoxy intermittently submerged in potable water, SP5/NACE 1 utility water, and wastewater; including surfaces lower than 2 feet above high-water level in hydraulic structures, and surfaces inside enclosed hydraulic structures, pump state wet wells, and vents (excluding shop- coated valves, couplings, and pumps). FM-4: Surfaces exposed to high temperature Near White Metal (3) between 150° and 600°F (65° and 315° C). blast cleaning Inorganic Zinc, water- SSPC- based SP 10/NACE 2 FM-5: Surfaces exposed to high Near White Metal (9) temperature between 600° and 1000°F. blast cleaning Aluminum silicon resin SSPC- SP 10/NACE 2 FM-6: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in White Metal Blast (101) water passages of valves 4-inch size and Cleaning SSPC- Polyamide-cured epoxy larger, exterior surfaces of submerged SP5/NACE 1 valves. FM-7: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in White Metal Blast (101) water passages of pumps which have Cleaning SSPC- Polyamide-cured epoxy discharge size of 4 inches or larger; exterior, SP5/NACE 1 submerged surfaces of pumps. FM-8: Ferrous surfaces of sleeve couplings. White Metal Blast (103) Cleaning SSPC- Fusion-bonded epoxy SP5/NACE 1 1/2011 09901 -21 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATION SURFACE SYSTEM NO./ PREPARATION DESCRIPTION FM-9: Ferrous surfaces of sluice gates, flap White Metal Blast (101) gates, and shear gates, including wall Cleaning SSPC- Polyamide-cured epoxy thimbles. SP5/NACE 1 FM-10: Structural steel, miscellaneous metal Commercial (10) work, and supports for prefabricated metal Blast Cleaning Zinc Rich Epoxy buildings, not exposed to view in finished (SSPC- building. SP6/NACE 3 FM-12: Ferrous metal exposed to view, inside Near White Metal (2) and outside of buildings. blast cleaning SSPC- Inorganic zinc/ SP 10/NACE 2 epoxy/polyurethane FM-13: Surfaces of indoor equipment not Commercial Blast (5) submerged. Cleaning SSPC- Epoxy, equipment SP6/NACE 3 FM14: Exterior(exposed) surfaces shop- Light abrasive blast (6) coated with fusion-bonded epoxy. to roughen surface Aliphatic polyurethane B. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal—Galvanized: Apply pretreatment coatings, barrier coatings, or washes as recommended by the coating manufacturer. SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATION SURFACE SYSTEM NO./ PREPARATION DESCRIPTION FMG-1: Exposed surfaces indoors and Alkaline (1) or(4) outdoors, except those listed below. cleaning SSPC- Aliphatic Polyurethane, SP1 or Acrylic FMG-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, Alkaline (100) chlorine storage room, and sodium Cleaning SSPC- Amine-cured epoxy hypochlorite storage room. SP 1 FMG-3: Surfaces submerged in water or Alkaline cleaning (100) wastewater, including surfaces lower than 2 SSPC-SP1 followed Amine-cured epoxy feet above high-water level and surfaces by Brush-Off blast inside hydraulic structures and vents cleaning SSPC-SP7/ ATAr1 FMG-4: Surface exposed to view, inside and Alkaline (1) or(4) outside of building. Cleaning SSPC- Aliphatic polyurethane, SP 1 or Acrylic C. Coating System Schedule, Interior Surface of Welded Steel Tanks: Coat interior surfaces, including tank nozzles,manholes,nozzle necks, and flange faces. For steel tank exterior coating systems, see paragraph 3.15.1, Coating System Schedule,Ferrous Metal—Not Galvanized. 1/2011 09901 -22 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS / PRODUCT STORED SURFACE SYSTEM NO. /DESCRIPTION PREPARATION Zinc Orthophosphate White metal blast (104) cleaning SSPC- Natural rubber(soft) or neoprene SP5/NACE1 Liquid Alum White metal blast (104) cleaning SSPC- Natural rubber(soft) or neoprene SP5/NACE1 Polymer White metal blast (104) cleaning SSPC- Natural rubber(soft) or neoprene SP5/NACE1 Sodium Bisulfite White metal blast (104) cleaning SSPC- Natural rubber(soft) or neoprene SP5/NACE1 Ferric Chloride White metal blast (104) cleaning SSPC- Natural rubber(hard) SP5/NACE1 Aqueous Ammonia White metal blast (104) cleaning SSPC- Chlorobutyl rubber SP5/NACE1 Caustic Soda Commercial Blast No Coating Cleaning SSPC- SP6/NACE 3 Sodium Hypochlorite White metal blast (104) cleaning SSPC- Chlorobutyl Rubber SP5/NACE1. Sulfuric Acid(max. White metal blast (107) 45% concentration) cleaning SSPC- Hypalon SP5/NACE1 Sulfuric Acid(above White metal blast (107) 40% concentration) cleaning SSPC- Viton SP5/NACE1 Hydrofluosilicic Acid White metal blast (107) cleaning SSPC- Chlorobutyl Rubber SP5/NACE1 Water, Potable Water, White metal blast (100) Utility Water cleaning SSPC- Amine-Cured Epoxy SP5/NACE1 3.13 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES,NONFERROUS METAL,PLASTIC,FIBERGLASS Where isolated non-ferrous parts are associated with equipment or piping,use the coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings, frames, or hatches. Use primers recommended by coating manufacturer. SCHEDULE NO.AND SURFACE SYSTEM NO./ APPLICATIONS PREPARATION DESCRIPTION 1/2011 09901 -23 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND PROTECTIVE COATINGS SCHEDULE NO. AND SURFACE SYSTEM NO./ APPLICATIONS PREPARATION DESCRIPTION NFM-1: Exposed surfaces, Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (1) indoors and outdoors, except Aliphatic Polyurethane those listed below. NFM-2: Chlorination room, Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (100) chlorine storage room, sodium Amine-Cured Epoxy hypochlorite storage room. NFM-3: Aluminum surfaces in Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (8) contact with concrete, or with any Aluminum Metal Isolation other metal except galvanized ferrous metal. NFM-4: Polyvinyl chloride Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (4) plastic, indoors and outdoors, not Acrylic submerged. NFM-5: Fiberglass surfaces. Per paragraph 3.09, (6) Plastic,Fiberglass, and Aliphatic Polyurethane Non-Ferrous Metals Fiberglass Surface Preparation END OF SECTION J 1/2011 09901 -24 of 24 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS SECTION 11311 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL _ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submersible, non-clog, centrifugal sewage pumps with integral submersible motors, cooling,power cable, control equipment, and accessories. B. Hinged aluminum hatch safety grates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate pumps and motors with electrical work as specified in Division 16, Electrical. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association(AFBMA) D. Hydraulic Institute E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic,Engineers (IEEE) F. National Electric Code(NEC) G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) H. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC) 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish and install submersible, non-clog, cutter-type centrifugal sewage pumps capable of handling raw,unscreened sewage in accordance with these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings. B. Number of pumps,minimum and maximum operating capacities,total dynamic head, suction and discharge size, and other pump design data is shown on the Drawings. C. Use pumps designed for continuous operation without cavitation within the specified operating range. The pump shall have a continuously rising head-capacity, characteristic curve. 08/2020 11311 - 1 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS D. Furnish and install aluminum safety access grates capable of withstanding a _ minimum pedestrian load of 300 lbs. E. Safety access grates shall be retrofitted to fit in the existing clear hatch openings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a list of not less than 10 installations where pumping equipment and safety access grates of similar type and size to those.specified has been in successful operation for at least 5 years. C. Submit locations of the nearest permanent service headquarters of pump and motor manufacturer for size of pump and motor submitted and for safety access grates. D. Submit descriptive literature, including a cross-sectional view of each pump and motor combination and each safety access grate, which indicates materials of construction, weights, principal dimensions, location of anchor bolts, and other important details. E. Motor data, wiring diagrams, one-lines, and conduit entry dimensions and details. F. Provide to scale drawings showing any piping modifications necessary to match proposed pump with existing suction and discharge piping. G. Submit pump manufacturer certified characteristic curves showing head-capacity relationship, brake horsepower, net positive suction head requirements, pump efficiency(ratio of water horsepower to brake horsepower, guaranteed net positive suction head required(NPSHR)and pump speed. Curves shall be complete for the entire range of operation from shut-off to zero head conditions.The information shall be prepared specifically for the pump proposed and not a catalog sheet. H. Manufacturer's Certifications: • 1. Submit pump manufacturer's certification that Contract Documents have been examined by the manufacturer for proposed electrical, instrumentation, mechanical, and structural systems affecting performance of the pumping equipment. 2. Submit pump manufacturer's certification that the maximum power requirement of pump system shall not exceed the motor rating under operating conditions on the pump characteristic curve. 3. Submit safety access grate manufacturer's certification that Contract Documents have been examined by the manufacturer for proposed structural system affecting performance of the safety access grates. 08/2020 11311 -2 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS Record Drawings: Submit record drawings under provisions of Section 01760 - Project Record Documents. J. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data for all equipment per Section 01350 - Submittals. Maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules and complete spare parts list with ordering information. K. Factory Tests: Submit 5 copies of certified test reports to the Engineer for review and approval. 1. The pump manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and tests on each pump before shipment. Factory test pumps using a calibrated shop motor and calibrated measuring equipment in accordance with standards of the Hydraulic Institute. 2. Test each pump using water. Submit test reports containing the following information: a. Capacity vs.head curve in U.S.gallons per minute and feet of head. b. Efficiency vs. flow curve in percent. c. Brake horsepower vs. flow curve. d. Speed of rotation. e. Impeller size and number. 3. Provide certified calibration data showing that electronic transducers,meters, gauges, and other instruments required to perform tests and make measurements have been calibrated within 30 days prior to the scheduled test. Show that flow meters have been calibrated and accuracy certified within the past 12 months. 4. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Engineer 30 days prior to the factory test. The Engineer may, at his or her option,witness the factory test. L. Where pump accessories are shown or specified requiring mounting, bearing supports,anchorage,special alignment devices and brackets,detail items completely on shop drawings. Reference other accessories, equipment, and associated items which may interfere with the placement of these items. M. Field Test: Submit test reports for field tests including results of demonstration with a Final Acceptance Test and Vibration Analysis. Include as part of the report defects and corrective actions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use new materials of high grade, and with properties best suited to the work required. 08/2020 11311 -3 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Provide pumping equipment and safety access grates of manufacturers whose products have proven reliable in similar service for at least 5 years. 2. Manufacturer shall demonstrate a consistent capability for the following level of service: a. Provide local (within 50 miles of the limits of the City of Pearland) factory trained personnel to service pumps and allied equipment when needed within a 48-hour period. b. Provide for delivery of rotating parts for the pumps, except for the impeller and motor,within a 48-hour period. Provide for delivery of the impeller and motor within 4 weeks. C. Have pump manufacturer factory test the pumps to detect any defects and demonstrate that they will function satisfactorily under all conditions specified in the Pump Schedule. Conduct pump testing in accordance with the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute. Have manufacturer prepare a written report on the scope and results of factory testing and remedial actions taken, if any. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver to site,store and protect equipment as required by Section 01600—Material and Equipment. B. Store equipment off the ground in enclosed shelter. Store and maintain equipment in accordance with manufacturer's direction. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01770—Contract Closeout. B. Pump manufacturer shall furnish to the City a warranty written expressly from the manufacturer to the City of Pearland, covering workmanship, material, and performance deficiency under normal use and service. The full warranty shall cover 100 percent of parts and labor for at least one full year. After the first year, the equipment shall be covered by a pro-rated warranty with the following minimum provisions: 1. From 12 to 36 months after acceptance: 50 percent of all replacement parts and labor for defective materials,workmanship,and performance deficiency. 2. From 37 to 48 months after acceptance: 30 percent of all replacement parts and labor for defective materials, workmanship, and performance deficiencies. 08/2020 11311 -4 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS 3. From 49 to 60 months after acceptance: 20 percent of all replacement parts and labor for defective materials, workmanship, and performance deficiencies. C. The warranty period shall commence on the day of start-up acceptance by the City. Warranty shall be in printed form and previously published as the manufacturer's standard warranty for similar manufactured units. D. The complete safety access grate assembly shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of 10 years from the date of purchase. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Select pump equipment which is designed and built for continuous service at all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, and without excessive vibration or strain. B. Furnish each pump with a stainless steel data plate containing the manufacturer's name, pump size and type, serial number, speed, impeller diameter, capacity and head and any other pertinent data. C. Motors, cables, and anchor bolts shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. Coordinate the torsional analysis, when required, to include pump, driver and bearings. D. Shaft seals shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer and sized to accommodate shaft and maximum deflection and misalignment in both shaft and seal. E. Use anchor bolts, nuts and washers made of type 316 stainless steel. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Through shop drawing submittals, the following named manufacturers will be considered,provided the submitted equipment meets the specified requirements and system operating conditions: 1. Pumps: a. Flygt Pumps, Inc. b. Pre-Approved Equal 2. Safety access grates: a. U.S.F. Fabrication, Inc. b. Pre-Approved Equal B. Listing as an acceptable manufacturer will not relieve the manufacturer from conforming to these Specifications. 08/2020 11311 - 5 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS 2.03 PUMPS A. Description: 1. Provide submersible, centrifugal, non-clog, solids handling-type pumps which are specifically designed for wastewater application. 2. Furnish pumps of standard dimensions, built to limit gauges or formed to templates, such that parts will be interchangeable between like units. B. Performance Requirements: When operating at the maximum output speed of the motor,under load and including slip(at 60 Hz),verify that the selected pump has a curve which meets all minimum conditions for Pumping Station Data as shown on the Drawings. The pump motor shall be capable of operating satisfactorily under the full range of conditions as defined in the data. Pump capacity,head and efficiency defined in the data corresponding to firm station capacity shall be the "guaranty point". Provide a pump with a characteristic performance curve which meets system curve requirements. 1. Pump Casing: a. Provide the volute of a single piece, concentric or non-concentric design, having smooth fluid passages large enough at all points to pass any size solids which can pass through the impeller. Use volutes inlets of a suction bell design for pumps with 12-inch discharge and larger. b. Construct major pump components of fine grained gray cast iron, ASTM A 48,Class 30 or better,with smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes and other irregularities. c. Have mating surfaces machined and fitted with rubber o-rings where watertight sealing is required. Achieve sealing by metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces. This will result in controlled compression of o-rings without the requirement of a specific torque limit. Do not use secondary sealing compounds,rectangular gaskets, elliptical o-rings, grease or other devices. d. Install replaceable wear rings on both volute and impeller to provide efficient. Fabricate wear rings of AISI Series 300 or better heat- treated stainless steel. Select wear rings so that the relative hardness of the volute and impeller differ by at least 50 BHN. e. Drill pump suction flange to ANSI standard, class 125. 2. Power Cable a. Provide a cable entry water seal which precludes specific torque , 08/2020 11311 -6 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS requirements to ensure a watertight and submersible seal. Seal the cable entry by an elastomer grommet, epoxy potting material, or a combination of both. Provide a cable entry sealing system with strain relief for the terminal connections and with access to the terminal connections without adversely affecting the integrity or function of the seal system. b. Provide cables that are oil,grease and abrasion resistant. Use cables with an outer jacket of silicone rubber or other material equally suitable for immersion in wastewater. c. For motors 20 horsepower and less,use cables capable of operating on either 230 volt or 460 volt, 3 phase service and under continuous submergence to a depth of 65 feet without loss of watertight integrity. For motors greater than 20 horsepower use cables capable of operating on 460 volt, 3 phase service under these same continuous conditions. d. No parallel power cables are acceptable unless they are size#1/0 or larger. e. Provide motors with reconnect-able terminal blocks. Number all leads. 3. Submersible Motor a. Pump Motor Characteristics: i. NEMA Design B squirrel-cage,induction,shell type design, housed in an oil-filled or air-filled watertight chamber. ii. Stator winding and stator leads insulated with moisture resistant Class F insulation which will resist a temperature of 311 degrees F. The stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method using Class H monomer-free polyester resin resulting in a winding fill factor of at least 95%. iii. The use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring penetration of the stator housing is not acceptable. iv. Fabricate rotor bars and short circuit rings of aluminum. v. Designed for continuous duty, capable of sustaining a minimum of 15 starts per hour, evenly spaced. vi. Capable of operating at liquid temperature of 104 degrees F in conformance with Factory Mutual requirements without overheating or operating in the service factor. 08/2020 11311 -7 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS vii. Non-overloading over the entire range of the pump operating curve within the nameplate horsepower. b. Pump motor explosion-proof rating: UL listed or FM approved as explosion-proof, suitable for NEC Class I,Division 1, Group D environments. c. Maximum motor speed: 1,200 rpm for pumps with discharge diameter greater than or equal to 6 inches; 900 rpm for pumps with discharge diameter greater than or equal to 12 inches. d. For sizes 20 horsepower and smaller, equip motor with dual voltage connections for 230/460 volts. e. Use thermal sensors to monitor stator temperatures. Equip stator with 3 thermal switches, embedded in the end coils of the stator winding(one switch in each stator phase). Wire these sensors to the control panel for use in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection. f. For motor sizes larger than 100 horsepower,provide an independent thermal switch to monitor the lower motor bearing temperature. g. Equip the pump with moisture sensors in the oil-filled seal chamber to indicate seal leakage. Equip motors larger than 20 horsepower with a leakage sensor to detect water in the stator chamber. h. Size the motor to be non-overloading at the any point on the characteristic curve of the pump, including run-out. Provide a motor with a power draw that does not exceed the nameplate rating while the pump is operating between the normal minimum and maximum system curves,using a service factor of 1.0. Do not exceed the total capacity of the motor, including service factor, while the pump is operating between the normal minimum and emergency,run-out system curves. 4. Shaft: Fabricate pump shafts as one piece of AISI Series 400 stainless steel. Make shaft of sufficient diameter to assure rigid support of the impeller and to prevent excessive vibration at all speeds. 5. Pump Seal: Provide each pump with a tandem mechanical shaft seal system. Operate the upper seal of the tandem set of seals in an oil chamber located just below the stator housing. The upper seal shall function as an independent secondary barrier between the pumped liquid and the stator housing. The lower seal of the tandem set of seals shall function as the primary barrier between the pumped liquid and the oil housing. Form each 08/2020 11311 - 8 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS seal with a stationary ring and a positively driven rotating ring both fabricated of solid silicon carbide. Shaft seals without positively driven rotating members or conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common single or double spring action between upper and lower seal faces are not acceptable. 6. Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball or roller type rated in accordance with AFBMA for an L-10 duty life of at least 100,000 hours at the rated capacity 7. Impeller a. The impeller shall be of ASTM A 532, 25% chrome cast iron, dynamically balanced, semi-open, multi-vane, back swept, screw- shaped, non-clog design. The impeller leading edges shall be mechanically self-cleaned automatically upon each rotation as they pass across a spiral groove located on the volute suction. The screw- shaped leading edges of the impeller shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other matter normally found in wastewater. The screw shape of the impeller inlet shall provide an inducing effect for the handling of up to 6% sludge and rag-laden wastewater. The impeller to volute clearance shall be readily adjustable by the means of a single trim screw. Have the impeller hub accurately fitted and mechanically secured to the motor shaft. b. Volute/suction Cover: The pump volute shall be a single piece gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B, non-concentric design with smooth passages of sufficient size to pass any solids that may enter the impeller.Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as specified. The volute shall have a replaceable volute insert ring containing spiral-shaped, sharp-edged groove(s). The spiral groove(s) shall provide the relief path and sharp edge(s)across which each impeller vane leading edge shall cross during rotation so to remain unobstructed. The internal volute bottom shall provide effective sealing between the multi-vane semi-open impeller and the volute. The insert ring shall be cast of ASTM A-48 Class 35B cast iron. c. Select an impeller capable of passing the following minimum diameter sphere: Pump Discharge Minimum Sphere 4" 3" 6"-8„ 4" 10"and Larger 5" 08/2020 11311 -9 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS d. Bolts, Studs and Nuts: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel for all fasteners on the submersible pump and motor casing. 2.04 SAFETY ACCESS GRATES A. Description:The Hinged Hatch Safety Grate smoothly rotates 90 degrees to its open position and locks in place by a hold-open rod. The aluminum grate has an OSHA safety orange finish. Hardware components are made of 316 stainless steel to withstand corrosive wastewater environments. B. Specification: 1. The access opening shall have a permanently installed fall through prevention grate system that provides continuous safety assurance in both its closed and open positions. When closed,the grate allows visibility for inspections and performance of limited maintenance below it.When open,the grate acts as an additional barrier to the access door opening. The system shall be a Hinged Hatch Safety Grate as manufactured by U.S.F.Fabrication,Inc.,Hialeah,FL 1-800-258-6873 or approved equal. 2. The fall through prevention system shall consist of a grate made of 6061-T6 aluminum and be designed to withstand a minimum pedestrian load of 300 lbs. per square foot. The grate shall operate independent of the cover's reinforcing so that the cover will continue to meet specified load and deflection requirements, even if the grate is damage or removed. The grate openings shall be 4" x 6" to allow both visual inspection and limited accessibility for maintenance purposes when the grate is closed. The grate will pivot on an aluminum hinge device with 316 SS hardware that permits it to rotate upward 90 degrees and automatically lock in place. An aluminum pull rod will be attached to the grate so the operator is positioned with the grate between him and the hatch's opening whenever he pulls on it to raise the grate. A 316 SS rod will automatically engage to secure the grate in its open position, and can be lifted upward to permit the grate to close. The hatch cover will not be able to shut until the grate is closed--thereby insuring the grate is in position when the next operator opens the hatch cover. The grate shall have an OSHA safety yellow finish to increase visual awareness of the safety hazard. 3. Installation of the fall through prevention system shall be in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturer.The complete grate assembly shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of 10 years from the date of purchase. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Access Doors: Existing. Replace Safety Nets 08/2020 11311 - 10 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS B. Bolts, Studs and Nuts 1. Bolts, studs and nuts: American National form right-hand machine cut threads in conformity with the current ANSI B1.1, Screw Threads, Coarse Thread Series, unless otherwise specified. Provide nuts and bolts with the standard hexagonal shape. 2. Finish for bolt heads and nuts: Semi-finished in conformity with ANSI B 18.2, Wrench-Head Bolts and Nuts and Wrench Openings,Heavy Series, unless otherwise specified. 3. Anchor bolts, flange bolts, studs and nuts: Type 316 stainless steel in conformity with ASTM A 276. 4. Hardware components for safety access grates shall be made of 316 stainless steel. 2.06 PUMP PROTECTION SYSTEM A. Have the pump manufacturer furnish a complete pump monitoring and protection system consisting of solid state monitoring to be installed in the motor starter enclosure,and independent probes integral to the pump/motor wired to a sealed cable entry terminal box for connection of submersible control cables. B. Provide a solid state monitoring unit designed for mounting within the motor starter enclosure. Design the monitoring system to accept inputs from the sensors specified and outputs to independent contacts which close to alarm each condition,or separate independent output terminals suitable for direct connection to interposing relays for alarm contact development. Provide a separate normally closed alarm contact,rated at 120V, 5A inductive, which opens on any failure. Use a monitor system suitable for operation from a 24VAC unregulated,unlimited power supply. Supply any additional equipment or appurtenances required to provide current and voltage limited installation as specified. Configure the monitoring system to accept separate isolated normally open contacts which close to indicate pump running and to reset after pump trip. C. Have sensors independently wired to the monitoring system. Make provision for the following sensors for each pump: 1. Seal leak(one required). 2. Stator temperature (one per phase, field test and connect to highest reading obtained). 2.07 SHOP PAINTING A. Provide pump and motor with one of the following factory-applied exterior protective coating systems: 08/2020 11311 - 11 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS 1. Coal tar epoxy as described in Section 09901 -Protective Coatings. _, 2. Amine-cured epoxy as described in Section 09901 -Protective Coatings. 3. Chloric rubber coating system: a. Surface preparation: White metal blast cleaning (SSPC SP-5) and removal of all oil and dust. b. Primer. One coat of alkyd resin primer, 1.6 mils minimum. c. Finish coat. Chloric rubber paint, 2.4 mils minimum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pumps in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions in locations shown on the Drawings. Provide sufficient clearances for thermal expansion and contraction. B. Set anchor bolts in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use anti- seize compound on stainless steel bolts. C. Contractor is responsible for any piping,valves,and support modifications necessary to accommodate pump placement. D. Installation of the fall through prevention system shall be in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturer. 3.02 TESTING A. Pumps 1. After pumps have been completely installed and working under the direction of the manufacturer,conduct field tests necessary to demonstrate that pump operation conforms to these Specifications. Supply water or wastewater, labor, equipment and incidentals required to complete field tests. 2. Demonstrate with a Final Acceptance Test that these Specifications have been met by the equipment as installed. As a minimum, perform the following tests. a. That units have been properly installed and are in correct alignment. b. That units operate without overheating or overloading any parts and without objectionable vibration. c. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts. ' 08/2020 11311 - 12 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMERISBLE PUMPS d. That the controls perform satisfactorily as to sequence control,correct start and stop elevations, and proper high level alarm functions. 3. If the pump performance does not comply with Specifications, take corrective measures or remove and replace pumps with pumps which satisfy the conditions specified. B. Safety Access Grates 1. After safety access hatches have been completely installed and working under the direction of the manufacturer, conduct field tests necessary to demonstrate load bearing capabilities that conform to these Specifications. 2. If the safety access grate performance does not comply with Specifications, • take corrective measures or remove and replace grates which satisfy the conditions specified. 3.03 START-UP AND ACCEPTANCE A. Start-Up. Beneficial use will not occur until after the start-up activities have been performed and accepted by the City Engineer. Start-up activities include the following: 1. Receipt and acceptance by the City Engineer of draft Operation and Maintenance manuals, including the wiring and ladder diagrams. 2. Installation inspection by City operating,electrical and instrumentation staff followed by any corrective measures required by the Contractor. 3. Satisfactory operation of pumps for 7 consecutive days under the City's control. If malfunctions or other operational problems halt the 7-day test period,the Contractor shall make appropriate corrections and restart the 7- day test period. 4. Provide the services of a factory-trained technician for a period of 4 hours at the lift station to train the City's operating and maintenance personnel. Training session shall be scheduled and coordinated by the Contractor. B. Acceptance. After the start-up operation has been successfully completed,the City will accept the pumps and safety access grates when final Operation and Maintenance manuals have been received, reviewed, and accepted by the City. Include ladder logic diagrams and wiring and termination diagrams for both power and instrumentation systems. END OF SECTION 08/2020 11311 - 13 of 13 CITY OF PEARLAND DRUM SCRUBBER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 11312 DRUM SCRUBBER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Specifications for one (1) drum scrubber odor control system, associated adsorbent filtration media,grease/mist filter,blower device,supports,and related items. Includes explanation of installation assistance, inspection and equipment startup, training of the OWNER'S personnel, and warranty information. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. City of Pearland Engineering Design Criteria Manual B. National Electric Code(NEC) C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements:Provide the drum scrubber odor control systems to comply with the requirements listed in Table 1. Table 1 Drum Scrubber Odor Control System Requirements Item _ Requirements System Identification No Pure Air DS-1000, or Pre-Approved Alternative System Performance Design 99.9% removal of Hydrogen Sulfide and other sewerage odors Grease/Mist Filter 99.9% Efficient Removal at under 4 Microns 26 ft3 Total 0.30 g/cc Hydrogen Sulfide Removal Capacity(66%by Weight) 70%Minimum Carbon Tetrachloride Sulphabsorb Blend Media 1050 m2/g Surface Area 580 kg/m3 Density 15%Moisture Content 97 Minimum Hardness 425°C Ignition Temperature 08/2020 11312 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND DRUM SCRUBBER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM 13 ft3 total 0.13 g/cc min Hydrogen Sulfide Removal capacity(16%by weight) CPS12 Blend Media 12%Minimum Permanganate Content, 20%Maximum Moisture Content 40%to 60%Crush Strength 3.0%Abrasion Loss 1000 cfm Blower Air Output 700 to 1250 cfm Acceptable Design Range 2.5 hp Maximum 115/230 V 1-Phase Motor Power Requirements 60 Hz Direct-Drive TEFC Motor Prewired 6 ft Power Cord (Supplied by Vendor) Enclosure Type Outdoor Air Piping Connect Air from Lift Station Vent to Unit Drain Piping Connect Condensate from Drum Scrubber Drain to Lift Station B. Additional materials shall be provided with the system shall be as listed in Table 2. Table 2Additional System Requirements Component Material Drum 52"Diameter 60"Height 1/4"(6.4 mm)Thickness High Density Polyethylene Drum Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Lid (Supplied by Vendor) Media Support Structure Fiber Reinforced Plastic Framework (Supplied by Vendor) Monitoring Rod(Supplied by Vendor) Inlet Coupling 10" Flexible Coupling (Fernco or Equivalent) Drain Piping Material Stainless Steel(Supplied by Contractor) Diameter 1" Air Piping Stainless Steel(Supplied by Contractor) 10"Connection from Unit to the Vent Latches Stainless Steel Rubber 08/2020 11312-2of7 CITY OF PEARLAND DRUM SCRUBBER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM Blower 4H Aluminum Grease/Mist Filter 316 Stainless Steel (Washable) and Poly Mesh Blend One (1) Spare Filter (Supplied by Vendor) Polishing Media 13 ft3 CPS12 Blend Support Pallet Stainless Steel to Place Between 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For Drum Scrubber Odor Control System B. Shop Drawings: For Drum Scrubber .Odor Control System. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's instructions for installation. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 5. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and manufacturer's representative, if applicable. 6. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of one year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current pricing information. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. The manufacturer shall have been in business for a minimum of ten(10)years. 2. All equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least ten (10) U.S. installations of the type being proposed, each with a minimum of five (5) years of satisfactory service. 08/2020 11312-3 of 7 �1 CITY OF PEARLAND DRUM SCRUBBER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,handle and store equipment components in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. System Arrangement 1. The equipment, sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this Specification section are typically based on recommendations by equipment manufacturers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. 2. Modifications to structural design due to a manufacturer's varying space requirements, foundation requirements, floor slope requirements, or dimension changes to fit manufacturer specific requirements shall be coordinated by CONTRACTOR and included in the Bid. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any modifications to the piping, electrical, structural, mechanical layouts and ensure materials compatibility to accommodate the odor control system. B. Environmental Conditions 1. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed for this service and the environment encountered in this installation. 2. When installed in wastewater treatment areas, the environment will be moist, and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. 3. Designed and capable of operation at ambient temperatures of 0°F to 100°F. 4. Furnish heat tracing and insulation as required, if required for exterior installation. Insulation alone shall not be sufficient to fulfill freeze protection provisions of this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Equipment Warranty: The equipment manufacturers shall include a warranty period of 24 months from equipment startup or 30 months from shipment whichever comes first. 08/2020 11312-4 of7 CITY OF PEARLAND DRUM SCRUBBER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER AND MODEL A. Drum Scrubber Odor Control system shall be PURE AIRTM DS-1000 Odor Control System manufactured by Pure AirTM Filtration, LLC, Norcross, GA, or pre-approved alternative. 2.02 DRUM SCRUBBER ODOR CONTROL UNIT A. Drum scrubber system shall consist of the grease/mist filter,the drum filter,the blower, and an outlet silencer. 1. Process module functions to filter grease, mist, and other airborne particles, adsorb and oxidize hydrogen sulfide gas and other gaseous contaminants, and release treated air into the environment. 2. The process module functions shall have the following attributes and capacities: a. The Drum Scrubber Odor Control System is designed for the removal of 99.9% of Hydrogen Sulfide and other odorous sewerage gases. b. The Drum Scrubber Odor Control System shall be mounted on a support pallet to be constructed of Stainless Steel or equivalent weather resistant material between the Unit and the pavement. c. The design airflow is from 700-1250 cfm. d. The Grease/Mist Filter is designed for 99.9% efficient mist removal at under 4 microns. e. The Drum shall be constructed of 52-inch diameter High Density Polyethylene(HDPE)with integrated HDPE grating media bed system. f. Filtration media shall consist of 26 cubic feet of High Capacity Sulphabsorb XL media and 13 cubic feet of CPS 12 media. g. Sulphabsorb XL is designed for 0.30 g/cc Hydrogen Sulfide removal capacity (66% by weight), a 70% minimum Carbon Tetrachloride content, 1050 m2/g Surface Area, 580 kg/m3 Density, 15%moisture content, a minimum Hardness of 97,and an ignition temperature of 425°C. h. CPS 12 media is designed for 0.13 g/cc min Hydrogen Sulfide removal capacity (16%by weight), 12%minimum permanganate content,20%maximum moisture content,40%to 60%crush strength, and 3.0%abrasion loss. 08/2020 11312-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND DRUM SCRUBBER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM i. A Media Bed Monitoring Rod shall be provided by the vendor to analyze media service life. j. The inlet connection to the Grease/Mist Filter shall be constructed of 10- inch flexible coupling. The associated air piping shall be constructed of stainless steel or Fiber-Reinforced Plastic(FRP). k. All latches shall be constructed of stainless steel and rubber. 1. The drain piping shall be constructed of 1-inch diameter stainless steel or FRP and shall connect from the Drum Scrubber Drain Outlet to the 4-inch coring in the Lift Station. m. The blower will be mounted on top of a Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) lid. n. The blower shall be constructed of Aluminum. o. The blower will be equipped with an outlet silencer. p. The blower will be equipped with a prewired 6-foot electrical cord for connection to lift station electrical. B. Miscellaneous Items 1. Provide the required lengths of piping to connect air from the Lift Station to the unit and drain condensate from the unit to the Lift Station coring. 2. Provide all supports, pallets, clamping devices, related components, and slip fit connections allowing for removal and inspection of the media without the necessity of entering the odorous space or disassembling the injection plumbing. 3. Inspection shall be able to be accomplished without the use of tools or specialized skills. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to shipment from the manufacturer, the odor control system shall be inspected and certified to operate and perform in connection with the usual purpose for which it is designed. B. All control panels shall be factory tested under simulated operating conditions verifying all devices function. C. Complete factory performance assurance testing shall be required prior to shipment. 08/2020 11312-6of7 CITY OF PEARLAND DRUM SCRUBBER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install and adjust equipment in accordance with the Drawings,approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate the equipment until the installation is approved by the manufacturer's representative. 3.02 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Remove temporary bracing supports and other construction debris that may damage equipment. 2. Remove protective coatings and oils used for protection during shipment and installation. 3. Check equipment for correct direction of rotation and freedom of moving parts. 4. Align equipment to Manufacturer's tolerances. 5. Adjust or modify equipment to ensure proper operation. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. Provide equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Installation stating that the equipment is installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Project site and/or classroom designated by OWNER,for 2 days for installation inspection,startup and operator training. B. Services Provided: Two semi-annual service visits after startup. END OF SECTION 08/2020 11312-7 of7 CITY OF PEARLAND LIFT STATION REHABILITATION Section 13201 LIFT STATION REHABILITATION 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lift Station Rehabilitation 1. Repair,rehabilitation, or replacement of existing lift station wet well liner. 2. All existing well wall liner shall be rehabilitated by the following method: a. Removal of existing T-Lock liner. b. Application of a corrosion resistant material as outlined in this specification. c. Other rehabilitation work. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 2. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02530—Gravity Sewers 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C307, 2003 Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings B. ASTM C531, 2000 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes C. ASTM C579,2001 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes D. ASTM C580, 2002 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and 3/2021 Addendum 1 13201 - 1 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND LIFT STATION REHABILITATION Polymer Concretes E. ASTM C884, 1998 Standard Test Method for Thermal Compatibility Between Concrete and an Epoxy-Rein Overlay F. ASTM C1028, 1996 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method G. ASTM D2060, 2001 Standard Test Method for Abrasive Resistance to Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser H. ASTM D4272,2003 Standard Test Method for Total Energy Impact of Plastic Films by Dart Drop 1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for removal of existing liner and application of new liner is by lump sum. B. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Manufacturer's Qualifications 1. Certified in compliance with ISO 9001 Quality Standards for formulation(research and development),manufacture, and technical support. 2. Manufacturer must have a local authorized technical specialist. 3. Products shall be manufactured in the United States. B Applicator's Qualifications: 1. Applicators must be qualified in this line of work and have a minimum of five (5) years' experience in the application of the protective coatings of the types specified herein. Submit a list of recent projects and names of references for those projects. 2. Five (5) references of Contractor indicating successful coating system installation performance greater than five years in age of coating product(s) of the same material as specified herein,applied by spray application within the municipal wastewater environment. C Coating and repair product(s) shall be capable of being installed and curing properly within the specified environment(s); specifically within environmental conditions of a typical sanitary sewer. Coating product(s) shall be resistant to all forms of chemical or bacteriological attack found in municipal sanitary sewer systems. 3/2021 Addendum 1 13201 -2 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND LIFT STATION REHABILITATION D Coating and Repair product(s) shall be fully compatible; including ability to bond effectively,as required by the specification,to each other and/or the host substrate, forming a composite system. E Contractor shall utilize equipment for the application of the coating and repair product(s) which has been approved by the product manufacturer; and Contractor shall have received training on the operation and maintenance of said equipment from the product manufacturer. Written certification of such approval(s) and training shall be submitted by the coating and repair product manufacturer(s). F Contractor and contractor personnel shall be certified by, or have their training approved and certified by, the coating and repair product(s) manufacturer(s) for the handling, mixing, application and inspection of the product(s) to be used as specified herein. Written certification of such training shall be submitted by the coating and repair product manufacturer(s) and shall include the individual contractor personnel to be employed on the project. G Inspectors shall be trained in the use of testing or inspection instrumentation and knowledgeable of the proper use, preparation and installation of the product(s) to be used as specified herein. H Contractor shall initiate and enforce quality control procedures consistent with the coating product(s) manufacturer recommendations and applicable NACE, SSPC, ICRI or other standards as referenced herein. I Pre-construction meeting shall take place no less than two weeks prior to Contractor mobilization. All parties to have physical presence on the project during construction shall be present. At this meeting responsibilities and authorities during construction shall be discerned; comments and questions regarding materials and execution of these specifications shall be presented and addressed. J Testing: 1. Protective coatings shall be applied under quality control procedures that include inspection of surface preparation before each coat. Do not proceed with the next step until the OWNER has approved the previous step. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for testing for this section, at no further cost to the OWNER. The ENGINEER shall also make such tests if it is considered necessary. Cooperate with the OWNER, providing equipment,scaffolds, and other equipment as requested by the OWNER. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A Store coating material at temperatures of between 50°F and 90°F. B The OWNER shall approve surfaces for application of coating at each stage. Any material that is coated prior to the OWNER's approval-shall be stripped back and recoated. 3/2021 Addendum 1 13201 -3 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND LIFT STATION REHABILITATION C Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not apply under conditions that are unsuitable for the production of good results. Do not begin application of coatings in areas where other trades are working,or where construction activities result in airborne dust or other debris. Do not apply coatings in conditions which do not conform to the recommendations of coating manufacturer. 2. Coatings shall only be applied when conditions fall within the parameters listed in manufacturer's printed data. 3. Concrete shall be cured for 30 days minimum before coating is applied. D Working Conditions: 1. Provide adequate lighting at any location that coatings are being applied or testing is performed. Illumination shall be of sufficient intensity to achieve good results. Provide explosion-proof lighting when required. 2. Temporary ladders and scaffolds shall conform to applicable safety requirements. Erect temporary scaffolds where needed to cover large areas. Provide ladders or scaffolding during testing procedures. E Contractor shall conform to all local, state, and federal regulations including those set forth by OSHA, RCRA and the EPA and any other applicable authorities. F Confined space entry program and other required safety training certifications,shall be submitted by Contractor to OWNER as necessary to perform the specified work. G Flow diversion and/or bypass plans shall be submitted by Contractor to OWNER as necessary to perform the specified work. H Exterior concrete waterproofing as not been specified. If the coating manufacturer or the CONTRACTOR requires the installation of a waterproofing material on the exterior of the wet well in order to warranty the product, then the Contractor shall provide waterproofing at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1.7 GUARANTEES • A Contractor shall warrant all work against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date of final acceptance of the project. Contractor shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice thereof, 1, repair defects in materials or workmanship which may develop during said ten(10) year period, and any damage to other work caused by such defects or the repairing of same, at his own expense and without cost to the OWNER. If the manufacturer's standard warranty does not extend to ten years,manufacturer shall provide documentation of extended warranty. B A warranty inspection shall be conducted annually for the entire warranty period. 3/2021 Addendum I 13201 -4 of CITY OF PEARLAND LIFT STATION REHABILITATION Any defective work discovered shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with specifications at no additional cost to the OWNER. Other corrective measures may be required during the warranty period. 1.8 SALVAGE A Items to be salvaged will be marked and are the property of the Owner. Clean and deliver salvaged items to locations designated by Engineer. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A SewperCoat — 100% Calcium aluminate by KerneosTM Aluminate Technologies. B Pre-Approved Equal. 2.2 COATING MATERIALS A Materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations for the products approved in 2.01. This includes any products not indicated, but required for the manufacturer's product installing including, but not limited to products to fill voids, smooth rough surfaces, repair materials, grout, mortar, materials for infiltration and crack repair,primers,exterior concrete waterproofing, etc. B Coating thickness shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, with a minimum thickness of 1,000 mils. 2.3 WALL CLEANING MATERIAL A High Pressure Water: 3,500-psi minimum force. B Cleaners: Detergent or muriatic acid capable of removing dirt,grease,oil and other matter which would prevent a good bond of sealing material to wall. Refer to sealing material manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4 WALL REPAIR MATERIALS A Hydraulic Cements: Use a blend of cement powders or hydraulic cement to stop active leaks in the manhole structure. B Quickset Mortar: Use a quickset mortar to repair wide cracks, holes or disintegrated mortar. 2.5 WET WELL COATING A The minimum thickness for SewperCoat 100% Calcium Aluminate product is 1,000 mils. The materials shall be applied by an approved certified applicator and 3/2021 Addendum 1 13201 -5 of 9 if CITY OF PEARLAND LIFT STATION REHABILITATION must meet the manufacturer's recommendations. Equipment for installation of lining materials shall be high quality grade and be as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.06 NON-SHRINK GROUT A For non-shrink grout, use prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic,cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. It shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 and shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,000 psi. 3.0 EXECUTION 11 3.1 PREPARATION A Prepare surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 13/NACE No. 6 "Concrete Surface Preparation, and with manufacturer's written recommendations. The profile of the substrate shall be in accordance with the International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Guidelines 310.2R, Concrete Surface Profiles (CSP) 1-10. B Remove all grease, oils, and grime by washing with an emulsifying alkaline water- base cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing. h C Remove all surface contaminants including old coatings, chemical salts,dust, loose concrete, and the laitence layer by hydro-blasting, steel shot-blasting, scabbling, scarifying, or dry abrasive blasting. Abrasives used for cleaning shall be used one time without recycling. D Resulting surface must be structurally sound and free of contaminants prior to coating application. E There shall be no standing water. 3.2 APPLICATION A Application shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 BYPASS PUMPING A Install and operate diversion pumping equipment to maintain sewage flow and to prevent backup or overflow in accordance with requirements of Section 02960 — Temporary Bypass Pumping. Obtain approval for diversion pumping equipment and procedures from Engineer. B In the event of accidental spill or overflow, immediately stop the overflow and take action to clean up and disinfect spillage. Promptly notify Engineer so that required reporting can be made to the TCEQ and Environmental Protection Agency. is 3/2021 Addendum 1 13201 -6 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND LIFT STATION REHABILITATION 3.4 WET WELL CLEANING A The floor and interior walls of the wet well shall be thoroughly cleaned and made free of all foreign materials including dirt, grit, roots, oils, grease, sludge, incompatible existing coatings, waxes, form release, curing compounds, efflorescence, sealers, salts, or other contaminants which may affect the performance and adhesion of the coating to the substrate. 1. High pressure water blasting with a minimum of 3,500 psi shall be used to clean free all foreign material within the manhole. 2. When grease and oil are present within the manhole,an approved detergent or muriatic acid shall be used integrally with the high pressure cleaning water. 3. All materials resulting from the cleaning of the manhole shall be removed prior to application of the cement based coating. 4. All loose or defective brick,grout,ledges,steps and protruding ledges shall be removed to provide an even surface prior to application of coating. B Prevent any foreign material from entering the adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the wet well. C No separate pay shall be made for this item. D Manufacturer's representative shall be available at all times on site to answer questions and approve preparation work prior to lining. 3.5 WET WELL SEALING A Seal active leaks in the manhole structure by using hydraulic cement material. B Remove loose or defective wall material. Wipe or brush surface clean prior to the application of hydraulic cements. C Drill weep holes at bottom of wet well walls to relieve hydrostatic pressure to stop leaks. Plug pressure relief holes after leaks are stopped using hydraulic cement materials. Lead wool may also be used to plug large leaks. D Repair wide cracks, holes, or disintegrated mortar with quickset mortars. Follow manufacturer's application procedures. E After all active leaks have been stopped, clean and prepare walls for application of selected liner material. F Properly apply the sealing compound to provide the minimum required uniform coating to the wall surface. G Strictly follow product manufacturer's published technical specifications and 3/2021 Addendum 1 13201 -7 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND LIFT STATION REHABILITATION recommendations for surface preparation, application, and proportioning. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Observations shall be conducted by the OWNER'S Representative or a third party inspection company and the OWNER'S Representative. Final observations shall be performed in the presence of the OWNER or their Representative and the CONTRACTOR'S Superintendent. All materials and equipment used in the accomplishment of testing are subject to observation at any time by the OWNER and/or INSPECTOR. Periodic observation times will be agreed upon by the INSPECTOR and CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER. B The OWNER may conduct the tests and observations to verify the Coating Manufacturer's data. If the coating testing results fall below the test requirements • or visual observation, the OWNER reserves the right to have the CONTRACTOR change coating materials and/or Coating Manufacturers to a coating that will meet ALL the stated requirements in this Specification. C All steps of the coating system will be subject to observation prior to progression to succeeding steps. Phases of observation shall include, but not limited to: 1. Pre-cleaning (before surface preparation) survey of facilities to be primed 2. During surface preparation and prior to coating application 3. During and immediately after each coating application 4. Final coating observation ii The CONTRACTOR shall not move or remove scaffolding, ladders or other fixtures necessary to provide proper observation until such work has been observed and approved by the INSPECTOR and/or the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. E Any work found to be deficient, damaged, or otherwise unacceptable shall be repaired in accordance with the Coating Manufacturer's latest written repair recommendations at no additional cost to the OWNER. I� F OWNER and OWNER'S Representative will make every attempt to minimize damage to newly coated areas during observation activities, but any damage caused, regardless of by whom, shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. G Observation and/or acceptance of CONTRACTOR'S work by OWNER, INSPECTOR or their Representatives in no way releases CONTRACTOR from any of the terms and conditions of the Contract Agreement. H On days when coating is being performed, the CONTRACTOR shall monitor and record ambient climatic conditions and interior reservoir conditions as follows: 3/2021 Addendum l 13201 -8 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND LIFT STATION REHABILITATION 1. Air temperature, surface temperature, humidity and dew point shall be measured and recorded by the CONTRACTOR prior to application of coating, daily. Surface temperature shall be measured using OWNER approved thermometers. The reservoir surface temperatures, relative humidity, dry bulb,wet bulb and dew point temperatures,both interior and exterior (as appropriate), are to be recorded at least every (3) three hours. The dew point shall be measured by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables. The CONTRACTOR shall use a form approved by the OWNER for recording this data. The completed forms shall be kept on the job site at all times from the time coating is first applied until the coating system is complete. 3.7 INSPECTION A After wet well rehabilitation has been completed, visually inspect the wet well in the presence of Engineer. Check for cleanliness of interior surface, elimination of active leaks, and no blockage condition for sanitary sewer line. B At completion of wet well rehabilitation, assist Engineer in verifying installation of minimum coating thickness of concrete liner. Test several points on the wet well wall. Repair verification points prior to final acceptance for payment. C At completion of wet well rehabilitation, assist Engineer in inspection of installation. 3.8 TESTING A Visual inspection shall be made by the Project Engineer and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the finished coating shall be marked and repaired according to the procedures set forth herein by Contractor. 3.9 CLEAN AND ADJUST A Promptly remove trash and debris resulting from coating operation from the site. B Use commercial solvents to clean tools immediately after use. Once cured, the material must be mechanically abraded. END OF SECTION 3/2021 Addendum 1 13201 -9 of 9 City of Pearland I&C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS SECTION 13300 I&C SYSTEM—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Scope: 1. The overall I&C System general requirements are given in this section. These requirements apply to each additional section of these Division 13 specifications as noted herein and as specified in the associated sections. 2. The Control System shall be furnished by a single SYSTEM SUPPLIER who shall assume responsibility for providing a complete and integrated system. 3. All equipment, components and materials required shall be furnished by the single SYSTEM SUPPLIER who shall assume the responsibility for adequacy and performance of all items. 4. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall identify those system components, which are not of their manufacture. 5. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall supply its company's Quality Assurance Plan, and for components that are not of its manufacture, the component manufacturer's Quality Assurance Plan. The plans shall include but not necessarily be limited to: method of testing, raw material criteria, methods of documentation, station control, "Burn-In", final tests and serialization coding and packaging 6. SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up and place in satisfactory operation a complete Control System. System shall be as specified in Division 13 and as shown. The system includes, but is not limited to the following major equipment a. Autosensory Panel or SCADA Control Panel b. Remote I/O Panels c. PLCs d. Panel PCs e. Cellular Routers and Network Communications Equipment 7. Control System shall control, monitor, store, display and log process and equipment operating information and to perform various process control functions and generate various alarms & reports. The unit processes, which the Control System shall monitor, and control are shown and described herein. 8. It is the intent of these Contract Documents that the SYSTEM SUPPLIER be retained by the CONTRACTOR to have overall responsibility for furnishing, interfacing, adjusting, testing, documenting, and starting-up the various Control • M: 1/23/2019 13300— 1 / 10 P.9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS System equipment described in the Contract Documents. The specified intent is that the SYSTEM SUPPLIER will have overall responsibility for making sure the various systems, trades, suppliers, vendors, subcontractors, etc. come together as a complete coordinated system which will reliably perform the specified functions. 9. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the SYSTEM SUPPLIER coordinates closely with suppliers of other specialty equipment to ensure the required inputs and outputs for the Control System are available. 10. Instrumentation and control systems for this project are intended to be supplied completely under this section. B. Division of Work. 1. It is the ultimate responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to furnish a complete and fully operable Control System that reliably performs the specified functions. The CONTRACTOR is to assume full responsibility for additional costs which may result from unauthorized deviations from the specifications. The CONTRACTOR is to establish the actual division of work with the minimum requirements as specified herein. 2. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall be responsible for: a. The integration of the system including the PLC networking, computer system network, panel layouts, wiring, and network communications. b. All hardware and software submittals. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall develop the panel shop drawings, wiring diagrams, plumbing diagrams, PLC and computer hardware configuration drawings and layouts, software documentation, and all other submittals defined herein and in the specification sections identified in paragraph 1.02 hereof. Coordination with the CONTRACTOR and other subcontractors shall be the responsibility of the SYSTEM SUPPLIER. c. The final system operation and reliability. All required tests and training shall be under the on-site supervision of the SYSTEM SUPPLIER. d. Ordering, fabrication, assembly, delivery and start-up of the Control System. All panel fabrication defined in Specification Section 13315 shall be performed at the SYSTEM SUPPLIER's shop. e. Obtaining from the CONTRACTOR the required information on those field elements, equipment starters, valve actuators, chemical feed equipment, local control panels, and other control equipment or devices that are required to be interfaced with, but that are not provided with the SCADA in order to provide full system coordination regarding interface, function, testing, and adjustment requirements. f. Providing accessory devices including furnishing and installation of networking interface cards, interposing relays, control switches and signal converters necessary to perform the intent as described by the control M: 1/23/2019 13300—2/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I8,C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS strategies and services necessary to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as shown on the Contract Drawings and defined in the Specifications. g. Coordinating all interface requirements with mechanical and electrical system suppliers and furnishing any signal isolation devices that might be required in order to insure compatibility between all equipment. h. Providing any special manufacturer's cables required. Defining the final installation and connection requirements of the SCADA at the jobsite through development of interconnection diagrams. j. Termination and final test of serial, ethernet, and fiber optic cabling, installed and terminating within control panels supplied hereunder. k. Verifying correctness of all final power and signal connections to the SCADA. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall make final adjustments to and calibrate all field elements provided with the SCADA. I. Ensuring that: (1) All components provided under this section are properly installed. (2) The proper type, size and number of control wires with their conduits and junction boxes.are provided and installed. (3) Proper electric.power circuits are provided for all components and systems. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for: a. Including within any subcontractor's scope: (1) Provision, installation and termination of field and power wiring to SCADA supplied control panels and field elements. Termination shall be made in accordance with final accepted interconnection diagrams developed by the SYSTEM SUPPLIER. The electrical subcontractor shall mark on the interconnect diagram the field wire numbers used for each termination point. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall finalize the interconnect diagrams by including these field wire numbers in the final as built.version. (2) Installation and termination of all specialty cables furnished by the SYSTEM SUPPLIER. b. Including within the scope installation of any instrumentation. Installation shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and under the direction of the SYSTEM SUPPLIER. c. Equipment storage and protection until installed following the storage and handling instructions recommended by the SYSTEM SUPPLIER. • M: 1/23/2019 13300—3/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS Antistatic and winterization requirements shall be per the SYSTEM SUPPLIER's instructions and the SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall periodically verify that these instructions are followed. d. Incorporating all necessary components into the system. Schedules included in the referenced specification sections do not necessarily indicate the complete component requirements of the SCADA. e. Ensuring that the SYSTEM SUPPLIER coordinates work with the OWNER. f. Requiring the SYSTEM SUPPLIER to observe and advise on the installation of equipment furnished by SYSTEM SUPPLIER and installed by CONTRACTOR to the extent required to certify, with the operational check-out tests, that the equipment will perform as required. g. Ensuring that information on existing equipment and needed by the SYSTEM SUPPLIER to coordinate the SCADA is provided in a timely manner. 4. Equipment found to be defective prior to system acceptance shall be replaced and installed at no additional cost to the OWNER. 5. In the bid price, the SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall provide for obtaining the services of authorized field personnel and from the suppliers of application software packages as necessary. Should these personnel be required during installation, start-up and checkout of the respective portions of the SCADA, such services shall be provided at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish, as prescribed under the General Requirements, all required submittals covering the items included under this section and its associated sections of the work. B. Submit complete, neat, orderly, and indexed submittal packages. Handwritten diagrams are not acceptable and all documentation submittals shall be made using CADD generated utilities. C. Partial submittals or submittals that do not contain sufficient information for complete review or are unclear will not be reviewed and will be returned by the Engineer as not approved. D. Provide all shop drawing submittals on thumb drive in PDF format. E. In addition to the shop drawing submittals required in the related specification sections, submit the submittals defined below covering the complete system. 1. System Performance. This submittal shall be a written description of how the operator will control the system and the system's subsequent response. Every piece of controllable equipment shall be separately described and the following information included: M: 1/23/2019 13300—4/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS a. Use of local manual controls. b. Use of HMI software controls. c. Use of automatic controls. 2. Each functional description shall specifically identify any interlocks (hardware and software)and HMI alarms generated. 3. Display Screens. This submittal shall include color copies of all proposed new and modified HMI operator screens. Modified graphics shall specifically indicate the revised portions. 4. Field Acceptance Test Plan. This submittal shall define the steps to be conducted during the required witnessed acceptance testing. The test shall be conducted in accordance with the general requirements set forth in Part 3 hereof. The submitted plan shall meet the following requirements: a. Each of the equipment covered in the system performance submittal shall be tested. b. For each equipment test, the required operator control actions and system response shall be demonstrated on the complete system, including each operator action, the response and appropriate HMI display/alarm updates. 5. The Contractor and System Supplier are hereby specifically advised that the above submittals shall be Approved or Approved As Noted prior to any witnessed performance testing. 6. Test Procedures: Submit the procedures proposed to be followed during all required testing. Procedures shall include test descriptions, forms, and check lists to be used to control and document the required tests. 7. Test Reports: Upon completion of each required test, document the test by submitting a copy of the signed off test procedures to the Engineer. F. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer& Model information 2. Dimensions, ratings, and data on features and components 3. Equipment Brochure 4. Accessories 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING • A. Store and protect equipment until installation following the storage and handling instructions recommended by the equipment manufacturers. Place special emphasis on proper anti-static protection of sensitive equipment. M:1/23/2019 13300—5/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS B. Protection During Construction: Throughout this Contract, provide protection for materials and equipment against loss or damage and from the effects of weather. Prior to installation, store items in indoor, dry locations. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions. Provide covers for panels and other elements that may be exposed to dusty construction environments. Specific storage requirements shall be in accordance with the SYSTEM SUPPLIER's recommendations. C. Corrosion Protection: Protect all consoles, panels, enclosures, and other equipment containing electrical or instrumentation and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion through the use of corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules. Prior to shipment, include capsules in the shipping containers, and equipment as recommended by the capsule manufacturer. During the construction period, periodically replace the capsules in accordance with the capsule manufacturer's recommendations. Replace all capsules just prior to Final Acceptance. • D. Inspect the material prior to removing it from the carrier. Do not unwrap equipment until it is ready to be installed. If any damage is observed, immediately notify the carrier so that a claim can be made. If no such notice is given, the material shall be assumed to be in undamaged condition, and any subsequent damage that is discovered shall be repaired and replaced at no additional expense to the OWNER. E. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage charges resulting from the handling of the materials. 1.03 SYSTEM SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS A. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall be a "systems house," regularly engaged in the design and installation of control and instrumentation systems and their associated subsystems as they apply to the municipal water or wastewater industry. For the purposes of this and other applicable Divisions, a"systems house" shall be interpreted to mean an organization that complies with all the following criteria: B. Employs a registered professional Control Systems Engineer or Electrical Engineer in the state of Texas to supervise or perform the work required by this Specification Section. C. Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed a manufacturer's training course on the hardware configuration and implementation of the specific programmable controllers, computers, and software proposed for this project. D. Has been in the wastewater industry performing the type of work specified in this specification section fora minimum of five (5) continuous years. E. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall maintain a fully equipped office/production facility with full-time employees capable of fabricating, configuring, installing, calibrating, troubleshooting, and testing the system specified herein. Qualified repair personnel shall be available and capable of reaching the facility within 24 hours. F. SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall have an Electrical Contractor's license in the State of Texas. M: 1/23/2019 13300—6/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS G. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall be one of the following: 1. Prime Controls 2. BL Technology- BLTI 3. Texas Industrial Controls Manufacturing —TICM 4. W.W. Payton 5. Weimar Manufacturing 6. ACE Controls 7. Or approved equal H. The listing of specific SYSTEM SUPPLIER organizations above does not imply acceptance of their products and capabilities that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. SYSTEM SUPPLIER listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. PART 2 PRODUCTS— (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SEQUENCE OF WORK A. Coordination Meetings: In order to ensure timely performance of the Contract and the system's conformance with these specifications. The first meeting will be held 30 days after award of the Contract to the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR and SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall provide for their attendance at this meeting in their quotation. A schedule for additional coordination meetings (approximately one each month)will be derived at this initial meeting for periodic update, coordination, and conflict resolution during the project duration. B. Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times: Do not start the following key project activities until the listed prerequisite activities have been completed and lead times have been satisfied: 1. Hardware Purchasing, Fabrication, and Assembly: Associated design related submittals completed (no exceptions or approved as noted). 2. Shipment: Completion and approval of all design related submittals. 3. Startup: Operational Checkout Tests. 4. OWNER Training: Owner training completed, and O&M manuals delivered. 5. Demonstration Tests: Operational Check-out Tests, Startup, OWNER Training, and Demonstration Test Procedures must be complete. Give 4 weeks' notice prior to the planned test start date. M. 1/23/2019 13300—7/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS C. Consoles, Panels, and Panel Mounted Equipment: Consoles, panels, and panel mounted equipment shall be assembled as far as possible at the SYSTEM SUPPLIER's shop. No work, other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage, shall be done on the panels at the jobsite. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Material and Equipment Installation: Install the SCADA in locations indicated on the Drawings and follow manufacturers' installation instructions explicitly, unless otherwise indicated. Wherever any conflict arises between manufacturers' instruction and these Contract Documents, follow ENGINEER's decision, at no additional cost. Keep a copy of manufacturers' instructions on the jobsite available for review. B. Install materials and equipment in a workmanlike manner utilizing craftsmen skilled in the particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished appearance. Coordinate &C work with the OWNER and work of other trades to avoid conflicts, errors, delays, and unnecessary interference with operation of the existing plant during construction. C. Provide finish on instruments and accessories that protects against corrosion by the elements in the environment in which they are to be installed. Finish both the interior and exterior of enclosures. Provide extra paint of each color used in the material from the manufacturer for touch-up purposes. D. Equipment Finish: Provide materials and equipment with manufacturer's standard finish system. Provide manufacturer's standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment with light gray color. E. Cleaning and Touch-up Painting: Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from premises and from interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. Touch-up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, consistency, and type of surface of the original finish. Clean and polish the exterior of all panels and enclosures upon the completion of the demonstration tests. 3.03 TESTING, START-UP, CALIBRATION, AND TRAINING A. Testing 1. All elements of the Control System, both hardware and software, shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of the Contract Documents 2. As a minimum, the testing shall include shop tests, operational check-out tests, and Demonstration Tests. a. Factory Shop Testing (1) The control system shall be tested via a full simulation at the factory, prior to shipment, so as to demonstrate that each M: 1/23/2019 13300—8/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS component is operational and meets the requirements of these specifications. (2) The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall conduct test routine for all I/O wiring and interconnect wiring of components. Test results shall be certified, with written documentation provided to the Engineer upon test completion. Factory testing may be witnessed by the Engineer or Owner. b. Onsite Readiness Test (1) CONTRACTOR shall schedule ORT with Electrician, Panel Fabricator, Integration Engineer, and other related sub-contractors to conduct field stat-up tests, field I/O checkout, and control strategy testing. The I/O checkout will demonstrate I/O functionality, analog scaling confirmation, historical data collection, alarm confirmation, security configuration, and network communications. The control strategy testing will confirm manual and automatic operation of the equipment from the Control System, tuning of loops, and process set point adjustments. c. Functional Site testing (1) Perform functional testing of all equipment controlled or monitored by control system. Contractor shall provide a checklist for all electrical, control and instrumentation functions and send to Engineer for approval. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer on a paragraph-by- paragraph basis. Each test shall be witnessed and signed off by the Contractor and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. d. Acceptance testing (1) The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer at least two (2)weeks prior to the commencement date of the field tests. After tests are completed and with system fully operational, system shall run continuously for a period of 7 days without failure. Any failures shall be repaired, and test shall start over again. 3. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input(cause) and, upon the system producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirements will have been satisfied. 4. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with, and documented on, prior approved procedures, forms, and checklists. Each specific test to be performed shall be described and a space provided after it for signoff by the appropriate party after its satisfactory completion. Copies of these signoff test procedures, forms, and checklists will constitute the required test documentation. 5. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not M: 1/23/2019 13300—9/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C SYSTEM —GENERAL Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation REQUIREMENTS practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. Define these simulation techniques in the test procedures. 6. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall coordinate all of their testing with the CONTRACTOR, the ENGINEER, all affected suppliers, and the OWNER. 7. The ENGINEER reserves the right to test or retest any and all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the approved test procedures. The ENGINEER's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. The Contractor shall bear all cost for any retesting. 8. Make the tests and checks prior to energizing instrumentation equipment in accordance with the individual Specification sections. 9. Testing shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at least two weeks in advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment, including manufacturer's services, as specified in the individual Specification sections. B. Training 1. The cost of training programs to be conducted with OWNER's personnel shall be included in the Contract price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the System being supplied. 2. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall provide detailed manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. 3. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall make use of Jeaching aids, manuals, slide/video presentations, etc. After the training services, such materials shall be delivered to 4. OWNER. 5. The training program shall represent a comprehensive program covering all aspects of the operation and maintenance of the system. 6. All training schedules shall be coordinated with, and at the convenience of the OWNER. Shift training may be required to correspond to the OWNER's working schedule. 7. Specific details of the nature and duration of training to be provided are defined in the individual specification sections. END OF SECTION M:1/23/2019 13300— 10/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C FIELD INSTRUMENTATION SECTION 13310 I&C FIELD INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Scope: 1. This Specification Section covers work related to the various field instruments to be supplied with the Control System. 2. Field instrumentation, as specified herein, shall be furnished by the same SYSTEM SUPPLIER furnishing services and equipment as outlined in 13300. 1.02 RELATED WORK • A. Specification Section 13300 defines work associated with the overall Control System B. Specification Section 13315 defines work associated with control panels and enclosures housing the various elements of the Control System C. Specification Section 13321 defines work associated with the Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs)that will interface the system with the field instruments defined hereunder. D. Provision of all field and power wiring, except manufacturer-supplied cables, and installation of all wiring is performed under Division 16, Electrical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following Field Instrumentation Shop Drawings in a single package: 1. Catalog information, descriptive literature, wiring diagrams, and shop drawings on all components of the field instruments, including all miscellaneous electrical and mechanical devices furnished under this section. 2. Individual data sheets for all components of the field instruments to supplement the above information by citing all specific features for each specific component (e.g. scale range, materials of construction, special options included, etc.). Each component data sheet shall bear the component name and instrument tag number designation shown in the Drawings and Specifications. 3. Installation details for all field mounted devices to show conformance with the Contract Documents. 4. Configuration documentation for all programmable devices to indicate actual settings used to set the device scale, range, trip points, and other control parameters. 5. Proposed tag numbers for each specific instrument. M: 1/23/2019 13310— 1 /5 P: 1/7/2021 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C FIELD INSTRUMENTATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment to be installed in a hazardous area shall meet Class, Group, and Division classification as shown on the Contract Electrical Drawings, or comply with the local or National Electrical Code, whichever is the most stringent requirement. B. All instruments requiring plumbing shall utilize stainless steel components as follows: 1. Test Tap: Shall consist of Crawford Fitting Co. Swagelock quick connects Series QC4-DE, or equal. 2. Tubing, Stainless Steel: Shall be ASTM A 312, TP 316, seamless, soft annealed with 0.065 inch wall. Fittings shall be ASTM A 276, TP 316 compression or socket weld type. 3. Valve, Ball: Shall be stainless steel ball valves, Whitey Series 40, Hoke Flamite Series 7100, or equal. C. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks. D. All transmitters shall be provided with either integral indicators or conduit mounted indicators in process units, accurate to two percent. Indicator readouts shall be linear in process units. E. Electronic equipment shall utilize printed circuitry suitably coated to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. Solid-state components shall be conservatively rated for their purpose, to assure optimum long-term performance and dependability over ambient atmosphere fluctuations and 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. The field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and slightly corrosive service conditions. 2.02 FIELD INSTRUMENTS A. Provide the field instrumentation shown the Special Device Table included on the contract drawings, or as specified herein. 2.03 MAGNETIC FLOW METER A. Flow Meter 1. Magnetic flow meter systems shall include a magnetic flow tube and a microprocessor-based "smart"transmitter that is capable of converting and transmitting a signal from the flow tube. Magnetic flow meters shall utilize the characterized field principle of electromagnetic induction and shall produce DC signals directly proportional to the liquid flow rate. Meters shall be capable of bidirectional flow and totalize for forward, reverse and net totals. 2. Each meter shall be furnished with a stainless steel metering tube and carbon steel flanges with a polyurethane liner(or as noted). Flow tubes shall be 150-lb M: 1/23/2019 13310—2/5 P: 1/7/2021 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C FIELD INSTRUMENTATION flange mounted unless otherwise noted. Linerless designs are not acceptable. Liner shall have a minimum thickness of 0.125 inches. The inside diameter of the liner shall be within 0.125 inches of the inside diameter of the adjoining pipe. Liner protectors shall be provided on all flow tubes. 3. The flow tube shall be provided with Nickel Alloy (Hastelloy C) or 316 SS flush mounted electrodes. Ultrasonic electrode cleaning shall not be acceptable. 4. Grounding rings shall be provided for all meters. The use of grounding electrodes are not acceptable. 5. All materials of construction for metallic wetted parts (electrodes, grounding rings, etc.) shall be minimum 316 stainless steel, but shall be compatible with the process fluid for each meter in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. 6. Flow tube shall be rated for pressures up to 1.1 times the flange rating of adjacent piping. System shall be rated for ambient temperatures of 30 to +65oC. Meter and transmitter housings shall meet NEMA 4X requirements as a minimum. When mounted in a meter vault (or otherwise specified), flowtube shall be of IP 68 construction as installed by the factory (no field IP 68 installation allowed). When meter and transmitter are located in classified explosion hazard areas, the meter and transmitter housings shall be selected with rating to meet the requirements for use in those areas. B. Signal Converter 1. Remote or integrally mounted, microprocessor controlled. a. Operate on 120 vac, 60 Hz power. b. Provide pulsed do voltage to magnet coils of magnetic flow meter to establish magnetic field. c. Convert flow signal from magnetic flow meter to analog and digital output signals, for bidirectional flow. 2. Span to be continuously adjustable between 2 and 31 ft/sec. Adjustment shall be by keypad. 3. The transmitter shall be remote mounted and have a polyurethane painted dual compartment aluminum, NEMA 4X housing. 4. The transmitter shall utilize a 90-220 VAC power supply and have outputs including 4-20 mA(Hart), scalable frequency (0-10,000 Hz, pulse output, two (2) discrete outputs (to 30 VDC) and one (1) discrete input. 5. The transmitter shall provide a pulsed DC coil drive current to the flow tube and shall convert the returning signal to a linear, isolated 4 20 mA DC signal. The transmitter shall utilize "smart" electronics and shall contain automatic, continuous zero correction, signal processing routines for noise rejection, and an integral LCD readout capable of displaying flow rate and totalized flow. The transmitter shall continuously run self-diagnostic routines and report errors via English language messages. Standard diagnostics shall include transmitter M: 1/23/2019 13310— 3/5 P: 1/7/2021 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C FIELD INSTRUMENTATION hardware and software fault, flowtube sensor coil fault, tunable empty pipe, grounding and wiring fault and high process noise. 6. The transmitter's preamplifier input impedance shall be a minimum of 109-1011 ohms which shall make the system suited for the amplification of low-level input signals and capable of operation with a material build up on the electrodes. 7. The transmitter shall provide an automatic low flow cutoff below a user configurable low flow condition (0-10%). The transmitter's outputs shall also be capable of being forced to zero by an external contact operation. 8. The transmitter shall be capable of communicating digitally with a remote configuration device via a frequency shift keyed, high frequency signal (Hart) superimposed on the 4 20 mA output signal. The remote configuration device shall be capable of being placed anywhere in the 4 20 mA output loop. C. Manufacturers 1. Rosemount 2. Or equal 2.04 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSDUCER A. Manufacturer: 1. Blue Ribbon 2. No exceptions B. Model: 1. BC 001 Birdcage Submersible Level Transmitter C. Accessories: 1. Surge Protector Model BCP 3000 D. Device Construction 1. Power: 10- 30 VDC 2. Output: 4-20 mA. 3. Accuracy: plus/minus 0.1 percent of calibrated span, minimum. 4. Range: 0.2 to 100 meters of H2O, minimum. 5. Flush mounted ceramic. 6. Heavy stainless steel body. 7. Cable: a. Heavy duty, submersible rated with strain relief device. b. Wet well depth plus length to terminal box with 10 feet slack coiled in terminal box (not in wet wells). M. 1/23/2019 13310—4/5 P: 1/7/2021 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C FIELD INSTRUMENTATION i c. Kellum grip with protective bushing. Suspend on stainless steel cable clear of pump and 4 inches above intake. Clamp transducer cable to stainless steel cable with suitable stainless steel clamps at 24-inch intervals. Provide epoxy coated lead weight at end of stainless steel cable. Provide stainless steel cable strain relief device at transducer that fits threaded connection at transducer, and that has ring for support by stainless steel cable. 2.05 SPARE AND EXPENDABLES A. Provide the following spare parts: 1. One spare sensor level transmitter 2. Ten spare fuses of each type and rating installed. 3. One spare surge protection device. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the Control System field instrumentation in strict accordance with the respective manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, in locations as shown on the Drawings, and as indicated on the installation details of the Drawings. B. Fully Calibrate each instrument. • C. Provide surge protection enclosures to the electrical sub-contractor for mounting and installation. The enclosures shall be fully wired internally. Coordinate grounding requirements with Division 16, Electrical. 3.02 TRAINING A. Two days of on-site (field)training shall be conducted at the OWNER's plant site and shall provide detailed hands-on instruction to OWNER's personnel covering all supplied field instruments. B. Training shall include: 1. calibration procedures. 2. preventive maintenance methods and timing. 3. fault-finding techniques. Table 13310-1: Field Instrumentation Tag Device Spec. Ratings LIT Wet Well Level Primary (Radar) See plans 0-50 ft LIT Wet Well Level Backup (Submersible) 13310 0-34 ft FIT Discharge Flow Meter 13310 0-2000 gpm CT Current Transmitter See plans 0-100 amps END OF SECTION M: 1/23/2019 13310—5/5 P: 1/7/2021 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL DEVICES SECTION 13312 I&C CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pilot Devices: a. Selector switches. b. Pushbuttons. c. Indicating lights. d. Potentiometer. 2. Relays/timers a. Control relays b. Time delay relays. 3. Pump alternators. 4. Phase failure relays. 5. Signal isolators. 6. Miniature circuit breakers. B. Supersedes: This specification supersedes all major equipment items 11000 series specifications with sections containing control requirements. Features and options indicated in these 11000 series specifications are to be retained and included along with additional features, options, materials, submittals, and requirements stated here. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA) , s 1. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts Maximum) 2. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). D. Factory Mutual (FM). E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). M: 8/24/2019 13312- 1 /8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL DEVICES 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Sections regarding submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature and specifications. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (NEC). B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and shown; install in accordance with UL requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufactures listed in the applicable articles below are acceptable. 2. Provide similar components from the same manufacturer for uniformity of appearance, operations, and maintenance. B. Substitutions: Comply with sections regarding substitutions. 2.02 Selector Switches, Pilot Lights, and Pushbuttons A. Manufactures: 1. Square D (Schneider Electric) Class 9001, Type K 2. No exceptions B. Construction: 1. NEMA 4X 2. Heavy duty 3. Oil-tight 4. Dust-tight 5. Water-tight 6. 30.5 mm diameter 7. Provide nameplates as required for application or as indicated on drawings. C. Selector Switches: M: 8/24/2019 13312-2/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL DEVICES 1. Position switches a. Maintained contact type. b. Knob type operator. c. Provide position switches as required to perform functions specified or shown in drawings: (1) Two-position (2) Three-Position (3) Four-Position 2. Contact Blocks: D. Provide contacts as required to perform functions specified or shown in drawings. a. Double break. b. AC Rating: (1) 7,200 VA make (2) 720 VA break E. Pilot Lights 1. LED type 2. Lenses: a. Glass type b. Color as appropriate for application or as indicated on drawings. c. Interchangeable d. Push to test e. Voltage as required F. Pushbuttons 1. Flush mounted. 2. Black button color, unless otherwise noted. 3. Contacts a. Double break. b. Momentary or maintained contacts as appropriate for application or as indicated on drawings. c. AC Rating: (1) 7,200 VA make (2) 720 VA break G. Potentiometers M: 8/24/2019 13312- 3/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL DEVICES 1. Linear adjustment through 0-1,000 ohm with 1 percent resolution. 2. Three-wire interface. 3. Dial plate with 0-100 percent scale. 4. One-turn adjustment knob. 2.03 Control Relays A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D (Schneider Electric) 2. No Exceptions B. DIN rail mounted Plug-in socket. C. Clear polycarbonate dust cover with clip fastener. D. Internal LED indicator when coil is energized. E. Check button. F. Temperature rise: 1. Coil 85 DegF max. 2. Contact 65 DegF max. G. Insulation resistance: 100 Meg min. H. Frequency response: 1800 operations/hour. I. Operating temperature: -20 to +150 DegF. J. Lift expectancy: 1. Electrical: 500,000 operations or more 2. Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations or more. K. Four(4)single-pole double-throw contacts rated 10A at 120V. L. Coil voltage as required. 2.04 Time Delay Relays A. Manufacturers: M: 8/24/2019 13312-4/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL DEVICES 1. IDEC 2. Macromatic 3. Eagle Signal Controls 4. Pre-approved equal B. Melt design test and performance requirements of NEMA ICS 2-218. C. Heavy-duty. D. Solid-state construction. E. External adjustment dial. F. DIN rail mounted Plug-in socket. G. Two (2) single-pole double-throw switches rated 5A at 120V. H. Auxiliary relays as required to perform functions specified or shown in drawings. I. LED indication during time cycle. J. Power source voltage as required. K. Operation Modes: 1. On-Delay Relay a. Five (5)time ranges. b. .02 seconds to 30 minutes or as required to perform functions specified or shown in drawings. 2. Instantaneous Open, Time Delay Close. a. 1.5 seconds to 15 seconds or as required to perform functions specified or shown in drawings. 3. Or operation modes as required to perform functions specified or shown in drawings. 2.05 Elapsed Time Meters • A. Manufacturers: 1. Cramer 635s/Hrs 2. Quartz 722-0004 3. ENM M: 8/24/2019 13312- 5/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I84C CONTROL DEVICES B. Six (6) digits. C. Non-resettable. D. Voltage as required. 2.06 Timers A. 24 Hour Clock Timer(Repeat Cycle) 1. Manufacturers: a. Tork Time Controls b. Intermatic c. Pre-approved equal 2. Surface mount. 3. 24-hour LCD display. 4. One (1) single-pole double-throw contact rated 20A at 120V. 5. 288 setpoints per 24 hours. 6. 1 to 7-day skip feature. 7. Time cycle programmable by keyboard. B. Interval/Duration Timer 1. Manufactures: a. ATC b. Pre-approved equal 2. DIN rail mounted plug-in base with dust tight cover. 3. Time range as indicated on drawings. 4. Two (2)single-pole, double-throw contacts rated 10A at 120V. 2.07 Exterior Mounted Flashing Beacon A. Manufactures: 1. Edwards Model No. 48XBRMR120A M: 8/24/2019 13312- 6/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL DEVICES 2. Or Equal B. NEMA 4X C. Red Polycarbonate Lens D. -31 to +150 DegF Operating Range 2.08 Alternators A. Provide the following types of alternators to perform functions specified or shown in drawings: 1. Three (3) Pump Triplexor a. Selector switch to lockout pump. b. DIN rail mounted plug-in base. c. LED indicating lights. d. 120VAC. e. 10A contacts at 240V. f. Time Mark model no. 442-120 Multi-Stage 2.09 Phase Failure Protection Devices A. Diversified Electronics Model No. SLD-440-ALE, 480 Volt, three-phase. B. Diversified Electronics Model No. SLD-220-ALE, 240 Volt, three-phase. C. Macromatic Model No. PMDU, 208-480 Volt, three-phase. 2.10 Float Switch A. Manufactures: 1. Siemens 9G 2. Anchor Scientific 3. Pre-approved equal B. Direct acting switch. C. Teflon coated 316 SS Float Switch M: 8/24/2019 13312- 7/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation l&C CONTROL DEVICES D. 60' cable 2.11 Submersible Pump Protection Module A. As provided by pump vendor. B. Winding overtemp alarm, indication, and protection. C. Seal leak alarm, indication, and protection. D. Manual reset pushbutton. END OF SECTION M: 8/24/2019 13312- 8/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL PANELS SECTION 13315 I&C CONTROL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: SYSTEM SUPPLIER Control Panels and Motor Controllers for use on AC circuits rated 600 V or less. B. Supersedes: This specification supersedes all major equipment items 11000 series specifications with sections containing control requirements. Features and options indicated in these 11000 series specifications are to be retained and included along with additional features, options, materials, submittals, and requirements stated here. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). B. ANSI/NFPA 70- National Electrical Code (NEC). C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). D. Factory Mutual (FM). E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature and specifications. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. D. CPT Sizing Information: Provide Manufacturer's 120V load analysis as required in Section 2.06. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (NEC). B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and shown; install in accordance with UL requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS M: 5/13/2019 13315- 1 /6 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL PANELS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Hennessey Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman Engineering. 3. The EMF Company. 4. Weigman Company. 5. N.E.M.A. Enclosure Mfg. Co. B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01630- Product Substitutions and Procedures. 2.02 PANEL MATERIALS A. All outdoor enclosures are to be stainless steel rated NEMA 4X or NEMA 3R as indicated on plans. B. All indoor enclosures in non-air conditioned spaces are to be stainless steel rated NEMA 4X or NEMA 3R as indicated on plans. C. All indoor enclosures in air conditioned spaces are to be painted steel rated NEMA 1 or NEMA 12. D. Backpanel for mounting components is to be 12 gauge steel minimum finished in white enamel. E. Power Supplies. 1. Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) or battery backup system shall be provided in all SCADA monitoring and control panels as follows: a. Size the supplies for all internal equipment plus an additional 20% spare capacity. b. Provide 60 minutes battery back-up capability at full load. c. Provide relay option card for indication of"On UPS Power" and "Low Battery Level". d. For outdoor panels provide an UPS and battery rated for operation at up to 50 degrees C. e. Provide manufacturer's hot-swappable maintenance bypass switch. 2. Provide isolated DC power for field transmitters and devices as specified and/or shown in the Contract Drawings. 3. Analog signal loop power supplies shall be redundant. F. Wiring: 1. Power wiring shall be 300 volt, type THWN stranded copper, No. 14 AWG size, for 120V service. M: 5/13/2019 13315- 2/6 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL PANELS 2. Discrete wiring shall be 300-volt type THWN stranded copper, sized for the current carried, but not smaller than No. 16 AWG. 3. Analog signal wiring shall be 300 volt, stranded copper in twisted shield pairs, no smaller than No. 18 AWG. 4. Panel wiring shall be routed within wire troughs or panduits. 5. Hinge wiring shall be secured at each end with the bend portion protected by a plastic sleeve... 6. Analog or do wiring shall be separated from any ac power or control wiring by at least six inches. 7. Each wire shall be uniquely identified using plastic, snap-on or permanent adhesive wrap-on numbered tags. 8. Terminal blocks shall be provided for all field wiring entering the panel. Surge suppression shall be provided for all outdoor field wiring entering or leaving the panel. Five (5) spare terminal blocks shall be provided. 9. No more than one wire per screw and yoke termination. G. Doors: 1. All control panels shall have a hinged door for ease of access. A minimum of 80% of the panel interior shall be exposed by doors. 2. , Panel door openings shall be sealed and fully gasketed. 3. The inside of each door shall be equipped with a print pocket. 4. Two-door enclosures shall have a removable center post. 5. Sealed panel doors shall be equipped with quick-release latches H. Miscellaneous Equipment: 1. All panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of corrosion — inhibiting vapor capsules, Northern Instruments Model Zerust VC, Hoffman, model A-HCI, or equal. 2. All sealed panels shall be equipped with combination drain/breathers, Crouse- Hinds model ECD18; or equal. 3. When noted on drawings, panels shall be equipped with thermostatically controlled space heaters to maintain internal temperatures above dew point. 2.03 MOTOR PROTECTION A. Motors Powered and Controlled by SYSTEM SUPPLIER'S Control Panel. M: 5/13/2019 13315- 3/6 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C CONTROL PANELS 1. Motor disconnects shall be MCP type circuit breakers. 2. All three phase motors controlled by the SYSTEM SUPPLIER'S Control Panel shall have phase failure protection via phase failure monitoring relay or solid state overloads that feature phase failure protection. 3. For motors of 75HP or greater, include an adjustable cool down timer to prevent exceeding motor manufacturer's recommended starts per hour limit. B. Motors Powered by Others and Controlled by SYSTEM SUPPLIER'S Control Panel. 1. A phase failure contact (open on fail)will be provided by others for use by the SYSTEM SUPPLIER'S Control Panel. 2. For motors of 75HP or greater, include an adjustable cool down timer to prevent exceeding motor manufacturer's recommended starts per hour limit. 2.04 PLANT MAINS AND GENERATOR PROTECTION A. All individual motors or other loads powered by the SYSTEM SUPPLIER'S Control Panel or powered by others but controlled by the SYSTEM SUPPLIER'S Control Panel of 15 HP or greater shall have adjustable power on time delays of up to threw minutes. Timer adjustments are to be coordinated with other plant loads to avoid simultaneous starts'of multiple loads affecting feeders, mains, and generators. 2.05 DESIGN FOR CONTINUOUS OPERATION A. Excluding specifically intended batch operation panels, all control panels shall be configured to remain operable after short duration power failures using HAND-OFF- AUTO switches or RUN/STOP maintained toggle switches. START/STOP pushbuttons, PLC, or other control functions that interrupt continuous operations for non-batch applications and require operator action to reactivate panel processes require submittal and prior approval. 2.06 CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER (CPT) SIZING A. SYSTEM SUPPLIER is to submit a CPT sizing load analysis as part of product submittals. CPT size should include all loads indicated on the plans and all supplied loads required as part of this specification plus an additional 50%. 2.07 DEAD FRONT OPERABILITY A. Panel construction shall result in dead front operability for all operator functions. If normal operator functions require opening of the panel door, the panel shall be equipped with a 3-point latch and the operator shall remain shielded from any live exposed components. 2.08 CONTROLS DOCUMENTATION A. Control diagrams submitted under Section 1.02 shall be electrically complete and encompass all control components and their location. This shall include phase failure relays, RUN/STOP switches, SCADA contacts, emergency STOP push buttons, M: 5/13/2019 13315-4/6 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation l&C CONTROL PANELS permissive switches, and other components that may be remote to the SYSTEM SUPPLIER'S Control Panel. Operating entity will have a single document for troubleshooting specific equipment items. Failure to comply with this Section will result in rejection of SYSTEM SUPPLIER'S Control Panel. 2.09 OTHER FEATURES A. Space Heaters: Provide minimum 150 watt strip-type space heaters.with an individual thermostat in each section. Use heaters rated for 240V, producing the required wattage when operated at 120V. B. All panel indicators are to push-to-test type LED. C. Circuit breakers and starters are to be NEMA rated. D. Panel layout shall facilitate bottom entry of all conduits utilizing myers hubs. E. Panels larger than 24"X 24"shall include a troubleshooting light, LED, 400 lumen minimum. F. For customer control connections, provide a separate 30A terminal block. Contacts closures intended for alarm, autodialer, or PLC use shall be rated 5A minimum. Contacts that carry control currents used for starter coils shall be rated 10A minimum. G. Panel shall be equipped with integral surge protection for incoming 480V power. Panels that use telephone lines shall include telephone surge protection. H. Panel internal wiring shall not be smaller than#14 AWG for all 120V circuitry and#12 AWG for all 240V and 480V circuitry. I. Maintain NEC required minimum spacing for intrinsically safe circuits. Label intrinsically . safe circuits. J. Supplied display screens, TFT panels, HMI panels, touch screens, LCD screens, or any operator interface panels shall be full sunlight viewable utilizing "Actively Enhanced Bright Active Matrix TFT Display"or similar technology. Minimum brightness in candelas per square meter(Cd/M2) or nits shall be 1000 for displays of 17" and below. Contrast ratio as measured in full sunlight shall be greater than 5:1. Shields, covers, shades, and screens are not allowed for achieving this contrast. Display screens shall be CrystalVue, VBond, StealthVU, High-Bright, Vartech Systems, Panel Bright or equal manufacturer or technology capable of achieving required full sunlight viewing. All display panels shall be NEMA 4/4X rated minimum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Transport, handle and install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. All panel mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. M: 5/13/2019 13315- 5/6 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation l&C CONTROL PANELS C. Free standing panels shall be mounted with four corner stainless steel anchors minimum. D. Field mounted panels shall include an equipment pad with 3' minimum front operator area clear of obstructions. Maintain NEC required clear front(or rear if applicable) working space free from obstructions or grounded components. E. Ground in accordance with Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding. F. Label all wires with heat shrink markers per Section 16195. END OF SECTION M: 5/13/2019 13315- 6/6 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C -HMI HARDWARE &SOFTWARE SECTION 13320 I&C - HMI HARDWARE &SOFTWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Control System HMI hardware and software requirements. B. The Work specified herein shall be performed by the same SYSTEM SUPPLIER as that defined in Specification Section 13300. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Specification Section 13300: General Requirements B. Specification Section 13325: System Programming. C. Division 16 - Electrical. All conduits are provided and installed under Division 16, Electrical. With the exception of certain specified special manufacturer's cables, all wiring and cables are provided and installed under Division 16, Electrical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature and specifications. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. D. Descriptive literature covering the HMI application software and its capabilities. E. Identification of any features that are optional additions beyond those provided by the base package F. Licensing costs and break-points for additional users, including all options. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TECHNOLOGY OBSOLESCENCE MITIGATION A. Due to rapidly evolving technology of the equipment specified herein, the requirements specified are to establish a baseline for the type of equipment required. Provide the latest hardware and software of similar specification at the time of purchase equivalent in cost to that which is specified. The procedure for submitting and releasing the equipment shall be as follows: 1. SYSTSEM SUPPLIER shall submit for approval the required data for the M: 1/23/2019 13320- 1 /5 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation IBC - HMI HARDWARE &SOFTWARE equipment as part of the Hardware submittal. 2. Equipment shall be ordered as late as possible dependent on the construction schedule to ensure the latest equipment available is provided. Just prior to ordering, resubmit for approval the required data of the latest available hardware and software equivalent in cost to that which is specified. No equipment shall be ordered more than 3 months prior to when it is needed to be continuously used on the project, unless it is determined to impede the construction schedule. 2.02 TOUCHSCREEN INTEREFACE - PANEL PC A. General 1. Operator interfaces shall be compatible with programmable logic controllers specified. 2. PLC shall be designated "Master". Other network connected components such as an autodialer shall monitor data registers, PLC addresses, or I/O points for the purpose of providing alarm or monitoring functions only but shall not be allowed to alter data registers, PLC addresses, I/O points, or PLC program in any way. 3. Provide an operator interface unit in face of auto-sensory panel that will allow operator to view and change all set points B. RAM 1. 12MB or Greater C. Storage 1. Flash D. Operating System 1. Microsoft Windows CE E. Display 1. Sunlight Readable 1,000 nit (minimum) 2. 15"TFT-LCD 3. 800x600 resolution 4. 50,000 Backlight Lifetime Hours 5. Touch Screen: 5 wire resistive F. Electrical 1. 9-36 VDC - M: 1/23/2019 13320- 2/5 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation IBC - HMI HARDWARE & SOFTWARE G. Ratings 1. IP65 Front Panel/NEMA 4X 2. VESA 100 x 100 3. Fanless design 4. Operating Temperature 32°F-113°F 5. Certification CE/ FCC Class A/ RoHS H. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Siemens Simatic TP1500 Comfort Outdoor, Model: 6AV2124-0QC13-0AX0 2. No exceptions. 2.03 SOFTWARE A. General 1. SCADA software shall be commercially available off-the shelf and shall be non- proprietary. 2. Software shall be a Client/Server architecture. No Microsoft Client Access Licenses (CAL) shall be required for full installation (thick) or browser-based (thin) clients. Terminal Services shall not be required. 3. Software shall not require dedicated server-level PC hardware for any individual system components. 4. Software shall support an automatic, orderly shutdown when switching to UPS backup power and power levels drop to a predefined setpoint. Software shall support automatically restart to full operation without user intervention. 5. Software shall provide a mechanism to backup and restore the entire application configuration. 6. Integrated software help manuals shall be provided to assist operators and maintenance personnel with operational and configuration tasks. B. Historian 1. Software shall include an integrated, no-cost historian and historical database, but also be capable of using a 3rd party database such as Oracle, SQL.or MySQL. 2. The historian and its historical data storage shall not require dedicated server computers. 3. Historian shall be capable of logging up to 4,000 values per second. M: 1/23/2019 13320- 3/5 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C - HMI HARDWARE &SOFTWARE C. Trending 1. Software shall support preconfigured plots of real-time and historical data as integrated elements of graphical process displays. 2. Software shall allow users to generate ad-hoc plots of historical data by clicking on each of the values to be trended. Selected groups shall be recordable for future recall. 3. Software shall display historical and real-time data in both plot and tabular format. Historical and real-time plotted values shall be shown in a continuous, uninterrupted, scrolling fashion, D. Drivers • 1. Software shall support an unlimited number of field devices and different I/O drivers in the same application. 2. Software shall include I/O drivers for a variety of devices and protocols such as: a. Protocols - Modbus, Profibus, Profinet, DF1, Ethernet/IP (CIP), DNP3, Hostlink, FINS, BSAP, SNMP Client. b. Other - DDE Client, OPC Client to support OPC Servers from 3rd party software providers. 3. Software shall support the development of additional I/O drivers where necessary. 4. Software shall support multiple communications protocols over a single communications port. 5. Software shall provide tools for polling telemetry devices (e.g. RTUs)directly. Software shall allow real-time tuning of each device's polling frequency without interrupting the polling cycle or restarting the application. To optimize I/O communications for telemetry applications, the polling order shall be configurable and polling shall be asynchronous (if permitted by the remote telemetry unit.) 6. Software shall support writing to multiple output tags via a single write request. This shall allow writing a set of default values to a set group of field device registers. 7. Tools shall include methods for monitoring communication statistics and reporting errors for each I/O driver. Software shall support radio diagnostics monitoring for radio modems (e.g. Dataradio/Calamp, MDS.) E. Security 1. Software shall include a security system with privilege and role based user accounts. Level-based access shall not be acceptable. M: 1/23/2019 13320-4/5 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation l&C - HMI HARDWARE& SOFTWARE 2. Security system shall support an unlimited number of user accounts, roles, and access privileges. System shall allow creation of an unlimited number of additional security privileges where necessary. 3. User passwords must be configurable to require a minimum length, contain alphanumeric characters, and expire after a pre-set period. User passwords shall be stored in an encrypted format. 4. System shall allow changes to user accounts, roles and privileges while the application is running. Changes shall become effective immediately. 5. User login and logout activity shall be recorded in the application event log. Disabling accounts after X failed attempts shall be supported. 6. System shall provide a mechanism to limit client access to specific IP addresses. F. Licenses 1. Provide one development license for each project 2. Provide one full runtime license for each interface, computer, or display installed. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Siemens WinCC-Comfort with Key(provide latest release) 2. No exceptions PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 13300 END OF SECTION M: 1/23/2019 13320- 5/5 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C PLC HARDWARE SECTION 13321 I&C PLC HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL A. Description of System: 1. Section describes programmable control and monitoring for specific processes specified in other sections. 2. Provide enclosures to enclose power supplies, processor/memory card, and I/O cards. 3. PLC Hardware, as specified herein, shall be furnished by the same SYSTEM SUPPLIER furnishing services and equipment as outlined in 13300. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements. 1. Design to meet following minimum criteria: a. NEMA ICS 2-230 arc test. b. ANSI C37.90A 1974 Surge withstand capability. c. NEMA ICS 3-304-42. d. Section 2 of IEEE 472-1974. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification to Engineer for approval. 1.04 RELATED WORK A. Specification Section 13300 defines work associated with the overall Control System B. Specification Section 13315 defines work associated with control panels and enclosures housing the various elements of the Control System C. Specification Section 13320 defines work associated with the HMI system that will interface the system with the PLC Hardware defined hereunder. D. Physical Installation of field instruments is performed under Division 15, Mechanical. E. Provision of all field and power wiring, except manufacturer-supplied cables, and installation of all wiring is performed under Division 16, Electrical. M:3/18/2020 13321 — 1 /6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C PLC HARDWARE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Allen Bradley Compact Logix (no substitutions). 2.02 GENERAL A. System(s)shall consist of following. 1. Processor with memory. 2. I/O hardware. 3. Power supplies. 4. Operator interface. 5. Cables necessary for compliance with specification. 2.03 PROCESSOR WITH MEMORY A. Total minimum I/O interface capability as specified and shown on Drawings. B. Program execution of time of less than 20 ms/k. C. Provide with necessary mounting hardware and interconnecting cable. D. Circuit cards shall be capable of following. 1. Operating in temperatures of OC to 55C. 2. Operating in humidity of 0%to 95%, noncondensing. 3. Easy replacement. E. Utilize 120 vac, 60 Hz power. F. Provide circuitry to communicate between processor, I/O hardware, and programming terminal. G. Provide manufacturer's memory (SD) card. 1. Memory size 24MB H. Internal diagnostics shall be available to user for troubleshooting. I. PLC shall halt if any of following occur. M:3/18/2020 13321 —2/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I84C PLC HARDWARE 1. Memory parity error. 2. Communications error between CPU AND I/O. 3. Loss of logic power to any part of the system. 4. Halt or interruption of the memory scan. 5. Detection of incomplete ladder rung in memory. • J. Processor shall have battery backup to prevent program loss on power failure. K. PLC Features: 1. Symbols to resemble conventional relay logic symbols. 2. Functions: a. Contact/coil status. b. Latching/unlatch. c. Force I/O. d. Data transfer. e. Four function math. f. Counting. g. Timing. h. Self-monitoring diagnostics. Shift registers. j. Transitional coils. k. Master control relay. 2.04 POWER SUPPLIES • A. 120 vac, 60 Hz power input. B. Integral PI filter. C. On-Off circuit breaker or finger-safe fused disconnect. D. 0.2% load regulation. E. Short circuit current limit protection. F. Crowbar overvoltage protection. G. 4 hour un-interruptible Power Supply. 2.05 I/O HARDWARE A. General: M:3/18/2020 13321 —3/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C PLC HARDWARE 1. Shield against electrical noise and RF. 2. Provide optical isolation to give 1,500 vdc isolation from wiring on other I/O modules. 3. Provide with field wiring arm terminal strips. B. Analog Input Modules: 1. Accept 1-5 vdc, 4-20 ma, 05 vdc, 10 vdc, 5 vdc, 10 vdc analog signals. 2. Analog conversion resolution of 12 bits. C. Analog Output Modules: 1. Output of 4-20 mAdc, 05 vdc, 10 vdc, 5 vdc, 10 vdc available. 2. Analog conversion resolution of 12 bits. 3. Output isolation available. D. Discrete Input Modules: 1. Monitor contact openings and closures from external devices. 2. Isolated 120 vac type. 3. LED lights for each input to indicate status. E. Discrete Output Modules: 1. Provide contact openings and closures to external devices. 2. Each output fused with blown fuse indicator light. 3. Each output to have indicator light to show output status. 4. Isolated output, 120 vac. F. Spares: 1. At minimum, the Contractor shall provide the spare parts under this contract as follows: a. Power Supply: Provide spare power supply for each model installed. b. Memory Cards: Provide spares for each type of card installed. M:3/18/2020 13321 —4/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I$C PLC HARDWARE c. I/O Cards: Provide spares for each unique I/O module type installed. Provide two or 10 percent of installed quantity, whichever is greater. d. Network interface and communication modules: Provide one spare communication module for each unique communication module installed. 2. All parts to be in original protective packages and stored on site after acceptance by Engineer. 2.06 PLC SOFTWARE PACKAGES: A. Include necessary hardware and software to perform minimum following function. 1. Provide capability to program PLC functions on-line and off-line. 2. Display on-line status of I/O and registers. 3. Force I/O. 4. Search any option. 5. Edit PLC program. 6. Display comprehensive error code registers. 7. Direct connect to PLC or network. 8. Operational security shall be provided via user-defined password. 9. Capable of producing hard copy printout of ladder logic program. 10. Provide full annotation including rung comments, I/O, and register labels. 11. Load and record contents of memory B. Provide software and any required licenses or serial keys to INTEGRATION ENGINEER immediately after approval of PLC submittal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and wire in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.. Manufacturer's Field Services: M:3/18/2020 13321 —5/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C PLC HARDWARE 1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at job site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum of 1 manday, travel time excluded, for assistance during plant startup, and training of Owner's personnel for plant operation. 3.03 TRAINING A. Hardware Maintenance: Provide a minimum of one 8-hour day of hardware training for up to three of the OWNER's personnel in the maintenance of the PLC hardware which shall include: 1. Training in standard hardware maintenance for the equipment provided. 2. Specific training for the actual hardware configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up. 3. Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures. 4. Troubleshooting and diagnosis. 5. Component removal and replacement. 6. Periodic maintenance. 3.04 INPUTS/OUTPUTS A. The following Tables define the I/O points for the system. The Tables separately identify hard-wired associated with each PLC. Control system internally derived tags are not shown. END OF SECTION M:3/18/2020 13321 —6/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Attachement-A 1/7/2021 Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehab LIFT STATION - PLC I/O Schedule PLC Name 10 Type Terminal No. I/O,Description • RLY/DVC Address/Tag Units Scale Max Field Chk Notes PLC-1 DI 0 LIFT PUMP NO.1 OVERTEMP DI:00 b PLC-1 DI 1 LIFT PUMP NO.1 SEAL FAIL DI:01 b PLC-1 DI 2 LIFT PUMP NO.1 OVERLOAD DI:02 b PLC-1 DI 3 LIFT PUMP NO.2 OVERTEMP DI:03 b PLC-1 DI 4 LIFT PUMP NO.2 SEAL FAIL DI:04 b PLC-1 DI 5 LIFT PUMP NO.2 OVERLOAD DI:05 b PLC-1 DI 6 BACKUP CONTROL DI:06 b PLC-1 DI 7 PHASE FAIL RELAY DI:07 b PLC-1 DI 8 LIFT PUMP NO.1 IN HAND DI:08 b PLC-1 DI 9 LIFT PUMP NO.1 IN AUTO DI:09 b PLC-1 DI 10 LIFT PUMP NO.2 IN HAND DI:10 b PLC-1 DI 11 LIFT PUMP NO.2 IN AUTO DI:11 b PLC-1 DI 12 LIFT PUMP NO.1 RUNNING DI:12 b PLC-1 DI 13 LIFT PUMP NO.2 RUNNING DI:13 b PLC-1 DI 14 CONTROL SELECTOR SWITCH-PLC DI:14 b PLC-1 DI - _ 15 CONTROL SELECTOR SWITCH-BACKUP DI:15 b PLC-1 DI 16 LIFT PUMP NO.3 OVERTEMP DI:16 b PLC-1 DI 17 LIFT PUMP NO.3 SEAL FAIL DI:17 b PLC-1 DI 18 LIFT PUMP NO.3 OVERLOAD DI:18 b PLC-1 DI 19 LIFT PUMP NO.3 IN HAND DI:19 b PLC-1 DI 20 LIFT PUMP NO.3 IN AUTO DI:20 b PLC-1 DI 21 LIFT PUMP NO.3 RUNNING DI:21 b PLC-1 DI 22 SPARE DI:22 b PLC-1 DI 23 SPARE DI:23 b PLC-1 DI 24 CONTROL PANEL INTRUSION DI:24 b PLC-1 DI 25 FLOAT-ALL PUMPS OFF DI:25 b PLC-1 DI 26 FLOAT-LEAD PUMP CALL DI:26 b PLC-1 DI. 27 FLOAT-LAG 1 PUMP CALL DI:27 b PLC-1 DI 28 FLOAT-LAG 2 PUMP CALL DI:28 b PLC-1 DI 29 FLOAT-HIGH LEVEL DI:29 b PLC-1 DI 30 GENERATOR RUN DI:30 b PLC-1 DI 31 ATS IN EMERGENCY DI:31 b 13321-I&C PLC Hardware_IO LIST(174-0001)LS LIFT STATION Page 1 of 2 City of Pearland Attachement-A 1/7/2021 Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehab LIFT STATION - PLC I/O Schedule PLC Name 10 Type Terminal No. I/O Description RLY/DVC Address/Tag Units Scale Max Field Chk Notes PLC-1 DI 32 ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM RUNNING DI:32 b PLC-1 DI 33 ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT DI:33 b PLC-1 DI 34 SPARE DI:34 b PLC-1 DI 35 SPARE DI:35 b PLC-1 DI 36 SPARE DI:36 b PLC-1 DI 37 SPARE DI:37 b PLC-1 DI 38 SPARE DI:38 b PLC-1 DI 39 SPARE DI:39 b PLC-1 DI 40, SPARE DI:40 b PLC-1 DI 41 SPARE DI:41 b _ _ PLC-1 DI 42 SPARE DI:42 b PLC-1 DI 43 SPARE D1:43 b PLC-1 DI 44. SPARE DI:44 b PLC-1 DI 45 SPARE DI:45 b PLC-1 DI 46 SPARE DI:46 b PLC-1 DI 47 SPARE DI:47 b _ PLC-1 DO 0 LIFT PUMP NO.1 START/STOP DO:00 b PLC-1 DO 1 LIFT PUMP NO.2 START/STOP DO:01 b PLC-1 DO 2 LIFT PUMP NO.3 START/STOP DO:02 b PLC-1 DO 3 SPARE _ _ DO:03 b PLC-1 DO 4 PLC TRANSFER CONTROL DO:04 b _ PLC-1 DO 5 PLC FAILURE DO:05 b PLC-1 DO 6 SPARE DO:06 b PLC-1 DO 7 SPARE DO:07 b PLC-1 DO 8 SPARE DO:08 b PLC-1 DO 9 SPARE DO:09 b PLC-1 DO 10 SPARE DO:10 b PLC-1 DO 11 SPARE _ __ DO:11 b PLC-1 DO 12 SPARE DO:12 b PLC-1 DO 13 SPARE DO:13 b _ PLC-1 DO 14 SPARE DO:14 b PLC-1 DO 15 SPARE DO:15 b PLC-1 Al 0 WET WELL LEVEL PRIMARY(RADAR) AI:00 FT PLC-1 Al 1 WET WELL LEVEL BACKUP(SUBMERSIBLE) AI:01 FT PLC-1 Al 2 DISCHARGE FLOW METER AI:02 GPM PLC-1 Al 3 SPARE AI:03 - PLC-1 Al 4 LP NO.1 PHA MOTOR CURRENT AI:04 AMPS PLC-1 Al 5 LP NO.1 PHB MOTOR CURRENT Al:05 AMPS 13321-I&C PLC Hardware_IO LIST(174-0001)LS LIFT STATION Page 2 of 2 City of Pearland I&C— NETWORK& COMMUNICATIONS Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation EQUIPMENT SECTION 13322 I&C— NETWORK&COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Scope: 1. This Section of the Specifications describes the requirements for Network and Communications Equipment and Systems to be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications as listed in the Related Work paragraph of this Section. 2. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER defined in Specification Section 13300 shall be responsible for coordinating all aspects of the network communications system. 3. It is the ultimate responsibility of the Contractor to furnish a complete and fully operable system that supports the required functions specified elsewhere. The Contractor is to assume full responsibility for additional costs which may result from unauthorized deviations from the specifications. 4. Equipment found to be defective prior to system acceptance shall be replaced and installed at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and will be returned un-reviewed. B. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable. Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., sufficient to confirm that the equipment provides every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall be clearly indicated. C. Furnish, as prescribed under the General Requirements, all required submittals covering the items included under this section and its associated sections of the work. D. Provide all shop drawing submittals on thumb drive in PDF format. E. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer& Model information 2. Dimensions, ratings, and data on featuresand components 3. Equipment Brochure 4. Accessories M: 1/23/2019 13322— 1 /4 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C—NETWORK& COMMUNICATIONS Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation EQUIPMENT PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PANEL MOUNTED INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCH A. General 1. Provide an industrial managed Ethernet switch for connection to the control network backbone as shown in the Drawings and specified herein. B. Physical Features 1. Minimum fiber uplinks: 4 x 100/1000 SFP ports. 2. Minimum copper ports: 8 x 10/100/1000 TX RJ45 ports. 3. Operating temperature: 0 to 130 °F. 4. Power: Redundant 24 VDC power supplies. 5. Enclosure: Metal case, DIN-rail mountable. C. Network Features: 1. Fault tolerant for use in a ring topology if shown on drawings. The switch shall be able to detect a blocked port and redirect data flow in the opposite direction within 30ms. 2. The switch shall come equipped with a dry contact rated for 120 VAC 5A that shall be used for common trouble alarm. The alarm shall be programmable. If the contact cannot use 120 VAC 5A, provide the necessary 24 VDC power from the PLC panel and provide interposing relays in the PLC panel. D. Manufacturers 1. MOXA EDS-408A 2. Or Approved Equal 2.02 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION CABLES A. Subject to compliance with the contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Belden B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings,features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Cables for Ethernet: Category 5e Above Grade Cable: Sunlight and Oil Resistant U/UTP 003 Cable, non-plenum. 1. Conductors: 4 bonded pair 24 AWG Bare Copper M: 1/23/2019 13322—2/4 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C— NETWORK&COMMUNICATIONS Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation • EQUIPMENT 2. Insulation: Polyolefin 3. Jacket: PVC with 600 volt rated color of jacket to match as follows: a. Green—Phone/Data b. Red—FIRE Alarm c. Blue—SCADA 4. Transmission Standards:ANSI/TIA568C 5. Nominal Velocity of Propagation: 69% 6. Flame Test Method: CMR Regulatory Compliance 7. Model: Belden 7957A D. Cables for Ethernet: Category 6 Above Grade Cable: Sunlight and Oil Resistant U/UTP 1. Cable, non-plenum. 2. Conductors: 4 bonded pair 23 AWG Bare Copper 3. Insulation: Polyolefin 4. Overall Cabling Separator Material of Foamed Polyolefin Tape 5. Jacket: PVC with 300 volt rated Color of jacket to match as follows: 6. Green— Phone/Data 7. Red — FIRE Alarm 8. Blue—SCADA 9. Transmission Standards: Category 6-TIA 568.C.2 10. Nominal Velocity of Propagation: 72 % 11. Flame Test Method: UL1666 Vertical Riser 12. Model: Belden 7953A 2.03 ETHERNET SURGE PROTECTOR A. Subject to compliance with the contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Phoenix Contact 2. PolyPhaser M: 1/23/2019 13322—3/4 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland I&C—NETWORK &COMMUNICATIONS Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation EQUIPMENT 3. Cooper Bussman B. Environmental 1. Operating temperature: -40 degrees F to 176 degrees F 2. Operating humidity: 95% non-condensing for indoor applications 3. Storage Temperature: -40 to 176 degrees F C. Physical 1. DIN Rail Mountable indoors and pole mountable outdoors applications 2. I/O connectors: RJ-45 3. Power over Ethernet POE+ to IEEE802.3 at up to 57VDC D. Functional Performance 1. Protection: handles 100 or more lightning strikes at surge levels of 8/20uSec at 6kV/3kA 2. Standard: Compliant to IEC61000-4-5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals. END OF SECTION M: 1/23/2019 13322—4/4 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING SECTION 13325 I&C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PART 1 GENERAL • 1.01 SUMMARY A. Scope: 1. This section defines requirements associated with programming the Control System, PLC, HMI and other application software. 2. The Work specified herein shall be performed by the SYSTEM SUPPLIER defined in Specification Section 13300. 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall provide an application programming design package that contains a written description of each control strategy. This submittal shall be Approved or Approved as Noted prior to any PLC programming Work. The descriptions shall lead the user through the major subsections of the programs. They shall generally describe the programming methods and techniques that will be used to implement the functional requirements of this Specification. B. Software Version and Revision Control: Once development begins all software versions shall be confirmed with the OWNER to ensure compatibility in deployment, including operating system, database, and application versions. C. A final documentation package that includes: 1. Licenses in the OWNER's name for all software supplied 2. Final copies of all programming files on Compact Disk 3. A complete printout of all PLC program logic. 4. A complete Printout of device configuration settings, including but not limited to a. VFD b. Soft Starts c. ATS d. Multilin (motor protection relays) e. Ethernet Switch f. Cellular Router PART 2 PRODUCTS—(NOT USED) M: 1/23/2019 13325— 1 / 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GRAPHICAL STANDARDS Graphical standards listed below provide a base concept for the display screens. Graphic screens shall be coordinated with the City of Pearland prior to starting screen development. Failure to coordinate with the City is at the contractor's risk. Screens will be redeveloped as needed to meet the City's requirments at no additional costs. A. All operator graphic screens shall include an alarm list at the bottom indicating the most recent alarms colored as defined below under color standards and, at the top, tabs to allow the user to switch to key graphics including the process overview and the alarm list. B. All graphic screens shall, as closely as possible, depict the actual process equipment in three dimensional symbols with fill color depicting current status in accordance with the graphic standards defined below. C. For detailed process graphics where the process is continued on or continued from another graphic, software pushbuttons shall be provided to lead to the appropriate other graphic. D. The following colors shall be used: 1. Dark Grey—Screen background. 2. Light Grey— Piping. 3. White- Chemical injection points. 4. Bright Green— Running equipment or open valve. Modulating valves shall have the current percentage open in text adjacent to the symbol. 5. Bright Green Flashing— Equipment starting or valve opening or Equipment stopping or valve closing 6. Red— Equipment with an acknowledged, but not yet cleared alarm. 7. Red Flashing— Equipment with an unacknowledged alarm E. For all level signals: 1. Color fill the symbol for the tank or vessel proportionally to indicate the amount contained. 2. Indicate in text the volume contained. F. Equipment Status. Color the symbol for each piece of equipment to reflect its current status (e.g. running, stopped, failed, etc.) in accordance with the graphic standards. M: 1/23/2019 13325—2 / 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation IBC SYSTEM PROGRAMMING G. Equipment Control Status. Adjacent to each piece of equipment indicate its control status, where such is available, as follows: H. Local Hardware Hand/Off/Auto switch position in context sensitive text: Hand, Off, Auto. I. Process Graphic Detail Screens. Where necessary to give complete details of a specific process area, provide an additional screen that is accessible by clicking the equipment symbol on the Process Overview screen. J. Alarm Log. Provide a log of all alarms issued by the system. The log shall include the date and time of detection. Provide the operator with the ability to sort the displayed log by any combination of the following: 1. Specific equipment. 2. Alarm description 3. Date and time. (occurrence, Acknowledgement, and return to normal) K. Event Log. Provide a log of all events issued by the system. The log shall include all alarms, operator control commands and set point changes, alarm acknowledgements and return to normal occurrences following an alarm condition. The date and time of occurrences shall be included together with, where applicable, the identity of the operator. Provide the operator with the ability to sort the displayed log by any combination of the following: 1. Operator. 2. Specific equipment. 3. Event description. 4. Date and time. 3.02 General Features A. Fine tuning and adjustment of all operational setpoints. B. Lead/Lag pump control and pump alternation. C. Pump flow/production report for equipment with flow meters. D. Detailed record and trending of facilities operations to help troubleshoot unexpected failures. E. Trending data'available for review and analysis to help optimize pumping operations. F. Provide overview screen to monitor entire facility single screen. G. Provide power consumption and pump efficiencies with integration to power monitors or motor protection relays and devices. M: 1/23/2019 13325—3/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation l&C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING H. Open source programming —the City, District, or Municipality owns the program and has complete control over it. Copy of final programs shall be saved on USB flash drive along with any required passwords to access or modify programs. Owner may choose any third party integrator or programmer to troubleshoot or modify existing programs with the owner's login credentials. 3.03 General Program Functions and Requirements A. The following general conditions will apply to all equipment and devices controlled or monitored by the SCADA system. 1. All I/O points monitored by the SCADA system will be recorded and trended at a pre-defined intervals on the Historian Server. Critical points such as levels and pressures used for state agency reports will be recorded indefinitely (as allowable by hard drive storage), non-critical points may only be recorded for 3-6 months unless otherwise requested. 2. Equipment & Device Status a. The On/Off status of all equipment and devices monitored by the SCADA system will be displayed on the appropriate HMI screen(s). 3. Elapsed Time Meters on HMI a. Elapsed time meters will be provided for all equipment with a "Run" status input to the SCADA system. (1) ETMs for the respective equipment will be displayed on the detailed HMI screens that show the run status of that equipment. (2) 4 ETM types (a) Current Runtime (b) Previous Runtime (c) Daily Runtime (d) Overall Runtime 4. Operational Control Modes Multiple control modes will be available through the control system. Mode of operation and status of selector switches shall be displayed on the HMI. a. Manual Operation Pumps to be manually controlled with two modes of operation. The status of the MCC or control panel mounted Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) and Primary- Backup selector switches will determine the mode of operation for the equipment: -- M: 1/23/2019 13325—4/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation 18,C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING i. Local Mode:When the selector switch is in the Hand or Off positions, the SCADA system will indicate that the pump is in Local mode and )unavailable to be controlled by the PLC. The SCADA system cannot control the equipment when it is in local mode. ii. Primary Mode - Manual: when the selector switch is in the Primary position and the HOA in the Auto position, the SCADA system will indicate that the equipment is in Primary mode. While in Primary mode,the user will have the ability to place the equipment in Manual. This allows the user to control the equipment via HMI start and stop push buttons. iii. All equipment automatically controlled by the SCADA system will have a "Primary Mode — Manual" means of operation as described above. This mode allows the users to override the automatic control and manually operate the equipment from the HMI via onscreen push buttons. b. Automatic Operation. i. Primary Mode - Automatic: when the selector switch is in the Primary position and the HOA in the Auto position, the SCADA system will indicate that the pump is in Primary mode. While in Primary mode, the user will have the ability to place the equipment in Automatic. This allows for the PLC to control the equipment automatically based on the process variables and operator setpoints. ii. Backup Mode - Automatic: When the selector switch is in the Backup position and the HOA is in the auto position, the SCADA system will indicate that pump control is in the backup mode. While in Backup mode, the SCADA system cannot control the equipment. All parameters will still be monitored and recorded while in backup mode by the SCADA system. 5. All HMI setpoints will be password protected. 6. All HMI control push buttons will be password protected. Menu and screen navigation buttons do not require passwords. 7. Flow Rate Totalizer a. Each instantaneous flow rate signal will include a totalized value in the PLC program. b. The daily totalized flow will be recorded on the Historian Server. c. When a valve or pump is closed or stopped, the totalizer will stop accumulating. M: 1/23/2019 13325—5/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 3.04 Warnings and Alarms A. The PLC will be responsible for generating system warnings and alarms based on the status and measurements received from the input point to the system. Warnings and alarms can also be considered as non-critical and critical alarms respectively. Warnings will r:otify the operator that a condition or an event has occurred that is not normal. Warr)ings provide notifications to the operator only and do not affect the overall process cont iol of a facility, whereas an alarm is an indication of a system parameter that might no longer be safe to operate. As such, the PLC will return the equipment to the designated safe state in order to prevent damage or reduce the risk of a dangerous condition. 1. System Alarms a. All system alarms will be displayed and recorded on the HMI. The Alarm tag name along with a plain English description will be provided. The SCADA system will have two types of alarm classifications: System Warnings and System Alarms (1) System Warnings: Non-Critical alarms that do not affect or stop a process or equipment operation. (2) System Alarms: Critical alarms that stop or inhibit equipment operation. b. System Warnings and Alarms will be displayed in the alarm window on the HMI screens. The type of alarm will be clearly displayed next to the alarm message. For example, "High Current Alarm" may shut down a pump where "High Current Warning" allows the pump to continue to operate but notifies the operator of the abnormal condition. c. All alarms will include operator adjustable time delays such that momentarily input"flickers" caused by electrical disturbances do not cause false or"ghost" alarms. Alarms must be active for the duration of the time delay prior to displaying on the HMI and notifying the operator. 2. Analog Inputs a. The PLC program will contain a user adjustable alarm setpoints for the following conditions: (1) Extra Low (2) Low (3) High (4) Extra High (5) Signal Loss M: 1/23/2019 13325—6/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation l&C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING b. Signal-Loss alarms will be an indication that the analog 4-20mA signal is either under-range or over-range. Where analog signal is required for adequately controlling process or equipment, a signal-loss alarm shall prevent equipment from operating. PLC shall transfer to backup controls where available. c. Analog inputs shall be user scale-able through HMI setpoints. An adjustable max scaling setpoint is to be provided for each analog input. Hard-coded scaling within the PLC program is not allowed unless pre- approved by OWNER. d. Typical Analog Alarms might include the following: (1) GST Level (2) System Pressure (3) Well Flow (4) System Voltage/Current (5) Motor Voltage/Current 3. Fail to Respond Alarm a. All pumps, valves, and other equipment controlled by the PLC will generate a "Fail to Respond"Alarm when the device is called to operate and the feedback state is not received by the PLC within the preset time delay. b. Where the device stops operating prior to the PLC releasing the call command, the "Fail to Respond"Alarm will be generated. c. An active "Fail to Respond"Alarm will prevent that device from being called by the PLC until the alarm has been acknowledged and reset at the HMI. d. Typical Alarms might include the following: (1) Booster Pump Fail to Respond (2) Well Pump Fail to Respond (3) Flow Control Valve Fail to Respond 4. Process Equipment Off Warning a. If all equipment for a process is off, and that process that requires a pump, valve, or device to be on continuously, a System Warning will be generated after a preset time-delay. M: 1/23/2019 13325—7/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING b. A"Disable" button will be available on the HMI to disable and bypass the alarm. 5. Device Malfunction a. Equipment may have auxiliary devices that are monitored by SCADA. A device Malfunction alarm will be generated if the auxiliary device does not operate at the appropriate times. b. Such alarms may include: (1) Motor Heater Failure (2) Chlorinator Solenoid Valve Failure (3) Air Compressor Solenoid Valve Failure 6. Excessive Run-Time Warning a. The PLC program will initiate a warning when equipment operates for an extended amount of time. The time setting is user adjustable. b. Booster Pumps c. Fans d. Well Pump e. Air Compressor 3.05 Control Descriptions A. Wet Well Pump Down (Lift Pump Controls) 1. Allow for automatic and manual control of 3 lift pumps. Automatic control to be based on wet well transmitter(s)4-20mA signal. 2. The program will allow for user adjustable lead/lag settings to alternate between lift pumps. 3. The program will automatically skip to next pump if called pump is unavailable. 3.06 PROGRAMMING ACCEPTANCE A. Regardless of any submittal approvals, final acceptance of the system programming will occur during the final Demonstration Test. B. The ENGINEER/OWNER reserves the right to require minor changes in the graphics and programming during the test. M: 1/23/2019 13325—8/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 3.07 TESTING, START-UP, CALIBRATION, AND TRAINING 1.01 Programming Schedule. A. It is the contractor's responsibility to incorporate the following programming schedules and milestones within the project's overall construction schedule. Failure to include the required milestones which may result in project delays are at the contractor's expense and at no additional cost to owner. 1. Kick-off Meeting a. Notify Engineer and Owner of project start date and submit overall construction schedule. 2. Internal Testing a. 4 weeks prior to the required control panel Factory shop testing, contractor to notify Engineer of Shop testing date. During this time the programmer shall internally test all programs and develop testing reports as needed to ensure program functionality. 3. Factory Shop Testing a. The control system shall be tested via a full simulation at the factory, prior to shipment, so as to demonstrate that each component is operational and meets the requirements of these specifications. b. The Panel fabricator shall conduct test routine for all I/O wiring and interconnect wiring of components. Test results shall be certified, with written documentation provided to the Engineer upon test completion. Factory testing may be witnessed by the Engineer or Owner. 4. Onsite Readiness Test a. Contractor shall schedule ORT with Electrician, Panel Fabricator, Integration Engineer, and other related sub-contractors to conduct field stat-up tests, field I/O checkout, and control strategy testing. The I/O checkout will demonstrate I/O functionality, analog scaling confirmation, historical data collection, alarm confirmation, security configuration, and network communications. The control strategy testing will confirm manual and automatic operation of the equipment from the SCADA system, tuning of loops, and process set point adjustments. 5. Functional Site testing a. Perform function testing of all equipment controlled or monitored by control system. Contractor shall provide a checklist for all electrical, control and instrumentation functions and send to Engineer for approval. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer on a paragraph-by-paragraph basis. Each test shall be • witnessed and signed off by the Contractor and the Engineer upon M: 1/23/2019 13325—9/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation I&C SYSTEM PROGRAMMING satisfactory completion. 6. Acceptance testing a. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer at least two (2) weeks prior to the commencement date of the field tests. After tests are completed and with system fully operational, system shall run continuously for a period of 7 days without failure. Any failures shall be repaired and test shall start over again. 7. Training a. The programmer shall conduct a training session with the facility's operators utilizing the actual system. Training time shall be dedicated to actual operation and use of the control system as encountered in day-to- day operations. The training shall provide Owner personnel with basic proficiency in display screen navigation and control functions pertaining to the specified system. END OF SECTION M: 1/23/2019 13325— 10/ 10 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16012 ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work shall include providing materials and equipment required for installation of complete and functioning electrical system as specified and as shown on the drawings. B. This section is an integral part of all Specification Sections related to electrical, control and instrumentation construction under this contract. Conditions of this section are paramount to all other conditions in applicable sections and shall supersede all other conditions and requirements. C. Electrical Control and Instrumentation Plans & Specifications are representative of the design intent and may not contain minute details normally associated with normally accepted electrical construction, as described in applicable codes or as described in manufacturer's literature. Contractor shall provide all appurtenances normally associated with a particular equipment or device, and as required for a properly operating system. 1.02 MAJOR ITEMS OF WORK AS FOLLOWS A. Installation of Control Panel B. Installation of Pump Junction Boxes C. Installation of Transducer Based Level Measurement System D. Installation of Natural Gas Generator and Piping E. Installation of Autodialer System 1.03 PLANT CONTROL SYSTEM , A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete motor control panel. The control panel shall include but shall not be limited to all circuit breakers, motor starters, indicating lights, selector switches, surge protectors, phase failure relays, elapsed time meters, alarm horn, push button, control transformers, power supplies, pressure switches, interlock wiring, terminal blocks, nameplates, and all other associated items required to provide a workable system. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Where submittals for a particular equipment, device or material item vary from that specified or shown on plan drawings, and where that item is not specifically noted as acceptable and, where installation of submitted item results in improper or undesirable operation of the system, Contractor shall be liable for removal and/or replacement of that item with the item specified or shown on plan drawings at no additional cost to Owner. M:6/23/2015 16012 - 1 /4 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL WORK C. With each submittal include a copy of the applicable specification(s) Page(s)for the item submitted and mark "complies" or "non-compliance" or "exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES A. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate electrical power, telephone, data or special purpose line installation with utility companies. Within 30 days after award of contract, Electrical contractor shall contact utility company and owner and shall request service needed. B. It is Electrical Contractors sole responsibility to assure that utility company and owner are notified and are kept aware of requirements. C. Contractor shall provide all conduit, conductors and termination equipment as needed for utilities and shall coordinate with utility companies for installation requirements and shall provide installation constructed according to the utility company standards whether or not such is shown in detail or plans. • D. Electrical Contractor shall review all sections of the plans including Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Instrumentation, Process, Architectural, and Electrical and shall note all electrical and/or requirements for devices and equipment shown or implied, and shall provide service accordingly for a complete operating electrical system. E. Electrical Contractor shall provide all programming set-up, adjustments and testing of devices or equipment included under this contract unless specifically excluded or unless equipment is not provided by Electrical Contractor. F. General Contractor is specifically responsible for coordination of all electrical systems, devices and equipment provided or installed under this contract and shall assure that all requirements by all trades are met such as to insure a complete and operating electrical, control, process or instrumentation system. G. Electrical Contractor shall be experienced with all types of electrical systems covered under this contract. No work shall be undertaken where Contractor's firm, project supervisors and project electrical workers have not had recent experience in similar projects in area or project location. Contractor will be required to furnish proof of experience where requested by Owner or Engineer or their Representatives. H. General Contractors Project Manager or his Assistant shall be familiar with types of electrical construction required by this project in order to determine that all subcontractors work in conformance with the plans and specifications. I. Contractor shall assure that all systems have been properly installed, adjusted and tested prior to final inspection, unless, Engineer has been duly notified in writing that certain equipments are not ready for final testing and such is acceptable with Engineer. J. Additional site visits, inspections, and tests conducted by Engineer due to systems not being ready at designated time of final inspection may result in charges to Contractor by M.6/23/2015 16012 -2/4 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL WORK Engineer to pay for additional time of electrical inspectors not covered in Electrical Engineers scope of work. All charges will be at Engineer's standard rates. K. Contractor shall fully inspect all motors and nameplates, controls, conduit, wiring devices and other items before,starting work, ordering materials or submitting shop drawings in order to verify existing conditions are as shown on plans and shall immediately notify Engineer of any discrepancies between plans & specifications and existing conditions. Failure to do so may result in responsibility for any required changes in construction. L. At completion of project and before final inspection, Contractor shall provide the Electrical Engineer with full size blue prints, red-lined to reflect the As-Built electrical installation. Any variation from plans shall.be shown on each applicable plan sheet. • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials provided under all sections of the specifications shall be new and the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. All materials shall conform to the National Electrical Code and shall be approved and listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories. Materials described by manufacturer's name and catalog number are selected to set a definite standard of design and quality to be required. There is not any intention to discriminate against a product of another manufacturer, which is equally durable in construction, similar in design, and will serve the purpose for which it is intended. Within 30 days after award of the contract and before any materials and equipment are placed on order, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list including catalog numbers and descriptive matter, of all materials and equipment he proposes to provide. B. Materials and equipment specifications are general in coverage and may contain reference to construction items that apply in only particular situations and may not apply as a general rule for materials installed on this project. 2.02 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Electrical plans and specifications are not intended to discriminate against any particular manufacturer. Specific values shown for a particular manufacturer's product may vary slightly for another product. The Electrical Engineer reserves the right to interpret the electrical specifications and to make judgment as to acceptance of a product, regardless of minute details in the specifications or on the Plans. B. Specifications shall be reviewed for applicability of materials under certain conditions and in certain environments and, where not shown otherwise on plan drawings. These application directions shall be adhered to. C. Where a particular reference on drawing plans does not conform to standard acceptable construction methods for a particular type project, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and request a clarification before ordering materials or starting construction. M:6/23/2015 16012 -3/4 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL WORK PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP • A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with current NEC and local codes. Conduits exposed to the weather shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel (RGS) unless noted otherwise on plans. Conduit placed underground shall be schedule 40 PVC unless noted otherwise on plans. B. A fish wire shall be left in all conduits in which the permanent wiring is not installed. C. All fixtures, switch, and receptacle locations shall be approved by Engineer. D. Refer to other sections of this specification for controls. Under this section of the specifications, the Contractor shall install the control devices and provide control wiring switches, outlet boxes, and shall make all final connections. Control wiring and interlocks shall conform to wiring diagrams furnished by equipment manufacturers. E. The Contractor shall provide services of his Engineer or a factory trained technician to instruct plant-operating personnel for a period of at least one (1) full day after completion of the contract work. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. All underground conduits shall be buried to a minimum depth of 24-inches below finished grade. All trenches shall be uniform width and shall be backfilled and compacted to 95% that of original density. Any damage to underground conduits caused by other Contractors shall be repaired by this Contractor and shall be compensated accordingly by the party or parties responsible for the damage. 3.03 CLEAN UP A. The Contractor shall upon completion of the work, remove all materials, empty containers, and any other materials that are not incorporated into the work. • END OF SECTION M:6/23/2015 16012 -4/4 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SECTION 16060 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical Demolition 1.02 REFERENCES A. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall he provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No.70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 305- Temporary Wiring 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Annotate existing drawings to sequence the demolition of systems, equipment removal and temporary hook-ups. B. Schedule with Engineer for required shut-downs to accommodate system demolition and installation of temporary facilities. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. By beginning demolition, installer accepts existing conditions and warrants that he will maintain service to equipment and items not scheduled or indicated for removal, and that he will return to the Owner all items and systems in good operating condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work. As specified in individual Sections. 2.02 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. The temporary electrical wiring and facilities shall be designed and constructed in strict compliance with NEC-Article No. 305. M:4/15/2020 16060 - 1 /3 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company to provide continuous service to operating equipment. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits. Use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from theEngineer at least one week before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. 3.02 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. 1. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 2. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. 3. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets, which are not removed. 4. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. 5. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. 6. Repair adjacent construction and finished damaged work. 7. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. 8. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new work. 3.03 DISPOSAL AND SALVAGE A. Salvage electrical and instrumentation equipment removed from existing facilities for reuse as applicable. M:4/15/2020 16060 -2 / 3 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION B. Material and equipment which can be reused or salvaged remains the property of the Owner unless specifically indicated in the Specifications or Drawings or as designated by the Engineer. C. Materials and equipment which cannot be reused or salvaged will be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. END OF SECTION M:4/15/2020 16060 - 3/ 3 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Conduits. b. Conduit fittings. c. Conduit supports. d. Wireways. e. Outlet boxes. f. Pull and junction boxes. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 1 —General Requirements 2. Section 16119— Underground Ducts & Pull Boxes 3. Section 16140—Wiring Devices 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Underfloor Conduits. 1. Conduits which run underground within perimeter of building walls under building floor. This may consist of one conduit, or several conduits grouped together. B. Duct Bank Conduits 1. Conduits which run underground outside perimeter of building walls. This may consist of one conduit, or several conduits grouped together. C. Underground Conduits 1. Underground conduits are both under floor conduits and duct bank conduits. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Division 1 —General Requirements for requirements for mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 1 /31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Identify dimensional size of pull and junction boxes to be used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA). 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. D2105, Standard Test Method for Longitudinal Tensile Properties of "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Tube. d. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. e. F512, Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). c. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Tubing and Conduit. d. TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. M: 4/15/2020 16110 -2/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. C80.1, Electric Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). b. C80.3, Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). c. C80.5, Electrical Aluminum Rigid Conduit. d. OS 1, Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1, Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 6, Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit—Steel. c. 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations. d. 360, Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. e. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. f. 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes. g. 514B, Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. h. 651, Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. i. 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing —Steel. j. 870, Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. k. 886, Standard for Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1660, Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. C. Comply with NECA"Standard of Installation." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufactures are M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 3/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES acceptable: 1. Rigid metallic conduits: a. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation. b. Triangle PWC Inc. c. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. d. Wheatland Tube Company. e. LTV Steel Company. f. EASCO Aluminum. g. Indalex. h. VAW of American, Inc. 2. PVC coated rigid metallic conduit and repair kits: a. Calbond b. KorKap c. Perma-Cote d. Rob-Roy Ind. e. Raychem "GelTek"tape. f. Thomas & Betts 0-Cal g. NEC Black Guard 3. Rigid non-metallic conduit: a. Carlon. b. Cantex. c. Heritage Plastics. d. Osburn Associates. e. Prime Conduit f. Champion Fiberglass. g. United Fiberglass of America, Inc. 4. Flexible metallic conduit: a. AFC Cable Systems. b. Anamet, Inc. c. Carlon. d. Electri-Flex. e. Flexible Metal Hose Company. f. International Metal Hose Company. g. Triangle PWC Inc. h. LTV Steel Company. 5. Flexible non-metallic conduit. a. Carlon b. Carflex. 6. Wireway: a. Hoffman Engineering Company. M: 4/15/2020 16110 -4/ 31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES b. Weigmann. c. Square D. 7. Conduit fittings and accessories: a. Appleton. b. Carlon. c. Cantex. d. Crouse-Hinds. e. Killark. f. Osburn Associates. g. OZ Gedney Company. h. RACO. i. Steel City. j. Thomas and Betts. 8. Support systems: a. Unistrut Building Systems. b. B-Line Systems Inc. c. Kindorf. d. Minerallac Fastening Systems. e. Caddy. 9. Outlet, pull, and junction boxes: a. Appleton. b. Crouse-Hinds. c. Killark. d. OZ Gedney Company. e. Steel City. f. RACO. g. Bell. h. Hoffman Engineering Company. Wiegmann. j. B-Line Circle AW. k. Adalet. I. Rittal. 10. Anti-seize compound: a. Crouse-Hinds 2.02 RIGID METALLIC CONDUITS A. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit(PVC-RGS): 1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) exterior coating: a. Coating: Bonded to hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to NEMA/ANSI C80.1. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 5/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of the coating. 2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating. 3. Urethane coating on threads. 4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings. 5. Female Ends: a. Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 2 in, whichever is less beyond the opening. b. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it. 6. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1. B. PVC-Coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit (PVC-RAC): 1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) exterior coating: a. Coating: Bonded to rigid aluminum conduit conforming to NEMA/ANSI C80.1. b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of the coating. 2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating. 3. Urethane coating on threads. 4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings. 5. Female Ends: a. Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 2 in, whichever is less beyond the opening. b. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it. 6. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1. C. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam. 2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 6/31 P. 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 3. Threads galvanized after cutting. 4. Internal coating: Backed lacquer, varnish, or enamel for smooth surface. 5. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6. 6. Rigid Aluminum Conduit(RAC) is an acceptable alternative to RGS. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam. 2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. 3. Internal coating: Baked lacquer, varnish, or enamel for a smooth surface. 4. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.3, UL 797. E. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC): 1. AA Type 6063 aluminum allow, T-1 temper. 2. Maximum copper content of 0.10 percent. ( 3. Extruded, seamless. 4. , Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.5, UL 6. 2.03 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT A. Schedules 40 (PVC-40) and 80 (PVC-80) 1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) plastic compound which includes inert modifiers to improve weatherability and heat distribution. . 2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure. 3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission. 4. Shall be suitable for use with 90 DegC wire and shall be marked "maximum 90 DegC". 5. Standards: NEMA TC 2, UL 651. B. ' Fiberglass: 1. Epoxy based resin system using an anhydride curing agent. 2. Continuous E-glass roving. 3. Winding angle approximately 54.75 degrees. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 7/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 4. Halogen free additive for flame spread and smoke control. 5. Ultraviolet inhibitor: Carbon black. 6. Two (2) step curing process. 7. Tensile strength: 9000 psi per ASTM D2105. 8. Integral bell and spigot. 9. Conduits and fittings to be joined with an epoxy adhesive creating a water tight connection. 10. Standard: UL 1684. 2.04 Flexible Conduit A. Flexible Galvanized Steel Conduit (FLEX): 1. Formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Standard: UL 360. B. PVC-Coated Flexible Galvanized Steel (liquid-tight) Conduit (FLEX-LT): 1. Core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Extruded PVC outer jacket positively locked to the steel core. 3. Liquid and vaportight. 4. Standard: UL 360. C. Flexible non-metallic (liquid-tight) conduit (FLEX-NM): 1. Formed of a helically wound spiral of rigid PVC reinforcement embedded within a flexible PVC wall. 2. Layered construction with a smooth seamless inner core of flexible PVC that is bonded to a covering of flexible PVC. 3. Between the layers is a woven nylon mesh for reinforcement. 4. Standard: UL1660 2.05 Wireway A. General: 1. Suitable for lay-in conductors. M. 4/15/2020 16110 - 8/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 2. Designed for continuous grounding. 3. Covers: a. Hinged or removable in accessible areas. b. Non-removable when passing through partitions. c. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out except far stainless steel type. d. Standards: UL 870, NEMA 250. B. General Purpose (NEMA 1 rated)Wireway: 1. 14 or 16 gage steel without knockouts. 2. Cover: Non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws. C. Raintight (NEMA 3R rated)Wiring Trough: 1. 14 or 16 gage galvanized steel without knockouts. 2. Cover: Non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws. D. Watertight (NEMA 4X rated)Wireway: 1. 14 gage type 304 or 316 stainless steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 gage stainless steel flanges. 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with continuous piano hinge with three- point latch. 3. Flanges: Fully Gasketed and bolted. E. Dusttight (NEMA 12 rated)Wireway: 1. 14 gage steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 gage steel flanges. 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with continuous piano hinge with three- point latch. 3. Flanges: Fully gasketed and bolted. 2.06 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fittings for use with RGS: 1. General: a. In hazardous locations, provide fittings listed for use in Class I, Groups C M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 9/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES and D locations. 2. Locknuts: a. Threaded steel or malleable iron. b. Gasketed or non-gasketed. c. Grounding or non-grounding type. 3. Bushings: a. Threaded, insulated metallic. b. Grounding or non-grounding type. 4. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection. 5. Couplings: a. Threaded straight type:Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used on. b. Threadless type: Gland compression or self-threading type, concrete tight. 6. Unions: Threaded galvanized steel or zinc plated malleable iron. 7. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Zink plated cast iron with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Clip-on type with stainless steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron. 8. Conduit bodies (round): a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron. b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron. 9. Sealing fittings: a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. With or without drain and breather. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 10/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting. B. Fittings for use with RAC: 1. General: a. In hazardous locations, provide fittings-listed for use in Class I, Groups C and D locations. 2. Locknuts: a. Threaded stainless steel. b. Gasketed or non-gasketed. c. Grounding or non-grounding type. 3. Bushings: - a. Threaded, insulated metallic. b. Grounding or non-grounding type. 4. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection. 5. Couplings: a. Threaded straight type: Same material and finish as the conduit with t.r which they are used on. 6. Unions: Threaded copper free cast aluminum. 7. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Copper free cast aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Clip-on type with stainless steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed copper free cast aluminum. 8. Conduit bodies (round): a. Body: Copper free cast aluminum. i b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, copper free cast aluminum. 9. Sealing fittings: a. Body: Copper free cast aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 11 /31 P: 9/1/2020 _ City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES c. With or without-drain and breather. d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting. C. Fittings for use with PVC-RGS: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings for use with RGS" and coated as defined under paragraph "PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS). D. Fittings for use with PVC-RAC: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings for use with RAC" and coated as defined under paragraph "PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS). E. Fittings for use with EMT: 1. Connectors: a. Straight, angle and offset types furnished with locknuts. b. Zinc plated steel. c. Insulated gland compression type. d. Concrete and raintight. 2. Couplings: a. Zinc plated steel. b. Gland compression type. c. Concrete and raintight. 3. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Screw down type with steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel or copper free aluminum. 4. Standard: UL 514B M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 12/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES F. Fittings for use with FLEX: 1. Connector: a. Zinc plated malleable iron. b. Squeeze or clamp type. 2. Standard: UL 514B. G. Fittings for use with FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM: 1. Connector: a. Straight or angle type. b. Metal construction, insulated and gasketed. c. Composed of locknut, grounding ferrule and gland compression nut. d. Liquid tight. 2. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B. H. Fittings for use with Rigid Non-Metallic PVC Conduit: 1. Coupling, adapters, and conduit bodies: a. Same material, thickness, and construction as the conduits with which they are used. b. Homogeneous plastic free from visible cracks, holes, or foreign inclusions. c. Bore smooth and free of blisters, nicks or other imperfections which could damage the conductor. 2. Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings. 3. Standards: ASTM D2564, NEMATC3, UL 651, UL 541B. I. Fittings for use with Rigid Non-Metallic Fiberglass Conduit: 1. Coupling and adapters shall be of the same material, thickness, and construction as the conduit. 2. Epoxy adhesive for joining conduits and fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings and shall provide a water tight connection. 3. Standard: UL 1684. J. Weather and Corrosion Protection Tape: 1. PVC based tape, 10 mils thick. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 13/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 2. Protection against moisture, acids, alkalis, salts and sewage and suitable for direct bury. 3. Used with appropriate pipe primer. 2.07 ALL RACEWAY AND FITTINGS A. Mark Products: 1. Identify the nominal trade size on the product. 2. Stamp with the name or trademark of the manufacturer. • 2.08 OUTLET BOXES A. Metallic Outlet Boxes: 1. Hot-dip galvanized steel. 2. Conduit knockouts and grounding pigtail. 3. Styles: a. 2 IN x 3 IN rectangle. b. 4 IN square. c. 4 IN octagon. d. Masonry/tile. 4. Accessories: a. Flat blank cover plates. b. Barriers. c. Extension, plaster or tile rings. d. Box supporting brackets in stud walls. e. Adjustable bar hangers. 5. Standards: NEMA/ANSI OS 1, UL 514A. B. Cast Outlet Boxes: 1. Zinc plated cast iron or die-cast copper free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Threaded hubs and grounding screw. 3. Styles: a. "FS" of"FD". b. Single or multiple gang and tandem. c. "EDS" or"EFS"for hazardous locations. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 14/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 4. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. 5. Standards: UL 514A, UL 886. C. Non-metallic Outlet Boxes: 1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) plastic compound. 2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure. 3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission. 4. Suitable for use with 90 DegC wire. 5. Styles: a. "FS" or"FD". b. Single or multiple gang. 6. Standard: UL 514A, NEMA TC 3. D. See Specification 16140 for wiring devices, wallplates, and cover plates. 2.09 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. NEMA 1 Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 gage minimum, galvanized steel or steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. 2. With or without concentric knockouts on four(4) sides. 3. Flat cover fastened with screws. B. NEMA 3R Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 gage minimum steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. 2. No knockouts. 3. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 4. Door with hinge and latch C. NEMA 4X Rated (metallic): 1. Body and cover: 14 gage type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 15/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Door with oil-resistant gasket. D. NEMA 4X Rated (non-metallic): 1. Body and cover: Ultraviolet light protected fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes. 2. No knockouts. 3. External mounting flanges. 4. Hinged door with quick release latches and padlocking hasp. 5. Door with oil resistant gasket. E. NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 Rated: 1. Cast gray iron allow or copper-free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub. 3. Cover bolted down with stainless steel bolts or threaded cover with neoprene gasket. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Grounding lug. 6. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. F. NEMA 12 Rated: 1. Body and cover: a. 14 gage steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out. b. Type 5052 H-32 aluminum, unpainted. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Non-hinged cover held closed with captivated cover screws threaded into sealed wells or hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Flat door with oil resistant gasket. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 16/ 31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch,Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES G. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 SF or heavier than 25 LBS. 2. Split covers when heavier than 25 LBS. 3. Weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits. 4. Tamper proof screws. 5. Terminal blocks: Screw-post barrier-type, rated 600 volt and 20 ampere minimum. H. Standards: NEMA 250, UL 50 2.10 SPECIAL PURPOSE BOXES A. Pedestal-Type Floor-Mounted or Counter-Mounted Duplex Receptacles: 1. Horizontal design housing with threaded conduit fittings in base with satin chromium finish. B. Flush in Floor Duplex Receptacles: 1. Dual level, full adjustable box with power fittings and brass carpet flange. 2.11 SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Multi-conduit Surface or Trapeze Type Support and Pull or Junction Box Supports: 1. Material Requirements. a. Galvanized steel:ASTEM A123 or ASTM A153. b. Stainless steel: AISI Type 304 or 316. c. PVC coated galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 and 20 mil PVC coating. d. Aluminum: AA Type 6063-T6. e. Fiberglass: Fire-retardant polyester or vinylester resin, ASTM E84, UL 94. B. Single Conduit and Outlet Box Support Fasteners: 1. Material Requirements: a. Zinc plated steel. b. Stainless steel, Type 304 or 316. c. Malleable iron. d. PVC coated malleable iron or steel: 20 mil PVC coating. M. 4/15/2020 16110 - 17/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES e. Steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish. 2.12 RACEWAY/DUCT SEALING COMPOUND A. Use with explosion-proof fittings to separate hazardous areas from non-hazardous areas: 1. UL Listed compound 2. Crouse-Hinds Chico or approved equal. 3. Use fiber dam for vertical installation. B. All other areas: 1. Non-hardening, putty-like consistency workable at temperatures as low as 35 F. 2. Compound shall not slump at temperature of 300 F and shall readily adhere to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common • metals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY INSTALLATION —GENERAL A. Shall be in accordance with requirements of: 1. NFPA 70- NEC. 2. Manufacturer's instructions. B. Size of Raceways: 1. Raceway sizes are shown on Drawings. If not shown on the Drawings, then size in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the minimum raceway size shall be: a. Conduit: 1 IN. b. Wireway: 2-1/2 IN x 2-1/2 IN. C. Field Bending and Cutting of Conduits: 1. Utilize tools and equipment recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit, designed for the purpose and the conduit material to make all field bends and cuts. 2. Do not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit when making conduit bends. 3. Prepare tools and equipment to prevent damage to the PVC coating. Use strap wrenches only to tighten joints in PVC-RGS. Replace all conduit and fittings with damage to the PVC coating, such as cuts, nicks, and threader chuck jaw marks. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 18/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 4. Degrease threads after threading and apply a zinc rich paint. 5. Deburr interior and exterior after cutting. D. Male threads of conduit systems shall be coated with an electrically conductive anti- seize compound. E. The protective coating integrity of conduits, fittings, outlet, pull and junction boxes and accessories shall be maintained. 1. Repair galvanized components utilizing a zinc rich paint. 2. Repair painted components utilizing touch up paint provided by or approved by the manufacturer. 3. Repair PVC coated components utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the coating, provided by the manufacturer of the conduit; or a self- adhesive, highly conformable, cross-linked silicon composition strip, followed by a protective coating of vinyl tape. a. Total nominal thickness: 40 mil. 4. Repair surface which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation. F. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before wire is pulled into place. 1. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally'/4 INtsmaller than the interior of the conduit, to remove obstructions: 2. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight-fitting rag through the conduit. 3. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until wire is pulled. G. Only nylon or polyethylene rope shall be used to pull wire and cable in conduit systems. H. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 IN of slack at each end of the pull wire. I. Where portions of a raceway are subject to different temperatures and where condensation is known to be a problem, as in cold storage areas of buildings or where passing from the interior to the exterior of a building, the raceway shall be sealed to prevent circulation of warm air to colder section of the raceway. J. Fill openings in walls, floor, and ceilings and finish flush with surface. 1. Where penetrating CMU block walls, repair with cementitious grout and paint to match. 2. Where conduit terminates at a cable tray system, fit conduit with an insulated bushing. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 19/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 3. When conduits are passing through a firewall or fire-rated floor into different rooms, cabinets, or enclosures, use a fire-rated seal. K. Install explosion-proof seals in conduit runs crossing or entering a hazardous classified area. Install CSBE removable sealing fittings to seal submersible pump cables in the wet well and at the first junction box outside the well. L. Conduit Stub-ups 1. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above finished slab. 2. Transition underground conduit to aboveground conduit at 90 DEG elbow where conduit transitions from horizontal to vertical conduit. 3. Where RGC or RAC is in contact with earth or concrete, wrap conduit with corrosion protective tap to 4 IN above finished grade. 4. Stub-up connections: Extend conduits for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with finished floor. 3.02 RACEWAY ROUTING A. Raceways shall be routed in the field unless otherwise indicated. 1. Conduit and fittings shall be installed, as required, for a complete system that has a neat appearance and is in compliance with all applicable codes. 2. Run in straight lines parallel to or at right angles to building lines. 3. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom. 4. Do not route conduits: a. Through areas of high ambient temperature or radiant heat. b. In suspended concrete slabs. 5. Conduit shall not interfere with, or prevent access to, piping, valves, ductwork, or other equipment for operation, maintenance and repair. 6. Provide pull boxes or conduit bodies as needed so that there is a maximum of 270 degrees of bends or 3-90 degree bends in the conduit run or in long straight runs to limit pulling tensions. 7. Make changes in direction of conduit using elbows or fittings. Do not use pull boxes to make direction changes unless specifically designated otherwise. B. All rigid conduits within a structure shall be installed exposed except as follows: M: 4/15/2020 16110 -20/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 1. As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concealed above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile suspended ceilings. 3. Concealed within stud frame, poured concrete, concrete block and brick walls of an architecturally finished area. 4. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor serving equipment in non- architecturally finished areas that are not locate on or near a wall or column and the ceiling height is greater than 12 FT. 5. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor slabs where shown on the Drawings or with the Engineer's permission. C. Maintain minimum spacing between parallel conduit and piping runs in accordance with the following when runs are greater than 30 FT: 1. Between instrumentation and telecommunication: 1 IN. 2. Between instrumentation and 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc: 2 IN. 3. Between instrumentation and 600 V and less AC power or control: 12 IN. • 4. Between instrumentation and greater than 600 Vac power: 12 IN. 5. Between telecommunication and 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc: 2 IN. 6. Between telecommunication and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 IN. 7. Between telecommunication and greater than 600 Vac power: 12 IN. 8. Between 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc and 600 V and less AC power or control: 1 IN. 9. Between 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc and greater than 600 V power or control: 2 IN. 10. Between process, gas, air, and water pipes: 6 IN. D. Conduits shall be installed to eliminate moisture pockets. 1. Where water cannot drain to openings, provide drain fittings in the low spots of the conduit run. E. Conduit shall not be routed on the exterior of structures except as specifically indicated on the Drawings. F. Where sufficient room exists within the housing of roof-mounted equipment, the conduit shall be stubbed up inside the housing. G. Provide all required openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for conduit penetration. 1. Repair penetrations to existing condition or better. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 21 /31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES H. Conduit embedded in columns and floor slabs or buried under slab-on-grade: 1. Run in the most direct, practical route. 2. Not to be installed under equipment pads unless approved by Engineer. 3. No crossovers unless approved by Engineer. 4. To be backfilled with concrete during the installation of the slab-on-grade or to be placed, backfilled, and compacted in the slab subgrade, as indicated on drawings. 5. Secured in place to prevent movement during the backfill and pour. I. Conduits and accessories embedded in concrete where shown on the Drawings: 1. Shall not be considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete except as indicated in the following: a. Conduit and fittings shall not displace more than 4 percent of the area of the cross-section of a column on which stress is calculated or which is required for fire protection. b. Size and locate sleeves or conduits passing through floors, walls, or beams so as not to significantly impair the strength of the construction. c. Sleeves or conduits passing through floors, walls or beams may be considered as replacing the displaced concrete structurally in compression. 1) Shall not be exposed to rusting or other deterioration. 2) Nominal inside diameter shall not exceed 2 IN. 3) Minimum spacing: 3 DIA OC. 2. Shall not be larger in outside diameter than one-third the thickness of the slab, column, or beam. 3. Shall have a minimum spacing of 3 DIA OC. 4. In reinforced concrete construction: a. Conduit shall not be run in beams. b. Place conduit after reinforcing steel has been laid. c. The reinforcement steel shall not be displaced by the conduit. d. Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 IN of cover over conduit, excluding surface finish. e. Conduits parallel to main reinforcement shall be run near the center of the M: 4/15/2020 16110 -22/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES wall. f. Conduits perpendicular to main reinforcement shall be run midway between wall or slab supports. 3.03 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Permitted Raceway Types Per Area Designations (unless specifically indicated on Drawings): 1. Dry areas: a. RGS. b. RAC. 2. Wet areas: a. RGS. b. RAC. 3. Exterior Corrosive areas (includes, but not limited to wastewater project sites): a. PVC-RGS. b. PVC-RAC. 4. Interior Corrosive areas (includes, but not limited to chemical rooms): a. PVC-40. b. PVC-80. c. Fiberglass. d. As indicated on drawings. B. Permitted Raceway types per Routing Locations: 1. In stud framed walls: a. EMT. 2. In concrete block or brick walls: a. PVC-40. 3. Above acoustical tile ceilings: a. EMT. b. •NEMA 1 rated Wireway. 4. Embedded in poured concrete walls and floors: a. PVC-40 b. PVC-80 c. Fiberglass M: 4/15/2020 16110 -23/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland . Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation' RACEWAYS AND BOXES d. PVC-RGS when emerging from concrete into areas designated as exterior and corrosive. 5. Beneath floor slab-on grade: a. PVC-40 b. PVC-80 c. Fiberglass 6. Direct buried conduits and ductbanks: a. PVC-40. b. PVC-80. c. Fiberglass. d. 90 degree elbows for transition to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass. e. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees. 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass. 7. Concrete encased ductbanks: a. PVC-40. b. PVC-80. c. Fiberglass. d. 90 degree elbows for transition to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass. e. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees. 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass. C. FLEX conduits shall be installed for connections to light fixtures, HVAC equipment and other similar devices above the ceilings. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 FT to light fixtures. b. 3 FT to all other equipment. M: 4/15/2020 16110 -24/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES D. FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM conduits shall be installed as the final conduit connection to light fixtures, dry type transformers, motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation primary elements, and other electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 FT to light fixtures. b. 3 FT to motors. c. 2 FT to all other equipment. E. NEMA 1 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in electrical rooms. 2. Surface mounted above removable ceilings tiles of an architecturally finished area. F. NEMA 3R Wiring Trough: 1. Surface mounted in exterior, non-corrosive locations. G. NEMA 4X Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as corrosive. H. NEMA 12 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in architecturally and non- architecturally finished areas. 3.04 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Seals: 1. Install in conduit systems located in hazardous areas as required by the NEC or as shown on Drawings. B. Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings shall be joined utilizing solvent cement. 1. Immediately after installation of conduit and fitting, the fitting or conduit shall be rotated '/turn to provide uniform contact. C. Install Expansion Fittings: 1. Where conduits are exposed to the sun and conduit run is greater than 200 FT. 2. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings. D. Install Expansion/Deflection Fittings: 1. Where conduits enter a structure. M: 4/15/2020 16110 -25/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES a. Except electrical manholes and handholes. b. Except where the duct bank is tied to the structure with rebar. 2. Where conduits span structural expansion joints. 3. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings. E. Threaded connections shall be made wrench-tight. F. Conduit joints shall be watertight: 1. Where subjected to possible submersion. 2. In areas classified as wet. 3. Underground. G. Terminate Conduits: 1. In metallic outlet boxes: a. RGS and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut. 2) Insulated bushing and two (2) locknuts. 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC. b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut. 2. In NEMA 1 rated enclosures: a. RGS and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut. 2) Insulated bushing and two (2) locknuts. 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC. b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut. • 3. In NEMA 12 rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut. b. Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC. 4. In NEMA 3R, 4 and NEMA 4X rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut. 5. In NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 rated enclosures: a. Into an integral threaded hub. M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 26/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 6. When stubbed up through the floor into floor mounted equipment: a. With an insulated grounding bushing on metallic conduits. b. With end bells on non-metallic conduits. H. Threadless couplings shall only be used to join new conduit to existing conduit when the existing conduit end is not threaded and it is not practical or possible to cut threads on the existing conduit with a pipe threader. 3.05 CONDUIT SUPPORT A. Permitted multi-conduit surface or trapeze type support system per area designations and conduit types: 1. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas: a. Galvanized system consisting of: Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit straps. b. Aluminum system consisting of: Aluminum channels, fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. c. Stainless steel system consisting of: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit straps. 2. Corrosive areas: a. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels and fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. b. Fiberglass system consisting of: Fiberglass channel and fittings, and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. c. Stainless steel systems consisting of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit straps. 3. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support system material. a. Galvanized steel system may be used with RGS and EMT. b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS, PVC-RGS and RAC. c. PVC coated galvanized steel system may be used with PVC-RGS, RAC, PVC-40, PVC-80, and Fiberglass. d. Aluminum system may be used with RAC and PVC-RGS. e. Fiberglass system may be used with PVC-40, PVC-80, PVC-RGS, and Fiberglass. M. 4/15/2020 16110 -27/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES B. Permitted single conduit support fasteners per area designations and conduit types: 1. Architecturally finished areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, or steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish. b. Types of fasteners: Spring type hangers and clips, straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts, and bolt on beam clamps. c. Provide anti-rattle conduit supports when conduits are routed through metal studs. 2. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, stainless steel and malleable iron. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts, and bolt on beam clamps. 3. Corrosive areas: a. Material: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel or PVC coated malleable iron or steel. For indoor corrosive areas, non-metallic PVC or fiberglass straps may be used. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts, and bolt on beam clamps. 4. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support fastener material. a. Zinc plated steel, steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish and malleable iron fasteners may be used with RGS and EMT. b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS, PVC-RGS, and RAC. c. PVC coated fasteners may be used with PVC-RGS, RAC, PVC 40, and PVC-80. d. Non-metallic fasteners may be used with PVC-40, PVC-80, and fiberglass. C. Conduit Support General Requirements: 1. Maximum spacing between conduit supports per NEC. 2. Support conduit from the building structure. 3. Do not support conduit from process, gas, air, water piping or other conduits. 4. Provide hangers and brackets to limit the maximum uniform load on a single support to 25 LBS or to the maximum uniform load. Recommended by the M: 4/15/2020 16110 -28/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES manufacturer if the support is rated less than 25 LBS. a. Do not exceed the maximum concentrated load recommended by the manufacturer on any support. b. Conduit hangers: 1) Continuous threaded rods combined with struts or conduit clamps: Do not use perforated strap hangers and iron bailing wire. c. Do not use suspended ceiling support systems to support raceways. d. Hangers in metal roof decks: 1) Utilize fender washers. 2) Not extend above top of ribs. 3) Not interfere with vapor barrier, insulation, or roofing. 5. Conduit support system fasteners: a. Use sleeve-type expansion anchors as fasteners in masonry wall construction. b. Do not use concrete nails and powder-driven fasteners. 3.06 OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install approved thread grease on all plugs prior to installation. 3. Fill unused punched-out tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs. Size boxes to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed and quantity of conduits connected to the box. B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Permitted uses of metallic outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices: 1) Recessed in all stud framed walls and ceilings. 2) Recessed in poured concrete, concrete block, and brick walls of architecturally finished areas and exterior building walls. b. Pull or junction box: 1) Above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile ceilings. • M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 29/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 2) Above 10 FT in an architecturally finished area where there is no ceiling. 2. Permitted uses of cast outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, corrosive, and hazardous areas. b. Pull and junction box surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, and corrosive areas. 3. Permitted uses of non-metallic outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished corrosive areas. b. Pull and junction boxes mounted in non-architecturally finished corrosive areas. 4. Mount devices outlet boxes where indicated on the Drawings and at the following heights: a. Light switch (to center): 48 IN. b. Receptacle in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 IN. c. Receptacle on exterior wall of building (to center): 18 IN. d. Receptacle in non-architecturally finished areas (to center): 48 IN. e. Telephone outlet in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 IN. f. Telephone outlet for wall-mounted phone (to center): 54 IN. g. Pushbutton or selector switch control station (to center): 48 IN. 5. Set device outlet boxes plumb and vertical to the floor. 6. Outlet boxes recessed in walls: a. Install with appropriate stud wall support brackets or adjustable bar hangers so that they are flush with the face of the wall. b. Locate in ungrouted cell of concrete block with bottom edge of box flush with bottom edge of block and flush with the face of the block. 7. Place barriers between switches in boxes with 277 V switches on opposite phases. 8. Back-to-back installations are not permitted. 9. When an outlet box is connected to a PVC coated conduit, the box shall also be PVC coated. C. Pull and Junction Boxes: M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 30/31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 1. Install pull or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections. a. Make covers of boxes accessible. 2. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted above removable ceiling tiles of an architecturally finished area. b. Pull or junction box surface in a non-architecturally finished area. 3. Permitted uses of NEMA 3R enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in dry and wet areas, unless stated otherwise in Drawings. 4. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive. 5. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X non-metallic enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in indoor areas designated as wet and/or corrosive where used with PVC-40 or PVC-80 conduit. 6. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in Class I hazardous areas. 1) Provide PVC coating in corrosive areas when PVC-RGS conduit is used. 7. Permitted uses of NEMA 9 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in Class II hazardous areas. 1) Provide PVC coating in corrosive areas when PVC-RGS conduit is used. 8. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as dry. END OF SECTION M: 4/15/2020 16110 - 31 /31 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation 600-VOLT POWER CABLE SECTION 16122 600-VOLT POWER CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for 600-volt power cable. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires. r 2. ASTM B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, Soft. 3. ASTM B33: Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), IEEE 383-2.5: IEEE Standard for Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations. C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. ICEA S-61-402: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy(NEMA WC-5). 2. ICEA S-66-524: Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-7). 3. ICEA S-68-516: Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-8). D. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 44: Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter No.3-Wiring Methods and Materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01330- Submittal Procedures: 1. Completed engineer's data sheets 2. Completed manufacturer's data sheets 3. Manufacturer's cut sheets, catalog data 4. Installation, terminating and splicing procedure 5. Instruction for handling and storage 6. Dimensions and weight M:3/28/2018 16122 - 1 /4 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation 600-VOLT POWER CABLE 7. Conformance certificate 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: 1. Cable shall be tested at the factory to confirm that the cable complies with requirements of Part 6 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524 or S-68-516. Refer to data sheet for additional test requirements. 2. Where applicable, the cable shall meet the requirements of the vertical tray flame test as described in IEEE 383-2.5 1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Reels shall be of the type specified on the data sheets. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Provide moisture protection by manufacturer's standard procedure or heat shrinkable self-sealing end caps applied to both ends of the cable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A. Alan Wire B. American Insulated Wire Corporation C. Cerro Wire D. General Cable Company E. Houston Wire & Cable F. Okonite Company G. Interstate Wire Company H. Southwire I. Service Wire Company J. Encore Wire 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design: Provide cable with the following design characteristic. Cable shall be UL 44 or UL 83 listed, rated 600 volts and certified for continuous operation at the temperature as specified on the 600 Volt Power Cable Data Sheets while installed in underground duct, conduit, or cable tray. Cables shall be single-conductor or multi-conductor(with ground) as specified on the data sheets. B. Conductors: Provide conductors which are Class B, concentric stranded, annealed copper coated, unless otherwise specified on the data sheets, with physical and electrical properties conforming to ASTM B3, B8 or B33 and Part 2 of ICEA S-61-402, S- 66-524, or S-68-516. The number and size of conductors supplied in each cable shall correspond to the quantities specified on the data sheets. M:3/28/2018 16122 - 2/4 P.9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation 600-VOLT POWER CABLE C. Insulation: Insulate each conductor as specified on the 600 Volt Power Cable Data Sheets to meet the requirements of Part 3 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524 or S-68-516. The insulation thickness shall match the dimensions listed in Section 3.2, Table 3-1 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524 or S-68-516, as specified on the data sheets. D. Jacket: 1. When power cables are to be enclosed in conduit, ducts or in other raceway systems, multiconductor power cables shall be of the non-metallic type and shall be covered by an overall nonmetallic jacket as specified on the Data Sheets, which complies with the requirements of Section 4.4 of ICEA S-66-524 or S-68- 516, Section 4.3 of ICEA S-61-402, or Table 21-5 of Part 21 of UL 83. 2. Single-conductor cables shall have a jacket thickness which meets the requirements of Table 4-4 of Part 4 of ICEA S-66-524, Table 4-2 of Part 4 of ICEA S-68-516, or Table 4-2 or 4-6 of Part 4 of ICEA S-61-402. Multi-conductor cables shall have a jacket thickness, which complies with Table 4-7 of Part 4 of ICEA S-66-524, Table 4-2 of Part 4 of ICEA S-68-516, Table 4-5 of Part 4 of ICEA S-68-516, or Table 4-6 of Part 4 of ICEA S-61-402, unless.otherwise specified on the data sheets. E. Armor: When power cables are to be exposed in a cable tray, cable channel or other cable support systems, the multiconductor power cables shall be protected by an interlocked metal armor made of galvanized steel which meets the requirements of paragraph 4.5 of ICEA S-68-516 or S-66-524 unless otherwise specified on the data sheets. An over-all jacket shall be provided as specified in the data sheets. F. Cable Marking: Print cable marking information on the overall cable jacket at 2-foot intervals. Use a permanent printing method color with a sharply contrasting the jacket color. Identify individual conductors as specified on the data sheets in conformance with Part 5 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524, and S-68-516. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete cable raceway systems, underground duct banks, and cable support systems before installing cables. B. Verify sizing of raceways and pullboxes to ensure proper accommodation for the cables. C. Check the length of the cable raceway system against the length of cable on the selected reel. D. Do not install or work on PVC insulated or jacketed cables in temperatures below 32 degrees F. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cable in Conduit and Ductbank: M:3/28/2018 16122 - 3/4 P:9/1/2020 • City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation 600-VOLT POWER CABLE 1. Clean conduits of all foreign matter before cables are pulled. 2. Install cables in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter 3-Wiring Methods and Materials. Do not exceed maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimum bending radius. 3. Pull cables into conduits using adequate lubrication to reduce friction. Lubricants must not be harmful to the conductor insulation. B. Cable in Tray: 1. Install medium voltage (5 Kv and 15 Kv) and 600V cables in separate trays or separated cables by a barrier in a single tray in accordance with NEC 318-6(f). 2. Install cables in trays in a neat and orderly manner. Tie cables to the tray rungs at approximate 15-foot intervals by use of cable ties. 3. Only one layer of 3-conductor No. 4/0 AWG and larger 600-volt power cables are allowed in a cable tray per NEC 318-9(a). 4. Using cable ties, make a triplex of single conductors used for 3-phase systems. Install in cable tray in accordance with NEC 318-10. C. Preparation for Termination: 1. Make up 600-volt power cable terminations and splices with heat shrinkable sleeves and seals. 2. Use crimp-on terminal lugs and connectors for all sizes of conductors. 3. Use crimp-on lugs with long barrel and two-hole tongues, except in places where terminations space is limited. D. Tests: 1. Before connecting the cables, test insulation integrity. 2. Use a 500 VDC megohmmeter and perform the cable insulation test in accordance with the operating instructions. E. Termination: 1. After the 600-volt cable has been tested with satisfactory results, terminate the cable at both ends to designated terminal points. 2. Tighten connection bolts with a torque wrench to specified torque levels. END OF SECTION M:3/28/2018 16122 -4/4 P:9/1/2020 • City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation INSTRUMENTATION CABLE SECTION 16126 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for instrumentation cable. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires. 2. ASTM B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, Soft. 3. ASTM B33: Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), IEEE 383-2.5: IEEE Standard for Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations. C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. ICEA S-61-402: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy(NEMA WC-5). 2. ICEA S-66-524: Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-7). 3. ICEA S-68-516: Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-8). D. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 44: Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables. E. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter No. 3-Wiring Methods and Materials, Article 725 - Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote Control, Signaling, and Power-Limited Circuits. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals: 1. Completed engineer's data sheets from this specification or manufacturer's data sheets, cut sheets, and catalog data. 2. Installation, terminating and splicing procedure (including bending radius and pulling tension data). M:4/17/2019 16126 - 1 /5 P:9/1/20 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation INSTRUMENTATION CABLE 3. Instruction for handling and storage. 4. Dimensions and weight. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: 1. Cable shall be tested at the factory to confirm that the cable complies with requirements of ICEA Section 7.7.9 of S-66-524 or 7.5.9 of S-68-516. Refer to data sheet for additional test requirements. 2. Where applicable, the cable shall meet the requirements of the vertical tray flame test as described in IEEE 383-2.5. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Reels shall be of the type specified on the data sheets. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Provide moisture protection by manufacturer's standard procedure or heat shrinkable self-sealing end caps applied to both ends of the cable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Alpha Wire Corporation B. Belden Division, Cooper Industries, Inc. C. Cablec Continental Cables Company D. Dekoron Wire &Cable, LLC E. General Cable Company F. Manhattan Electric Cable Corporation G. Okonite Company 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design: Provide cable with the following design characteristics. The cable shall consist of multiple conductors. The cable assembly shall be UL listed, flame, oil and sunlight resistant, and certified for continuous operation at the temperature specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets in wet or dry locations while installed in underground duct, conduit, or cable tray. The number and size of conductors supplied in each cable shall correspond to the quantities specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. Each conductor shall be individually insulated. Pairs and triads shall have conductors, which are twisted together with a drain wire, shielded, and covered with a jacket. Multi- pair/triad cables shall consist of the required number of electrically isolated, shielded pairs or triads, which are bundled together and covered by an overall jacket as specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. B. Conductors: Provide conductors which are Class B, concentric stranded, annealed tinned copper whose physical and electrical properties comply with ASTM B3, B8 or B33 M:4/17/2019 16126 -2/5 P:9/1/20 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation INSTRUMENTATION CABLE and Part 2 of ICEA.S-61-402, S-66-524, or S-68-516, unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. C. Insulation: Each conductor shall be insulated as specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets in compliance the requirements of Part 3 of ICEA S-61-402, S-66-524, or S-68-516. The average insulation thickness shall not be less than the dimensions shown in Table 7-32 or 7.5.1 of ICEA S-66-524 or S-68-516 for 600-volt insulation unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. The minimum insulation thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the value given in the table. D. Drain Wire: Provide drain wire which is Class B, seven-stranded, tin-coated copper in accordance with ASTM B3, B8, or B33 and as specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. The drain wire shall not be less than two AWG sizes smaller than the insulated conductor's size, except for multiple pair triad drain wires, which shall not be less than the insulated conductor size. E. Shielding: Provide shielding consisting of laminated, nonburning, mylar-backed aluminum tape applied helically around a twisted pair or triad with the aluminum side in continuous contact with the drain wire unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheet. Wrap the tape around each twisted pair or triad with a 25 percent minimum overlap unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. F. Jacket: The physical and electrical properties of the jacket used to cover single or multi-pair or triad cables shall meet the requirements of section 7.7.7 or ICEA S-66-524 or section 7.5.6 of ICEA S-68-516. Jacket material is specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. The jacket thickness shall be equal to the dimensions shown in Table 7-33 or 7.5.2 of ICEA S-66-524 or S-68-516. The jacket material is specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. The jacket thickness shall be equal to the dimensions shown in Table 7-33 or 7.5.2 of ICEA S-66-524 or S-68-516. G. Armor: Where requested, use instrumentation cables protected by an interlocked metal tape armor coating made of galvanized steel which meets the requirements of paragraph 4.5 of ICEA S-68-516 or S-66-524, unless otherwise specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. H. Conductor Identification: Use individual conductors in single-pair and single-triad cables which are color coded black and white; and black, white and red, respectively. Multi- pair-triad cables shall have one conductor in each pair or triad colored white, and all other conductors are color coded in sequence according to Table L-2 of Appendix 2 of ICEA S-66-524, and as specified on the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets. I. Cable Marking: Print cable-marking information on the jacket of each cable at 2-foot intervals. Use a permanent printing method with color sharply contrasting the jacket color. See the Instrumentation Cable Data Sheets for the minimum information required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete cable raceway systems, underground duct banks and cable support systems before installing cables. M:4/17/2019 16126 - 3/5 P:9/1/20 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation INSTRUMENTATION CABLE B. Verify sizing of raceways and pullboxes to ensure proper accommodation for the cables. C. Check the length of the cable raceway system against the length of cable on the selected reel. D. Do not install or work on PVC insulated or jacketed cables in temperatures below 32 degrees F. E. Clean conduits of foreign matter before cables are pulled. F. Provide at least 30 percent spare conductors or pairs. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cable in Conduit and Ductbank 1. Install cables in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and NEC Article 725 - Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote Control, Signaling and Power Limited Circuits. Do not exceed maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimum bending radius. 2. Pull cables into conduits using adequate lubrication to reduce friction. Lubricants must not be harmful to the conductor insulation or cable jacket. 3. Conduits carrying low-level signal cables shall be PVC-coated rigid steel. B. Cable in Tray: Install instrument and signal cable in cable tray only when the tray is dedicated for this type cable and cables are approved for tray installation. C. Termination: 1. Do not splice conductors. For termination use crimp-on type ring tongue non- insulated tin-plated copper lugs. 2. For shielded control cable, terminate the shield and ground it at one end only, preferably at the control panel end for instrument and communication cable and at the supply end for electronic power cables. Shield on ungrounded cable end to be wrapped cylindrically around cable end and thoroughly insulated with Scotch 33 electrical tape. Grounded end to be of sufficient length to reach ground screw or terminal strip and insulated with transparent tubing. 3. If splicing is required, maintain shield continuity by jumpering the ground shield across connection point where it is broken at junction boxes, or other splice points. Insulate these points from ground. 4. Mark wiring on both ends with circuit numbers or loop tag numbers. Heat shrink wire markers after the ring tongue terminal has been installed. Extend the marker over the crimp or base of the terminal. D. Tests: 1. Before connecting the cables, test insulation integrity and conductor continuity. M:4/17/2019 16126 -4/5 P.9/1/20 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation INSTRUMENTATION CABLE 2. Test shielded cable shields with an ohmmeter for continuity along the length of 'the cable and for shield continuity to ground. 3. Connect shielded instrumentation cables to a calibrated 4-20 milliamp DC signal transmitter and receiver. Test at 4,12, and 20 milliamp transmitter settings. 4. Test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place to demonstrate that the circuit and connected equipment perform satisfactorily and that cables are free from improper grounds and short circuits. E. Termination: After the instrumentation cable has been tested with satisfactory results, the cable can be terminated at both ends to their designated terminal points. END OF SECTION M:4/17/2019 16126 -5/5 P:9/1/20 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for wiring devices including: 1. Receptacles. 2. Wall switches. 3. Wall plates and cover plates. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA): 1. NEMA WD1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD6 - Dimensional Requirements. B. Federal Specifications (WC-596F). C. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):, 1. NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Articles 210 Branch Circuits, 250 Grounding and 410, Paragraphs 56, 57 and 58. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval: 1. Manufacturer's product literature and specifications including dimensions, weights, certifications and instructions for handling, storage and installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pack and crate devices to permit ease of handling and protect from damage during shipping, handling and storage. M: 5/9/2017 16140 - 1 /3 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation WIRING DEVICES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bryant Electric B. Crouse-Hinds, Arrow Hart Division C. Hubbel Inc. Wiring Devices Division D. Leviton Manufacturing Company E. Pass & Seymour/Legrand. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Standards: Conform to NEMA WD1 for general requirements and NEMA WD6 for dimensional requirements. B. Manufacture devices to heavy-duty industrial specification grade with brown nylon bodies (orange for isolated-ground receptacles) back and side wiring provisions and green-colored grounding screws. C. Receptacles: 1. Duplex-type receptacles: Rated 20 amps at 120 volts. 2. Contacts: Brass or phosphor bronze. 3. Receptacle grounding system: Extend to the mounting strap unless isolated ground is indicated or required. 4. GFI or GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter) receptacles: Provide feed-through type with test and reset button. D. Wall Switches: 1. Toggle switches: Rated 20 amps at 120/277 volts AC rated for both resistive and inductive loads. 2. Contacts: Silver cadmium oxide construction to prevent sticking, welding and excessive pitting. E. Cover Plates: 1. Receptacles: a. In outdoor areas, provide cover plates of cast metal, in-use type with stainless steel hardware. M: 5/9/2017 16140 -2/3 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation WIRING DEVICES b. In indoor, corrosive and/or wet areas, provide cover plates of polycarbonate type with stainless steel hardware. c. All other plates: Type 302 stainless steel. 2. / Wall Switches a. In outdoor or corrosive or wet locations, provide cover plates of cast metal, gasketed with spring-loaded hinged covers and stainless steel hardware. b. All other plates: Type 302 stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that device boxes are correctly placed. B. Verify that the correct quantity, size and type of wires are pulled to each device box. C. Verify that wiring has been checked at both ends. D. Prepare wire ends for connection to devices. E. Inspect each wiring device for defects. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. ' D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductors clockwise around screw terminals. G. Install cover plates on switch, receptacle and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Energize and test devices for proper operation. END OF SECTION M: 5/9/2017 16140 - 3/3 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for cabinets and enclosures for housing of control panels and motor controls. 1.02 ' REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum). a. NEMA 3R- Enclosures for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against wind-blown dust, rain, and sleet; undamaged by formation of ice on the enclosure. b. NEMA 12 - Enclosures for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping non-corrosive liquids. c. NEMA 4X— Enclosures for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against wind-blown dust, rain, sleet, hose directed water, and corrosion; undamaged by formation of ice on the enclosure. B. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), NFPA 70- National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 373 - Cabinets, Cutout Box, and Meter Socket Enclosures. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL), UL 50 - Safety for Cabinets and Boxes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01300 Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data. 2. Instruction for handling and storage. 3. Installation instructions. 4. Dimensions and weights. • 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Have cabinets and enclosures packed and crated to permit ease of handling and to provide protection from damage during shipping, handling and storage. M:'6/24/2015 16160- 1 /3 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The EMF Company B. Hennessey Products, Inc. C. Hoffman Industrial Products D. Pauluhn Electric Manufacturing Company E. Weigman Company F. Rose Enclosure G. N.E.M.A. Enclosure Mfg. Co. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Sheet Metal Boxes: 1. Provide enclosures manufactured in accordance with NEMA 250 and NEC Article 373. Fabricate outdoor NEMA 3R and NEMA 4X panels from 0.125- inch thick type 5052 H32 aluminum or 14 gauge, 316 stainless steel. NEMA 12 indoor panels shall be painted steel. 2. Dimensions and special features are shown on the Drawings. 3. Construct outdoor enclosures with continuously welded seams ground smooth. 4. Additional material thickness and bracing requirements shall be determined by the manufacturer to provide the strength required by the standard listed. The bracing shall be provided in such a way as to minimize the protrusion into the wiring and the equipment spaces. 5. Install the door with a stainless steel continuous hinge, stainless steel padlock handle with gasket and stainless steel hardware. 6. Furnish the door with oil-resistant neoprene gasket attached with oil-resistant adhesive and held in place with aluminum retaining strips. 7. Use a single, 3/4-inch minimum, door handle that provides a 3-point latching through latch rods with rollers. Provide rollers with at least 3/4-inch diameter. 8. Gasketed overlapping doors may be used instead of a center post. 9. Provide heavy duty lifting eyes of suitable material. 10. Fabricate the enclosure with a stud-mounted panel inside. Make panels from 12- gauge steel painted with white enamel finish. 11. Equip NEMA 12, NEMA 3R, and NEMA 4X enclosures with thermostatically controlled space heaters and corrosion inhibitors. Provide heaters rated for 240V for 120V operation. 12. Weld mounting feet to the enclosure if called for on the Drawing. M.6/24/2015 16160 - 2/3 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 13. Include a high impact plastic data pocket in the enclosure. 14. Provide ground connections on the enclosures to enable grounding of the enclosure with a No. 2 AWG conductor. 15. Equip free-standing outdoor cabinets with inner and outer door restraint bars to prevent door swing during windy conditions. 16. Supply indoor enclosures with filtered passive air intake and exhaust openings, 4-inch square in the side near the top and near the bottom of the adjacent side panel. B. Hardware: 1. Mounting Hardware: Stainless steel 2. Conduit Connectors: Watertight as manufactured by Myers Hubs, or equal. 2.03 TESTING A. Test cabinets and enclosures in accordance with UL 50 so unit qualifies for a UL label. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Review Drawings and determine how many enclosures of each kind are required and check if supplied quantity is sufficient. B. Check the mounting pads or foundations for proper mounting dimensions and features, including grounding conductor stub-up. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use enclosures described in this specification only above grade. B. Install enclosures in accordance with NEC Article 373 in locations as indicated on the Drawings. C. Install enclosures in readily accessible locations to facilitate general operations, wire pulls, maintenance and repair. D. Plug unused conduit openings. E. Make conduit connections to the enclosures with watertight conduit connectors. END OF SECTION M:6/24/2015 16160 - 3/3 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16165 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for disconnect switches including: 1. Fusible disconnect switches 2. Non-fusible disconnect switches 3. Circuit breaker type disconnect switches 4. Fuses 5. Circuit breakers 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA) 1. NEMA AB1: Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. NEMA KS1: Enclosed Switches B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. UL 98: Standard for safety enclosed switches and Dead Front Switches 2. UL 198C: High Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting type 3. UL 198E: Class R Fuses C. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), NFPA No. 70- National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 380- Switches. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval: 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data 2. Switch internal arrangement 3. Breaker or fuse characteristic curves 4. Instructions for handling and storage 5. Installation instructions 6. Dimensions and weights 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. M: 10/10/2017 16165 - 1 /3 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation DISCONNECT SWITCHES B. Single-Source Responsibility: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall be product of single manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Have disconnect switches packed and crated to permit ease of handling and to provide protection from damage during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers: 1. Square D/Schnieder Electric 2. No Exceptions B. Fuses: 1. Bussman Division, Cooper Industries 2. Mersen 3. Littelfuse Incorporated 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Disconnect Switches: 1. Characteristics: Horsepower rated, 300-volt, heavy-duty type with an interlocked door, positive quick-make, quick-break mechanism and visible blades. 2. Use switches and components designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA AB1, NEMA KS1, UL 98, and NEC Article 380. 3. Enclose switch in the enclosure type as stated on the drawings. If not stated on drawings, provide NEMA 12 type enclosure for indoor application and NEMA 3R type enclosure for outdoor applications except in corrosive areas. In corrosive areas, provide NEMA 4X (type 304 or 316 stainless steel). 4. Provide switches with provisions for padlocking the operating lever in OFF position and door in closed position. 5. Select switches having the number of poles and general size conforming to the Drawings. 6. Conform to fusible, non-fusible or circuit breaker type switch requirements as shown on Drawings or one-line diagrams. 7. Provide an auxiliary contact, shown on the Drawings. 8. Select fuses or circuit breakers with current interrupting duty as calculated for the points of switch application or as indicated on the Drawings or one-line diagrams. M: 10/10/2017 16165 -2/3 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation DISCONNECT SWITCHES B. Fuses: Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, for fuses used in disconnect switches, provide the dual-element, time-delay type with the maximum interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes, conforming to the current NEC. C. Circuit Breakers: When circuit breakers are used in disconnect switches, provide the thermal-magnetic type with current interruption ratings as required at the point of application. D. Conduit Connectors: Watertight as manufactured by Myers Hubs, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Review the Drawings and verify the disconnect switches are correct for the applications. B. Make sure that the correct fuses or breakers are being used regarding size and short circuit interrupting capability. C. Prepare adhesive labels on the inside door of each switch indicating UL fuse class and size or breaker type and size for replacement. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEC Article 380. B. Mount switches 6'-6" (to top of cabinet) above finished floor or grade. C. Install switches level and plumb. D. In wet and corrosive areas, including outdoor locations, install switches on spacers to provide a space of approximate 1/4-inch between the back of cabinet and the mounting surface. E. In wet and corrosive areas, including outdoor locations, connect conduit to the bottom of enclosure and to the lower 30 percent of the sides using watertight connectors. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable enclosed switches and circuit breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions. END OF SECTION - I M: 10/10/2017 16165 - 3/3 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors B. Equipment grounding conductors C. Bonding D. Power system grounding E. Communication system grounding F. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding G. Control equipment grounding 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires 2. ASTM B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, Soft 3. ASTM B33: Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE 142-82: Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 2. IEEE 383-2.5: IEEE Standard for Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations. C. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables 2. UL 467: Grounding and Bonding Equipment D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA No. 70- National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 250 -Grounding. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data 2. Installation, terminating and splicing procedure 3. Instruction for handling and storage 4. Dimensions and weight B. Submittals after construction M:6/24/2015 16170 - 1 /6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING 1. Report of field tests and observations certified by Contractor. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: 1. Use insulated cable conforming to requirements of the vertical tray flame test as described in IEEE 383-2.5. 2. Test grounding system in the field in accordance with procedures outlined in Part 3 - Execution. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship grounding cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Pack and crate other materials specified to withstand normal abuse during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cable: 1. American Insulated Wire Company 2. Houston Wire &Cable 3. General Cable Company 4. Okonite Company 5. Interstate Wire Company 6. Southwire 7. Encore Wire B. Ground Rods and Connectors: 1. Blackburn 2. Copperweld 3. Thomas & Betts C. Exothermic Connections: 1. Burndy Corporation (Therm-O-Weld) 2. Erico Products (Cadweld) D. Grounding Connectors: 1. Burndy Corporation 2. O.Z. Gedney 3. Thomas & Betts M:6/24/2015 16170 -2/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design: 1. Provide grounding cable and materials with the following characteristics: a. Use a grounding system designed in accordance with NEC Article No. 250 - Grounding, and the IEEE 142-82 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. B. Materials: 1. Use grounding conductors, bare or insulated, which are manufactured and tested in accordance with applicable standards ASTM B3, ASTM B8 and ASTM B33. 2. Where specified on Drawings, provide a main ground loop of No. 4/0 AWG, Class C stranded, bare copper cable. Small groups of isolated equipment may be grounded by a No. 2 AWG minimum insulated conductor connected to the main loop. Generally, taps shall be sized as follows: -, a. Main ground loop or grid:#4/0 minimum b. Switchgear, motor control,centers and power transformers: #4/0 c. Motors 200 hp and above: #4/0 d. Power panels-AC and DC: #2/0 e. Control panels and consoles: #2 f. Building columns: #4/0 g. Fencing posts: #2/0 3. Where single conductor insulated grounding conductors are called for, use 600- volt insulation. Use ground conductors identified with green insulation or green tape marking. 4. Supply identifying ribbon which is PVC tape, 3 inches wide, red color, permanently imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW" in black letters as specified in Section 16195, Electrical Identification. 5. Utilize flexible copper braid across hinged chain link or fence gates to bond the movable portion to the grounded fence post. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete site preparation and soil compaction before trenching and driving ground rods for the underground grid. B. Verify from Drawings the exact location of stub-up points for grounding of equipment, fences and building or steel structures. M:6/24/2015 16170 - 3/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING 3.02 CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA A. Install the main ground loop at a depth of at least 30 inches below earth surface. Connect the ground loop to ground rods and to tap connections to form a complete system as indicated on the electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall give special attention to the grounding of service equipment, structures and fences to comply with the NEC, local authorities and the serving utility company. B. Electrical equipment, buildings, tanks, and other structures and equipment shall be grounded as indicated on the Drawings. Where ground rods are required, the rods shall be 10 feet long, 3/4-inch diameter, copper-clad steel ground rods, or as specified on the Drawings. Rods shall be driven vertically, and the top of the rods shall be a minimum of 18 inches below finished grade, or as specified on the Drawings. C. Local pushbutton and selector switch stations, two-wire control devices, disconnect switches, lighting transformers, panelboards, operator panels, benchboards, and the enclosures of other electrical apparatus shall be grounded through an equipment grounding conductor run with the power supply or control circuit conductors or shall be grounded as shown on the Drawings. D. Ground medium voltage motors, in addition to the grounding conductors in the motor feeder cable, with a separate No. 4/0 AWG cable to motor frame. E. Motors having power supplied by multiconductor cable shall be grounded by a separate grounding conductor in the cable and where supplied by single conductor cable in conduit by a grounding conductor pulled in the conduit. Connect ground conductors to the ground bus in the motor control center and to the ground terminal provided in the motor conduit box. F. Do not ground the insulated bearing pedestals of large motors. G. Connect ladder-type cable trays to the grounding electrode system. H. Install a warning ribbon approximately 12 inches below finished grade directly above the ground grid. I. Connect fence posts of chain link and metal fences to the main ground loop at least every 50 feet. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Grounding: 1. Make grounding connections to surfaces, which are dry and cleaned of paint, rust, oxides, scales, grease and dirt to ensure good conductivity. Clean copper and galvanized steel to remove oxide before making welds or connections. 2. ,Use the exothermic welding process for below-grade grounding connections, except at ground rods. Use mechanical connectors or thermal connections for above-grade grounding connections as shown on the Drawings. M:6/24/2015 16170 -4/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING 3. Make grounding connections to electrical equipment, vessels, mechanical equipment and ground rods in accordance with the Drawings. 4. Ground tanks and vessels by making connections to integral structural supports or to existing grounding lugs or pads, and not to the body of the tank or vessel. 5. Leave ground connections to equipment visible for inspection. Protect them with PVC non-metallic conduit as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Make connections to motor frames and.ground buses with lugs attached to the equipment by means of bolts. Do not use motor anchor bolts or equipment housing for fastening lugs of grounding cable. 7. Where the wiring for lighting systems consists of single conductor cables in conduit, provide each conduit with an equipment-grounding conductor. Use a grounding conductor with green colored insulation and ground equipment in the lighting system. B. Raceway and Support Systems Grounding: 1. Install raceway, cable rack or tray and conduit so that it is bonded together and permanently grounded to the equipment ground bus, according to the Drawings. Connection to conduit may be grounding bushing or ground clamp. 2. Install raceway at low voltage motor control centers or other low voltage control equipment so that it is bonded and grounded, except that any conduit which is effectively grounded to the sheet metal enclosure by bonding bushing or hubs need not be otherwise bonded. 3. Where a grounding conductor is run in or on a cable tray, bond the grounding conductor to each section of cable tray with a cable tray ground clamp. 4. Where only grounding conductor is installed in a metal conduit, bond both ends of the conduit to the grounding conductor. 5. Provide flexible"jumpers" around raceway expansion joints. Use copper bonding straps for steel conduit. Install jumpers across cable tray joints, which have been parted to allow for expansion and any hinged cable tray connections. C. Fences and Gates: 1. Ground fences, fence posts and gates to the underground grid as shown on the Drawings. D. Power System Grounding: 1. Solidly ground the secondary neutral of the main power supply transformer either to the ground grid or through an impedance. See Drawings for details. 2. Solidly ground the neutral of lighting, instrument and control transformers. E. Cable Armor and Shields: M:6/24/2015 - 16170 - 5/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING 1. For shielded control cable, terminate and ground the shield at one end only, preferably at the control panel end for instrument and communication cable and at the supply end for electronic power cables. Maintain shield continuity by jumpering the ground shield across connection point where it is broken at junction boxes, or other splice points. Insulate these points from ground. 2. Connect the ground wire in power cable assemblies at each terminal point to a ground bus, if available, or to the equipment enclosure. Do not carry these ground wires through a "doughnut" current transformer(CT) used for ground fault relaying; do carry ground leads from stress cones through CTs. Ground power cable armor and shield at each terminal point. F. Test Wells: 1. Provide access (test wells)for testing the ground grid system at one or several ground rod locations. Make test wells of a pipe surrounding the rod and connections with a cover placed on top at grade level. See Drawings for details. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test: 1. Perform ground resistance tests after underground installation and connections to building steel are complete, unless otherwise noted on applicable Drawings. 2. Make tests at each ground test well using a "fall of potential"test method. Each ground test well shall not exceed a maximum resistance of 5 ohms. Where measured values exceed this figure, install additional ground rods as required to reduce the resistance to the specified limit. B. Inspection: 1. Inspection of the grounding system by the Engineer and the local Code Inspector must take place before the grid trenches are backfilled. 3.05 RESTORATION A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. B. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other Work to their original condition. D. Include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. E. Restore disturbed paving as indicated. END OF SECTION M.6/24/2015 16170 -6/6 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Requirements of Division 16 "Basic Electrical Requirements" apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. C. Strut. D. Fittings. E. Hangers. F. Hanger rod. G. Brackets. H. Cable ties. I. Spring vibration isolators. J. Concrete Equipment Pads. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 16010: 1. Provide strut by no more than two (2) manufacturers. 2. Hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, spacing, features, and application for each required type of hanger, support, sleeve, seal, and fastener to be used. 3. Shop'drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials. 4. Submittals in this section shall also be signed by the Structural Engineer and/or System Building Manufacturers where applicable. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Comply with the following: 1. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL, ETL, CSA, or other approved, nationally recognized testing and listing agency that provides third- party certification follow-up services. 2. Comply with Federal Specification W-C-582A, FF-B-575C and FS-S-760A(2). M: 10/27/2015 16190 - 1 /7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems: a. Allied Tube &Conduit b. American Electric c. B-Line Systems, Inc. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Unistrut Corporation 2. Hangers: a. Erico/Caddy b. Allied c. American Electric d. B-Line e. GS Metals f. Unistrut 3. Brackets: a. Erico b. Bowers c. Raco d. Steel City 4. Vibration Isolators: a. Amber/Booth b. Dynasonic c. Grinnell d. Mason Industries 2.02 COATINGS A. Coating: Strut, fittings, hangers and hanger rod shall be ASTM A123 hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Hardware fasteners and clamps shall have ASTM B633 Type III SCI electroplated zinc coatings. 2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps. Purlin hangers shall mount to the vertical member of the purlin or as otherwise required by building manufacturer and/or structural engineer. M: 10/27/2015 16190 -2/ 7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation SUPPORTING DEVICES B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction.features as follows: 1. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using beam clamps. 2. Use steel springhead type toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. 3. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware. 4. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. 5. Do not drill structural steel members. C. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish. E. U-Channel Systems (Strut): 12-gauge steel 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" minimum channels, with 9/16" x.1-1/8" maximum short slots at 2" on center maximum. Strut shall be cold formed per ASTM A570 GR33. Joints in strut system shall be made with 4 bolt accessories as a minimum. Conduit clamps to strut shall be bolt unistrut 1100, 1200, 1400 Series or equal. F. Recessed Box Supports Brackets: Mount boxes with Erico/Caddy SGB Series, FBS Series or equal. 2.04 FIELD FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Shop or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U- channel components. B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted: a. 3-inch and smaller: 20-gauge. b. 4-inch to 6-inch: 16-gauge. M: 10/27/2015 16190 -3/7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation SUPPORTING DEVICES c. over 6-inch: 14-gauge. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. D. All Thread Rod: Hot dip galvanized, 1/4" minimum. 2.05 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Hangers: Spring steel hangers shall be amber/booth BS Series or equal. B. Pads: Provide ribbed neoprene pads amber/booth Type NR or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install supporting devices to fasten electric components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC, NECA and manufacturers requirements. B. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following: 1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. 2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used. 3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration and shock resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs. C. Exclusions: 1. Do not fasten supports to ceiling system, pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment and conduit. 2. Tie wires and perforated pipe straps shall not be used for securing conduits. 3. Do not support loads from the bottom chord member of trusses or open web steel joists. 4. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires or ceiling tees. M: 10/27/2015 16190 -4/7 P.9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation SUPPORTING DEVICES 5. Do not use powder-actuated anchors unless indicated by Architect or Structural Engineer. 6. Do not drill or cut structural members unless directed by Architect or Structural Engineer. D. Touch up all scratches or cuts on steel components with an approval zinc chromate or a 90 percent zinc paint. Use PVC compound on PVC coated components. . 3.02 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND SLEEVES A. Fabricate supports form structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate,strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nut unless otherwise noted. B. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four. C. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. D. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. Where conduit is of different sizes, use the same trapeze hanger space supports for the smallest size conduit on the rack. E. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1A4-inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. F. Branch circuit raceways which are 1-inch or smaller may be attached to wall studs by use manufactured clips. G. Space supports for raceways in accordance with NEC. H. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. I. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire-rated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire-rated wall or floor construction, apply UL-listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables. 3.03 BOXES AND WIRING DEVICES A. Structural Mounting: They shall be rigidly supported from a structural member of the building either directly or by using a metal or wood brace. Support wires that do not provide rigid support shall not be permitted as the sole support. M: 10/27/2015 16190 - 5/7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation SUPPORTING DEVICES B. Outlet or junction boxes in exposed or concealed ceilings, all thread rod, manufactured brackets shall be mounted to building structure, strut suspended from building structure. Do not support boxes with conduit only or with all thread rod. C. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. D. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box. E. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. F. Metal braces shall be protected against corrosion and formed from metal not less than .020 inch (508 micrometers)thick uncoated: G. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. - H. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or tees. 3.04 CABLE TRAYS A. Cable tray shall be supported with strut, all thread rod and beam clamps at intervals no longer than as specified in Section 16114. 3.05 WIRES AND CABLES A. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors. 3.06 BUSWAY A. Provide hangers and supports by busway manufacturer at intervals indicated in Section 16466. 3.07 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Provide supports as indicated in Section 16510 and 16530. 3.08 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. This shall include but not be limited to cabinets, enclosures, disconnect switches, panelboards, motor controllers, VFD's, small transfer switches and wireways. B. All cabinets and panelboards shall be wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboard one inch off wall. E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. M: 10/27/2015 16190 - 6/7 P.9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation SUPPORTING DEVICES 3.09 INDOOR FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. This shall include but not be limited to switchboards, dry type transformers and large transfer switches. B. Free standing equipment shall be installed on concrete pads unless noted otherwise. C. Concrete pads shall be 3"tall and be 2" wider than equipment on all 4 sides. D. Concrete shall be 3000 PSI, 28 day compressive strength. E. Concrete, forms and reinforcing shall be in accordance with Division 3. F. Floor mounted transformers shall also be provided with neoprene vibration isolation pads. 3.10 INDOOR SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment to be suspended shall be supported with strut, with all thread rod and beam clamps. B. Transformers shall also have spring steel hanger vibration isolators. 3.11 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR RACK OR PEDESTAL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be rack or pedestal mounted only where indicated or required by installation. B. Mount on strut bolted to concrete or anchored with concrete base when located outside. 3.12 OUTDOOR PAD MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. This shall include but not be limited to distribution transformers, switchgear, switchboards, dry type transformers, motor control centers and generators. B. Concrete pads shall have a footprint 12" larger than equipment on all sides. C. Concrete pads shall be 6"thick with 18" deep by 12" wide grade beams on all sides. D. Concrete shall be 3000 PSI, 28 day compressive strength. E. Provide 6"wire mesh in pad. F. Provide 4#4 bar with#3 stirrups at 18" on center in grade beams. END OF SECTION M: 10/27/2015 16190 -7/7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Product Data: 1. Submit for each type of product specified. C. Samples: 1. Submit for each color, lettering style, and or graphic representation required for identification materials, samples of labels and signs. D. Miscellaneous: 1. Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and _ labels. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with ANSI C2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: 1. Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere. B. Conform to ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum (" length of color field for each raceway or cable size. M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 1 /8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1. Color: Black legend on orange field. 2. Legend: Indicates voltage. C. Adhesive Labels: 1. Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl. Legend is over-laminated with clear, wear and chemical resistant coating. D. Pre-tensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: 1. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic bands sized to suit diameter of line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when placed in position. E. Colored Adhesive Tape: 1. Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3-mils thick by 1 to 2-in. wide (0.08-mm thick by 25 to 51-mm wide). F. Underground Line Warning Tape: 1. Permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape with following features: a. Size: Not less than 6-in. wide by 4-mils thick (152-mm wide by 0.102-mm thick). b. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. c. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. d. Printed Legend: Indicates type of underground line. G. Tape Markers: 1. Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. H. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: 1. Bands cut from 0.014-in. (0.4-mm)thick aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. I. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: J. Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field printed legends. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener. K. Aluminum Faced Card Stock Tags: 1. Wear resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002-in. (0.05-mm)thick, laminated with moisture M: 10/27/2015 16195 -2/ 8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller. Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION resistant acrylic adhesive, and punched for fastener. Preprinted legends suit each application. L. Brass or Aluminum Tags: 1. Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2 by 2-in. (51 by 51-mm) by 0.05-in. (1.3-mm). 2.02 ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: 1. Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere. B. Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-in. (1.6-mm) minimum thick for signs up to 20-sq. in. (129-sq. cm), 1/8-in. (3.2-mm)thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved Legend: Black letters on white face. 2. Punched for mechanical fasteners. C. Baked Enamel Signs for Interior Use: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size as indicated or as otherwise required for application. 1/4-in. (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. D. Exterior, Metal Backed, Butyrate Signs: 1. Wear resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-in. (1-mm), galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to application. 1/4-in. (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. E. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: 1. Self-tapping stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws, with nuts, flat washers and lock washers. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: 1. Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, 1 piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties with following features: a. Minimum Width: 3/16-in. (5-mm). b. Tensile Strength: 50-lb (22.3 kg) minimum. c. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 185°F (Minus 4 to 85°C). d. Color: As indicated where used for color-coding. M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 3/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION L B. Paint: 1. Alkyd-urethane enamel. Primer as recommended by enamel manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install identification devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: 1. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and or designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations used in Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. D. Sequence of Work: 1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish,"install identification after completion of finish work. E. Self Adhesive Identification Products: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying. F. Identify feeders over 600 V with "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters 2-in. (51- mm) high, stenciled with paint at 10-ft (3-m) intervals over continuous, painted orange background. Identify following: 1. Entire floor area directly above conduits running beneath and within 12-in. (305- mm) of basement or ground floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to conduits concealed within wall. 3. All accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around conduits in vertical shafts, exposed in building, or concealed above suspended ceilings. 4. Entire surface of exposed conduits. G. Install painted identification as follows: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime Surfaces: a. For galvanized metal, use single component, acrylic vehicle coating formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units, use M: 10/27/2015 16195 -4/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION heavy duty, acrylic resin block filler. For concrete surfaces, use clear, alkali resistant, alkyd binder type sealer. 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of silicone alkyd enamel. 4. Apply primer and finish materials according to manufacturer's instructions. H. Identify Raceways and Exposed Cables of Certain Systems with Color Banding: 1. Band exposed and accessible raceways of systems listed below for identification. a. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap around, colored plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or combination of both. Make each color band 2-in. (51- mm)wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of 2 color markings in contact, side by side. b. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-ft (15 m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-ft (7.6 m) in congested areas. c. Colors: As follows: (1) Fire Alarm System: Red. (2) Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. (3) Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. (4) Security System: Blue and yellow. (5) Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. (6) Telecommunications System: Green and yellow. I. Install Caution Signs for Enclosures Over 600 V: 1. Use pressure sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange field. Install on exterior of door or cover. J. Install Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: 1. Label externally as follows: a. Exposed Boxes: Pressure sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover. b. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card stock tags. c. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent. K. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: 1. During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 to 8-in. (150 to 200-mm) below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16-in. (400-mm), use single line marker. M: 10/27/2015 16195- 5/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION a. Install line marker for underground wiring,both direct buried and in raceway. L. Color Code Conductors: 1. Secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout secondary electrical system. a. Field applied, color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. (1) Colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for distance of 6-in. (150-mm)from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last 2 turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-in. (25-mm)wide tape in colors as specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. 2. Colored cable ties applied in groups of 3 ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3-in. (76-mm)from terminal and spaced 3- in. (76-mm) apart. Apply with special tool or pliers, tighten to snug fit, and cut off excess length. System Voltage A B C Neutral 120/240 Volt 1 Ph/3w Black Red White 120/208 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Red Blue White 120/240 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Orange Blue White 277/480 Volt 3Ph/4w Brown Purple Yellow Gray Motor Control 1 Black 2 Red 3 Blue Ground Green M. Power Circuit Identification: 1. Use metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes,junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms. a. Legend: %-in. (6.4-mm)steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations. b. Fasten tags with nylon cable ties;fasten bands using integral ears. N. Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. Conductors to Be Extended in Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color coding for voltage and phase indication of secondary circuit. M: 10/27/2015 16195 -6/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION I Identify 3. Multiple Control and Communications Circuits in Same Enclosure: Ide t y each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use consistent system of tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape. O. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows: 1. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where indicated or required to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. 2. Emergency Operating Signs: a. Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-in. (9-mm) high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and or emergency operations. P. Install identification as follows: 1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text with '/2-in. (13-mm) high lettering on 1-1/2-in. (38-mm) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use lettering 2-in. (51-mm) high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of following categories of equipment: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Electrical substations. e. Motor control centers. f. Motor starters. g. Push button stations. h. Power transfer equipment. Contactors. j. Remote controlled switches. k. Dimmers. I. Control devices. m. Transformers. n. Inverters. o. Rectifiers. p. Frequency converters. q. Battery racks. r. Power generating units. s. Telephone switching equipment. t. Clock/program master equipment. u. Call system master station. v. TV/audio monitoring master station. w. Fire alarm master station or control panel. M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 7/8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION x. Security monitoring master station or control panel. 2. Apply designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, push buttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. END OF SECTION M: 10/27/2015 16195 - 8/ 8 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS SECTION 16211 NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies the furnishing and installation of a packaged electric generating plant. B. The packaged, natural gas engine-electric generating plant shall be pre-wired, pre- piped, assembled, and aligned on a single skid type base. The packaged system of new, unused equipment of the manufacturer's latest design includes all necessary instruments, devices, switches, and other appurtenances for proper operation of the unit: supplies steel safety guards around all external rotating parts, and provides a unit on which adjustments, repairs, and normal maintenance are possible without the use of special tools. The supplier will be responsible for the proper performance of the complete unit and support systems. C. All equipment provided shall be manufactured by a single source of supply, and supplied by a manufacturer who has been continuously engaged in the manufacture of industrial grade Power System products for a minimum of 25 years. The manufacturer shall have test facilities available to test the proposed equipment and demonstrate the equipment will meet the project specifications. 1.02 GUARANTEE A. All systems and components supplied under this specification shall be guaranteed against defective material, poor workmanship, design deficiencies, and failure during normal usage for a minimum of 12 months after the date of acceptance by Engineer. Vendor shall make necessary corrections to all deficiencies noted within this time, without expense to purchaser. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided. 1.03 STANDARDS AND CODES A. All material and equipment supplied under this specification shall be designed, assembled, and tested in full compliance with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. NEC - National,Electric Code 2. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 3. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories 4. NEMA.- National Electronic Manufacturers Association 5. ASA-American Standards Association 6. ANSI -American National Standards Institute 7. NFPA— National Fire Protection Association 1.04 All components used shall be UL labeled or listed whenever such recognition is M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 1 / 10 P: 2/24/2021 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS available. 1.05 DRAWINGS AND DATA A. The following items shall be submitted with vendor's proposal: 1. Outline dimensions and weights. 2. Descriptive literature describing the standard series specified (not a one-of-a-kind fabrication). 3. Drawing submittal schedule with approval allowance requirements. 4. Shipping time after receipt of order. 5. Exceptions and clarifications to this specification. 6. Factory testing procedures. 7. Submit manufacturer's detailed sizing report indicating compliance with the parameters and load starting sequence as indicated in Section 2.02. Genset size indicated in Section 2.02B is allowed only if manufacturer's sizing report produced by generator manufacturer's representative indicates full compliance with all aspects of the parameters and loads listed in section 2.02. B. The following items are required of the successful bidder prior to manufacture: 1. Certified dimensional drawings showing weight, outline dimensions, bolting and drilling details, clearances for installation, operation and maintenance, and required ventilation. 2. Elevation views, showing and identifying all items furnished and section views as required to locate all components. 3. Bill of material describing all components and recommended spare parts with pricing and delivery. 4. Brochures on engine, generator, muffler, batteries, charger, control panel, and any accessory equipment showing ratings, construction features, and performance characteristics. 5. Schematic and wiring diagrams of the electrical system showing all factory wiring and clearly indicating wiring and voltage of any electrical strip heaters. Also, submit fully detailed inter-connection drawings indicating each individual connection to any remote equipment, including a separate connection drawing to show point to point electrical wiring connections. 6. Submit documentation indicating compliance or certification with EPA emission requirements. M: 10/14/2019 16211 -2 / 10 P: 2/24/2021 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS 7. Submit documentation for sound test data, based on free field environment. 1.06 SUBMITTALS AFTER MANUFACTURE 1. Factory and Field Tests - Provide each factory and field test report on the actual packaged electric generating plant provided, indicating results for all tests described herein. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals-Two weeks prior to final inspection, provide the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals pertaining directly to the unit provided. Include the following information: a. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as-built shop drawings, outline drawings, schematic and wiring diagrams. b. Instructions for erection and alignment, including tolerances and preparation for use. 3. EPA Emissions certification test reports. a. For all EPA compliant listed units, provide digital copy of 3rd party test report necessary for EPA certification. b. File all required documentation with the EPA and TCEQ on behalf of the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Natural Gas Engine Driven Generator Set, complete with accessories, shall be: 1. Cummins/Onan 2. Kohler 3. MTU Onsite 4. Taylor Power Systems 5. Pre-Approved equal B. Engines shall be: 1. Cummins 2. Doosan 2.02 RATINGS A. VOLTAGE AND CONNECTION —480V/277V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 60 Hertz, 0.8 Power Factor. - B. POWER— 125KW, 156KVA M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 3 / 10 P: 2/24/2021 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS C. LOADS & STARTING SEQUENCE—Generator'set shall be capable of starting the following loads in the sequence shown: 1. Lighting and control loads of 25KVA, single phase. 2. One 20 HP motor, 1.15 service factor, code letter H, full voltage starting. 3. One 20 HP motor, 1.15 service factor, code letter H, full voltage starting. 4. One 20 HP motor, 1.15 service factor, code letter H, full voltage starting. D. Generator shall be capable of starting loads in the above sequence with not more than 20% instantaneous terminal voltage drop, and not more than 10% sustained terminal voltage drop with the specified KVA load at near zero power factor applied to the generator set. See section 1.04 A 7. E. Generator shall be capable of starting loads in the above sequence with not more than 10% instantaneous terminal frequency drop. See section 1.04 A 7. F. Site operating parameters shall be 100 ft. altitude and an ambient temperature of 95 degrees F. G. Contractor will be responsible for verifying generator operations by executing procedures in the generator checklist attached to this specification. The checklist includes a load bank test. 2.03 ENGINE A. Type - Liquid cooled, natural gas fired engine, either naturally aspirated or turbocharged. 4-cycled engine required, or as approved by the ENGINEER. B. Rating - Provide an engine with brake horsepower not less than required by the full load rating of the generator, including losses, and with all accessories attached. C. Speed -The engine speed will be suitable for direct connection to the generator without exceeding engine manufacturer's published curves. Speed must not exceed 1800 PRM. D. BMEP -The engine BMEP will not exceed 351 PSI, when producing rated load. Piston speed shall be 2250 feet per minute or less. E. Construction: 1. Replaceable liners. 2. Two (2)valves per cylinder. 3. Full pressure lube system with crank shaft driven oil pump. 4. Unit injectors. 5. Full flow replaceable oil filter. 6. Primary and secondary fuel oil filters. M: 10/14/2019 16211 -4 / 10 P: 2/24/2021 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS 7. Replaceable fuel transfer pump suitable for a maximum of 4 feet suction lift. 8. Oil bath or dry type air intake cleaner. F. Starting System 1. Heavy duty, battery driven electric starter motor. 2. A fully charged 24 volt lead acid, impact resistant, storage battery or batteries mounted on the unit. Make battery capacity sufficient for four cranking cycles at firing speed of 10 seconds duration each, with 15 seconds rest periods- Provide all battery cables, connections, electrolyte, and a hydrometer. 3. Provide additional heaters or insulation as required to keep all generator components capable of cold weather starting, minimum -31°C. • G. Cooling System -The generator set will be furnished with a unit mounted radiator having. sufficient capacity for cooling the engine when delivering full rated horsepower at the design ambient. The fan is to be engine driven pusher type. An immersion heater shall be furnished in the jacket water system. H. Exhaust System - High degree, critical-rated stainless steel muffler and/or catalytic converter assembly with maximum silencing capacity mounted on unit. Include a suitable length of flexible exhaust tubing for mounting between engine and muffler. When V type engines are used, a wye type flex will be furnished. All exhaust equipment and hardware mounted to the exterior of the generator enclosure shall be stainless steel. I. Fuel System 1. Designed for natural gas fuel. 2. Full flow replaceable element fuel filter. 3. Fuel connection lines between tank and engine. J. Governor- Provide governor of the electric type, Woodward, Onan or,an approved equal, to maintain frequency stability at any constant load, including no load, within plus or minus '/4 percent, and to maintain frequency regulation between no load steady state and full load steady within .5 percent. K. Battery Charger-A static, solid state type battery charger unit which automatically controls the charge rate. Include a charging rate ammeter, thermal overload circuit and transformer. The charge shall be suitable for operation at 120 volts single phase, 60 Hertz. The maximum charging time to bring the batteries up to full charge will be 12 hours. Mount charger on unit, using adequate vibration devices. Charger shall be of the dual rate type. L. Emissions— Engines used in proposed generator set to be certified to comply with current US EPA and any applicable TCEQ air quality regulations at the project location and time of installation. 2.04 GENERATOR M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 5 / 10 P: 2/24/2021 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS A. Type- Furnish a direct coupled, synchronous, brushless type generator with amortisseur windings, revolving field, exciter, and built-in static rectifier and statically regulated excitation system. B. Insulation System - Class H, minimum, with temperature rise limited to 105°C over a 40°C ambient under the application of full plant load conditions. C. Instantaneous Voltage Dip - Less than 15 percent when sequenced load is applied to the unit. D. Voltage Stability- Maintain within plus or minus 1 percent of rated voltage at any constant from no load to full load. E. Voltage Regulation - Maintain within plus or minus 1 percent deviation from rated voltage between no load steady state and full load steady state. F. Enclosure-Weatherproof, with locking side panels, unless otherwise specified. G. Coupling - From engine, drive rotor through a semi-flexible coupling to ensure permanent alignment. H. Strip Heaters - Provide thermostatically controlled, low surface temperature space heaters to prevent condensation. I. Generator Set Control and Protection - Provide comprehensive monitoring and control system integral to the Generator Set control to guard the electrical integrity of the alternator and power system. Provide single and 3-phase fault current regulation, so that downstream protective devices have the maximum current available to quickly clear fault conditions, without subjecting the alternator to potentially catastrophic failure conditions. Include provisions to either prevent over voltage due to single phase faults, or to shut down the generator set if line to neutral voltage on any phase exceeds 115%for more than 0.5 seconds. Submittals shall demonstrate that the protective device provides proper protection for the alternator by a comparison of the trip characteristic of the breaker with the thermal damage characteristic of the alternator. Field circuit breakers shall not be acceptable for generator overcurrent protection. 2.05 CONTROL PANEL A. General— Provide a control panel mounted to unit which includes, but is not limited to, the following instruments and protective devices. 1. A C ammeter. 2. Phase selector switch. 3. Current transformers. 4. A C voltmeter. M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 6 / 10 P. 2/24/2021 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS 5. Automatic solid state voltage regulator. 6. Rheostat for adjusting voltage plus or minus 5 percent of rated voltage. 7. Engine Malfunction Warning Lights: a. Low oil pressure. b. High water temperature. c. Low water temperature d. Engine overcrank. e. Engine overspeed. 8. Frequency meter. 9. Non-resettable elapsed time meter with a 9,999.9 hour maximum indication. 10. Coolant temperature gage. 11. Oil pressure gage. 12. Main circuit breaker. 13. Combination alarm-shutdown system with manual reset and indicating lights for high engine temperature, low oil pressure, engine overspeed, and engine fail-to- start. Include an additional set of contacts for remote alarms. 14. Manual start/stop switch for control of engine. 15. Alarm dry contact closures as follows: a. Low oil pressure b. High water temperature c. Low water temperature d. Engine overcrank e. _ Engine run 16. Remote control contacts as follows: Engine start via transfer switch (which will include power transfer). 17. Provide latest electronic control panel at engine and with remote control panel at transfer switch. Remote panel to have full functions. B. All interface wiring connections shall be made in the control panel. C. Control panel heater- Provide thermostatically controlled, low surface temperature space heaters to prevent condensation. D. Remote alarm annunciator—Comply with NFPA 110. An LED labeled with proper alarm M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 7 / 10 P: 2/24/2021 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS conditions shall identify each alarm even and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. E. Generator shall include Modbus TCP/IP communications protocol for integration of generator with Owner's control system. Provide RJ-45 ethernet connection. Where necessary, contractor shall provide serial to ethernet convertor. 2.06 ENGINE START/STOP CONTROLS A. The engine controls shall be provided with bypassing of the low oil pressure shutdown circuitry during start-up. B. If unit fails to start in an appropriate time (normally 30 seconds), the starting circuit shall shut down for an appropriate time (approximate 10 seconds) and then repeat the start cycle. If the unit still fails to start after approximately four start attempts, the overcrank alarm shall activate and the starting circuit shall shut down. C. The engine start/stop control shall be static solid state. • 2.07 BASE A. Mount the assembled packaged unit on a base of welded structural steel, box type construction. Prime all exposed metal parts with a rust inhibitor and finish in durable machinery enamel. B. Vibration isolators shall be of the steel spring type. 2.08 WEATHERPROOF SOUND ATTENUATING HOUSING The enclosure shall meet the following criteria: rigidity wind test equal to 100 MPH (ASCE 7-05, Exposure C), roof load equal to 40 lbs. per sq. ft., and rain test equal to 4" per hour. A. Construction 1. Provide an overall weatherproof prefabricated steel or aluminum enclosure. Instruments, controls, and battery system shall be mounted within enclosure. 2. Doors—Hinged with padlocking provisions. Restraint/Hold back hardware to keep door open at 180 degrees during maintenance. Rain lips over all doors. 3. Panels— Removable side panels, when equipped, shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. 4. Louvers— Equipped with bird screen to permit air circulation when engine is not running while excluding bird and rodents. 5. Hardware—All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. 6. Mounting Base—Suitable for mounting on housekeeping pad. B. Engine Cooling 1. Housing shall provide ample airflow for engine generator operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 40 deg C. The enclosure shall not exceed the generator manufacturer's recommendations for total external static pressure to ensure adequate airflow for cooling and combustion. M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 8 / 10 P: 2/24/2021 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS C. Sound Performance 1. Reduce the sound level of the engine generator while operating at full load to a maximum of 75 dBA measured at any location 23 feet(7 meters)from the engine generator in a free field environment. D. Painting 1. Prime all exposed metal parts.with a suitable rust inhibitor applied to the clean, bare metal, followed by two coats of an epoxy paint of powder-coated and baked . for exterior weather. E. Site Provisions 1. The complete assembly of engine generator, and enclosure shall be designed to be lifted into place as a single unit. F. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Lighting Panelboard — For generators larger than 200 kW or when indicated on the drawings, provide a factory installed 120/240 Volt, single-phase panelboard with a minimum main breaker rating of 60 Amps inside the generator enclosure. The panel shall be mounted in accordance with NEC working space requirements. All generator 120/240 Volt components shall be factory wired to the panelboard. 2. Interior Lighting— For generators 150kW and larger, provide two (2) 120V fluorescent strip, compact fluorescent, or LED fixtures rated vapor-tight, wet location, and high ambient temperature. Provide two (2) 3-way switches, one on each side. 3. Receptacle— Provide one (1) 125V, 20A, Duplex GFI receptacle in a weatherproof FS box with a weatherproof cover mounted internally to the enclosure. The receptacle shall be mounted in accordance with NEC requirements. The circuit shall be wired locally when a single-phase panelboard is provided with the generator. G. Contractor to coordinate with manufacturer on housing size prior to constructing concrete pad. 2.09 TESTING A. Units shall be factory tested under design conditions. Purchaser, at his option, may witness test. Vendor shall give one (1)week notice before test is made. 2.10 FIELD TESTS A. Perform field tests at the site after installation is complete and in the presence of the Owner's representative. B. Perform on site resistive load bank testing to the full capacity of the generator set for a minimum of two (2) continuous hours. Verify adequate generator cooling, fuel flow, M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 9 / 10 P: 2/24/2021 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AND CONTROLS metering, and operation. Contractor shall contact Engineer at least 48 hours prior to commencement of testing. C. Perform sequence start-up of plant and demonstrate compliance with specifications. D. Provide 3rd party emissions testing required for EPA certification for all EPA compliant listed units. Provide copies of the reports to Engineer and file all required paperwork with the EPA and TCEQ necessary for certification. E. Perform natural gas line pressure testing in accordance with NFPA 54 in the presence of the Owner's representative and provide documentation to the Engineer before introducing natural gas into the system. Contractor shall contact Engineer at least 48 hours prior to commencement of testing. 2.11 TRAINING A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be limited to 3 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. 2.12 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain service parts inventory at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. Within 50 mile of the job site, the supplier shall maintain; a minimum of 6 factory trained and qualified field technicians; a proper supply of spare parts for the supplied equipment; a shop with overhaul capabilities; and be able to provide 24 hour, 7 day per week, 365 day per year field service capability. C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years. END OF SECTION M: 10/14/2019 16211 - 10 / 10 P: 2/24/2021 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES SECTION 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs) rated 600 V and below and switching devices commonly used with them. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1. NEMA AB1-86- Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70-90 - National Electrical Code (NEC). C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 1. UL 98-87- Enclosed and Dead Front Switches. 2. UL 486A-80 - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. Seventh Edition. 3. UL 489-86 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. Seventh Edition. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): Device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains interruption of power in circuit it protects. B. Ampere-Squared-Seconds: Expression of available thermal energy resulting from current flow. With regard to current-limiting fuses and circuit breakers, ampere-squared-seconds during fault current interruption represents energy allowed to flow before fuse or breaker interrupts fault current within its current limiting range. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. M: 3/31/2016 16475 - 1 /7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Components and Installation: a. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code (NEC)." b. Local codes and ordinances. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar OCPDs from single manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDs), GENERAL A. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers; and also as individually enclosed and mounted single units. 2.02 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers except as indicated: 1. Square D/Schneider Electric 2. No exceptions B. UL 489 and NEMA AB 1. C. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers in load-center-type panelboards and breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal. D. Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole. E. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: Factory adjusted to low-trip-setting current values. F. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in switchboard or panelboards where indicated. G. Enclosure for Switchboard or Motor Control Center Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated. H. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, as indicated or required M: 3/31/2016 16475 -2/7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES to suit environment where located. I. Combination Circuit Breakers and Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters: UL 943 arranged for sensing and tripping for ground-fault current in addition to overcurrent and short-circuit current. 1. Match features and module size of panelboard breakers and provide clear identification of ground fault trip function. 2. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as Class A, Type 1 device. 3. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 30 milliamperes. J. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let-through ampere-squared-seconds during fault conditions to value less than ampere-squared-seconds of one-half-cycle wave of prospective symmetrical fault current. Circuit breaker shall use no fusible devices in its operation. Current-limiting characteristic shall be in addition to normal time-delay and instantaneous-trip characteristics and other features as indicated. K. Circuit Breakers With Solid-State Trip Devices: Provide indicated circuit breakers with solid-state trip devices having following features: 1. Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes between minus 20C and plus 55C. 2. Adjustability: Breaker ratings and trip settings shall be changeable by operation of controls on front panel of breaker, by change of plug-in element without removing breaker from mounting, or by combination of 2 methods. 3. Ground-Fault Tripping: Adjustable for pick-up and time-delay values. Provide for indicated units. 4. Provide clear plastic shield limiting access to rating plug and adjustments on solid state trip circuit breaker. Seal by attaching sealing wire through hole in posts provided. With wire seal installed, circuit breaker rating plug and adjustments shall not be "readily accessible." M: 3/31/2016 16475 - 3/7 P. 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2.03 INSULATED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 4. Siemens 5. Or approved equal B. UL 489 and NEMA AB 1. • C. Ratings: Continuous-current, interrupting, and short-time-current ratings, and voltage and frequency ratings as indicated. D. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with following features: 1. Moving Contacts Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. E. Circuit-Breaker Trip Devices: Solid-state overcurrent trip device system that includes 1 integrally mounted current transformer or sensor per phase, release mechanism, and following features: 1. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions, which are independent of each other in both action and adjustment. 2. Temperature compensation to assure accuracy and calibration stability from minus 20°C to plus 55°C. 3. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. 4. Current Adjustability: Effected by operating controls on front panel or by changing plug-in elements or current transformers or sensors. 5. Three bands for long-time- and short-time-delay functions marked "minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum." 6. Five pickup points, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. 7. Six pickup points, minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions. 8. Ground fault protection with at least 3 short-time-delay settings and 37 trip-time- delay bands. Adjustable current pickup. M: 3/31/2016 16475 -4/7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 9. Trip Indication: Labeled lights or mechanical indicators on trip device shall indicate type of fault causing breaker trip. If lights are used, integral power source shall maintain indication for 60 hrs, minimum. F. Auxiliary Contacts for Remote Indication: Where remote indication of breaker position is indicated, provide spare auxiliary switch in addition to other auxiliary switches required for normal breaker operation. Spare auxiliary switch shall consist of 2 Type"a" and 2 Type"b" stages (contacts), wired to terminal block in breaker housing. G. Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Include following: 1. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least 2 padlocks on each breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of draw out mechanism. 2. Operating Handle: Provide 1 for each manually operated breaker. No handle ties are permitted. • 3. Electric Close Button: Provide 1 for each electrically operated breaker. 4. Indicating Lights: Contacts for"Breaker Open"and"Breaker Closed,"for main and bus tie circuit breakers, and for other indicated breakers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONNECTIONS A. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. B. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated,tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as indicated and as required by NEC. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. B. Ground in accordance with Section 16452. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. Reports: Prepare certified written reports on tests and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made. M: 3/31/2016 16475 -5/7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible.person. 3. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least 1 week's advance notification. 4. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of system, perform following preparations for tests: a. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. b. Make continuity tests of circuits. c. Include full updating on final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents. d. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPDs. 5. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include following inspections and related work. a. Overcurrent-Protective-Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters. Where discrepancies are found, test organization shall recommend final protective device ratings and settings. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make final system adjustments. b. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current single line diagram. c. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. d. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPDs with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. e. Clean OCPDs using manufacturer's approved methods and materials. f. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPDs. 6. Electrical Tests: Include following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions: a. Insulation resistance test of OCPD conducting parts. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. b. Verify trip unit reset characteristics for insulated-case circuit breakers. c. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices. d. Activate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or undervoltage relays, to verify operation of shunt-trip devices. e. Check stored-energy charging motors for proper operation of motor, mechanism, and limit switches. f. Check operation of electrically operated OCPDs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. M: 3/31/2016 16475 -6/7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES g. Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and sequence. Make closing attempts on locked-open and opening attempts on locked-closed devices including moveable barriers and shutters. 7. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest. Verify by system tests that specified requirements are met. 3.04 CLEANING ' A. Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPDs. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. END OF SECTION M: 3/31/2016 16475 -7/7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 16481 MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. AC motor control devices rated 600 v and below. B. Overcurrent protective devices and disconnect switches used with motor controllers are specified in Section 16475. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Motor Controller: Device that controls, protects, and energizes electric motor, and where required, controls its speed or torque or power delivered by it. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Engineers approval: 1. Product Data: a. Include dimensions, ratings, and data on features and components. 2. Test Results: a. Certified reports of field tests and observations. 3. Miscellaneous: a. Load Current and Overload Relay Heater List: Compiled by Contractor after motors have been installed. Arrange list to demonstrate selection of heaters to suit actual motor nameplate full load currents. 4. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data: a. Manufacturer's data on maintenance and operation of equipment. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar motor-control devices from single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Provide controllers from manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment of types and capacities indicated, with such products in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 yrs. M. 6/24/2015 16481 - 1 /7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation MOTOR CONTROLLERS C. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 100. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of controllers and control devices with pilot devices and control circuits provided under other sections of Specifications covering control systems. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Spare Fuses and Incandescent Indicating Lamps: Furnish one spare for every 5 installed units, but not less than one set of 3 of each kind. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers: 1. Square D/Schneider Electric 2. No exceptions 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS, GENERAL A. Coordinate features of each motor controller with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, duty cycle of motor, drive, and load, and pilot device, and control circuit affecting controller functions. Provide controllers horsepower rated to suit motor controlled. B. NEMA Size 1 minimum. C. Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to motor. M: •6/24/2015 16481 -2 /7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation MOTOR CONTROLLERS D. Overload Relays: 1. Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic. 2. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full load current of specific motor to which connected with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. 3. Enhanced Protection Overload Relay: Provide overload relays with NEMA Class 10 tripping characteristics for submersible equipment or where indicated. Select to protect motor against voltage unbalance and single phasing. E. Enclosures: 1. For individually mounted motor controllers and control devices, comply with NEMA 250. 2. Provide enclosures suitable for environmental conditions at controller location. 3. Provide NEMA Type enclosures as indicated on the contract drawings. If not shown, provide as required to suit environment where located. 2.03 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Quick-make, quick-break toggle action. B. Doublebreak silver alloy contacts. C. Pilot light. D. Padlocking provision. 2.04 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Full voltage, non-reversing, across the line, magnetic controller, except-where another type indicated. B. Control Circuit: 120 v. Control power transformer integral with controller where no other supply of 120-v control power to controller indicated. Control power transformer with adequate capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100% spare capacity. C. Combination Controller: Switch type; fused or nonfused as indicated; quick-make, quick- break switch; factory assembled with controller and arranged to disconnect it. For fused switches, provide rejection type fuse clips and fuses rated as indicated. D. Combination Controller: Motor circuit protector; molded case circuit breaker type with magnetic only trip element calibrated to coordinate with actual locked rotor current of connected motor and controller overload relays. Provide breakers factory-assembled with controller, interlocked with unit cover or door, and arranged to disconnect controller. Provide motor circuit protectors with field-adjustable trip elements. E. Overvoltage/Undervoltage/Phase-Failure Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting. - M. 6/24/2015 16481 - 3/7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation MOTOR CONTROLLERS 1. Provide in starter enclosure for Size 2 and larger starters. 2. Delay initial motor start. 3. Delay motor restart due to starter dropout caused by undervoltage or starter coil circuit interruption for maintained control circuits. 4. Adjustable on delay from 0.15 to 30.0 sec set at 10.0 sec. 5. Connect control relay in motor starter coil circuit. 6. Coordinate control relay selection with motor starter to cause motor starter to drop out at voltage slightly higher than dropout voltage of starter and have dropout time slightly faster than motor starter to ensure if motor starter drops out, relay will drop out. 2.05 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES A. General: Furnish auxiliary control device as specified. Factory-install in controller enclosure except as otherwise indicated. B. Pushbutton Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty type. C. Stop Pushbutton Station: Momentary break pushbutton station with factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock pushbutton in depressed position with control circuit open. D. Lockout Pushbutton Station: Maintained contact red mushroom pushbutton station with factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock pushbutton in depressed position with control circuit open. E. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. F. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hrs. G. Ammeters, Voltmeters, and Frequency Meters: Panel type, 2 %-in. minimum size with 90 or 120 degree scale, and ±2% accuracy. Where indicated, provide transfer device with off position. H. Current Sensors: Rated to suit application. I. Current-Sensing Phase-Failure Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated contacts for hard-wired connection. Arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal, current unbalance of from 5% to 30%, or loss of supply voltage. Provide adjustable response delay. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install motor controllers and auxiliary motor control devices in accordance with M: 6/24/2015 16481 -4/7 P. 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation MOTOR CONTROLLERS manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals. B. Mounting: 1. For control equipment at walls, bolt single units to wall. Mount multiple units on lightweight structural steel channels bolted to wall. 2. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks fabricated of structural steel members and lightweight slotted structural steel channels. Use feet consisting of 3/8-in. thick steel plates, 6-in. square, bolted to floor. Use feet for welded attachment of 1-1/2-in. by 1-1/2-in. by'/4-in. vertical angle posts not over 3-ft oc. Connect posts with horizontal lightweight slotted steel channels and bolt control equipment to channels. C. Motor Controller Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Conform to requirements of Section 16475. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 16195. 3.03 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring as specified in Section 16120. B. Install wiring in enclosures bundled, trained, and supported. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten connectors, terminals, and mountings. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements not indicated, comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and 486B. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Supplier's or manufacturer's technician for equipment specified herein shall be present at job site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum man-days indicated, travel time excluded, for equipment adjustment, and training of Owner's personnel for plant operation. Include minimum of: a. '/2 man-day for Instructional Services. B. Testing: 1. Reports: Notify Engineer in writing indicating defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include records of repairs and adjustments made. 2. On completing installation of system, perform following tests: ( a. Make insulation resistance tests of conducting parts of motor control M: 6/24/2015 16481 - 5/7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation MOTOR CONTROLLERS components; and of connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. For devices containing solid-state components, use test equipment and methods recommended by manufacturer. b. Make continuity tests of circuits. c. Review updating of final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents. d. Review manufacturer's written instructions for installation and testing of motor control devices. 3. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include following inspections and related work. a. Motor Control Device Ratings and Settings: Verify ratings and settings as installed are appropriate for final loads and final system arrangement and parameters. Recommend final protective device ratings and settings where differences found. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make final system adjustments. b. Inspect for defects and physical damage and nameplate. c. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. d. Check tightness of electrical connections of devices with calibrated torque wrench. Use manufacturer's recommended torque values. e. Clean devices using manufacturer's approved methods and materials. f. Verify proper fuse types and ratings in fusible devices. 4. Electrical Tests: Perform following in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. a. Insulation resistance test of motor control devices conducting parts to extent permitted by manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation resistance less than 100-megohms not acceptable. b. Use primary current injection to check performance characteristics of motor circuit protectors and for overload relays of controllers for motors 15 hp and larger. Trip characteristics not within manufacturer's published time-current tolerances not acceptable. c. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable trip devices. d. Test auxiliary protective features such as loss of phase, phase unbalance, and undervoltage to verify operation. e. Check for improper voltages at terminals in controllers having external M: 6/24/2015 16481 -6/7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation MOTOR CONTROLLERS control wiring when controller disconnect opened. Voltage over 30 v unacceptable. 5. Correct deficiencies and retest motor control devices. Verify by system tests that specified requirements are met. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Overvoltage/Undervoltage/Phase Failure Control Relay: 1. Adjust control relay to cause motor starter to drop out at voltage slightly higher than dropout voltage of starter and have dropout time slightly faster than motor starter to ensure if motor starter drops out, relay will drop out. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices internally using manufacturer's recommended methods and materials. END OF SECTION M: 6/24/2015 16481 - 7/7 P: 9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 16496 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Delayed transition automatic transfer switches to automatically transfer between normal and standby power sources. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA ICS 2-447-AC Automatic Transfer Switches C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. UL 1008- Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Manufacturer shall submit shop drawings for review, which shall include the following, as a minimum: 1. Descriptive literature 2. Plan, elevation, side, and front view arrangement drawings, including overall dimension,'weights and clearances, as well as mounting or anchoring requirements and conduit entrance locations. 3. Schematic diagrams. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Accessory list. • • M:3/23/2018 16496 - 1 /7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Zenith B. ASCO C. Onan D. Kohler E. Russelectric F. Eaton G. Pre-approved equal 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. The delayed transition automatic transfer switch shall be furnished as shown on the drawings. Voltage and continuous current ratings and number of poles shall be as shown. Switches shall be UL listed in accordance with UL-1008. 2. The transfer switch shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors and NEMA 4X S.S. for outdoors, unless otherwise indicated. Enclosures shall be fabricated from 12-gauge steel. The enclosure shall be sized to exceed minimum wire bending space required by UL 1008. Outdoor enclosures shall have no exposed controls. 3. The transfer switch shall be equipped with an internal welded steel pocket, housing an operations and maintenance manual. 4. The transfer switch shall be top and bottom accessible. 5. The main contacts shall be capable of being replaced without removing the main power cables. 6. The main contacts shall be visible for inspection without any major disassembly of the transfer switch. 7. All bolted bus connections shall have Belleville compression type washers. 8. When a solid neutral is required, a fully rated bus bar with required AL-CU neutral lugs shall be provided. 9. Control components and wiring shall be front accessible. All control wires shall be multiconductor 18 gauge 600-volt SIS switchboard type point to point harness. All control wire terminations shall be identified with tubular sleeve-type markers. 10. The switch shall be equipped with 90 degrees C rated copper/aluminum solderless mechanical type lugs. M:3/23/2018 16496 -2/7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 11. The complete transfer switch assembly shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation and compliance with the specification requirements. A copy of the factory test report shall be available upon request. • 12. Transfer time shall be of sufficient duration to allow motor run controls to drop out or, Contractor shall provide additional time delay controls to accomplish this function. B. Automatic Transfer Switch: 1. The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by two electric operators momentarily energized, and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple over center type linkage. 2. The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in both the normal and emergency positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs, and shall be silver-tungsten alloy. Separate arcing contacts with magnetic blowouts shall be provided on all transfer switches. Interlocked, molded case circuit breakers or contactors are not acceptable unless specifically shown on plans. 3. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a safe external manual operator, designed to prevent injury to operating personnel. The manual operator shall be front accessible and shall provide"quick make-quick break" operation, offering the same contact to contact transfer speed as the electrical operator to prevent switching the main contacts slowly. The external manual operator shall be UL listed for operation, under load, from the outside of the transfer switch while the door is closed. C. Automatic Transfer Switch Controls: 1. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a microprocessor based control system, to provide all the operational functions of the automatic transfer switch. The controller shall have two asynchronous serial ports. The controller shall have a real time clock with Nicad battery back-up. • 2. The CPU shall be equipped with self diagnostics, which perform periodic checks of the memory I/O and communication circuits, with a watchdog/power fail circuit 3. The controller shall use industry standard open architecture communication protocol for high speed communications to other controllers and to a master 4. The controller shall include Modbus TCP/IP communications protocol for integration of ATS with Owner's control system. Provide RJ-45 ethernet connection. Where necessary, contractor shall provide serial to ethernet convertor. Communication port shall allow interface to either the manufacturer's or the owner's furnished remote supervisory control. 5. The controller shall have password protection required to limit access to qualified and authorized personnel. M:3/23/2018 16496 - 3/7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 6. The controller shall include a 20 character, LCD display, with a keypad, which allows access to the system. 7. The controller shall include three-phase over/under voltage, over/under frequency, phase sequence detection and phase differential monitoring on both normal and emergency sources. 8. The controller shall be capable of storing the following records in memory for access either locally or remotely: a. Number of hours transfer switch is in the emergency position (total since - record reset). b. Number of hours emergency power is available (total since record reset). c. Total transfer in either direction (total since record reset). d. Date, time, and description,of the last four source failures. e. Date of the last exercise period. f. Date of record reset. D. Sequence of Operation: 1. When the voltage on any phase of the normal source drops below 80% or increases to 120%, or frequency drops below 90%, or increase to 110%, or 20% voltage differential between phases occurs, after a programmable time delay period of 0-9999 seconds factory set at 3 seconds to allow for momentary dips, the engine starting contacts shall close to start the generating plant. 2. The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency when the generating plant has reached specified voltage and frequency on all phases. 3. After restoration of normal power on all phases to a preset value of at least 90% to 110% of rated voltage, and at least 95% to 105% of rated frequency, and voltage differential is below 20%, an adjustable time delay period of 0-9999 seconds (factory set at 300 seconds) shall delay retransfer to allow stabilization of normal power. If the emergency power source should fail during this time delay period, the switch shall automatically return to the normal source. 4. After retransfer to normal, the engine generator shall be allowed to operate at no load for a programmable period of 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds. E. Automatic Transfer Switch Accessories: 1. Programmable three phase sensing of the normal source set to pickup at 90% and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout out at 110% of rated voltage. Programmable frequency pickup at 95% and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105% of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases, set at 20%, and phase sequence monitoring. 2. Programmable three phase sensing of the normal source set to pickup at 90% and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout out at 110% of rated voltage programmable frequency pickup at 95% M:3/23/2018 16496 -4/7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickupat 110% and dropout at 105% P q Y p of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases set at 20%, and phase sequence monitoring. 3. Time delay for override of momentary normal source power outages (delays engine start signal and transfer switch operation). Programmable 0-9999 seconds. Factory set at 3 seconds, if not otherwise specified. 4. Time delay to control contact transition time on transfer to either source. Programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 10 seconds. 5. Time delay on retransfer to normal, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds if not otherwise specified, with overrun to provide programmable 0- 9999 second time delay, factory set at 300 seconds, unloaded engine operation after retransfer to normal. 6. Time delay on transfer to emergency, programmable 0-9999 seconds, factory set at 10 seconds. 7. A maintained type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, keypad initiated. 8. A remote type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, remote switch initiated. 9. A time delay bypass on retransfer to normal shall be included. Keypad initiated. 10. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to close on failure of normal source to initiate engine starting. 11. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to open on failure of normal source for customer functions. 12. Light emitting diodes shall be mounted on the microprocessor panel to indicate: switch is in normal position, switch is in emergency position and controller is running. 13. A plant exerciser 'shall be provided with (10) 7 day events, programmable for any day of the week and (24)calendar events, programmable for any month/day, to automatically exercise generating plant programmable in one minute increments. Also include selection of either"no load" (switch will not transfer) or"load" (switch will transfer) exercise period. Keypad initiated. 14. Provision to select either"no commit" or"commit"to transfer operation in the event of a normal power failure shall be included. In the"no commit position," the load will transfer to the emergency position unless normal power returns before the emergency source has reach 90% of it's rated values (switch will remain in normal). In the"commit position"the load will transfer to the emergency position after any normal power failure. Keypad initiated. 15. Two auxiliary contacts rated 10 Amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 100 to 800 amps) 15 amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 1000 to 4000 amps), shall be mounted M:3/23/2018 16496 - 5/7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH on the main shaft, one closed on normal, the other closed on emergency. Both contacts will be wired to a terminal strip for ease of customer connections. 16. A three phase digital LCD voltage readout, with 1% accuracy shall display all three separate phase to phase voltages simultaneously, for both the normal and emergency source. 17. A digital LCD frequency readout with 1% accuracy shall display frequency for both normal and emergency source. 18. An LCD readout shall display normal source and emergency source availability. 19. Contacts for"Transfer Impending", adjustable 0-120 SEC. F. Ratings: 1. Delayed transition automatic transfer switches shall have the following 3 cycle short circuit closing and withstand as follows: a. RMS Symmetrical Amperes 480 VAC Current Limiting Amperes Closing and Withstand Fuse Rating 100-400 42,000 200,000 600-800 65,000 200,000 1000-1200 85,000 200,000 1600-4000 100,000 200,000 2. During the 3 cycle closing and withstand tests, there shall be no contact welding or damage. The 3 cycle tests shall be performed without the use of current limiting fuses. The test shall verify that contacts separation has not occurred, and there is contact continuity across all phases. Test procedures shall be in accordance with UL-1008, and testing shall be certified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 3. When conducting temperature rise tests to UL-1008, the manufacture shall include post-endurance temperature rise tests to verify the ability of the transfer switch to carry full rated current after completing the overload and endurance tests. 4. The microprocessor controller shall meet the following requirements: a. Storage conditions- 25 degrees C to 85 degrees C b. Operation conditions - 20 degrees C to 70 degrees C ambient c. Humidity 0 to 99% relative humidity, noncondensing d. Capable of withstanding infinite power interruptions e. Surge withstand per ANSI/IEEE C-37.90A-1978 5. Manufacturer shall provide copies of test reports upon request. G. Manufacturer: M:3/23/2018 16496 - 6/7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 1. The transfer switch manufacturer shall employ a nationwide factory-direct, field service organization, available on a 24-hour a day, 365 days a year, call basis. 2. The manufacture shall include an 800 telephone number, for field service contact, affixed to each enclosure. 3. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each transfer switch, by serial number, for a minimum 20 years. 2.03 Warranty: 1. Provide 5 year standard manufacturer's warranty consisting of 2 years parts and labor, and an additional 3 years of replacement parts. Warranty shall be "on site" and warranty service shall be available by the factory service department on an emergency basis if required. Depot or non site warranties are not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Automatic Transfer Switches shall be provided with adequate lifting means for ease of installation of wall or floor mounted enclosures. B. Provide access and working space as indicated or as required. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Tighten assembled bolted connections with appropriate tools to manufacturer's torque recommendations prior to first energization. 3.03 START-UP AND TESTING A. Provide the services of a factory representative to check-out, test, and start-up the automatic transfer switch in conjunction with the standby generator. Fully function test the automatic transfer switch to verify proper operation. END OF SECTION M:3/23/2018 16496 -7/7 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation NATURAL GAS SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION 16980 NATURAL GAS SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Natural Gas Utility Charges: Natural Gas Utility charges for extension of distribution .system to point of service termination and meters will be paid by Owner, except where bid allowance is indicated, or where specifically noted otherwise on plans or in other specifications. B. Temporary service disconnects at existing installations shall be paid for by Contractor. Prompt reconnection of service shall be coordinated by Contractor. All temporary disconnection and reconnection costs are to be paid for by Contractor. 1.02 DEFINITIONS • A. Natural Gas Utility: Local Gas Company. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA No. 70— National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Gas Company Standards: 1. Installation shall strictly comply with current Gas Company Standards. Where plans conflict with Gas Company standards, contact Engineer for directions before starting work. Failure to do so is at Contractor's risk. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS SERVICE A. Gas Service Characteristics: 1. As indicated on Drawings and provided by Gas Utility. B. Gas Meter Location: Locate gas based on drawings from Gas Company. Do not install Gas equipment without•this data statement and without confirming location with Gas Company and Engineer. Contact Engineer prior to construction. Provide submittal with layout of Gas Company's line, Owner's Gas line and generator for review by Engineer and Gas Company before starting construction. Send copy of Gas Company"Service Confirmation and Drawings"to Engineer for review. Any construction performed with Engineer's review is at Contractor's risk and expense. M:3/9/2018 16980— 1 /.3 P.9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation NATURAL GAS SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Confirmation of Gas Service: 1. Consult with Gas Utility to verify service information specified and shown on Drawings. Failure to do so may result in removal and replacement of service equipment at Contractor's cost. Do not start service installation work until "Service Confirmation" has been received from Gas Company and has been reviewed and approved in writing by the Engineer. 2. Include deviations required by Gas Utility from contract documents to comply with Gas Utility standards and requirements. Send drawing of final service arrangement for Engineer's review. Do not install service equipment until approved by Gas Company in writing. 3. Relocate service meter and structure up to twenty feet(20')to maintain clearance required by Gas Utility Company or to maintain other clearances. Coordinate exact point of service with Gas Company and locate customer service Gas line within distance of Gas Company line as per Gas Company Standards. Failure to coordinate location is at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost. B. Metering: 1. Consult with Gas Utility regarding service entrance requirements and metering equipment. Conform strictly to Utility Company standards. 2. Install metering equipment to meet standards and requirements of Gas Utility. C. Application for Gas Service. 1. Obtain required forms from Gas Utility. 2. Assist Owner in completion of forms and deliver completed forms to Gas Utility. Advise Owner of exact requirements. 3. Coordinate schedule for installation of electric service with Electric Utility. 4. Notify utility company in writing, within 30 days of project start date that permanent service will be required for this project. Specify date required and location of project. 5. Notify Engineer, in writing of date service applied for, date to be installed, Gas Company contact name and telephone number and copy of"Service Confirmation" as this information become available. Do not start construction of service without this report and without confirming service location with Engineer. 6. Contractor is responsible to see that service is connected according to the Gas Company standards. Final permanent service connection by Gas Company is M:3/9/2018 16980—2/3 P.9/1/2020 City of Pearland Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation NATURAL GAS SERVICE ENTRANCE required before project is considered complete, before final acceptance, and before final payment is made. END OF SECTION M:3/9/2018 16980—3/3 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS SECTION 16982 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR GENERATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping, valves, and specialties for natural gas distribution from the Gas Utility Company to the generator. B. See Section 16980 Natural Gas Utility for final connection to Gas Utility Company's natural gas main. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Gas Main: Utility's natural gas piping. B. Gas Distribution: Piping from gas main to individual service-meter assemblies. C. Point of Delivery: Piping outlet from service-meter assembly. D. Natural Gas Piping: Piping that conveys natural gas from point of delivery to generator. E. PE: Polyethylene plastic 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working-Pressure Ratings: 1. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include identification materials and devices; and pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings for the following: 1. Service components. Include valves, regulators, and specialty fittings. 2. Piping specialties. B. Shop Drawings: Include pipe sizes, valves, regulators, gas meters, and specialties. Include details of service-meter assembly and underground piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures. M:9/13/2019 16982 1 / 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control"Article. E. Maintenance Data: For service regulators, service meters, and specialty valves to include in maintenance manuals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Distribution Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with requirements of utility supplying natural gas. C. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for natural gas piping systems. Include materials, installation, and testing. D. Comply with NFPA, "National Fuel Gas Code", for gas piping materials and components; installations; and inspection, testing, and purging. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing natural gas piping. B. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent damage and entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Store valves and specialties with end protectors in place, unless necessary for inspection, then reinstall for storage. D. Store valves and specialties indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew- point temperature. Support off ground or pavement in watertight enclosures if outdoor storage is necessary. E. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. F. Store plastic pipes and valves protected from direct sunlight. Support pipes to prevent sagging and bending. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located. M:9/13/2019 16982 —2/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner& Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. C. COORDINATION 1. Coordinate connection to gas main and meter assembly with utility. 2. Coordinate pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements with natural gas piping. 3. Coordinate with other utility work. 4. Work Interruptions: Leave natural gas distribution piping in safe condition if interruptions occur while alterations or repairs are being made to existing gas piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40,-Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground. M:9/13/2019 16982—3/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves. 6. Mechanical Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. (2) Smith-Blair, Inc. b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped with anode. B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. 1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type'orASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe. 2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be'threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. M:9/13/2019 16982—4/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40;Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet. b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 5. Plastic Mechanical Couplings,NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: • (1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. (2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. (3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Acetal collets. e. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener. 6. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. (2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. M:9/13/2019 16982 —5/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS (3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Fiber-reinforced plastic body. c. PE body tube. d. Buna-nitrile seals. e. Acetal collets. f. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 7. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. (2) Smith-Blair, Inc. b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground. 2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches B. Y-Pattern Strainers: M:9/13/2019 16982—6/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION.FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for 2-inch (2") NPS and smaller; flanged ends for 2 1/2-inch (2 1/2") NPS and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. 2.04 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2-inch (2") NPS and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to 2-inches NPS shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2 1/2-inch (2 1/2") NPS and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. M:9/13/2019 16982 —7/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL.GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials"WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body. D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. &Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. M.9/13/2019 16982— 8/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS • e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. F. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. M:9/13/2019 16982—9/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. G. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. H. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. c. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company. 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 10/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. 10. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. I. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flowserve. b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Milliken Valve Company. e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc. 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. . 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch (1") NPS and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. J. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast-iron, two-section box. M:9/13/2019 16982— 11 / 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve. 2.05 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators 2-inch (2") NPS and smaller; flanged for regulators 2 1/2-inch (2 1/2") NPS and larger. B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. d. Invensys. e. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. M:9/13/2019 16982— 12/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig. C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 4. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 6. Seat Disc: Nitrite rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 9. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. M:9/13/2019 16982 — 13/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory-or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 13. Maximum Inlet Pressure: As required. 2.06 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wilkins; a Zurn company; Model DUBI or comparable product by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco-Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C)] [150 psig (1035 kPa)] [250 psig (1725 kPa)]. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Basis-of-Design 2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wilkins; a Zurn company; Model DUBI or comparable product by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Matco-Norca, Inc. • d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 3. Description: M:9/13/2019 16982— 14/ 19 P.9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation . GENERATORS • a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg. d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. 2.07 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm)wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm)deep; colored yellow. 2.08 CONCRETE BASES (WHERE SHOWN ON PLANS) A. Concrete Bases: Precast, reinforced, made with 3000-psi minimum, 28-day compressive strength concrete; and 4 inches thick and 4 inches larger in dimension than supported item, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in specifications. M:9/13/2019 16982— 15/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 3.02 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or piping section. B. Inspect natural gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected. C. Comply with NFPA 54, Part 1, "Prevention of Accidental Ignition" Paragraph. 3.03 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same or higher than system pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground Piping: Use the following: 1. 2-inch NPS and smaller: Steel pipe, butt-welding-type fittings, and welded joints. Joints for connection to threaded service regulators, service meters, and valves may be threaded. 2. 2-inch NPS and smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron fittings, and threaded joints. 3. 2 'h-inch NPS and larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding-type fittings, and welded joints. Joints for connection to service regulators, service meters, and valves with flanged connections may be flanged. Joints for connection to service regulators, service meters, and valves with threaded connections 2 '/2 to 4-inch NPS may be threaded. C. Underground Piping: 1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location. 3.04 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. If specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping gas mains. 2. Underground: Do not use valves underground, install valves above ground only. 3. Above ground, 2-inch NPS and smaller: Lubricated, tapered plug valves or ball valves. 4. Above ground ,2 1/2-inch NPS and larger: Lubricated plug valves. 3.05 JOINT CONSTRUCTION M:9/13/2019 16982— 16/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS A. Refer to specifications for basic piping joint construction. B. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection. C. Install flanges, in piping 2 1/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3.06 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install buried gas distribution piping at least 24 inches deep, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Provide red, 12-inch wide marker tape 12 inches above gas piping. B. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum length nipple of three pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. C. Install strainers on inset side of service regulators and valves. D. Terminate vent piping with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. E. Install PE natural-gas piping per ASTM D 2774. 3.07 VALVE.INSTALLATION A. Install shutoff valves on branch connections to underground gas distribution piping. Install valves with valve boxes. B. Install metal shutoff valves on aboveground, gas distribution piping. C. Install aboveground, metal shutoff valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Include metal tag indicating piping systems supplied, attached to valve with metal chain. 3.08 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATIONS A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground. Provide precast concrete bases where shown on Plans. B. Installation of service meters is by Gas Company. Contractor shall coordinate and verify meter assembly will provide required gas pressure and volume rate (CFH). M:9/13/2019 ' 16982— 17/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS C. Install pressure-relief or pressure-limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if device is free, tested to determine pressure at which they will operate, and examined for leakage if closed. D. Terminate service-regulator vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. 3.09 CONNECTIONS A. Connect gas distribution piping to natural gas source and extend to service-meter assemblies and points indicated. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges, as required for piping material. Connect to emergency generator as required. B. Connect to utility gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. C. Connect to existing gas distribution main according to ASME B31.8. 3.10 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING A. Install aboveground, natural gas distribution piping upstream from equipment shutoff valves, electrically continuous, and bonded to grounding electrode according to NFPA 70. B. Do not use gas piping as grounding electrode. 3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on or near each service regulator, meter, and earthquake valve. 1. Text: Distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operation requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to name of identified unit. B. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tape during backfilling of trenches for piping. C. Refer to specifications for warning tapes. 3.12 PAINTING A. Refer to specifications for field-painting requirements. At a minimum, remove any debris, corrosion, and loose factory coating prior to applying primer and paint. B. Use materials and procedures in specifications. Include "safety yellow" color, unless otherwise indicated. C. Paint exposed metal pipe, fittings, valves, and supports. D. Paint exposed metal regulators, meters, and supports, except units with factory-applied paint or protective coating. Restore damaged finish to original condition. M:9/13/2019 16982— 18/ 19 P:9/1/2020 City of Pearland NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR Miller Ranch Rd Lift Station Rehabilitation GENERATORS 3.13 FIELD QUALTIY CONTROL A. Inspect, test, and purge natural gas distribution according to NFPA 54, Part 4, "Inspection, Testing, and Purging," and utility requirements. B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until there are no leaks. C. Report test results in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service regulators, meters, and valves. E. Verify correct pressure settings for service regulators. 3.14 ADJUSTING A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices. END OF SECTION M:9/13/2019 16982— 19/ 19 P:9/1/2020